no 


•SO 


LIB  RARY 

OF   THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

GIFT    OF 

Received         ^T^O^i     . ,  i8g  / '.      rz  y 

Accessions  No.M.4Jr&r  Shelf  No ?Sfe^ 

__i : _*£* 


C# 


GRAMMAR 


OF 


THE   HEBREW  LANGUAGE, 


BY 

MOSES   STUART 

ASSOCIATE    PROFESSOR    OF     SACRED     LITERATURE    IN    THE 
THEOLOGICAL    INSTITUTION   AT  ANDOVER. 


SIXTH  EDITION  CORRECTED  AND  ENLARGED. 


ANDOVER: 

GOULD    AND    NEWMAN,  PRINTERS    AND    PUBLISHERS. 
NEW    YORK: 

CORNER  OF  FULTON  AND  NASSAU  STREETS. 


183 


ft  SI 


Entered  According  to  act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1835,  by  Moses  Stuart, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


it-ZfyS* 


PJ-4513 


PREFACE 

TO    THE    SIXTH    EDITION. 


The  present  edition  of  this  Grammar  retains  all  the  material  features 
of  the  two  preceding  ones  ;  while,  at  the  same  time,  it  has  received  nu- 
merous minute  corrections,  and  not  a  few  additions  which  I  regard  as  of 
some  importance.  I  have  not  been  an  inattentive  observer  of  what  has 
been  recently  done  in  the  department  of  Hebrew  Grammar.  During  the 
revision  which  I  have  made  of  the  last  edition  of  this  work  with  a  view 
to  the  present,  I  have  consulted  Ewald's  second  or  abridged  edition  of 
his  Hebrew  Grammar,  which  (being  later  than  the  large  edition)  has 
given  more  fully  his  maturer  views  in  relation  to  this  subject.  I  have 
made  free  and  constant  use  also  of  the  eleventh  (I  believe  the  latest) 
edition  of  Gesenius'  Hebrew  Grammar.  In  his  tenth  edition  he  states 
that  it  might  almost  pass  for  a  new  work,  so  many  were  the  additions  and 
alterations  which  he  had  made  ;  and  in  his  eleventh  edition  he  further 
states,  that  many  more  corrections  and  additions  still  had  been  made. 
I  have  availed  myself  of  these  ;  and  whenever  I  have  deemed  them  to 
be  of  importance  and  fairly  to  belong  to  the  subject  of  Grammar,  I  have 
in  some  way  incorporated  them  into  my  work.  The  distinguished 
Essays  of  Hupfeld,  (in  the  so-called  Theologische  Studien  und  Kritiken, 
1830,  Nos.  2,  3),  on  subjects  intimately  connected  with  the  elements  of 
Hebrew  Grammar,  I  have  also  read.  To t  these  Gesenius,  in  the  latest 
edition  of  his  Grammar,  professes  himself  to  be  peculiarly  indebted.  I 
could  wish,  indeed,  that  these  Essays  were  presented  to  my  countrymen 
in  a  becoming  English  dress.  The  true  lover  of  Hebrew  study  would 
find  a  rich  entertainment  in  them ;  and  this,  even  in  cases  where  he 
might  not  adopt  the  opinion  which  their  author  espouses. 

Besides  the  additions  and  corrections  which  a  new  perusal  of  Ewald  and 
Gesenius  has  suggested,  I  have  also  made  a  considerable  number  of  mi- 
nute ones,  as  the  result  of  my  own  study  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures. 
These,  however,  and  most  of  the  others,  have  a  particular  relation  to  the 
first  part  of  the  Grammar  and  to  the  Syntax. 

The  doctrine  of  the  Hebrew  vowels  I  have,  for  the  most  part,  cast 
entirely  in  a  new  mold,  even  at  the  expense  of  changing  the  designation 
of  the  sections,  and  thus  creating  some  slight  embarrassment  to  such  as 
may  use  the  past  editions  of  my  Hebrew  Chrestomathy.  The  sections 
whose  numbers  are  changed,  are  §§  ^5 — 33  inclusively  ;  but  the  intelli- 
gent student  can  never  be  at  a  loss,  after  once  reading  over  these  with 
attention,  where  to  find  what  he  needs.  In  the  new  edition  of  the  He- 
brew Chrestomathy,  which  will  soon  be  commenced,  the  sections  thus 
changed  as  to  the  numbering,  will  receive  proper  attention. 


IV  PREFACE. 

The  new  matter  which  I  have  added  in  various  places,  I  have  so  in- 
serted elsewhere  as  not  to  cause  a  change  in  the  former  designations  of  sec- 
tions or  notes.  I  have  added  it  in  the  form  of  new  notes,  or  remarks,  Or  else 
have  made  anew  section,  repeating  a  foregoing  number  and  subjoining  some 
letter  in  Italic  of  the  alphabet  to  it  in  order  to  distinguish  it ;  e.  g.  on 
p.  221,  under  §  539,  will  be  found  several  new  heads  of  remarks,  such 
as  a,  2>,  etc. ;  on  p.  222  will  be  found  (under  the  head  of  Interrogatives) 
a  section  entirely  new,  marked  §  540  a,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
the  section  above,  and  to  leave  the  numbering  unchanged  of  the  section 
which  follows. 

Probably  I  might  have  made  still  more  changes,  and  (as  I  would  fain 
believe)  improvements  in  this  volume,  had  not  a  protracted  sickness,  all 
but  mortal,  laid  me  entirely  aside  from  study  until  recently  during  a 
great  part  of  the  past  year.  As  it  is,  however,  the  student  who  makes  a 
thorough  comparison  will  find,  particularly  in  the  first  and  last  portions 
of  the  Grammar,  not  a  few  alterations  and  additions  —  emendations,  I 
would  hope  they  may  claim  to  be  called. 

Fault  has  been  sometimes  found  by  some  of  my  reviewers  in  the  pe- 
riodicals, because  I  am  so  often  making  changes  in  my  elementary 
books.  But  as  I  have  become  more  and  more  satisfied  that  all  works  of 
this  nature  must  have  imperfections,  and  as  I  cannot  doubt  that  my  own 
have  them,  I  must  still  believe  that  the  better  way  is  to  correct  what  we 
have  found  to  be  erroneous,  and  supply,  if  we  can,  what  is  found  to  be 
deficient.  If  such  grammarians  as  Matthiae,  Buttmann,  and  Gesenius, 
have  found  it  necessary  to  do  this,  it  would  be  arrogance  in  me  to  claim 
,an  exemption  from  the  like  necessity. 

As  the  closing  sheets  of  this  work  were  about  to  be  struck  off,  I  re- 
ceived a  copy  of  the  first  portion  (nearly  to  the  end  of  the  regular  verbs) 
of  Prof.  Nordheimer's  new  Critical  Hebrew  Grammar,  now  in  a  course  of 
publication.  It  was  too  late  to  avail  myself  of  some  ingenious  suggestions, 
which  this  learned  foreigner,  at  present  a  Professor  of  the  Oriental  Lan- 
guages in  the  University  of  New  York,  has  made  in  respect  to  the  or- 
thography, orthoepy,  etc.,  of  the  Hebrew.  His  design  is,  to  give  a  copi- 
ous treatise  on  the  subject  of  Hebrew  Grammar.  While  I  thank  him  for 
his  kindness  in  favoring  me  with  a  copy  of  his  learned  work,  I  regret 
that  I  could  not  earlier  avail  myself  of  its  use.  I  hope  he  will  find  lovers 
enough  of  Hebrew  in  this  country,  to  encourage  and  to  reward  his  efforts 
in  promoting  the  study  of  it.  That  the  number  of  such  is  increasing, 
would  seem  to  be  satisfactorily  proved  by  the  sale  of  so  many  elementa- 
ry books  as  have  of  late  been  published.  Sincerely  do  I  hope  that  the 
number  of  thorough  students  of  the  original  Scriptures  may  be  more  and 
jnore  augmented ! 

M.  STUART. 

Theological  Herainarij,  J}n<jlovcr,JYov.  10, 1837. 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ORTHOEPY. 


Page. 

ALPHABETS  9 

Ancient  number  ofletters  12 

Arrangement  of  letters  12 

Age  of  their  names  12 

Significance  of  the  same  12 

Pronunciation  of  the  same  12  | 

Later  Hebrew   alphabet  13  | 

Final  forms  of  letters  13  I 

Sounds  of  letters  J3 

Dilated   ktters  15 

Unusual  letters  15 

Similar   letters  15 

Classification  of  the  letters  16 
Aspirates,  Quiescents,  Gutturals,  Liquids        17 

VOWELS  17 

Not  original  17 

Vowel-letters  18 

Ground  of  classification  19 

Quality  of  vowels  19 

Pure  and  impure  vowels  19 

Long  and  short  21 

Long  and  short  by  nature  21 

Long  vowels  treated  as  short  21 

Short  vowels  coalescing  become  long  21 

Miscellaneous  remarks  on  vowels  22 

Syllabication  as  affected  by  vowels  24 

SHEVA  25 

Design  of  it  25 

When  employed  25 

Sheva  vocal  26 

Sheva  silent  26 

Composite  Shevas  27 

When  employed  27 

Used  out  of  the  common  course  27  I 

General  principle  in  regard  to  Shevas  27 

Not  employed  under  Guiescents  28 

COALESCENCE    OF    VOWELS  AND 

QUIESCENTS  28 

Table  exhibiting  this  28 

Sound  of  coalescing  Q,uiescents  not  lost  29 
The  Ehevi,  when  they  retain  a  consonant 

power  29 

Otiumof  the  Ehevi  30 

COALESCENCE    OF     VOWELS  AND 

DAGHESH'D  LETTERS  30 

Vowels  affected  by  omitted  Gutturals  and 

Resh  30 

Vowels  affected  by  the  omission  of  other 

Daghesh'd  letters  31 

ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  VOWELS         31 

Proper  place  of  the  vowels  31 


Page. 

Diacritical  point  over  Shin  and  Sin  32 

Vav  with  Hholein  over  it  32 
Orthography  of   the  vowels  as  connected 

with  the  Q,uiescents  32 

Words  written  plene  and  defective  32 

No  certain  rule  for  them  33 

ORTHOGRAPHY  of  QAMETS  HHATEPH  33 

In  a  mixed  syllable  33 

In  a  simple  syllable  34 

PATTAH  FURTIVE  34 

DAGHESH  35 

Daghesh  forte  35 

Orthography  of  it  35 

Omission  of  it  36 

Division  of  Daghesh  forte  36 

Euphonic  Daghesh  and  its  kinds  36 

DAGHESH  LENE  37 

General  rules  for  the  insertion  of  it  37 

for  the  rejection  of  it  38 

General  exceptions  to  the  rules  38 

Particular  exceptions  to  the  same  39 

RAPHE  40 

MAPPIQ,  40 

METHEGH  40 

Distinguished  from  Silluq  41 
Cases   in   which  it  is  either   uniformly  or 

usually  employed  41 

Cases  in  which  usage  is  various  41 

Methejjkt  before  Maqqeph  42 
Use  of  several  Metheghs  on  the  same  word      42 

Use  of  Conjunctives  instead  of  Methegh  42 

MAQCIEPH                               -  43 

Effects  of  it  on  the  vowel  and  tone  43 

End  answered  by  it  43 

RULES  FOR  READING  HEBREW  43 

Exemplification  45 

ACCENTS,  table  of  them  47 

Various  alleged  uses  of  them  49 

Proper  place  of  writing  them  50 

TONE-SYLLABLE  51 

General  rule  for  it  ;  and  exceptions  51 

Shifting  of  the  tone-syllable  54 

Critical  marks,  and  Masoretic  notes  55 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


PART  II. 

CHANGES  AND  PECULIARITIES  OF  CONSONANTS  AND  VOWELS. 


Letters  of  the  same  organ  easily  commuted  57 

Assimilation  of  Consonants  57 

Consonants  cast  away  or  dropped  58 

Consonants  added      '  58 

Transposition  of  Consonants  59 

PECULIARITIES  OF  THE  GUTTUR- 
ALS AND  RESH  59 

Daghesh  forte  omitted  in  them,  and  compen- 
sation for  it  59 

Gutturals  prone  to  the  A  sound  59 

Commonly  take  a  composite  Sheva  60 

PECULIARITIES  OF  aUIESCENTS  60 
General  principles  regulating  them  60 
Other  ways  in  which  Quiescence  is  effected,  be- 
sides those  involved  in  the  general  principle  61 
Peculiar  usage  of  Aleph,  He,  Vav,  Yodh, 
when  they  would  have  a  vowel,  and  be 
preceded  by  a  Sheva  61 
Peculiarities  of  Aleph  62 
Peculiarities  of  Vav  and  Yodh  63 
Peculiarities  of  He  64 
Commutation  of  the  Q,uiescsents  for  each 

other  64 

Ciuiesconts  used  as  paragogic  letters  65 

CHANGES  OF  THE  VOWELS  65 
Vowels  mutable  and  immutable  65 
Composite  Sheva  commuted  66 
Proper  mutable  vowels  66 
Changes  of  vowels  limited  to  their  respect- 
ive classes  66 


Corresponding  long  and  short  vowels 
Rules  of  exchanging  long  vowels  for  short 
When  short  vowels  become  long 
Pause-accents  lengthen  short  vowels 
Falling  away  of  vowels 

when  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one 

syllable 

moved  forward  two  syllables 

Changes  in  vowels  by  reason  of  const,  state 

by  reason  of  accession  at  the  end 

Rise  of  new  vowels 

What  these  usually  are 

What  they  are  before  composite  Shevas 

New  vowels  when  two  Shevas  come  togeth- 
er, of  which  the  first  is  composite 

Rise  of  furtive  vowels 

Euphonic  changes  of  the  vowels 

Vowels  changed  by  Accents 

Accents  sometimes  lengthen  short  vowels 

They  shorten  long  ones 

They  restore  vowels  that  had  been  dropped 

They  turn  simple  Sheva  into  Seghol 
composite  Sheva  into  the  corre- 
sponding long  vowel 

Effect  of  pause-accents  not  uniform 

Vowels  changed  by  accession  and  transpo- 
sition 

Vowefls  changed  by  the  position  of  certain 
letters  and  words 

Changes  in  the  vowel-points  of  the  article 

of  the  particles 

of  the  conjunct.  Vbt 

of  the  interrog.  ^ 


68 


PART  III, 


GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE  OF  WORDS. 


Radical  words  77 

Conformity  to  their  principles  77 

Biliteral  roots  77 

Q,uadriliteral  and  Quinqueliterai  roots  78 

Parts  of  speech  78 

Grammatical  structure  of  words  78 
Various  ways  of  expressing  case,  number, 

gender,  person,  etc.  78 
Composite  words  78 
Mode  of  writing  particles  and  oblique  pro- 
nouns 79 

ARTICLE  79 

Assimilation  of  it  79 

PRONOUNS  79 

Pronouns  personal  [Nom.]  79 

Oblique  cases  of  them  80 

Pronouns  demonstrative  80 

relative  80 

interrogative  81 

VERBS  81 

Classification  81 

Inflection  81 

Conjugation  81 

Usual  Conjugations  82 

Peculiar  conjugations  82 

Unusual  conjugations  83 


Conjugations  of  pluriliteral  verbs 

All  conjugations  do  not  belong  to  any  one 

verb 
Names  of  the  conjugations 
Root  of  verbs 
Forms  of  the  root 
Niphal  and  its  signification 
Piol 

Pual,  etc. 
Hiphil,  etc. 
Hophal,  etc. 
Transposition    of   the    letters  prefixed   to 

Hithpael 
Significations  of  this  conjugation 
Unusual  conjugations 
Mood,  tense,  number,  person  and  gender  of 

verbs 
Ground-forms  of  verbs 
Formation  of  the  Praeterite  tense 
Inf.  const,  and  absolute 
Formation  of  the  Fut.  tense 
The  praeformative  letters  of  the  Fut.  tense 

expel  the   praeformatives  of  the  derived 

conjugations 
Final  vowels  of  the  Future 
Irnper.  mood 
Participles  of  transitive  verbs 

of  intransitive  verbs 


Subj.  and  Opt.  moods 


CONTENTS. 


VII 


P 


Paragogic  and  apoc.  Futures 

Imp.  parag  and  apoc. 

Future  with  Vav  conversive 

Praeter  with  Vav 

General  remarks  on  the  tenses  of  verbs 

Paragogic  letters  suffixed  to  verbs 

Verbs  with  Q,uiescents  defectively  written 

REGULAR  TRANSITIVE  VERBS ;  notes 

and  explanations 
REGULAR    VERBS    INTRANSITIVE; 

notes 

VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS 

Verbs  Pe  Guttural ;   characteristics,  etc. 

Notes  on  Paradigm 

Verbs  Ayin  Guttural ;  characteristics,  etc. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

Verbs  Lamedh  Guttural ;  characteristics,etc. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS ;  definition 

First  Class;    PE  ALEPH,  characteristics 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

PE  YODH  ,  characteristics 

First  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh  ;  characteris- 
tics 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

Second  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh  ;  character- 
istics 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

Third  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh:  characteris- 
tics 

VERBS  PE  NUN ;  characteristics 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

Second  Class 

VERBS    AYIN    DOUBLED;  characteris- 
tics, etc. 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm 
Peculiar  anomaly  of  these  verbs 
VERBS  AYIN  VAV;  characteristics, etc. 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm 
VERBS  AYIN  YODH 


92  Pluriliteral  verbs 
93 

93  PARTICIPLES 


129 
129 


100 
100 

101 
109 

10-2 
103 

104 
104 
105 
105 

109 
108 

107 
103 

108 
108 

109 


110 
112 
114 
115 
117 
119 


VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX-PRONOUNS        130 
Table  of  the  forms  of  such  suffixes  132 

Notes  on  the  Table  of  them  132 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  of  them  as  attached 

to  the  verb  134 

Verbs  Lamedh  He  with  suffixes  135 

NOUNS;  derivation  and  declension  135 

Nouns,  primitive,  derivative,  and  denomi- 


Third  Class 

VERBS  LAMEDH  ALEPH  ;  characteris- 
tics, etc.  120 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  120 
Interchange  of  forms  between  these  Verbs, 

and  Verbs  Lamedh  He  121 

VERBS  LAMEDH  HE;  characteristics, etc.  122 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  123 

Apocopate  Future  oFKal  123 

of  Hiphil  125 

Peculiar  Anomalies  126 

Imitations  of  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph  126 

General  Remarks  on  these  126 

Verbs  lamedh  tav  126 

verbs  doubly  anomalou8  127 

Relation  of  irregular  verbs  to  each  other        128 


native 

136 

Composite  and  proper 

137 

Gender  of  Nouns 

137 

of  the  plural 

Formations  of  Fern,  nouns,  with  Table 

138 

139 

Formation  of  the  plural,  masc.  and  fern. 

140 

Heterpclites 

141 

Formation  and  use  of  the  Dual 

142 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS  ;  const,  state  143 

Suffix-state 

144 

Table  of  suffix  pronouns 

145 

Rules  for  suffixes 

146 

Vowel-changes  in  nouns  on  account  of  de- 

clension 

147 

Laws  of  such  vowel-changes 

147 

Suffixes  attached  to  the  plural 

148 

NOUNS  MASC.  Dec.  I. 

148 

Dec. II. 

149 

Dec.  III.  IV. 

150 

Dee.  V. 

151 

Dec.  VI. 

152 

Notes  on  the  A.  E.  O.  class  of  Dec.  VI.  153 

Segholates  of  Verbs  Ayin  Vav,  etc. 

154 

Segholates  of  Verbs  Lamedh  He 

154 

Infinitive  Segholates 

Anomalous  Plurals  of  Segholates 

154 

155 

Dec.  VII. 

155 

Dec.  VIII. 

156 

Doc.  IX. 

157 

NOUNS  FEM.  Dec.  X.  XL 

158 

Dec.  XII.  XIII. 

159 

Dual  Number  of  Nouns 

160 

Hetcroclites  or  anomalous  nouns 

160 

NUMBERS  ;  cardinal  and  ordinal 

160 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm 

162 

Method  of  Notation 

162 

ADJECTIVES 

162 

PARTICLES 

163 
163 
164 

Adverbs 
Prepositions 

Table  of  them  with  pronouns,  etc. 

165 

Conjunctions 

166 

Interjections 

166 

PART  IV. 


SYNTAX. 


ARTICLE 

Insertion  of  it 

Omission 

Article  before  Adjectives 


167 
167 
169 
170 


NOUNS ;  case  absolute 
Cases  relative ;  Nom. 
Genitive  Case 
Gen.  with  Lamedh 


171 
172 
173 
174 


VIII 


CONTENTS. 


General  remark  on  it  175 

Gen.  sometimes  follows  adjectives  175 

various  meanings  of  it  176 

Dat.  case  177 

Accusative  177 
Accus.  put  after  Participles  and  Verbals        178 

Voc.  and  Abl.  cases  179 

CONSTRUCT  STATE  179 

Form  of  it  not  confined  to  position  before  a 

Genitive  179 

Refers  solely  to  the  relation  of  two  nouns  to 

each  other  180 

Apposition  181 

Gender  of  nouns  and  adjectives  182 

Number  of  nouns  used  collectively  182 

Pluralis  Excellentiae  182 

Use  of  the  plural  in  poetry  183 

Repetition  of  nouns  183 

with  the  copula  184 

184 
184 


Nouns  employed  as  adjectives 
When  employed  as  adjectives 
Circumlocutory  phrases  used  in  the  room  of 
adjectives  185 


ADJECTIVES ;  often  used  as  nouns  186 

used  as  predicates  of  a  sentence  186 

article  before  them  in  this  case  187 

Adjectives  qualifying  nouns  187 

Plur.  adjectives  with  Dual  Nouns  188 

Adj.  with  nouns  of  common  gender  188 

Position  of  adjectives  188 

Construct  state  of  them  188 

Comparative  degree  of  adjectives  189 

Superlative  189 

Various  methods  of  making  a  superlative  190 

NUMERALS  190 

Cardinal  numbers  used  for  Ordinals  191 

PRONOUNS;  use  of  the  primitive  ones  192 

used  for  the  verb  of  existence  193 

Case  of  suffix-pronouns  193 
Exceptions  194 
Position  of  noun-suffixes  194 
Position  of  pronouns  in  a  sentence  195 
Place  of  reflexive  pronouns  supplied  by  va- 
rious nouns  195 
Anomalies  of  pronouns  196 
Relative  pronouns  196 


VERBS;  general  principle  of  concord  197 

Concord  with  nouns  of  multitude  197 

Verbs  with  several  connected  Nominatives  197 
Concord  of  nouns  with  the  verb  of  existence  198 
Anomalies  in  concord  of  verbs;  number 

as  to  gender 

as  to  both  number  and  sender 


Peculiar  Anomaly 
Impersonal  Verbs 
Verbs  wiih  indefinite  Nominatives 


199 
201 
201 
202 
202 


TENSES  ;  various  meaning  of  the  Praeter   203 
of  the  Future   206 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD 

Use  of  Composite  Verbs 
Cases  governed  by  Verbs 
Verbs  governing  two  Accusatives 
Passive  Verbs 

INF.   ABSOLUTE,  and  its  various  uses 
Inf.  const,  and  its  various  uses 

PARTICIPLES 

Verbs  used  as  adverbs 

PARTICLES;  adverbs 

Prepositions 

Conjunctions 

Interrogates 

Interjections 

PLEONASM 

ELLIPSIS 

of  nouns 

>  of  pronouns 

of  the  verb  of  existence 

■  of  adverbs 

of  prepositions 

of  conjunctions 

in  poetic  parallelism 

Change  of  construction 
Constructio  praegnans 


210 
211 


211 
213 


216 
218 


219 
221 


225 


227 
228 


230 
231 
231 
231 
232 


Zeugma 

Hendiadys 

Paronomasia 

Paradigm  of  verbs,  nouns,  etc.  234 

Synoptical  View  of  ail  the  Conjugations  of 
the  Hebrew  Verbs  272 


fl 


^S^ 

iwm 

\y>& 

PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY    AND  ORTI 

IOEPY. 
JET. 

I.  ANCIENT  HEBREW  ALPHA! 

Forn; 

Repre- 
sented by 

Sounded 
as 

Names  in 
Hebrew  ; 

which  are 
represented    by 

and  sounded  as 

Signification  of 
the  names. 

tf 

? 

ttaleph 

Aw'-Ief 

OX. 

n 

bh,b 

v,b 

n^a 

Beth 

BaJth 

house. 

j 

Sh>g 

g 

iflJP* 

Girnel 

Gee-mel 

camel. 

31 

dh,d 

(  th  ini 
j  that,U 

'.'     T 

Daleth 

Daw'-leth 

door. 

n 

h 

h 

an 

He 

Hay 

hollow. 

i 

v 

V 

it 

Vav 

Vawv 

hook. 

T 

z 

Z 

in 

Zayin 

Za-yin 

armour. 

n 

hh 

hh 

njrj 

Hheth 

Hhaith 

travelling-scrip 

6 

t 

t 

tjns 

Tet 

Tait 

serpent. 

n 

y 

7 

•ft* 

Yodh 

Yoadh 

hand. 

s 

kh,k 

kh,k 

$ 

Kaph 

Kaf 

hollow-hand. 

b 

i 

I 

^ 

Lamedh 

Law-medh 

ox-goad. 

12 

m 

m 

oa 

Mem 

Maim 

water. 

3 

n 

n 

]13 

NOn 

Noon 

fish. 

0 

s 

s 

3$ 

Samekh 

Saw'-rnekh 

prop. 

? 

V 

u 

lfc 

?ayin 

A-yin 

eye. 

£ 

ph,p 

% 

MD 

Pe 

Pay 

mouth. 

t 

ts 

ts 

•'IS 

Tsade 

Tsaw-dhey 

screech-locust. 

? 

q 

q 

tff 

Qoph 

Qoaf 

ear. 

i 

r 

r 

'&! 

Resh 

Raish 

head. 

to 

sh,  s 

sh,s 

r®. 

Shinf 

Sheen 

tooth. 

nl 

th,  t 

th,  t 

in 

Tav         1 
2 

Tawv 

cross. 

No.  II.  No.  III. 

LATER  HEBR.  ALPHABET.       ORIENTAL,  ALPHABETS. 


Forms. 

Rep. 
by 

X 

Sounded 
as 

Names. 

Arabic 
alphabet. 

Syriac      I 
alphabet.  J 

Hebrew          I 
coin-letter.      i 

'amar. 
ilphab. 

~aT 

Heb, 

N 

Itfaleph 

J 

1 

FV< 

tf 

n 

bh 

V 

Beth 

J 

a 

3  4 

a 

s 

■3 

b 

b 

- 

^  -1 

i 

5 

J 

gh 

g 

Gimel 

2» 

<^> 

^T^, 

s 

- 

5 

g 

g 

J 

3t 

n 

lap 
1 

dh 

(  th  in 
|  that 

Daleth 

o 

> 

f  «it  A 

* 

» 

i 

'    1 

d 

d 

o 

■3T    X 

^ 

T 

n 

h 

h 

He 

A 

Ol 

B<5> 

ri 

n 

i 

V 

V 

Vav 

k 

0 

^ 

b 

T 

z 

z 

Zayin 

j 

1 

as 

n 

hh 

hh 

Hheth 

Cwflk. 

Jj 

I 

5 

D 

t 

t 

Tet 

i 

**  LJJ       VJU 

^ 

13 

h 

y 
kh 

1 

kh,'h 

Yodh 

J 

J 

a  a 

i 

i 

if 

i>3 

Kaph 

r 

o 

i.» 

j 

t 

1 
Lamedh 

5 

^ 

'  o  0 

3? 

s 

d,b 

m 

m 

Mem 

* 

^> 

-v*"  v** 

-m 

2 

hh 

TV3 

n 

n 

Nun 

j 

J 

4    P  P. 

49 

P 

b 

s 

s 

Samekh 

£D 

to 

* 

3? 

« 

3?  ay  in 

c  c 

i* 

W  Ct) 

*JU»» 

to 

fc* 

ph 

ph,f 

Pe 

i 

£> 

r  x 

A 

n 

£ 

P 

P 

y,s 

ts 

ts 

Tsadhe 

j6kd 

& 

P 

q 

q 

Qoph 

3 

JD 

■i 

r 

r 

Resh 

/ 

} 

to 

sh 

sh 

Shin 

AW 

A 

to 

s 

s 

Sin 

AW 

n 

th 

th 

Tav 

s   » 

i 

n 

t 

t 

lb 

1 

1 

u 


IV.  TABLE  OF  THE  VOWELS. 


I.  Class  :  Jl  sound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Aleph. 


Names. 


yQj?  Qamets 

nn^  Pattahh  long 

Pattahh  short 

713D  Seghol  long 


Seorhol  short 


Form. 

12  $n  m 

12 
12_  ttfi 


Sound. 

a  in  a// 
a  in  father 


=  a  in 


=  a  in 


=  a  in 


faring 


hate 

[  hated 
[  climate 


Rep.  by 


a    %tr 

a 
a 
e 
e 


II.  Class  ;  E  and  /sound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Yodh. 


^5  Tseri 
pijlD  Seghol  /cwg 


Seghol  s/ior/ 


p^n  Hhireq  /on^ 
Hhireq  short 


fi  WD 


=  ei/  in  //&e?/ 
=  ey  in  purvey 

=  i    in  machine 

4*      in  \  estimate 

l      lU\pin 


e 
e 
I 
1 


III.  Class 

tJ^in  Hholem 


O  and  U  sound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Vav. 


tj  C  Qamets  Hha- 
Y  \  teph  short. 


p  "1/1  ft)    Shureq 

Qibbuts  /owg 

Qibbuts  short 


0 

55 

1212 

b  eb 

•r              t 

ib  cms 

12 

X212 

12 
»B 

=  0    in 


£° 


=  0    \n\holiday 

"J  I  not 

=  00  in  moon 
=  00  in  moon 
=  wc  in  rue 
=  w   in^/w// 


dT.rr 


IV.  [Half-vowels]  Sheva,  simple  and  composite. 


Jlltti  Sheva  (simple) 
nnD  t\W  Hhateph  Pattahh 
Vl^5|Wl  Hhateph  Sfghol 
Y^E  ^l1?-^  Hnat^Pn  Qamets 


B 

n 

n 

1: 


=  c  in  6egm 
=  a  in  ftfatt^ 
=  e  in  fogm 
=  o  in  won/ 


12  §§    1 — 5.   ALPHABET. 


Remarks  on  the  Alphabet. 
§  1.  The  ancient  number  of  letters  was  only  22 ;  which  is  clear  from 
the  alphabetic  Psalms,  viz.  Ps.  25.  34.  37.  111.  112.  119. 145 ;  also  from 
alphabetic  compositions  in  Prov.  31: 10  seq.  Lam.  I — IV.  But  in  Ps.  25. 
34.  145,  one  letter  is  omitted ;  in  Ps.  27,  2  is  repeated  and  9  omitted. 
All  the  other  Shemitish  alphabets,  (and  probably  the  ancient  Greek  one 
also),  had  originally  the  same  number  of  letters,  viz.  22. 

NOTE.  The  present  square  form  of  the  Hebrew  letters  is  not  the  most  ancient  one.  This  is 
evident  from  inscriptions  on  Hebrew  coins  stamped  in  the  time  of  the  Maccabees,  which  have 
characters  such  as  are  designated  in  alphabet  No.  III.  The  present  square  letter  is  evidently  de- 
rived from  the  Aramaean  forms  of  letters,  and  probably  originated  some  time  after  the  birth  of 
Christ.  This  Kopp  has  recently  shewn,  in  a  satisfactory  manner,  in  his  Bilder  und  Schriften 
der  Vorieit,  If.  p.  95  soq.,  particularly  p.  156  seq. 

§  2.  The  usual  arrangement  of  the  letters  is  fully  settled  by  the 
same  alphabetic  compositions  in  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  which  are 
noted  above.  Most  of  the  arrangement  seems  to  have  been  originally 
accidental ;  yet  not  all  of  it.  For  example,  the  Liquids  b,  73, 2,  are 
ranged  together.  Za-yin  (t)  meaning  shield,  and  Hheth  (n)  probably 
meaning  travelling-scrip,  are  associated.  So  Yodh  (*>)  hand,  and  Kaph 
(3)  hollow-hand;  Mem  (ft)  water,  and  Nun  (3)  fish;  also  3?ayin  (3>) 
eye,  Pe  (d)  mouth,  Q,6ph  (p)  ear,  Resh  (~\)  head,  and  Shin  (x)  tooth. 
In  Lam.  I — IV,  9  stands  ranged  after  D  ;  which  shews  that  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  alphabet  was  not  uniform  in  all  cases,  at  the  time 
when  this  book  was  written. 

§  3.  The  age  of  the  alphabetic  names  seems  to  mount  higher  than 
that  of  the  Hebrew,  or  of  any  of  the  present  Shemitish  languages.  Some 
of  the  forms  of  these  names  are  like  the  Aramean,  e.  g  rP2,  23",n,  BEj; 
two  seem  to  be  of  appropriate  Hebrew  stamp,  viz.  y\t  "]y>  ;  but  PJ^N, 
btt/\a,  njVj  IB?,  Jjqb,  with  ii  ,  andpiB  (instead  of  ]%),  are  mani- 
festly exotics,  derived  from  a  kindred  language  which  is  now  no  more, 
but  which,  as  the  more  simple  forms  of  the  words  shew,  was  probably 
older  than  the  time  of  Moses. 

§  4.  The  signification  of  the  names  is,  in  most  cases  (not  in  all),  suffi- 
ciently plain.  The  names  are  borrowed  from  natural  objects  ;  but  the 
resemblance  of  the  letters  to  them  is  not  to  be  traced  in  many  of  the 
present  Hebrew  letters,  which  differ  much  from  the  form  of  the  corres- 
ponding ancient  6nes.  Alphabet  No.  1.  col  7,  shews  the  most  proba- 
ble original  significations.  For  an  admirable  exhibition  of  the  very 
ancient  forms  of  Shemitish  letters,  Kopp's  Bilder  und  Schriften  der  Vor- 
zeit,  II.  157,  may  be  consulted. 

§  5.  The  pronunciation  of  the  names  is  given  in  No.  I.  col.  6,  as 
exactly  as  the  English  alphabet  will  permit.     The  vowels  in  col.  5.  of 


§§  6 8.  ALPHABET.  13 


the  same,  are  sounded  as  directed  in  the  table  of  the  vowels  under 
No.  IV. 

§  6.  The  later  Hebrew  alphabet,  as  it  now  appears  in  all  our  point- 
ed Hebrew  books,  consists  of  twenty-nine  letters,  as  given  in  No.  II. 
Six  of  these,  as  the  alphabet  shews,  have  two  sounds  each,  but  retain 
only  the  ancient  single  name  ;  one  (tB  Sin,  pronounced  Seen)  is  fur- 
nished with  a  point  over  its  left  tooth,  (Shin  has  one  over  the  right 
tooth,  lb),  and  also  with  a  different  name,  in  order  to  distinguish  it. 
The  modern  Arabians  have  twenty-eight  letters,  six  of  which  are  thus 
distinguished  merely  by  a  diacritical  point ;  as  is  the  case  with  the  same 
number  of  letters,  in  the  later  Hebrew  alphabet.  Comp.  Arab,  alpha- 
bet in  No.  III. 

§  7.  The  final  forms  of  five  of  the  letters  appear  in  the  short  left- 
hand  column  of  them,  in  the  alphabet  No.  II.  They  are  doubtless 
subsequent  in  their  origin  to  the  original  forms ;  but  when  they  were 
introduced  is  not  known.  When  manuscripts  were  written  continuous- 
ly, i.  e.  without  separating  the  words,  (as  they  originally  were),  these 
final  letters  aided  very  much  in  making  the  proper  divisions.  Why 
more  of  them  were  not  invented  for  that  purpose,  it  is  difficult  to  say. 
The  practice  of  employing  the  final  forms  at  the  end  of  words,  is  uni- 
versal, so  far  as  they  go.  Conceit  or  mistake  has  excepted  only  some 
two  or  three  cases  ;  e.  g.  573  (for  ]73),  Job  38:  1  ;  rct"jD\  (for  ttnTib,), 
Is.  9:  6 ;  tsn  (for  Drt),  Neh.  2:  13. ' 

NOTE.  The  technical  name,  yB5»S  (kamnephe'ts),  is  given  by  the  older 
grammarians  to  these  final  forms  which  are  peculiar,  in  order  that  they  may  be 
easily  remembered  by  the  learner. 

§  8.  The  sounds  of  the  letters  are  given  according  to  the  general 
usage  of  the  most  enl  ightened  Hebrew  scholars  of  the  present  time.  There 
is  a  difference  of  opinion  among  the  learned  about  some  of  the  niceties  of 
sound,  in  regard  to  several  of  them.  But  in  respect  to  a  language  which 
has  been  dead  for  2000  years,  such  questions  can  never  be  determined 
with  satisfactory  certainty.  I  subjoin  a  few  remarks  on  particular  letters, 
which  are  of  the  more  difficult  class. 

Aleph  (k),  as  all  agree,  was  of  a  very  slight  sound.  It  easily  coa- 
lesced with,  or  conformed  to,  other  proximate  sounds.  I  have  chosen 
the  spiritus  lenis  of  the  Greeks  to  represent  it.  Practically  we  do  not 
sound  it  at  all,  at  least  not  perceptibly.  In  theory  it  is  a  real  consonant ; 
and  the  Hebrews  doubtless  sounded  it  so  as  to  make  it  perceptible  in 
most  cases. 

Beth  (:i),  bh=zv.     So  the  modern  Greeks  sound  their  /?. 

Gimel  (a),  when  it  is  equivalent  to  gh,  is  represented  in  the  alpha- 


14  §  8.    ALPHABET. 


bets  as  sounded  like  g.  But  the  real  sound  is  quite  uncertain.  The 
Arabians  sound  the  same  letter  (a.)  like  our  j ;  just  as  in  English  we 
sound  g  soft  before  e  and  i.  I  follow  the  general  usage  and  sound  it 
as  g  hard,  because  the  other  sound  is  unknown  to  us. 

Daleth  (l),  dh—th  in  that;  a  sound  which  much  perplexes  Europe- 
ans of  the  continent,  but  which  is  altogether  easy  and  familiar  to  the 
English,  and  to  the  modern  Greeks  who  so  sound  their  d. 

He  (n)  is  a  feeble  h.  Vav  (l)  is  a  feeble  v.  The  Arabs  sound  it 
like  our  w ;  which,  more  probably,  was  the  Hebrew  usage.  I  conform 
to  the  general  European  usage. 

Hheth  (n)  hh,  i.  e.  a  strong  aspirate  Yet  it  was  not  always  so  in 
practice,  among  the  Hebrews ;  for  at  the  end  of  words  it  appears  to 
have  been  very  much  softened.  E.  g.  the  Seventy  represent  rnF]  by 
SaQQtt,  and  nbtt)  by  UaXa.  But  they  translate  fift  ,  by  Xdp  ;  and 
-Fn  ,  by  *Puyr\k.  The  Arabians  have  two  gradations  of  sound  for  this 
letter. 

Tet  (a)  is  a  hard  guttural  kind  of  t,  for  which  we  have  no  due  repre- 
sentative in  English.     The  corresponding  Greek  letter  is  #. 

Kaph  (3),  kh,  a  difficult  sound.  The  Greeks  have  it  in  their  %. 
The  usual  practice  sounds  it  like  7*,  i.  e.  makes  a  kind  of  guttural  of 
it.  Kh  can  be  distinctly  sounded  by  special  effort ;  but  what  is  gained 
by  this,  is  not  worth  the  trouble  necessary  to  gain  it.  Common  usage 
sounds  ^3 ,  as  be-hmo.  I  would  conform  to  this,  as  it  is  so  much  easier 
than  to  sound  Teh  fully ;  or  it  may  be  read  be-kaw,  by  giving  to  9  the 
same  sound  as  3=&. 

Samekh  (d)  is  sounded  as  the  Greek  a,  of  which  it  is  the  undoubted 
prototype.  In  the  later  Hebrew,  it  does  not  seem  to  differ  perceptibly 
in  sound  from  the  letter  UJ ,  Sin ;  and  the  Hebrews  have,  in  their 
orthography,  written  many  words  indifferently  with  either  the  one  or 
the  other,  as  D*}B  and  itf^B  to  divide.  Yet  in  other  words  there  is  a 
difference  ;  as  in  '"DO  and  ^Dto . 

The  sound  of  Ayin  (?)  is  represented  by  ("),  the  double  spiritus 
asper  of  the  Greeks,  for  want  of  a  better  representative.  Grammarians 
have  represented  it  by  g,  gh,  hgh,  sounded  gutturally :  also  hh,  hhh, 
and  by  the  nasal  gn,  ng,  ngn.  The  Arabians  have  two  sounds  for  it  ; 
the  deeper  one  is  scarcely  attainable  by  any  European.  The  ancient 
Hebrews  appear  to  have  had  two  also ;  e.  g.  the  Sept.  render  ?TjlWJ 
r6[iOQQat  trty  rd£a;  but  their  usage  varies,  as  *)>9  'Ml,  pbJW  'Apa- 
Aij»c.  That  it  sometimes  had  comparatively  a  feeble  sound,  is  evident 
from  its  admitting  of  coalescence  or  contraction,  as  ^3  for  b^S  ;  also 
from  its  commutation  with  tt ,  (see  in  the  Hebrew  lexicon  under  «). 


§§  9 11.   ALPHABET.  15 


Europeans  generally  neglect  to  sound  it.  Jerome  calls  it  a  vowel ;  see 
above,  in  '^pcdijx,  the  ground  of  this.  The  vowel  accompanying  it 
should  have  a  strong  impetus  of  the  voice  in  pronouncing  it ;  and  this 
will  bring  the  sound  near  to  that  which  the  Arabians  give. 

Tsadhe  (£),  ts  hard.  Qoph  (p),  a  deep  guttural  k,  pronounced 
with  impetus.  Resh  (l),  the  rolling  r  of  the  French,  or  the  Greek  p. 
Tav  (P,),  t  soft. 

Note.  The  Jews  of  the  present  day  differ  much  in  their  pronuncia- 
tion of  the  Hebrew.  The  Polish  and  German  Jews  follow  the  analogy 
of  the  Syriac  pronunciation  ;  the  Spanish  and  Portuguese  Jews,  that  of 
the  Arabic.     Most  Christian  teachers  follow  the  latter. 

In  general  it  should  be  observed,  that  the  earlier  sounds  of  the  He- 
brew letters  were  harsher  and  more  distinctly  marked  ;  in  later  periods 
the  harsher  sounds  were  gradually  softened.  E.  g.  in  Syriac  2  is  weak 
and  soft ;  the  Galileans  sounded  2 ,  n  ,  and  tt  alike  ;  in  Ethiopic  '&  is 
simply  s,  etc. 

§  9.  Dilated  letters  are  a  mere  expedient  to  make  out  the  adjust- 
ment of  a  line  ;  for  the  Hebrews  do  not  separate  words  at  the  end  of 
lines.     The  usual  ones  are  t< ,  Ft,  fe,  CD  ,  n,  i.  e.  K ,  FT ,  b  ,  ta ,  n . 

[§  10.   Unusual  letters.  These  are,  (1)  Literae  mqjusculae ;  as  n|5l  , 
Ps.  80:  16.    (2)  Minusculae ;  as  Q&n  JFr2  ,  Gen.  2:  4.  (3)  Suspensae  ; 
as  n^tt ,  Ps.  80:  14.     (4)  Inversae  ';    as  'sbp  ,  Numb.  1035.     The  :  55" 
Rabbins  find  mysteries  in  these ;   the  considerate  critic  will  find  only 
mistakes  in  copying,  or  conceits  of  the  copyists. 

§  11.  Similar  letters.  These  are  numerous  in  the  Hebrew  alpha- 
bet. The  student  should  carefully  note  them  at  the  outset.  They  are 
as  follows ;   viz. 


1.  Beth 

2    S  Kaph 

8.  Zayin 

T     ]  Nun 

2.  Gimel 

j    D  Nun 

9.  Hheth 

n  n  He 

3.  Daleth 

1   ^  Kaph 

10.  Hheth 

n  n  Tav 

4.  Daleth 

1  1  Resh 

11.  Mem 

B  8  Tet 

5.  Vav 

1    i  Yodh 

12.  Mem 

D  0  Samekh 

6.  Vav 

1    ]  Nun 

13.  Tsadhe 

p  ?  Ayin 

7.  Zayin 

T    1  Vav 

Explanations. 
(1)  3  is  distinguished  from  3,  by  the  right  angle  which  its  perpen- 
dicular side  makes  with  the  strokes  at  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  let- 


16  §§  11 13.    CLASSIFICATION    OP   CONSONANTS. 

ter ;  3  is  round  at  its  corners  instead  of  being  angular.  In  some  print 
ed  copies,  D  is  distinguished  from  3  only  by  the  roundness  of  its  corner 
at  the  bottom.  (2)  3  is  distinguished  from  5,  by  having  the  stroke  at 
the  bottom  united  to  the  perpendicular  only  by  a  small  point  at  the  cor- 
ner ;  in  1,  the  bottom  stroke  is  united  without  any  variation  of  its  mag- 
nitude. (3)  f  final  descends  below  the  line ;  T  does  not.  (4)  T  is 
distinguished  from  1 ,  by  have  a  right  angle  at  the  top,  at  which  part  *l 
is  round  or  obtuse.  (5)  T  descends  to  the  bottom  of  the  line  ;  *1  does 
not.  (6)  ]  final  falls  below  the  line  ;  T  does  not.  (7)  The  top  of  T  is 
continued  a  little  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicular,  while  that  of  7  is 
not ;  the  upright  line  of  T  is  small  at  the  top,  where  it  inclines  to  the 
right,  while  it  is  gibbous  below  ;  which  is  not  the  case  with  1.  (8)  T 
descends  only  to  the  line ;  *J  final  falls  below  it.  (9)  n  has  no  space 
between  its  left  side  and  the  top  ;  {"J  exhibits  a  small  chasm.  (10)  n 
has  a  small  dotted  circle  at  the  bottom  of  the  perpendicular  stroke  on 
the  left  hand ;  n  has  not  this  mark.  (11)  t3  is  open  at  the  top.;  73  at 
the  bottom.  (12)  D  is  almost  round  ;  D  final  is  a  square  or  parallelo- 
gram. (13)  i2  is  angular  on  the  right  side  of  it,  and  the  bottom  is  par- 
allel with  the  line  ;  3>  turns  to  the  left  only.  Final  f,  in  its  falling 
stroke,  either  turns  a  little  to  the  right,  or  descends  perpendicularly  ;  it 
also  falls  below  the  line. 

N.  B.  The  learner  will  find  it  altogether  the  easiest  method  of  making  himself  familiar  with 
the  distinctions  between  the  Hebrew  letters,  and  with  the  respective  sounds  of  the  letters,  (as  also 
of  the  vowels),  to  practice  writing  them  down,  calling  each  aloud  by  its  name,  and  uttering  the 
sound  of  it  as  often  as  he  writes  it.  Let  this  practice  be  persisted  in,  until  all  the  vowels  and  con- 
sonants can  be  recognized  with  facility  and  pronounced  readily;  their  distinctions  definitely  de- 
scribed and  drawn  with  the  pen  at  pleasure;  and  their  names  familiarly  recalled.  In  this  way 
the  student  may  learn  to  write  Hebrew  letters  and  vowels,  (which  he  should  by  all  means  do)  ; 
and  he  will  fix  the  names,  forms,  and  sounds  of  all  the  written  signs  indelibly  upon  his  memory. 

[§  12.     Classification  of  the  consonants.      This  has  been  usually 

made  agreeably  to  the  organs  specially  employed    in    pronouncing 
them,  as  follows  ;  viz. 

(a)  Gutturals  N     tt  H     2  technically  called  2TVn& 

(b)  Labials  3      1  »     B  P)Ja*l3 

(c)  Dentals  T     D  £     1     C  (to)  unSCT 

(d)  Linguals  T     D  b      3     D  *$$?( 

(e)  Palatals  3     "  5      p  pya 

Of  these,  the  most  important  classes  are  the  Gutturals  and  the  La- 
bials. But  8  is  oftentimes  not  employed  as  a  Guttural ;  on  the  other 
hand,  n  is  not  unfrequently  treated  like  one.] 

§  13.  A  more  important  division  of  the  consonants,  for  practical 
purposes,  is  one  which  selects  only  those  letters  that  are  the  subjects  of 
some  special  peculiarity.     This  is  as  follows ;  viz. 


§  14.    VOWELS.  17 


(a)  Aspirates;  viz.  D,  3,  %  3,  £,  371,  technically  called 
B^ghadh-ksphath  (n£3  133). 

They  are  named  Aspirates,  because,  when  there  is  no  point  (i.  e. 
Daghesh)  in  them,  they  are  aspirated,  i.  e.  associated  with  an  A-sound ; 
see  alphabet  No.  II. 

When  they  are  destitute  of  this  point  or  Daghesh,  these  letters  are  called,  by  the  older  gram- 
marians, molles  and  raphatae,  §  70  ;  with  it,  durae  and  dagessatae,  $  83. 

(b)  Quiescents;  viz.  M,  H,  1,  \  technically  named  tfehevi 
O'lHtf).  The  reason  of  this  is,  that  cthe  sound  of  these 
letters,  being  in  itself  somewhat  feeble,  often  coalesces 
with  the  vowel  sound  which  precedes;  so  that  these  let- 
ters are  said  to  quiesce,  i.  e.  to  lose  their  separate  sound 
as  consonants,  by  falling  into  the  preceding  vowel. 

(c)  Gutturals;  viz.  tf,  H,  H,  ?,  or  a-hahha?  Cmna),  as 
stated  above. 

Besides  these  four  letters,  Resh  (^)  has  a  claim  occasionally  to  be  reckoned  with  the  Gutturals, 
because  it  is  treated  in  the  same  way  as  they  are;  see  $  111,  seq.  Aleph  and  He,  moreover,  often 
become  Quiescents,  (see  b  above) ;  so  that  they  are  to  be  reckoned  as  Chttturals,  only  when  they 
have  a  distinctive  consonant  sound,  or  (in  technical  language)  are  moveable. 

(d)  Liquids ;  viz.  ^,  ft,  3,  *1 ;  of  which  *)  is  to  be  re- 
garded only  as  a  kind  of  half-liquid.  Sometimes  it  is  a 
kind  of  Guttural,  according  to  the  statement  above. 
Technically  these  may  be  called,  limnar  (^D^V). 

N.  B.  The  student  should  impress  these  classes,  particularly  the  three  first,  deeply  on  his  memory. 

Note.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  employed  by  the  Hebrews 
to  designate  numbers.  See  Par.  XXVIII  of  the  numerals,  and  the  §§ 
there  referred  to. 


VOWELS. 
§  14.  Originally  the  Hebrew  alphabet  consisted  only  of  consonants. 
Some  learned  men  have  maintained  the  contrary,  and  averred  that 
tt,  %  \  were  originally  designed  to  be  vowels.  But  the  fact  that  these 
letters  constitute  essential  parts  of  the  triliteral  roots  in  Hebrew,  and 
that  they  are  susceptible  of  forming  syllables  by  union  with  every  sort 
of  vowel-sound,  proves  beyond  all  reasonable  doubt  that  they  are  essen- 
tially consonants. 

3 


18  <$$  15 — 18.  vowels. 


§  15.  But  as  the  sounds  of  N,  1,  %  were  feeble,  and  often  in  prac- 
tice were  made  to  coalesce  with  the  vowels  which  preceded  them,  it 
was  natural  that  in  process  of  time  these  letters  should  come  to  be  con- 
sidered, in  many  cases,  as  representatives  of  the  vowels  with  which 
they  were  customarily  made  to  coalesce.  Hence,  in  the  later  Hebrew 
writings,  we  find  tt,  "I,  \  not  unfrequently  used  in  the  room  of  vowels  ; 
more  rarely  in  the  early  writings.  But  the  still  later  Chaldaeo-Rab- 
binic  Hebrew  employs  these  three  letters,  very  often,  merely  for  the 
purpose  of  designating  vowels.  On  this  account  these  three  letters  are 
called  vowel-letters,  by  recent  grammarians,  when  they  are  spoken  of 
in  reference  to  the  usage  now  in  question.  The  older  grammarians 
called  them,  with  like  reference,  matres  lectionis,  i.  e.  authors  or  guides 
of  [right]  reading.  But  in  reference  to  another  ground  of  classification, 
these  same  letters  (together  with  !i)  are  called  Ehevi  (*fflN$)  or  Quies- 
cents ;  see  §  13.  6. 

[The  moat  ancient  Hebrew  MSS.  consisted  of  only  the  letters  in  the  alphabet  No.  I.,  which,  how- 
ever, were  of  very  different  shape  from  the  present  ones  ;  see  $  I.  Note.  When  the  diacritical  signs, 
i.  e.  small  dots  in  or  over  a  letter,  which  distinguish  the  later  alphabet  and  increase  the  actual 
number  of  letters,  together  with  all  the  vowel-points  and  accents,  were  first  introduced,  no  histor- 
ical documents  satisfactorily  shew.  But  it  is  now  generally  agreed,  that  the  introduction  was  a 
gradual  one  ;  and  that,  however  early  some  few  particular  things  in  the  general  system  may 
have  been  commenced,  yet  the  whole  system  of  diacritical  signs,  vowel-points,  and  accents,  was 
not  completed,  so  as  to  exist  in  its  present  form,  until  several  centuries  after  the  birth  of  Christ  ; 
almost  certainly  not  until  after  the  fifth  century,  probably  not  until  after  the  seventh  ;  see  Gese- 
nius'  Gesehichte  d.  Heb.  Sprache,  s.  182  f.,  and  Hupfeld,  in  the  Theol.  Stud,  and  Kritiken,  A.*D. 
1830,  No.  3,  where  this  question  is  ably  and  satisfactorily  discussed.  In  regard  to  reading  MSS. 
destitute  of  all  this  system  of  helps,  there  is  no  serious  difficulty  ;  at  least  none  to  any  one  who 
well  understands  the  language.  The  same  thing  is  habitually  done,  at  the  present  day,  by  the 
Arabians,  the  Persians,  and  the  Syrians,  in  their  respective  tongues  ;  and  in  Hebrew,  by  the  Jew- 
ish Rabbies,  and  by  all  the  learned  in  the  Shemitish  languages.] 

§  16.  From  what  has  just  been  said,  the  student  will  see  why  (in 
the  table  No.  IV.)  tt,  i,  and"1,  are  represented  as  vowel-letters  cor- 
responding to  their  respective  classes  of  vowels.  It  is  because  these 
letters  were  occasionally  employed  (tfless  frequently)  to  designate  more 
or  less  of  the  vowel-sounds,  which  are  associated  with  them. 

§  17.  In  the  same  Table,  in  column  2d,  the  letters  NHID^ 
are  so  arranged  as  to  form  syllables  by  the  help  of  the  vowels.  They 
are  so  used  merely  to  exhibit  to  the  learner  the  manner  in  which  the 
Hebrew  vowels  are  written,  in  respect  to  the  alphabetic  letters  or  con- 
sonants with  which  they  are  associated,  i.  e.  as  written  above,  below,  or 
in  the  consonants. 

18.  The  student  must  free  himself,  at  the  outset,  from  the  habit  of 
giving  English  sounds  to  the  English  representatives  of  the  Hebrew 
vowels,  and  be  very  careful  always  to  sound  these  representatives  as 
directed  in  the  table. 


§§  19 — 23.  vowels  :  quality.  19 

§  19.  The  ground  of  classification  in  the  Table  No.  IV.  is,  that  the 
vowels  in  these  respective  classes  not  only  have  a  natural  relation  to 
each  other  in  respect  to  the  sound,  but  for  the  most  part  are  often  com- 
muted for  each  other.  Seldom  does  commutation  take  place  without 
the  limits  of  the  respective  classes. 

Former  method  of  Classifying  the  Vowels. 

[§  20.  The  classification  among  the  older  grammarians  had  respect 
to  quantity,  and  was  as  follows ;  viz.  Long — Qamets,  Tseri,  Hhireq 
magnum,  Hholem,  Shureq;  Short — Pattahh,  Seghol,  Hhireq  parvum 
Clamets  Hhateph  and  Qibbuts.  But  all  of  these  so  called  short  vowels 
are  in  fact  often  long,  with  the  exception  of  Clamets  Hhateph.  Hence  ,, 
the  student  is  exposed  to  be  perplexed  and  misled,  by  such  a  classifica- 
tion. A  better  division  is  that  proposed  by  the  ancient  Jewish  gram- 
marians, and  lately  adopted  by  the  leading  Hebrew  grammarians  in 
Germany ;  the  basis  of  which  is  exhibited  in  Table  IV.  In  like  man- 
ner, the  Arabic  has  only  three  classes  of  vowels.] 

Ewald,  in  his  Hebrew  grammar  (1827),  has  attempted   to  reduce  the  vowels  to  two  classes; 
with  much  ingenuity,  but  not  satisfactorily. 

Classification  of  Vowels  in  regard  to  Quality. 

§  21.   In  Hebrew  it  often  happens,  that  the  sounds  of 

some    consonants  which  follow  certain  vowels,  instead  of 

being  preserved  and  pronounced   distinct,  coalesce    with 

such  vowels  and  form  as  it  were  part  of  them;    see  §53 

seq.  §58  seq. 

This  takes  place  either  because  the  consonant  sounds  are  in  them- 
selves feeble  and  lacking  in  distinctness  (§  15),  or  else  in  order  to  avoid 
the  repetition  of  a  letter  which  would  be  harsh  an4  disagreeable  to  the 
ear,  or  difficult  to  utter,  (§  58  seq.) 

§  22.  This  usage  gives  rise  to  a  division  of  the  vowels 
which  is  of  great  practical  importance,  as  it  is  intimately 
connected  with  the  variations  and  declensions  of  words 
in  the  Hebrew  language.  By  this  division  vowels  are 
distributed  into  Pure  and  Impure. 
Q  §  23.  A  pure  vowel  is  one  with  which  no  consonant 
sound  coalesces.  i}3 


rC^vi 


20  §§  24,  25.  vowels  :  quality. 


6§  24,  25.  vowels  :  qual 


§  24.     An  impure  vowel,w  on  the  contrary,  is  one  with 

which  a  consonant  sound  does  coalesce. 

E.  g.  in  ^5*T  dd-bhdr  both  vowels  are  pure  ;  the  first  in  ^  ,  because 
no  consonant  follows;  the  second  in  15,  because,  although  a  conso- 
nant follows,  it  preserves  its  distinct  sound  and  does  not  coalesce  with 
the  vowel.  On  the  other  hand,  in  NZ  bd  the  N  has  no  distinct  sound, 
because  it  coalesces  with  the  Qamets ;  and  in  *]n3 ,  (so  written  instead 
of  ^2 ,  §  111.  §  112),  the  Qamets  contains  a  coalescent  Resh,  which 
is  suppressed  in  the  writing  by  omitting  a  Daghesh  in  the  *\ ;  in  both 
which  cases  Qamets  is  impure.  And  thus  of  all  the  other  vowels, 
which  in  any  way  admit  a  consonant  to  coalesce  with  them  ;  see  §  53 
I  seq.  §58  seq. 

§  25.    The  pure  long  vowels   are  Qamets,  Tseri,  and 
Hholem.       All   the  short  vowels,  viz.  Pattahh,    Seghol, 
THhireq    (parvum),  Qamets  Hhateph,  and    Qibbuts  (not 
vicarious),   are  pure,  whenever  no  consonant   sound  coa- 
lesces with  them.  ■-'"■ 

Note  1.   Of  the  long  vowels,  Hhireq  magnum  and  Shureq  are  always  Is- 
impure,  because  Yodh  or  Vav  (either  expressed  or  implied)  always  fol- 
lows them  and  coalesces  with  them;  §  53 seq. 

Note  2.  The  importance  of  the  principle  stated  above  may  be  esti- 
mated from  the  fact,  that  (with  very  few  exceptions)  all  impure  vowels 
are  immutable,  and  all  pure  ones  mutable;  §  127 seq. 

Note  3.  Appearance  merely  will  not  determine  whether  a  vowel  long 
by  nature  is  pure  or  impure,  inasmuch  as  the  quiescent  letter,  which 
frequently  coalesces  with  it,  is  often  omitted  in  the  writing ;  e.  g.  CJ3 
qdm  (impure)  stands  for  QNj?  gam,  "13  nir  for  "V3  ,  bp  qol  for  bip  ,  etc. ; 
see  §  63.  The  same  is  true  of  the  short  vowels,  which  become  long 
by  the  coalescence  of  a  consonant  with  them  ;  e.  g.  bf73  bd-hel  for  b«T2- 
bah-hel,  Cn:  ni-hham  for  on}  nihh-hham,  etc. ;  see  §  29.  Note.  In  a 
multitude  of  cases,  therefore,  the  student  can  distinguish  whether 
vowels  of  this  kind  are  pure  or  impure,  only  by  obtaining  a  knowledge 
of  etymology  and  the  analogies  of  the  Hebrew  language. 

Note  4.  On  the  other  hand,  letters  apparently  quiescent  are  some- 
times inserted  after  vowels  long  by  nature,  without  mixing  with  them  and 
rendering  them  impure.  In  this  case  they  are  merely  a  kind  of  fulcrum 
for  the  vowel  ;  e.  g.  ^nftb"1.  yil-modh  with  Hholem  pure,  =  ltt!i£ ;  ^rib 
so-bhebh  with  Tseri  pure,  =3^0;    see  §  64,  and  comp.  §§  14 — 16, 


<S$  26 — 29.  vowels  :  quantity.  21 

which  exhibit  the  grounds  of  introducing  such  anomalies.     It  is  proba- 
J*    ble  that  the  maires  lectionis,  in  such  cases  (§  15),  were  introduced  be- 
fore the  vowel-points  came  into  usage. 

Classification  of  Vowels  in  regard  to  Quantity. 

§  26.      Vowels  in  Hebrew  may  be  divided   into  long, 

short,  and  semivowels  or  very  short  ones  made  by  the  She- 

vas  (§42seq.) 

Only  the  two  former  classes  are  treated  of  here.     The  semivowels  /try*«i  < 
are  fully  described  in  §  42  seq. 

§  27.    Long   by  nature,   or  always   long,  are    Qamets,        *"7 
Tseri,  Hhireq  magnum,  Hholem,  and  almost  always  Shu- 
req.      Short  by  nature,  and  always  short  when  pure,  are 
Pattahh,  Seghol,  Hhireq  parvum,  Qamets  Hhateph,  and**"* 
Qibbuts. 

§  28.     Of  the  vowels  long  by  nature  some  have  been 

occasionally,  yet  very  rarely,  considered  and  treated  as 

short. 
I  --v  Note  1.  There  are  a  few  cases  in  which  Shureq  appears  to  be  short, 
i.  e.  to  be  of  the  same  quantity  as  Qibbuts,  even  although  it  seems  to 
coalesce  with  Vav.  Such  are  the  cases  when  it  stands  before  a  da- 
ghejh'd  letter  ;  e.  g.  Irtj^n  hhuq-qd,  rTS*)t  zun-nd,  ^IWfc  md-$uz-zly  etc. 
In  Chala«^,  Syriac,  and  Arabic,  this  is  very  common.  So  few  cases 
of  this  nature,W  ever,  occur  in  Hebrew,  that  ihey  seem  to  result 
merely  from  the  use  of  a  vowel-letter  by  transcribers  as  the  sign  of  a 
vowel,  and  to  have  been  introduced  before  the  vowel-points  were  em- 
ployed ;    see  $$  14 — 16. 

[Note  2.  Similar  cases  of  Hhireq  with  Yodh  are  also  affirmed  by 
most  grammarians  to  exist.  But  the  examples  evidently  do  not  justify 
this  conclusion,  inasmuch  as  they  seem  to  amount  only  to  different 
modes  of  orthography  and  pronunciation  in  respect  to  the  same  word ; 
e.  g.  abp'r  ziq-ldgh  and  ibffl  zi-qelagh,  Wap  qim-mosh  and  ,£i;a",p 
qi-mdsh,  'd^B  pil-le-ghesh  and  'di^B  pi-le-ghesh,  tP-nia  md-rig-gim 
and  tru'lift  mo-ri-ghim.] 

§29.      Of  the  vowels    short  by   nature,   all   (except*;  V.'  " 
^!    Qamets  Hhateph  which  is  never  long)  may  coalesce  with 


22  §§  30,  31.  vowels  :  quantity. 

a  consonant-sound,  and  thus  become-  impure  and  long;  § 

53seq.  §58seq. 

[Note.  For  the  most  part  the  coalescent  consonant,  in  these  cases, 
is  one  which  is  contained  in  an  implied  Daghesh,  (omitted  in  writing 
because  it  is  compensated  for  by  the  lenghtening  of  the  vowel),  and  not 
one  of  the  Ehevi  or  Quiescents.  In  this  way  only  are  Pattahh,  Hhireq  «»  , 
parvum,  and  Gtibbuts  (not  vicarious),  made  long  and  impure;  e.  g.  as  *•• 
in  b!7.2  bd-hel,  for  bna  bdh-hel;  fin  a  ni-hhdm  for  SPO  nihh-hhdm ;  Y^H 
ru-hhdts,  for  yn*~\  ruhh-hhdts.  For  cases  like  rWipb  ,  n^tfS  ,  where 
Pattahh  and  Qibbuts  apparently  have  a  quiescent  tt,  see  §  118  with  the 
notes. 

On  the  other  hand,  Seghol  may  be  made  long,  either  by  a  Quiescent, 
as  *J,  N2£,  T\12,  ge,  tse,  me  ;  or  by  the  coalescence  of  a  daghesh'd  let- 
ter, as  Q^nrj^l  he-hd-rim,  iiftS  pe-hjid,  vntt  toe-hhdv,  where  the  Gut- 
turals n  ,  rj ,  exclude  the  Daghesh  forte  which  belongs  to  them ;  see  j 
$<§,  53.  58.  111.  112.  54.— Qamets  Hhateph  is  never  long.]  VT 

Miscellaneous  remarks  on  the  Vowels,  and  recapitulations.        .•  *  V* 

§  30.     From  the  exhibition  of  the  vowels,  as  made  above,  it  appears  ^ 
that  there  are  several  different  classes  of  long  vowels.     ( 1 )  Long  pure   j"  \ 
vowels,  i.  e.  Qamets,  Tseri  and  Hholem,  when  no  consonant  sound     ~ 
coalesces  with  them  ;  as  in  *Q;T  dd-bhdr,  tip  shem,  5a  Ml.     (2)  Long 
impure  vowels  ;  such  are  Hhireq  magnum  and  Shureq  always,  and  such 
all  the  long  vowels  may  be  ;    e.  g.  *V*2  nir,  tnp  qum;   and  also  as  K2 
bd,  "p3  ben,  bip  qol.     (3)  All  the  short  vowels  may  be  made  long  in 
quantity  (while  their  usual  form  is  preserved),  by  coalescence  with  a 
suppressed  dagesh'd  letter,  or  with  a  Quiescent ;    see  the  illustrations 
under  §  29. 

The  question  naturally  arises  here,  whether  there  was  any  practical  difference 
in  the  sounds  of  these  different  classes  of  long  vowels,  either  in  respect  to  length 
or  quality  of  sound.  But  this  is  one  which  cannot  now  be  solved  with  any  good 
degree  of  certainty.  One  is  easily  inclined  to  suppose,  that  the  vowels  naturally 
long  were  made  very  long  by  the  coalescence  of  a  consonant  with  them.  Again, 
we  may  naturally  suppose,  that  the  short  vowels  which  become  long  by  coales- 
cence with  a  consonant,  but  still  retain  their  usual  form  (as  in  §  29),  were  pro- 
nounced somewhat  shorter  than  vowels  of  the  first  class  which  are  naturally  long.  f 
But  of  this  we  cannot  be  certain,  inasmuch  as  the  Hebrew  has  been  a  dead  lan- 
guage for  so  long  a  period. 

§  31.  The  vowels  naturally  short,  which  become  long  whenever 
they  become  impure  (§  29),  may  be  compared  to  good  advantage  in 
some  respects,  by  the  student,  with  the  doubtful  or  rather  double-timed 


§§  32 — 35.  vowels  :  miscellaneous  remarks.  23 

vowels  of  the  Greek,  a,  i,  v7  whose  quantity  must  be  discovered  by 
etymology,  poetic  usage,  etc.,  and  cannot  be  known  from  mere  appear- 
ance. The  beginner  will  be  embarrassed,  at  first,  in  respect  to  the 
diagnosis  of  the  impure  vowels  of  this  class,  because  they  retain  their 
usual  form.  Yet  etymology  and  a  moderate  acquaintance  with  the 
usages  and  forms  of  the  Hebrew  will  soon  overcome  this  difficulty. 

§  32.  The  like  embarrassment  will  often  happen,  in  respect  to  the 
proper  long  vowels  in  Hebrew.  By  turning  to  §  63,  the  reader  will 
see  that  Quiescents  which  might  be  written,  and  which  actually  coa- 
lesce with  the  preceding  vowels,  are  often  omitted,  so  that  the  appear- 
ance is  the  same  as  if  the  long  vowels  were  pure ;  e.  g.  "13  =^2 , 
l?p=bip,etc.  The  power  of  recognizing  such  cases  is  acquired 
gradually,  and  only  in  the  way  already  stated  with  regard  to  the  double- 
timed  vowels. 

§  33.  The  student  will  perhaps  feel  some  difficulty,  when  he  per- 
ceives that  in  the  table  of  the  vowels  Seghol  is  put  among  both  the  first 
and  second  class  of  vowels.  The  simple  reason  or  ground  of  this  is, 
that  Seghol  often  takes  the  place  of  Qamets  or  Pattahh  as  well  as  the 
place  of  Tseri,  and  so  is  treated  as  belonging  to  both  these  classes  of 
vowels  ;  see  §  19.  What  the  language  itself  has  done,  cannot  be  alter- 
ed by  the  grammarian. 

He  will  also  find  it  difficult  to  distinguish  Qamets.Hhateph  (,  )  i.  e. 
short  O,  from  Qamets  (  t  )  i.  e.  long  A.  For  rules  which  will  enable  him 
to  do  this,  he  is  referred  to  §  68seq. 

§  34.    Even  in  English  we  may  find  a  multitude  of  quiescent  letters, 

as  well  as  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  in  show,  day,  wrong,  right,  done,  none, 

save,  hate,  etc.  etc.     We  might  say,  if  there  were  any  advantage  to  be 

gained  by  it,  that  such  quiescent  letters  become  so  in  consequence  of 

being  preceded  by  certain  other  letters,  or  quantities  of  sound.     But 

we  should  soon  find,  that  the  Hebrew  is  quite  an  orderly  language, 

compared  with  our  own,  if  we  should  undertake  to  make  out  a  set  of 

such  rules ;  for  in  Hebrew  they  are,  for  the  most  part,  easily  made  out ; 

see  §  53  seq.  §  58  seq.     In  English  both  vowels  and  consonants  often 

quiesce,  and  when  quiescent  they  often  affect  the  quantity,  and  even 

the  sound  of  the  preceding  vowel ;  e.  g.  do'nt  for  do  not,  hate  omitting 

the  e  is  hat,  etc.     One  who  speaks  and  well  understands  the  English 

language,  can  scarcely  wonder  at  the  usage  of  quiescent  and  coalescent 

letters  among  the  Hebrews. 

§  35.  No  theory  of  the  Hebrew  vowels  has  ever  yet  been  broached,  which  is 
not  liable  to  some  objections.  Almost  all  beginners  complain  of  this  part  of  He- 
brew Grammar  as  complicated  and  difficult.  It  is  somewhat  so  ;  and  yet  far  less 
so  than  the  vowels  in  our  own  mother  tongue,  or  in  the  Greek  language.    The 


24  §§  36—39.  vowels:  as  affecting  syllables. 

relation  of  long  and  short  with  respect  to  Hebrew  vowels,  is  for  us,  indeed,  more 
a  matter  of  theory  than'of  practice.  In  this  light,  however,  it  is  very  important 
to  the  student,  who,  without  understanding  this  theory  well,  cannot  analyze  with 
satisfaction  or  success  great  numbers  of  changes  in  the  forms  of  Hebrew  words. 
Hebrew  grammars  in  general  have  not  at  all  recognized  the  fact,  that  both  Quies- 
cents  and  suppressed  daghesh'd  letters  coalesce  with  the  preceding  vowel  and 
lengthen  it  and  make  it  impure,  on  principles  which  are  in  all  important  respects 
substantially  the  same.  The  principle  at  the  basis  of  every  possible  case  of  this 
nature  is  very  simple,  viz.  that  a  consonant,  suppressed  in  sound,  finds  its  equiva- 
lent in  the  preceding  vowel  by  augmenting  its  length.  That  Quiescents  and  Guttu- 
rals are,  in  general,  the  only  classes  of  letters  which  are  subject  to  the  law  of 
suppression,  belongs  to  the  nature  of  the  language.  The  development  of  facts 
respecting  these  phenomena,  belongs  to  grammar.  If  a  student  understands  well 
the  distinction  between  pure  and  impure  vowels,  and  between  long  and  short  ones, 
he  need  not  trouble  himself  to  inquire  how  long  the  Hebrews  dwelt  on  the  sounds 
of  the  one  or  the  other.  If  he  complains  that  the  system  is  complicated,  he  will 
remember  that  it  belongs  to  the  language,  which  cannot  be  altered  in  order  to  adapt 
it  to  our  wishes.  He  should  not,  therefore,  charge  complication  upon  Hebrew 
grammar,  which  does  no  more  than  to  state  facts  as  they  are. 

Syllabication  as  affected  by  the  Vowels. 

§  36.    Pure  long  vowels   usually  stand  only  in  a  simple 

syllable  ;#  they  are  employed  in  a  mixed  one,f  only  when 

it  is  accented. 

E.  g.  -D1}  dd-bhdr,  'iBb  se-pher ;  ]\Z3  shen,  "Shpi  yiq-tol. 
§  47.  The  same  is  true  of   impure  long  vowels  which 
have  a  quiescent  in  them. 

E.  g.  tfa  bd,  mpr  qdm ;  Jib-]  gde,  "pa  ben ;  ^  tt,rrf>  nlr ;  ft  Id,  bip 
qol;  HJOIp  qu-mu,  Mp  qum. 

§  38.     But  vowels  lengthened  by  a  daghesh'd    letter 

suppressed,  can  stand  only  in  a  simple  syllable. 

E.  g.  *l%%  bd-rekh,  brj3  ne-hdl,  -f^S  bd-rakh;  bfi5,  tirtt,  ytj^;  all 
with  the  first  vowel  impure  because  it  coalesces  with  a  suppressed  da- 
ghesh'd letter,  and  all  with  the  same  in  a  simple  syllable. 

§  39.     The  proper  short  vowels  may  stand  either  in  a 
mixed  or  simple  syllable. 

E.  g.  in  mixed  syllables ;  as  in  b^  ddl,  fSi  ben,  and  in  the  first  sylla- 
bles of  TVypft  miq-ne,  nttpfi  hhoJch-md,  -)tDpZ3  muq-tdr.  In  simple  syl- 
lables; as  in  the  first  syllables  of  ^b  me-lekh,  "\$\  nd-Vdr,  b3*2  vdy- 
yi-ghel,  ibtiN  #o-h°ld..  But  Qibbuts  is  not  employed  in  a  simple  syl- 
lable unless  it  be  vicarious  or  impure.     In  the  latter  case,  i.  e.  when  it 

*  A  simple  syllable  is  one  which  ends  in  a  vowel-sound.  It  matters  not 
whether  the  vowel  is  pure  or  impure. 

t  A  mixed  syllable  is  one  which  ends  in  a  consonant-sound. 


$§  40 — 45.  sheva.  25 


is  long,  it  may  stand  either  in  a  mixed  syllable,  as  in  bt3£  (for  Vlttj?), 
or  in  a  simple  syllable,  as  in  ^33j?  (for  Ifclp). 

§  40.  Much  the  greater  number  of  syllables,  which 
are  not  final  ones,  end  in  a  vowel.  Very  few  mixed  syllables 
(not  final)  have  long  vowels  in  them;  none  unless  ac- 
cented. 

§  41.  For  the  particular  details  of  syllabication  and  of  reading  He- 
brew, the  student  is  referred  to  §  90  seq.,  where  he  will  find  them  ex- 
hibited at  length.  The  general  principles  here  exhibited  he  will  find 
to  be  of  importance  in  practice. 


SHEVA. 

§.  42.  The  Hebrews  never  amalgamated  two  or  more  consonant- 
sounds  together,  (as  we  do  in  plan,  stripe,  shrink,  etc.),  except  at  the 
end  of  a  word  ;  and  even  then  very  rarely,  and  never  to  the  extent  of 
more  than  two  letters.  In  a  multitude  of  cases  they  even  supplied  a 
furtive  vowel  in  the  final  syllable  of  words,  in  order  to  shun  the  amalga- 
mation of  two  consonants ;  e.  g.  for  -iBD  sephr,  they  wrote  and  read 
150  se-pher.  Still  they  admit,  in  a  few  cases,  such  forms  as  Ptt3£ 
qa-talt. 

§  43.  When  two  consonants  begin  a  syllable  they  are 
not  combined  in  one  sound,  but  a  very  short  vowel,  i.  e. 
a  kind  of  half-vowel,  is  supplied  after  the  first  letter,  in 
order  to  smooth  the  transition  to  the  second  letter.  This 
is  called  Sheva,  flTO  ;    and  a  Sheva  may  be  either  simple 

or  composite,  as  the   Table  of  Vowels  shews  in  No.  IV. 

Note.  Instead  of  saying  bra,  bre,  by  one  impetus  of  voice  as  we 
do,  the  Hebrews  pronounced  bera,  bere,  i.  e.  with  a  very  short  vowel- 
sound  between  the  two  consonants. 

§  44.  Shevas  usually  mark  either  the  beginning  or  the 
end  of  syllables. 

Note.  The  only  exception  is  a  Sheva  on  the  penult  letter  of  a  word, 
whose  final  syllable  ends  with  two  consonants  ;  as  fibBg  qa-talt. 

§  45.  (a)   All  syllables  beginning  with  two  consonants, 
4 


26  §§  46 — 48.  sheva  vocal  and  silent. 

have  a  Sheva  (either  simple  or  composite)  under  the  first 
of  them.  (6)  All  syllables  ending  with  one  or  two  vocal 
consonants,  take  a  Sheva  simple  (either  expressed  or  im- 
plied) under  them. 

§  46.  All  Shevas  at  the  beginning  of  syllables  are  vocal 
i.  e.  are  sounded ;  all  Shevas  at  the  end  are  silent.  Hence 
result  the  following  rules;  viz. 

Sheva  Vocal 

(a)  Such  are  the  composite  Shevas  ;  because  they  are  always  placed 
at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable.  (6)  Simple  Sheva,  after  a  simple  syl- 
lable ;  as  Sftaab  la-msdhd.  (c)  After  another  Sheva ;  as  !H5Db*  yil- 
mzdhu.  But  if  the  second  Sheva  be  at  the  end  of  a  word,  it  is  not 
vocal;  as  rn^b  la-mddht;  see  i  below,  (d)  Under  a  letter  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  word,  as  lab  hmodh.  (e)  Under  a  letter  with  Daghesh 
forte  expressed  ;  as  llnb,  km-medhu  =sitai7373b  ,  §71.  (f)  Under  a  letter 
in  which  a  Daghesh  forte  is  implied  ;  as  rfsbn  (=:lbl??i)  hal-hlu,  or  per- 
haps hd-hlu,  not  read  as  H*ti  hdl-lii. 

[Note.  The  common  maxim  of  grammarians  in  regard  to  the  case 
ft  is,  that  "  Sheva  is  always  vocal  when  under  a  letter  which  is  imme- 
diately repeated."  This  is  evidently  incorrect ;  e.  g.  '•'Tpil  har-re  (not 
har-rcre),  ^aab  Ubh-bhe  (not  lib-bfbhe),  and  so^bbri  (plur.  const,  of  bbtt) 
is  hhal-le,  not  hhal-lsle.  On  the  contrary,  ftbTl  reads  hal-Ulu,  because 
it  belongs  to  a  Daghesh'd  form  of  the  verb  bbn ,  and  the  Daghesh  is 
omitted  merely  from  the  frequent  usage  of  rejecting  it  from  a  letter 
when  it  would  be  immediately  followed  by  a  vocal  Sheva ;  see  §  73. 
Note  3.  Some  knowledge  of  Hebrew  forms  is  necessary,  in  order  to 
distinguish  such  cases.] 

Sheva  Silent. 

(g)  After  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable ;  as  Sftb"]  yil-mbdh. 
(h)  After  a  long  vowel  in  a  mixed  tone-syllable  ;  as  n:"l72bn  til~modh-nd. 
(i)  Two  Shevas  at  the  end  of  a  word  are  both  silent ;  ft'lEb  la-mddht. 

§  47.  The  form  of  all  the  Shevas  is  exhibited  fully  by  Table  IV. 
No.  IV.  The  composite  Shevas  are  so  called,  because  each  is  made 
by  a  union  of  Sheva  with  one  of  the  short  vowels;  as  is  evident  from 
inspection. 

§  48.    The  quantity  of  all  the  Shevas  is,  at  least  in  theory, 


§§  49—52.  sheva.  27 


the  same;  i.  e.  none  of  them  is  considered  as  a  proper 

vowel. 

E.  g.  1'p©  peqodh,  SrtJ  zahdbh,  "^  Kc/e,  "»bn  M°ft,  etc.,  are  all  con- 
sidered as  monosyllabic  words.  What  practical  difference  between  the 
length  of  the  respective  Sheva-sounds  existed  amongst  the  Hebrews, 
cannot  now  be  determined. 

§  49.  The  composite  Shevas  belong  appropriately  to 
the  Gutturals,  and  are  commonly  used  under  them  instead 
of  Simple  Sheva. 

Note.  No  definite  rules  can  be  given,  however,  as  to  the  kind  of 
Sheva  under  the  respective  Gutturals  ;  for  usage  varies  them  in  different 
words  which  have  the  same  letters,  and  in  different  positions.  In  gen- 
eral, n,  n,  9,  at  the  beginning  of  words  take  ( _, )  ;  but  N  takes  ( #<<  ). 

§  50.  Gutturals  (and  other  letters)  which  take  a  com- 
posite Sheva,  must  always  begin  a  syllable ;  §  46.  a.  A 
Guttural  which  ends  a  Syllable,  must,  like  the  other  conso- 
nants, take  Sheva  simple;  for  there  is  no  other  silent  Sheva. 

E.  g.  Waip  shd-md9-ti,  b^l  yehh-ddl,  narr  yeh-ge,  "vD^  yeto-sor. 

[§  51.  The  composite  Shevas  ( _. )  and  (t  )  occur,  not  unfrequently, 
under  most  of  the  other  consonants  besides  Gutturals ;  e.  g.  3fiT  zahdbh, 
fi'^'lp  q°dhd-shim}  etc.     But  (     )  is  limited  to  Gutturals. 

Note.  No  uniform  rules  can  be  given  for  such  cases.  The  general 
principle  seems  plainly  to  be,  a  design  to  mark  the  letter  which  takes  a 
composite  Sheva,  as  having  a  real  vocal  Sheva;  and  consequently  to 
advertise  the  reader,  that  the  preceding  vowel  is  not  to  attach  to  itself 
the  letter  to  which  the  Sheva  belongs  ;  e.  g.  nntl  u-zahabh,  not  uz-habh, 
rD^atn  hd-bhard-khd,  not  hdbh-rd-khd;  ?jbcinj  ti-malokh,  not  tim-lokh. 
There  can  scarcely  be  a  doubt,  that  all  such  Shevas  as  these  are  de- 
signed only  to  designate  some  peculiar  niceties  practised  in  oral 
enunciation.  They  cannot  be  considered  as  belonging  to  the  essential 
forms  of  words  ;  nor  can  they  be  reduced  to  rule.] 

§  52.  It  is  a  general  principle,  that  all  moveable  con- 
sonants   not  immediately  followed  by  a  vowel,  must  have 

a  Sheva  of  some  kind,  either  expressed  or  implied. 

At  the  end  of  words  in  general,  Sheva  is  not  usually  expressed  but 
only  implied ;  e.  g.  B£  qdm,  the  same  as  Dj5  .     The  exceptions  to  this 

*  A  moveable  consonant  is  one  which  is  sounded,  and  does  not  quiesce  or 
coalesce . 


28         [§§  53,  54.    COALESCENCE    OP   VOWELS   AND    QUIESCENTS. 

rule  are,  (1)  In  a  final  Kaph  ;  as  ^20.  (2)  When  the  final  syllable 
ends  with  two  consonants,  as  PHttb  la-madht ;  but  here,  in  case  the 
penult  consonant  is  a  Guttural,  this  consonant  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive 
instead  of  a  Sheva  simple  ;  §  233.  Note. 

Note  1.  The  Quiescents,  when  they  coalesce  with  the  preceding 
vowel,  have  no  Sheva ;  §  53.  Whenever  these  letters  have  a  Sheva, 
they  are  to  be  regarded  as  moveable  consonants. 

Note  2.  When  a  word  ends  with  two  consonants,  of  which  the 
first  is  a  Quiescent,  usage  is  various  as  to  Sheva  under  the  Jinal  letter  ; 
e.  g.  we  find  both  ntfa  and  ntt3 . 

General  Remarks.  There  can  be  but  little  doubt,  that  the  composite  Shevas  were  more  dis- 
tinctly sounded  than  the  simple  ones.  Hence  their  application  to  the  Gutturals,  which  peculiarly 
needed  more  vowel  aid  to  enounce  them  than  other  consonants.  Hence  too  their  use  in  regard  to 
other  letters,  for  the  sake  of  more  distinct  pronunciation;  $  51.  Note.  But  the  niceties  of  living 
vernacular  pronunciation  are  now  lost ;  most  of  them  no  more  to  be  recalled.  Present  general 
usage  among  Hebrew  scholars,  is  all  that  is  aimed  at  in  this  grammar. 


b 


COALESCENCE  OF  VOWELS  AND  QUIESCENTS. 

To  such  a  coalescence  the  preceding  explanations  have  rendered  it  necessary  to  advert.    It 
must  now  be  more  fully  explained. 

§  53.  The  sound  of  the  quiescent  letters,  tf,  Tl,  %  \ 
being  feeble,  (specially  at  the  end  of  a  syllable),  they  al- 
ways coalesce  with  the  vowel-sound  which  precedes  them, 
in  case  they  have  no  vowel  of  their  own,  nor  any  Sheva 
expressed  or  implied;  i.  e.  such  coalescence  takes  place, 
provided  that  such  vowel-sound  is  homogeneous. 

§  54.     The  following  table  exhibits  the  coalescence  of  the  respective 
Quiescents,  with  their  homogeneous  vowels. 

Aleph  (tf)  quiesces  in  Qamets  (_  )  as  in  fi<2  ba. 

-  Tseri      (__  ) ©Hi  resh. 

-Seghol   (_) WaSlEn  tfm-tse-na. 

-Hholem(l)-   -  l!Q^y6-mer. 

YodhO)                 -Tseri      (_)  -   -  '"psben. 

-Seghol  (_) tf^ge. 

-Hhireq  (_  ) *p^din. 

That  vowel  sound  is  called  hqmoge?ieoys,  which  is  adapted  to  coalesce  with 
the  Quiescents  respectively  ;  that"  is  called  heterogeneous,  which  is  not  adapted 
to  coalesce.  "         ""- 


§§  54 56.    COALESCENCE    OF    VOWELS    AND    QUIESCENTtL.  29 

Vav  0)  quiesces  in  Hholem  (l)  as  in  *?ip  qol. 

-Shureq      p)  -    -  Dip  qum. 

He  (fi)        —      -Qamets    (_) hfe  g«la. 

-Tseri      fcj) n§[gdt 

-Seghol    (_)-   -  n^go-le. 

-  Hholem  (1 )  -    -  •  n  78  ga-lo. 

In  English  we  have  a  multitude  of  cases  similar  to  these;  e.  g.  low,  show,  etc.,  with  w  quies- 
cent ;  say,  day,  etc.,  with  y  quiescent.  Almost  every  letter  in  our  alphabet  is,  in  some  situations, 
quiescent  before  or  after  some  other  letter. 

Note  1.  There  are  some  other  cases  besides  those  presented  in  the 
above  Table,  of  which  quiescence  has  been  affirmed  by  most  gramma- 
rians ;  e.  g.  "pttittn  ri-shon,  n&npb  Tiq-rath,  fnttS  pu-rd.  But  here  K 
is  otiant,  and  does  not  quiesce  in  Hhireq,  Pattahli,  and  Qibbuts ;  and 
so  elsewhere,  see  §  118  with  the  Notes. 

Note  2.  Although  the  Hholem  is  written  over  the  1,  as  in  T  ;  and 
the  Shureq  is  written  in  it,  as  1 ;  yet  in  both  cases  these  vowels  usually 
belong  to  the  preceding  consonant;  e.  g.  in  bip  to  the  p,  in  Wp  to  the 
p.  Cases  like  "p?  2d-vdn  occur ;  but  they  are  easily  distinguished, 
because  the  letter  preceding  the  1  has  then  a  vowel  of  its  own,  inde- 
pendently of  that  connected  with  the  % 

§  55.  The  sound  of  the  Quiescents,  in  case  of  coales- 
cence, is  not  lost,  but  united  with  the  preceding  vowel ;  so 
that  it  makes  such  vowels  protracted. 

§  56.    The  Ehevi  Oliltt)  retain  their  proper  consonant 

power,  i.  e.  do  not  quiesce,  (l)  Always  at  the  beginning 

of  a  syllable. 
E.  g.  IttN  tod-mar,  Qn  hem,  lb*  yd-ladh,  1^}  ve-ledh. 

(2)  Always  when  they  end  a  syllable,  in  case  they 
have  a  simple  Sheva  under  them  either  expressed  or  im- 
plied. 

E.  g.  *\OW  yeto-sor,  ^5H3  neh-pakh,  "Wjbtt?  shd-lav-ti,  *n  hhay,  7J2. 
gav.  In  the  two  last  cases,  the  Sheva  is  implied,  i.  e.  *rt=1  %  and  ")£ 
=]P ;  see  §  52. 

(3)  Usually,  when  preceded  by  a  heterogeneous  vowel. 
E.  g.  *3  tdv,  *j>  qdv,  l^ttf  shd-lev,  IT  ziv,  *»r]  hhay,  nia  goy,  *$% 

ga-luy,  tpp  qdy-yem,  tanp  qav-vdm,  etc.     In  all  cases  of  this  kind,  it 
is  easy  to  judge  whether  the  Ehevi  quiesce  or  are  moveable,  by  the 


. 


30  §§  57,  58.  otium  of  the  ehevi,  etc. 

nature  of  the  preceding  vowel.  See  further  on  the  Quiescents,  § 
1 15  seq. 

Note  1.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  the  Ehevi  are  always  marked 
with  a  Sheva  in  case  they  are  moveable ;  at  the  end  of  a  word,  as  Sheva 
is  not  written  (§  52),  one  must  judge  from  the  nature  of  the  vowel 
which  precedes,  whether  the  Ehevi  are  quiescent  or  not. 

Note  2.  In  the  middle  of  words,  all  the  Ehevi  not  unfrequently  re- 
sist coalescence,  i.  e.  remain  moveable.  He  (n)  always  resists  it, 
when  in  such  a  condition,  as  in  bti2  bd-hdl;  and  N  sometimes,  even 
when  the  vowel  is  adapted  to  coalescence,  as  in  "{ONI  ye&sor.  At 
the  end  of  words,  all  the  Ehevi  generally  (not  all  of  them  uniformly) 
coalesce,  unless  the  preceding  vowel  is  heterogeneous.  Compare  §. 
119  b.  §  120.  b.  §  121.6. 

Otium  of  the  Ehevi. 

§  57,  There  are  some  cases,  in  which  the  Ehevi  are 
neither  moveable  consonants,  nor  coalescent  with  prece- 
ding vowels.      They  are  then  said  to  be   otiant,  {in  olio, 

otiaritur.) 

This  happens  in  the  following  cases,  viz.  (a)  When  preceded  by 
sifent  Sheva ;  as  Ntttt  Met,  "TOR  Hat.  (b)  Preceded  by  a  Quiescent ; 
as  nfiOSii  he-bhe-thd,  with  tt  otiant.  (c)  Followed  by  Daghesh  forte  ; 
as  tiT~H72  mdz-ze  =  JTT73  .  (d)  Yodh  preceded  by.  Qamets  and  fol- 
lowed by  T  with  a  Sheva  implied,  is  otiant;  as  "T*ttW  dtbhd-rdv,  where 
Sheva  is  implied  under  the  final  1,  §  52. 

NOTE.  In  such  cases  the  otiant  letter  is  mostly  (not  always)  retained,  out  of  regard  to  or- 
thography, and  to  indicate  the  etymology  of  the  word.  So  in  a  multitude  of  cases  in  English,  we 
have  otiant  vowels  :  as  in  honour,  hear,  moan,  etc. 

Coalescence  of  Vowels  with  Daghesh'd  letters  omitted. 
§  58.  The  Gutturals  and  Resh  scarcely  ever  admit  Da- 
ghesh, i.e.  reduplication;  §71.  §  111.  In  cases  where  by 
analogy  they  ought  to  be  doubled  but  are  not,  the  letter 
omitted  by  excluding  the  Daghesh,  coalesces  with  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  and  lengthens  it ;  §  29.  §  30.  2. 

E.  g.  y  y$n  hd-M-retsy  instead  of  If  ytm  ha8-8d-rets  ;  -tiglj*  ye-Hd- 
mer,  instead  of  *\ft'81  yiK-8d-mer ;  brte  bd-hel,  with  Pattahh  impure 
(§  29),  instead  of  bttS  bdh-hel;  brp  bi-hel  with  Hhireq  impure  (§  29), 
instead  of  bna  bih-hel;  d^fttf  Ha-hhim  with  Pattahh  impure  (§  29),  in- 
stead of  fc^RN  Sahh-hhim;  DM  ni-hhdm  with  Hhireq  impure  (§  29),  in- 


§§59 — 61.  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  VOWELS.  31 

stead  of  Cn:  nihh-hhdm;  *Wgj  bd-$er  (§  29),  instead  of  T^jgg  ba$-9er; 
D2»  me-Sim,  instead  of  D*55D  mis-Vim  ;  *p2  be-rekh,  instead  of  -n^ 
bir-rekh;  -pis  bd-rekh,  instead  of  -]^2  bar-rekh,  etc.  Comp.  §  111. 
§112. 

Note.  In  regard  to  this  usage  it  is  plain,  that  an  excluded  daghesh'd 
letter  lengthens  the  quantity  of  the  preceding  vowel ;  for  in  some  cases 
this  is  expressed  by  using  a  vowel  long  by  nature  instead  of  a  short  one, 
as  ^*]2  for  ?y"5ja .  When  in  other  cases  the  form  of  a  doubtful  vowel 
remains,  the  quantity  of  it  is  of  course  long,  §  29. 

To  give  reasons  why  a  double-timed  vowel  is  at  one  time  used,  and  at  another  a  vowel  long  by 
nature,  before  the  Gutturals  excluding  Daghesh,  is  out  of  our  power.    The  fact  is  palpable. 

[§  59.  Some  other  letters  occasionally  omit  Daghesh,  with 

a  similar  effect  (for  the  most  part)  on  the  preceding  vowel. 

E.  g.  "TPJ  vd-yehi,  instead  of  TIM  vay-yihi.  But  it  is  doubtful  how 
such  cases  as  *np^  (for  'inp'?)  were  read;  i.  e.  whether  they  were  pro- 
nounced yi-qthhu  or  yiq-hhu.  The  probability  is,  that  there  was  a  va- 
riety of  pronunciation  ;  for  some  of  them  are  marked  with  a  Methegh 
(§  85),  as  W  (for  ^n^i) ;  some  with  composite  Sheva,  as  nrijsb  lu- 
q°hhd  (for  JinpV) ;  both  of  which  show  that  the  first  syllable  is  to  be 
read  as  a  simple  one,  vd-yehi,  lu-q°hhd  ;  and  so  of  others  like  them.  But 
some  words  have  neither  of  these  marks,  e.  g.  inp?  (for  'inp?) ;  and  in 
such  cases  they  are  probably  to  be  read  as  ihjj^  yiq-hhu,  etc.  The 
omission  of  Daghesh,  in  all  such  instances,  seems  to  have  respect  only 
to  the  niceties  of  pronunciation  in  regard  to  a  few  words  ;  which  nice- 
ties the  Punctators  strove  to  express.  It  does  not  belong  to  the  essen- 
tial form  of  words.] 


ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  VOWELS, 

§  60.  The  two  first  classes  of  vowels  are  all  written  under 

the  consonants ;  with  the  exception  that  Qamets  is  written  in 

the  bosom  of  a  final  Kaph,  e.  g.  ^  kha,  see  table  No.  IV.    Of 

the  third  class,  Qibbuts  also  is  written  under  them;     but 

Hholem  is  written  over,  and  Shureq  in  them. 

§  61.  The  proper  place  of  a  vowel  is  under  or  over  the  middle,  or 
(as  they  are  now  printed)  the  right  side,  of  a  consonant.  Shureq  is  al- 
ways written  after  the  consonant  to  which  it  belongs,  i.  e.  in  the  bosom 
of  the  following  T .  Hholem  is  commonly  written  over  the  right  side  of 
the  letter  next  following  that  to  which  it  belongs,  as  tin  torn,  bip  qol; 


32  §§  62 — 64.  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

but  sometimes  necessity  prevents  this,  e.  g.  in  u^p,  where  the  type  will 
not  admit  such  a  disposition  of  the  Hholem.  Hholem,  when  it  follows 
N,  is  commonly  written  over  its  left  side,  as  bON;  but  not  if  followed 
by  1,  as  ^DIK. 

§  62.  The  diacritical  point  over  to  and  XD  often  coincides 
with  Hholem  ;  in  which  case  it  serves  the  double  purpose  of 
marking  the  vowel  and  of  distinguishing  the  letter. 

(1)  Sin  (  il) )  beginning  a  syllable,  is  read  so ;  e.  g.  trato  so-ne.     (2) 

33  following  a  consonant  that  has  no  vowel,  contains  a  Hholem  for  that 
consonant,  and  also  marks  sh;  e.  g.  jTRSJa  mo-she.  (3)  iz$  with  two 
points  beginning  a  syllable,  is  read  sho ;  e.  g.  ^5flft)  sho-mer.  (4)  ft) 
with  two  points  ending  a  syllable,  is  read  05;  e.  g.  tt5s*i?  yir-pos. 

Note.  Vav  ("))  with  a  Hholem  over  it  and  a  vowel  under  it,  is  join- 
ed as  a  moveable  consonant  with  the  vowel  under  it ;  e.  g.  fiib  lo-vef 
tiiiT]  ytho-vd,  the  Hholem  belonging  to  the  preceding  letter. 

Vowels  in  connection  with  the  Quiescents. 
§63.  AstheEhevi  or  Quiescents  drop  their  distinct  con- 
sonant-sound in  coalescence  (§  53),  and  the  words  with  vowel- 
points  are  sounded  in  the  same  manner  whether  the  Quies- 
cents are  omitted  or  inserted,  so,  in  practice,  thej  are  often 
omitted. 

Note.  Words  in  which  the  Quiescents  are  inserted,  are  said  to  be 
written  fully ;  those  in  which  they  are  omitted,  to  be  written  defectively. 
In  both  cases,  the  pronunciation  and  quantity  of  the  vowels  remain 
the  same ;  as  the  following  example  will  shew. 

Written  fully.  Written  defectively.  Read. 

*na£»  *»n^  md-U-thi, 

*\**2  ^:  nir. 

bip  b'p  qol 

OTEj?  073  j?  qd-mus. 

§  64.  There  are  some  cases  in  which  Vav  and  Yodh  (particularly 
the  former)  are  inserted,  when  they  are  not  proper  Quiescents,  and 
have  no  influence  on  the  sound  or  the  nature  of  the  vowel.  In  all 
these  cases,  they  are  considered  as  mere  orthographic  fulcra. 

E.  g.  "tfjMp.i  the  same  as  *ioh^m  yil-modh;  i^lb,  the  same  as  513  b 
so-bhebh;    ^n  ,  the  same  as  "^n  hhuq-qe  ;  comp.  §  25.  Notes  3,  4. 

In  all  probability  such  forms  sprung  from  the  practice  of  employing  Vav  and  Yodh  as  vowel- 
letters,  §  15.  How  to  distinguish  such  cases  from  those  where  Vav  and  Yodh  are  employed  as 
true  Quiescents,  etymology  only  can  teach  ;  and  with  a  knowledge  of  this,  it  is  very  easy. 


65,  06.    ORTHOGRAPHY  OP  QAMETS  HHATBPH.         33 


§  65.  No  certain  rule  can  be  given  for  the  insertion  or  omission  of 
Quiescents,  when  there  is  a  real  coalescence.  More  generally,  when 
two  syllables  are  immediately  connected  in  both  of  which  there  is  a 
Quiescent,  the  first  syllable  omits  it ;  e.  g.  p^K ,  tTp'TS.  But  instan- 
ces of  a  contrary  usage  also  exist ;  e.  g.  ribTp^rhb'ip  ;  and  sometimes 
both  Quiescents  are  omitted,  as  UXb'E  for  D""*)"^  5  s0  ^:.  f°r  "i"1?  >  etc- 
Even  the  same  word  is  variously  written ;  e.  g.  ""hlJFpiur  ,  "^rnftpSri, 
"•nb^gfl  >  Tibpn  >  all  pronounced  haqi-mo-thi. 

Orthography  of  Qamets  Hhateph. 

From  No.  IV.  in  the  Table  of  Vowels  it  appears,  that  Qamets  Hhateph  (short  o)  has  the  same 
form  with  Qamets,  viz.  (  ).  It  is  important,  therefore,  to  point  out  how  they  may  be  distin- 
guished. 

I.  Qamets  Hhateph  in  a  mixed  syllable. 

§  66.  (a)  The  figure  (T  )  followed  by  simple  Sheva  with- 
out any  Methegh  between,  is  short  O,  if  in  a  syllable  not  ac- 
cented. 

E.  g.  nD3h  hhokh-md,  not  hhd-khtmd.  But  with  a  Methegh  it  reads 
thus,  nttDft  hhd-khemd.  With  an  accent  it  reads  as  Clamets ;  e.  g. 
ttni.»  mdv-td,  finvj  shdv,  rf^jS  lay-la.  For  an  account  of  the  Methegh, 
see  §  85. 

[Note.  There  are  some  few  cases  where  Methegh  does  not  dis- 
tinguish Clamets  from  short  O  ;  e.  g.  rrisin-rr  dor-bho-noth,  not  dhd- 
nbho-noth;  so  "jS^jJ  gor-bdn,  not  qd-rebhdn  ';  n"n73'£  shom-rd  not  sha- 
merd.  But  in  these  and  the  Tike  cases,  manuscripts  and  editions  vary 
as  to  the  Methegh,  which  must  be  considered  as  irregular  here.  Of 
course,  etymology  only  can  settle  the  true  pronunciation  in  doubtful 
cases.] 

(b)   When  followed  by  a  letter  with  Daghesh  forte,  in  a 

syllable  not  accented,  (t  )  is  short  O 

E.  g.  D^na  bot-tim,  *33tl  hhon-ne-ni.  If  the  syllable  is  accented,  it 
is  read  as  long  A  ;  e.  g.  fTSD^  yam-ma,  HTS?  lam-ma,  etc. 

[Note  1.  A  euphonic  Daghesh  (§  75  seq.)  at  the  beginning  of  a  word, 
does  not  make  short  O  of  the  (J  belonging  to  the  last  syllable  of  the 
preceding  word ;  it  remains  long  A  still ;  e.  g.  ^3  nED'E  ,  read  shd-khan- 
tdb-bo.  But  this  is  merely  a  euphonic  matter,  ana  is  contrary  to  the 
laws  of  the  language  in  general. 

Note  2.  A  Methegh  after  (  )  does  not  in  this  case  always  denote 
long  A  ;  e.  g.  ESPFfi  bot-te-kheni,  not  bd-te-khem.  See  the  note  under 
a  above,  where  the  principle  is  the  same.  Etymology  only  can  deter- 
mine such  cases.] 

5 


34  <§§  67 69.    QAMETS   HHATEPH,    ETC. 

(c)  The  figure  (T)  in  a  final  mixed  syllable  unaccented ,is 

short  0. 

E.g.  EpT\l  vay-yd-qdm,  with  accent  on  the  penult.  With  accent 
on  the  ultimate,  as  in  Qntfrr  hd-Xd-dhdm,  the  (  t  )  ultimate  is  long  A. 

Remark.  All  the  cases,  a,  b,  c,  are  virtually  one  and  the  same,  i.  e. 
they  are  all  cases  of  (Jina  mixed  unaccented  syllable  ;  e.  g.  JlftSTl 
hhokh-md,  bnn2!=D?£iri3  bot-tim,  D£*1=D£*t1  vay-yd-qdm,  all  virtually 
the  same  as  the  case  exhibited  under  the  letter  a  above. 

II.  Q.amets  Hhateph  in  a  simple  syllable. 

§67.  The  figure  '(„)  1S  short  O  in  a  simple  syllable, 
(«)  WhenQamets  Hhateph,  i.e.  short  O,  immediately  fol- 
lows. 

E.  g.  *jb*B  pd-$dl-khd,  ^ttj?T  qo-tobh-Jchd.  Here  a  Methegh  always 
stands  after  the  first  short  o. 

Note.  Bat  there  are  cases  here,  where  etymology  only  can  distin- 
guish the  true  vowel ;  e.  g.  "^tajS  qd-ton-ni  (with  Methegh  according  to 
§  87.  e) ;  not  qo-ton-ni,  because  the  root  is  ]bj3  qd-ton. 

(b)    When  the  composite  Sheva,  Hhateph  Qamets(T.) 

immediately  follows. 

E.  g.  ib^S  pb-Vlo,  "'"iHS  bd-hh°ri.  Methegh  always  stands  after  the 
(    )  here  also. 

[Note.  Etymology  alone  can  determine  the  reading  in  some  of 
these  cases.  E.  g.  n^Nn  hd-&°niy-yd,  because  T\  is  the  article  (§  162. 
§  152.  a.  2);  FFsNa  bd-8°niy-yd,  because  3  has  the  article  included 
in  it  (§  152.  Note) ;  r"P2N3  bd-$°niy-yd,  because  3  is  the  simple  prepo- 
sition 3 ,  §  139. 

§  68.  The  nouns  E^pno  sho-rd-shim  (from  '£■?.#)*  ana*  ^^IR  9°- 
dhd-shim  (from  "«2np),  are  altogether  anomalous  in  their  reading.] 


PATTAHH   FURTIVE. 

§  69.  This  is  a  short  Pattahh,  employed  for  the  sake  of 
ease  and  euphony,  when  a  word  has  either  of  the  Gutturals, 
tt ,'  t$ »  9 »  at  the  end  of  its  final  syllable,  preceded  by  a  long 
vowel  not  of  the  A  class.  /,  £,  /frt-fcT"  "*"* 

E.g.  ni  33  gd-bhoah,  rvr\  ruahh,  j*S  reff*.     In  order  to  pronounce 
these,  lay  the  stress  of  the  voice  on  the  proper  vowel,  and  just  touch 


/. £.  JiIum  m±d  iu     «rV~" 


tv 


§§  70 73.    DACHESH    FORTE.  35 


the  Pattahh  ;  somewhat  as  a  in  the  English  words  trial,  vial,  etc.  The 
furtive  Pattahh  is  sounded  before  the  final  consonant.  As  it  is  merely 
a  euphonic  help,  and  belongs  not  to  the  essential  form  of  the  word,  so 
it  falls  away  as  soon  as  the  syllable  in  which  it  stands  changes  its  rela- 
tive position  ;  e.  g.  rwn  ruahh,  plur.  nim^l  ru-hhoth. 

Note.  Aleph,  when  at  the  end  of  a  word,  never  takes  Pattahh  fur- 
tive. Pattahh  furtive  is  seldom  employed  unless  the  vowel  that  imme- 
diately precedes  it  is  of  an  immutable  nature.  When  it  is  mutable,  the 
usual  method  is  to  exchange  it  for  a  common  Pattahh,  in  which  case 
Pattahh  furtive  is  superseded;  comp.  §  113.  notes  1,  2. 


DAGHESH. 

§  70.  Daghesh  (COT)  *s  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  a  letter. 
It  serves  two  purposes ;  ( 1 )  To  double  a  letter.  (2)  To  re- 
move its  aspiration. 

§  71.  When  Daghesh  serves  to  double  the  letter  in  which 
it  is  written,  it  is  called  Daghesh  forte.  When  it  only  re- 
moves aspiration,  it  is  called  Daghesh  lene. 

Note.  For  another  peculiar  kind  of  Daghesh  forte,  called  Daghesh 
euphonic,  see  §  75. 

/.  Daghesh  forte.  M  I  1 
§  72.  (a)  Dagheshforte  distinguished  from  Daghesh  lene. 
The  former  is  never  written  in  the  final  letter  of  a  word,  un- 
less such  letter  has  a  vowel ;  nor  in  the  first  letter,  (although 
Daghesh  euphonic  appears  here) ;  and  it  is  always  immediate- 
ly preceded  by  a  vowel-sound. 

Note.  This  last  circumstance  separates  it  entirely  from  Daghesh 
lene ;  which  is  preceded  immediately  by  a  silent  Sheva.  If  at  any  time 
a  vowel  immediately  precedes  a  Daghesh  lene,  that  vowel  must  be  at 
the  end  of  a  preceding  word,  and  this  word  have  a  disjunctive  accent 
(§  93).     Comp.  §  79.  3. 

§73.  (Jb)  Orthography  of  Dagheshforte.  When  the  same 
letter  is  to  be  repeated,  and  the  first  one  takes  a  silent  Sheva, 
it  is  the  usual  practice  to  designate  it  by  the  point  Daghesh 
forte;  e.g.  ^£=^I?Dj?  qit-tel. 


36  §§  74,  75.    DAGHESH    FORTE. 


[Note  1.  Still  there  are  many  cases  of  a  different  orthography, 
which  may  be  called  plenary.  E.  g.  ibbs  tsil-lo,  instead  of  iViS ;  D^TTttS^ 
for  fi'TttP  ytshod-dem,  etc. ;  particularly  in  derived  forms  of  words,  as 
nbrp  (not  rtep)  from  Inbbp ,  etc.,  in  which  cases  Daghesh  forte  is  not 
used. 
~y~-  Note  2.  If  the  first  of  the  two  letters  must  have  a  Sheva  vocal, 
\       Daghesh  forte  is  excluded  ;  e.  g.  D^J?b>  So-Ulim,  not  tftft  ol-lim.] 

Note  3.  Practice  not  unfrequently  omits  Daghesh  forte,  when  it 
would  be  immediately  followed  by  a  vocal  Sheva  in  case  it  were  inserted; 
e.  g.  nnp";  yiq-hhic,  instead  of  Trip  yiq-qehhii.  Particularly  is  Daghesh 
omitted  in  such  cases,  if  another  letter  of  the  same  kind  immediately 
follows ;  as  sfcbn ;  hd-Ulu  (not  hal-lu)  because  the  word  stands  for 
l3&?| ;  which  can  be  known,  however,  only  by  etymology.  Comp.  § 
46./.  Note. 

Note  4.  Shureq  is  written  in  the  same  manner  as  Daghesh  forte, 
in  the  letter  1  ;  e.  g.  1 .  But  it  is  easily  distinguished.  When  the  pre- 
ceding letter  has  no  vowel,  the  point  stands  for  Shureq;  when  it  has 
one,  it  stands  for  Daghesh  forte ;  e.  g.  Blp  is  read  qum,  but  W  p>  is 
sounded  qiv-vdm.] 

[§  74.  (c)  Division  of  Daghesh  forte.  ( 1)  It  is  compensa- 
tive, i.  e.  it  merely  supplies  a  letter  omitted  in  the  writing. 

E.  g.  »srj3  nd-thdn-nii  for  12:n: ,  SJj^  yig-gash  for  V&S*  (§  107.  a), 
where  3  is  assimilated. 

(2)  Characteristic,  i.  e.  it  distinguishes  the  particular  form 
of  a  word.  ?*$& 

E.  g.  bap  ,  the  form  of  the  conjugation  Picl,  in  distinction  from  bt3£ 
the  form  in  Kal.    /.£./•*!•  V^?S> 

Note.  In  na  a£,  probably  for'  n:tf  ;  BPfctB  shtta-yim,  for  tnnra  ; 
and  such  cases  as  Ip3  &a-ra£,  for  finn3;  the  Daghesh  in  the  Tav  is 
properly  compensative,  although  in  a  peculiar  way.] 

Daghesh  forte  Euphonic. 

[§  75.  All  those  kinds  of  Daghesh  forte  which  are  merely 
occasional,  and  have  respect  only  to  peculiar  modes  of  reading 
in  particular  cases,  are  thus  named. 

Of  these  there  are  three  kinds  ;  (a)  Daghesh  conjunctive.  So  the 
first  species  of  euphonic  Daghesh  may  be  named.  It  is  frequently  in- 
serted in  the  initial  consonant  of  a  word,  when  it  is  preceded  by  a 
vowel  unaccented.     E.  g.  "»>  n"np  qa-ri-thal~li,  fiT-nfc  maz-ze  —  n\.73  , 


§§  76 79.    DAGHESH    LENE.  37 

ia-npri^  ye-hheseb-bo.  The  vowels  Qamets,  Pattahh,  and  Seghol,  are 
almost  the  only  ones  employed  before  Daghesh  conjunctive.  Sometimes 
examples  are  found  like  *tt£  Wp»  qu-muts-tsi&u.  Daghesh  conjunctive 
is  frequent,  especially  in  the  Psalms.  It  is  rarely  found  after  words  with 
an  accent  on  the  ultimate  ;  and  where  it  is  so,  the  reading  is  doubtful. 

§  76.  (6)  Daghesh  affectuosum.  This  is  a  euphonic  Daghesh, 
sometimes  inserted  in  the  penult  letter  of  a  word,  when  the  tone  falls  on 
the  penult  syllable  of  the  same ;  e.  g.  iV^n  hhd-dhel-lu,  instead  of  *V"in 
hha-dhelu ;  WP  ye-hhat-tu,  instead  of  'lnftV  It  were  better  to  call 
this,  Daghesh  accented.  The  object  of  it  seems  to  be,  to  create  a  penult 
syllable  on  which  the  voice  can  rest,  without  the  intervention  of  a  Sheva 
before  the  final  syllable. 

§  77.  (c)  Daghesh  acuting.  This  appears  in  some  cases  where  a 
letter  would  by  analogy  have  a  Sheva  silent ;  and  it  both  doubles  the 
letter,  and  makes  Sheva  vocal;  e.g.  n")3tt  iiek-kere-hd,  instead  ofJTptt 
toekh-re-ha ;  i^BSH  for  i^BSH ,  Ex.  2:  3. 

Remark.  In  all  cases  of  euphonic  Daghesh,  the  manner  of  reading  only  is  concerned;  not  the 
essential  forms  of  words.  The  Daghesh  of  this  kind  is  merely  an  attempt  to  preserve  some  nice- 
ties of  pronunciation.] 

II  Daghesh  lene.  y\ 

§  78.  Daghesh  lene  belongs  only  to  the  Aspirates  riSD!D  153 
(Bfghadh  k^phath) ;  and  when  inserted,  it  is  a  sign  that  they 
are  to  be  pronounced  without  any  aspiration,  i.  e.  without  an 

/i-sound. 

E.  g.  3  is  bh,  but  a=  b ;  D  =  kh,  3=  k,  etc.     See  Alphabet,  No.  II. 

Note  1.  Daghesh  forte  also  appears  in  the  Aspirates,  as  often  as  in 
other  letters.  But  it  is  easily  distinguished  from  Daghesh  lene ;  for 
Daghesh  forte  is  always  preceded  by  a  vowel  belonging  to  the  letter 
immediately  before  it ;  while  the  preceding  letter  has  a  silent  Sheva 
under  it,  in  case  the  Daghesh  is  lene;  or  if  such  preceding  letter  have 
a  proper  vowel,  this  vowel  has  a  disjunctive  accent  upon  it  (§  93),  and 
belongs  to  a  preceding  word  ;  §  79.  3. 

Note  2.  Daghesh  forte  in  an  Aspirate  not  only  doubles  it,  but  also 
(by  usage  in  pronunciation)  removes  the  aspiration  ;  e.  g.  "^Stf  $ap-pi, 
not  8aph-piy  although  when  written  out  in  full  it  would  seem  to  be  the 
latter,  as  "SDtt.  Ease  of  enunciation  demands  the  doubling  of  the  let- 
ter without  the  aspiration. 

General  rules  for  the  insertion  of  Daghesh  lene. 

§  79.  ( 1 )  It  is  inserted  in  all  Aspirates  standing  at  the  com- 
mencement of  a  chapter  or  verse. 


38  §§  79 — 81.   DA6HESH    LENE. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1:  1,  in  rpiptf^a  the  Beth  takes  Daghesh  lene ;  so  at  the 
beginning  of  a  verse,  Gen.  3: 5,  *3  ki  (not  *5  khi),  etc. 

(2)  In  all  cases  after  a.  silent  Sheva  either  expressed  or 
implied. 

E.  g.  in  FHJ2B ,  Tav  has  a  Daghesh  lene  after  a  silent  Sheva  express- 
ed; in  ",:s  ^? ,  Pe  has  one  after  a  Sheva  implied  under  the  ?,  §  52. 

(3)  When  preceded  bj  a  vowel  (either  pure  or  impure)  at 

the  end  of  a  word  having  a  disjunctive  accent,  an  Aspirate  at 

the  beginning  of  the  word  that  follows,  takes  a  Daghesh  lene. 

E.  g.  Ps.  1:  3,  V?3  *jyn ,  where  the  Kaph  must  be  aspirated,  were 
it  not  that  the  disjunctive  accent  (Rebhia$)  is  on  the  preceding  sylla- 
ble rfj .  And  so  of  all  the  other  Disjunctives ;  see  the  accents,  § 
92  seq*. 

Oeneral  rules  for  the  rejection  of  Daghesh  lene. 

[§80.  It  is  rejected,  (a)  When  the  Aspirates  stand  next 
after  a  vocal  Sheva.  (b)  After  a  vowel  either  pure  or  im- 
pure, whether  this  vowel  be  within  the  same  word,  or  at  the 
end  of  a  preceding  one  which  has  no  disjunctive  accent  upon  it. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1:  2,  ^rrn  nn^n  ,  where  the  Tav  in  SirPn  follows  a  vocal 
Sheva  (*]  ye) ;  and  in  \7\t\  tho-hu  (not  to-hu),  the  D  follows  a  vowel  with 
a  quiescent  letter,  and  that  vowel  is  associated  with  a  conjunctive  ac- 
cent (Merka),  and  consequently  n  remains  aspirated.  So  after  a  com- 
posite Sheva ;  e.  g.  l'n2> ,  Vabhodh  (not  2abodh),  because  such  Sheva  is 
always  vocal,  §  46.  a. 

Note.  In  cases  where  a  mere  Pattahh  furtive  precedes  an  Aspirate, 
it  takes  Daghesh  lene ;  e.  g.  Pinpb  ld-qaah7it,  so  written  instead  of 
nh£bT;  §233,  Note.]  '  ~~T 

Usual  exceptions  to  the  general  rule. 

T)  Etymology  and  special  usage  have  made  many  exceptions  to  these 

1  general  rules.  ~ 

[§  81.  (1)  An  Aspirate  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  which  word  is 
derived  by  inflection  from  a  ground-form  that  excluded  Daghesh  lene, 
also  excludes  it. 

E.  g.  lbi|n  ridh-phu  (not  'IS'!*))  because  the  ground-form  is  Pp*i  , 
where  the  Pe,  being  immediately  preceded  by  a  Hholem,  cannot  take 
a  Daghesh  lene,  §  80.  b.     So  *5r*JJ0  mal-khe,  ground-form  tJ^JQ  ,  in 


§§  81,  82.    DAGHESH    LENE.  39 

which  3  is  preceded  by  a  vowel ;  toTS^  ya-az-bhu,  ground-form  SJTJP^, 
where  2,  having  a  vowel  before  it,  cannot  receive  Daghesh  lene ;  In- 
finitive mode  "Ua  btghodh,  and  with  suffix  1  "03  bigh-dho,  because  1  in 
the  ground-form  has  a  vowel  before  it. 

(2)  Loose  prefixes  (which  in  fact  are  separate  words)  do  not  affect 
the  insertion  or  omission  of  Daghesh  lene,  in  respect  to  the  second  let- 
ter of  any  word  when  it  is  an  Aspirate. 

E.  g.  2n3,  with  the  preposition  2  prefixed,  is  written  2n22  bikh-thdbh 
(not  2FG2) ;  TBS  with  3  prefixed,  "VB33  Mkh-phir  (not  TB33)  ; 
b*33  with  *?,  binab  ligh-bhul  (not  b^ab),  etc. 

Note  1.  The  Inf.  mode  with  such  a  loose  prefix,  varies  in  its  usage. 
E-  g.  1BO  j  Inf.  "isp  ,  with  prefix  b  ,  ispb  Tis-podh ;  and  such  is  the 
more  common  usage.  But  we  find  also  bB: ,  Inf.  bso  ,  with  prefix  3  , 
?C3fa  bin-phol ;  with  3,  b*BD3  lan-phol;  but  with  b,  b*3:b  Un-pol. 
Usage  therefore  is  variable  in  regard  to  this  mode. 

Note  2.  But  when  the  prefix  is  closely  united  to  a  word,  so  as  to 
constitute  (as  it  were)  an  essential  part  of  the  word  itself,  then  the  gen- 
eral rule  (§  79.  2)  is  followed  ;  e.  g,  ISOJ  yis-podh  (not  IBD?),  Fut.  of 
Kal  from  the  root  1B0  sd-phddh;  or  (if  you  please)  from  the  Inf.  form 
"fcO  szphodh.  So  in  Hiphil,  b^n  hish-pil  (not  b^BUJri),  from  bBtt. 
In  all  such  cases,  the  prefix  is  considered  and  treated  as  an  essential 
and  formative  part  of  the  word.] 

Particular  Exceptions  to  the  general  rules. 

[§  82.  (1)  Rejection  of  Daghesh  lene.  (a)  The  suffix  pronouns, 
*?{,  QD,  "J3,  reject  it.  (6)  Generally,  an  Aspirate  preceding  the  final 
syllable  ni ;  as  ntobfc  ,  mT£  j  rmb:  ,  etc. ;  but  not  always,  as  msnn 
tar-buth.     (c)  The  various  forms  of  132  ;  e.  g.  i"U2,  *U3j ,  etc. 

(2)  Admission  of  it  contrary  to  general  rules,  (d)  Some  words 
beginning  with  two  Aspirates,  viz.  22,  B2 ,  33;  e.g.  Jer.  3:25, 
Wfjtfia  n23tf: ;  Ex.  14:  17,  risnBS  rH±$»1 ;  Is.  10:  19,  -^33-03  rib. 
In  all  such  cases  manuscripts  and  editions  differ;  some  extending  the 
rule  so  as  to  begin  with  Daghesh  lene  in  most  cases  where  a  word  com- 
mences with  two  Aspirates,  others  scarcely  observing  such  a  rule  at  all, 
(e.  g.  Michaelis'  Hebrew  Bible),  (c)  A  few  words  which  usage  only  has 
excepted  from  the  general  rule ;  e.  g.  "fcjtBSj  fr°m  ^1^  >  ^"1  fr°m 
tP^4*l  •  {f)  An  apparent  exception  is  an  Aspirate  after  rrii-p  ,  which 
takes  Daghesh  lene.  But  the  Hebrews  read  this  word  ^3itf  8add-ndy, 
which  ends  in  the  consonant  y  having  a  silent  Sheva.] 

Remark.  The  detail  of  Daghesh  lene,  as  to  some  few  words  and  forms,  is  not  regulated  by  any 
established  usage ;  the  Masora,  the  Rabbins,  manuscripts,  and  editions,  differing  in  respect  to 
some  particulars.    But  as  nothing  important  in  grammar  depends  on  the  insertion  or  omission  of 


40  <§$  83 85.    RAPHE MAPPIQ — METHEGH. 

Daghesh  in  such  cases,  the  student  need  not  be  perplexed  if  he  occasionally  meet  with  instances 
not  conformed  to  the  general  principles.  Mistakes  in  printing  and  transcribing  have  occasioned 
some  of  these  anomalies  ;  and  conceit  has  increased  the  number. 


RAPHE. 

§83.  Raphe  (uD"l)  means  soft.  It  is  a  small  parallel 
stroke  of  the  same  form  as  Pattahh,  put  over  Aspirates,  to 
show  that  they  retain  their  aspiration;  e.g.  Tn2p  kha- 
bh^dha ;  and  so  it  is  directly  the  opposite  of  Daghesh  lene. 

The  printed  editions  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures  have  long  ceased  to 
use  this  sign,  (which  indeed  is  quite  superfluous),  with  the  exception  of 
a  very  few  solitary  cases;  e.  g.  Judg.  16:  16,  28.  Num.  32:  42,  in  Van 
der  Hooght.  In  ancient  manuscripts  it  was  very  common ;  and  it  was 
sometimes  employed,  moreover,  to  shew  that  Daghesh  forte  was  omit- 
ted ;  sometimes,  that  Mappiq  did  not  belong  to  n ;  and  sometimes,  to 
note  that  tt  and  Ft  at  the  end  of  words  were  quiescent. 


MAPPIQ. 

§84.  Mappiq  (pE'Q)  is  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  a  final 
Si,  (which  is  almost  always  quiescent),  denoting  that  it  is 
moveable. 

E.  g.  rn  yah  (fp  would  read  yd) ;  nna  gd-bhah,  (irD}  must  be  writ- 
ten 7D2  ,  and  read  ga-bha.) 

Note.  Mappiq  is  now  used  only  in  final  Ji ;  but  in  some  Hebrew 
manuscripts  it  is  found  in  the  other  Quiescents,  denoting  that  they  are 
moveable.  The  meaning  of  p^SE  is  producens,  i.  e.  bringing  out  or 
pronouncing  the  letter  on  which  it  is  placed. 


METHEGH. 

§  85.  Methegh  (^Hft)  is  a  small  perpendicular  mark  (i), 
preceding  the  tone-syllable  more  or  less  according  to  the  va- 
rious purposes  for  which  it  is  employed,  and  denoting  a  secon- 
dary or  half-accent,  analogous  to  that  on  the  first  syllable  of 
our  English  words  un  dertake,  nomination,  etc. 


§§  86,  87.    METHEGH.  41 


The  word  Metkegk  (fraenum,  retinaculum)  denotes,  when  technically  employed,  a  holding  in  or 
restraint  of  the  voice,  viz.  in  reading,  (decora  suspensio  vocis) ;  which  of  course  gives  a  kind  of 
halftone  or  accent  to  the  syllable.  It  does  not,  like  the  other  accents,  relate  to  the  connection  of 
words  with  each  other,  but  only  totke  manner  of  reading  the  syllable  on  which  it  is  placed  ;  and 
is  therefore  of  comparatively  little  importance  to  us. 

Note.  The  mark  (i)  on  the  last  or  on  the  penult  syllable  of  a  verse, 
is  always  the  accent  Silluq,  not  Methegh. 

[§  86.  Manuscripts  and  editions  differ  widely  as  to  the  frequency 
of  using  Methegh;  the  Spanish  manuscripts  exhibiting  it  very  sparing- 
ly, the  German  ones  very  frequently.  The  Codex  Cassel.  scarcely  has 
it  at  all.  In  regard  to  many  cases,  the  Jewish  grammarians  themselves 
are  not  agreed  about  the  use  of  it.  Consequently  there  is  much  dis- 
crepancy respecting  it  in  our  best  Hebrew  bibles.] 

Uniform  or  general  use  of  Methegh. 

[§  87.  It  is  uniformly  employed,  (a)  Before  all  the  composite 
Shevas,  when  they  are  preceded  by  a  vowel,  (and  is  technically  called 
in  this  case  Sp^KB  ma-toarikh,  i.  e.  prolonger) ;  e.  g.  TMTJ,  ftp^.\, 
^bng,  "I8J{£,  *fct£. ,  etc.  (6)  Almost  uniformly,  in  such  cases,  after 
the  composite  Sheva  has  fallen  away  by  inflection,  etc. ;  e.  g.  *(!0$£  , 
by  inflection  tttePJ  ,  preserving  the  Methegh  ;  (or  this  case  may  be 
ranked  with  e  below),  (e)  After  a  long  vowel  next  before  the  tone- 
syllable  and  followed  by  a  Sheva  vocal;  e.  g.  nn*jn,  """}bn,  lan^n , 
rrVibin,  Tibia  with  Qibbuts  vicarious,  (d)  The  verbs  mn  and  J-pn  , 
when  they  take  formative  or  other  prefixes  with  a  short  vowel,  employ 
Methegh  after  such  vowel;  e.  g.  niTlb  tYfiV-t  !"P.rr  Imp.  with  i  Gen. 
12:  2,  JKJFJJ  ,  etc.,  nearly  without  exception  in  good  editions.  In  prin- 
ciple, this  may  be  classed  with  h  below. 

Very  generally  employed,  (e)  On  the  second  syllable  before  the 
tone,  where  it  is  a  simple  one ;  as  irifcttj \  fyfi  •  (f)  But  if  this  be  a 
mixed  syllable,  then  on  the  third  before  the  tone,  provided  it  be  simple ; 
e.  g.  irfiNJ  i  JTJl^Qas.  (g)  After  a  short  vowel  made  long  by  posi- 
tion (§  29),  before  a  letter  which  excludes  Daghesh  forte  either  neces- 
sarilvor  arbitrarily;  as  QDnn,  Q^Tina  ,  fr£2£b  ■  ^piPT ,  rribiTa,  msoa 
2  K.  2:  11,  etc.  But  this  is  sometimes  neglected,  as  rfffrlrj  ;  specially 
when  Yodh  with  Sheva  follows  the  vowel  made  long  by  omitting  the 
Daghesh,  e.  g.  *1?K3  >  -T~)^?2  >  etc-  5  ana"  commonly  so,  in  regard  to 
Hhireq,  as  Piel  aiY\  ^hz ,  etc.,  without  Methegh.] 

The  qualifying  terms,  almost  uniformly,  very  generally,  will  of  course  advertise  the  student 
that  he  is  not  to  expect  uniformity  in  the  cases  under  them. 

Occasional  use  of  Methegh. 
[  (h)  After  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  (not  made  by  Daghesh 
forte),  especially  after  Pattahh  and  short  Hhireq,  Methegh  is  placed, 
6 


42  §  87.    METHEGH. 


sometimes  on  the  first,  and  sometimes  on  the  second  syllable  before  the 
tone ;  e.  g.  on  the  first,  as  Kte§ ,  ninny ,  *£#£ ,  tfypjft  i  ^30  Is. 
10:34.  <Vl3  Ps.  76:  12,  'lnst'T,  ^b-sni;  with  other  short  vowels, 
J|Vn  (d  above),  fiarr,  ~^^  shomra,  "\^^  qorbdn,  ^^  dorian , 
SpiOJ  9amodhkha,  etc. ;  on  the  second,  as  I1ft£tijr| ,  ip-jan*! ,  D^tinntt, 
etc.  The  cases  with  other  vowels  than  Pattahh  or  short  Hhireq,  are 
rare,  (i)  On  the  first  syllable  of  a  polysyllabic  word,  when  this  sylla- 
ble ends  with  a  daghesh'd  letter ;  e.g.  O^Fa,  IBtrfh^  **•*&$« 
tpBSH  ,  etc. ;  especially  when  the  first  letter  is  Vav  conversive,  Mem 
prefix,  or  He  article.  This  case,  in  principle,  appears  to  be  the  same 
with  that  of  h  above.] 

Rare  use  of  Methegh. 
[  (J)  Very  seldom,  after  a  Vocal  Sheva  under  the  first  letter ;  as 
ntfl  ,  Ifcfc) ,  ^n~  ;  more  rarely  still,  even  before  Sheva  initial,  as  nfcp 
Est.  9:  7 — 9,  ten  times.  In  these  cases  it  is  called  Methegh  initial; 
the  older  Jewish  grammarians  named  it  &PM  >  mugitus ;  a  name  after- 
wards extended  to   Methegh  generally.] 

Methegh  before  Maqqeph. 

[  (/)  The  general  principle  is  the  same  as  if  the  two  words  joined  by 
Maqqeph  were  one,  (they  being  read  as  one) ;  so  that  the  above  rules 
generally  apply ;  e.  g.  "*3-^$>3,  e ;  $fe  Nftj  i  *»  ik:?-,,3  ■  e*  "^^J 
ynfijn  ,  e,  etc.  (m)  In  many  cases  long  monosyllables  immediately 
before  Maqqeph  take  a  Methegh,  (yet  it  is  often  otherwise),  although  a 
tone-syllable  follows  immediately,  e.  g.  bitt~rP2 ,  tiT-Kb!! ;  and  even 
when  it  does  not,  and  the  monosyllable  is  a  mixed  one,  Methegh  is 
sometimes  employed,  as  tHfij~:HttJ ,  etc,  contrary  to  the  principle  in  e. 
Short  vowels  before  Maqqeph  commonly  reject  Methegh;  as  rpa~iy, 
etc.] 

Such  are  the  numerous  and  very  indefinite  (not  to  say  contradictory)  principles  for  the  use  of 
Methegh.  No  wonder  that  no  two  editions  or  manuscripts  agree  in  regard  to  it.  Some  of  the 
very  words  employed  here  as  examples,  are  differently  marked  in  different  editions. 

Note  1.  The  conjunction  *)  (and)  does  not  generally  receive  Me- 
thegh. 

Note  2.  Several  Metheghs  may  appear  on  the  same  word,  if  the 
different  rules  for  writing  it  should  require  them  ;  e.  g.  D$T*$SRS ,  for 
the  Methegh  on  22  ,  see  e  above  ;  for  that  on  22  ,  see  a. 

Note  3.  Instead  of  Methegh,  the  conjunctive  accents  (especially 
Munahh,  Qadma,  and  Merka,  §  93)  are  frequently  used,  when  a  word 
has  a  distinctive  upon  it ;  e.  g.  tP'TS^Jj!^  with  Munahh  under  53  ,  in- 
stead of  fi^ispttbl  with  Methegh  ;  and  so  in  very  many  cases. 


§§  88 90.  MAQQEPH — READING  OF  THE  HEBREW.       43 

MAQQEPH. 
§88.   Maqqeph  (5]j?fc  I  e.  connecter),  somewhat  like  our 
hyphen,  connects  two  words  together,  and  makes  them  as  one 
in  respect  to  interpunction  and  reading. 

E.  g.  O^D&n-nN,  13-np.hN;.     Usually  either  the  former  or  latter 
word,  in  cases  of  this  nature,  is  short ;    as  in  the  examples  produced. 
§  89.   The  word  before  Maqqeph  throws  off  its  tonic  ac- 
cent ;  and  a  long  vowel  in  its  final  syllable  is  for  the  most  part 
shortened,  if  pure. 

R  g-  V!$n~*?  >  where  b$  has  no  accent,  Gen.  1:  15.  For  the 
reason  why  the  long  vowels  before  Maqqeph  (which  removes  the  tone) 
are  shorteued,  see  §  36.  §  129.  a.  But  here  the  punctators  were  not 
uniform  ;  for  we  have  Tn-ab  lebh-Ddvidh  (not  T]T~lb),  and  without 
Methegh  too,  in  1  Sam.  24:  6  ;  but  also  ara-Silj  lebhridsh,  2  K.  12:  5  ; 
and  thus  in  other  cases. 

[Note  1.  Maqqeph  sometimes  appears  between  several  words  in 
succession,  as  !ib~"YvpN-b3"T)tt  .  Mostly  it  is  employed  only  between 
words  closely  connected  in  sense,  e.  g.  between  prepositions  and  their 
nouns,  words  in  regimen,  etc.  ;  but  its  use  is  not  confined  to  these,  and 
it  is  very  arbitrary  in  many  cases,  about  which  manuscripts  and  edi- 
tions, and  also  Jewish  grammarians  and  critics,  disagree.  In  ^ome  few 
cases  it  stands  after  a  polysyllabic  word  ;  as  ni-^nnn  ,  Gen.  6.  9. 

Note  2.  Maqqeph  might  itself  be  appropriately  enough  called  a 
conjunctive  accent  sui  generis,  as  it  in  most  cases  plainly  supplies  the 
place  of  a  usual  Conjunctive.  E.  g.  the  famous  Jewish  critics,  Ben 
Asher  and  Ben  Naphthali,  disagree,  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  respecting 
the  answer  to  the  question,  whether  a  Maqqeph  or  a  Conjunctive  is  to 
be  put  on  certain  words.  It  differs,  however,  from  other  Conjunctives 
in  this  respect,  viz.  that  it  usually  causes  the  preceding  long  mutable 
vowel  to  be  shortened. 


RULES  FOR  READING  HEBREW. 

§  90.  The  principal  difficulty  is,  to  know  where  to  begin  and  end 
a  syllable.  The  following  rules  may  aid  the  learner,  in  commencing 
the  practice  of  reading. 

1.  Every  syllable  must  begin  with  a  moveable  letter. 

Note.     Vav  with  Shureq  («i)  in  the  beginning  of  words  is  the  only 


44  §  ^O.  READING  OF  THE  HEBREW. 

exception,  and  is  sounded  m=oo  in  English.  In  ^EK  8d-mar,  "M2^ 
2d-madh,  etc.,  the  tt  and  2  are  moveable,  although  we  do  not  sound 
them,  because  we  know  not  what  sound  to  give  them. 

2.  No  syllable  can  have  more  than  two  moveable  letters  before  its 
vowel ;  and  none  admits  more  than  one  after  its  vowel,  except  a  final 
syllable  which  may  have  two. 

3.  Every  vowel  stands  in  a  simple  syllable,  when  followed  by  a  letter 
which  has  a  vowel  belonging  to  it. 

4.  Every  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable,  is  followed  by  a  simple 
Sheva  expressed  or  implied,  or  by  a  Daghesh  forte  ;  e.  g.  b|^|  bar-zel, 
in  which  the  first  syllable  has  a  Sheva  expressed,  the  second  a  Sheva 
implied  ;  so  in  *l72b  Km~medh="\l2T2b . 

5.  A  long  vowel  also  makes  a  mixed  syllable,  when  it  is  followed  by 
a  simple  Sheva  expressed  or  implied,  or  by  an  implied  Daghesh  forte  ; 
provided  such  vowel  be  in  a  tone-syllable.  E.  g.  2£,  qdm;  n:Vi:p') 
yiq-tol-nd,  where  the  Hholem  is  in  a  mixed  tone-syllable ;  fite*  ydm-md 
—rfcl2\  ;  r\k  8eth,  where  Sheva  is  implied  under  the  n. 

6.  When  a  long  vowel  is  not  in  a  tone-syllable,  it  must  make  a  sim- 
ple  syllable,  although  followed  by  a  Sheva ;  e.  g.  nbl3pT  qd-tdd,  B^Sa 
bd-gsdhim.  But  not  so  before  a  Maqqeph,  as  TIT"^  lebh-Ddvidh,  be- 
cause the  Maqqeph  takes  away  the  tone  which  naturally  belongs  to  the 
word  that  precedes  it. 

7.  Every  vowel  followed  by  a  real  Quiescent  makes  a  simple  syllable, 
provided  the  letter  next  after  the  Quiescent  have  a  vowel  belonging  to 
to  it,  or  the  Quiescent  stands  at  the  end  of  a  word.  E.  g.  in  rTMEttH 
re-shith,  N"}  is  a  simple  syllable,  because  the  S3  which  comes  next  after 
it  has  a  vowel  of  its  own  ;  in  tfnn  bd-rd,  Kn  is  a  final  simple  syllable. 
Of  course, 

8.  A  vowel  followed  by  a  real  Quiescent  makes  a  mixed  syllable,  if 
the  next  succeeding  moveable  letter  is  destitute  of  a  vowel.  E.  g.  in 
rPX&n  re-shith ;  rPitf  is  a  mixed  syllable  because  n  has  no  vowel  of 
its  own.  But  such  syllables  must  always  be  tone-syllables  ;  excepting 
the  very  few  cases  where  quiescent  }  is  irregularly  used  in  short  sylla- 
bles ;  see  §  28,  Note  1. 

9.  Short  vowels  make  a  simple  syllable,  when  the  next  succeeding 
letter  has  a  vowel  of  its  own. 

10.  Every  composite  Sheva,  and  every  simple  Sheva  vocal,  stands  of 
course  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  §  46. 

11.  Vowels  long  merely  by  position,  i.  e.  the  doubtful  vowels  having 
a  daghesh'd  letter  coalescing  with  them,  always  stand  in  a  simple  syl- 
lable. 


§  91.  READING  OP  THE  HEBREW.  45 


Exemplification  of  reading  Hebrew. 

§91.  (1)  Gen.  1:  1.  rft&ttna  bzre-shith;  3  with  Daghesh  lene  79. 
*1 ;  with  Sheva  under  it  45,  and  with  Sheva  vocal  46. — in  re,  with  a 
quiescent  long  vowel  53,  quiescent  in  Aleph  54  tf. — rp*£J  shith,  with  a 
quiescent  vowel  followed  by  quiescent  Yodh  54  "i ;  n  without  any  Sheva 
expressed,  having  one  implied  52 ;  also  without  a  Daghesh  lene  because 
it  follows  a  vowel  80. — rP£  is  a  mixed  syllable  90.  8. 

(2)  &na  bd-rd ;  a  with  Daghesh  lene  because  the  preceding  letter 
has  a  silent  Sheva  impled  79.  2,  a  a  simple  syllable  90.  3. — fifi  rd, 
vowel  protracted  and  impure  with  N  quiescent  54. 

(3)  trrfbN  tield-him ;  N  with  composite  Sheva  49r\vhich  is  moveable 
46.  a. — "b  Id,  simple  syllable  90.  3. — tPH  him,  with  Yodh  quiescent  54, 
and  Hhireq  impure  and  protracted  24,  and  in  a  mixed  syllable  90.  8. 

(4)  nN  Keth  90.  5. — D'jb^n  hash-shd-ma-yim ;  tfjn  hash,  this  sylla- 
ble comprising  the  sh,  which  is  made  by  the  Daghesh  forte  in  the  ty  71 
and  73,  also  90.  4. — x  shd  90.  3. — 72  ma,  with  Pattahh  pure  and  short 
27,  and  also  with  accent  upon  it  100.  b,  and  in  a  simple  syllable  90.  9. 
— E?  yim,  with  short  Hhireq  141  and  100  a,  mixed  short  syllable  90.  4. 

(5)  nsn  vseth;  Vav  moveable  56.  1,  n«  as  above  in  No.  4. 

(6)  V^Nn  hd-  8d-rets ;  n  90.  3— N  90.  3,  and  with  K  moveable  56. 
1. — fn  rets,  with  short  Seghol27,  and  in  a  mixed  syllable  90.  4. 

(7)  Verse  2.     V^m  vehd-Hd-rets ;  1  ve  in  No.  5.   ' 

(8)  Jin'1."  hd-yetha ;  n  with  Qamets  long  66.  a  under  e.  g.,  ?  ys, 
Yodh  moveable  56.  1. — nn  thd,  n  without  Daghesh  lene  80.  a,  and 
followed  by  in  quiescent  54  n. 

(9)  inn  tho-hu ;  n  without  Daghesh  lene  80.  b. — in  hu  with  n 
moveable  56.  1,  and  with  T  quiescent  54  1. 

(10)  inaT  vd-bho-hu;  ")  vd  56.  1,  simple  syllable  90.  3. — 3  bho,  a 
without  Daghesh  lene  80.  b ;  simple  syllable  90.  3. — in  hu,  as  before 
under  No.  9. 

(11)  *7'£rr.  vtkho-shekh ;  "l  vt  56.  L — ttJn  hho,  Hholem  in  a  pure 
syllable  ;  the  point  over  the  right  tooth  of  the  Shin  stands  as  well  for 
the  vowel  Hholem  as  to  mark  sh  62.  2  ;  read  as  a  simple  syllable  hho 
90.  3. — *f  tu  shekh,  short  Seghol  and  mixed  syllable,  see  in  No.  6 ; 
Sheva  silent  in  the  final  Kaph,  52.  1. 

(12)  ^2  Sal  90.  4  ;  the  y  is  moveable  here,  although  we  do  not  sound 
it,  because  we  know  not  how  to  sound  it. — ""jB  pine ;  Pe  with  Daghesh 
lene  79.  2,  Sheva  vocal  46.  d.— *\  we,  54  ^ . 

*  Note.  In  this  exemplification,  the  first  number  in  any  reference  stands  for  a 
section  (§)  in  the  Grammar;  others  which  follow  this,  stand  for  the  subdivision, 
under  that  section. 


46  §§  91—93.    ACCENTS. 


(13)  trinn  thehdm;  n  without  Daghesh  lene80.  b. — Gin  hhom,  90.8. 

( 14)  rpm.  viruahh ;  see  T  v*  in  No.  5. — hn  rwaM,  with  Pattahh  fur- 
tive 69. 

(15)  ETribN  Reld-him,  see  No.  3. — nBrntt  merd-hhe-pheth ;  *l  with 
Pattahh  long  29  and  90.  11. — rj  hhe,  with  Seghol  pure  and  short  27, 
also  accented  100.  a. 

(16)  "ia£*b?  Sal  pene,  see  in  No.  12.  tPJ3M  hdm-md-yim,  the  letter 
signified  by  Daghesh  forte  in  Mem  attaches  to  the  first  syllable  ham-  90. 
4. — 73  ma,  90.  3. — B"»  yim,  with  short  i  141. 

(17)  Verse  3.  Vdy-yo-mer  &elo-him  yehi,  8or  (with  N  moveable  56. 
1,  although  we  do  not  sound  it) ;  vd-yehi  $or,  (in  vd  the  Pattahh  has  a 
Daghesh  implied  in  it,  and  is  to  be  regarded  as  long,  29  and  59.) 

(18)  Verse  4.  *<-}*;>  vdy-ydr  (with  tt  otiant  at  the  end  57.  a)  Helo- 
him  eth  hd-btor  Id-tbbh,  vdy-ydbh-del  8eld-him  ben  hd-Kor  u-bhen  (u 
90.  1.  Note)  hd-hhd-shekh  (fi  ,  29  and  58 ;  see  also  in  No.  11  for  the 
Hholem  in  the  U3.) 

(19)  Verse  5.  Vdy-yiq-ra  toelohim  Id-ttdr  ydm,  veld-hhd-shehh  (b 
Id  29)  qd-rd  lay-la  {*f  lay  66.  a.  under  e.  g.)  pd-yehi  (vd  in  No.  17) 
9e-rebh  vd-yehi  bho-qer  ydm  Se-hhddh  (&e  29  and  58). 


ACCENTS, 

§  92.  The  other  small  marks  of  various  forms  accompa- 
nying the  Hebrew  text,  are  accents.*  They  are  divided  into 
two  great  classes ;  viz.  (a)  Such  as  separate  words,  or  parts 
of  sentences,  from  each  other ;  which  are  called  disjunctives. 
(6)  Such  as  serve  to  shew  that  words  are  to  be  closely  con- 
nected, either  in  the  reading,  or  in  the  sense,  or  in  both ; 
which  are  called  conjunctives. 

§  93.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  forms,  names,  and  classifica- 
tion of  the  accents.  Some  of  them  are  used  both  in  poetry  and  prose; 
and  such  have  no  mark  prefixed.  Others  are  peculiar  to  prose,  and 
these  have  (t)  prefixed.  Others  are  peculiar  to  poetry,  and  these  have 
(*)  prefixed.  Poetry  means  (according  to  the  accentuators)  only  the 
books  of  Job,  Psalms,  and  Proverbs,  called  technically  nEtf  (truth), 
these  being  the  three  initials  of  the  Hebrew  names  of  these  books. 

*  Usually  called  tonic  accents,  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  Methegh 
which  is  called  the  euphonic  accent. 


§  93.    ACCENTS.  47 


NOTE.  The  reader  will  observe,  that  the  parallel  "blank  line  within  the  parentheses  which 
stands  next  after  the  numbers,  is  intended  to  represent  the  line  of  Hebrew  letters ;  and  conse- 
quently the  position  of  the  accents  in  relation  to  the  letters  over  or  under  which  they  stand,  is 
thus  marked. 

I.  Disjunctives. 
(1)  Pcrnse  accents  or  Disjunctives  of  the  first  class. 

1.  ( : — )  Silluq,  p^O  ,  i.  e.  stop,  pause.     In  connection  with  the 

two  large  points  that  always  follow  it,  it  is  named 
p'lOB  spDa  pnjPtj ,  pause  at  the  end  of  averse.  Else- 
where this  same  mark  stands  for  Methegh ;  §  85. 
Note. 

2.  (  — )  Athnahh,  n^ntt  ,  i.  e.  respiration. 

*    3.     (  — **)  Merka  Mahpakh  ^JV2_  ttSntt  ,  a  composite  accent,  see 
Nos.  23.  25. 

■ "  '  '  '  ■■ ■  ■    

(2)  Occasional  Pause-accents  or  Disjunctives  of  the  second  class. 

(  — )  Tiphhha  finst:  (posterius),  i.  e.  palm  of  the  hand,  so 
called  from  the  shape.  It  is  also  named  tth"}t2  retar- 
dation, and  (when  next  before  Silluq  and  Athnahh) 
N^*N?3  strong.  In  poetry,  it  is  merely  a  Conjunctive ; 
see  No.  30. 

( -—  )   Tiphhha  (anterius) ;  praepositive,  §  95.  a. 

(  —  )  Zaqeph  Qaton,  jifcj:  S)pej  ,  i.  e.  elevator  minor. 

(  —  )  Zaqeph  Gadhol,  biia  5]p7,  i.  e.  elevator  major. 

('—  )  Segholta,  KPfcaD  ,  i.e.  cluster  of  grapes,  (from  its  shape); 
postpositive,  §  95.  a. 


t 

4. 

i 

* 

5. 

t 

6. 

t 

7. 

t 

8. 

(3)  Lesser  Disjunctives  or  Disjunctives  of  the  third  class. 
t     9.     (  — )   Tebhir,  'Van  ,  i.  e.  interruption. 

10.     (  —  )  Rebhia,  Sftp  ,  i.  e.  resting  or  lying  over. 
♦11.     (  —  )  Rebhia  Geresh,  a  composite  accent,  with  the  Geresh 

praepositive,  comp.  Nos.  10,  15 ;  also  §  95.  a. 
f  12.     ( 5_  )  Pashta,  tfttip?  ,  i.  e.  expansion  (of  the  voice) ;  postposi- 
tive, §  95.  a. 
13.     (  *_  )  Zarqa,  SjjSt  ,  i.  e.  dispersion  ;  postpositive.     In  poetry 
(when  not  postpositive)  it  is  a  mere  Conjunctive  ;  see 
No.  31,  also  §95.  a. 
f   14.     (_  )   Yethibh,  S-jrr,  i.e.  sitting;    praepositive.      It  is  also 


48  §  93.   ACCENTS. 


called  t^pift  ^&b*  tuba  anterior,  and  bS'tfn  "ICS?  tuba 
inferior ;  see  §  95.a 
*  15.     (  — )  Geresk,  ©"^,  i.e.  expulsion.     Also  called  D'nt:  sfaWd 

(Arabic,  /  vj^/i  dypeus),  and  tfbfN  retention  (   \  *f 

cohibuit.)  # 

t    16.     (  — )  Garshayim,  Qy*J")2  ,  i.  e.  double  Geresh      Also  called 

fPq*jtJ ,  fD^O  ,  dual  and  plural  of  onta  sfo'e/rf. 
t    17.     ( —  )   Telisha  Gedhola,  ttbilij   rifftftj ,  i.  e.  evulsio  major ; 

also  ttOntt  ;  praepositive,  §  95.  a. 
t    18.     (  —  )  Qarne  Phara,  rrjB  *%*$. ,  i-  e.  the  two  horns  of  a  heifer, 

(from  the  shape). 

19.  (  —  )  Pazer,  ^TS  ,  i.  e.  disperser.     Also  bl*M  Its  . 

20.  (   f  )  Pesiq  p^DS  ,  i.  e.  cessation,  written  in  the  line  between 

words,  and  placed  (as  here)  perpendicularly.  Also 
called  tt£DD ,  separation.  Also  preceded  by  a  Con- 
junctive on  the  word  after  which  it  is  placed. 

II.  Conjunctives. 

r 

21.  (  -  - )  Munahk,  fi^E  ,  i.  e.  joined.     Also  *\W  ^D.iz;  tuba  recta, 

and  Ijrjrj  ncto  tuba  ambulans.  In  poetry  both  superius 
and  inferius.  On  an  ultimate  syllable,  and  followed 
.by  Athnahh,  Zarqa,  or  Zaqeph  Qaton,  it  is  called 
*fo9  ,  Hluy,  i.  e.  ascent.  When  placed  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  word,  and  followed  by  Zaqeph  Q,aton,  it 
is  named  bianiDft  mekharbel,  sieve,  i.  e.  agitation  (of 
the  voice). 

22.  (  —  (  Qadhma,  $72*ip_ ,  i.  e.  before. 

23.  (  —)  Merka,  K3"]tt  (apoc.  form  of  N3n2*E),  i.  e. prolonging ; 

also  *ph«MD,  ^p"?£  id. 
t   24.     (  —  )  Merka  Khephula,  ttblED  K3")?2 ,  i.  e.  Merka  doubled. 
Also  f|njKJW  |?"3*?  >  two  rods. 

25.  (  -*-)  Mahpakh,    !]sn»  ,  i.  e.   inversion.     Also  ^Efifc   *V$B 

crooked  trumpet,  ^^Dn  IBiZJ  inverted  trumpet.  In 
poetry,  superius  or  inferius ;  in  prose,  inferius. 

26.  (  —  )  Shalshcleth,  n^aftsj  ,  i.  e.  chain,  (from  the  shape), 
t   27.     ( , — )  Darga,  *W"Y2  ,  i.  e.  steps,  gradation. 

t  28.     (  — )   Telisha  Qetanna,  STTSttp  ^"^^in  ,   i.  e.  evulsio  minor. 
Also  fiWJbri  (eradicator  ?)  postpositive,  §  95.  a. 
29.     (  — )  Yerahh,  n-y;  (properly  fry),  i.e.  moon.      Also  ITJ* 


§§  94,  95.  accents.  49 


iai,,~73  ,  the  moon  a  day  old;   H\W ,  round;  !?2ba  , 
wheel. 

*  30.     (  « — )   Tiphhha  (posterius),  in  poetry  a  Conjunctive;    comp. 

No.  4. 

*  31.     (— ')  Zarqa,  in  poetry  a  Conjunctive,  when  it  is  not  postposi- 

tive ;  see  No.  13.] 

§  94.  The  accents  are  said  to  be  subservient  to  three  pur- 
poses; viz.  (l)  To  mark  the  tone-syllable.  (2)  To  serve 
as  signs  of  interpunction.  (3)  To  regulate  the  reading,  or 
rather,  the  cantillating  of  the  Scriptures. 

§  95.   ( 1)  To  mark  the  tone-syllable,  is  what  they  generally 

do.      But  the  cases  of  exception  are  very  numerous. 

[  (a)  Eight  of  them,  are  always  confined  to  the  same  position,  let  the 
tone  be  where  it  may;  e.  g.fSegholta,  Pashta,  Zarqa  (No.  13),  and 
Telisha  Qetanna^must  always  be  put  over  the  last  letter  of  a  word,  and 


are  therefore  called  postpositive  ;  while  Tiphhha  anterius,  Yethibh, 
Telisha  Gedhola,  and  Geresh  in  the  composite  accent  Rebhia  Geresh 
(No.  11),  belong  only  to  the  Jirst  letter  of  a  word,  and  are  therefore 
called  praepositive  ;  see  the  Table.  Of  course  these  accents  some- 
times fall  in  with  the  tone-syllable  ;  but  oftentimes  the  reverse  of  this 
happens. 

The  student  then  can  never  depend  on  the  accents  as  universal  and  safe  guides,  in  respect  to 
the  tone  of  words.  He  must  thereforo  resort  to  the  general  principles  which  regulate  the  tone,  in 
all  doubtful  cases. 

(b)  Many  words  have  two  accents  on  them.  In  this  case,  if  both 
accents  are  of  the  same  form,  the  Jirst  marks  the  tone  ;  e.  g.  'inn,  with 
the  tone  on  the  penult.  If  the  accents  are  of  different  forms,  then  the 
last  (left  hand  one)  marks  the  tone-syllable,  i.  e.  if  it  belong  to  those 
accents  which  always  mark  the  tone  ;  e.  g.  tPTJrijjbl ,  where  KPl«  is 
acuted.  Here  is  one  Conjunctive  and  one  Disjunctive  upon  the  word ; 
but  sometimes  there  are  two  Disjunctives,  as  Wife  ,  Lev.  10:  4;  and 
sometimes  even  two  on  the  same  monosyllable,  as  rr.T ,  Gen.  5:  29. 
Very  often,  two  Conjunctives  are  put  upon  one  and  the  same  word,  as 
Wlf,  Ps.  96:  4. 

Remark.  All  this  shews  the  great  improbability  that  the  accents  were  originally  invented  for 
the  purpose  of  marking  the  tone.  The  numerous  cases  of  double  accentuation,  and  of  praepositive 
and  postpositive  accents  that  do  not  coincide  with  the  tone-syllable,  prove  that  the  marking  of  it 
by  the  accents  in  general,  is  merely  a  secondary  and  not  a  primary  object  of  these  signs.  If  we 
say  it  is  a  primary  one,  how  are  we  to  explain  it,  that  one  and  the  same  syllable  has  two  tones  at 
the  same  time  I    For  so  we  must  conclude  from  this  principle,  and  from  the  occurrence  of  such 


'•<: 


50  §§  96—98.  accents. 


examples  as  tit .  But  if  the  cantillation  is  marked  by  the  accents  (§  97),  then  two  accents  may 
both  be  expressed  by  variations  of  the  voice,  when  cantillating  the  same  syllable  ;  but  how  arc 
they  both  to  be  accounted  for,  on  any  other  ground  ?] 

§  96.   (2)  Accents  mark  in  part  the  interpunction. 

This  is  the  use  most  commonly  assigned  to  them  as  the  principal 
one.  In  many  cases,  in  fact,  the  accents  accord  well  with  the  divisions 
of  sense.  In  the  poetical  books,  the  pause-accents  are  useful  in  mark- 
ing the  end  ofailyoi ;  and  they  generally  do  this  with  accuracy.  But  in 
all  parts  of  the  Bible  there  is  a  multitude  of  cases,  where  the  accents 
make  pauses  in  utter  disagreement  with  the  sense.  So  obviously  is  this 
the  case,  that  the  Punctators  cannot  be  supposed,  by  any  one,  to  have 
been  ignorant  of  it. 

E.  g.  in  Gen.  1:  1,  we  have  fi^ffbs  ,  i.  e.  a  pause-accent  (Athnahh) 
of  the  largest  kind,  like  our  colon,  placed  between  a  verb  and  the  Ace. 
case  which  the  verb  governs ;  and  so,  in  many  hundreds  of  instances. 
This  serves  to  shew,  that  the  use  of  the  accents  by  way  of  interpunction 
is  only  secondary. 

[NOTE.  The  paitse-accents  are  supposed  to  mark  the  greater  divisions  of  the  sense,  (like  our 
colon  and  semicolon) ;  the  Disjunctives  of  the  second  class,  subdivide  these  ;  and  those  of  the 
third  class  make  a  division  of  these  parts  into  minuter  portions  still,  (like  our  comma,  and  as  it 
were  like  a  half-comma) ;  so  that  a  verse  is  broken  up  into  very  small  portions,  of  one,  two,  or 
three  words  each,  rarely  of  more.  But  all  this  arrangement  of  accents  has  its  regular  order,  for 
the  most  part;  for  there  is  a  prescribed  consecution  of  the  accents,  each  Disjunctive  having  its 
appropriate  place  when  admitted  by  the  nature  and  length  of  a  verse,  and  its  respective  Conjunc- 
tives (shewing  what  words  are  to  be  joined  together)  being  regularly  attached  to  :t,  i.  e.  preceding 
it.  The  manner  and  order  of  this  consecution  belongs  properly  to  a  treatise  of  the  accents.  The 
student  who  wishes  to  become  acquainted  with  it,  may  find  it  represented  at  great  length  in  Bos- 
ton's Tractatus  Stigmologicus,  Wasmuth's  Instit.  Accentaum,  Abicht  de  Accentibus ;  and  in  the 
second  edition  of  this  Grammar,  in  the  Appendix,  he  will  find  an  abridged  exhibition  of  the  whole 
system,  on  which  much  time  and  pains  were  bestowed  .] 

§97.  (3)  Accents  also  mark  the  cantillation. 

The  Jews  do  not  read,  but  cantillate  the  Scriptures ;  as  the  Mos- 
lems do  their  Koran.  The  accents  direct  this.  The  Koran  too  has 
marks  for  such  a  purpose.  This  appears  to  me  plainly  to  have  been 
the  original  design  of  the  accents,  viz.  to  guide  the  recitativo.  Now 
as  this  was  regulated,  more  or  less,  by  the  tones  of  words  and  by  the 
sense  of  a  passage,  so  the  accentuation  very  often  (and  more  usually) 
accords  with  these  objects ;  but  still,  in  a  multitude  of  cases  it  has  no 
direct  reference  to  them,  but  merely  to  reading  or  cantillation. 

For  an  exhibition  in  musical  notes  of  the  recitativo  power  of  the  accents,  see  Jablonskii  Praef. 
ad  Bib.  Heb.  §  24,  and  Bartoloccii  Bibliotheca  Rabbin.  IV.  p.  341. 

§  98.  The  proper  place  of  an  accent  (neither  praepositive  nor  post- 
positive), is  over  or  under  the  left  side  of  the  letter  which  begins  a  syl- 


§§  99,  100.    TONE-SYLLABLE.  51 

Iable.     The  imperfection  of  types,  however,  sometimes  prevents  the 
printed  books  from  following  this  rule. 

Remark.  The  student  should  gradually  make  himself  acquainted  with  the  accents,  so  as  to 
distinguish  and  to  name  them.  The  Conjunctives  often  shew  what  words  should  be  connected  in 
sense;  the  Disjunctives,  which  -liould  be  separated.  They  serve,  therefore,  as  an  index  of  the 
construction  which  the  Accentuators  put  upon  the  Hebrew  text.  In  a  very  great  number  of  ca- 
ses, the  pause-accents  (and  sometimes  all  the  others)  affect  the  forms  of  words,  by  their  influence 
on  the  vowels;  so  that  the  student  should  by  no  means  supersede  so  much  attention  to  them,  as 
will  enable  him  readily  to  distinguish  their  nature  and  office,  so  far  as  they  have  an  influence  on 
the  tone,  or  interpunction,  or  on  the  vowel-system.  One  must  often  be  in  the  dark  on  these  sub- 
jects, who  is  not  familiar  in  some  degree  with  the  power  of  the  accents.  Let  him  therefore  attend 
to  this  subject,  in  a  moderate  degree  at  first,  but  still  without  intermission,  until  he  is  master  of 
the  whole. 


TONE-SYLLABLE. 

§  99.  The  general  rule  is,  that  the  tone  is  on  the  last  syllable.* 

To  this  there  are  many  exceptions.   In  Syriac  and  Arabic,  the  penult  is  more  generally  accented. 

Note.  Technically  an  oxytone,  i.  e.  a  word  with  the  tone  on  the 
ultimate,  is  called  2nbtt  MilraV  (from  below) ;  a  word  with  the  tone 
on  the  penult  is  called  b^ybft  Miteel  (from  above). 

Exceptions. 

Several  classes  of  words  have  the  tone  on  the  penult,  viz. 

§100.    (a)  All  Segholate  forms,  i.  e.  those  which  have  a         . 

furtive  vowel  in  their  final  syllable,  §359.     -77 —  ***" 

[This  vowel  is  almost  universally  Seghol,  Pattahh,  or  short  Hhireq. 
mm  In  a  few  cases  Shureq  appears  to  be  furtive,  and  consequently  employ- 
ed as  a  short  vowel ;  e.  g.  in  vAh,  and  'in a,  which  stands  for  irtn  and 
■Ips.  In  proper  names  ending  with  *?!%  the  penult  syllable  is  accent- 
ed, as  Itt^yn  Micaiah  ;  so  also  in  iHrViJai  ,  where  the  =1  is  quasi  fur- 
tive, §  12a  b.] 

(b)   All  duals  are  penacuted ;  and  plurals  of  the  same  form 
with  duals. 

E.  g.  dual,  DlJ^JJ  plurals  like  the  dual,  tPa  ,  tPBti  '>  m  a^  which 
cases  the  final  Hhireq  is  short. 

*  Words  with  the  tone  on  the  ultimate,  are  not  marked  in  this  grammar  with  the 
accent,  except  for  special  purposes.  The  reader  will  understand,  therefore,  that 
a  word  without  a  tone-accent  noted,  is  after  this  to  be  regarded  as  having  the  tone 
on  the  ultimate.  From  this  remark,  however,  the  Hebrew  that  is  exhibited  in  the 
syntax  is  to  be  excepted,  where  the  penult  tone-syllables  are  not  marked,  except 
for  special  purposes. 


52  §  100.    TONE-SYLLABLE. 


[N.  B.  The  rest  of  this  §  and  the  following  one  had  better  be  omitted  in  pri- 
mary instruction,  and  can  be  best  attended  to,  when  the  respective  classes  of 
verbs,  etc.,  shall  become  the  object  of  particular  study.] 

lit  i  [(c)  Apocopated  futures  in  verbs  HP,  which  take  a  i'ur- 

H~^tive  vowel;  as  ^P  ,  ^V»  §283.  3.y.  1.  §288.  1. 

(d)  All  the  forms  of  regular  verbs,  which  receive  forma- 
tive syllabic- suffixes, beginning  with  a  consonant;  excepting 
those  which  have  Qfi  and  ]!■)_,  §  194.  §  197. 

Exceptions  to  this   rule   may  bo  found,  but  they  are  either  the   result  of  error  in  copyists  or 
printers,  or  the  accent  has  been  moved  from  its  proper  placo  by  some  of  the  causes  described  in 


101. 

p\  Tn  T-Tinliil  nf  rpo-nlar  x'prhe.  all  f  hp  nprsnns  nrp  iwnarii- 


(e)  In  Hiphil  of  regular  verbs,  all  the  persons  are  penacu- 
ted,  in  case  of  accession  at  the  end,  which  have  Yodh  charac- 
teristic between  the  two  last  radicals.  The  ^other  persons 
follow  the  rule  in  d. 

(f)  In  Kal,Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophaf'of  verbs  W  the 
tone  rests  on  the  penult  in  all  the  persons  which  have  forma- 
tive suffixes  beginning  with  a  vowel,  i.  e.  wherever  Sl_ ,  *) ,  **— , 
is  added  to  the  root.      See  Par.  XII. 

But  sometimes  the  tone  is  Milra ;  as  1*2^ ,  Imper.  *\-\  .  Such  ex- 
ceptions are  limited  chiefly  to  Kal. 

Note.  In  all  the  persons  of  these  verbs  which  have  formative  sylla- 
bic suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  (excepting  the  suffixes  DTI  and 
"\P\ ),  the  tone  rests  on  the  epenthetic  i  or  *,_.  (§  259)  which  is  inserted 
between  the  verb  and  the  formative  suffix.  To  this  rule  there  are  a 
few  exceptions ;  as  ^ni^T  ,  etc.,  where  the  tone  is  on  the  ultimate. 

N.  B.  Pod,  Poal,  and  Hithpoel  of  these  verbs  are  regularly  accented  :  i.  e.  they  have  their  tone 
like  tbo  corresponding  conjugations  in  a  regular  verb. 

(g)  In  Kal,  Niphal  and  Hiphil  of  verbs  12 ,  the  tone  rests 
on  the  penult,  in  those  persons  which  have  formative  suffixes 
beginning  with  a  vowel,  i.e.  the  sufF.  i"i_,T,  ^_ . 

In  a  few  cases,  the  tone  here  is  on  the  last  syllable  ;  as  rtjQ  ,  Imper. 
*W&  .  This  is  very  rare,  except  in  Kal.  Comp.  above  under  f;  see 
Par.  XIII. 

Note.     As  in  the  case  ofverbs  99  above  (/,  Note),  so  here  all  the 


<r 


§  100.   TONE-SYLLABLE.  53 


persons  of  those  verbs  which  have  an  epenthetic  1  or  \i  (§  268.  c.)  be- 
fore formative  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  (excepting  the  suf- 
fixes tJPi  and  ]tt)  have  the  tone  on  the  epenthetic  syllable,  i.  e.  on  the 
penult. 

N.  B.  All  the  other  parts  of  the  verbs  «t?  are  regularly  accented,  viz.  Hophal, 
Polel,  Polal,  Hithpolel,  and  those  persons  in  Kal  which  have  formative  syllabic 
suffixes  beginning  with  consonants  and  not  preceded  by  an  epenthetic  syllable 
(i  or  >»,._) ;  as  P££.  etc.  So  participles  of  these  verbs,  in  the  fern,  and  plural,  are 
regularly  accented.     Comp.  under/. 

(h)  The  paragogic  endings  !"J_  and  if-.,  when  suffixed  to 

verbs,  affect  the  tone  in  the  same  manner  as  the  formative 

suffixes  n_ ,  *1 ,  and  *_ . 

Of  course  they  draw  down  the  tone  upon  the  ultimate,  in  all  cases 
except  such  as  are  noted  above,  under  eyf,  and  g,  where  it  is  penacute 
with  these  paragogics. 

E.  g.  Milra,  rnaT  for  is T ,  Imp.  Piel  of  -im  .  Milel,  112 ON  for 
20K  ,  1  pers.  Fut.  of  320  ;  tttna  for  chj  ,  from  Q731 ;  STOips  for  asip; , 
from  Dip  . 

N6te.  ii._  and  n—  pargogic  are  rarely  added  to  any  persons,  ex- 
cept those  which  end  with  a  radical  letter  of  the  verb  ;  and  this  mostly 
in  the  Fut.  tense.  In  the  Praeter,  only  the  3d  pers.  feminine,  in  a  very 
few  cases,  receives  a  paragogic  ti_  or  !"F_ ,  (all  other  apparent  cases  of 
paragoge  in  the  Praeter  being  quite  doubtful)  ;  and  this  3d  pers.  femi- 
nine retains,  like  a  paragogic  noun,  the  accent  on  the  penult,  contrary 
to  h  above. 

E.  g.  npSunn  ,  Josh.  6:  17 ;  rrn&BS ,  2  Sam.  1:  26,  with  Pattahh 
under  N,  where  we  might  expect  Qamets. 

(i)  Nouns,  pronouns,  adverbs,  and  (in  a  few  cases)  partici- 
ples, are  pcnacutcd,  when  they  have  fi_  or  H-  paragogic  or 
local 

E.  g.  nsr  ,  f"J72n  ,  rtavo  ,  my  a  masc.  In  a  few  instances,  the  ac- 
cent  in  such  cases  is  found  on  the  ultimate. 

Note.  Yodh  paragogic  always  draws  down  the  accent  upon  itself, 
unless  there  are  special  causes  to  counteract  this. 

(j)  Verbs,  nouns,  etc.,  are  pcnacuted  with  the  following  sul- 
fix-pronouns;  viz.  fl-  *0_  hD-  *lfi_  *\Tl-  1»1_  ft-  ft-.  jO^ 
ttl  13l  itL  and  some  others;  also  withal.  Q_  "j- (short- 


54  §  101.    SHIFTING    OF   THE    TONE-SYLLABLE. 

ened  from  ^_  D_  ]_),  although  the  original  suffixes  inclu- 
ded in  the  parenthesis  are  Milfa  or  acuted  on  the  ultimate. 

The  suffix  pronoun  Tj ,  preceded  by  a  Sheva  vocal,  is  Milrd ;  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel,  Mild;  e.  g.  \^p  ,  but  rfytt . 

(Jc)  Nun  epenthetic  always  makes  the  tone  penult ;  e.g. 
^ISJ ,  fijjnp  .  Nun  paragogic  always  brings  it  to  the  final 
syllable;  as  WISH,  but  with  Nun,  "prVlfflF]. 

(/)   Pause-accents  frequently,  (sometimes  other  accents), 

occasion  the  tone  to  stand  upon  the  penult,  when  its  regular 

place  would  be  on  the  ultimate;  and  vice  versa. 

E.  g.  sj:n3 ,  wn: ,  n»*l ,  nta*2  .  This  properly  belongs  to  the  next 
head ;  but  it  is  well  here  to  advertise  the  student,  that  there  is  a  class 
of  penacuted  words,  which  are  made  so  as  it  were  accidentally,  their 
proper  accent  being  on  the  ultimate.] 

Shifting  of  the  tone-syllable. 

[§  101.  The  rules  in  §  99.  §  100,  constitute  the  regular  and  usual 
principles  of  accentuation.  But  the  tone-syllable  is  often  shifted  from 
its  natural  place ;  e.  g. 

(a)     Vav  prefixed  to  the  Praeter  of  verbs,  commonly 

makes  the  word  Milra.    2>~v?/3  •  JUuj  r- 

E.  g.  wi«j ,  "£n:n2h ;  nbb** ,  fcfrs&n  ;  Hiph.  rtr&sn ,  ntaam. 

So  too  in  verbs  99  and  12 ,  §  100./,  g,  and  also  in  h. 

Exceptions.  (1)  Always,  the  first  pers.  plur.  of  verbs  ;  as  W*TO4ti  . 
(2)  Generally,  verbs  whose  third  radical  is  a  Quiescent;  as  ntfVr, 
rY^I,  nani.  (3)  Verbs  with  a  pause-accent  on  the  penult;  see/ 
above.  (4)  When  a  tone-syllable  immediately  follows,  the  tone  is  then 
commonly  (not  always)  thrown  back;  as  nan  TOnf©1)  . 

NOTE.     Besides  these  exceptions,  there  are  other  occasional  instances  of  exception  to  the  rule 
in  a  above,  which  either  want  of  consistency,  or  inaccuracy  in  transcribers,  has  occasioned. 

(6)    Vav  conversive  prefixed  to  the  Future,  commonly  (not 

always)  makes  the  word  Milel  V^V^?^  s>^c  0J 

E.  g.  ^73^  ,  *l  73^*1 .  In  such  cases,  the  verb  must  end  with  a  rad- 
ical letter,  and  its  penult  syllable  be  simple ;  otherwise  the  change  in 
question  is  excluded. 


§§  101 103.    CRITICAL   MARKS,    ETC.  55 

Note  1.  Apocopated  verbs  with  a  furtive  final  vowel,  are  all  ac- 
cented on  the  penult  in  the  Future.     See  §  182.  2.  y.  §  288. 

Note  2.  Futures  with  Vav  conversive  remain  Milra,  (a)  In  the 
first  pers.  sing. ;  as  ^EB] .  (6)  In  verbs  ab ;  as  ttV^l .  (c)  With  a 
pause-accent  on  the  final  syllable. 

(c)  The  particle  7&  (not)  before  the  Future,  usually  (not 
always)  makes  it  Mild. 

E.  g.  rpin-b^  do  not  reprove,  Pjoin^bN  you  must  not  add,  with  the 
tone  on  the  penult.  But  here  practice  is  not  uniform,  as  the  accent  is 
sometimes  on  the  ultimate. 

Verbs  Tib  preceded  by  btt ,  commonly  suffer  both  apocope  and  re- 
traction of  the  accent. 

(d)  A  word  regularly  Milra,  if  immediately  followed  by  a 
tone-syllable,  more  usually  becomes  Milel. 

E.  g.  ip  "•Din  ,  regularly  accented  ""Bin;  ^1N  n^2  ,  standing  alone, 
Fnp .  But  as  the  penult  syllable  is  often  not  adapted  to  receive  an  ac- 
cent, and  as  the  change  of  tone  would,  in  some  cases,  have  a  tendency 
to  obscure  the  sense  in  reading,  the  usage  in  question  is  often  neg- 
lected. 

(c)  The  Imp.  and  Fut.  apocopated,  with  an  optative  or 
hortative  seme,  commonly  (not  always)  throw  back  the  ac- 
cent. 

E.  g.  1*5^n  keep  thyself  for  ^b^n  ;  H*}\  let  him  see,  for  fft|^  ; 
SJ^fj  for  nipn  .  The  Future  always  does  this,  when  it  has  a.  furtive 
vowel. 

N.  B.  Pause  accents  frequently  occasion  the  tone  to  be  shifted  both 
forwards  and  backwards ;  see  above,  §  100.  /.] 


CRITICAL  MARKS  AND  MASORETIC  NOTES. 

[§  102.  In  the  common  editions  of  the  Bible  with  Masoretic  notes, 
etc.,  a  small  circle  over  any  word,  e.  g.  NSptl ,  shews  that  the  margin 
is  to  be  consulted,  either  for  a  different  reading  (as  Gen.  8:  17,  tt^n 
in  the  case  above),  or  for  liter ae  major es  or  minor es,  Pisqa,  puncta  ex- 
traordinaria,  etc.  The  mark  (*)  over  words  in  Van  der  Hooght,  etc., 
refers.to  a  marginal  note.] 

[§  103.     Qeri  and  Kethibh.     There  are  a  considerable  number  of 

SIT! 


56  §§  103,  104.    CRITICAL   MARKS,    ETC. 

marginal  readings  (about  1000)  in  our  common  Hebrew  Bibles,  most 
of  which  are  quite  ancient.  Some  of  them  correct  grammatical  anom- 
alies, some  are  euphemisms,  and  some  propose  a  different  word.  They 
are  probably  the  result  of  an  ancient  recension  of  Hebrew  manuscripts. 
The  marginal  word  is  called  ",np  Qeri,  which  means  read;  i.  e.  this 
word  is  to  be  read  instead  of  the  word  in  the  text  to  which  it  relates, 
and  which  is  called  VT}%  Kethibh,  i.  e.  written  or  text.  The  vowel- 
points  under  the  Kethibh  belong  to  the  Qeri,  which  is  printed  without 
points.  If  a  word  is  omitted  in  the  text,  the  vowel-points  stand  in  the 
place  with  a  small  circle  over  them,  while  the  letters  belonging  to  them 
are  printed  in  the  margin ;  as  in  Judges  20:  13.  This  is  called  "^O 
H^tp  rib"]  ,  read  but  nut  written.  If  a  word  is  superfluous  in  the  text, 
it  is  left  unpointed  ;  as  in  Ezek.  48:  16.  This  is  called  -nj?  rib]  3*tpt , 
written  but  not  read.] 

§  104.  Literae  majores  et  minores  distinguish  themselves,  §  10. 
Pisqd  (N£ps)  means  separation,  i.  e.  a  space  left  in  the  text  in  the 
middle  of  a  verse  ;  as  in  Gen.  35:  22. 

Puncta  extraordinaria  are  marked  thus,  •ihj^ttJVi  .  See  Gen.  18:9. 
33:  44,  where  are  examples  of  points  over  the  letters  which  are  extra- 
ordinaria. 

The  Rabbins  regard  these  as  designating  some  mysterious  significations  of  the  words  over 
which  they  are  placed.  Probably  the  original  design  of  them  was,  to  denote  that  the  reading 
was  suspicious.  The  number  of  words  over  which  they  are  found  is  only  fifteen.  For  a  full  ac- 
count of  all  the  marginal  and  other  notes  in  the  Masoretic  editions  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  see  the 
preface  to  Van  der  Hooght's  Hebrew  Bible,  $§  23-- 25.  See  also  the  like  explanations,  at  the  close 
of  Hahn's  edition  of  the  Hebrew  Bible. 


PART  II. 

CHANGES   AND   PECULIARITIES  OF  CONSONANTS 
AND  VOWELS. 


CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS. 

[§  105.  It  is  a  principle  occasionally  developed  in  the  Hebrew  lan- 
guage, that  letters  of  the  same  organ  are  easily  commuted.  E.  g.  la  j  ^h 
J^3  ,  all  mean  back ;  and  the  like  in  a  number  of  cases,  in  the  different 
classes  of  letters  mentioned  in  §  12.  But  changes  of  this  nature  be- 
long to  lexicography,  as  they  do  not  affect  the  grammatical  forms  of 
words.] 

§  106.  The  changes  which  affect  the  consonants,  may  be 
ranked  under  (a)  dissimilation,  (b)  Casting  away,  (c)  Ad- 
dition,    (d)  Transposition. 

§107.  (a)  Assimilation.  Several  consonants  are  occa- 
sionally assimilated ;   viz. 

[  (1)  In  the  first  syllable  of  words ;  viz.  (a)  Nun  most  frequently 
of  all ;  e.  g.  n-JE  for  ^212  from  this,  ti\)  for  tiz^  .  This  is  very  com- 
mon in  verbs  "JD  (§  252),  but  not  universal.  (6)  Lamedh  rarely  ;  pro- 
bably in  the  article  bn  in  all  cases  (§  163),  as  E"]a"in  for  tnfci)  bri , 
etc.  Also  in  the  verb  n^b ;  as  Fut.  n[P?  for  fi^b"; .  (c)  Kesh  very 
seldom  ;  in  *TiJ8  ,  as  l^n^tp  instead  of  ^n")  T&N  ,  who  will  be ;  ND3 
for  ND112  ,  which  is  the  form  of  the  word  in  Syriac  and  Arabic,  (d) 
Tav ;  as  in  the  praeformative  nn  (in  Hithpael),  where  it  often  assimi- 
lates itself  to  the  first  radical  of  the  verb,  e.  g.  nsnn  for  na^nn  etc. ; 
see  §  187.  b.  2.  3.  (e)  Mem ;  but  only  in  a  few  foreign  words,  as 
THh  for  VBTab  ,  in  Greek  XafAizaSeg.     (f)   Yodh;  in  some  verbs  "D, 

(2)  In  the  last  syllables  of  words.  In  all  the  cases  under  No.  1,  the 
assimilation,  as  we  have  seen,  is  indicated  by  a  Daghesh  forte  in  the 
letter  with  respect  to  which  such  assimilation  takes  place.  But  assimi- 
lation occasionally  happens  at  the  end  of  words,  where  a  Daghesh  forte 
cannot  be  written,  §  72.  This  takes  place  in  cases  where  a  furtive 
vowel  would  stand  in  the  final  syllable  of  a  word,  provided  its  full  form 
were  given  to  it ;  e>  g.  nn  for  n:n,  f]n  for  t\zh ,  n2  for  naz,  etc. 
8 


58  §§  108,    109.    CHANGES    OF    CONSONANTS. 

So  also  nb  for  rrVr,  nita  for  mn« .  nmoa  for  nnhttiJB,  muifc  for 

f    v  t     : 

Note.  A  long  vowel  in  such  cases  of  assimilation  and  contraction 
(as  nn  for  n:Fi),  is  rather  unusual.  The  other  examples  here  exhibit 
only  Pattahh,  as  the  vowel  appropriate  to  the  contracted  form. 

Remark.  All  languages  have  a  practical  tendency  toward  shortening  words, 
and  assimilating  some'of  the  letters.  £.  g.  in  Greek.  ovMaufavu  instead  of  ovv- 
XauSuro)  ;  and  so  at  the  end  of  words,  ojtorg  for  6S6rr  (Gen.  686rrog),  Kh}U)'tg  for 
lG.rtii,\vT  (Gen.  KXrt^,\viog).     In  Latin,  illustris  for  iidustris,  etc.] 

§  108.   (6)  Consonants  cast  away  or  dropped.      Instances 
of  this  nature  occur;   viz. 

[  (a)  At  the  beginning  of  words,  by  aphaeresis,  when  a  Sheva  would 
be  under  the  first  letter.  E.g.  (1)  Aleph;  as  ISftj  for  1!3r]3jX  ,  and 
so  not  unfrequently.  (2)  YodJi;  as  *\\  for  lb"] ,  3b*3  forbW.  (3) 
Mem;  as  njsb  for  n|>bE .  (4)  Nun;  as  ]fi  for  |l}3 .  It  is  doubtful 
whether  any  letter  which  has  a  proper  vowel,  suffers  aphaeresis.  It 
seems  to  be  limited  to  cases  where  Sheva  is  used  under  a  letter. 

{b)  In  the  middle  of  words,  by  Syncope.  This  happens,  when  a 
Sheva  immediately  precedes  the  letter  dropped.  In  cases  of  syncope, 
the  vowel  of  the  letter  syncopated  takes  the  place  of  this  Sheva ;  e.  g. 

qbfc  for  vfesn ,  tnnj?  for  s\\-)p;  n»y  for  mjVrp ,  TfbEb  for  ^barjb ; 

**  for  n*,  "»3*for  ^3;  =)ba  for  «i^j;  *?3  for  JfgS  ,  etc.  Syncope  of  N 
is  pretty  frequent ;  of  Ji ,  very  common  ;  of  1  and  "• ,  more  seldom,  ex- 
cept in  verbs  nb  ;  of  9  very  rare  ;  see  §  118  seq. 

(c)  At  the  end  of  words,  by  apocope,  (l )  Mem  and  Nun  at  the 
end  of  all  plural  nouns,  etc.,  in  the  construct  state  ;  see  §  333.  c.  (2) 
Perhaps  Nun  at  the  end  of  some  proper  names;  as  IT; 73  for  yilXQ  . 
(3)  n  final  is  usually  dropped  when  words  receive  suffixes,  etc. 

Note.  The  omission  or  dropping  of  the  Quiescents  as  such,  which 
often  happens,  is  treated  of  in  §§  63 — 65.] 

§109.  (c)  Consonants  added.  T-his  sometimes  happens, 
[(a)  At  the  beginning  of  words,  by  prosthesis  ;  e.  g.  :V3P)  and 
bifcna;  nts  ,  -tt3«;  (so  Greek  x&*$,  h&*e).  (b)  In  the  middle  of 
words,  by  epenthesis  ;  e.  g.  TjKDNfcfi$  ;  J|3R.Rfi$  for  *){$$.  Epenthe- 
sis  is  most  frequently  resorted  to,  in  order  to  replace  the  latter  of  two 
liquid  letters,  which  might  have  regularly  been  used.  See  an  instruc- 
tive exhibition  of  this,  in  Ges.  Heb.  Lex.  under  bb^T .  (c)  At  the  end 
of  words,  by  par  agog  e  ;  as  Hbtjgtn  l*SflR?  *  AJs0  *S  an(*  ^"i  are 
frequently  added  by  paragoge  ;  so  *>_.  and  T  sometimes,  to  participles 
and  nouns.     See  §  125.  6.  c.  d,] 


§§  110 113.    PECULIARITIES    OP    GUTTURALS,    ETC.  59 

§  110.  (d)  The  grammatical  transposition  of  letters  is  lim- 
ited principally  to  the  conjugation  Hithpael,  when  it  begins 
with  a  sibilant  letter;  §  187.6. 

[In  lexicography  there  are  a  considerable  number  of  transpositions  ; 
e.  g.  3U33  and  tons,  a  lamb;  »13te  and  Y"nS,  to  break;  Mibs?  and 
rfblSj ,  wickedness,  etc.  Such  transpositions  are  most  frequent,  between 
the  Sibilants  and  Resh. 

Note.  The  exchange  of  a  letter  for  one  of  the  corresponding  class 
which  may  fill  its  place,  is  not  an  unfrequent  thing  in  lexicography ; 
as  T^2  ,  y\%  ,  and  Db^  .  to  exult;  naO  and  -DD  ,  to  shut  up.  But 
these  changes  belong  not  to  grammar,  'in  Hithpael  only  is  the  trans- 
position in  question  a  grammatical  one  ;  §  187.  b.] 


PECULIARITIES  OF  THE  GUTTURALS  AND  RESH. 

§  1 11.   The  Gutturals  are  never  doubled  in  pronunciation ; 

and  Resh  in  this  respect  is  usually  like  them.      Hence  Da- 

ghesh  forte  (which  is  a  sign  of  reduplication)  is  not  admissible 

in  the  Gutturals,  nor  usually  in  Resh. 

A  few  cases  only  occur  of  Daghesh  forte  in  Resh  ;  as  n^3 , ,  rp.u) , 
rna ,  etc. 

§  112.  As  a  compensation  for  Daghesh  forte  excluded 
from  the  Gutturals  and  Resh,  the  preceding  vowel  is  length- 
ened; §58.  andcomp.  §59. 

E.g.  ?jn3  instead  of  rj^3,  Bang  instead  of  Ctftt,  *]-}3  instead  of 
?p3 ,  etc.  But  ti  and  n  commonly  take  impure  Pattahh  before  them 
(§  29) ;  as  bH3  instead  of  bn3 ;  t^ntf  instead  of  aTw  . 

[Note.  In  a  great  number  of  cases,  Pattahh  impure  and  long  is 
employed  as  a  compensative  vowel ;  almost  always  before  Ji  and  M  , 
when  the  A  sound  is  required.  In  other  cases,  impure  Hhireq  (§  29) 
is  sometimes  adopted  instead  of  Tseri ;  e.  g.  ^3  (not  *")3-3)  instead  of 
"lira  Ms-sir ;  so  Y$:  (not  ye*:)  for  y-ND ;  also  Qibbuts  long  and  im- 
pure instead  of  Hholem,  as  n5blT3  (not  n»r$)  instead  of  nrn2  .  It  fol- 
lows that  the  student  must  not  always  expect  a  vowel  long  in  appear- 
ance before  the  Gutturals ;  for  impure  long  Pattahh  and  Hhireq  are 
frequently  used  instead  of  Qamets  and  Tseri ;  §  29.  The  use  of  im- 
pure Qibbuts  (except  as  being  vicarious  for  Shureq)  is  unfrequent.] 

§  113.    The  Gutturals  usually  take  the  A  sound  before 


60  §§  113 115.    PECULIARITIES    OF    QUIESCENTS. 

them;  most  frequently  in  a  final  syllable,  but  not  unfrequent- 

ly  in  a.,  penult  one. 

E.  g.  3>fc*45  (Imp.)  instead  of  Step ,  3n\  instead  of  Sn\  .  In  a  penult 
syllable ;  *>K  instead  of  "\s\ ,  S^n^  instead  of  STan^ . 

[Note  1.  In  almost  all  cases,  where  the  final  syllable  has  a  Guttural 
at  the  end,  and  has  also  a  mutable  vowel,  that  vowel  is  exchanged  for 
Pattahh;  as  Kal  Imp.  S»33 ,  instead  of  sfatt};  Piel  »ari  ,  instead  of 
3?73tf5 ,  etc. 

Note  2.  In  case  the  final  syllable  with  a  Guttural  has  a  long  vowel, 
which  is  immutable,  Pattahh  furtive  is  put  under  the  Guttural,  as 
qwgtiri ,  Jjfej  ,  etc.     See  §  69. 

Note  3.  Resh  never  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive ;  and  in  this  respect 
is  not  like  the  Gutturals.] 

§  1 14.   Instead  of  simple  Sheva  vocal,  the  Gutturals  usual- 
ly take  a  composite  Sheva;  comp. §49. 

E.g.  nbN  ,  *jbj"l,^?rTN  But  Sheva  simple  stands  under  the  Gut- 
turals, at  the  end  of  a  mixed  syllable  and  after  a  short  vowel,  i.  e.  when- 
ever a  silent  Sheva  is  required  :  as  "^V ,  H^fp*  ;  comp.  §  50. 


PECULIARITIES  OF  QUIESCENTS. 

In  treating  of  the  vowels,  it  was  necessary  to  notice  the  quiescent  and 
otiant  power  of  the  letters  fit  Sri  .*»  (Ehevi),  §^  53 — 57,  so  far  as  might 
serve  to  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  vowel  sounds  in  which  they  quiesce. 
But  a  more  particular  notice  of  the  various  phases  and  powers  of  these 
letters  is  demanded  ;  and  such  an  one  is  intended  to  be  given  here. 

Principles  which  regulate  Quiescence. 
§  115.  The  letters  tf ,  1,  ^  (Evi)  quiesce,  when  a  homo- 
geneous vowel  precedes  them  (§  53),  and  according  to  the 
analogy  of  other  consonants  they  would  stand  at  the  end  of  a 
mixed  syllable,  and  take  a  simple  Sheva  silent  either  express- 
ed or  implied  ;  §  56.  2. 

E.  g.  KS72  instead  of  W£tt=«2?3  ,  JTT)rP2  instead  of  min'S  ,  ntt^ 
instead  of  ae^  ,  nunn  instead  of  aUtttt. 

Note.  If  the  preceding  vowel  be  naturally  heterogeneous,  yet  in 
many  cases  this  does  not  exclude  quiescence,  because  a  peculiar  expe- 


§§  116—118.    PECULIARITIES    OF    QUIESCENTS.  61 


dient  is  often  adopted  in  order  to  effect  it;  see  §  117.  1.  Comp.  with 
this,  §  56.  3. 

Such  is  the  general  rule  for  cases  of  quiescence,  subject  however  to 
many  exceptions.     But  quiescence  is  not  limited  to  this  case  only ;  for, 

§  116.      Quiescence  sometimes  happens,  when  the  Evi 

would  (by  analogy)  have  a  vowel;     specially  when  they 

would  take  a  fur live  one ;   comp.  §  1 19.  c.  3.  §  120.  c. 

E.  g.  sip  instead  of  Dig,  tnp  instead  of  tftlgj  naxa:  instead  of 
nasttD ,  sstfn  instead  of  dip  ,  rriba  instead  of  niSa ,  n^X  instead  of 
n^3U3 ;  and  so  often,  when  the  vowel  preceding  the  furtive  one  is  ho- 
mogeneous. But  usage  only  can  enable  the  learner  to  distinguish  such 
cases. 

§117.     The  general  rule  demands  that  the  preceding 

vowel  should  be  homogeneous,  as  a  condition  of  quiescence ; 

but  quiescence  is  often  effected  in  cases  when  such  preceding 

vowel  would  be  naturally  heterogeneous.  This  happens  in  two 

two  different  ways; 

( 1)  The  vowel  may  conform  to  the  Quiescent,  in  order  to 

become  homogeneous. 

E.  g.  for  i'^n  (which  would  be  the  regular  analogous  form),  is 
substituted  l^in,  i.  e.  the  heterogeneous  short  Hhireq  in  the  syllable 
"vn  ,  conforms  to,  or  becomes  homogeneous  with,  the  Vav  in  in  .     So 

ribiv  for  nbi  v ,  n?bs  for  rvba  ,  etc. 

(2)  The  Quiescent  may  conform  to  the  vowel,  so  as  to 
become  homogeneous  with  it. 

E.  g.  tJNjJ  for  Dig  ,  nb2  for  *fe| ,  nb«j  for  ibjj  ,  etc. 

Fractico  only  can  teach  the  student,  what  cases  come  within  these  rules. 

Special  usage  in  regard  f o  fi* ,  rt ,  1 ,  V 

§  1 18.  The  letters  N ,  1 ,  ^ ,  and  likewise  fl ,  having  a  vow- 
el of  their  own,  and  being  preceded  by  a  consonant  with  She- 
va,  oftentimes  remit  their  vowel  to  the  place  of  the  preceding 
Sheva,  and  become  either  otiant  or  quiescent. 
E.  g.  tnttJin  for  trisan ,  ]iuj*n  for  "p&K1-) ,  lata  for  ^ns  ,  !-nas> 


62 


§§  118,  119.    PECULIARITIES    OF    QUIESCENTS. 


for  rT}H»;  ana  for  tfi3  (bzvo)  Dip  for  Dip,  ^  for"'!?,  ^3  for  *p ; 
i-jya  for  tta^K,  rtttVj  for  rtJO^Jt ,  ]inn^  for'fnn^,  lb*  (with  Yodh 
omitted)  for  :pba ,  etc.  So  in  respect  to  nj  e.  g.  ?jb72b  for  Sfeftfj , 
V^ftb  for  b^Ogrt!? ,  etc. ;  see  Note  3  below. 

[Note  1.  This  has  been  usually  named  Syriasm  ;  but  improperly, 
since  it  appears  so  very  often  in  Hebrew  (taking  all  the  cases  together) 
as  to  shew  that  it  is  a  property  of  the  dialect,  and  not  the  result  of  error 
in  Syriazing  transcribers.  Usage  only  can  determine  the  cases  in 
which  it  is  admitted. 

Note  2.  Such  instances  have  also  been  represented  by  all  the 
grammarians  as  mere  quiescence,  in  respect  to  tt.  That  they  are  not 
so,  however,  but  cases  of  otium,  seems  to  be  plain  from  the  following 
examples ;  viz.  Dtfnpb  (instead  of  DN^pb),  which  with  a  sing,  suffix 
makes  inanpb  ,  with  a  plural  one  tp>ni<npl? ;  so  rDttbw  (instead  of 
•"Dtfb 73),  construct  state  rDtf b^ft  ,  with  suffix  ^POttb 73 ;  shewing  that 
the  Pattahh  is  not  affected  by  the  tt  in  such  cases,  but  still  remains 
short  (as  it  plainly  is)  in  the  syllables  niO  ,  2Kb  .  Aleph  then  appears 
to  have  no  effect  on  the  mutability  or  quantity  of  the  vowel  which  pre- 
cedes it,  in  such  cases ;  and  consequently  it  is  otiant.  Instances  of 
Vav,  Yodh,  and  He,  do  not  occur  in  the  same  way  as  those  above  of 
Aleph  ;  but  such  cases  as  "•$  for  *|$D ,  ^  for  "n* ;  fcfl  for  **?Y; ,  *bift 
for  ">^an ,  SjJp|V  for  lV?.~~  »  etc-»  shew  that  Vav>  Yodh,  and  He,  do 
become  quiescent  or  otiant,  and  in  the  like  way  with  N.  Yodh  and  Vav 
are  usually  retained  in  such  words  as  JlT^N  (for  n73^),  N13  (for  tfia) ; 
and  in  these  cases  they  appear  to  be  quiescent.  The  principle  is  ex- 
tensive in  regard  to  Vav  and  Yodh  in  the  so  called  verbs  nb  ,  which 
are  properly  lb  and  ""b;  and  it  will  account  for  a  great  part  of  the 
abridged  forms  of  these  verbs;  see  §  281. 

Note  3.  N ,  1 ,  *,  tt ,  being  quiescent  or  otiant,  are  frequently 
omitted  in  writing  ;  e.  g.  P|£M  for  P)V«73  ,  bill!  for  bttK?  '■>  ^  for  ^"® 
bevo,  ibti  for  tttyg;  *3  for  *15  ,  fcj£  for  V"^ ,  b^ppb  for  b^Bpnb  , 
etc. ;  see  §  57.  §  63.  Vav  and  Yodh  are  usually  dropped  when  otiant, 
and  He  always  when  it  is  in  the  middle  of  a  word.] 

,',  Peculiarities  of  Aleph. 

[§  111E  These  are  so  many,  that  they  need  a  separate  statement. 

(a)  Aleph  is  sometimes,  (1)  A  Guttural;  as  in  *$3&V  (2)  A 
Quiescent ;  as  in  ^fc^ ,  tt£73  .  (3)  It  is  sometimes  treated  as  a  com- 
mon moveable  consonant ;  as  in  tt£b  ,  plur.  S.nKb3 ,  ST£fc*3  boS-shd. 
Usage  only  can  lead  to  the  proper  knowledge  of  the  respective  cases  of 
such  a  nature. 


§§  119,  120.    PECULIARITIES    OF    QUIESCENTS.  63 

(b)  Aleph  at  the  end  of  a  word  has  no  guttural  power  (comp.  §  69, 
Note),  but  is  either  quiescent,  otiant,  or  employed  like  other  conso- 
nants; e.  g.  quiescent,  as  in  tf£S;  otiant,  as  in  iOSttn ,  IHFJ£  ,  see 
§  57.  b.  a ;  or  it  retains  a  common  consonant  power,  as  in  Segholates, 
e.  g.  aba  ,  plur.  trabs  ;  NSD  ,  with  suffix  Qttno  sobh-Xdm. 

(c)  Aleph  in  the  middle  of  a  word.  (1)  Like  other  Gutturals,  it 
takes  a  composite  Sheva  where  they  take  one.  But  in  some  cases  it 
drops  such  Sheva,  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel  and  lengthens 
it ;  e.  g.  Sfe'tt^  instead  of  n'tt*6  ,  CTrbttb  instead  of  n^rrbttb  ,  HSfitJ  in- 
stead of  fTlMX,  Sntf  for  anNfit ,  etc. ;  comp.  §  152.  c.  2.  These  may 
be  called  cases  of  contraction.  In  fnrPb  the  points  are  not  appropriate ; 
for  the  Jews  read  ",317fi*b=",;:7^b ,  as  the  Pattahh  seems  to  be  long. 
The  word,  however,  is  sui  generis  in  respect  to  form.  (2)  But  where 
other  Gutturals  take  a  Sheva  silent  (§  114  in  e.  g.),  Aleph  usually  be- 
comes quiescent,  e.  g.  TiNSft  ;  but  with  another  Guttural,  as  ^fihEto . 
(3)  Aleph  penult,  in  words  that  would  regularly  be  Segholates  and 
where  N  would  have  a  furtive  vowel,  more  usually  (not  always)  rejects 
such  furtive  vowel,  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel  (if  homoge- 
neous), and  lengthens  it  if  it  is  short;  e.  g.  irtfl  for  tzjfi^ ,  n&W;733  for 
nNsztt: ;  §  116.  (4)  Aleph  sometimes  remits  its  vowel  to  the  preced- 
ing letter  with  Sheva,  and  becomes  otiant ;  §  118. 

(d)  Aleph  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  (l)  If  it  have  a  proper  vow- 
el, it  is  regular.  (2)  If  it  should  regularly  have  a  composite  Sheva,  in 
some  few  cases  (after  the  manner  of  the  Syriac)  it  employs  along  vowel 
instead  of  it ;  e.  g.  ]1»N  ,  instead  of  ]ia$  ,  OnsON  for  Dni>ON  ,  *p)?Jlk 
for  *psnN  •  The  student  should  remember,  that  this  happens  only  at 
the  beginning  of  words,  and  also  that  it  is  not  frequent.] 

Peculiarities*  of  Vav  and  Yodh. 

[§  120.  (a)  At  the  end  of  syllables  and  words,  Vav  and  Yodh,  in 
case  they  would  regularly  have  a  silent  Sheva  and  are  preceded  by 
homogeneous  vowels,  uniformly  quiesce;  §  115.  (b)  They  quiesce  at 
the  end  of  words,  also,  when  analogically  they  would  be  preceded  by  a 
silent  Sheva  or  by  a  furtive  vowel ;  e.  g.  *")B  instead  of  h-)D  or  We  , 
W  for  W  or  \"P  ,  Itiz  instead  of  iris,  inhaji  for  inn'^  with  Pat- 
tahh  furtive.     To  this  principle  there  are  a  few  exceptions  in  respect 

!  to  Vav  ;  e.  g.  r£$ . 

Note.     With  tt  the  case  is  different;   e.  g.  8tt3h  (instead  of  tftih) 

'  with  a  otiant ;  on  the  other  hand,  Mb 3  with  tt  moveable  like  other  con- 

!  sonants. 


64 


§§  121 124.    PECULIARITIES    OP    QUIESCENTS. 


(c)  Vav  and  Yodh  penult,  which  would  regularly  take  a  furtive 
vowel,  reject  it,  and  quiesce  in  a  preceding  homogeneous  vowel ;  e.  g. 
rribiJ  instead  of  f^Sl  ge-lo-veth,  man  instead  of  np"J  rfSo-veth,  rPSip 
instead  of  rTZi'dJ;  comp.  §  119.  c.  3.] 

Peculiarities  of  He. 

[§  121.  (c)  -4£  Me  beginning  and  in  the  middle  of  words,  when  re- 
tained, it  is  always  a  moveable  consonant.  Apparent  exceptions  are 
some  compound  proper  names  (as  "ilXfr^S  with  quiescent  Pi),  which 
depend  only  on  the  transcriber,  {b)  At  the  end  of  words,  it  is  nearly 
always  quiescent ;  as  nba  gct-ld,  §  54.  When  moveable  it  is  marked 
with  Mappiq ;  as  MiiJ  gd-bhah,  §  84.  (c)  Like  K,  it  is  capable  of 
having  a.  furtive  homogeneous  vowel  before  it  without  quiescence,  e.  g. 
rp?. ,  J-jsp. ,  JiD 3  ,  etc. ;  for  it  must  in  such  cases  be  considered  as 
moveable  ;  comp.  8  in  §  119.  b,  in  Nr3  ,  etc.  (d)  He  M  is  frequently 
made  otiant,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  by  a  Daghesh  forte  euphonic ;  e.  g. 
nr-nfc=nT» ,  aita-rin  mdt-tbbh,  ">-)D  rtf$5>  yd-sep-ptri.  But  this  be- 
longs merely  to  modes  of  reading,  and  not  to  the  grammatical  forms  of 
the  language.] 

Commutation,  Apocope,  and  Paragoge  of  Quiescents. 

§  122.  Commutation.  This  naturally  results  from  the  fact,  that  the 
same  vowels  are  homogeneous  with  different  Quiescents.  (1)  At  the 
end  of  words.     E.  g. 


K- 

is  put 

for    tt- 

as    amp    fo 

r     tihnp 

t    :»t 

*C 

F»* 

.    .      NI^H      . 

^.R* 

«T. 

'    !> 

•  •  N?.,,2r.  * 

roup 

tf- 

i"»— 

ate    . 

ris 

T 

.   .    ttttJptt      .    . 

aujpa 

w-3 

tf-r. 

<*ik 

i- 

N- 

.  .     eni    .  . 

«ftf*l 

i- 

ri- 

te;    . 

ritKv 

n 

N-. 

trn    . 

Bfr"j 

i__ 

»- 

.  .  |^i    .  . 

fiftorj 

(2)  Sometimes  in  the  middle  of  words ;    as  tFAtaS  for  tP^as ,  Ef.p. 
for  C|\p,  S^fl  for  3|t| . 

§  124.     Apocope.      Not  only  are  Quiescents  frequently 

omitted  in  writing  words  (§  63),  but  apocope  in  certain  cases  is 

even  a  law  of  the  language. 


§§  125 127.    CHANGES    OF   THE    VOWELS.  65 

[  (a)  In  verbs  nb  ,  in  the  apoc.  Fut.  and  Imper.,  and  when  they  have 
suffixes  :  §  283.  3.  y.  313. 

(b)  In  nouns  with  suffixes  or  increase,  derived  from  the  same  class 
of  verbs;  §378.6.] 

§  125.  Paragoge.  The  Quiescents  (with  a  vowel  pre- 
ceding them)  often  constitute  a  paragogic  ending. 

[  (a)  Aleph  is  sometimes  paragogic,  after  the  syllables  "»_  ,  T ,  1 ; 
e-  S-  ^?.l=  y.l }  Ki3^=i3^ ,  KsJ5bn=!lD^5  they  go.  This  last  form 
with  tt  paragogic,  is  a  usual  one  in  Arabic. 

(6)  Also  rr-  n-  n_;  e.  g.  bbp>*$,  r$t}jft.;  jtfj;,  !7}jj^;  ]n, 

(c)  More  seldom  n ;  e.  g.  pronoun  suffix  B__ ,  parag.  to- ;  so  the 
noun  n^h ,  parag.  irprt . 

(e?)  Rarely  ",_  ;  as  D"»p73 ,  Wj?73 ;  but  Forf/t  is  often  inserted  be- 
tween two  words  united  to  form  a  proper  name ;  e.  g.  ^)J  maw,  btf 
GW,  united  riO"D3  Gabriel,  i.  e.  man  of  God.] 

NOTE.  Several  pronouns  are  of  the  same  form  and  sound  as  some  of  these  paragogic  letters. 
In  such  cases,  the  connection  of  the  word  with  the  context  must  determine  whether  such  doubtful 
forms  are  pronouns  or  paragogic  letters. 


CHANGES  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

§  126.  The  changes  which  words  in  the  Hebrew  undergo,  in  order 
to  designate  their  various  relations  and  significations,  are  effected  partly 
by  a  change  in  the  vowels,  and  partly  by  a  change  in  the  consonants. 
The  laws  which  regulate  the  vowel-changes,  are  the  subject  of  our  pre- 
sent consideration. 

Vowels  Mutable  and  Immutable. 

§127.    General  principle.      Pure  vowels  are  mutable; 

impure  ones  immutable.      See  §  23.  seq. 

[Exceptions.  Long  impure  vowels  are  sometimes  exchanged,  (1)  For 
each  other  ;  as  DT273  plur.  D^OISE  ,  where  i  is  exchanged  for  \;  (2) 
For  long  pure  ones  ;  as  Imp.  2d  pers.  masc.  tnp  ,  2d  pers.  plur.  fem. 
rijS.j?  ,  with  Hholem  pure;  Niph.  Fut.  3d  masc.  sing.  Qip"]  with 
Hholem  impure  and  protracted,  3d  plur.  fem.  rt373J?!n  with  Hholem 
pure  and  mutable ;  Hiph.  Imper.  2d  pers.  plur.  masc.  ©**OP«3  ,  plur. 
fem.  M3bbpn  with  Tseri  pure.  (3)  For  short  pure  ones ;  as  bi"Ja , 
const,  -b'la  gedhol;  titt^h  ,  constr.  naJari.  (4)  For  Shevas;  e.  g. 
*  *9 


§§  127,  128.    CHANGES    OP   THE    VOWELS. 


nbx  ,  fern.  tinb-J .     All  long  pure  vowels  are  from  their  very  nature 
mutable. 

All  these  changes,  excepting  No.  1  and  the  first  instance  in  No.  3,  are  very  frequent  in  Hebrew. 
The  laws  of  declension,  in  such  cases,  supersede  the  usual  laws  of  the  vowels,  applicable  to  other 
cases  ;  so  that  one  can  call  no  vowel  in  Hebrew  absolutely  immutable  ;  all  being  liable  in  certain 
cases  to  change.  But  when  and  where  this  happens,  can  be  learned  only  by  practice.  Korean 
one  avoid  the  conclusion  above,  by  saying  that  the  different  persons,  genders,  etc.,  require  in 
themselves  different  vowels,  as  pure,  impure,  etc. ;  for  these  changes  are  in  the  usual  course  of  de- 
clension, conjugation,  regimen,  etc.,  which  occasion  almost  all  the  vowel  changes  in  the  language. 

Note  1.  The  composite  Shevas,  in  the  like  way,  are  frequently  ex- 
changed for  each  other,  in  the  course  of  declension :  e.  g.  DjfJra  masc. 
part.,  fern.  flOrM  ;  *lbfiT  ,  with  suffix  n:nD^  .  The  A  sound  appears 
to  be  shorter  than  the  E  sound. 

Note  2.  The  vowels  that  are  properly  and  usually  mutable,  are 
these ;  viz.  Qamets,  Tseri,  and  Hholem,  long  and  pure ;  Pattahh, 
Seghol,  Hhireq,  Qamets  Hhateph,  and  Qibbuts,  short  and  pure,  §  25. 
The  other  vowels  are  immutable  in  the  sense  above  denned,  i.  e.  they  re- 
main immutable,  unless  a  particular  form  of  a  word  becomes  more  im- 
perious than  the  usual  laws  of  the  vowel-changes.] 

Geseniu3  says,  that  the  quiescent  long  vowels  are  immutable  always  and  in  all  circumstances, 
Heb.  Gramm,  11th  edit.  $  25.  1.  But  surely  there  are  a  multitude  of  exceptions  to  this  rule,  as 
the  cases  above  presented  shew.  lie  also  states,  that  short  vowels  before  a  Daghesh  forte  are 
immutable,  $  25.  3;    but  he  must  have  overlooked  such  instances  as  >^^^  '  in  pause  "P^  etc. 

General  principles  of  Vowel-changes. 

§  128.  (a)  The  changes  of  vowels  for  each  other,  are  very 
generally  (not  always)  limited  to  the  respective  classes  to 

which  they  belong;  §19. 

Note.  A  few  seeming  exceptions  appear ;  e.  g.  IS  plur.  S^pa  ; 
in*l5a  plur.  tr-nitt  .  So  Hiph.  b^n  ,  2  pers.  Pbiprr.  Every  lan- 
guage has  some  such  anomalies.  Practice  only  can  teach  how  to  dis- 
tinguish them, 

(6)  Each  long  mutable  vowel  has  one  or  more  corres- 
ponding short  ones,  for  which  it  may  be  exchanged ;  and  vice 
versa.    E.  g. 

Long  pure  Vowels,  Corresponding  short  ones. 

Qamets  (  t  )  Pattahh   ....(_ 

C  Pattahh  (sometimes)  ( 

Tseri       (  .. )  I  Seghol     .     .     .     .     I] 

(Hhireq     .     .     .     .     ( 

«-*■<■>      IS  Hhateph :  i: 


§§  129,  130.    CHANGES    OP    THE    VOWELS.  61 

Long  mutable  Vowels  exchanged  for  corresponding  short  ones. 

[§  129.  (a)  When  they  are  in  a  mixed  syllable  on  which 
the  tone  rested,  and  from  which  the  tone,  for  some  special 
cause,  has  been  removed  either  forward  or  backward. 

(1)  Forwards;  e.  g.  "n  ,  &V]-J  w\ ,  tJDtt^ ;  fzt,  Sffefj  &|p& 
i-.^P?  yiq-tol-khd  ;  =00^  ,  m^OIJ;  before  Maqqeph,  asb'3  ,  ^.^-^3 
hbl-^asher,  §  89.  (2)  Bachcards,  i.  e.  towards  the  right  hand ;  as 
=fo  i  ^.2 »  °Pr  >  *B?1  vay-yd-qom ;  tihti^ii  ,  BQ$j$$  .  The  reason  of 
such  changes  is,  that  long  vowels  cannot  stand  in  mixed  syllables  unless 
they  are  tone-syllables,  §  36.  Of  course,  when  the  tone  is  removed 
they  must  be  shortened. 

Note  1.  A  few  solitary  cases  are  found  of  apparent  exception  to 
this  principle ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  17:  35,  "Pfc^BSTJ  in  the  Kethibh.  But  the 
first  Yodh  here  is  merely  a  fulcrum,  §  64 ;  the  word  is  read  vd-ham%t" 
tiv,  with  the  first  i  short.  >        ^/  _ 

(6)  When  they  are  in  a  mixed  syllable,  which  the  con- 
struct state  requires  to  be  shortened, 

E.  g.  *Mxq  word,  but  Jlin,,;  "D?  the  word  of  Jehovah ;  where  the 
original  syllable  *il  is  shortened  to  *"Q ;  see  §  342.  b. 

(c)  Long  vowels  before  a  Daghesh  forte  latent  in  a  final 
letter  (not  a  Guttural),  when  a  change  in  them  is  required,  for 
the  most  part  are  exchanged  for  an  appropriate  short  vowel. 

E.  g.  (a)  Tseri  goes  into  Hhireq  parvum  ;  as  SK  (Daghesh  forte 
being  implied  in  the  D),  with  suffix  "»73N  .  (b)  Hholem  into  Qibbuts 
short;  as  pn,  hptj  ,  but  sometimes  into  Qamets  Hhateph,  as  Vf\  ^J 
oz-zi. 

Note.  If  the  tone  remains,  the  vowel  continues  long  in  such  cases ; 
e.  g.  ttauj  shdm-md,  ri73tl  hem-ma. 

(d)  A  pause  accent  falling  on  final  Tseri,  not  unfrequently 
changes  it  into  Pat tahh;  see  §145. 

Short  Vowels  in  mixed  syllables  may  become  long. 
§  130.    (a)  This  happens,  when  the  form  of  the  word  is 
so  changed  that  they  come  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable. 


1/ 


68  §§  130 133.    FALLING    AWAY    OP   THE    VOWELS. 

E.g.  TJ),  ^Tgi  a31-,nah;  btt£,  ibttj?.  So  of  course  before  a 
Quiescent :  as  tt£73  instead  of  N£73  ,  Sibil  instead  of  nba=nba  . 

[  (6)    When  a  Daghesh  forte  is  omitted  in  writing,  a  short 

vowel  placed  before  it  becomes  long ;  §  29  with  Note. 

E.  g.  *p3  instead  of  *f*&  ,  *p3  instead  of  *pa ,  *ps  instead  of 
3«g  ,  long  by  nature  and  form ;  brn  for  bna ,  EH:  for  Dn: ,  etc.,  long 
by  position ;  see  §  29. 

Note.  Daghesh  forte  implied  in  a  letter  at  the  end  of  a  word  ,  (it 
cannot  be  written  in  such  a  case,  §  72),  usually  prolongs  the  vowel 
which  precedes  ;  e.  g.  b}"  instead  of  b^,  EN  instead  of  73  N  ,  INrn  for 
^tf  rn  yith-avv ;  but  sometimes  the  vowel  remains  short,  as  bJP  for  J|jj , 
3D  (not  no)  for  33D  :  and  often  so  in  verbs  W . 

(c)    The  article  prefixed  to  a  few  words,  lengthens  the 

short  vowel  in  them. 

E.g.  to,c»rt;  in.^^^snj  -is,  *n**j  ffalfrijpf'' 
Usage  only  can  distinguish  such  cases  ;  and  they  are  not  numerous.] 

[§131.  A  pause-accent  falling  on  Pattahh  or  Seghol  pure, 

commonly  (not  always)  lengthens  them. 

E.g.  trio  0^73;  bin,  bill.  Occasionally  other  accents  do  the 
same ;  see  §  149.] 

Falling  away  of  the  vowels. 
§  132.   Vowels  are  said  to  fall  away,  when  they  are  drop- 
ped and  a  Sheva  takes  their  place. 

%[g.  S?|i  "Nfli  where  the  vowel  under  the  *  in  the  first  word, 
falls  away  in  the  second. 

Note.  Apocope  of  vowels  is  dropping  them  at  the  end  of  a  word  ; 
as  Ji33?  ,  ?p}»}  ,  where  the  Seghol  of  the  first  word  is  dropped. 

Falling  away  by  change  of  Tone-syllable. 

§  133.  (a)  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one  syllable, 
i.  e.  moved  toward  the  left  hand,  the  penult  vowel  of  the 
ground-form*  falls  away,  if  pure  and  mutable. 

*  The  ground-form  is  the  primary  one,  in  number,  gender,  or  tense,  to  which 
it  belongs  ;  the  original,  from  which  the  others  are  derived. 


§§  134,  135.    FALLING    AWAY    OF   THE    VOWELS.  69 

E.  g.  Sh1*  ,  nn^  ;  3Jb* ,  ^Jf.  If  the  tone  is  not  shifted,  the  vowel 
remains  ;  e.  g.  id* ,  'ISD* . 

(b)  If  the  tone  is  moved  forward  two  syllables ,  both  the 
ultimate  and  penult  vowels,  when  mutable,  fall  away. 

E.  g.  *fo\ ,  &Vl?2 ;  1P4 ,  tih^agt ;  where  both  vowels  of  the  ground- 
form  vanish.  In  regard  to  the  short  Hhireq  which  takes  the  place  of 
one  of  them,  see  §  137.  In  regard  to  Sheva  being  inserted  when  the 
vowel  is  dropped,  see  §  52. 

Falling  away  on  account  of  Regimen. 
[§  134.   Regimen  or  the  construct  state  (§  332)  often  oc- 
casions the  penult,  or  both  the  ultimate  and  penult  vowels  to 
fall  away,  if  they  are  pure  and  mutable. 

Note  1.  (a)  Regimen  in  the  singular  usually  causes  the ' penult 
mutable  vowel  to  fall  away ;  as  *s*£%  ,  in  reg.  rn^P  li'T  ,  where  the  first 
vowel  falls  away,  and  the  last  is  shortened.  The  suffix  state  has  the  like 
effect  on  the  penult  vowel,  e.  g.  "^ST  .  (b)  The  plural  regimen  causes 
both  the  ultimate  and  penult  vowels  to  be  dropped  ;  e.  g.  FT] ST]  nm$?$  • 
In  like  manner  grave  suffixes  affect  both  vowels  ;  e.  g.  D^n^ .  Comp. 
§  342.  b.  c. 

Note  2.  Vowels  must  be  pure,  in  order  to  fall  away.  Even  when 
they  are  so,  usage  does  not  always  treat  them  in  the  same  manner ; 
e.  g.  Wj  is  in  reg.  fiic  ,  but  ]3  in  reg.  makes  "J3  ,  the  first  retaining  the 
long  vowel,  and  the  second  shortening  it.     But  in  a  suffix  both  drop  it ; 

e.  g.  •aijj ,  tjs  . 

Note  3.  In  Segholate  forms  (Dec.  VI.  of  nouns),  the  final  vowel  is 
merely  furtive ;  so  that,  those  nouns  being  monosyllabic  in  theory,  regi- 
men makes  no  change  in  their  vowels.     See  paradigm  of  Dec.  VI.] 

Falling  away  on  account  of  Accession. 
[§  135.  (a)  Where  the  ground-form  of  a  word  receives 
an  accession  at  the  end  beginning  with  a  vowel,  which  requires 
its  ultimate  and  penult  consonants  to  be  united  in  the  same  syl- 
lable with  such  accession,  then  the  final  vowel  of  the  ground- 
form  falls  away,  if  mutable. 
This  happens  most  frequently  in  verbs ;   e.  g.  bDjJ ,  fem.  FrbttJ) , 


70 


§§  135 139.    RISE    OP    NEW    VOWELS 


*?Dj3? ,  plur.  rtv^l ;  "Q3  ,  fem.  TttXgi  part.  pres.  JjBj?  ,  fem.  rr3?tqp, 
plur.  D^btt'p;  in  Pie],  iTJ&tt  ,  fem.  ITlJa^a  ;  so  also  in  nouns  of  Dec. 
VII.,  as  n;«,  plur.  tp^jl. 

(6)  Where  only  the  final  consonant  is  united  with  an  acces- 
sory vowel,  and  the  penult  consonant  must  have  a  Sheva  si- 
lent, the  final  vowel  of  the  ground-form  falls  away. 

E.  g.  Imp.  fem.  I*0$S  (not  ^bp),  ground-form  bhfi ;  £ftO  (not 
^bbp),  ground-form,  bfep. 

Note  1.  If  only  the  final  letter  of  the  ground-form  is  to  be  united 
with  the  accessory  vowel,  and  the  penult  letter  must  retain  a  vowel  in- 
stead of  having  a  Sheva,  then  such  vowel  cannot  fall  away;  e.  g.  i8M  , 
with  suffix  ini'T ,  iSis  ,  plur.  D"»2Si3. 

Note  2.  Usage  only  will  enable  the  student  readily  to  distinguish 
the  cases  where  the  rule  is  to  be  applied.  We  can  see  no  reason  a 
priori,  why  the  Hebrews  might  not  have  said  llW  as  well  as  T^l' 
except  that  in  this  way  the  suffix-forms  are  distinguished  from  those 
made  by  simple  declension  which  mark  person  and  number.] 

Rise  of  New  Vowels. 

§  136.  We  have  seen  that  two  successive  vowels  may  fall  away 
(§  133.  b.  §  134),  on  account  of  the  tone  being  removed,  or  of  regimen. 
Tn  such  cases  an  impossible  syllable  would  arise,  i.  e.  one  with  three 
consonants  before  a  vowel,  §  42 ;  consequently  a  new  vowel  must  be  in- 
serted in  order  to  avoid  this. 

E.  g.  "D^,  constr.  plur.  *JM  dbhre.  But  this  is  inadmissible;  see 
§  42.  So  E'MJasj ,  constr.  *vp3N  (with  one  composite  Sheva),  which 
would  be  an  impossible  syllable.     A  vowel  must  therefore  be  supplied. 

§  137.    Incase  the  vowels  falling  away  leave  two  simple 
Shevas,  the  usual  supplied  vowel  is  short  Hhireq. 
E.  g.  ^DT  ,  plur.  constr.  TVja  instead  of  *"M. 
§  138.    But  if  one  of  the  two  letters  that  have  been  de- 
prived of  their  vowels,  is  a  Guttural,  then  Pattahh  or  Seghol 
must  be  the  supplied  vowel. 

E.  g.  tntt»8,  constr.  *$i»  instead  of  *#3N;  tPp^H  ,  constr.  '•fcbrt. 
[§  139.   If  an  accessory  letter  with  a  Sheva,  be  prefixed  to 
a  Guttural  having  a  composite  Sheva,  such  accessory  letter 


§§   140,  141.    FURTIVE    VOWELS,  ETC.  71 

takes  a  supplied  short  vowel  which  is  homogeneous  with  the 

composite  Sheva. 

E.g.  ^,but  with  prefix!?,  Wb;  Vbtf,  V3&6.;  "»bh»  "tym  60- 
hh°li .  But  the  Fut.  of  the  verbs  rnn  and  rprj  makes  n;rP  ,  ttW  • 
and  analogous  to  this  is  the  pointing  of  the  prefixes,  as  ni^nb,  con- 
trary to  the  analogy  of  other  guttural  forms.] 

[§  140,  When  in  varying  the  forms  of  words  it  so  hap- 
pens, that  analogically  two  Shevas  would  come  under  two 
successive  letters,  and  the  first  of  these  would  be  a  com- 
posite Sheva;  then  the  corresponding  short  vowel  is  sub- 
stituted for  such  composite  Sheva. 

E.  g.  SlSBJT)  instead  of  !"D5!l3,  which  would  make  an  impossible 
syllable.  So  ^bss  po-ol-khd  instead  of  ^bss  ;  Iftt}?!  instead  of  WJ35!  i 
The  ground  of  this  is,  that  from  their  nature  two  Shevas  cannot  stand 
together  unless  the  first  be  silent  and  the  second  vocal;  except  at  the 
end  of  a  word.  But  in  the  case  above,  the  first  is  vocal,  i.  e.  it  is  a 
composite  Sheva,  §  46.  a. ;  of  course  the  expedient  of  a  new  vowel 
must  be  adopted,  in  order  to  avoid  an  impossible  syllable.] 

Rise  of  furtive  Vowels. 
§  141.  As  the  Hebrews  rarely  admit  two  consonants  after 
a  vowel  in  the  same  syllable  (§  42) ;  so,  in  order  to  avoid  this, 
they  supply  a  furtive  vowel  in  most  cases  where  such  a  con- 
currence would  otherwise  take  place.  This  vowel  is  com- 
monly Seghol  short ;  but  under  words  having  a  penult  Guttu- 
ral, it  is  Pattahh  short ;   with  a  penult  Yodh,  it  is  short  Hhireq. 

E.  g.  ?|"^j  instead  of  ^53  ,  ^SO  for  rjBD ,  13%  for  1*2 ,  rra  for 
n"3 .  See  on  Dec.  VI.  §  359,  also  §  283.  3.  y.  on  the  Segholate  forms 
of  verbs. 

[Note  1.  The  2d  pers.  fem.  sing.  Praet.  in  verbs  Lamedh  Guttural, 
takes  Pattahh  furtive ;  e.  g.  ny*a;u  instead  of  R3ft3tt3 ,  in  order  to  ease  the 
pronunciation ;  §  69. 

Note  2.  All  words  having  a  furtive  vowel  are  Milel,  i.  e.  accented 
on  the  penult.  In  this  way  they  are  distinguished  from  the  few  forms 
that  resemble  them  in  the  final  vowel,  but  are  accented  on  the  ultimate ; 
c.  g.  b%*  ,  Vrn?  ,  etc.     Comp.  §  100.  a.] 

■ 


72  §§  142 — 144.  euphonic  changes,  etc. 

Euphonic  changes  of  the  Vowels. 

[§  142.  These  are  various,  (a)  A  Guttural  with  Qamets  seldom 
admits  a  Qamets  or  Pattahh  immediately  before  it,  but  exchanges  it 
for  a  Seghol;  e.  g.  tSrpG*  instead  of  ttNfJI! ,  VUii  for  VtfWJ ;  nhD  for 
WJB  ,  ^':N-Jitt  for  ^bN-i-!» ,  etc. 

Note.  The  rule  is  not  uniform.  Such  cases  occur  as  Y"}ttn, 
^Jilrt ,  D?tt ,  etc.  The  word  isn  is  anomalous,  being  put  for  TJgl  or 
*isn  .  The  practice  required  by  the  rule,  is  occasionally  extended  to 
cases  where  the  Gutturals  are  not  present ;  as  ^jflHO  nij — W  ,  where 
J172  stands  for  HJ2;  also  to  Gutturals  not  pointed  with  Qamets,  as 
iTttHfrfi  for  tTtthftn ,  hd-h°dhd-shim. 

•    t  t:   v  •     it!ii' 

(b)  In  mixed  syllables  losing  their  tone,  Seghol  in  some  cases  takes 
the  place  of  Pattahh  ;  e.  g.  l\  ,  b^R  for  DD/T ;  ^tf  for  ^bb^ .  The 
reason  of  this  is,  that  Pattahh  is  better  adapted  to  a  mixed  syllable  with 
the  tone  ;  Seghol,  to  one  without  it.     Consequently, 

(c)  In  a  tone-syllable,  we  sometimes  find  Pattahh  instead  of  Seghol ; 
e.  g.  JjPJ  ,  constr.  |  j?T  and  not  ]pj .     See  Dec.  V.  of  nouns,  Parad. 

(d)  A  furtive  vowel  at  the  end  of  words  causes  the  preceding  vowel, 
if  mutable,  to  conform  E.  g.  Qamets,  as  nttnin  instead  of  nEirnn ; 
Pattahh,  as  'ibb  for  llbh  :    Tseri,  as  mia  for  maa .     So  in  verbs  ; 

e-  g-  Hu  for  H*2  >  *llh  for  WVl  •    In  GutturaIsJ  nvvn  for  n?-7i» , 
etc. 

(e)  Anomalous  changes  of  the  vowels  occasionally  occur  ;  probably 
to  mark  the  peculiar  pronunciation  of  certain  words.  E.  g.  (1)  Long 
vowels  are  put  for  short  ones  before  the  composite  Shevas ;  as  Tibs ti 
for  fjgpl ,  nb?h  for  n\vti ,  and  perhaps  rjbnn  for  *|V« .  (2)  Short 
vowels  for  long  ones ;  as  snfta  for  gJttfV  ,  WlJ  for  ^HHJ  .  (3)  Long 
vowels  are  put  for  short  ones  arising  out  of  composite  Shevas;  as 
t&tt$j  for  WntflJ,  ttl^Wtfi  for  'inbsNn.] 

N.  B.  All  these  cases  under  e  are  very  unfrequent;  and  it  is  difficult  to  decide  whether  they 
should  be  attributed  to  mere  accidental  euphony,  to  negligence  in  transcribing,  or  to  a  principle 
of  the  language. 

Vowels  changed  by  Accents. 

§  143.  Pause  accents,  and  sometimes  others  (§  149),  not  only  occa- 
sion a  shifting  of  the  tone-syllable  of  words  (§  100.  /),  but  very  fre- 
quently occasion  a  change  in  the  quantity  of  vowels ;  usually  lengthen- 
ing short  vowels,  but  sometimes  shortening  long  ones. 

§144.  (l)  They  lengthen  short  vowels;  changing  Pattahh, 


§§  145 148.    VOWELS    CHANGED    BY    ACCENTS.  73 


and  Seghol  when  used  for  Pattahh  (§  142.  d),  into  Qamets, 
and  Qamets  Hhateph  into  Hholem. 

E.  g.  8fq ,  trg  ;  fcoj?  ,  bttft ;  tffa  (for  $$}  §  142.  d),  Jftjg .  So 
where  they  shift  the  tone  also  :  as  Sintt ,  nfitt ;  TVP&  ,  HP!?  .  So  DJaVl 
vay-yd-moth,  rift^T  . 

Note.  The  praepositive  and  postpositive  accents  (§  95)  may  affect 
vowels  without  standing  on  them,  in  the  same  manner  as  other  accents 
which  are  placed  on  them ;  e.  g.  ^[b^  (instead  of  ^bft)  with  Tiphha 
anterius,  Ps.  97:  1 ;  tettT  (instead  of  *»p^  with  Segholta  on  the 
ultimate ;  see  §  146. 

[§145.  (2)  They  shorten  the  long  vowels.    Verbs  in  pause* 

frequently  exchange  Tseri  ultimate  for  Pattahh. 

E-g-  *">?.">  *>£*!;  ^3iJ,  ^£pr;  ^T:,  bar;  *fy*\  *jjb*.  So  with 
verbs  taking  suffixes;  as  ab^nfi* ,  ftb^BK;  jrpfp,  "jrprP.  But  the 
cases  are  numerous  in  which  Tseri  remains  in  such  examples.  The 
whole  thing  seems  to  be  merely  arbitrary  euphony.] 

[§  146.  A  pause-accent  on  a  word,  which  by  declension  has 

dropped  the  final  vowel  of  the  ground-form  (§  135),  restores 

that  final  vowel,  and  also  lengthens  the  same  if  it  be  short. 

This  takes  place,  (a)  When  such  accent  falls  on  the  restored  vow- 
el;  asttfc-v;,  !"JK^,  ground-form  &*£,'•  CaqQ,  &SB,  ground-form 
f^B;  "H?Df>?i  '£Bf£,  ground-form  Sfeg'jfj  iytftS*  ,  1*0 izj ? ,  ground- 
form  yhp~i .  (b)  When  it  falls  on  the  succeeding  syllable  ;  as,  jS*J©"^ 
instead  of  jvijp},  Joel  2:  5;  'pprjV  instead  of  fiptfr,  JoeI  2:  8' 
■p'bb.;.  instead  of  |1&!£  ,  Joel  2:  7.] 

N.  B.  Both  of  these  usages  are  very  often  neglected,  and  the  natural  accentuation  remains. 

[§  147.  Pause  accents,  when  they  fall  on  those  persons  of 
verbs  Tv?  (properly  17  §  280)  which  drop  a  letter  and  a  vow- 
el, sometimes  restore  the  letter  as  well  as  the  vowel  dropped, 
and  affect  the  vowel  as  stated  in  §  146. 

E.  g.  tt&a  ,  W33  ,  ground-form  nD2=="'t23 ;  492  ,  4VS  ,  from  fi3>3= 
^2  ,  §  280.  Note.]  \ 

[§  148.  Where  no  vowel  has  been  dropped,  a  pause- 
accent  sometimes  occasions  changes;  viz. 

*  A  word  or  syllable  is  said  to  be  in  pause,  when  a  pause  accent  rests  upon  it. 
10 


74  §§  148 — 152.  vowels  changed  by  accents,  etc. 

(a)  Falling  on  simple  Sheva  penult,  it  puts  Seghol  in  its 
place;  e.g.  D3B,  ffiDJDj  ^8*  Sjg^ 

(6)   Falling  on  a  composite  Sheva  penult,  it  substitutes  the 

corresponding  long  vowel. 

E.  g.  "I?r$,  "»3« ;  "^n  ,  "»b'n  ;  cases  with  Hhateph  Seghol  do  not  oc- 
cur.    But  the  practice  is  not  entirely  uniform;  e.  g.  "Hr,  •,bi3>;  ''Sft, 

NOTE.  A  pause-accent  in  Is.  21:  11  (V*Wj)  seems  to  convert  the  absolute 
form  h^t)  into  the  construct.  But  I  apprehend  that  in  this  case  h*h  is  chosen 
without  reference  to  the  accent,  and  merely  for  the  sake  of  varying  the  nV">V 
which  had  just  been  repeated. 

§  149.  General  remarks.  The  effect  of  pause-accents  is  not 
uniform.  In  a  great  number  of  cases,  no  change  is  occasioned  by 
them.  On  the  other  hand,  most  of  the  disjunctive  accents,  and  even 
several  of  the  conjunctive  ones,  not  unfrequently  produce  the  same  ef- 
fect in  prolonging  syllables  as  the  pause-accents.  For  example  ;  (a) 
Disjunctives;  SSJSn.  *M*5J  tttttt ,  =13^213 ;  iixnv ,  riMMfil  W>3, 
!p22;  WV ,  Wl-31  Ps.  5:12,  etc.  (6)  Conjunctives;  as  ^bnnn , 
^nnn ;  itfe  ,  *jj$| ;  ^jfc3? ,  IJ&na  ,  ^^ ,  nrDT*7>  etc-  The  entire 
want  of  any  regular  system  in  regard  to  the  influence  of  the  accents 
over  the  vowels,  shews  very  clearly  that  such  influence  belongs  only  to 
the  occasional  method  of  reading  certain  passages  or  words,  and  not  to 
the  essential  mutations  of  the  language  itself. 

Vowels  changed  by  accession  and  transposition. 

[§  150.  Forms  of  verbs  ending  in  1  ,  receiving  an  accessory  pro- 
noun beginning  with  a  consonant  and  not  having  the  tone  upon  it, 
drop  the  first  vowel  of  the  ground-form  if  it  be  mutable,  and  restore  the 
second  which  had  been  dropped  by  declension,  and  (if  it  be  short) 
lengthen  it. 

E.g.  ST^,  plur.  *htg,  with  suffix  ^ataPj    so  U£|*}?j  "»2n^i£73'2 ; 

'*&%# ,  "•M^asj .] 

[§  151.  Transposition  is  only  occasional  and  euphonic.  It  belongs 
not  to  the  rules  of  the  language.  Instances  of  it  are  such  as  the  fol- 
lowing, viz.  tf3t£  for  ^:n^ ,  ttSSJttj  for  Srastoa ,  etc. 

Voicels  changed  by  position. 
[§  152.  The  prefixes  to  words,  consisting  of  one  letter,  vary 


§§   152.    VOWELS    CHANGED    BY    POSITION.  75 

their  vowels  according  to  their  posision  and  the  nature  of  the 
words  to  which  they  are  attached. 

(a)  The  article  H  (for  brt ,  §  162)  has,  (I)  Usually,  Pattahh  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh  forte ;  e.  g.  £tJSn===*,2Jn:  bn .  (2)  Before  the 
Gutturals  N  ,  2  ,  and  also  1 ,  it  takes  Qamets  ;  as  «J*»Krt  ,  f^awj  ,  ttjtfifl . 
(3)  Before  M  and  n  ,  Pattahh  long  is  the  more  usual  vowel ;  as  ^briii, 
^l'£ttft .  (4)  Before  all  the  Gutturals,  when  they  have  a  Qamets  under 
them,  the  article  usually  takes  Seghol;  see  §  142.  a.  (5)  The  Da- 
ghesh after  the  article  is  not  only  omitted  before  the  Gutturals  and 
Resh  (§  111),  but  more  usually  omitted,  also,  before  words  beginning 
with  12  and  J  having  a  simple  Sheva  ;  e.  g.  rr^DErt  for  npD72n  ,  -)fc*»n 
for  •tfta. 

Note.  When  the  article  is  preceded  by  the  particles,  2  ,  3  ,  b  ,  it 
usually  suffers  syncope  (§  108.  b),  and  gives  up  its  vowel  to  the  parti- 
cles; as  trfcjpa  for  t^]25-2  ,  0*3  for  D*ri3  ,  tP-jJ^  for  Cnrrflb  .  On 
the  contrary,  it  sometimes  resists  syncope  ;  as  Esnb  ,  etc. 

(b)  The  Particles  a ,  3  ,  b  ,  are  appropriately  pointed  with  Sheva 
simple.  But,  (1)  Before  the  composite  Shevas  they  take  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel;  e.  g.  }1"lft3,  "^fib  lo-hh°li,  etc.  (2)  Before  accented 
syllables  they  usually  take  Qamets;  as  niab  ,  nmb  ,  abb  .  But  this 
is  confined  chiefly  to  forms  of  the  Inf.  mode  not  in  regimen;  to  pro- 
nouns ;  and  to  tone-syllables  at  the  end  of  a  verse,  or  of  a  disjunctive 
clause.  In  other  cases,  the  usual  punctuation  is  Sheva.  (3)  Before 
simple  Sheva  they  take  short  Hhireq;  comp.  §  137. 

(c)  The  Conjunction  "]  is  appropriately  pointed  with  a  Sheva  sim- 
ple. But,  (1)  Before  Gutturals  with  a  composite  Sheva,  it  takes  the 
corresponding  short  vowel;  as  "73*]  .  (2)  Before  N  which  would  re- 
gularly have  a  composite  Sheva,  it  sometimes  takes  a  corresponding 
contracted  vowel  in  which  tt  quiesces,  as  tJ^rrbNi  f°r  B"1*^**} ;  comp. 
§  1 19.  c.  1 .  (3)  Before  a  tone-syllable  it  frequently  takes  Qamets ;  as 
nno],  liVl  *Vf%  .  The  usual  cases  of  this  nature  are  before  a  dis- 
junctive accent ;  before  a  conjunctive  one,  1  retains  Sheva.     (4)  Before 

Sheva  vocal,  either  simple  or  composite,  standing  under  a  letter  not  a 
Guttural,  and  also  before  3,  23  ,  0,  it  takes  Shureq;  as  b^5) ,  SfrTsi  , 
TPX1,  n??5),  *TV9'j  •"iS'iM.  (5)  Before  Yodh  which  analogically 
would  have  a  Sheva,  it  takes  long  Hhireq  and  makes  the  Yodh  quies- 
cent (comp.  §  53) ;  as  W1 ,  Wl  .  (6)  Before  the  verbs  i-Til  and 
rrn,  it    sometimes  takes  short  Hhireq  or  Seghol;     as   HTn    J-prn 

nrp-m . 


76  §  152.   VOWELS    CHANGED    BY    POSITION. 

(d)  The  interrogative  Ty  changes  its  usual  punctuation  ;  (1)  Be- 
fore Sheva  simple,  where  it  takes  Pattahh :  as  fjai  T^n .  (2)  Before 
Gutturals  with  Qamets,  it  takes  Seghol;  as  EDtTJj,  is  he  wise?  comp. 
§  142.  a.  (3)  Before  Gutturals  without  damets,  it  takes  Pattahh,  and 
sometimes  Qamets ;  as  *jV.$vi  shall  I  go  1  SlHNln  vos  ne  ?  (4)  It  some- 
times imitates  the  punctuation  of  the  article  before  a  letter  with  a  She- 
va :  e.  s.  ftin'Sft  an  tunica  ?  "O-nn  viaene  meae  1  And  even  before  a 
letter  with  a  vowel  it  sometimes  does  the  same,  although  very  rarely  ; 
as  3Epain  an  bonum  erit  ?] 


PART  III. 

GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE  AND  FORMS  OF 
WORDS. 


§  153.  Radical  Words.  The  Hebrew  and  its  cognate  languages, 
in  their  present  state,  exhibit  a  surprising  degree  of  regularity  and 
uniformity  in  the  construction  and  sound  of  the  radical  words.  This 
circumstance  forms  a  broad  line  of  distinction  between  them  and  all 
the  western  languages.  Almost  all  radical  words,  which  with  few  ex- 
ceptions are  verbs,  consist  of  only  three  letters  usually  forming  two 
syllables;  as  *jbft  he  reigned,  Y~}h  the  earth.  From  such  triliteral 
roots  are  derived  the  various  forms  of  nouns  and  verbs,  which  are  used 
to  express  case,  number,  gender,  person,  tense,  etc.,  and  the  different 
forms  of  nouns,  adjectives,  participles,  etc.  From  this  general  principle 
of  derivation  (which  was  commonly  represented  by  the  older  gram- 
marians as  universal),  are  to  be  excepted,  perhaps,  a  few  nouns  which 
constitute  the  names  of  familiar  objects ;  e.  g.  3N  father,  Cfij  mother, 
■p  hand,  etc.  A  few  particles  and  primitive  pronouns  also  appear  to 
be  biliteral  in  their  root,  and  not  derived  from  a  triliteral  word. 

§  154.    Conformity  to  the  general  principle.      So  extensively   in 

Hebrew  is  the  principle  of  inflection  grounded  on  derivation  from  a  tri- 
literal root,  that  nouns  which  are  primitive  and  biliteral,  conform  to 
the  common  laws  in  their  declension  ;  i.  e.  they  are  treated  as  though 
they  were  derived  from  triliteral-roots.  Thus  EN  by  inflection  be- 
comes *^M=3^5W3«  ,  as  if  derived  from  E73tf ;  although  EN  seems  to  be 
a  primitive. 

§  155.  Biliteral  roots.  From  some  appearances  in  the  Hebrew 
language,  it  is  probable  that  originally  it  contained  a  greater  number 
of  biliteral  roots  than  at  present ;  and  that  its  triliteral  forms  were,  in 
many  instances,  constituted  by  doubling  the  second  radical  of  the  root, 
or  adding  to  it  one  of  the  vowel  letters,  or  the  semi-vowel  Nun  : 

E.  g.  iLP  and  aitt  to  be  good,  common  root  St3;  nS3  and  ftvsto 
blow,  common  root  HE);  ?|S$,  5p*r,  NS'7 ,  !"D"7 ,  to  thrust  down,  com- 
mon root  "p . 

In  like  manner,  there  is  a  considerable  number  of  triliteral  words 
in  the  Hebrew  and  its  cognate  dialects,  in  which  two  of  the  radicals 


78  ^§  156 160.    STRUCTURE  OF    WORDS. 

are  the  same,  while  the  third  is  quite  different,  and  yet  the  meaning  of 
each  word  exhibiting  the  same  two  radicals,  remains  the  same  in  all. 

E.  g.  the  verb  signifying  to  lick,  is  either  2>vb  ,  S3>b ,  D?b  ,  O^b  ,  5]?b  , 
y^b ,  or  p?b  ,  the  letters  3>b  being  uniform  in  all. 

But  if  biliteral  roots  were  originally  more  numerous  than  at  present, 
they  had  conformed  to  the  common  laws  of  the  language  at  least  as 
early  as  any  of  the  written  Hebrew  now  extant ;  since  the  written  lan- 
guage every  tf  here  presents  the  triliteral  forms,  as  principally  constitu- 
ting the  radical  words. 

§  156.  Quadriliteral  and  quinqueliteral  roots  are  very  rare  in  the 
Hebrew  ;  such  as  btt~0  a  fruitful  field,  tO^  to  devour,  £*|b#  to  be 
quiet.  Those  which  exist,  are  formed  by  the  addition  or  insertion  of  a 
letter  or  letters,  to  lengthen  the  triliteral  root ;  in  the  same  manner  as 
triliterals  are  formed  from  biliterals,  as  described  above  in  §  154. 

Note.  In  quadriliterals  the  formative  additional  letter  prefixed  is 
usually  a  Sibilant  (tf))  or  a  Guttural  (ft) ;  the  letters  inserted  between 
the  first  and  second  radical,  are  usually  b  or  1 ;  at  the  end  b  or  ]  is 
added.  E.  g.  nirjV«p  from  in): ,  *n5D  from  ^1tt  ;  t\$bi_  from  P)?T  , 
fiDns  from  QD3:  bzn3  from  &n2,  1»n|  from  im  ,  etc. 

§  157.   The  parts  of  speech  in  Hebrew  are,  the  article,pro- 

noun,  verb  (including  the  participle),  noun,  adjective,  adverb,pre- 

position,  conjunction,  and  interjection  ;   which  will  be  treated  of 

in  their  order. 

§  158.  The  proportional  number  of  roots  in  the  various  parts  of 
speech  in  the  Hebrew,  may  be  thus  arranged,  (a)  The  verb  is  alto- 
gether most  frequently  primitive.  (6)  Only  a  small  number  of  nouns  are 
primitive,  (c)  The  original  pronouns,  personal,  demonstrative,  etc.,  are 
all  primitive,  {d)  Particles  are  some  of  them  primitive,  and  some  are 
derived  from  other  parts  of  speech.  The  Hebrew  has  very  few  particles. 
Grammatical  structure  of  words. 

§  159.  There  are  two  ways  in  which  case,  number,  gender,  per- 
son, tense,  etc.,  may  be  expressed  in  any  language  :  (1)  By  the  inflec- 
tion of  words  in  general  or  ground-forms.  (2)  By  affixing  other  words, 
i.  e.  particles,  which  serve  to  express  relation.  The  Hebrews,  as  the 
sequel  will  shew,  made  use  of  both  these  methods. 

§  160.  Composite  words,  i.  e.  compound  verbs,  nouns,  etc.,  which 
the  Greek,  Latin,  and  other  western  languages  exhibit,  are  not  usual 
in  the  Hebrew.  Words  properly  composite  are  scarcely  ever  found  in 
Hebrew,  except  in  proper  names ;  where,  however,  they  frequently  occur. 


§§  161 J  64.  ARTICLE — PRONOUN.  79 


§  161.  The  Hebrew  also  differs  from  the  languages  of  the  West, 
in  the  mode  of  writing  many  of  its  particles,  and  the  oblique  cases  of 
its  personal  pronouns.  These,  instead  of  standing  by  themselves,  are 
commonly  united  with  the  verbs,  nouns,  etc.  to  which  they  belong,  or 
on  which  they  depend,  so  as  to  form  with  them  but  one  word. 


THE  ARTICLE. 

§  162.  The  Hebrew  has  but  one  article,  viz.  ?iTJ ,  common- 
ly written  T\  with  a  Daghesh  forte  after  it.  It  corresponds  in 
a  good  degree,  but  not  universally,  with  the  definite  article  the 
in  English. 

§  163.  In  writing,  the  Lamed h  of  the  article  ^ft  is  always 
assimilated  to  the  first  letter  of  the  noun  to  which  it  is  prefixed, 
and  expressed  by  a  Dagheshyor/e  in  that  letter  or  by  some 

equivalent. 

E.  ff.  ia?an  the  rain,  instead  of  nEE  bn ;  d'ltfn  the  man.  instead  of 
Citf  bn ,  etc.  §  107.  I.  b.  §  112.  For  the  various  pointing  of  the  arti- 
cle, see  §  152.  a. 

Note.  That  the  original  form  of  the  article  was  bil ,  seems  proba- 
ble from  the  form  of  the  Arabic  article  btt  ,  whose  b  is  frequently  as- 
similated in  the  same  manner  as  the  Hebrew.  The  only  difference  is, 
that  in  the  Hebrew  the  assimilation,  or  some  equivalent  for  it,  is  uni- 
versal;, in  Arabic,  it  is  usual  only  before  the  solar  letters. 


PRONOUNS. 

I.  Pronouns  Personal. 
§  164.  The  Hebrew  is  rich  in  personal  pronouns ;  not  only  distin- 
guishing the  masc.  and  fem.  of  the  2d  and  3d  persons,  when  they  stand 
as  the  subjects  of  verbs,  but  possessing  forms  appropriate  to  the  oblique 
cases  which  follow  verbs,  nouns,  or  participles. 

Nominative  case  or  Ground-form  of  all  the  personal  Pronouns. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

com.  / 

**  *Sta 

we,  ttruwNj          tirfl  i3« 

mas.  thou, 

nn«    R& 

ye,     DAN 

fem.  thou, 

tag  "ft* 

ye,      Ifitf  (]V}^_)  ngjW 

mas.  he,  (it), 

mn 

they,      prj               ffi3PI 

fem.  she  (it), 

&h  aon 

(hi)  they,      ]tt               njjh 

80  §$  165— 468.  pronouns. 

Notes. 

[§  165.  (a)  In  pause,  the  pronouns  assume  the  forms,  ^Stt  ,  FrftN  , 
n$ ,  etc.,  §144.  (6)  The  tf  in  N5)!"? ,  aorr  (&0!"i  M),  isparagogic  §  125.  a, 
and  0ft7m£  §  57.  (c)  The  form  wrfa  occurs  only  six  times  ;  138 ,  only 
in  Jer.  42  :  6.  (d)  In  !!3n8  (in  some  Codd.  nspN),  'nnh,  nsh,  the 
{-!_  is  paragogic  §  125.  6.  (e)  The  forms  nfiN  ,  ttN ,  "totf  (afj?  D^  > 
■jriN  (]riN),  are  probably  for  hl-CN,  Fi:8 ,  "TON,  DftMtj  "J^N  ,  §  107. 
1.  a;  for  the  full  forms,  i.e.  those  with  2,  are  found  in  Syriac  and 
Arabic,  (f)  Nlii  (hi)  is  anomalous,  (the  older  form  of  the  pronoun 
was  N^n,  which  was  both  masc.  and  fern.) ;  the  marginal  reading  or 
Keri  (§  103)  often  supplying  the  form  fcTn  (i^n),  as  a  correction.  It 
is  found  only  in  the  Pentateuch. 

N.  B.  The  ground  forms  of  the  pronouns  above,  though  generally  designating  only  the  Nomina- 
tive case,  do  sometimes  stand  in  other  cases,  §  468.] 

§  1 66.  The  oblique  cases  of  personal  pronouns  in  Hebrew, 
are  made  by fragments  of  primitive  pronouns  suffixed  to  verbs, 
nouns,  and  particles,  so  as  to  constitute  one  word  instead  of  be- 
ing written  separately  as  in  the  western  languages. 

N.  B.  For  an  account  of  these  pronominal  suffixes,  as  appended  to  the 
above  mentioned  classes  of  words  respectively,  see  for  verbs  §  309  seq., 
for  nouns  §  336,  for  adverbs  §  405,  for  prepositions  §  408,  and  for  in- 
terjections §  410  Note. 

II.  Pronouns  demonstrative. 
§  167.  Of  these  there  are  but  few  in  the  Hebrew,  viz. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

sc.  nt 

fem.  ntf'T 

com.  ^T   this 

com.    tl\&    these 

sntVn 

(nt)  it 

fV»I  this 

7<tf    these 

The  usual  forms  are  those  in  the  first  line  ;  those  in  the  second,  are 
unusual.     For  DNT ,  the  form  ixfen  is  once  employed,  Ezek.  36 :  35. 

Note.  The  pronouns  of  the  3d  pers.,  i.  e.  fctttt,  iTrf,  BSJ,  ]n, 
are  also  frequently  employed  as  demonstratives ;  in  which  case  they 
usually  prefix  the  article,  as  fibrin  &i*2  on  that  day. 

III.  Pronouns  relative. 
§  168.  The  only  proper  one  is  TttJJB,  who,  which,  what,  of 
every  gender  and  number. 


§§  169 173.    PRONOUNS VERBS.  81 

[Note.  This  pronoun  is  contracted,  mostly  in  the  later  Hebrew, 
by  dropping  the  a  (§  108.  «),  and  assimilating  the  n  (§  107.  c) ;  as 
iV.jp  instead' of  ib  "Viptf  .  The  'd  (the  apocopate  form)  has  various  vow- 
els, according  to  the  nature  of  the  word  which  follows  ;  e.  g.  'p  as  in 
CiV*; ;  Qj  followed  by  a  Daghesh  ;  *d  ,  as  in  i-jfiNu;  Judg.  6 :  17;  p  ,  as 
in  drift  Ecc.  3  :  18.  In  this  last  case,  there  is  no  compensation  by  a 
vowel  for  the  ~»  which  is  cast  away. 

§  169.  The  demonstratives  JlT  and  \| ,  are  occasionally  em- 
ployed as  relatives. 

IV.  Pronouns  interrogative. 

§  170.   These  are  two;  viz.  ^12  who,  and  T\12  (t])2  Tip) 
what. 

Note.  Before  a  Daghesh  euphonic  the  form  TM2  is  used,  as  ^b-tT£  ; 
also  before  n,  ft ,  9  ,  not  having  damets,  and  usually  before  Maqqeph ; 
before  a  Guttural  with  Qamets,  r>'2 ,  as  "DS8  *n72  §  142  a ;  but  some- 
times !*j/3  also  before  such  Gutturals,  as  in  Ex.  12 :  26,  mias«1  iltt  . 


VERBS. 

§  171.  Classification.  They  are  distributed  into  (a)  Primitive, 
i.  e.  underived  from  any  other  words ;  e.  g.  ^12  to  reign*  nii^  to  sit, 
and  so  of  most  of  the  Hebrew  verbs.  (6)  Derivative,  i.  e.  such  as 
come  from  primitives  by  the  accession  of  formative  letters.  Such  are 
all  the  conjugations  of  verbs  excepting  the  first  or  Kal.  (c)  De- 
nominative, i.  e.  those  which  are  formed  from  nouns  (dc  nomine) ;  e.  g. 
rJTN  to  live  in  a  tent,  from  bnN  a  tent. 

NOTE.  These  divisions  concern  the  origin  of  verbs,  but  not.  the  mode  of  inflection.  A  great 
number  of  verbs  is  comprehended  in  the  class  b,  while  very  few  belong  to  theclass  c. 

§  172.  Inflection.  In  respect  to  inflection,  verbs  are  divided  into 
regular  and  irregular.  Regular  verbs  are  those  which  are  analogous 
in  their  inflection,  and  preserve  through  all  their  changes  their  original 
triliteral  root.  Verbs  irregular  are  either  pluriliteral,  or  those  which 
drop  or  assimilate  one  or  more  of  their  radical  letters. 

§  173.  Conjugation,  (a)  The  term  conjugation,  in  grammars  of 
the  Greek,  Latin,  and  some  modern  languages,  is  employed  to  denote 
different  classes  of  verbs,  which  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by 

*  Literally,  he  reigned.  The  Infinitive  in  English  is  used  in  this  work,  merely  for  the  sake  of 
brevity,  in  preference  to  the  third  person  of  the  past  tense,  which  would  exactly  correspond  to  the 
Hebrew  root. 

11 


82  §§  173 — 175.  PECULIAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


certain  peculiar  characteristics  of  form  or  inflection.  Such  verbs  are 
therefore  said  to  belong  to  the  first,  second,  third,  etc.  conjugation.  In 
this  sense  the  Hebrew  might  be  said  to  have  several  conjugations;  but 
this  word  is  not  so  used  by  Hebrew  grammarians. 

(6)  In  the  Hebrew  grammar,  the  word  conjugation  is  applied  to 
different  forms  of  the  same  verb,  and  it  corresponds  in  some  degree 
with  the  word  voice  in  Greek  grammar,  although  it  is  employed  in  a 
much  more  extensive  sense.  The  passive  and  middle  voices  in  Greek 
exhibit  the  original  idea  of  the  verb  under  certain  modifications,  or 
with  some  additional  shades  of  meaning.  So  the  property  of  all  the 
conjugations  in  Hebrew  is,  to  vary  the  primary  meaning  of  the  verb,  by 
uniting  with  it  an  accessory  signification.  The  Hebrews  were  thus 
enabled  to  express,  by  means  of  their  conjugations,  all  those  various 
modifications  and  relations  of  verbs,  which,  in  most  other  languages, 
are  expressed  either  by  composite  verbs,  or  by  several  words. 

NOTE.  The  most  convenient  arrangement  is,  to  make  as  many  conjugations  as  there  are  forms 
of  verbs,  original  and  derived.    These  are  presented  to  view  in  the  following  section. 

Usual  Conjugations. 

ACTIVE.  passive  and  reflexive. 

Name.  Form.  Name.  Form. 

§174.   1.  Kal  ^Bp     2.  Niphal  ^Bp3 

fa 

5.  HJphil       V*$*l     6.  Hophal  JW} 

7.  Hithpael  tf&^t)Tfi 

Peculiar  Conjugations. 
§  175.  (a)  1  Poel  M/lD ,  active.      2  Poal  MID ,  passive. 
3  Hithpoel  Siin&ri;   without  a  sibilant  letter,  as  PT^tPil 

(from  bbl). 

These  conjugations  are  found  in  the  class  of  verbs  named  Ayin 
doubled  (3>5>),  and  very  rarely  appear  in  any  other.  They  take  the 
place  of  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  as  these  appear  in  regular  verDs ; 
see  §  262. 

(6)  1  Polel  fflCfip ,  active.  2  Polal  DJftp ,  passive.  3  Hith- 

polel  btftpris  . 


;3.  Piel  bttp,      4.  Pual 


§§  175 178.    UNUSUAL  CONJUGATIONS.  83 

In  Verbs  Ayin  Vav  (i2  §  269)  these  forms  are  the  common  substi- 
tutes for  the  regular  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael. 

Note.  Although  the  appearance  of  these  two  classes  {a  and  b)  is 
the  same,  yet  the  mode  of  formation  is  very  different ;  e.  g.  32TD  ,  etc. 
comes  from  the  root  520  ,  and  is  formed  by  inserting  \  between  the  two 
first  radicals;  while  DJOlp,  etc.,  comes  from  Dip,  and  is  formed  by 
doubling  the  last  radical.  Most  of  the  lexicons  and  grammars  name 
the  class  6,  Pilel,  Pulal,  etc.,  because,  in  regular  verbs,  the  shape  of 
these  conjugations  would  be  like  bbpp ,  b\W  ,  etc.  But  as  these 
conjugations  scarcely  have  an  existence  in  regular  verbs,  (and  have 
not  even  a  similar  corresponding  one  in  the  Arabic,  excepting  the  very 
rare  and  peculiar  conj.  IX.  and  XL),  so  it  is  much  better,  for  the 
sake  of  perspicuity,  to  name  them  as  I  have  done  here.  A  potiori 
nomen  fit,  is  a  good  rule  in  making  out  artificial  denominations  of  this 
nature. 

Unusual  Conjugations. 

[§  176.  Most  of  them  are  of  very  rare  occurrence  ;  and  several  of 
them  occur  not  more  than  two  or  three  times,  in  the  whole  Scriptures. 
They  are  as  follows ;  viz. 

(1)  Hothpaal  or  Huthpaal,  btspnn ,  bBpnrr ,  both  passive  forms 
of  Hithpael ;  comp.  Pual  in  §  174.  They  are  of  very  rare  occur- 
rence. 

(2)  Pilel  active  and  Pulal  passive,  bbtip ,  bbpp  (comp.  §  175.  b 
Note),  occurring  only  in  five  or  six  cases,  in  regular  verbs. 

(3)  Pilpel  active  and  Polpal  passive,  formed  out  of  verbs  2?2  and 
IS ,  by  repeating  the  first  and  last  radicals ;  e.  g.  from  bbil  comes  baba , 
ba]?a  ;  from  b^,  b3b3  and  b3b3  .  These  are  equivalent  to  the  forms 
from  the  same  verbs,  described  in  §  175.  a.  b. 

(4)  A  form  Tiphel  seems  to  have  been  in  existence ;  e.  g.  F^rtin 
from  rnh  ,  banft  ,  a  denominative  (§  171.  c)  from  ban .  Once  we  have 
a  Paoel  form  ;  e.  g.  in  "titf  Xft  >  in  all  respects  a  anal;  XeydfAtvov  in 
Hebrew. 

JfOTE.  Other  conjugations  are  made  by  some  grammarians  ;  but  they  are  disputed  ones,  and 
it  is  of  little  or  no  importance  to  the  student  to  insert  them  here,  as  his  lexicon  will  give  him  the 
requisite  information.] 

[§  177.  Pluriliteral  verbs,  i.  e.  verbs  whose  root  consists  of  more 
than  three  letters,  take  the  following  forms  j  viz.  fitns  ,  VE*iB ,  ]3«Jjj  , 
active ;  ba-D  ,  *£Qt?n  ,  'T^Eft ,  passive. 

§  178.  No  one  verb  in  Hebrew  exhibits  all  the  conjugations  above 
mentioned ;  and  very   few  exhibit  even  all  the  usual  ones  in  §  174. 


84  §§  179 182.  SIGNIF.  OF  THE  conjugations. 


Neither  is  the  active  or  passive  meaning  always  attached  to  the  forms 
under  which  it  is  ranged ;  as  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel.  Predominant 
usage  directs  the  classification  of  the  respective  conjugations. 

§  179.  The  names  of  all  the  derived  conjugations  are  borrowed 
from  the  various  forms  of  the  verb  b*S ,  which  the  old  grammarians 
used  in  constructing  paradigms ;  and  are  merely  the  modes  of  pro- 
nouncing those  several  forms.  The  first  conjugation  is  called  bP  Qal> 
or  (as  it  is  usually  written)  Kal,  i.  e.  light ;  because  it  is  not,  like  the 
derived  forms,  increased  by  the  addition  of  any  letter  to  the  root.  The 
other  names  are  formed  thus ;  bigtfl  Niph-"al;  k&B  Pi-Sel,  Daghesh 
forte  being  excluded  by  the  Guttural ;  b?5>  Pit-Sal,  Daghesh  being  ex- 
cluded ;  byVT]  Hiph-Sil;  brsn  Hoph-Val ;  b*Bnri  Hith-pa-Vel,  Dag- 
hesh excluded;  and  so  of  the  unusual  conjugations. 

§  180.  The  third  person  singular  of  the  praeter  tense  in  Kal,  is  re- 
garded as  the  root  of  all  verbs;  one  class  (verbs  iy)  excepted,  whose 
root  is  the  triliteral  Infinitive,  e.  g.  tnp  . 

Form  and  Signification  of  the  usual  Conjugations. 
§  181.  (a)  Kal  is  generally  active;  but  it  may  be  either 
Ws  transitivebr  intransitive.  h&S  T?VSP 

(b)  The  root,  which  is  the  third  person  singular  masculine, 
has  three  different  forms,  distinguished  by  the  final  vowels, 

Pattahh,  Tseri,  and  Hholem. 

E.  g.  *lp_B  to  visit,   ]jvt  to  be  old,  and  iV  to  fear. 

Note  1.  The  form  with  final  Pattahh  is  generally  active  and  tran- 
sitive ;  but  sometimes  it  is  intransitive,  as  b*Tfi  to  be  great.  The  other 
two  forms  are  usually  intransitive,  but  sometimes  otherwise. 

Note  2.  Some  verbs  in  Kal  have  a  passive  meaning  ;  e.  g.  ]3'£  to 
inhabit  and  to  be  inhabited;  Jibs  to  elevate  and  to  be  elevated. 

§  182.  (a)  Form  of  Niphal.   It  is  formed  by  prefixing  Nun 

to  the  ground-form  of  the  verb,  and  dropping  the  first  vowel 

of  the  same. 

E.  g.  bt?j5,  bt:p3. 

Note.  The  real  prefix  seems  to  be  :n  ,  (in  Arabic  it  is  :n).  In 
the  Infinitive  this  developes  itself;  e.  g.  btspn=bt5j2:rr ,  Nun  being  as- 
similated in  the  first  form,  §  107,  a.  The  appropriate  pointing  of  the 
prefix  Nun,  in  the  Praeter,  would  be  Sheva  (:);  but  short  Hhireq  is  ne- 
cessarily substituted  for  it,  inasmuch  as  the  vowel  under  the  first  radical 


§§  182 184.    SIGNIF.  OF  THE  CONJUGATIONS.  85 

falls  away,  §  137;  or  an  equivalent  vowel  must  be  substituted,  in  case 
the  first  radical  is  a  Guttural,  §  138. 

{b)  Significations  of  Niphal.  (1)  It  is  passive  of  Kal,  when  Kal 
is  transitive.  (2)  Passive  of  Piel,  or  of  Hiphil,  when  they  are  transi- 
tive and  Kal  is  intransitive.  (3)  It  is  often  a  reflexive  form,  corres. 
ponding  to  the  middle  voice  of  the  Greeks;  as  ^XJtpVl  watch  thyself ', 
bNttJ:  he  asked  for  himself.     Such  are  the  usual  meanings  ;  but, 

(4)  It  also  has  an  intransitive  sense,  and  often  expresses  passion  or 
affection  ;  as  fibrti  he  was  sick,  in  Kal  filrri  with  the  same  sense ;  n:tt3 
to  sigh.  (5)  To  show  one's  self  as  doing  a  thing,  or  as  suffering  it  to 
be  done ;  e.  g.  *Jr3:  to  show  one's  self  honourable,  3>53  (=93  22  to  ex- 
hibit one's  self  as  smitten,  irjy?.  to  suffer  one's  self  to  be  entreated.  (6) 
To  express  reciprocal  action  ;  as  b&ah  to  contend,  viz.  with  another; 
Shb3  to  fight,  viz.  with  an  enemy;  3HT2  to  confer,  viz.  with  another. 
(7)  Sometimes  simply  as  Kal ;  e.  g.  3>2nZ33  juravit. 

NOTE.  It  is  often  used  in  such  a  connection  that  it  must  be  translated  by  a  corresponding  verb 
having  can,  may,  must,  ought,  could,  would,  should,  etc.,  before  it;  e.  g.  Geo.  6  :  21.  16 ;  10. 
20 ;  9,  etc. 

§  183.   (a)  Form  of  Piel.     This  is  characterized  by  a 

doubling  of  the  middle  radical ;  as  7IDD . 

Note.  In  case  the  middle  radical  is  a  Guttural,  and  cannot  take  a 
Daghesh  forte,  the  preceding  vowel  is  prolonged  as  a  compensation 
(§  111.  §  112) ;  e.  g.  Sj-jg  for  Tp2  ,  etc. 

(b)  Significations  of  Piel.  (1)  It  is  causative  of  Kal ;  e.  g.  121N 
to  perish;  12N  to  cause  to  perish.  This  is  the  predominant  meaning. 

(2)  To  let  any  thing  or  person  be  or  do  thus  and  so ;  to  regard  or 
exhibit  it  or  him  as  being  or  doing  thus  or  so;  e.g.  h*rj  to  let  one 
live ;  p"7iE  to  show  or  pronounce  one  to  be  just ;  N73t3  to  pronounce  one 
unclean.  (3)  It  is  intensive  of  Kal:  e.  g.  i>N'&  to  ask,  b&'ti  to  beg; 
*nnp  to  break,  "l3"<p  to  dash  in  pieces.  (4)  It  has  a  privative  sense  ; 
e.  g.  1232  to  know,  12)2  to  misapprehend ;  Hiph.  ttJ'Htpn  to  take  root, 
Piel  "£"T£  to  root  out.  (5)  It  often  agrees  in  signification  with  Kal 
transitive;  seldom  has  it  an  intransitive  meaning.  (6)  Sometimes 
it  has  a  reflexive  sense  ;  e.  g.  Gen  41  :  14,  nV^Pn  and  he  shaved  him- 
self. 

§  184.  Pual.  This  is  simply  the  passive  of  Piel,  and  is 
characterized  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  middle  radical,  (or  a  com- 
pensation for  it  when  it  is  excluded),  and  by  Qibbuts  short  or 
Qamets  Hhateph  in  the  first  syllable. 


86  §§  185 187.   SIGNIF.  OF  THE   conjugations. 

E.  g.  rap.  or  bt3  j?  qot-tdl. 

§185.  (a)  Form  of  Hiphil.  It  prefixes  He,  and  inserts 
Yodh  between  the  two  last  radicals. 

E.  g.  bap ,  Hiph.  b^n . 

(b)  Significations  of  Hiphil.  (1)  It  is  causative  of  Kal ;  as  ttJTg 
to  be  holy,  ttS^FpFJ  to  make  holy.     This  is  the  usual  meaning. 

(2)  Not  unfrequently  is  Hiphil  used  in  the  same  sense  (transitive 

and  intransitive)  as  Kal ;  e.  g.   rphttin  to  corrupt,  tt^pUJn  to  be  quiet, 

*p3bn  to  be  white. 
■    ... 

Note.  Seldom  are  tta  Piel  and  Hiphil  of  the  same  verb  both  used 
in  a  causative  sense.  When  both  are  employed,  it  is  generally  with 
some  shade  of  difference  in  their  signification ;  e.  g.  133  to  honour, 
TSprj  to  render  powerful. 

§186.  Hophal.  This  is  characterized  by  n  prefixed  to 
the  root,  accompanied  by  the  vowel  Qamets  Hhateph  or 
short  Qibbuts. 

E.  g.  ^prj  or  bt:p;n  . 

It  is  usually  the  passive  of  Hiphil ;  but  it  occasionally  has  an  intran- 
sitive meaning,  as  Fut.  Hoph.  JbV  he  shall  be  able,  from  £»bj;  some- 
times an  active  one,  as  tHSisn  fiib  ye  shall  not  serve  them,  Ex.  20:  5. 
Deut.  5:  9.  13:  3 ;  which,  however,  is  capable  of  being  rendered,  that 
ye  may  not  be  caused  to  serve,  etc. 

§  187.    (a)  Form  of  Hithpael.      It  prefixes  T\t]  to  the 

Inf.  form  of  Piel. 

E.  g.  Inf.  Pi.  hqjg ,  Hith.  bsjgnsi . 

[  (b)  The  characteristic  nrr  undergoes  several  mutations,  when  it 
comes  before  the  Sibilants,  or  the  cognate  letters.     E.  g. 

(1)  Before  a  Sibilant,  the  n  changes  places  with  it ;  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing examples,  viz. 

D    Kal    b3D     Hithpa.     bsFiOtt    instead  of    bsOnn 

to     —     3*to       —        sajntor!         —         ^atonn 

ti     —    ^mi       —       14&q&!        —        *HH^! 

*     —    PI*       —        P^H         —         ppzrjri 

In  the  latter  case  (i£)  the  n  is  not  only  transposed,  but  changed  into 

its  cognate  tD .     This  case,  however,  is  very  unfrequent  in  Hebrew, 

though  common  in  the  cognate  languages. 


§§  187 190.    SIGNIF.    OP    THE    CONJUGATIONS.  87 


t 

as 

Wfi 

5 

as 

nostt 

3 

as 

aasn 

1 

as 

o»i-iN 

t 

as 

B»1^R 

(2)  Before  a  cognate  letter  the  D  is  more  commonly  assimilated ;  e.  g. 

*"\2/7H       instead  of  "^nn       from         "las 

^snari         —  -^nn      —       ^"^ 

(3)  The  same  usage  of  assimilation  is  occasionally  extended  to  some 
other  letters ;  e.  g. 

instead  of      isinri     from     rtfj| 

—  i-tfgsrjn     —    nD3 

—  N2.:nn       —      ana 

—  isai-ina     —      tm  (§  112) 

—  Dar^nn      —     sjbuj] 

(c)  Significations  of  Hithpael.  (1)  It  is  reflexive  of  Piel;  as 
'^l.p.  t°  sanctify j  £h[£nn  lie  sanctified  himself.  (2)  It  signifies  to  make 
one's  self  to  be  or  do,  or  to  exhibit  one's  self  as  being  or  doing,  that 
which  the  verb  in  its  ground-form  signifies  ;  e.  g.  ESnnn  to  shew  one's 
self  cunning,  from  VDU  to  be  wise;  b^nn  to  behave  one's  self proudly , 
from  £*1J|  to  be  great;  !"»Vnnri  to  represent  one's  self  as  sick,  from  irbrr 
to  be  sick.  Also  with  some  slight  modifications,  as  CSnnfl  to  think 
one's  self  wise,  from  QDri  to  be  wise;  tosfrntt  to  make  one's  self  to  be 
sought,  i.  e.  to  conceal  one's  self,  from  iDBn  £0  seek;  "jShnri  £0  ask  fa- 
vour for  one's  self,  properly  to  make  one  gracious,  from  jpH  to  be  gra- 
cious.    These  are  the  leading  significations. 

(3)  It  is  sometimes  the  passive  of  Piel ;  as  1£5  to  number,  "TjvBnn  to 
be  numbered.  (4)  It  is  also  intransitive  ;  as  5]3tf  nn  to  be  angry.  (5) 
It  is  not  unfrequently  active  and  transitive  ;  as  nTpPrrti  to  keep  or  00- 
serve,  viz.  laws,  statutes,  etc. 

Signification  of  the  unusual  Conjugations. 

[§  188.  Poel,  Poal,  and  Hithpoel,  are  merely  substitutes  for  the 
daghesh'd  conjugations  (§  175  a) ;  as  are  also  Polel,  Polal  and  Hithpo- 
lel  (§  175  6)  ;  and  likewise  Pilel  and  Pulal  (176.  2). 

Note.  When  the  regular  Piel,  Pual,  etc.,  of  verbs  99  and  15>  are 
employed,  together  with  the  forms  just  mentioned,  there  is  generally 
some  slight  distinction  of  meaning  between  them,  such  as  is  described 
in  §  185.  b.  Note.] 

[§  189.  Pilpal  and  Polpal  are  only  another  form  for  Piel  and  Pual, 
§  176.  3.] 

[§  190.  Hothpaal  and  Huthpaal  agree  in  meaning  with  Hithpael, 
when  is  it  used  in  a  passive  sense. 

NOTE.  The  other  unfrequent  conjugations  have  generally  an  intensive  signification.  The 
plurilateral  verba  are  few,  and  of  various  significations.] 


§§  191 194.  VERBS  ;  MODE,  TENSE,  ETC. 


MODE,  TENSE,  ETC. 

§  191.  The  modes  and  tenses  of  verbs  are  very  limited  in 
Hebrew.  The  modes  are  the  Indicative,  the  Imperative, 
and  the  Infinitive ;   the  tenses  are  the  Praeter  and  Future. 

§  192.  The  number,  person  and  gender  of  verbs,  are  ex- 
pressed with  unusual  fulness  and  accuracy. 

§  193.  The  ground-forms  of  all  verbs  are  (l)  The  Prae- 
ter, 3d  pers.  sing.  masc. ;  which  is  the  ground-form  of  the  past 
tense  and  the  present  participle.  (2)  The  Infinitive  construct ; 
which  is  generally  regarded  as  the  ground- form  of  the  Future 
and  Imperative. 

««^  Note.     But  in  verbs  with  Future  Pattahh,  the  Infinitive  construct 

takes  Hlwlem  regularly ;  which  seems  to  be  at  variance  with  this  prin- 
ciple; at  least  it  is  an  exception  (a  large  one  too)  to  the  maxim  just 
laid  down,  see  §  212.  2.  §  230,  respecting  the  Inf.  const,  as  a  ground- 
form.  However,  out  of  Kal  the  Inf.  may  well  be  taken  as  the  ground- 
form  of  the  Future  and  Imperative  in  all  the  conjugations;  and  even 
the  Participles  in  Piel,  Pual,  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael,  are  derived 
from  the  Infinitive  form  in  the  same  conjugations. 

§  194.    The  Praeter  is  declined  by  adding  to  the  root(the 
3d  pers.  sing,  masc.)  fragments  of  pronouns,  in  order  to  desig- 
nate person  and  gender;  e.g. 


Singular 

3  mas. 

bu_pr  ground-form. 

3  fem. 

rfrttp  by  adding  n_ 

.  .  , 

fragment  of    fiTn 

2  mas. 

ftbb'jf      —          n 

nn 

—    —       nm 

2  fem. 

nbog       —         S 

m 

—    —  rw  ^ 

1  com. 

Plural 

n 

prob.  from  obs.  "niNtj 

3  com. 

lbt2j£  by  adding      i 

NT 

derivation  unknown 

2  mas. 

fcnbttp      —        sn 

fragment  of       Bfttt 

2  fem. 

ra~$?    -     w 

tiyj 

—    —          7132* 

1  com. 

■iSbqg      —        *a 

—    —          ttjg 

195 197.    INF.    MODE — FUT.    TENSE. 


§  195.  The  Infin.  construct  in  Kal  (the  usual  ground-form 
of  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  mood)  has,  like  the  Praeter  Kal  (§  181. 
6),  three  forms ;  viz.  ?D£ ,  2Dtfj ,  "JX15 .  The  Inf.  in  the  de- 
rived conjugations,  takes  the  vowels  peculiar  to  such  conjuga- 
tions respectively. 

Note.  Besides  these  endings,  the  Inf.  of  regular  verbs,  specially  in 
Kal,  sometimes  takes  the  form  of  a  fem.  noun,  §  212.  3  ;  and  in  some 
irregular  ones,  the  fem.  form  in  Kal  is  almost  the  only  one  in  use,  e.  g. 
in  verbs  Pe  Yodh,  etc. 

§  1 96.    The  Infinitive  absolute  takes  Qamets  in  the  first  syl- 
lable, and  Hholem  impure  in  the  last. 
e.  g.  bjtajs . 

Note.  This  form  is  preserved  even  in  most  of  the  irregular  verbs. 
In  verbs  12? ,  however,  we  have  Dip  for  Sip.  The  derived  conjuga- 
tions preserve,  for  the  most  part,  the  final  Hholem  impure  in  the  Inf. 
absolute;  e.  g.  Niph.  fojttl ,  Piel  b'tag,  Pual  b*B& .  Hiphil  has  Tseri ; 
as  bnt3pn  or  btapn  .  The  variations  will  be  noted  under  the  respective 
classes  of  verbs. 

§  197,  The  Future  tense  is  declined  by  prefixing  fragments 
of  pronouns  to  the  ground-form,  i.  e.  the  Inf.  construct ;  and 
also  by  suffixing  them,  in  some  cases,  in  order  to  mark  the  gen- 
der, or  number,  or  both. 

Compare  the  Praeter  (§  194),  which  is  declined  by  the  aid  of  forma- 
tive suffixes  only.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  probable  derivation 
of  most  of  the  Fut.  formative  prefixes  and  suffixes. 

Singular. 


(  prob.  from  frttn,  *  fori 
( to  begin  a  word. 

deriv.  uncertain. 

from  nPJfi*. 
(  pref.  from  PKt ;  surf,  from 
(  ipn  to  mark  the  fem. 

from  "»:n  . 


Inf.  const,     rttp  ground-form. 

3  masc.       5>BJP  by  prefixing 

i 

3  fem.       Vcpn 

—  n 

2  masc.     b'opn 

—  n 

2  fem.      "^tipnbysufF.  andpref, 

\ —  n 

1  com.      b'tapN  by  prefixing 
12 

—  a 

90  §§  198 — 202.  verbs  ;  formation  of  tenses. 


Plural. 
3  masc.       I^Bp^  by  suff.  and  pref,  1  —  8        deriv.  of  ^  uncertain. 

q  r„m       **UA<»*  i  **        L  (  deriv.  of  n  uncertain; 

•"   )s  •  I     *  \  n5  from  nsn  . 

2  masc.       'iVopn     ....  ^  —  n  pref.  from  Drjtf . 

2  fern.      rr=bt2>     ....      1^-n  (  prefix  from  ^ ;  n2 

.» «    ':  *  *     T  I  trom  run. 


1  com.  bbp:  by  prefixing  —  3  from^s. 

mtf        [§  198.    The  formative  prefixes  or  praeformatives  of  the  Fut.  would 
appropriately  have  a  Sheva  for  their  vowel-pointing,  (as  in  Piel  and 
Pual  they  have) ;  but  the  vowel  here  receives  various  modifications  ac- 
cording to  the  pointing  of  the  letter  which  follows ;  §§  136 — 139.] 
U  [§  199.  In  the  derived  conjugations,  Niphal,  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and 

Hithpael,  the  praeformatives  of  the  Fut.  usually  expel  the  characteris- 
tics of  the  conjugation,  and  transfer  their  vowel-points  to  themselves, 
§118;   e.g. 


Fut.  Niphal                   bVfc  instead  of 

?t:£i-p  from  Inf. 

bovjn 

—      —    in  verbs  12  B^pj       — 

diptr     — 

cipri 

—  Hiphil                   ^T<1      — 

b^prr     — 

5&JRS 

—      —     in  verbs  "&  trp.?       — 

«*§T!     - 

n^pn 

—  Hophal                  bttjr       — 

«WJ!    - 

bt:pn 

—      —     in  verbs  is  dj3_F       — 

dpw     - 

bj>}tt 

—  Hithpael  bfcprr      —        rfifgfth*     — 

§  200.  The  final  vowel  of  the  Fut.  may  be  (like  that  of  the 
Praeter  and  Inf.)  either  Hholem,  Pattahh,  or  Tseri. 

E.  g.  Hholem ;  which  is  by  far  the  most  usual  form,  as  &3SP  .  Pat- 
tahh;  which  is  common  in  intransitive  verbs  having  a  Praeter  with 
Tseri,  and  also  in  verbs  with  a  Guttural  in  the  final  syllable,  and  some 
others,  as  13D* ,  *$$%  ^Tj^fpfiJSPa^  *>1  r==^E3»1 »  etc-     Tseri,  as 

^bfr ,  nur  ,  ;jrr=]F}3,» ,  etc. 

§201.  The  Imperative  follows  the  same  analogy  as  the 
Future,  usually  taking  the  same  vowels  in  its  final  syllable,  and 
for  the  like  reasons.      It  is  declined  by  means  of  siiffix-£r&g- 

ments,  like  those  in  the  Praeter  and  Future. 

Note.  The  Imp.  has  only  the  second  persons.  When  an  Imp. 
sense  for  the  1st  and  3d  persons  was  needed,  the  Hebrews  employed 
those  persons  respectively  of  the  Fut.  tense. 

§202.     The  participles  in  Kal  are  both  active  and  pas- 


§§  202 — 204.  verbs  ;  subj.  and  opt.  modes.  91 

sive;  in  the  other  conjugations  there  is  but] owe  form, 
which  follows  the  respective  conjugations  with  regard  to 
its  meaning. 

E.  g.  Kal  Sni3  scribens,  y\ro  scriptum.  But  in  verbs  with  final 
Tseri  and  Hholem,  the  part,  present  retains  the  form  of  the  Praeter,  as 
Praet.  *6a ;  part.  |£& ;  Praet.  *UJ  ,  part.  n*JP  ;  so  in  verbs  1$  ,  Praet. 
fc£  ,  part.  Bj?  .  In  Niphal  the  same  principle  prevails,  with  a  slight  va- 
riation ;    as  Niph.  bt2p:2 ,  part.  btt£3 ,  i.  e.  with  final  Pattahh  prolonged. 

Note  1.  Intransitive  verbs  usually  have  but  one  form  of  the  parti- 
ciple in  Kal ;  which  may  have  either  an  active  or  passive  meaning,  as 
the  case  requires. 

Note  2.  Beyond  Niphal,  all  the  participles  are  derived  from  the 
Inf.  form  of  their  respective  conjugations,  by  prefixing  ft  ,  and  dropping 
the  characteristic  h  where  it  occurs;  e.g.  Piel  bt2£73,  Pual  btaptt, 
Hiphil  ^Df>g  ,  Hophal  bttjPE ,  Hithpael  felBgna  .  In  the  passive 
forms,  the  final  Pattahh  of  the  ground-form  is  prolonged,  i.  e.  it  be- 
comes Qamets.  Any  departures  from  this  principle  will  be  noticed 
where  they  occur. 

Note  3.  Participles  are  declined  in  the  same  manner  as  adjectives, 
having  sing,  and  plur.  forms  of  the  masc.  and  fem.  gender. 


Subjunctive  and  Optative  Moods. 
§203.     The  Hebrew  has  neither  of  these  in  separate, 
regularly  defined  forms,  as  in  Greek;    but  it  employs  in  the 
room  of  them,  and  to  a  certain  extent,  peculiar  forms  of  the 
Fut.  tense. 

NOTE.  In  the  Arabic,  the  usage  of  the  Fut.  in  this  way,  is  far  more  defined  and  general  than 
in  the  Hebrew.  In  Syriac  and  Chaldee,  the  usage  does  not  at  all  appear.  The  Hebrew  use  is  a 
kind  of  medium  between  the  two,  as  it  is  somewhat  frequent,  and  yet  far  from  being  general. 

^       §204.    The  Future  is  varied,  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
pressing an  optative  or  conditional  sense,  by  paragoge  and 

apocope. 

(a)  By  paragoge,  viz.  of  !"T-_  and  sometimes  H- ;  e.  g.  Fut.  tal!3'i$ , 
with  paragoge  nnz^N  ;  so  ""IHTN ,  with  paragoge  5T173TN  ;  ]&$\  parag. 

(6)  By  a  kind  of  apocope;    which  generally  consists  in  rendering 
shorter  the  final  long  vowel ;    and  in  some  cases,  in  casting  away  the 


? 


p 


13 


92  §§  205,  206.  verbs  ;  parag.  and  apoc.  future. 

final  letter  and  vowel ;  e.  g.  b^ttp^  ,  apoc.  bt2p^_  ;  n:)»', ,  apoc.  nfa^  with 
Hholem  pure,  (which  is  shorter  than  1 ) ;  Inb^P ,  apoc.  !?,3]  . 

§  205.  Theparagogic  Future  is,  for  the  most  part,  confined 
to  the  1st  person,  singular  and  plural ;  the  2d  and  3d  persons 
rarely  exhibiting  it.  It  is  employed  in  all  the  conjugations; 
but  it  is  very  rare  in  the  passive  ones  and  in  verbs  TO  •  It  is 
used, 

(a)  As  an  Optative;  e.  g.  Htfl&JtJ  let  me  die.  (b)  To  express  ex- 
citement, urging,  assurance,  strong  determination  ;  as  rDbtf  I  must  go, 
JTn^N  let  me  rise  up,  mzHN  I  am  resolved  to  speak,  TObl  let  us  go, 
etc.  (c)  After  the  particles  ]3?Eb  ,  H  (that),  it  expresses  the  latter  part 
of  conditional  sentences;  as  nnsON  pMSV,  so  that  1  may  declare ; 
i-j^DriD")  that  ice  may  eat.  (d)  In  some  cases,  it  is  used  in  this  last 
(conditional)  sense,  where  the  particle  is  omitted. 

Note  1.  Examples  of  paragoge  in  respect  to  the  third  and  second 
persons  of  verbs,  may  be  found  in  Is.  5:  19.  Ezek.  23:  20.  Ps.  20:  4. 

Note  2.  Vav  conversive  (§  208)  frequently  occasions  the  paragogic 
form  of  the  verb  in  the  first  person  to  be  adopted,  particularly  in  the 
later  Hebrew  ;  but  not  with  any  speciality  of  meaning,  as  ~H7:^T  and 
I  said,  Gen.  41:  11  nEbftn  and  we  dreamed ;   comp.  §  206.  Note  1. 


§ 206.  The  jaj?oco£ateFiiture,  on  the  other  hand, is  mostly 
confined  to  the  2d  and  3d  persons,  rarely  making  its  appear- 
ance in  the  first;  e.g. 

Reg.  verb  Hiph.  yaffil  apoc.  bt?.p.?             -^pn  apoc.  btjgfi 

Verbs  i*   Kal  mar  —  mr             MfcR  —  nftn 

Hiph.  n"»ir  —  nrp            rnaa  —  higjg 

Verbs  sfe  Kal  tt^r  —  ^  (^>)    rtlrin  —  ^n(b^) 

Piel  r-n?^  —  bv?  (bJi)    rc^in  —  ^ri(b5Pi) 

Hiph.  rtrji  —  jjaj  (ri  ;)    n\m  —  b^  (bin) 

Hithp.  nYim-1  —  bam          riVann  —  bann 

This  Future  is  employed,  (a)  To  express  command,  wish,  prohibi- 
tion ;  e.  g.  n^l  let  him  destroy  ;  ^frCPi  btf  hide  not.  (b)  After  i  in  a 
conditional  sentence  ;  as  Tipl  M«£  7*e  may  te//.  (c)  After  the  particles 
of  negation,  rib  ,  be*;  as  PJCpn  rib  Mow  5/m/<  rco£  «oW;  inin  bN  Mom 
sAa/£  not  be  preferred. 

[Note  1.      Vav  conversive  (§  208)  connects  itself  very  often  with 


§§  206 — 208.  verbs  ;  vav  conversive. 


such  apocopate  forms,  but  frequently  without  any  speciality  of  meaning ; 
e.  g.  b$f*3  and  he  divided.    Comp.  §  205.  Note  2 ;  also  §  101.  b. 

Note  2.  the  proper  apoc.  Future  is  confined  to  conjugations  and 
forms,  such  as  the  table  above  exhibits.  All  Futures  do  by  no  means 
admit  it,  in  all  the  conjugations  ;  nor  do  all  classes  of  verbs  admit  it; 
nor  does  any  verb  admit  it  in  cases  where  it  has  a  formative  suffix. 

Note  3.  The  apocopate  Futures,  specially  in  poetry  and  in  the  later 
Hebrew,  are  not  always  of  special  significancy,  but  are  often  employed 
as  the  common  ones.] 

N.  B.  The  Fut.  with  retracted  accent  and  final  syllable  shortened 
because  of  this  retraction,  does  not  always  and  of  course  belong  to  the 
Fut.  apocopate  ;  for  not  the  apocopate  forms  only,  but  also  others,  oc- 
casionally suffer  such  retraction  and  shortening  of  the  final  syllable ; 
see  §  101.  b.  d. 

— .  §  207.   The  Imperative,  like  the  Future,  has  both  pa- 

ragogic  and  apocopate   forms,  which  give  intensity  to  the 

meaning. 

E.  g.  Paragogic;  as  ^ibtt,  irnTa/S ;  Wp,,  M^p;  *)B0  ,  J-PBO  . 
Apocopate;  as  ?txm  (for  b^ptt) ;  so  rf?A,  apoc.  ba ;  bV2  ,  apoc.  bb; 
]573VJ  apoc.  of  n:3|73UJ ,  jjfijhjs  apoc.  of  Hja^jij . 

Future  with  Vav  conversive. 

§208.  Vav  with  Pattahh  prefixed  to  the  Future  tense, 
and  followed  by  a  Daghesh  forte,  is  called  Vav  conversive  ;  be- 
cause its  usual  effect  is  to  convert  such  Future  into  a  Praeter 
in  respect  to  meaning. 

E.  g.  -172N  he  said,  also  1^*1  he  said  or  and  he  said.     If  the  prae-  J"%  J  •  ' 
formative  letter  of  the  Fut.  be  M  ,  the  Daghesh  is  omitted  and  the  vowel 
is  lengthened ;  as  bbpjn,  §  112.     If  the  praeformative  letter  of  the 
verb  have  a  Sheva  simple,  Daghesh  forte  is  usually  omitted  after  the 
Vav;  e.  g.  *tfgg*l,  §  73.  Note  3. 

[Note  1.  Vav  conversive  is  often  connected  with  the  paragogic  first 
pers.  Fut.,  §  205.  Note  2  ;  also  with  the  apocopate  2d  and  3d  pers.  Fut, 
§  206.  Note  1 ;  in  many  cases  without  giving  an  Optative  or  Subjunc- 
tive meaning  to  them. 

Note  2.  Vav  conversive  commonly  (not  always)  makes  the  Future 
Milel,  and  consequently  shortens  the  final  vowel  if  it  be  long,  §  101.  b. 

Note  3.  Vav  conversive  is  probably  a  fragment  of  the  verb  rft  n  to 
be.     The  first  letter  is  dropped  (as  it  commonly  is  in  Syriac),  and  the 


94  §§  208 — 211.  verbs  ;  occasional  peculiarities. 


fragment  5T1  is  united  to  the  Future  by  assimilating  the  H ,  (as  in 
rrt^rrt-n^) ;  so  that  £B{5*l=a=Sfbj^  Slirr  it  was  [that]  he  killed,  i.  e. 
he  killed.  So  the  Arabians  make  their  Imperfect,  only  they  write  out 
the  verb  of  existence  in  full ;  and  so  the  Syrians,  except  that  they  em- 
ploy the  participle  of  the  verb  of  existence. 

Note  4.  When  Vav  is  not  conversive,  and  is  prefixed  to  the  Fut, 
it  has  a  different  punctuation  from  the  above ;  e.  g.  in  Gen.  1  :  6,  Wj  , 
but  with  Vav  conversive  TPT;  so  £op?] ,  but  with  Vav  conversive 

Praeter  with  Vav. 
§  209.    Vav  prefixed  to  the  Praeter  is  merely  a  conjunc- 
tion.     But  it  often  gives  to  the  Praeter  the  sense  of  a  Fu- 
ture, because  it  connects  it  with  a  preceding  Future  or  Imper- 
ative. 

Note.  As  Vav  conversive  prefixed  to  the  Future,  retracts  the  tone 
(§  208.  Note  2) ;  so,  on  the  contrary,  Vav  joined  to  the  Praeter  usually 
throws  the  tone  forward,  as  "Wap ,  "'rnn^"]  ,  §  101  a. 

§  210.  General  remark  on  the  tenses.  The  tenses  in  Hebrew  are 
real  Aorists,  capable  of  every  variety  of  meaning  as  to  designation  of 
time.     See  this  fully  developed  in  the  Syntax,  §  503.  §  504. 

Occasional  peculiarities  in  the  forms  of  Verbs. 
[§211.  The  peculiarities  now  to  be  noted  are  not  confined  to  any 
one  conjugation  or  class  of  verbs,  but  apply  more  or  less  to  all  the  dif- 
ferent conjugations  and  classes  of  them. 

(a)  Paragogic  letters  are  often  prefixed  to  some  of  the 
forms;  e.g. 

(1)  Nun,  to  persons  ending  in  }  or  ^  ;  as  •pijjH'!  instead  of  ll^n? , 
•ppa'lPi  instead  of  ^pS'iFi ;  rarely  to  the  Praeter,  as  yiJ^JJ  instead  of  =]?*£ ; 
see  §  109.  c.  §  146.  b.  (2)  (a)  H_. ,  usually  to  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  active, 
§  204.  §205.  §  207;  rarely  in"  the  Praeter,  as  M»fJ«J  for  £$$ 
Niph.  Praet.  fem.  SiNbs: ,  with  tt_.  parag.  nntf  rD2 ;  Hiph.  fern. 
ttfcOSftn ,  with  parag.  iinjonn  .  (b)  Sometimes  ii_  is  used  instead  of 
r>-;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  28:  15,  ntf/npan .  (3)  Aleph  paragogic  or  otiant, 
rarely  ;  as  nab?! ,  tf^Dbn  the  same  ;  so  *WfDB?  for  MD&?  ,  §  125.  a.  (4) 
Participles  sometimes  take  He  or  Yodh  paragogic,  especially  the  lat- 
ter, when  they  are  in  regimen  ;  as  ni  &nb  "V^DUJ^n  .  (5)  Sometimes 
the  Inf.  mood  takes  it ;  as  "^ipinb  .  (6)  Also  the  Praeter  2d  pers. 
fem.,  as  TOt:pr . 


§§  211,  212.    VERBS    TRANSITIVE.  95 

(6)  Forms  with  Quiescents  are  sometimes  defectively  writ- 
ten, §  63. 

E.  g.  yq$  for  n*}£  ,  hgt?  for  U|i  (comp.  §  122.  1)  j  bat  this  usage 
is  rare.  Oftener  1  is  written  for  ns ;  as  lti&R  for  rtr^aFi.  Sometimes 
n_  for  "»fu  :  as  P»T  for  ">rw .  rtittb  for  wto? .  So  sna  for  nana  , 
etc. 

(c)  The  prepositions  21,  3,  b  ,  prefixed  to  the  Inf.  of  Niphal,  often 
(not  always)  expel  the  n  characteristic,  and  stand  in  its  place  ;  as 
bt3^3  forbDjsria  ;  comp.  §  199. 

(d)  Mem  praeformative  in  participles  is  sometimes  (rarely)  omitted  ; 
as  njvb  for  rtjftn ,  Mppna  for  D£ppf}»3  ,  etc.] 


REGULAR  VERBS  TRANSITIVE.* 

NOTES  ON  PARADIGM  I. 

The  student  is  first  of  all  to  commit  paradigm  I.  of  the  Verbs.  The  following  notes  will  serve 
to  explain  variations  and  anomalies.  The  paradigms  are,  for  convenience'  sake,  thrown  together 
at  the  end  of  the  Grammar. 

.\.  B.  The  learner  will  be  careful  to  note,  that  the  tone  is  on  the  ultimate  in  all  cases  where 
it  is  not  marked  with  an  accent  over  the  penult.  Particular  care,  at  the  outset,  will  enable  him 
always  to  accent  the  verbs  rightly,  without  any  trouble. 

Kal 

[§212.  (1)  Praeter.  The  unusual  forms  are  3  fern.  sing,  in  ru , 
e.  g.  f&Tlg  from  btN;  also  2  pers.  masc  nPHJa  for  Pftta  (n  parag.), 
§  211.  ifc;  "TOVri  for  tt£n  2  pers.  sing,  fern."  (Yodh  parag.),  §  211.  6. 

(2)  The  example  nsn  exhibits  the  Fat.  with  Pattahh,  (familiarly 
called  Fut.  A) ;  but  there  are  very  few  verbs  with  such  a  Future,  un- 
less the  last  syllable  has  a  Guttural  in  it,  or  the  verb  belongs  to  the 
classes  with  final  Tseri  or  Hholem  in  the  Praeter  ;  §  181.  6.  The  Inf. 
of  3D"i  issbn  ;  and  so  in  other  cases  of  the  like  nature  ;  which  seems 
not  to  agree  with  the  idea  of  its  being  the  ground-form  of  such  Futures 
and  Imperatives  as  take  Pattahh  ;  §  193.  2. 

(3)  Less  usual  forms  of  the  Infinitive.  Besides  the  usual  forms  in 
the  paradigm,  there  are,  (a)  Inf.  absolute,  Jr'Dj5  ,  Vav  omitted  ;  Inf.  con- 
struct bit:p  ,  Vav  fulcrum  only  ;  also  as  bt2p .  (6)  The  Inf.  has  femi- 
nine forms  also,  though  rarely ;  e.  g.  like  'nb'Oft  ,  ^Pp  ,  nVpp  ;  (bttpE, 
like  the  Chaldee,  is  doubtful). 

*  Some  of  the  verbs  here  treated  of  are  intransitive  also  ;  but  in  general  it  is 
otherwise  ;  and  so,  a  potiori  nomenfit. 


96  §§  212,  213.  verbs  transitive. 


Note.  The  Hholem  in  the  Inf.  absolute  is  impure  and  immutable  ; 
but  in  the  Inf.  constr.  it  is  pure  and  mutable.  Hence  it  is  shortened 
before  Maqqeph  ;  as  ""bttp  getol.  Before  suffixes  it  is  shortened  and 
transposed  ;  see  the  Inf.  with  suffixes  in  Par.  XXII. 

(d)  Less  usual  forms  of  the  Future.  These  arebiEp1;  (Vav  fulcrum), 
rarely  as  btap*  except  in  verbs  with  a  Guttural  in  the  final  syllable,  or 
verbs  intransitive  having  a  Praeter  with  Tseri ;  still  more  seldom  as 
Rb)Dp?.«  First  pers.  parag.  as  nbttpN  very  rare.  In  pause  *&3fp.  > 
MST- 1  §  t4&\  with  ]  parag.  the  latter  form  (23"p)  becomes  JiM-p  • 
Three  times  the  3d  plur.  fern,  has  a  praeformative  *  instead  of  Pi;  e.  g. 
J"rn^-  instead  °f  "il^?1!! ,  Dan.  8:  22,  also  the  like  forms  in  Gen.  30: 
38.' 1  Sam.  6:  12. 

(5)  Imperative;  bi Dp  (Vav  fulcrum),  sometimes  asbDp.  Parago- 
gic,  nbtqjj ,  iibpp  ,  rarely  as  nb'bp  ,  Mb^p  .  Imp.  2d  pers.  fern.  sing, 
seldom  as  ^Dg  ,  ",?:Opr ,  1  Sam.  28:  8.  Second  pers.  masc.  plur.  (sel- 
dom) lite  ;  in  pause,  sometimes  as  ib'fcp  ,  ibt^  .  The  Hholem  here 
is  pure  ;  as  it  is  also  in  the  Inf.  and  Future.  A  kind  of  apocopate  form 
is  not  unfrequent  of  the  2  pers.  fem.  plural ;  e.  g.  J*Sf*J  with  final  fur- 
tive Pattahh,  instead  of  iTOfctiJ  . 

7  t  :   -  : 

Note  1.  As  the  Hholem  in  the  Future,  Inf.,  and  Imper.,  is  pure, 
wriether  written  without  a  Vav  or  with  one,  it  is  of  course  shortened 
•when  the  accent  is  thrown  off;  e.  g.  before  Maqqeph,  "btsp'i  qiq-tol, 
so  before  a  suffix,  D^btDfJ^  ;  Inf.  and  Imp.  ~bDp  qetol 

Note  2.  Some  verbs  have  both  Fut.  O  and  A ;  e.  g.  such  as  rfifti , 
*TPT>  fl3?i  7?n,  etc-»  (see  Lex.)  without  any  difference  in  their 
meaning.  Others  have  Fut.  O  and  A,  with  a  difference  in  their  sig- 
nification ;  e.  g.  S^j5  ,  snft  ,  tabn,  ^n,  etc.  (see  lexicon.) 

(6)  Participles  active.  Frequently  written  bp.p,  although  the  Hho- 
lem is  impure,  §  63  ;  very  seldom  as  b^Dip  ,  bttip  or  b^Dp,  which  are 
doubtful  forms.  With  Yodh  parag.,  "»bt:p  ,  fem.  Vibpp  (from  the  fem. 
form  J"i?Dp ).  Participles  are  declined  as  adjectives,  having  masc.  and 
fem.  as  well  as  sing,  and  plural  forms ;  see  parad.  XXI. 

(7)  Participles  passive.  Sometimes  written  bpp  (§  41),  seldom  as 
b^O  .  The  sense  is  not  uniformly  passive,  but  sometimes  active;  often 
so  in  neuter  and  intransitive  verbs;  as  is  the  case  also  in  Syriac] 

Niphal. 

[§213.     (1)  The  Praeter  has  no  variations  from  the  paradigm.  (1) 
Inf.  abs.  'in™  foniJ-Hn  ,  Exek.  14:  3 ;  Pp:rj  for  fp3rr ,  Ps.  68:  3. 
(3)  The  final  Tseri,  in  the  forms  of  the  Inf.  const.,  Fut.,  and  Imp., 


§§  213 216.    VERBS  TRANSITIVE.  97 


iapure,  and  of  course  shortened  when  the  accent  is  thrown  off;  e.  g. 
^.ffrj  >  P?1  ,  Inf.  — insn  .  A  disjunctive  accent  often  changes  the 
Tseri  to  Pattahh  ;  as  bfc^l  ,  §  129,  d.  §  145.  The  actually  occurring 
plur.  fern.  2d  and  3d  persons  more  usually  have  Pattahh,  even  without 
a  disjunctive  accent,  or  the  presence  of  a  Guttural ;  as  Fttb^Kn  ,  Jer. 
24 : 2 ;  so  that  as  to  the  forms  with  Tseri,  as  in  the  paradigm,  it  is 
somewhat  doubtful  whether  they  were  the  predominant  ones  in  the  language. 
(4)  Future  1st  pers.  sing,  often  takes  Hhireq  under  the  praeforma- 
tive  ;  e.  g.  as  btapr8 ,  UJn^N  ,  etc. 

Pitl 

[$  214.  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Seghol,  as  137 ;  oftener  with 
Pattahh,  as  "i^b  ,  specially  before  Maqqeph,  as  fcMM-tsbJa  .  (2)  Infin- 
itive fem.  forms  rather  frequent,  as  rn?3T;  with  suffix,  as  &&$$ . 
(3)  Imperative  A.  as  X?jq .  (4)  Participle  sometimes  without  » ,  as 
hsna  for  narcn  ,  Eccl.  4  :  2.  §  108.  a.  3.  The  plur.  fem.  Future'  has 
sometimes  Pattahh  instead  of  Tseri,  e.  s.  rubtapft  instead  of  !n;bt3pPi: 

7  ft  T    .    -|_    .  T".     ..11    .    J 

comp.  §  213.  3. 

Note  1.  The  final  Tseri  throughout  Piel  is  pure  ;  and  of  course  it 
should  be  shortened  whenever  it  loses  the  accent ;  e.  g.  ^'"•B'-Jj? .  Nun 
parag.  usually  retains  it,  as  "psbrr . 

Note  2.  Daghesh  forte  in  the  middle  radical  is  not  unfrequently 
omitted  in  writing,  when  the  middle  radical  has  a  Sheva ;  as  wp^  for 
MJ£3Pt,$  73.  Note  3.] 

Pual. 
[§215.  (1)  Praeter  very  rarely  as  btt'lp ,  a  mere  orthographic  varia- 
tion.    Once  Srrjj?b  for  nhpb .     (2)  Participle  sometimes  omits  73  ;  as 
n|?b  for  njpbtt  ,  C2-ib  for  hnbn ,  etc.  §  108.  a.  3.] 

NOTE.  Daghesh  is  sometimes  omitted  in  writing  here,  as  in  Piel  ;  see  Note  2  above. 

Hiphil. 

[§  216.  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Seghol  under  the  ?"T,  as  1373^371 
instead  of  isnbsn.  Rarely  N  is  put  for  n ,  as  "'ftbNSN  (Is.  63 : 3)  1st 
pers.  sing,  for  "Vnb&Oft . 

(2)  Infinitive  absolute  frequently  as  bttjjtt  ,  (once  tPSltfN  Jer.  25:  3, 
Chaldee  form  tt  for  n),  or  b^ttp.n  .  (3)  Inf.  construct  seldom  as  btajSfJ. 
With  preposition,  as  b^pnb  and  b^ppb. ,  §  108.  b.  In  a  few  instances 
the  praeformative  has  Hhireq;  as  W'jn,  like  the  Praeter.  See  Lev. 
14:  43.  Gesenius  (Comm.  uber  den  Jes.)  supposes  bVUV\  and  ta^ttftl 
in  Is.  31:5  to  be  of  the  same  character  ;  but  nothing  hinders  our  con- 
sidering them  as  Praeter  made  Fut.  by  the  T  prefixed. 

(4)  Future  apocopate  btrp"  ,  and  specially  with  1  as  bt3|3*  2  ,  having 
13  ' 


§§  216 — 218.    VERBS  TRANSITIVE. 


a  Tseri  pure  and  mutable,  §  206.     This  of  course  is  shortened,  when 
it  loses  the  accent.     A  peculiar  anomaly  of  the  3d  pers.  plur.  here,  is 

!W£1»  ^1T--»  *nVr>  ]  Sarn-  14:22-    31:2.    Jer.9:2.     This  is 
after  the  manner  of  the  Aramaean. 

(5)  Imperative  takes  the  apocopate  form  with  Tseri,  in  the  2d  pers. 
sing.  masc.  and  2d  plur.  fern. ;  but  it  sometimes  has  the  form  bnt2pn 
here  ;  and  with  parag.  n_  ,  and  with  suffix  pronouns,  it  always  follows 
this  model ;  e.  g.  nb^EDpn  ,  liT^Epn. 

(6)  The  apoc.  form  of  the  Part,  (bttptt)  in  the  singular,  is  doubt- 
ful. But  plural  forms  derived  from  such  a  singular,  sometimes  occur ; 
e.  g.  tP»VrjE  as  from  &£*]»,  Jer.  28:8;  ^-\Wn  as  from  *lpE, 
2  Chron.  28:  23. 

Remarks.  In  the  Praeter  the  ■>_  is  generally  held  fast,  not  being 
exchanged,  in  the  persons  where  it  is  used  at  all,  for  any  other  vowel; 
but  in  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp.,  the  apoc.  forms,  and  those  with  1  pre- 
fixed, or  preceded  by  bN  ,  take  Tseri  instead  of  \_,  which  Tseri  is  for 
the  most  part  pure  and  mutable.  Instead  of  this,  Pattahh  is  employed 
when  the  final  syllable  of  the  verb  has  a  Guttural  in  it,  §  236.  §  230.] 

NOTE.  Respecting  the  tone-syllable  in  this  conjugation,  see  $  100. 

Hophal. 

§  217.  Some  verbs  have  both  forms,  i.  e.  as  bttprr  and  btipJi  ;  some 
the  one  exclusively,  and  some  the  other.  No  actual  case  of  the  Inf. 
construct  occurs  in  this  conjugation. 

In  a  very  few  cases,  the  Ji  characteristic  of  the  conjugation  remains 
after  the  praeformative,  e.  g.  rn.ysprrfc  for  ntexptt ;  so  in  Hiph.  rriiSTJ 
for  WtJ\  verb  ttb.  Instances  of  Hoph.  Inf.  abs.  occur  in  Ezek.  16:4 
(bis).  Josh.  9:24.] 

HithpaeL 
[§218.  (1)  The  end  syllable  with  Pattahh  is  frequent  here,  which 
of  course  makes  Qamets  in  pause  ;  as  -"Tpnri ,  sj^pnn  .  (2)  In  the 
second  and  first  person  of  the  Praeter,  (where  the  usual  vowel  between 
the  second  and  third  radical  is  Pattahh,  as  in  the  paradigm),  if  the 
tone  is  thrown  off  from  this  Penult  syllable,  it  occasionally  takes  Hhireq 
instead  of  Pattahh  ;  as  ^n^pnn-i ,  CrrtZHpnrp  .  (3)  Maqqeph  shortens 
the  forms  with  Tseri,  as  this  vowel  is  here  pure  and  mutable ;  e.  g. 
rp-^V.iinn.  (4)  Nun  parag.  usually  retains  and  prolongs  the  Pat- 
tahh, when  that  vowel  is  used  ;  as  fJDVftnH.  (5)  Daghesh  forte  in 
the  middle  radical  is  sometimes  omitted  here,  as  in  Piel  and  Pual  ; 
e.  g.  I^gn?  (for  ^jvBrr]),  Judg.  20: 15,  the  Pattahh  being  prolonged 
as  a  compensation. 


§§  219 222.    VERBS  INTRANSITIVE. 


(6)  The  passive  of  Hithpael,  i.  e.  Hothpael,  sometimes  occurs ; 
e.  g.  ^ann ,  Num.  1  :  47.  2 :23 ;  so  afctarr  (for  fittaqnn ),  023rr  (for 
D33nn),  with  Q-ibbuts  instead  of  Qamets  Hhateph  ;  comp.  §  184.] 

Special  Forms. 

§  219.  Besides  the  conjugations  of  the  regular  verbs  here  noted, 
Poel  and  Poal,  also  Pilel  and  Pulal,  sometimes  occur  in  them ;  but 
such  cases  are  exceedingly  rare.  E.  g.  of  the  former,  are  ttinittj  and 
•tiyti ,  part.  Df&B  Job  9  :  15,  T«$l!j8  (for  so  it  should  be  pointed)  Ps. 
101 :  5,  -WVP  1  Sam.  21  : 3  ;  of  the  latter,  \\tz  ,  nnttS  ,  ^Bfc .] 


REGULAR  VERBS  INTRANSITIVE.  V3>£>    A)    7t£3 

••  -r 


hv*> 


NOTES  ON  PARADIGM  II. 


§  220.  The  3d  pers.  sing.  Praeter  is  the  principal  one  which  exhib- 
its a  departure  from  the  forms  of  the  regular  transitive  verb  ;  as  will  be 
seen  by  inspection  of  the  paradigms. 
?'&&  §221.  Verbs  final  Hholem  (of  which  there  are  not  half  a  score), 
generally  retain  the  Hholem  in  the  derived  forms;  "Vn'a^  from  *u^, 
nPfr:r  from  bb*' ;  but  not  always  ;  as  "TO312S  shd-khdl-ti  from  bbttj .   As 

.;t  T    '  .  /iM'  #T 

the  Hholem  in  these  verbs  is  pure,  so  it  is  shortened  when  it  loses  the 
accent ;  as  n"W1  veyd-ghor-td. 
y*3     §222.    In  the  same  manner,  those  few  words  which  retain  Tseri 
in  the  derived  forms,  shorten  it  either  into  Hhireq  or  Seghol  when  the 
tone  is  removed  ;  e.  g.  iy  ,  Tr'1^ ;  b&V  ,  tinrN«p  . 

[Note  1.  All  the  futures  are  with  Pattahhy  unless  the  Praeter  has 
two  forms,  A  and  E ;  as  p^  and  \y^  ,  Fut.  only  "jb'Jr  ,  as  in  the 
paradigm. 

Note  2.  In  pause  the  Tseri  of  verbs  intransitive  most  frequently 
makes  its  appearance  ;  e.  g.  Ipi'n  ,  and  so  often.  In  a  number  of  cases, 
a  pause-accent  makes  the  Tseri  appear,  which  elsewhere  does  not  ap- 
pear ;  as  "jSttS ,  pre  only  in  pause. 

Note  3.  Out^of  Kal  the  intransitive  vertjs  conform  to  the  model  of 
the  transitive  ones,  and  need  not  separate  paradigms.  The  whole  num- 
ber of  them  is  very  small ;  and  the  cases  of  departure  in  inflection  from 
the  model  of  Par.  1.,  are  comparatively  very  few. 

Note  4.  The  verbs  called  intransitive,  are  in  some  cases  transitive. 
As  before,  a  potiori  nomen  fit.] 


100  §§  223 — 226.  verbs  with  gutturals. 

VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 

§  223.  We  have  seen  (§  179)  that  the  verb  bs&  ,  (the  example  for 
paradigms  in  the  old  grammars),  is  employed  to  give  technical  desig- 
nations to  the*  various  forms  of  verbs.  Accordingly,  as  D  is  the  first 
letter  in  this  verb,  9  the  second,  and  b  the  third ;  so  verbs  with  Guttu- 
rals may  be  denominated  D  guttural,  $  guttural,  b  guttural,  whose  first, 
or  second,  or  third  radical  letter  is  a  Guttural. 

Verbs  Pe  Guttural;  Par.  III.  IV. 
§  224.   Where  other  verbs  would  take  a  simple  Sheva  un- 
der the  first  radical,  these  more  usually  have  a  composite  She- 
va.     This  may  be  called  the  smooth  enunciation. 
E.  g.  iag: ,  p]ba; ,  pirn,  Sep,  F)b* ,  prn ,  etc. 

Note  1.  The  praeformative  letters  must  have  the  short  vowel  which 
corresponds  with  the  composite  Shevas,  in  such  cases ;  see  §  139.  This 
extends  to  the  letters  formative  of  conjugation,  as  well  as  of  tense ;  e.  g. 
Niph.  TOJJ  ,  Hiph.  V»sn  ;  Hoph.  "12?n ,  etc. 

Note  2.  When  the  final  vowel  is  Hholem,  the  preceding  vowels 
are  generally  (_.  J  ;  but  when  it  is  Pattahh,  they  are  usually  (...);  e.g. 
I'W* ,  Pim  .    Yet  such  forms  as  OhrP  do  sometimes  occur. 

Note  3.  As  (  )  seems  to  be  shorter  than  (_  ..),  so  the  first  is  some- 
times put  for  the  second,  where  a  more  rapid  enunciation  is  required  ; 
e.  g.  Wl»*rj ,  but  with  1  ,  "'n^yrjl . 

§225.    But  not  unfrequently  the  Guttural  retains  Sheva 

simple  ;   and  then  the  vowel  under  the  praeformative,  etc.,  is 

still  the  same  as  it  would  be  in  case  a  composite  Sheva  had 

been  employed;  i.e.  verbs  Pe  Guttural  do  not  employ  the 

regular  short  Hhireq  under  praeformatives  in  the  Fut.  etc., 

but  some  other  short  vowel.      This  may  be  called  the  rough 

enunciation. 

E.  g.  *"iba;  ,  -ft**  ,  rjsn: ,  -ran;  ,  instead  of  *ibie;  ,  W? ,  ^*|!jj» 
UJSrr.  Only  the  verbs  rrrr  and*rPh  in  Pe  Guttural  make  such  forms 
as  rC*P  and  JTh*, 

v   ;|.  v   ir 

§  226.  When,  in  the  course  of  inflection,  a  simple  Sheva 
comes  immediately  to  follow  a  composite  Sheva  under  the 
Guttural,  the  Guttural  assumes  the  corresponding  short  vow- 
el ;  see  §  140. 


§§  227,  228.  verbs  pe  guttural  ;  notes.  101 

E.  g.  =n*lP  ,  not  !H*J£J  >  which  woujd  make  an  impossible  syllable, 
§  42.  §  140.     So  tap£i  noHBOKJ;  I9^|«  not   I1${$  . 

§  227.  Where  the  first  radical  would  regularly  be 
doubled,  (as  in  the  Inf.  Fut.  and  Imp.  of  Niphal),  but  this  is 
prevented  by  its  being  a  Guttural  ( 1 1 1),  the  preceding  vowel 
is  lengthened  (§112),  as  the  paradigms  shew. 

Note.  In  this  respect  verbs  Pe  Resh  agree  with  verbs  Pe  Guttural, 
§  111 ;  e.  g.  OEntt  instead  of  OJcnft. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  228.  (a)  KAL.  (1)  Inf.  construct,  receiving  prefix-prepositions 
with  a  Sheva,  causes  them  to  be  pointed  as  the  praeformatives  in  the 
Future  are;  e.g.  "Ito?.?  ,  ^^,  also  ?DN^.  Inf.  fem.  like  nW», 
jnj?Tn  ,  nbpn  ,  which  last  form  is  very  unusual. 

(2)  The  Future  has  two  forms  ;  as  will  be  seen  in  the  paradigm. 
Aleph  here,  whether  a  radical,  or  a  praeformative  of  the  first  pers. 
sing.,  takes  the  Seghol  vowels  in  preference  to  the  others.  The  two 
forms  _  _  and  -  _  are  not  un frequently  interchanged  in  the  Fut.  of 
the  same  verbs ;  and  sometimes  the  singular  has  one  form,  and  the 
plural  another,  just  as  adjunct  words  may  require  the  pronunciation 
to  be  more  or  less  rapid ;  e.  g.  5]bN£  ,  plur.  ^BOep  .  The  reason 
of  their  exchange  for  each  other,  in  many  cases,  is  not  apparent  to  us. 
It  depended,  probably,  on  the  niceties  of  viva  voce  enunciation. 

The  Futures  with  the  rough  enunciation,  i.  e.  with  Sheva  simple, 
*  are  as  nan-1  ,  ^TJ« ,  usually  having  Pattahh  in  the  first  syllable  when 
the  last  is  O,  and  Seghol  when  the  last  is  A  :  which  last  is  probably 
an  expedient  in  order  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  two  Pattahhs.  The 
declension  of  these  forms  is  otherwise  regular,  as  in  Par.  I. ;  excepting 
that  where  the  final  Pattahh  falls  away,  the  praeformative  may  take, 
and  sometimes  does  take,  Pattahh;    as  l&ftj,  while  the  plural  is 

{^Imperative  with  tf,  as  qbN,  IrtW.  With  n  parag.,  as  HBO** . 
Imp.  fem.  sing.  %bh  ,  ^rjflj  Ruth  3:  15,  a  peculiar  form. 

(6)  NIPHAL.  The  common  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  of  the 
Seghol  class ;  e.  g.  tVgP\ ,  or  (according  to  the  rough  enunciation) 
nrih:.  But  in  the  Inf  absolute  with  Hholem  final,  it  is  Pattahh 
(comp.  a.  2.  above),  as  *pBn: ,  -ito: ;  very  seldom  with  Pattahh  in 
other  cases,  yet  sometimes  so,  as  n&qih:  Gen.  31:  27.  Vav  prefixed 
commonly  occasions  Pattahh ;   comp.  §  224.  Note  3.     The  increased 


102  §§  228 — 232.  verbs  ayin  guttural. 

forms  of  the  Part,  also  receive  it;    as  tOffii  fitte,  Vfeft*     In 
Esth.  8:  8,  we  find  fcinHD ,  a  Part,  sui  generis. 

(c)  HIPHIL.  (1)  Sometimes  with  the  rough  enunciation,  as 
^PDfrn  .  Peculiar  is  ttb*n ,  §  142.  e.  1.  Vav  prefixed  changes  the 
composite  Sheva  to  the  A  class ;  e.  g.  ^nttnnrn  ,  i.  e.  it  hastens  the 
pronunciation  of  the  first  part  of  the  word,  because  the  tone  is  thrown 
forward ;  comp.  §  224.  Note  3.  (2)  Inf.  abs.  and  constr.  are  some- 
times interchanged  in  their  usage;  e.  g.  T^n  (Josh.  7:  7)  for  Inf.  ab- 
solute -Viiyn  ;    -liayb  ,  Inf.  abs.  (Deut.  26:  12)  for  Inf.  const.  "Pto^b  . 

(3)  Future  with  rough  enunciation  ""Pprr  ;    and  so  the  Part.  "VOl-pa. 

(4)  *pTE  is  for  YV*fi  ,  §  119.  c.  1 ;  for  the  omission  of  the  tf,  see  §  118. 
Note  3. 

(4)  HOPHAL.  With  rough  enunciation,  ^S!"if: ;  also  (rarely) 
5rrb?n,  §  142.  e.  1 ;  bFiH!"T ,  Inf.  abs.  sui  generis,  Ezek.  16:  4. 

Note.  The  Daghesh'd  conjugations  (i.  e.  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hith- 
pael)  are  regular,  because  they  can  never  have  a  Sheva  under  their 
first  radical] 

Verbs  Ay  in  Guttural;  Par.  V. 

§  229.  Where  other  verbs  have  Sheva  simple  under  the 
middle  radical,  these  take  a  composite  Sheva,  §49. 

§230.  Final  syllables  in  the  ground-forms  of  any  of  the 
conjugations,  having  Hholem  or  Tseri  in  them,  may  exchange 
these  for  Pattahh.  In  Kal  this  is  usual ;  in  the  other  conju- 
gations, less  common.  But  still,  the  Inf.  const,  in  Kal  takes 
Hholem;  comp.  §  244.  6.   Note  2. 

E.  g.  Fut.  pgp,  rarely  as  ^1  \  Piel  an? »  n,3?  (see  §  33) ;  Hiphil 
Imp.  pft^n ,  etc.     Verbs  Ayin  Resh  sometimes  imitate  this. 

§231.  As  the  conjugations  Piel,  Pual,  Hithpael,  cannot 
admit  a  Daghesh  in  the  middle  radical,  they  prolong  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  as  a  compensation,  in  cases  where  analogy 
would  require  such  a  Daghesh.  Verbs  Ayin  Resh  imitate 
them  in  this;  §111.  §112. 

Notes  on  Paradigm  V. 
[§  232.    (a)  KAL.    (1)  Inf.  fern,  as  tiqtW  ,  rfbrtK ;  also  as  i"T[?rn . 
(2)  Future  anomalous  pftr;  ,  §  142.  e.  1. 


§§  232 — 236.  verbs  lamedh  guttural.  103 


(6)  PIEL.  Praeter  with  middle  N  ,  takes  either  Tseri  or  Hhireq 
impure  before  it;  as  ]N73  ,  fN:  .  Middle  M  prefixes  impure  Hhireq  ;  as 
•jrrs  .  Middle  n  and  r ,  Hhireq  impure  and  rarely  Tseri ;  as  UirtD  , 
ItWl  ,  "VPS  ,  W^ .     Resh  demands  Tseri ;  as  -yna ; . 

Future,  Inf.,  Imp.,  and  Part,  with  middle  N  and  "S ,  usually  require 
Qamets  before  them  ;  as  *U*e* ,  *J"${  ,  ^"32$  •  But  n  ,  n  ,  3> ,  most 
commonly  prefix  Pattahh  ;  as  5n3^  tarrn1; ,  "T^  ,  etc.  Yet  Q,amets  is 
sometimes  used  here ;  and  even  in  the  same  verb,  the  Inf.  may  have 
one  of  these  vowels,  and  the  Fut.  another  ;  e.  g.  Inf.  isa  ,  Fut.  *13£P  , 
etc. 

(c)  PUAL.  Here  compensation  is  usually  made  for  Daghesh  ex- 
cluded, by  Hholem,  e.  g.  Vtf  ii ,  ^p2  ;  but  sometimes  by  Qibbuts  im- 
pure, as  ynn  ,  cnn  ;  see  §  33. 

(d)  HITHPAEL.  Here  the  vowel  before  the  Guttural  is  varied, 
just  as  in  the  fut.  Piel ;  see  above  under  b.  The  accent  affects  Pattahh 
here  in  a  peculiar  way  ;  e.  g.  ipiansnn ,  instead  of ''Pransnn  ,  which  is 
explained  by  §  142.  a,  and  §  144.  y«3»= Y^nE  (§'  187.  b.  3)  is  an 
instance  of  Hithpoel.] 

Verbs  Lamedh  Guttural;  Par.  VI. 

§  233.    Where  by  analogy  the  Guttural  must  have  a  She- 

va,  the  vowel-points  are  regular. 

Note.  The  2d  pers.  sing.  fem.  takes  a  furtive  Pattahh  under  the 
Guttural ;  e.g.  fttttt}  instead  of  Ptffcia  ,  §  52.  2.  If  the  Pattahh  under 
9  here  was  a  proper  vowel,  the  pointing  would  be  n3>ftiEi ,  i.  e.  with  n 
Raphe.     Punctuation  like  ^3*53  is  very  rare. 

§  234.   Where  the  Guttural  is  preceded  by  1 ,  T ,  i_  im- 
mutable, it  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive,  §  69. 

E.  g.  in  the  Inf.  absolute  and  in  the  Part.  pass,  of  Kal ;  in  Hiph. 
throughout,  where  "•_  is  usually  retained.  The  Inf.  const,  in  Kal  com- 
monly follows  the  same  usage,  as  Jjtoic ;  compare  (§  230)  a  similar 
punctuation  as  it  respects  the  Hholem. 

§  235.   In  Kal,  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  nearly  always  take  Pat- 
tahh; also  the  fem.  Part.  Segholate;  as  n^ft'd. 

Note.  The  Imp.  appears  to  have  Hholem  sometimes ;  e.  g.  hats  r 
Gen.  43:  16. 

§  236.     All  the  forms  with  pure  final  Tseri  may  retain 


104  §§  236 — 240.  irregular  verbs. 


it,  and  put  a  Pattahh  furtive  under  the  Guttural ;   or  they  may 

substitute  a  real  Pattahh  instead  of  these  vowels. 

E.  g.  ?%j&  or  3>Eia . 

Note  1.  Prolonged  forms,  i.e.  such  as  the  Inf.  abs.,  the  forms 
with  a  pause-accent,  etc.,  retain  Tseri.  The  apocopate  forms  take 
Pattahh. 

Note  2.  Verbs  nb  frequently  imitate  this  class  of  Guttural  verbs, 
by  taking  Pattahh  as  their  final  vowel. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  237.  Under  this  class  are  included  all  those  in  which  any 
of  the  radical  letters  are  dropped,  or  assimilated,  or  in  which 
they  become  quiescent, 

§  238.  These  may  be  most  conveniently  distributed  into 
(a)  Those  which  are  irregular  B,  i.e.  in  the  first  radical 
(§  223).  (b)  Those  which  are  irregular  JP ,  i.  e.  in  the  second 
radical,  (c)  Those  which  are  irregular  7  ,  i.  e.  in  their  third 
radical,  (d)  Those  which  are  irregular  £D  and  7  ,  i.  e.  in  their 
first  and  third  radical. 

I.  CL.ASS  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS, 

§  239.  These  consist  ol  verbs  MD ,  *&,  and  JB ,  1.  e.  whose 
first  radical  is  neither  N ,  1 ,  or  3  . 

VERBS  PE  ALEPH;  Par.  VII. 

§  240.    In  most  cases,  verbs  with  tf  for  their  first  radical 

belong  to  the  class  Pe  Guttural,  above  described,  tf  being 

treated  as  a  Guttural.      The  verbs  which  really  belong  to 

the  class  now  in  question,  are  those  in  which  fc*  as  first  radical 

is  quiescent. 

[Note.  Of  these  there  are  only  Jive,  viz.  15a  ,  !"DN  ,  b^tf  ,  ^EN  , 
rtSN  .  Three  more,  viz.  nrjN  ,  ThN  ,  P)0tf ,  sometimes  exhibit  a  quies- 
cent tt  ,  and  sometimes  a.  guttural  one  ;  e.  g.  Thtf'S  tnan.  For  other 
explanations,  see  under  paradigm  VII.] 


§§  241 243.  VERBS  PE  ALEPH PE  YODH.  105 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  241.  (a)  Kal.  (1 )  The  Future  drops  tf  quiescent  of  the  root  in 
the  1st.  pers.  sing.,  and  retains  only  the  tt  praeformative  which  desig- 
nates the  first  person  ;  e.  g.  ^Etf  instead  of  natttf,  thus  avoiding  the 
occurrence  of  two  Alephs.  (2)  In  a  very  few  cases,  the  first  syllable 
takes  a  Tseri  instead  of  a  Hholern  ;  as  nn&T  (not  Jin^"')  ;  in  nrrN  the 
Fut.  has  both  forms,  e.  g.  1st.  pers.  sing.  Sntt  and  anfij .  The  last  syl- 
lable in  these  verbs  usually  exhibits  Tseri,  specially  when  it  has  a  dis- 
junctive accent ;  e.  g.  b'D^ ;  with  a  conjunctive  one,  Pattahh  is  very 
common  in  the  same  syllable,  e.  g  b^tfV 

Note.  Quiescent  tf  here  is  not  unfrequently  omitted  in  writing ;  as 
*)§*  for  &Qtf\  ^W  for  *n*}tf\  etc. ;  see  §  63. 

(3)  Inf.  construct  from  -)£« ,  ibtfb  for  -ibtfb  ,  §  119.  c.  1.  Imper- 
ative once  IDfig  for  IDtt  ,  see  §  119.  d.  2. 

(b)  Derived  conjugations.  (1)  Niphal  once  as  Trt^5 .  (2)  Piel 
admits  contraction  ;  as  pfta  for  P)V.N» ,  *Wft  for  *!#Kfi ;  see  §  118.  Note 
3.  (3)  Hipiml  also  admits  contraction  in  a  little  different  manner; 
e.  g.  b^n  for  ^DNn  . — Future,  h^jjfi\l  (with  accent  retracted  §  129) 
instead  of  bttNTT,  'pta  for  J,WJ?Jj  see  §  119.  c.  1.  Fut.  once  with 
Hholern,  as  !"n"»nN,  Jer.  46:  8. — Imperative,  vhr:  for  'Pnan  ,  §  119. 
c.  1.  (4)  Hophal,  >&3l*  (1  for  tf  §  122.  2)  for  *i^&0  ,  like  the  con- 
tractions in  §  119.  c.  1.] 

VERBS  PE  YODH ;  Par.  VIII— X. 

§  242.  These  may  be  divided  into  three  classes ;  viz. 
(l)  Such  as  have  (originally)  a  Vav  for  the  first  radical; 
e.g.  lV=h77ll.  (2)  Those  whose  first  radical  is  proper- 
ly Yodh;  as  DEh.  (3)  Such  as  follow  the  analogy  of 
verbs  Pe  Nun,  in  assimilating  the  first  radical  in  the  Fu- 
ture, etc, 

FIRST  CLASS  OF  VERBS  PE  YODH  |  Par.  VIII. 

§  243.  (a)  In  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp.  of  Kal,  the  Yodh  is 
for  the  most  part  dropped;  the  Praeter  and  Part,  are 
regular. 

(6)  In  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal,  the  original  1  ap- 
14 


106  §§  243 — 247.  verbs  pe  yodh,  i.  class. 

pears;   but  it  is  quiescent,  except  in  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp. 
of  Niphal,  where  it  is  moveable. 

§  244.  The   Inf.,  Fut.,  and   Imp.  of  Kal  exhibit   two 
forms;    viz.  one   with  final  Tseri,  and   another  with  final 

Pattahh. 

{a)  The  forms  with  final  Tseri  take  Tseri  in  the  first  syllable  also, 
and  more  generally  omit  the  Yodh ;  as  333* ,  etc.,  as  in  Par.  VIII. 

[Note.  The  Fut.  sometimes  (rarely)  retains  the  Yodh  in  the  wri- 
ting of  these  verbs ;  as  1  pers.  sing.  Fut.  parag.  ttbb^tt  (from  £|fc*J, 
Ip^.  (from  "i^),  with  final  Pattahh  because  of  the  Resh.  With  a 
Guttural  in  the  final  syllable,  Pattahh  of  course  usually  takes  the  place 
of  Tseri ;  as  9*\*  ,  not  pV] .  In  the  Inf.  const,  and  Imp.  of  Kal,  Yodh 
disappears  almost  throughout,  in  the  forms  with  final  Tseri.] 

{b)  But  the  forms  with  final  Pattahh  more  usually  retain  the  Yodh 
in  Inf.,  Imp.,  and  Fut.  of  Kal ;  and  the  Fut.  takes  Hhireq  magnum 
in  the  first  syllable  ;  as  fQ*  ,  ;&*<  ,  «H^  ;  see  in  Par.  VIII. 

[Note  1.  Yodh  quiescent  is  sometimes  omitted  here  in  writing;  as 
ttto"  for  aJy  ,  Ps.  102 :  5,  §  63.     So  wn*'  for  fen^  . 

Note  2.  The  Inf.  construct  of  the  masc.  form,  is  not  analogical  here 
with  that  of  the  forms  of  final  Tseri  in  the  Future.  It  takes  Hholem  ; 
as  X^  ,  pB"1 .     One  would  naturally  expect  Pattahh. 

§  245.  The  derived  conjugations  of  both  these  classes  of 
verbs  are  alike;  the  model  is  exhibited  in  the  paradigms 
of  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal. 

[§  246.  Some  verbs  ^SD  take  both  the  forms  above 
noted. 

E.  g.  p:r  ,  Imp.  ps  and  pr»  ;  npj; ,  Fut.  ^£^  ,  also  *\%?2  or  *\J£. 
The  lexicons  note  such.] 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  247.  KAL.  (a)  The  Inf.  of  the  class  Fut.  Tseri  has  more  usual- 
ly the  fern.  Segholate  ending,  as  in  the  paradigm.  With  a  Guttural, 
Pattahh  of  course  is  used  ;  e.  g.  p?1  (not  rer%  )  from  **£  ,  §  1 J  3.  But 
sometimes  the  apocopate  masc  form  is  used ;  as  r?  from  SH*1.  Another 
fern,  form  of  the  Inf.  is  as  rrt  from  nrj; .  The  suffix  Inf.  fern,  is  as 
nir4,  *%M  fflPjgQ)  from  5X1 » so  nl* »  Tm  n"om  TV  >  etc- 

(6)  The  Inf.  of  the  class  Fut.   Pattahh  is  regular ;  see  §  244.  b. 


§§  247 — 249.  verbs  pe  yodh,  It:  class.  107 


Note  2.  The  feminine  forms  are  as  n^h"? ,  from  h5*  ;  ^T.  from  N^ . 
Forms  with  Vav  fulcrum,  as  "\T^  . 

(c)  The  Future,  which  has  Tseri  final,  is  pure,  so  that  it  may  be 
shortened;  as  it  is  in  3p\ l  ,  with  tone  retracted,  §  129.  With  n 
parag.,  as  T£  ,  rty^L*     Altogether  anomalous  is  the  Fut.  S^JJ1 . 

{d)  The  Imperative;  (1)  Where  the  Future  is  Tseri,  commonly 
takes  a  paragogic  letter;  as  ffll ,  i"Db  {^b),  from  Ti ,  *jb  masc.  forms; 
so  with  n_  parag.,  as  n^ ,  masc.  9\t  §  125.  b.  (2)  The  Imp.  of  the 
verbs  Fut.  Pattahh  regularly  retains  its  Yodh  radical. 

{e)  NIPHAL.  (1)  Future  sometimes  retains  the  Yodh,  instead  of 
exchanging  it  for  the  original  "l ;  e.  g.  Tirffl ,  8*jV  with  retracted  tone, 
§  129. 

Note.  It  is  peculiar  also,  that  the  first  pers.  sing,  here  (like  the 
other  persons)  retains  Hhireq  in  its  first  syllable,  as  SiljMt ,  0*1^*J , 
")DJN  ,  etc. ;  not  3"4^N  ,  etc.,  as  in  most  other  analogous  cases. 

(2)  Part.  plur.  const.  "^W  (instead  of  ^13)  from  nr;  also  ttjofa  with 
Tseri,  instead  of  tDJsfa  ,  from  aJp^j 

(/)  PIEL.  The  Fut.  here,  preceded  by  Vav  conversive,  drops  the 
first  of  its  Yodhs,  and  writes  it  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  second  ;  e.  g."»in*l 
instead  of  ttJa^l ,  W£1  for  ^y.l  >  etc. 

ig)  HIPHIL.  (1)  The  Future  with  retracted  tone,  as  ibjv  . 
Sometimes  the  characteristic  rr  is  retained  in  the  Future,  as  s^ttji  Ti"1 
for  £*»i: ;  so  iTlirp. ,  RDirr  ,  from  rn;  ,  P)tr  ;  comp.  §  199.  (2)  TAe 
Imperative  sometimes  retains  its  Vav  moveable ;  as  NSIfT  for  ^hn  , 
Gen.  8  :  17 ;  so  ^tain  for  -iiziin ,  Ps.  5 : 9. 

{h)  HITHPAEL  sometimes  retains  the  original  Vav,  and  uses  it  as 

moveable,  e.  g.  aninn ,  rprinti ,  n^tnrf.] 


SECOND  CLASS  OP  VERBS  PE  YODH  ;  Par.  IX. 

§  248.  These  are  such  as  have  a  Yodh  originally  for  their 
first  radical ;   which  they  retain  in  Hiphil,  and  thus  distinguish 

themselves  from  the  other  class  described. 

See  remarks  in  Paradigm  IX. 

Note.  Only  seven  verbs  belong  to  this  class  ;  viz.  SB"' ,  b\.1t  173'' , 
P^OD^^^^^Hiph. 

§  249.   The  Future  Kal  here  is  sometimes  with  Pattahh 


108  $$  249 — 252.  verbs  pe  yodh — pe  nun. 


and  sometimes  with  Tseri;   mostly  written  fully,  but  some- 
times defectively. 

E.  g.  ao**,  as  in  the  paradigm;  but  also  *]£■'? ,  ^X^Vj  Vi?.*1?' 
7JP^^  .  Of  course  this  class  of  verbs  agrees  with  the  preceding  one 
as  to  the  final  vowel  in  the  Fut.  of  Kal,  i.  e.  it  has  both  Tseri  and  Pat- 
tahh.     No  Infin.  form  occurs  here. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  250.  Hiphil,  as  the  paradigm  shews,  may  be  written  either  plene 
or  defective.  (1)  The  Future  sometimes  exhibits  moveable  Yodh,  in- 
stead of  Yodh  quiescent;  ITC^ ,  Prov.  4:25;  B-YW*,  Hos.  7:2. 
Comp.  §  247.  g.  2,  and  h. 

Note.  Two  Futures  are  altogether  anomalous;  e.g.  S't}^,  Job 
24  :  21 ;  also  *>•*£  .  The  like  to  this  is  SHJ*  ,  in  Kal  Future,  Ps.  138: 
6.  §  247.  c. 

(2)  Imperative  once  retains  a  moveable  Yodh  in  the  Qeri,  *\iti*fl , 
Ps.  5:9.     So  the  Part,  of  Hiphil,  as  tprjir  53  1  Chron.  12 :  2.] 


THIRD  CLASS  OF  VERBS,PE  YODH;  Par.  X. 

§  25 1.  The  peculiarity  here  is,  that  Yodh  is  assimilated  in 

the  Fut.  of  Kal,  in  Niph.,  Hiph.,  and  Hophal. 

[Note  1.  Only  four  verbs  belong  wholly  here  ;  viz.  H2\  5£*,  nST1 , 
yx*  .  Five  others  partake  partly  of  the  peculiarities  of  these  verbs,  and 
partly  of  the  other  classes,  viz.  15^  ,  "itP  ,  p£* ,  "xst^  ,  T&^ . 

Note  2.  Simonis  and  Eichhorn  derive  all  the  peculiar  forms  of  this 
class  of  verbs,  from  roots  ]D  .  The  question  is  one  of  etymology.  It 
matters  not  for  the  student,  which  way  it  is  decided.  I  follow  the  lex- 
icon of  Gesenius,  for  convenience's  sake  rather  than  from  conviction. 
The  fulness  of  the  paradigm  supersedes  the  necesity  of  additional 
notes.] 

VERBS  PE  NUN;  Par.  XI. 
§  252.  The  peculiarities  of  these  verbs  are,  (a)  That 
whenever  3  (their  first  radical)  would  analogically  take  a 
Sheva,  in  the  course  of  declension,  etc.,  it  more  usually  be- 
comes assimilated  to  the  letter  which  follows,  and  is  expressed 
by  a  Daghesh  Jbrte. 


§§252—254.  verbs  pe  nun.  109 

(6)    That  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp.  of  Kal,  the  Nun  is  some- 
times dropped,  in  the  manner  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh. 

[Note.  In  this  case,  the  Imper.  more  commonly  takes  the  parag. 
form,  as  &|,!rctf£,  IP),  flU7}.  The  Inf.  commonly  has  a  Segholate 
form,  in  cases  of  aphaeresis,  i.  e.  where  the  first  radical  is  dropped ;  as 
OfJ%  in  the  paradigm.  But  abridged  forms  in  these  verbs  either  of  the 
Inf.  or  Imp.,  are  not  frequent  at  all.  These  Inf.  and  Imp.  modes 
more  generally  preserve  the  radical  3 ,  even  when  the  Fut.  assimi- 
lates it;  e.  g.  Inf.  and  Imp.  &j?3  ,  Fut.  D|^ ;    Inf.  and  Imp.  yh*  ,  Fut. 

§  253.    Verbs  whose  second  radical  is  a  proper  Quiescent 

or  a  Guttural,  exclude  the  'peculiarities  of  verbs  ]D . 

Note.  The  reason  is,  that  the  Daghesh  (compensative  of  Nun)  can- 
not be  inserted  in  either  of  these  classes  of  letters  ;  and  therefore  usage 
commonly  preserved  the  Nun  before  them.  But  in  Niphal  Praeter, 
where  a  Guttural  is  the  second  radical,  and  Nun  would  be  repeated  if 
it  were  preserved,  it  is  dropped,  as  dns ,  not  Qrj3D  ,  the  vowel  in  the 
first  syllable  being  prolonged  as  usual,  §  112.  Note.  §  29.  The  verb 
nri3  more  usually  drops  3  in  the  Fut.  of  Kal ;  as  nh^  ,  but  also  nhstn 
2  person.  In  other  respects,  the  verbs  just  named  are  regular  in 
respect  to  Nun. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§254.  (a)  KAL.  (1)  Inf.  const,  like  dx\  ,  occurs  only  in  six 
verbs.  Once  Inf.  fiOiB,  from  8i»2  ,  Ps.  89:  10.  The  reg.  form  S3tt, 
Dp  a ,  JM13 ,  is  most  frequent.  Some  verbs  have  both  forms;  as  #t33  and 
nsa  .  I  find  no  example  of  reg.  Inf.  with  final  Pattahh.  Fem.  form 
with  suffix,  as  ftXDk  ,  itTO  . 

(2)  Future  Hholem  is  more  frequent  than  Fut.  Pattahh  in  these 
verbs.  Fut.  Tseri  only  in  jna .  Some  verbs  have  both  Fut.  O  and 
A  ;  as  TT3 ,  "fla  .  Some  at  one  time  retain  3  ,  and  at  another  omit  it, 
in  different  examples  of  the  Fut.  ;  as  S^a ,  123 ,  etc. 

(3)  Imperative,  like  the  Inf.  seldom  drops  the  radical  3 ,  §  252.  b. 
The  abridged  forms  are  like  XX  ,  1Z52.  (before  Maqqeph  -SJa),  Mja,  VDl; 
JPrfrom  ]na. 

(6)  NIPHAL.  (1)  Praeter  appears  like  Piel,  because  it  drops  the  3 
of  the  root,  and  inserts  a  daghesh  or  prolongs  the  vowel  ;  as  i*to3  ,  Piel 
and  Niph.  Ktea  ;   fcto  ,  Pi.  and  Niph.  fifta ;    §  253.     Once  with  Hho- 


110  §§  254—257.  verbs  ayin  doubled. 


lem,  as  Vvz2 .  (2)  Infinitive  abs.  sometimes  as  Pjiiiq ,  E)*33Ft  Ps.  68:[34 
*jin3tt  Jer.  32:  4.     (3)  Participle  once  as  ^rjr.3  ,  with  suffix  ^ . 

(c)  HIPHIL  very  rarely  retains  the  3 ;  as  Ifftyn ,  bBzb  .  So  in 
Hophal,  ^pP,2ii .  The  usual  vowel  in  Hophal  is  short  Qibbuts,  as  in 
the  paradigm. 

Note.  The  verb  nj5b  imitates  *}£)  in  Kal ;  see  lexicon.  The  verb 
"jna  assimilates  its  final  "]  also,  before  suffixes  beginning  with  n  or  3 ; 
as  NKa  instead  of  n:n: ,  *sn3  ,  etc.  The  Inf.  is  nn  for  nih  (§  157.  2), 
with  suff,  W ,  Tseri  being  shortened,  §  129.  a.] 

Remark.  The  great  variety  of  usage  in  verbs  of  this  class,  shews 
that  the  sound  of  3  was  quite  variable,  and  the  letter  less  prominent 
and  distinct  than  most  of  the  consonants.  The  predominant  usage  in 
Kal,  is  regular ;  in  Niph.,  Hiph.,  Hophal,  irregular.  Gesenius  states 
the  contrary  of  this,  as  to  Kal,  but  a  minute  examination  of  all  these 
verbs,  will  shew  that  he  is  mistaken.  The  daghesh'd  conjugations  are 
regular  throughout ;   so  that  no  paradigm  is  needed. 


II.  CLASS  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

( Verbs  Irregular  2> .) 

§  255.  These  comprehend  such  as  are  defective  in  respect  to  their 
middle  radical ;  i.  e.  such  whose  middle  radical  either  falls  out,  or  be- 
comes quiescent. 

VERBS  AYIN  DOUBLED  (&) ;  Par.  XII. 
§  256.    This  class  comprises  all  those  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  the  same  letter,  and  which  often  (not  al- 
ways) drop  the  second  radical  in  the  course  of  inflection ;  as 
Sit),  Praet.  30,  Inf.  SD . 

These  verbs  might  well  be  named  contracted  verbs,  (not  very  unlike 
the  Greek  r^aco,  iifiw,  cpiXew,  qdai ,  etc.) ;  for  a  great  part  of  their 
irregularity  arises  from  contraction.  But  dispute  about  names  would 
not  be  important. 

First  law  of  contraction. 

§  257.  This  is,  that  the  second  radical  is  dropped,  and  with 

it  the  point  or  vowel  of  the  preceding  letter  (whether  a 


§§  257 260.  VERBS  AYIN  DOUBLED.  Ill 

proper  vowel  or  a  Sheva),  and  the  vowel  belonging  to  the 
second  radical  is  then  transferred  to  the  first  radical. 

E.  or.  nno  50:  iiD,5o;  SaO*1,  io"1?,  etc.  The  alterations  occa- 
sioned  in  the  formative  praefixes,  etc.,  by  this,  will  be  considered  in  the 
sequel. 

N.  B.  All  the  forms,  which  have  an  impure  vowel  in  them,  or  a 
Daghesh  forte  in  the  middle  radical,  are  incapable  of  contraction ;  e.  g. 

3ni o  ,  nino ,  nino ,  aao ,  etc. 

§  258.  Any  accession  to  the  end  of  a  contracted  form,  (by 

declension  or  in  any  other  manner),  cause  the  second  radical 

to  reappear  by  a  Daghesh  forte,  but  does  not  restore  to  the 

first  radical  its  original  vowel. 

E.  g.  ISO ,  contr.  SO ,  with  accession  lao  sab-bu  (not  toZD),  Tfizp, 
^b,  licr,  etc.  In  all  such  cases,  the  middle  radical,  having  lost  its 
vowel,  is  written  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  last  radical,  and  joined  in  a  sylla- 
ble with  the  preceding  vowel. 

§  259.   In  order  to  render  more  audible  the  doubling  of 

the  final  letter  of  the  root,  the  epenthetic  syllables  1  and  *,_ 

(with  the  tone)  are  inserted  before  suffixes  beginning  with 

a  consonant. 

E.  g.  in  the  Praeter  i,  as  rjisO ,  'liizD ;  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  *,-_, 
as  J-j^zOF i,  ra^sD  •  The  Arabian,  while  he  writes  the  words  fully 
regular  in  these  cases,  pronounces  them  like  the  Hebrew. 

§  260.   The  praeformatives  of  tense  and  conjugation,  in- 
stead of  the  short  vowel  of  regular  verbs,  in  their  contracted 

forms  usually  assume  long  pure  vowels,  §  130. 

Hophal  only  has  an  impure  vowel  following  its  characteristic ;  e.  g. 
IMMtt  instead  ofnaCH. 

Note.  In  most  cases  the  original  ground-forms,  from  which  the 
contracted  forms  seem  evidently  to  be  derived,  are  somewhat  different 
from  those  of  regular  verbs  ;  e.  g.  Kal  Fut.  ZD"1  appears  to  come  from  a 
full  Fut  23p2  (like  the  Arabic  Future) ;  so  that  when  D  is  thrown,  by 
contraction,  into  the  second  syllable,  and  Pattahh  under  the  Yodh 
praeformative  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  it  of  course  becomes 
long,  i.  e.  it  goes  into  Q,amets,  §  130.  So  in  Niph.,  where  we  have 
2p:  apparently  for  lap: ,  and  in  the  Fut.  3SP  for  ZSO*; ;  in  Hiph., 


112  §§  261 — 264.  verbs  ayin  doubled. 

30ijT  from  53pn ,  etc.     But  in  some  few  cases,  the  contracted  forms 

appear  to  come  from  regular  original  ones ;  as  Fut.  "ift^  >  apparently 

from  tan»",# ;  so  Niph.  £*n  as  from  bbrn ;  Inf.  btyl  ,  as  from  bbrjn  ,  etc. 

Second  law  of  Contraction. 

§  261.  This  is,  to  insert  a  Daghesh  in  the  first  radical 
after  praeformatives,  to  give  those  praeformatives  the  re- 
gular short  vowel,  and  then  to  omit  the  doubling  of  the 
last  radical  when  the  word  receives  an  accession  at  the 
end.      The  epenthetic  i  and  \_  are  also  omitted  in  this 

case. 

E.  g.  Kal  Fut.  der» ,  etc.,  Hiph.  BT£  (from  fifcfi)  instead  of  fin; ; 
Hoph.  n3£  (from  nn_3)  instead  of  nS!P  . 

NOTE.  In  Kal  Fut.  this  is  not  uncommon  ;  in  other  conjugations  it  is  rare.    In  Chaldee,  this  is 
the  reigning  method  of  contraction. 

§  262.  The  conjugations  Poel,  Poal,  Hithpoel,  usually 
take  the  place  of  the  regular  daghesh'd  conjugations  here, 
but  not  always;  and  sometimes  both  exist  together,  either 
as  synonymous,  or  with  some  shades  of  difference,  §  188. 
§  175.  a,  > 

§  263.  Verbs  $9  with  the  second  and  third  radicals  gut- 
tural, lengthen  the  preceding  vowel  in  cases  where  Da- 
ghesh forte  should  be  inserted  but  is  excluded  by  the  Gut- 
tural, §  112. 

E.  g.  rarw ,  contracted  np ,  3d.  pers.  fem.  Htvr  ,  1  pers.  *nirr«B . 

Note  1.  The  tone  syllables  in  the  usual  contracted  forms  are  pecu- 
liar.    See  an  account  of  them  in  §  100.  f. 

Note  2.  The  student  must  not  fail  to  note,  that  in  Kal  verbs  3>£ 
often  retain  the  regular  form ;  specially  in  the  Praeter,  and  sometimes 
in  the  Infinitive.  In  most  other  cases  they  generally  follow  the  models 
in  the  paradigm  ;  with  more  anomalies,  however,  than  most  other  clas- 
ses of  verbs,  as  the  sequel  will  shew.  An  instance  of  conformity  to 
both  models  in  the  Fut.  is  ]Sft,Fut.  ]fP  and  ]2^r»;  so  )in  ,  Hiph. 
•ps-iii  regular. 

Notes  on  the  paradigm. 

[§  264.  (a)  KAL.  (1)  The  Praeter  of  verbs  final  Hholem  conforms 
to  the  law  of  contraction  in  §  257;  e.  g.  fibn,  3  Plur.  ^ten;  and  so 
ISh,  etc.     Once,  Vflm==%3i»n ,  Ps.  64  :  7 ;  comp.  §  266. 


§  264.    VERBS    AYIN    DOUBLED.  1 13 

(2)  Infinitive  constr.  sometimes  with  Pattahh ;  as  tyflj ,  *a| .  Inf. 
fem.  rttp  from  wn.  The  Inf.,  in  a  considerable  number  of  cases,  is 
written  with  a  Vav  fulcrum,  §  64 ;  e.  g.  b'lil ,  til?,  'ite  .  So  Imp.,  even 
when  it  has  a  Daghesh,  as  "Vail,  ttjip.  Rarely  has  the  Inf.  a  Shureq, 
as  "Via,  Ecc.  9.  1. 

In  the  suffix  state,  or  before  Maqqeph,  the  Inf.  having  a  pure  Hho- 
lem  shortens  it,  as  pn  >  Tpn ;   Eh  ,  ~Qn  torn. 

(3)  (a)  The  Future  usually  has  Hholem  pure ;  but  sometimes  it 
appears  with  Vav  fulcrum  (§  64)  ;  as  T13?^ ,  for  tttj .  This  Hholem  is 
shortened  by  losing  the  tone  :  as  ftp  ,  togfe*!  ^s-  *>7:  2,  or  nss.rrj  Is.  27: 
11  ;  no*i . 

*  »    T  - 

(b)  The  Put.  with  Pattahh  also  occurs,  which  usually  gives  a  Tseri 
to  the  praeformative  ;  as  *M2_1 ,  bp2  >  &*3!!  >  ECptt  1  Pers-  with  Yodh 
fulcrum  (§  64)  from  E73!n;  but  bin  in  Amos  5:  24  seems  also  to  be 
Fut.  Kal. 

(c)  The  Fut.  also  has  Shureq  in  a  few  cases  ;  as  "p-p  ;  fVTj  .  So 
the  second  kind  of  contracted  Future ;  as  Drift  (=D:i3nr))  instead  of 
fihn ,  from  tj£n . 

(4)  Imperative  also  has  Pattahh  sometimes,  as  bil  ;  with  Tt  parag.  as 
•1*3';  with  Resh,  as  JT}N  .  It  also  has  Vav  fulcrum,  as  Si^r,  Josh.  10: 
12,  (No.  3  above).  The  Imp.  with  Hholem  pure  of  course  shortens 
this  vowel  when  the  tone  is  removed ;  as  "'sn  ,  fi^D  • 

Niphal. 

[  (b)  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Tseri,  as  bp3;  also  with  Hholem, 
as  1  'itt  ,  Is.  34 :  4.  The  praeformative  has  sometimes  other  vowels 
besides  Qamets  ;  e.  g.  tt!3  from  ^:n  ;  bfi_3  from  bbft ;  nti:  from  nnfr  ; 
where  the  vowel  under  3  is  long,  because  the  Daghesh  forte  is  omitted 
in  the  second  radical.  This  conforms  to  the  second  mode  of  contrac- 
tion described  above,  §  261 ;  comp.  260.  Note,  at  the  end  ;  also  §  111. 
§  112.  According  to  these  forms,  we  find  Pjbto  (from  b^h),  Ezek. 
22:  16 ;  'ttfft  (from  p_n),  Jer.  22:  23. 

(2)  Infinitive  abs.  with  Hholem;  as  pisin,  tlsrt  Inf.  const,  with 
Tseri ;  as  Dan ,  bhn ,  §  261.  §  112. 

(3)  Future  with  Hholem  as  tiV»j  with  Resh,  yilft  2d  pers.,  IT-n^ 
3d  pers.  plur.,  from  t3En  . 

(4)  Imp.  with  Hholem ;  as  *jftq.     (5).  Part,  with  Tseri,  as  0232 .] 

Hiphil. 

[  (c)   This  conj.  has  a  pure  Tseri  throughout,  in  both  syllables ; 
15 


114  §§  264 — 266.  verbs  ayin  doubled. 

which  is  therefore  liable  to  change,  as  is  usual  with  all  pure  vowels ; 
e.  g.  npr?  Hiph.,  2  pers.  nizprt ,  etc. 

(1)  It  should  be  noted  here,  that  Hiphil  not  only  takes  a  Pattahh 
Jinaly  in  case  it  has  a  Guttural  or  a  Resh  in  the  last  syllable,  as  ngjn  , 

^JWJ ;  and  in  pause,  as  Tnn  ,  §  145 ;  but  also  (not  unfrequently)  with- 
out either  of  these  reasons ;  as  'p^vn, ,  9t3DQ  ,  Part.  b22E  . 

(2)  Praeter  once  b^Tn^Tn,  §261.  Sui  generis  is  nT-Ori  for 
nipisrr ,  Pro  v.  24:  28  ;  unless  it  may  come  from  fins  ,  which  is  more 
probable.     (3)  Future  with  tone  retracted,  no*1  ,  etc. 

(d)  HOPHAL  has  no  special  anomalies  except  the  manner  in  which 
the  praeform.  is  pointed,  nDifi  for  52l0fi.] 

§  265.  Resemblance  between  verbs  99  and  15? .  This  is 
great.  Hophal  is  the  same  in  both ;  and  the  praeformatives 
take,  in  the  same  way,  a  long  pure  vowel.  Besides  these 
general  resemblances,  there  are  many  particular  instan- 
ces, in  which  verbs  VV  exhibit  the  same  appearance  as 

verbs  1?. 

E.  g.  Inf.  "rta  from  "nra,  ipiro  (instead  of iprn)  from  pjpft .  Fut. 
"P^;  fWf'j  TiiU;,  etc.  Hiph.  inf.  ffihST  (for  ^Enfi)  from  Dan. 
Fut.  EV«£T,  from  EJgaJ ;  Jiy*P  (f°r  T1?1!?)  n*om  ^nn.  ^  raay  be  justly 
doubted,  however,  whether  the  root  is  not  12  in  all  such  cases ;  see 
§  298.  §  299.  1  merely  conform  to  the  lexicons,  in  this  arrange- 
ment. 

[§266.  Peculiar  Anomaly.  Verbs  99,  with  theirs/ 
form  of  contraction  (§§  257 — 260),  sometimes  omit  the  usual 
Daghesh  forte  in  the  increased  forms  (§258),  and  also  the 
vowel  which  precedes  it. 

E.g.  Fut.  nbaa  for  rtjsaa  *»£  for  Var;  Inf.  floljfe  for  Ban*:; 
Niph.  *qK}j  for  *ttj?i: ,  Is.  19.  3;  Fut.  fia^3  for  nxfcz  ,  Jer.  8:  14. 
But  these  anomalies  are  by  no  means  frequent. 

Note.  The  conjs.  Poel,  Poal,  and  Hithpoel,  with  their  substitutes, 
Pilpel,  Pulpal,  and  Hithpalpal,  are  declined  regularly  ;  the  final  Tseri 
etc.  in  them  being  pure,  and  subject  to  changes  as  usual. 

Remark  1.  Of  the  whole  number  of  verbs  Ayin  doubled  (124),  26  have  only  Piel  etc.  forms  ;  20 
have  only  Poel  etc.  forms  ;  10  have  only  Pilpel  etc.  forms  ;  11  have  both  Piel  etc.,  and  Poel  etc. ; 
2  have  Piel  etc.  with  Pilpal  etc. ;  and  3,  Poel  etc.  with  Pilpel  etc.  The  other  52  supply  no  exam- 
ples of  any  of  these  conjugations.  It  appears,  therefore,  that  the  regular  form  in  Piel,  is  as  fre- 
quent as  any  other. 

Remark^,    The  lexicons  are  very  irregular  in  designating  the  conjugations  Poel,  Poal, etc. 


§§  267,  268.  verbs  ayin  vav.  115 

The  student  must  accommodate  the  designation  to  the  actual  form.    The  Vav  usually  accompa- 
nying the  Hholem  in  these  conjugations  is  sometimes  omitted  in  writing,  §  63. 

Remark  3.  Almost  all  the  anomalies  perplexing  to  the  student,  arise  from  the  peculiarities 
noted  in  $  261  and  $  266.  But  those  in  §  261  are  altogether  of  the  most  frequent  occurrence.  If 
the  student  thoroughly  possesses  himself  of  the  second  modo  of  contraction  there  exhibited,  he 
will  meet  with  but  few  cases  which  will  trouble  him. 

VERBS  AYIN  VAV  \  Par.  XIII. 

§  267.  This  class  comprises  all  those  whose  second  radical 
is  Vav,  and  whose  root  throughout  becomes  monosyllabic  by 

contraction. 

Note.  This  species  of  verbs  might  also  be  justly  called  contracted, 
so  that  verbs  sv  may  be  named  the  first  class  of  contracts,  and  verbs 
15  the  second. 

§  268.  The  laws  of  contraction  are  essentially  the  same  here  as  in 
verbs  55;  the  principal  differences  are  occasioned  merely  by  the  nature 
of  Vav  as  a  Quiescent. 

(a)  The  last  vowel  of  the  full  form  is  transferred  to  the 
first  radical,  and  takes  the  place  of  its  appropriate  punctuation 
which  falls  out ;  comp.  §257. 

E.  g.  Uncontracted  d}j>,  contracted  Epr=GN£  ;  the  original  1  con- 
forms to  the  heterogeneous  vowel  (§  117.  2),  i.  e.  1  becomes  N  in  order 
to  conform  to  the  Pattahh  of  the  root,  which  Pattahh  then  coalesces 
with  the  substituted  N  and  therefore  becomes  Qamets.  So  Praeter  E 
and  O;  e.g.  rn  0 ,  contr.  nE=rp73  ,  Vav  conforming  to  the  final 
vowel  Tseri  (§  117.  2) ;  uira  ba-vosh,  contr.  Sbtt  bosh.  In  Hiph.  Fut. 
B*lf}2i  contr.  bJR**,  the  Vav,  after  conforming  to  the  vowel,  i.  e.  after 
becoming  Yodh,  falling  out  as  superfluous  before  another  Yodh  in 
Hiphil,  and  the  Pattahh  under  the  praeformative  being  of  course  length- 
ened by  coming  to  be  placed  in  a  simple  syllable,  §  130.  In  Hoph. 
fij^itt ,  there  seems  to  be  a  transposition  of  the  Vav  to  the  first  syllable, 
as  if  Bg*fl  were  put  for  Slj^ .  But  see  and  comp.  Hoph.  of  verbs  55, 
§  260.  Note.  §  264.  d. 

N.  B.  All  the  forms  where  Vav  takes  a  Daghesh  forte,  and  also, 
where  it  is  immediately  followed  by  n  as  a  third  radical,  are  capable  of 
contraction  ;  e.  g.  1-15 ,  Ti^ D  ,  etc. 

(b)  The  praeformatives  all  take  long  pure  vowels,  in 
the  contracted  forms;  the  kind  of  vowel  being  determin- 
ed by  the  original  uncontracted  forms,  which  appear  to 


116  §§  268,  269.  verbs  avin  vav. 


have  differed  from  the  common  regular  forms;  like  those  in 

verbs  h    §  260  with  the  Note. 

E.  g.  Kal  Fut.  ttpi ,  as  if  from  fifing  (comp.  the  Arabic  Fut.  *ttg3 ; 
Part.  Dp  ,  as  if  from  pip  ,  an  old  Part,  form  ;  Imp.  and  Inf.  0*1  p,  as  if 
from  tnp  .  So  in  Niph.  tripa ,  as  if  from  Dip:;  Hiph.  t^pr?  ,  as  from 
n"npn ,  etc. 

(c)  In  like  manner  as  verbs  W  (§  259),  these  verbs  in 

some  cases  insert  i  and  *_  (with  the  tone)  in  the  Praeter 

and  Future,  before  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant 

E.g.  Niph.  Praeter,  trial  pa,  taniaipa;  Hiph.  ma^n  ;  Kal  Fut. 
tW^IPfy  So  far  as  the  principle  extends,  it  is  developed  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  verbs  3&.  But  in  verbs  "\y  it  extends  only  to  the  Praeter 
of  Niph.  and  Hiphil  as  to  the  epenthetic  1 ,  and  only  to  the  Fut.  of  Kal 
as  to  v. ;  vvhile  in  verbs  VS  it  extends  throughout  the  four  contracted 
conjugations,  Kal,  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal. 

(d)  The  tone-syllable  in  these  verbs  is  throughout  analo- 
gous to  that  in  verbs  5*3?;    see  §  100.  g. 

§  269.  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  are  here  very  rare ;  in- 
stead of  them,  Polel,  Polal,  and  Hithpolel  are  employed, 
§  175.  b.  §188. 

Examples  of  Piel  are  *T2*  ,  rn  p .  Most  instances  of  Piel  assume 
Yodh  ;  as  D*p  ,  S*  ft,  for  D=j#p  ,  5s],  ft  ,  etc.  In  regard  to  the  difference 
between  iiio  in  verbs  3#and  Eaip  here,  see  §  175.  b  Note. 

Remark  1.  The  2d  and  1st  persons  in  Kal  Praeter  are  peculiar, 
inasmuch  as  they  take  a  short  vowel  in  their  contraction.  So  it  is  also 
in  the  corresponding  Arabic  and  Syriac.  Hophal  also  takes  a  short 
vowel  in  the  contracted  root.  Both  these  cases  conform,  indeed,  to  the 
general  principle  §  268.  a;  but  they  differ  from  the  manner  of  contrac- 
tion in  Kal  Praet.  3d  persons,  and  in  Niphal  throughout. 

Remark  2.  The  anomalous  vowels  in  different  tenses  and  conjuga- 
tions, may  be  easily  accounted  for  on  the  principles  developed  in  §  117. 
E.  g.  in  the  Fut.  tnp*^  (instead  of  01  p^  which  we  might  expect),  the 
vowel  conforms  to  the  Vav  with  the  U  sound.  It  might  indeed  take 
the  O  sound  equally  well,  for  aught  that  we  can  see ;  but  its  present 
form  distinguishes  it  more  clearly  from  the  Fut.  of  verbs  S£ .  So  in 
Niph.  Praet.,  fiipa  (instead  of  Dpa)  the  vowel  having  conformed  to  the 


§  270.    VERBS  AYIN  VAV.  1 17 

Vav,  §  117.  1.  So  also  in  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  etc.  of  Niph.;  the  Hholem 
arises  from  the  conformity  just  described.  In  Hiphil  the  Vav  of  the 
root  conforms  to  the  vowel  (Hhireq),  i.  e.  the  vowel  becomes  Yodh,  and 
then  falls  out  before  the  Yodh  characteristic  of  the  conjugation. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§270.  (a)  Kal.  (1)  Praeter  rarely  as  Etf£ ,  Hos.  10:  14.  Fem. 
3d  pers.  once  with  n ,  as  nl'S  (like  the  Chald.,  Syr.,  and  Arab.)  for 
najj  ,  Ezek.  46  :  17.  In  Mai.  3  :  20,  tomjs  comes  from  tfjs— 'ins , 
comp.  §  181.  b.  Very  seldom  is  the  3d  Person  with  Pattahh  ;  e.  g.  T3  , 
HO ,  as  if  from  IV* ,  nfrtt . 

The  parad.  exhibits  a  verb  Jinal  Tseri.  The  final  n  of  n»  ,  (and 
of  other  verbs  ending  with  n),  before  a  suffix  beginning  with  n,  is 
designated  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  suffix  letter,  instead  of  being  fully 
written,  §  293. 

Verbs  final  Hholem  are  also  found  among  the  class  12.  They  re- 
tain the  T  in  the  3d.  pers.  Praeter,  because  it  is  homogeneous,  and  the 
third  person  is  protracted  ;  e.  g.  UiT3  ,  ^1N .  But  in  the  other  persons 
(which  are  commonly  shorter),  they  usually  omit  the  Vav  ;  e.  g.  ©"a, 
nuns,  ftps,  mia,  '♦mn— -^ana,  ttt&tk,  "jfiipa,  ^ipa.  Inf.,  Imp.,  Part, 
also,  izjia  .    The  Hholem  must  be  short  in  the  unaccented  syllables. 

(2)  Infinitive  const,  sometimes  with  Hholem  instead  of  Shureq  ;  as 
rritt  ,  ana,  aiD  ,  etc.  The  Vav  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as  aub  ,  etc. 
§  63. 

(3)  Future  sometimes  with  O  instead  of  U;  as  ifiT  ,  &tt* ,  Din; , 
tsip^  .  Forms  defectively  written  are  Cj?  ^ ,  Op*,  etc.  Fein.  plur. 
sometimes  without  the  epenthetic  %  ,  as  naafcft ,  or  33OT ,  instead  of 

Fut.  apoc.  as  p'pV  with  Hholem  pure  and  mutable;  e.  g.  BJJ12 
vay-yd-gom  ,  83-ajJn  ta-shob-na  ,  where  the  Hholem  has  been  short- 
ened. It  is  sometimes  written  as  Qip^  (Vav  fulcrum) ;  sometimes  it 
appears  with  Qibbuts,  as  Sjpj .  With  a  Guttural  or  Resh,  the  apoc. 
Fut.  usually  takes  Pattahh ;  as  nz\ i  ,  ^0*1 . 

(4)  Imperative  also  is  sometimes  defectively  written,  as  Cjp,  n!Q, 
etc. ;  §  63.  Paragogic  forms ;  nttip  ,  Siata  ,  etc.  Imp.  apoc.  as  b'fc  ; 
like  the  Fut.  with  O  pure. 

(5)  Participle  with  O,  as  BlVrj  which  covers,  Is.  25 : 7,  and  so 
d^izria;  with  E,  as  n73,  W&,  %  202.     With  a  retained,  as  tMWj, 

T  •    T        * 


1  18  §  270.    VERBS  AYIN  VAV. 

Niphal. 

[  (b)  (1)  Praeter  rarely  with  Tseri  penult,  as  ni»3 .  Out  of  the  3d 
pers.  Hholem  is  usually  exchanged  for  Shureq  (§  127.  Exc.  1),  as  be- 
ing equally  homogeneous  with  the  Vav  and  somewhat  shorter  ;  and  to 
be  shorter  is  required,  because  the  accent  is  thrown  forward  upon  the 
epenth.  i.     Hholem  rarely  remains;  as  Drjiiisa . 

(2)  Infinitive  const,  rarely  with  U;  as  ttJ^fT.  (3)  Participle  also 
has  rarely  U;  tfrDJS  for  C^to^D^S: .] 

Hiphil. 

[(c)(1)  Praeter  written  defectively  is  rare;  fIfp35rBl?$Q'<  Some- 
times the  epenthetic  T  is  omitted;  as  F©\n=:rnt>3n,  "nbtirn^ 
•'nil^ttrn ;  fiqn ,  "nan ,  instead  of  nlrflDfj,  '•nirwatt  .  So  also,  not 
unfrequently  in  the  2d  and  1st  pers.,  the  forms  are  contracted  ;  e.  g. 
|*ferj  for  "Tnri'Van,  Bttttn,  for  DnirpEn ,  etc.  Sometimes  Tseri  is 
used  instead  of  Hhireq  ;  as  ni»nn,  niStfJn ,  Ulfegjfy  etc.  Hhateph 
Seghol  sometimes  stands  under  the  praeform.  instead  of  Hhateph  Pat- 
tahh;  as  rrifPBiT. 

Peculiar  is  ?nn,  **3*Ji  and  ^ D in ,  as  if  from  roots  99 ;  see  lexicon. 
Once  n^Dn  (from  rfiD).  like  verbs  99  in  the  second  form  of  contrac- 
tion, §  261.  The  praeform.  n  (in  the  derivates  of  W  and  lis)  takes 
Pattahh  instead  of  a  comp.  Sheva ;  e.  g.  niVyJ]  ,  nvirtt  ,  "niVw  , 
and  thus  in  respect  to  the  other  verb. 

(2)  Infinitive  fem.  once  S1B3m,  apoc.  form  of  masc.  fSpStli,  Infin- 
itive abs.  once  "73>n  because  of  the  Guttural.  (3)  Future  W1^;  comp. 
forms  in  §  261,  which  this  imitates.  The  plur.  fem.  is  hpft&Q  (in- 
stead of  n3J3^lj,  because  a  mixed  syllable  with  Yodh  and  Hhireq 
magnum  cannot  be  penultimate,  even  if  an  accent  supports  it.  Future 
apoc.  shortens  the  Tseri  whenever  it  loses  the  tone ;  e.g.  dfc*1 ,  ]^n~bK. 
With  a  Guttural  or  Resh ;  as  ynni ,  nO»1 . 

(4)  Imperative  once  with  Tseri;  as  aSgtt  ,  2  K.  8  :  6.  (5)  Parti- 
ciple rarely  as  tTO$,  *p>E  (for  n^DW,  \^)>  imitating  verbs  99 ;  see 
§  261.] 

Other  Conjugations. 

[  (d)  HOPHAL  is  sometimes  written  with  Qibbuts  vicarious ;  as 

*nib? ,  njRtj  instead  of  %r&^\  nsin,  §  39. 

(e)  POLEL,  POLAL,  and  HITHPOLEL,  are  declined  in  all  re- 
spects like  Poel  etc.  in  verbs  99,  i.  e.  like  Piel,  Pual,  etc.,  in  regular 


§§  270 274.  VERBS  AYIN  YODH.  1 19 


verbs,  as  the  former  stand  in  the  place  of  the  latter.  Polal  occurs  in 
only  fourjverbs. 

(/)  HITHPOLEL,  like  Hithp.  in  reg.  verbs  (§  218),  often  takes 
Pattahh  in  the  final  syllable;  which  in  pause  becomes  Qamets,  as 
pi2nn.  Once  the  72  of  the  praeform.  is  omitted  in  the  Part.,  as 
tfijftftpk  for  DEipnEa  ,  Ps.  139 :  21. 

(g)  PILPEL  etc.  are  declined  like  Polel  etc.  Pilpel  is  found  in  on- 
ly five  verbs  ;  Polpal  only  in  b'lS;  and  Hithpalpal  only  in  b'ln  .] 

§  271.  General  remarks  on  verbs  "S .  (a)  The  great  similarity  of 
them  to  verbs  99  is  very  manifest,  from  §  263,  a.  b.  c.  d ;  and  indeed 
from  many  of  the  forms  produced  under  §  270,  specially  under  §270.  c. 
1.  It  might,  however,  be  doubted  whether  more  or  less  of  these  forms, 
so  much  like  22  ,  have  not  a  root  belonging  to  that  species  of  verbs. 
The  resemblances  in  the  general  principle  of  contraction,  are  too  man- 
ifest to  escape  notice. 

[  [b)  The  number  of  verbs  1?  is  about  141.  Of  these  13  are  fib  , 
and  incapable  of  contraction,  §  268.  a.  N.  B ;  6  resist  contraction,  viz^ 
Jna,  ^nrt  ,  W9,  ni22,  rnn,  and  inu;  ;  the  rest  are  contracted.  Five 
only  have  the  conj.  Piel.] 

VERBS  AYIN  YODH  ;  Par.  XIV. 

§  272.  These  are  such  as  have  a  Yodh  originally  for 
their  middle  radical,  and  which  retain  it  in  more  or  less  of 
the  forms  of  Kal, 

§  273.    Out  of  Kal,  verbs  ^  in  all  respects  are  like 

" 
those  W. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  274.  Kal.  (1)  Procter  retains  the  Yodh  only  in  three  verbs,  viz. 
•pa  , 'yi ,  l*f ;  and  where  this  is  retained  in  declining,  the  epenth. 
i  is  inserted  before  the  formative  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant, 
as  the  paradigm  shews.  All  the  other  cases  of  the  Praeter  conform  to 
that  of  verbs  13*. 

(2)  The  Future  in  all  respects  resembles  Hiphil,  in  regard  to  form. 
So  the  apoc.  form  also ;  e.  g.  ££  >  13**2  i  B^ »  ^},l  •  (3)  Participle 
in  one  case  is  regular,  viz.  a^TN  ,  from  a^N  . 

Note.  Very  few  verbs  are  exclusively  *9 ;  most  being  also  JJ  in 
Kal.  The  older  grammarians  and  lexicographers  admitted  no  class  *9; 
but  ranked  such  forms  as  *M  under  Hiphil,  with  an  aphaeresis  of  the 


120  §§  ^75 — 278.    VERBS  LAMEDH  ALEPH. 

in  .     But  as  this  is  without  other  example,  and  as  the  kindred  langua- 
ges exhibit  verbs  *»$ ,  this  class  is  now  generally  admitted.] 


III.    CLASS  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  275.  This  comprehends  those,  whose  third  radical  becomes  quies- 
cent, or  disappears. 

VERBS  LAMEDH  ALEPH;  Par.  XV. 

§  276.  Aleph  at  the  end  of  words  is  usually  quiescent, 
§  119.6.  Throughout  verbs  fcp,  Aleph  is  either  quiescent 
or  otiant,  when  it  ends  a  word  or  syllable. 

§  277.  The  general  laws  of  quiescence  are,  (a)  In  the 
Praeter  of  all  the  derived  conjugations,  before  formative 
suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  fc*  quiesces  in  Tseri. 
(Jo)  In  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  of  all  the  conjugations,  before 
formative  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  tf  quiesces 
in  Seghol.  (c)  In  all  other  cases,  it  quiesces  (when  at 
the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable)  in  the  regular  vowel ;  ex- 
cepting that  whenever  it  meets  with  Pattahh,  it  lengthens 
it  into  Qamets. 

E.  g.  na£E  ,  ^K^E ,  rrttf  Stttt  ,  tt3tf£»n ,  etc.  In  Kal.  the  Fut. 
SlZni  With  Pattahh  becomes  N£E^  ,  by  reason  of  tf  quiescent ;  in  Niph. 
we  have  N2»3  instead  of  M22733 :  Pual,  K2ZE  instead  of  KS73  ,  etc. 
§115. 

Note.  But  the  vowels  made  long  by  such  quiescence,  do  not  remain 
immutable.  The  laws  of  declension  supersede  the  laws  of  quiescence; 
and  Qamets,  etc.,  (made  by  quiescence)  fall  away  like  any  mutable 
pure  vowels ;  e.  g.  tf£73  ,  fern,  rrtf 2E  ;  Fut.  aSMr  ,  2d  fem.  WCDft ,  etc. 
See  §  127.  Exc.  4.     So  Piel  M£13 ,  fem.  n«£» ,  etc. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  278.  (a)  KAL.  (1)  Praeter  of  verbs  final  Tseri  usually  retains  the 
Tseri  here ;  as  tf"V ,  nan'' ,  Bn&'V ,  etc.  The  3d  pers.  sing.  fem. 
sometimes  takes  n  (like  the  Aramaean) ;  as  ri&nj?  ,  Is.  7  :  14.  Some- 
times these  verbs  are  written  defectively ;  as  "TiklB  for  tojltlttt  ,  §  63. 

(2)  Infinitive  fem.  rtN'V  ,  ilNLjh;  also  with  n,  as  rtt&ftpanq^ , 


§§  278, 279.  verbs  lamedh  aleph. 


121 


niNIp  (with  1  fulcrum  merely)  =nfi*1np  ;  see  §  119.  c.  3;  or  this  may 
be  considered  as  mere  conformity  to  the  forms  of  the  Inf.  in  verbs  rib  . 
Infinitive  masc.  sometimes  as  iBn=aitaft ,  §  63. 

(3)  Imperative  HN-p  yf-rw=^"}^,  see  §  118.  In  plur.  fern.,  ]NHp. 
apoc.  for  rjatt^ja ;  nptfS  for  naax  (from  OfX\)  is  sui  generis,  Cant. 
3:11;  Comp.  §  118.     Or  is  the  root  i-jKS? 

(4)  Participle  fern.  n«£b  for  rtokfc,  nri"1  for  nail"1 ,  §  119.  c.  3. 
With  suff.  Wni,  for  Bins,  §  118. 

(6)  NIPHAL.  (1)  Praeter  fern,  ntfbsa;  see  under  a.  1.  above. 
Forms  defective,  Bnataa  for  nnwgtaa .  (2)  Infinitive  abs.  Nip:.  (3) 
Participle  sometimes  as  O^tf^Ta: ,  seemingly  from  ftttgua. . 

(c)  PIEL.  Inf.  sometimes  as  bfi&JQ,  nitf^E  ;  comp.  a.  2.  above. 

(J)  HIPHIL.  Praeter  defective,  as  ^tantt^artann ;  Inf.  also  "'taftrf, 
Jer.  32 :  35.] 

Interchange  of  forms  between  verbs  Kb  and  Sib . 

§  279.  In  the  Chaldee  and  Syriac,  these  two  species  of  verbs  fall 
under  one  and  the  same  category,  and  have  the  same  forms  throughout. 
In  Hebrew,  there  is  plainly  an  incipient  tendency  towards  this  idiom, 
which  developes  itself  in  the  frequent  interchanges  of  these  verbs  for 
each  other,  in  regard  to  vowels,  or  consonants,  or  both.  E.g.  verbs  ttb 
imitate  verbs  rib : 


(1)  As  to  vowels. 

(2) 

As  to  consonants. 

[KAL 

"Tiabs.  for 

W^ 

KAL  Imp. 

fiD-j  for        tfSn 

Part. 

KXta  for 

s&ta 

no:  for        aoa 

PIEL 

aCrn  for 

nV.7? 

Fut. 

n^snn  for  haaiWn 

T          V      I     •                                  TV-. 

Ttrfr]  for 

Titfsn 

NIPH. 

rafts  for      Nana 

»    :  •                             t    j  • 

Fut. 

WQX*  for 

HtfS 

n">aa  for      naaa 

Inf. 

ma'ia  for 

t&q 

Inf.  const. 

ne-yi  for     asnrr 

NIPH. 

naaan  for 

Nasn 

PIEL 

rti|n  for     *>»•' 

(3)  -4s  to  ftofit  vowels  and  consonants.  Kal  nft£  for  nN72^,  *ibl2  for 
IMgtig,  see  §  118.  Part.  act.  Pish  for  HNiS  §  118.  rfbsfor  tr4fpjSL9 
§  118.     Pass.  ^  for  «itoa ,  Ps.  32  :  1.'  ' 

Niph.  iraoa  for  naaEraa.  nns-ia  for  rws-ia .  Fut.  ^ep  for 
laSTa"1,  §  118. 

:  it  •  '    J 

Piel.  ib-V;  for  *flftj*T  ,  §  118. 

Hiph.  Xfcmi)  for  SflrfcnpjfJ .    Part,  nzftft  for  K^ftB  • 
Hith.  rraann  for  nataann  .    niaann  for  Naann. 
16 


122  §§  280 — 282.  verbs  lamedh  he. 

Compare  with  these  resemblances  to  verbs  Jib ,  the  similarities  of 
those  verbs  to  ttb  ,  in  §  290.  See  on  the  general  principle  of  such  in- 
terchanges, §  122.] 

VERBS  LAMEDH  HE;  Par.  XVI. 
§  280.  These  comprise  verbs  originally  with  a  final 
Yodh  or  a  final  Vav;  both  of  which  coming  at  the  end 
of  a  word  after  a  heterogeneous  vowel  (Pattahh),  con- 
form to  the  vowel,  i.  e.  become  Ti  and  quiesce  in  it, 
§117.2. 

Note.  Verbs  originally  lb  are  few;  e.  g.  as  nb'ti  for  ijjtf,  1st  pers. 
Praet.  *Ffl?*>;  most  verbs  Tib  are  originally  *>b.  Only  the  derivate 
forms  develope  the  original  root ;  e.  g.  *ps  from  fTJp2=^j53 ;  *)22j5  from 
^Iirj0r=lirj^  .  Verbs  with  Jl  Mappiq,  i.  e.  n  moveable,  are  verbs  which 
originally  have  a  final  ti ,  and  belong  to  the  class  of  b  Gutturals. 

§  281.  The  final  radical  in  these  verbs  either  quiesces 
or  becomes  otiant  and  falls  out,  both  in  conjugation  and  de- 
clension, every  where  with  only  two  exceptions. 

These  are,  (1)  Praeter  3d  pers.  fem.,  where  the  final  radical  is  ex- 
changed for  n;  as  tiribjl ,  Sinbaa,  etc.  (2)  Participle  pass.;  as  ^Jj* 
gd-luy  ;  where  the  Yodh  remains  a  proper  consonant. 

§  282.  The  rules  of  quiescence,  and  the  form  of  the  quiescent  let- 
ter, differ  in  different  persons  and  tenses.     They  are  as  follows : 

(a)  The  Praeter  3d  masc.  sing,  in  all  the  conjugations, 
requires  ft  quiescent  in  Qamets ;  see  paradigm. 

(b)  The  other  forms  without  accession  at  the  end,  take 
B?  throughout;  excepting  the  Imp.  2  masc.  sing,  which 
has  fi_,  and  the  Inf.  abs.  which  has  H L . 

(c)  Before  sufformatives  beginning  with  a  consonant, 
(1)  The  Praeter  of  Kal  has  i_.  (2)  The  Praeter  of 
all  the  derived  conjugations,  has  ^ .  (3)  The  Fut.  and 
Imp.  throughout  have  \_ ,;  see  paradigm. 

(eZ)  Before  sufformatives  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
Quiescent  falls  away. 


§  283.   VERBS    LAMEDH   HE. 


123 


E.  g.  tfcg  instead  of  I^J,  <b*  for  »*$* ,  etc. ;  §  118.  But  a  pause- 
accent  restores  the  Quiescent  and  prolongs  the  original  vowel  which 
precedes  it ;  e.  g.  V\y  instead  of ^b}?  or  VbP  ,  §  157. 

NOTE.    The  falling  away  of  the  Quiescent  here,  throughout,  depends  on  the  principle  stated 
in  $  118  with  the  Note. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  283.    (a)  KAL.     (1)  Praeter  sometimes  has  the  Chaldee  form, 

a3  niBJ>  for  Jintoy ,  comp.  §  278.  a.  1.     With  Vav  moveable  once, 

^ffll.yb  ,  Job  3:  26.     Forms  written  defectively  are  rather  unusual ;  as 

*nWfor  "TP32! . 
•  •  *  •  •  * 

(2)  Infinitive  abs.  sometimes  drops  the  H  ,  and  takes  the  form  nba 
for  S"rib2  ,  etc.  Twice  it  takes  n ;  as  rnriX  ,  rnttn  .  Infinitive  constr. 
(rarely)  as  ri3[? ,  triDg  i  Fem.  form.  iTlNn  (SlNn),  retaining  the  Vav, 
Ezek.  28:  17.  '  Once  Vr H ,  in  Ezek.  21:  15. 

Note.  The  usual  Inf.  constr.,  as  rriba  is  a  fem.  Segholate  form, 
and  is  merely  a  contraction  of  nibs  ;  see  §  120.  c.  Comp.  fem.  Infin- 
itives, §  212.  3. 

(3)  Future,  (a)  ft*tt$  a:nh,  ^TFi,  (instead  of  Sr;!rin,  n^n  , 
HSjrni),  are  mere  imitations  of  the  Chaldee  pointing  in  the  Fut.  of  these 
verbs,  and  are  probably  errors  of  transcribers. 

(/?)  The  Yodh  quiescent  of  the  root  is  sometimes  omitted  before  suf- 
fixes, a3  H3to?.fi  for  513"^?^ ;  and  sometimes  it  becomes  otiant  by  rea- 
son of  a  Dagh.  euphonic,  as  Fi^KnPi ,  [and  even  falls  out  here  also,  as 

Apocopate  Future  of  Kal. 

[  (y)  This  is  common  to  all  the  conjugations  of  this  verb.  It  is 
formed  by  dropping  the  final  tt  with  the  preceding  vowel.  It  then  ap- 
pears, (I)  Usually  with  a  furtive  vowel  under  the  first  radical.  (2) 
Without  one.     E.  g. 


(1)  Forms  with  a  furtive  vowel. 
full  form.    apoc.  usual  form. 

Sing.      3    rtfltfj     (b$:)  b}>.l  a 


—        2 

tt^p 

tygi b 

—         1 

rt?ia$ 

b«n  c 

(Plural)  1 

*VP. 

W&  d 

J  gutt.    3 

&&$ 

9p\\  e 

r-        2 

nsnn 

*nrn/ 

tlgutt.    3 

to?*  i  g 

3 

*tfn 

5n«  i  h 

(2)  Third  pers.  without  a  furt.  vowel. 
full  form.         apoc.  nude  form. 

r\3X]    $p ,  (^n)  i 

•  •  •  *  ^H  (with  Pattahh  furt.)  / 

Hft&i     Mpl  Job  31:  27.  w 

^T  **}!! >  I  *w  ofto  (§  57  a)  n 

^TT?    f"}!! » 11?.l  Ps-  72:  8.  o 


124  §  283.    VERBS    LAMEDH    HE. 

Note  1.  The  Segholate  forms  in  verbs  differ  in  one  respect  from 
those  of  nouns,  etc. ;  inasmuch  as  verbs  take  Hhireq  short  and  pure 
for  a  penult  vowel ;  whereas  nouns,  etc.,  allow  only  of  Seghol,  Tseri, 
Pattahh,  Q,amets  (in  a  few  cases),  and  Hholem,  all  pure.  In  the  above 
table,  a,  e,  and  h  have  short  Hhireq  for  a  penult  vowel. 

Note  2.  In  the  apoc.  forms  of  the  2d  and  1st  persons  sing,  and 
plural,  the  Hhireq  is  prolonged  into  Tseri,  so  b,  c,  d;  not  b^rA ,  b^iO  , 
etc.  On  the  other  hand,  the  third  person  very  rarely  has  a  Tseri  in 
the  penult,  like  bi£>\  from  nb'JJ  ,  under  a. 

Note  3.  When  the  second  radical  is  a  Guttural,  the  apoc.  forms 
assume  the  usual  Pattahh  in  the  final  syllable  ;  as  in  e  and  f  §  113. 
When  the  first  radical  is  a  Guttural,  both  vowels  more  usually  are  Pat- 
tahh, as  in  g ;  but  n  and  n  may  take  Hhireq,  as  in  h. 

Note  4.  The  nude  apoc.  forms  in  No.  2,  without  furtive  vowels,  are 
not  frequent ;  yet  they  occur  sufficiently  often  to  be  distinctly  acknow- 
ledged. Inform  they  resemble  such  nouns  as  Dttp,  "51*18  ,  etc.  The 
learner  will  observe,  that  the  Hhireq  under  the  praeform.  is  occasion- 
ally prolonged,  and  so  becomes  Tseri ;  e.  g.  in  i.  In  /,  the  Pattahh  in 
**51  (yi-hhad?)  is  only  furtive,  as  the  Daghesh  lene  in  "7  shews. 

Note  5.  In  the  forms  under  j,  k,  the  Segholate  shape  accommo- 
dates itself  to  the  words,  which  have  a  final  Yodh ;  e.  g.  Tp  instead  of 
W  or  *7j\  ,  etc.  See  the  ground  of  this,  in  §  120.  b.  So  also  W 
(written  once  Nin?  §  125.  a.),  from  n]ti . 

Note  6.  All  the  apoc.  forms  of  the  Future  more  usually  have  a  1 
conversive  before  them  ;  but  some  occur  without  it ;  and  T  does  not 
always  occasion  apocope,  e.  g.  ftjajjl  2  K.  1:  10,  frog  2  K.  6:  23. 

Remark.  The  student  will  observe,  that  none  of  the  Segholates  in 
Kal  have  the  common  form  of  two  Seghols,  like  *f*h  .  In  this  respect 
the  forms  of  Kal  are  distinct  from  those  of  Hiphil,  which  adopts  the 
double  Seghol  wherever  the  nature  of  the  word  permits. 

(4)  Imperative.  For  the  forms  of  ""b-J  ,  &J  ,  instead  of  *»}$ ,  Vty{  , 
see  §  118  with  Notes  1.  2.  3. 

(5)  The  active  Part.  fern,  is  tibia  (for  S"Pbia  §  118).  Sometimes 
it  assumes  the  form  rrba,  plur.  rrnba,  as  if  from  ^H ,  of  the  form 
!p3h,§SU2.  6. 

(6)  The  passive  Part,  rarely  as  >i&JS  for^&y,  SD&  for  ^BX  .  In 
Kethib,  itftb'2  mtu-vdth,  Qeri  ni^ta: .] 


§§  284 — 288.  verbs  lamedh  he.  125 

Restoration  of  the  Yodh  Radical. 

[§  284.  In  the  forms  where  Yodh  radical  is  dropped,  it  is  occasion- 
ally restored,  either  by  a  pause-accent,  by  Nun  parag.,  or  by  the  em- 
phasis required  upon  the  word.  See  §  147  for  pause-accent.  With 
Nun,  larj?,  'p^a'V  and  fWl*.  Emphasis  fPDh  Ps  57  : 2.  Imp. 
TOS  ,  Is.  21  :  12.  *  With  ft  parag.  also,  Fut.  H^BWfiJ  . 

Note.  From  these  cases  of  restored  and  prolonged  vowels,  it  is 
clear,  that  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  of  verbs  fib  have,  in  the  real  ground-form, 
a  final  Pattahh,  since  the  restored  vowel  goes  into  Qamets  ;  §  146.] 

Niphal. 
[§285.  (I)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq  before  n;  as  n^a  from 
ftp  3 ,  V*ftj  .     In  pause  Waa  from  r?D2  . 

(2)  Infinitive  abs.  rarely  as  nibi* .  Infinitive  const,  very  rarely  as 
rifinrr,  Judg.  13:21. 

(3)  The  Future  apoc.  merely  drops  the  final  ft  with  the  preceding 
vowel.] 

Piel. 

[§  286.  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq  before1,  as  ffA, 
(2)  The  apoc.  forms  in  this  conj.  not  only  drop  their  final  fr  with  its 
vowel,  but  also  the  Daghesh  forte  from  the  middle  radical  (see  par.), 
because  this  letter  now  becomes  a  final  one,  §  72.  The  preceding 
vowel  is  sometimes  prolonged,  as  in?l=n}rro  . 

When  the  middle  radical  is  a  fr  (as  in  ff!"jb>  Sin3),  the  apocopate 
forms  require  a  Mappiq  to  be  inserted,  in  order  to  make  the  He  mutable 
when  it  comes  to  be  final ;  e.  g.  nbrn  ,  MsVil . 

(3)  With  Yodh  restored  ;  Imp.  1^1  (for  Vfy ,  §  73.  Note  3).  Fut. 
with  sufF.  W&*lfc*l 

Hiphil. 

[§287.  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq;  as  wffli ,  I^Mtt. 
Sing.  fern.  3d  pers.  sometimes  as  nb}ft  ;  comp.  §  283.  a.  1.  In  some 
cases  the  ft  prefix  takes  Seghol ;  as  fibst!  ,  ft^^f]  ,  Also  the  Chaldee, 
*>bfin  for  fibrin ;  comp.  §  283.  3.  a. 

(2)  Infinitive  abs.  once  as  fill-in  .  Infinitive  const,  once  rni&jSff 
for  rni2j3fj,  Lev.  14  :  43.  (3)  Praeter  3d  pers.  plur.  once  ^Onft  him- 
siv,  like  the  Chaldee  V72n ,  etc.  Fut.  once  "»httin  for  ftrjan ,  Jer. 
18 :  23.] 

[§  288.  Future  Apocopate.    Like  those  in  Kal,  they  are  divided 


126     §§  288 — 293.  terbs  lamedh  he — lamedh  tav. 

into  two  kinds.  (1)  With  a  furtive  vowel;  e.  g.  bfyi,  W$*\,  fc?\l« 
Here  the  penult  vowel  is  Seghol,  or  Pattahh  when  the  first  radical  is 
a  Guttural.  The  usual  forms  of  noun-Segholates  are  here  prevalent 
in  distinction  from  those  in  Kal ;  Remark,  p.  124. 

(2)  With  nude  apocope;  as  8Tf£  ,  ^-p;  frlnc*,  jjg  ,  etc. 

Note.  The  Imp.  follows  the  analogy  of  No.  1 ;  e.  g.  with  a  furtive 
vowel,  always  as  Inn  ,  t\*\h  ,  instead  of  ttSjfJTJ  ,  nsnrr ,  etc.  With  a 
Guttural,  as  b?h  for  ttj*n  ,  etc.] 

[§  289.  Peculiar  anomalies.  Such  are  the  endings  in  ( .. )  in 
the  Infin.,  and  Future ;  e.  g.  Inf.  Kal,  i"PH  to  be;  Piel  tt»9  opprimen- 
do;  Hoph.  mart  .  In  Kal  Fut.  StPtft,  *bn  for  tt^tffc;  Piel  rtfel}. 
In  Syr.  and  Chaldee,  the  Fut.  ends  in  4T-.  or  *-  in  these  verbs.] 

[§  290.  Imitations  of  verbs  ttb  ;  comp.  §  279.  (a)  Imitation  in 
respect  to  consonants;  e.  g.  TjN^  for  WSJ^ ;  ^U>2  Inf.  abs.  for  S1T2J3  , 
Imp.  fiorr.  So  «3tt5%  Nbm ,  for  natf* ,  ttbrr;  ttstt  for  nstt  Piel 
fetf*  for  n|^%Ecc.  8:  1."  (6)  .4s  to  vowels';  e.  g.  nb^rifor  h$Dft, 
rtSfttJej  for  ttyuia ;  Piel  Inf.  tt**  for  nis? ,  Fut.  ti'^n  for  Sil^ft;  Part. 
Niph.  ribha  for  rfjtg .] 

§  291.  General  remark  on  the  usage  described  in  §  279,  §  290.  The 
number  of  these  anomalies  will  be  increased  or  diminished  very  much, 
according  to  the  principles  assumed  by  the  lexicographer.  If  he  con- 
stitute roots  both  in  Nb  and  in  rfb ,  with  the  same  meaning,  then  the 
anomalies  are  reduced  to  a  very  small  number.  If  he  make  but  one 
root,  then  they  are  multiplied.  I  observe  that  Gesenius,  (very  rightly 
in  my  apprehension),  in  his  latest  works,  increases  the  number  of  the 
roots  and  thus  diminishes  the  anomalies. 

[§  292.  Pilel  appears  only  twice,  viz.  in  S-PK3  (contract.  S-n«3  §  119. 
c.  1)  from  HN3;  and  in  *nftt372  Part,  const,  plur.,  from  fihD,  Pilel 

Hithpalel  appears  only  in  tthtt) ,  Hith.  fntp^1"!  >  Fut-  aP0C-  tttn^ 
instead  of  Ifimr  ,  §  120.  6.  Inf.' with  H  parag.  Vn  nftttjn ,  2  K.  5  :  18.] 

VERBS  LAMEDH  TAV. 

[§  293.  These  are  not  strictly  irregular ;  but  in  all  the  persons 
which  receive  a  suffix  beginning  with  n ,  the  n  final  of  the  root  is  in- 
serted by  a  Daghesh  forte  in  the  suffix  letter ;  e.  g.  nn3 ,  Fn3  Jcd-rat- 
td  ,  n^3,  t3!R^3,  etc.  So  also,  nfc  he  died,  fib  mat~td,  nttb  ,  etc.,  as 
in  the  paradigm.] 


§§  294 — 296.  verbs  doubly  anomalous.  127 

VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS. 
§  294.     These  are  such  as  have  two  radicals  (usually 
the  first  and  third)  which  may  be  dropped  or  assimilat- 
ed, or  may  become  quiescent;  as  Sintf,  NSPj  fjjr.'i  81D3 , 
ftW  etc. 

Note.  Very  few  cases  occur  like  fctfs,  where  two  irregular  letters 
come  together.  Two  cases  only  occur  of  verbs  irregular  p  and  23> ; 
e.  g.  -n: ,  and  DD5 ;  for  which  see  lexicon.  The  verbs  TI3  and  p3, 
are  regular  as  to  the  Nun,  §  253. 

§  295.  In  regard  to  the  first  radical,  these  verbs  exhibit  all  the  va- 
rious phases  of  verbs  irregular  D  ;  and  in  regard  to  the  third  radical  all 
the  phases  of  verbs  irregular  p  ;  see  Par.  XVII — XX. 

[§  296.  The  following  examples  and  notes  on  the  paradigms  just 
mentioned,  exhibit  all  the  forms  of  these  verbs  in  which  the  student  is 
likely  to  meet  with  any  difficulty. 

(a)   Verbs  fcfe  and  tb . 

rrbN  ,  Hiph.  fut.  apoc.  bf*1  1  Sam.  14  :  24,  for  rfctfjl  . 

rrBK  ,  Imp.  1B»  Ex.  16:23,  by  Syriasm  for  1S>N  (119.  d.  2);  Fut. 
with'suff.  in&fol  1  Sam.  28 :  24,  for  infctfftl  ,  §  241.  Note. 

tins*,  Praet.  in  Pause,  "PfiK  Jer.  3:22;  Imp.  in  pause,  spina  for 
lW(§  119.  d.  2.  §  147)  ,  Fut.  an*]  Deut.  33:21,  for  nn^J,  a 
change  being  made  in  both  the  final  vowel  and  consonant ;  §  290.  a.  b. 
n&ri  Is.  41 :  25,  for  tinN^;  see  §  118.  Note  2.  Hiph.  Imp.  in  pause, 
V»nn  for  TOW!  ,  %  119.  c.  1.  §  147. 

(6)   Verbs  IB  and  $> . 
«*; ,  Inf.  fern.  nK£  for  n«%  ,  §  119.  c.  1.    Imp.  N2 ,  §  243.  a. 

(c)   Verbs  fe  and  ft.  Par.  XVII. 

iljjj  not  found  in  Kal;  Piel  Fut.  *nn  Lam.  3:53,  for  H^l , 
J  247' 2.  f.  Hiph.  Fut.  with  In  retained,  rjV)J-P  Neh.  11 :  17,  §  247. 
g-.  1.  1st  pers.  with  suffix  spiN  Ps.  35 :  18,  and  in  pause  sj  JIM  Ps. 
30:  13. 

Kg* ,  Fut.  1st  pers.  plur.  with  suff.,  &}3) ,  Ps.  74 : 8. 

nf ,  Fut.  apoc.  ?p*l ,  Ezek.  31 : 7,  nude  apoc.  form ;  Popaal, 
rpW\  Ps.  45  :  3. 

T  «T     IT 


128  §§  296 — 299.  irregular  verbs,  etc. 

STV  ,  Fut.  1st  pers.  with  suff.  tn^D ,  Num.  21 :  30.  Hiph.  Fut.  with 
suff.  tn\  2  K.  17:  27  ;  ^nh¥l  Ps.45  :  5,  etc. 

(d)   Verbs  fB  and  fe  Par.  XVIII. 

The  paradigm  exhibits  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  forms  of  NT2)5 ;  in 
Hiphil  those  of  tf  U»  ,  because  the  former  does  not  occur  in  Hiphil. 

Infinitive  construct,  ntfto  for  hfitfp,  §  119.  c.  1.  Fut.  ftt^B  Ruth 
1  :  14,  Aleph  omitted  in  writing.     Hiph.  Fut.,  VB* ,  Ps.  55 :  16,  Kethib 

for  *Oi2T  . 

(c)   Verbs  p  and  rfc,  Par.  XIX. 

The  three  verbs  ttT2 ,  nt33 ,  fD2 ,  are  all  of  this  form.  Kal  Fut. 
apoc.  with  Vav,  D«1  and  -by ;  T*1  2  K.  9 :  33.  Niphal  of  nfc3  Praet. 
3  pers.  plur.  in  pause,  9*B3  ,  Num.  24 :  6;  Fut.  3  pers.,  njBJ*,  Zech. 
1 :  16 ;  3  pers.  plur.  "jttj'f ,  Jer.  6  :  4.— H3j  ,  Praet.  Niphal  ns:  2  Sam. 
11 :  15 ;  tft&a ,  Job  30  **8  (with  K  for  !i  §  290),  or  perhaps  the  root 
is  N33  . 

Hiph.  Fut.  with  suff.  13^,  2  Sam.  14:  6;  ^ ,  Job  36:  18,  etc. 
Fut.  apoc.  with  Vav,  t:*1 ,  *]*1 ,  etc.  The  Imp.  also  suffers  apocope, 
and  takes  the  forms  tan  ,  -jn ,  which  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 

[§  297.  The  verb  ai a  has  all  the  common  inflections  exhibited  in 
paradigm  XX.  But  it  has  many  forms  sui  generis  besides  these ;  e.  g. 
with  suff.,  *J«&,  !"»SNz;  Fut.  13*1  for  «ia»1  .  Fem.  3d  plur.  na/fipn 
with  epenth.  *>_.  Also  nntfaFl  Deut.  33:  16,  for  fctarjj  and  ^1K3& 
1  Sam.  25 :  34,  for  ^an) .  Hiphil  sometimes  takes  epenth.  1 ;  as 
rfniioan ,  ivriaoan ,  cniaoan .   Defectively  *ah  for  apart . 

Note.  The  verbs  6W3  and  N'lp  are  used  only  in  Hiphil;  where 
they  are  declined  like  NTS.] 

RELATION  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS  TO  EACH  OTHER. 

§  298.  In  the  irregular  verbs  in  general,  only  two  of  the  radicals 
appear  to  be  permanent  and  immutable.  The  other  radical  may  be, 
and  often  actually  is,  supplied  in  different  ways,  according  to  the  forms 
adopted  by  the  different  classes  of  irreg.  verbs.  E.  g.  from  the  biliteral 
*p»  have  been  formed  Sj^fj'j  ?p^,  aa? ,  n&*,  all  of  the  same  meaning. 
So  also,  air  and  a*3;  ^s* ,  "fti*  and  inSS:  anp  and  Tl^p  :  aiD 
and  atij;  and  so  more  or  less,  of  a  large  proportion  of  the  irregular 
verbs,  much  larger  than  has  yet  been  generally  noticed.  This  princi- 
ple reigns  extensively,  also,  in  the  kindred  Shemitish  languages. 

%  299.   In  consequence  of  different  forms  having  the  same  mean- 


§§  299,— 302.  participles.  129 

ing,  it  happens  in  many  cases  that  one  form  is  employed  only  in  some 
particular  tense  or  conjugation,  while  another  is  employed  exclusively 
in  another.  E.  g.  from  Tjbn  ivit,  is  derived  the  Praet.  and  Part. ;  while 
its  equivalent  ?lrj  furnishes  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp.  So  ppn  ,  as  a 
verb  &  in  Kal ;  but  Pual  npjn  ,  and  Hith.  ttjSfiriH ,  come  from  npn . 

Compare  in  Latin,  fero,  tuli,  latum  ;  Greek,  <p'(w,  ot'aw,  r^tyy.a.  It  were  to  be  wished 
that  lexicographers  would  make  a  more  extensive  use  of  this  obvious  and  widely  extended  prin- 
ciple in  Hebrew  etymology.    It  would  greatly  diminish  the  so  called  anomalies  of  the  language. 

PLURILITERAL  VERBS. 

[§  300.  These  are  properly  very  few ;  and  they  are  declined  like 
the  conjs.  Pilel  and  Pulal.  The  following  list  comprises  the  whole 
number  that  actually  appear  ;  viz. 

(1)  8t3JM3,  1  pers.  with  suff.  rpntfttNt:  ,  Is.  14:23.  (2)  Vans, 
participle  >2-)Dtt ,  1  Chr.  15  :  27.  (3)  SD/n3 ,  Fut.  with  suffix, 
Hsbons:  ,  Ps'.  80  :  14.  (4)  tlfSi  ,  Job  26 :  9. '  (5)  t $&i  ,  Job  33  : 
25.  (6)  Irnftn,  2  pers.  fut.  rnfrnn  ,Jer.  12:5;  Participle  nnnnfc , 
Jer.  22  :  15.  (7)  A  few  other  forms  are  noted  in  some  of  the  lexicons, 
but  in  others  they  are  more  properly  referred  to  the  Pilel  form,  derived 
from  a  triliteral  root;  as  Pilel  3  pers.  fem.  in  pause  tt3  3*n  ,  Job  15:32. 
Cant  1:16,  from  73^1.] 


PARTICIPLES. 


§  301.  Participles  are  treated  as  adjectives,  and  there- 
fore they  are  declined  as  nouns;  which  is  common  in 
other  languages.  Participles  in  regard  to  case,  tone- 
syllable,  etc.,  follow  the  usages  of  nouns.  Par.  XXI.  ex- 
hibits the  various  phases  and  declensions  of  their  abso- 
lute state. 

§  302.  All  of  them  in  the  fem.  may  form  Segholates,  except  the 
ground-form  has  an  immutable  penult  vowel ;  e.  g.  S"prj3 ,  TtttV ,  il^pE  , 
etc.,  are  incapable  of  a  Segholate  form,  because  the  penult  vowels  can- 
not be  so  changed  as  to  conform  to  the  laws  of  Segholates ;  see  §  142# 
d.  But  in  Hiphil  the  fem.  Segholates  seem  to  be  derived  from  an  apo- 
copate fem.  form  like  FTbLjfta  ,  which  resembles  the  apoc.  Fut.  bttp^  > 
and  has  a  Tseri  pure  and  mutable. 
17 


130      &§  303 — 306.  verbs  with  suffix  pronouns. 


VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 


-s  §  303.  Pronouns  following  verbs  and  being  governed  by 
'  them,  are  attached  to  them  and  united  in  the  same  word. 
This  is  effected  by  taking  the  fragments,  or  parts  of  the  pro- 
noun, with  an  appropriate  vowel  of  union  where  one  is  need- 
ed), and  adjusting  the  form  of  the  verb,  when  necessary,  so 
as  to  receive  it. 

E.  g.  "5^03  instead  of  ">3K  ^Qgi  he  hilled  me;  tJJgSjtDfj  instead  of 
fitt  fibb  j3 ,  thou  didst  kill  them.     Comp.  Latin  eccum  for  ecce  eum,  etc. 

§  304.  Most  of  the  suffix  pronouns  influence  the  tones  of 
the  verb,  i.  e.  they  move  it  forward  or  toward  the  left ;  and 
consequently  they  occasion  more  or  less  changes  in  the  muta- 
ble vowels  of  verbs,  usually  (not  always)  according  to  the  gen- 
eral principles  of  the  vowel  changes,  §  1 26  seq.  In  some  few 
cases,  the  consonants  o{  the  verb  suffer  a  change  in  order  to 
receive  a  suffix ;  see  §311. 

§  305.   As  all  the  conjugations  of  verbs  terminate  in  the 

same  manner,  they  all  receive  suffixes  in  the  like  manner  with 

Kal,  with  very  little  variation.      But  neuter  verbs,  and  those 

which  are  passive  or  reflexive,  do  not  from  the  nature  of  the 

case  admit  of  suffixes,  as  they  do  not,  when  neuter,  govern 

words  after  them. 

*p    Note.  Verbs  of  the  first  and  second  persons  do  not  receive  suffixes 
\  of  the  same  persons,  because  the  reflexive  forms  of  the  verbs  are  em- 
ployed to  express  the  sense  which  would  be  thus  conveyed. 

§  306.  The  Inf.  mode  and  participles  receive  suffixes  ei- 
ther in  the  manner  of  verbs  or  of  nouns. 

But  not  with  the  same  meaning,  as  it  respects  the  Inf.  mode ;  for  a 
noun-suffix  appended  to  it,  denotes  the  subject  or  agent  of  the  verb ; 


§§  307 309.  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS.        131 


but  a  verbal  suffix,  the  object  of  the  action  implied  by  the  verb.  E.  g. 
Inf.  *fpB,  with  noun  suffix  *1p&  my  punishment,  viz.  that  which  I  in- 
flict ;  with  a  verbal  suffix  "^/ipsb  ,  to  punish  me. 

§  307.  Different  forms  of  pronoun  suffixes.  Most  of  the  verbal-suf- 
fixes or  fragments  of  primitive  pronouns,  have  at  least  three  different 
forms,  adapted  to  the  different  ending  or  tense  of  the  verb  to  which 
they  are  appended. 

(a)  The  most  simple  form  of  the  suffixes  is  that  in  which 
thej  begin  with  a  consonant.  In  this  shape  they  are  append- 
ed, through  all  the  tenses  and  modes,  to  forms  of  verbs  which 
end  with  a  vowel;  see  Note  below. 

(b)  To  the  simple  form  of  the  suffixes,  i.  e.  to  suffixes  be- 
ginning with  a  consonant,  is  prefixed  a  vowel  of  the  A  class, 
viz.  Qamets  or  Pattahh.  In  this  shape  they  are  appended  to 
forms  of  verbs  which  end  with  a  consonant  usually  in  the  Prae- 
ter  only, 

(c)  To  the  same  forms  are  prefixed  a  vowel  of  the  E  class, 
viz.  Tseri  or  Seghol.  In  this  shape  they  are  appended  to 
forms  of  verbs  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  which  end  with  a  con- 
sonant. 

Note.  The  vowel  which  is  thus  prefixed  to  the  suffixes,  serves  to 
connect  them  more  readily  with  the  verb,  and  is  therefore  called  the 
union-vowel.  When  the  verb  ends  in  a  vowel,  this  same  vowel  of  course 
serves  as  a  union-vowel. 

§  308.  Between  the  suffix  and  the  union-vowel  there  is  sometimes 
inserted  an  epenthetic  Nun,  §  109,  b,  which  is  usually  assimilated  to 
the  first  letter  of  the  suffix  and  expressed  in  it  by  a  Daghesh  forte.  In 
poetry,  the  Nun  is  sometimes  fully  written.  This  class  of  suffixes  is 
limited  principally  to  the  sing,  number  of  the  pronouns,  and  to  the  Fut. 
tense  of  verbs. 

[§  309.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  suffixes  as  appended,  (a) 

U  To  verbs  ending  with  a  vowel,  in  all  the  moods  and  tenses,     (b)  To 

those  ending  with  a  consonant,  in  the  Praeter.     (c)  To  those  ending 

with  a  consonant,  in  the  Fut.   and  Imperative,     (d)  It  exhibits  also 

those  suffixes  which  receive  an  epenthetic  Nun. 


7) 


332 


§§  309,  310.  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 


Sing,  common 

* 

2  m.  Sjl  ?  i 


2  f.      -sj  13 


3  m.    ^_  1 
3  f.      ft* 


ph.  ^_r 


2  m.    D£ 

3  m.     D  poet. 'It). 

».«     Mlfi 


Praeter. 
in  pause  l,3_ 


q  m  pause  ^_^_ 

in-*1! 


13_ 


D5 


n_ 


i3_  ; 

D_  D-.  poet,  tell* 


-ss 


Future  with  epenthetic  Nun. 
(d) 
Sing.  1.  ML^   ^J*    for    N^y  etc. 

'  —    2  m.      ^  J"  MS  J"   for     ^]_"*  etc. 


—  3  m, 

—  3  f. 


13_    for  inD_  also  13 


1st  Plur. 


nD_    for  m 


*»3_   for  !)33_] 


iwes  ore  the  table  of  suffixes.     Unusual  forms. 

[§  310.  (1)  In  a  very  few  instances,  the  Future  has  the  suffixes  TjJ' 
13-  like  the  Praeter  ;  and  vice  versa  the  Praeter  very  rarely  takes  suf- 
fixes like  the  Future,  viz.  ■*_* ,  and  a  few  times  ^  J  . 

(2)  The  original  union-vowels  would  seem  to  be  Qamets  and  Tseri ; 
which  shorten  into  Pattahh  and  Seghol  when  the  tone  is  removed. 
Before  the  epenthetic  Nun,  the  two  latter  only  are  found.  So  also  in 
^3-  ,  which  in  pause  becomes  *2*.  . 

(3)  The  2d  pers.  sing.  fem.  ^__  in  b,  occurs  but  seldom  ;  the  more 
common  form  in  the  Praeter  is  !]_.  (without  tone  *]  J),  as  in  the  Future. 
The  form  with  parogogic  Yodh  ("0-)  occurs  often  in  the  later  Psalms. 


m 


§§  310,  311.   VERBS    WITH    SUFFIX    PRONOUNS.  133 

(4)-;The  suffixes  S5  ,  "J3  ,  never  take  a  union-vowel ;  nor  does  the 
suffix*^  or  HD ,  except  in  pause.  The  3d  pers.  sing.  fern,  of  the  Prae- 
ter  also  takes  suffixes  either  with  or  without  a  union-vowel ;  see  below 
§312.2. 

(5)  The  forms  "Mil  ltt_"  IE—*  with  a  parag.  i  ,  are  common  in  poe- 
try. The  form  itt  is  found  as  a  suffix  once,  Ex.  15:  5 ;  so  in  Ethiopic. 
The  form  En_  occurs  in  Deut.  32:  26. 

(6)  Instead  of  the  fem.  suffix  "j  of  the  3d  pers.  plural  fern.,  the  masc. 
form  E  appears,  specially  after  the  sufformatives  1  and  % ;  perhaps  in 
order  that  the  fem.  suffix  may  not  be  confounded  with  the  parag.  ] ;  as 
EViin^l  Ex.  2:  17,  for  {%tf$^| ;  HfcfilGl  .  *  Sam-  6:  10-  Gen-  26: 
15.  Num.  17:  3,  4.  Josh.  4:  8.  Hq|  2:  14.  Prov.  6:  21.  But  "j  is  used 
in  Jer.  48:  7. 

(7)  The  suffixes  with  epenth.  Nun  are  occasionally  found  in  the 
Imp.,  but  rarely  in  the  Praeter;  see  No.  1.  above.  In  Chaldee,  an 
epenth.  Nun  is  always  found  before  the  suff.  of  the  Fut,  Imp.,  and 
Infinitive. 

(8)  Wherever  there  is  a  union-vowel,  it  always  takes  the  tone.  The 
suffixes  tp.  and  "p.  always  draw  down  the  tone  upon  themselves,  remov- 
ing it  two  places  if  necessary ;  and  are  on  that  account  denominated 
grave  suffixes.  The  others  never  move  the  tone  more  than  one  syl- 
lable, and  are  called  light  suffixes. 

The  suffix  $  or  TVD  when  appended  to  verbs  ending  in  a  consonant, 
usually  takes  the  tone.  The  3  pers.  sing.  fem.  of  the  Praeter  is  except- 
ed ;  see  paradigm. 

(9)  Some  of  these  suffix-forms  of  pronouns  are  derived  from  primi- 
tive forms  which  are  still  in  use  ;  as  tJ ,  ]  ,  form  Bri ,  fri ,  etc.  Others 
would  seem  to  come  from  forms  which  are  now  obsolete  in  Hebrew ; 
as  *j  from  nsN=n3:K  thou,  like  "E:N  i";  M  ,  form  $$M  etc.  The 
form  ^  still  appears  in  Ethiopic,  as  a  regular  sufForm.  in  the  flexion  of 
verbs] 

NOTE.  Verbal  suffixes  are  also  united,  in  all  their  forms,  with  certain  adverbs  and  interjec- 
tions.; in  which  condition  they  are  in  the  Nominative  case. 

§  311.  Changes  made  by  suffixes,  in  the  vowels  and  consonants  of  the 
Heb.  verb.  The  changes  of  the  vowels  are  seen  in  the  paradigm.  In 
respect  to  the  consonants,  the  following  changes  take  place ;  viz.  Praet. 
3  fem.  n_  becomes  n_  (ru) ;  the  fem.  Pi  ('•P))  becomes^;  2  plur. 
masc.cn  becomes  1  Pi;  as  the  paradigm  shews.  The  forms  ending 
with  ns-  receive  n  in  its  room. 


134  §  312.  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm. 

[§  312.  KAL,  Praeter  third  person  masc.  singular.  In  "^bap,  as 
the  tone  is  moved  forward,  the  first  vowel  falls  away,  §  133  ;  the  second 
vowel  of  the  original  word  being  thrown  into  a  simple  syllable,  becomes 
long,  §  130;  but  where  the  syllable  remains  mixed,  Pattahh  continues, 
as  obbttp  .  In  such  a  way,  the  student  will  easily  account  for  most 
of  the  changes  made  in  the  original  vowels  of  the  verb.  Verbs  final 
Tseri  retain  it,  when  a  long  vowel  is  required  in  the  last  syllable  of  the 
verb  ;  as  Btt&b  . 

(2)  Praeter  3  fern,  substitutes  n  for  the  final  n  ,  unites  this  (for  the 
most  part)  in  a  syllable  with  the  last  radical  of  the  verb,  and  always 
puts  the  tone  upon  the  same  syllable.  It  is  only  when  a  suffix  begins 
with  a  vowel,  (which  for  the  fern.  sing,  occurs  only  in  *J_  E_  "j— )  that 
the  final  D  is  taken  away  from  this  syllable  {§  90.  1),  which  of  course, 
as  it  then  becomes  simple,  prolongs  the  Pattahh,  §130.  E.  g.  with  suff. 
•J-  ,  ^ri.bttp  ,  where  the  Tseri  of  the  suffix  is  shortened,  in  consequence 
of  falling  into  a  mixed  syllable  without  the  tone,  §  129.  a.  So  0_  ]_. 
make,  by  the  same  rules,  Enb^bp  ,  ]nb>t3p  . 

Note.     The  suffix  =l!n and    rj-  sometimes  assimilate  their  tt  to 

the  final  n  of  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  wbttiJ^lrrnb^-; ,  1  Sam.  1:  24  ;   ntfrHtf 
=nm  rw  ,  Jer.  49:  24. 

(3)  Praeter  2  fern,  exhibits  the  form  "Wbtap  before  a  suffix,  (as  stat- 
ed in  §  311)  ;  and  in  this  way  it  appears  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
1st  pers.  sing,  when  it  takes  the  suffix  of  the  3d  pers.  sing,  and  plural. 
The  student  will  remark  that  here,  and  in  the  2d  pers.  plural,  a 
union-voioel  is  provided  for  the  verb  by  adopting  such  forms  as  "'Pibttp , 

inbap. 

(4)  The  Infinitive  most  usually  takes  suffixes  in  the  manner  of  Se- 
gholate  nouns,  in  Dec.  VI ;  i.  e.  the  final  vowel  is  thrown  back  upon  the 
first  radical  and  shortened.  If  the  verb  be  9  Guttural,  then  the  points 
are  regulated  by  the  usual  principles,  in  §  114.  §  128.  See  the  exam- 
ples in  the  paradigm.  The  variety  of  punctuation  with  the  suffixes  ^ , 
D3 ,  ]D ,  may  also  there  be  seen. 

The  Infinitive  of  a  verb  Fut.  Pattahh  usually  takes  Hhireq  under 
the  first  radical  before  suffixes  ;  as  Drpa  in  the  paradigm  ;  but  some- 
times  Pattahh,  as  ^n_  ,  ifc*a ,  etc.  Verbs  Pe  Guttural  sometimes 
take  a  Seghol  in  the  first  syllable  ;  as  nraft ,  Ps.  102:  14. 

The  Infinitive  f  em.  Segholate  takes  suffixes  like  nouns  of  Dec.  XIII. 


§§  312—315.  verbs  wrTH  suffix  pronouns— nouns.        135 

Hhireq  is  the  usual  vowel  in  the  first  syllable,  e.  g.  n\z;n  ,  \^ u3n  ;  but 
sometimes  Pattahh,  as  rD'dg ,  '9f\V  . 

(5)  Future  suffixes  are  provided  with  a  union- vowel  in  most  cases, 
where  the  verb  ends  with  a  consonant ;  in  which  cases  the  final  Hho- 
lem  or  Tseri  of  the  verb  is  dropped.  But  with  suflf.  ^  ,  CD ,  ]3 ,  these 
vowels  are  retained,  and  shortened  because  they  lose  the  tone.  On  the 
other  hand,  verbs  Future  Pattahh  retain  this  vowel,  and  prolong  it  be- 
fore a  union-vowel  »  as  triizb"1  from  ,l'2lb■, . 

(6)  The  Imperative  follows  the  analogy  of  the  Future  throughout  ; 
and  this  in  regard  to  verbs  final  Pattahh,  as  well  as  others. 

(7)  Participles  follow  the  manner  of  the  nouns  to  whose  declension 
they  belong,  in  receiving  suffixes. 

(8)  PIEL  usually  drops  its  final  Tseri  before  a  union-vowel,  as  in 
the  paradigm  ;  but  before  *J ,  C3  ,  Jg  ,  it  commonly  shortens  it  into  Se- 
ghol  or  short  Hhireq,  as  ^^j? ,  tpft-jS ;  rarely  into  Pattahh,  as  ^p*i3  , 
Deut.  2:  7.     Pattahh  final  here  remains,  as  ~^rn . 

(9)  POEL,  POLEL,  etc.,  imitates  Piel  in  their  suffixes. 

(10)  HIPHIL  appends  suffixes  to  its  full  forms,  not  to  the  apoco- 
pate ones.  Very  rarely  is  the  final  vowel  of  the  verb  dropped;  as  in 
** y??l  instead  of  N^JMft .] 

Verbs  Lamedh  He  with  suffixes. 

[§  313.  Suffixes  here  cause  the  final  letter  and  vowel  to  fall  away. 
The  union-vowel  is  then  supplied,  or  omitted,  as  the  nature  of  the  case 
requires. 

Note  1.  Praeter  3d  sing.  fern,  rejects  the  final  rr_  ,  and  then  fol- 
lows the  analogy  in  regular  verbs  as  to  the  n  before  the  suffix. 

Note  2.  Suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant  sometimes  cause  the 
original  Yodh  to  be  restored  ;  as  VFlIji  i^OD") ,  DrTfcJSK  ,  etc.] 


NOUNS. 

§  314.  Derivation.  Most  nouns  in  Hebrew  are  derived  from  verbs; 
and  in  general  they  have  for  their  ground-forms  the  Inf.  mode  or  par- 
ticiples. A  comparatively  small  number  of  nouns  are  probably  primi- 
tive ;  but  these  conform,  in  their  inflection,  to  the  usual  laws  which 
regulate  those  derived  from  verbs. 

§  315.    Declension  in  Hebrew  nouns  differs  much  from  declension 


136        §§  315,  316.  nouns  ;  general  classification,  etc. 

in  Greek  and  Latin.  The  plural  and  dual  numbers  are,  indeed,  distin- 
guished by  appropriate  endings  added  to  the  ground-forms ;  but  case, 
properly  considered,  is  not  marked  by  any  peculiarity  of  inflection  in 
the  noun  itself.  For  the  most  part,  it  is  designated  by  prepositions  and 
the  construct  state  of  the  preceding  noun,  §  332.  But  the  plural  and 
dual  endings,  the  suffixes,  and  whatever  increases  the  original  ground- 
forms  of  the  noun  and  shifts  the  place  of  its  tone,  occasions  a  variety  of 
changes  in  the  vowel-points  and  in  the  forms  of  nouns,  which  may  not 
unaptly  be  called  declensions. 

§316.  Classes  of  nouns  in  respect  to  origin.  Nouns,  like 
verbs,  are  either  primitive  or  derivative.  Those  of  the  latter 
class  are  divided  into  verbals  or  those  derived  from  verbs,  and 
denominatives  or  those  derived  from  nouns.  Three  classes 
of  nouns  may  therefore  be  reckoned. 

(a)  Nouns  primitive;  which  are  principally  those  that  designate 
animals,  plants,  metals,  numbers,  members  of  the  human  and  animal 
body,  and  some  of  the  great  objects  of  the  natural  world.  But  among 
the  names  of  all  these,  are  some  of  verbal  derivation. 

NOTE.  The  form  of  primitive  nouns  is  not  distinguished  from  that  of  derived  ones.  They 
are  treated,  in  their  inflections,  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  they  were  derived.  Only  a  knowledge 
of  etymology,  therefore,  can  enable  the  student  to  determine  whether  a  noun  is  primitive  or  de- 
rivative ;  and  in  some  cases  it  may  be  doubtful  to  the  best  etymologist,  whether  a  noun  belongs 
to  the  first,  second,  or  third  class  above  specified. 

(b)  Nouns  derivative;  which  are  altogether  the  most  numerous 
class.  Very  many  of  them  appear  to  be  derived  either  from  participles, 
or  from  the  Inf.  mood.  The  former  more  commonly  denote  the  subject 
or  object  of  action  or  passion,  (nomen  agentis  vel  patientis) ;  the  latter 
denote  action  or  passion,  {nomen  actionis  vel  passionis.)  The  first 
class  are  named  concretes,  being  used  to  designate  some  being  or  thing ; 
the  second  abstracts,  denoting  simple  action  or  passion.  But  to  this 
principle  there  are  very  many  exceptions. 

(c)  Nouns  denominative;  which  are  nouns  derived  from  other  nouns, 
either  primitive  or  verbal.  E.  g.  S*Vs  a  vine  dresser,  from  the  primitive 
fcSlb  a  vineyard ;  "p ft^j?  eastern,  from  the  verbal  D*l»  the  east.  The 
forms  of  these  resemble  those  of  the  other  classes. 

[Note.  Denominatives  are  usually  formed,  (1)  By  adding  to  verbals 
the  masc.  derivation  *_ ,  or  the  fern.  PT_ ;  e.  g.  8H0  six,  *>&&  sixth ; 
"•Stf  173  a  Moabite,  from  5COft ;  nbNnizr  an  Israelite,  from  ranto"; ,  etc. 
Several  adjectives  also  are  formed  in  this  manner ;  as  "*"p: ,  fern. 
n^^53  strange,  from  n55  a  stranger ;  "^iE^ji  first,  from  "pEI^ ,  etc. 


§§  316 — 319.  nouns  ;  gender.  137 

(2)  By  adding  n%  ,  which  is  usually  of  the  fern.  Gender.  E.  g.  ttJan 
princeps,  rPlEtt'i  principium.  Words  of  this  form  are  sometimes  de- 
fectively written,  as  n^S:  for  tPSLTSt ,  etc. 

(3)  Rarely  by  adding  the  terminations  H—  ft—  \_  or  ^- .  E.  g. 
ft£"H§  a  Hon,  from  *TIJ ;  MEN  f re-offering,  from  8)H;  ^b"1^  a  deceiver, 
from  b">3  ;  ^[TDa  a  treasury,  from  V  23v  .] 

[§  317.  Nouns  composite  and  proper.  Composite  nouns  are  very 
rarely  found  in  Hebrew,  except  in  proper  names.  A  few  however  oc- 
cur which  are  made  up  of  two  nouns,  or  of  a  noun  and  a  particle ; 
e.  g.  mlbb£=mjb  b£  shade  of  death;  b?*b:3  worthless,  from  ^2  not 
and  b?^  profit. 

Note  1.  Proper  names,  in  their  formation,  follow  the  general  ana- 
logy of  verbals  as  given  in  §  316.  b.  Very  many  of  them  are  composite 
and  consist  usually  of  two  nouns,  or  of  a  noun  and  a  verb.  E.  g.  ]"B^.2 
Benjamin,  i.  e.  son  of  my  right  hand;  tPp.^rT*  Jehoiakim,  i.  e.  Jehovah 
will  exalt. 

Note  2.  To  the  first  word  in  composite  proper  names  a  Yodh  is 
usually  added,  as  bNp"Oa  Gabriel  or  man  of  God,  from  12\  and  btf ; 
sometimes  a  Vav,  as  bflMft'.!?  Samuel  or  name  of  God,  from  Bui  and  bi$  . 
The  name  of  God  (b$  or  SrifP  abridged)  forms  the  beginning  or  the 
termination  of  a  great  multitude  of  Hebrew  proper  names.] 

Gender  of  Nouns. 
§  318.    The  Hebrew  has  only  two  genders,  viz.  the 
masculine  and  feminine.      These  are  distinguished  some- 
times by  the  form,  and  sometimes  by  the  signification,  of 
words. 

§319.  I.  Gender  distinguished  by  form,  (a)  In  gen- 
eral, nouns  are  masculine  which  end  in  one  of  the  original 
radical  letters  of  the  word. 

(6)  The  feminine  is  distinguished  by  adding  to  the  mas- 
culine, either  5l_  ,  T\ ,  n_  or  D- .  JTY*T"" 

E.  g.  ^bfa  a  king,  tisbtt  a  queen;  NEfr  a  sinner;  ntttarr  sin,  ","}25> 
a  Hebrew  man,  rP"liS  a  Hebrew  woman;  "rttiijj,  fern,  rn'ttp  incense  ; 
yrua  ,  fem.  nsni  E  acquaintance.  The  fem.  n__  is  appropriate  to  words 
with  Gutturals  at  the  end,  §  141. 

[Note  1.  Besides  these,  the  following  terminations  of  the  feminine 
18 


138  §§  319—322.  nouns  ;  gender. 


actually  occur,  although  they  are  rare  ;  viz.  (1)  tt_ ;  as  ttr& ,  for  Frjttj , 
§  122.  1.  (2)  n_;  as  rn»T,  poetic  for  nn^T.  (3)  n_  with  the 
proper  vowel  Pattahh,  and  with  the  tone  on  the  ultimate ;  as  ri]?-)3 
emerald  Ezek.  28  :  13,  Dtf  £  pelican  Ps.  102  :  6. 

Note  2.  The  endings  n",_  and  nn  are  also  feminine.  They  are 
contracted  forms,  and  stand  for  the  full  fem.  n*—  and  ni_,  neither  of 
which  the  language  permits,  §  120.  c] 

§  320.   II.    Gender  distinguished   by  signification,      (a) 

Nouns  which  designate  objects  such  as  the  following  are 

masculine,  although  they  have  a  feminine  termination. 

(1)  Names  of  men  ;  as  tt^W  Judah.  (2)  Offices  of  men  ;  as  iins 
a  governor.  (3)  Nations;  as  Irn'irr  the  nation  of  Judah.  (4)  Rivers; 
as  InsftN  Amana. 

T    T  -{ 

(6)  Nouns  which  designate  objects  such  as  the  follow- 
ing are  feminine,  although  they  have  a  masc.  termination. 

(1)  Names  of  women ;  as  bfn  Rachel  (2)  Office  or  relations  of 
women;  as  &$  mother.  (3)  Countries;  as  ^TiEN  Assyria.  (4)  Towns 
as  1^  Tyre.  (5)  Female  beasts;  as  pnfij  a  she-ass.  (6)  Members 
of  the  body  by  nature  double ;  as  Jg$  the  ear. 

Note  1.  The  same  word  may  be  masc.  in  one  meaning,  and  fem. 
in  another;  as  FH1ST]  Judah  or  the  Jews,  masc;  JT^JT ,  the  country 
qfJudea,  fem. 

Note  2.  There  are  some  nouns  which  are  feminine,  although  des- 
titute of  any  distinctive  sign  of  this  gender  either  in  form  or  significa- 
tion ;  as  ^$3  a  well;  -|33  a  talent,  etc.  These  can  be  learned  only 
from  practice. 

§  321.  Nouns  of  common  gender.  A  considerable  num- 
ber of  nouns  are  of  common  gender.  Such  are  generally 
the  names  of  beasts,  birds,  metals,  etc. 

Note  1.  These  nouns  are  mostly  masculine  as  to  form.  Some  of 
them  are  more  commonly  employed  as  masc.  nouns ;  others  more  fre- 
quently as  feminine.  These  can  be  learned  only  by  practice.  What 
is  of  the  neuter  gender  in  the  present  western  languages,  is  generally 
designated  in  the  Hebrew  by  the  feminine ;  as  *11JB  ri3  daughter  of 
Tyre,  i.  e.  city  of  Tyre. 

Note  2.  Nouns  of  the  dual  number  are  universally  of  the  common 
gender. 

§  322.   Gender  of  the  plural     In  the  plural,  the   ap 

pearance  of  nouns  as  to  gender  is  in  many  cases  dubious. 


§§  322.  323.  nouns  ;  formation  op  the  pem.,  etc.  139 

A  considerable  number  of  masc.  nouns  form  their  plural  as 
if  they  were  feminine;  while  many  feminine  nouns  have 

plurals  of  the  masculine  form,  §327. 1. 

E.  g.  masc.  !2N  a  father,  plur.  ninN.  Fem.  fitan  wheat,  plur. 
tPBh ,  etc. 

Note.  The  gender  of  the  plural,  let  the  form  be  as  it  may,  is, 
with  few  exceptions,  regulated  by  that  of  the  singular.  Some  words  ex- 
hibit both  the  masc.  and  fem.  forms  of  the  plural,  but  the  gender  of 
both  forms  is  the  same,  viz.  it  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  singular. 

Formation  of  fem.  nouns  from  masc.  ones. 
[§  323.  The  addition  of  fem.  terminations  (§  319.  b)  to  the  masc. 
forms  usually  occasions  some  change  in  the  vowels  of  the  masculine, 
because  these  terminations  affect  the  tone-syllable  of  the  ground-form. 
E.g.  (a)  The  ending  n_  ,  (1)  Draws  down  the  accent  and  consequently 
causes  the  penult  vowel  of  the  masc.  form,  if  mutable,  to  be  dropped  ; 
§133.  (2)  In  nouns,  etc.,  not  monosyllabic,  of  Dec.  VII.,  the  final  vowel  is 
dropped.  (3)  Such  nouns  as  Dec.  VIII.,  in  case  they  have  a  long 
vowel,  exchange  it  for  a  short  one  with  Dagh.  forte  ;  or,  in  case  this  is 
excluded,  substitute  an  equivalent  for  it,  §  111.  §  112.  (4)  Masc.  Se- 
gholates  receiving  n_-  fem.  assume  the  suffix-form  in  order  to  take  it ; 
see  par.  of  Dec.  VI.  (5)  Nouns  of  declension  IX.  drop  their  final  In  and 
its  preceding  vowel,  in  order  to  receive  the  fem.  n-  .  All  these  prin- 
ciples are  apparent  in  the  following  table  of  formations,  in  which  those 
nouns  not  accompanied  by  a  common  numeral  mark,  form  the  fem.  by 
the  mere  addition  of  the  fem.  ii-  to  the  masculine;  those  marked  1, 
2,  3,  4,  5,  correspond  in  their  formation  to  the  rules  given  in  1,2,  etc. 
above.  The  Roman  numerals  mark  the  declensions  to  which  the  masc. 
nouns  respectively  belong. 


ec. 

Masc. 

Fem.              Dec. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Dec 

Masc. 

Fem. 

I. 

tno 

ttD'lO       VI. 

«ft* 

PtJ^O  (4) 

H 

nig 

•pnnn 

n;inhn 

*3*t 

wJa«  (4) 

VIII 

.  tan 

nan  (3) 

II. 

N^i'fc 

nN^ia 

"^d 

n^ntx  (4) 

n 

ni:  (3) 

III. 

£bj 

nVna  (1) 

*« 

n^S  (4) 

» 

nsT?(3) 

p1no 

r^ina  (1) 

Hot 

nbp»  (4) 

pn 

rrgrr  (3) 

9%gy 

ttJM^Cl) 

Pin 

*gfn(4) 

T? 

Pip  (3) 

a-na 

njo-a(l) 

5£ 

f    T 

*Vr  <4) 

B 

H|i  (3) 

irgjg 

rwgta(J) 

T)k 

rrr%  (4) 

nifi 

m$  (3) 

IV. 

m 

rtaw(i)  vii. 

lj& 

rt»«ii  (2) 

IX. 

nc; 

WRTO 

V. 

m 

nm  t« 

^rj72 

n^jpn  (2) 

• 

iipa 

rt«-]5g  (5) 

p.: 

H|£  (irreg.) 

n 

rt« 

140  §§323 — 326.  nouns;  formation  of  the  plural. 

Note.  As  nouns  of  Dec.  V.  not  unfrequently  imitate  those  of  Dec, 
VI.  in  their  const,  form  (see  par.),  so  among  the  feminines  derived  from 
ground-forms  belonging  here,  are  some  that  imitate  the  fern,  of  Dec. 
VI. ;  e.  g.  ?|*P  fem.  HS^P ,  b$l  fern.  ilb?.1  •  For  the  form  pina  ,  fern. 
npwn  ,  under  Dec.  III.,  comp.  §  127.  Except.  1.  §  270.  b.  1. 

(b)  The  ending  n  makes  no  change  in  the  original  word  ;  e.  g. 
Kraft ,  nafch  ;  V$3> ,  rp-oy ,  etc. 

(c)  The  Segholate  endings  n_  n_.,  (1)  Affect  the  penult  vowel  in 
the  like  manner  with  r»_  ;  see  above,  a.  (2)  They  change  the  ultimate 
mutable  vowel,  according  to  the  rule  in  §  142.  d.  (3)  If  the  final 
vowel  be  impure,  they  substitute  a  pure  one  in  its  room  ;  e.  g.  'ITi* , 
mi**;  tfy&t  n'^btt;  rrertfis,  rttjra,  Tq-i,  n^,  etc.;  §  127, 
Exceptions. 

Note.  The  Fem.  Segholate  form  is  usually  chosen  for  the  construct 
state;  while  n_  is  more  common  in  the  absolute  state.  In  the  fem. 
Inf.  and  Part.,  the  Segholate  ending  is  the  usual  one.  Nouns  in  Dec. 
VI.  and  IX.  are  not  susceptible  of  fem.  Segholate  endings.  Nouns  in 
Dec.  VIII.  omit  the  Daghesh  in  the  double  letter  and  lengthen  the 
preceding  vowel,  when  they  assume  the  Segholate  form;  e.g.  SiUJip, 
njfe.] 

Formation  of  the  Plural 

§  324.  The  Hebrew,  like  the  Greek,  has  three  num- 
bers, the  singular,  dual,  and  plural  The  plurals  of  masc. 
and  fem.  nouns  are  usually,  but  not  always,  distinguished 
by  appropriate  forms. 

§  325.  Plural  masculine.  The  plural  of  masc.  nouns  is 
formed,  (a)  Usually  by  annexing  to  the  singular,  (l)  E\_ . 
(2)  D  simply,  in  some  words  ending  in  \_ . 

E.g.  (1)  0=10  plur.  D^tMO.  (2)  ^np: ,  trniM ;  also  as  '■ft';tt**J. 
But  the  plural  ending,  as  might  be  expected,  is  sometimes  written  de- 
fectively ;  as  tPftftft ,  also  S:^2Pi,  §  63. 

(6)  The  unusual  forms  of  the  plural,  are  (1)  "p_. ;  e.  g.  *r^73  ,  plur. 
•p^J ,  Prov.  31 :  3.  (2)  %  ,  e.  g.  pVn  ,  "•aifcrj  ,  Jer.  22  :  14  ;  ^'3 
Nah.3:  17.  (3)  Perhaps  \_ ;  e.  g.  J33,  ^Ps.  45:9.  The  forms 
1  and  2  coincide  with  the  Chald.  aryl  Syriac'plurals. 

§  326.    Plural  feminine.       The   plural  of  fem.  nouns 


§§  326—327.  nouns  ;  heteroclites,  etc.  141 

is  formed.  (a)  By  changing  the  terminations  fi_  ri- 
ft- of  the  fem.  sing,  into  Tf] ,  and  by  corresponding  vowel 
changes. 

E.g.  nnnn,  plur.  rn-nn;   rn\a>  plur.   rrnaN;  nsztt,  plur. 

ni5>3t3  .     The  n  of  the  fem.  ending  sing,  is,  in  a  few  cases,  retained  in 

the  plural  as  if  it  were  a  radical ;  e.  g.  masc.  b%  ,  fem.  n):\  ,  fem.  plur. 

rnnb'r. 
•»  > 

(6)  By  annexing  ni  simply  to  those  feminines  which  in 
the  singular  have  a  masc.  form;  as  "INS,  plur.  nilNS, 
§  320.  Note  2. 

(c)  By  changing  D*1-.  into  ni*-.,  as  D'HD?,  plural 
rnnn?;    and  tfi  into  tf(Q  as  n&£fi,  plur.  nVsSjB^ 

Note  1.  The  plurals  under  c  appear  to  be  derived  from  obsolete 
forms  of  the  sing,  in  n*_  and  !rp_  .  Nouns  of  these  classes  sometimes 
also  form  their  plural  after  the  usual  manner ;  as  rP3rr  ,  plur.  tPn^ft 
and  ni  rrar? ;  msT ,  plur.  tPrn^T . 

Note  2.  The  plural  ending  of  the  fem.  form  is  not  unfrequently 
written  defectively  ;  as  riVp   for  m'^p,  etc. 

HETEROCLITES. 

[§  327.  Thus  we  may,  in  the  manner  of  the  grammarians, 

name  those  nouns  which  specially  depart  from  usual  analogy. 

They  are  oijive  classes.      These  are, 

(1)  Such  as  have  a  masc.  singular,  and  yet  have  a  plural  of  the  fem. 
form  and  masc.  gender,  e.  g.  5tf  ,  rnn&J ,  §  322  and  the  Note  ;  also 
such  as  have  a  fem.  singular,  and  a  plur.  of  the  masc.  form  and  fem. 
gender,  e.  g.  Sl^b  ,  tFXfc  .  (2)  Such  as  have  two  forms  of  the  plural, 
while  the  gender  of  both  follows  that  of  the  singular,  e.  g.  !"J2itt  fem.  a 
year,  plur.  ttWQ  and  niia  fem.,  §  322.  Note.  (3)  Some  nouns  have 
only  a  plur.  form  ;  e.  g.  t^DD ,  the  face.  (4)  Some  are  found  only  in 
the  singular  ;  e.  g.  Pp2  fowl,  Pja  children,  etc.  These  have  a  collec- 
tive and  plur.  sense,  as  well  as  a  sing.  one.  (5)  Some  words  exhibit 
(like  many  in  the  Arabic)  a  pluralis  pluralium,  i.  e.  a  plural  formed  by 
a  second  plural  in  addition  to  the  first  one ;  e.  g.  ME3  «  high  place, 
plur.  rri»3  ,  pluralis  pluralium  DTnEia  .] 


142      §§  328 — 331.  nouns  ;  formation,  etc.,  op  the  dual. 

Formation,  use,  etc.,  of  the  Dual. 

§  328.  The  dual  is  usually  formed  by  adding  the  termina- 
tion D1-  (*p-)  to  the  forms  of  the  singular;  e.  g.  (a)  To 
masculines  without  change,  (b)  Tofeminines  in  PL.,  after 
changing  the  final  ft  into  n . 

E.  g.  {a)  tri*  ,  B*^  •  (b)  fO*T  *  8^3*1  .  In  nouns  of  Dec.  VI. 
the  dual  ending  is  appended  to  the  suff.  form,  as  h(] ,  B".]?^"!;  see 
paradigm. 

Note.  The  dual  endings  appear,  in  some  few  cases,  to  suffer  con- 
traction ;  e.g.  -rni  for  vh'~,  cnS'V  for  trn3""n ;  T  for  tr^r . 
These  contrasted  forms  are  limited  mostly  to  proper  names. 

§329.  Use  of  the  dual.  It  is  used  principally  to  de- 
signate such  objects  as  are  double  either  by  nature  or  by 
custom. 

[E.  g.  p'1^,,  the  two  hands;  &"]5?2  a  pair  of  shoes ,  etc.  The  names 
of  members  of  the  human  body  which  by  nature  are  doubled,  have  also 
a  plural  as  well  as  a  dual  form  ;  but  the  dual  is  generally  taken  in  a 
literal,  and  the  plural  in  a.  figurative  sense;  as  U\%3  hands,  nis3 
handles. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  instances  the  dual  form  stands,  instead  of  the 
plural,  for  a  greater  number  than  two ;  e.  g.  Q^S33  Q$  six  wings ; 
frfsttj  "tib'p  three  teeth.  It  hardly  needs  to  be  remarked,  that  the  dual 
is  of  course  essentially  plural,  requiring  a  plural  verb,  adjective,  etc. 
In  some  cases  it  is  difficult  to  show  the  reason  of  the  dual  form ;  as 
B'fnnS  mid-day,  etc.     Perhaps  it  is  intensive. 

Note  2.  The  words  tTttttJ  heavens  and  D^b  waters,  though  appa- 
rently dual,  are  used  as  plurals.] 

§  330.  Gender  of  the  dual.  It  is  of  common  gender ;  and  it 
is  found  only  among  nouns,  and  not  among  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples. 

§  331.  The  dual  ending  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  plural ;  e.  g. 
rrinitt  walls,  D"fntoh  two  walls,  etc.    Comp.  §  327.  5. 


§§  332,  333.  nouns  ;  changes  by  declensions.  143 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

Construct  state. 

§  332.  The  Hebrew  has  no  cases,  in  the  sense  in 
which  we  speak  of  cases  in  Latin  and  Greek.  But  when 
two  nouns  come  together,  the  second  of  which  is  to  be 
translated  as  a  Genitive,  this  relation  is  indicated,  contrary 
to  the  usual  custom  of  other  languages,  by  some  change 
in  the  first  noun  (if  it  be  susceptible  of  change)  instead 
of  the  second.  The  first  noun  so  situated,  is  said  to  be  in 
regimen  or  in  the  construct  state ;  while  any  noun  not  thus 
placed  before  a  Genitive,  is  said  to  be  in  the  absolute 
state. 

Two  nouns  in  such  a  relation  are  supposeed  to  be  uttered  nearly  as  if  they  were  one  word  ;  for 
which  reason  the  first  noun  is  usually  contracted  in  the  utterance,  (if  it  be  capable  of  contraction), 
so  that  the  stress  of  voice  may  be  transferred  to  the  second. 

Changes  of  Consonants  in  the  declension  of  Nouns. 

§  333.  The  consonants  of  the  ground-form  or  absolute 
state,  are  modified  in  regimen  or  the  construct  state  as  fol- 
lows; viz. 

(a)  In  all  classes  of  masc.  nouns  sing,  (not  having  a  fem. 
form,  §  320),  the  const,  is  like  the  abs.  form  as  to  its  con- 
sonants. 

(b)  Feminines  singular  in  H-  change  this  ending  into  fl- ; 
as  HH*P,  const.  ntfT.  Other  feminines  singular  suffer  no 
change  of  their  consonants. 

(c)  The  plur.  ending  ID1-  and  the  dual  &*]_  become1.; 
as  D^MD,  const.  iMD;  t^T,  const.  *g. 

(d)  Plurals  in  Tft  suffer  no  change  in  their  consonants,  in 

the  construct  state. 

Remark.  The  vowels  of  words  are  also  affected  by  regimen  or  con- 
struct state ;  see  §  341  seq. 


144  §§  334 — 336.  nouns  ;  suffix  state. 

Suffix  state. 

§  334.  This  is  that  form  of  nouns  to  which  are  appended 
or  suffixed  fragments  of  pronouns  equivalent  in  signification  to 
our  pronominal  adjectives  in  English. 

E.  g.  0*10  a  horse,  with  suffix,  IDTO  his  horse,  etc.  So  bTp  voice,  ibp 
vox  ejus. 

Note.  Pronouns  or  fragments  of  pronouns  thus  suffixed,  may  be 
considered  as  equivalent  in  general  to  nouns  in  the  Gen.  case,  and  as 
putting  the  noun  to  which  they  are  suffixed  into  a  kind  of  regimen  or 
const,  state.  Frequently  the  suff.  state  requires  the  same  vowel-chan- 
ges as  the  const,  state,  but  not  always  ;  as  may  be  seen  by  the  para- 
digms of  nouns,  where  both  states  are  exhibited. 

§  335.  Most  of  these  suffixes  (like  those  of  verbs,  §  304 
seq.),  cause  the  tone  of  the  word  to  which  they  are  appended 
to  be  moved  forward,  and  of  course  produce  a  change  in  the 
vowel-points;  see  §  129 seq. 

§  336.  Noun-suffixes  (like  those  of  verbs,  §  307  seq). 
have  generally  three  different  forms,  adapted  to  the  ending 
or  number  of  the  word  to  which  they  are  appended, 

(a)  The  most  simple  form  of  the  suffixes  is  that  in  which  they  be- 
gin with  a  consonant,  and  are  appended  to  nouns  singular  endingjwith 
a  vowel. 

(b)  The  second  form  of  suffixes  prefixes  a  union-vowel,  in  which 
shape  they  are  appended  to  nouns  singular  ending  with  a  consonant. 

(c)  The  third  form  of  the  suffixes  is  peculiar  to  nouns  plural.  Here 
all  the  suffixes  take  a  union-vowel ;  and  all  of  them,  except  that  of 
the  1st  person  sing.,  insert  a  Yodh  between  the  union-vowel  and  the 
suffix. 

[The  following  table  exhibits  the  suffixes  as  appended  to  the  various  forms  of  nouns  ;  the  first 
column,  (a)  Containing  those  which  are  attached  to  nouns  singular  ending  with  a  vowel  ;  the 
second,  (b)  Those  which  are  attached  to  nouns  singular  ending  with  a  consonant ;  the  third, 
(c)  Exhibiting  the  suffixes  as  they  are  attached  to  nouns  plural.  Several  unusual  forms  of  suf- 
fixes are  subjoined.] 


§§  336.  nouns  ;  suffix  state. 


145 


Sing. 


to  w  (c) 

Simple  form.         With  un.  vowel,  etc.  Suff.  to  nouns  plural. 


1.        my      ill 
2  m.   thy     ^  ^_ 

2  £      thy    ^ 

3  m.  his     1  ^JlJ 
3f.     Aer    t]2 
PI  hour    & 

2  m.  your  DID 

2  il    ?/o?;r   jj 

3  m.  (fcf'r  Dn 

3  f.  /tev  ]n  jn 


h_ 

V.CfcJ 

t'ii* 

t;  CQ 

fc  ■$* 

TjC  *j$C  «J^ 

i  ri  in,; 

TU  1_  poet.lfTU 

R_nJ 

T             T     '.' 

jwT 

< 

K 

■$ 

D5;_ 

1' 

i=V. 

D_  poet.  hB- 

on\.  poet.  haC 

i-  n3_'n:_' 

Sv 

Notes. 


[Note  1.  Unusual  suffixes  to  nouns  singular.  Sing.  Suff.  2  masc. 
jTJju  Ps.  139:  5,  !-D_.  Ps.  10;  14— 2  fern.  sing.  !p_  Ezek.  5:  12,  *J« 
Ezek.  23:  28,  rb_  (for  !j-)  with  ru  parag.  Nah.  2:  14,  *bL  Ps.  103^ 
3. — 3  fern,  n_  without  Mappiq  Num.  15:  28,  N_  Ezek.  36:  5  for  FJ-- . 
Plural  ;  1  pers.  13-*  Ruth  3: 2.  Job  22:  20.— 2  fem.  nap.  Ezek.  23: 
48,  49.-3  masc.  Dnl  2  Sam.  23:  6.-3  fem.  rrtttJ  1  K.  7:  37. 

Note  2.  Unusual  suffixes  to  nouns  plural.  Sing.  Suff.  3  masc. 
••.-pPs.  116:  12,  Chaldaic— 3  fem.  Nrj-j"  Ezek.  41:  15,  for  77%*. 
Plural  :  2  fem.  risy-  Ezek.  13:  20.— 3  masc.  Vmfy J  Ezek.  40:  16. 
3  fem.  fi^-  Ezek.  1:  11;  all  with  rt-  paragogic. 

Note  3.  The  suff.  "1_.  joined  to  a  noun  ending  with  "• ,  usually  coa- 
lesces with  it;  e  g.  "^ia  a  nationt  ■}!$  (goyi)  my  nation;  but  sometimes 
as  !*y*  my  fruit. 

Note  4.  The  sing,  forms  3  pers.  %t\£  tiJ  are  appended  to  nouns 
of  Dec.  IX. ;  in _"  is  parag.  for  D_  ,  §  125.  c. 

Note  5.     ANOMALIES.     (1)  Yodh  in  the  plur.  suff.  is  sometimes 
omitted  in  writing ;    as  ^377  for  *Va"V7  ,  TO^n  for  H^n,  Gen.  4: 
4.   inn?  for  *P"}ai  ,  etc.     (2)  Sometimes  a  sing.  suff.  is  attached  to  a 
19 


I 


146  §§  336 — 340.  nouns  ;  suffix  state. 


plur.  noun  ;  Vn?  for  *rh% ,  Ps.  132:  12 ;  ^n'SE  for  ^nipa  ,  Deut.  28  ; 
59;  Errintf  for  nn^n'nx  ,  etc.  (3)  Vice  versa,  plur.  suffixes  are  some- 
times appended  to  the  singular;  e.g.  Tprrr-n  for  TjnSriPi,  ^rn:2, 
thy  building,  for  ^rji:2,  Inf.  noun  from  n:3  Ezek.  16:  31.  Nos.  2 
and  3  are  doubtless  oversights  of  transcribers. 

Remark.  The  suffixes  DD  ,  \2 ,  Ei"*  ,  ]"  ,  are  called  grave,  because 
they  always  bring  down  the  tone  upon  them  ;  while  other  suffixes  are 
called  light,  because  they  do  not  affect  the  tone  uniformly  in  this  man- 
ner. With  nouns  singular,  the  grave  suffixes  take  no  union-vowel. 
With  nouns  plural  they  have  one,  but  do  not  allow  it  to  take  the  tone. 
In  all  other  cases,  without  exception,  the  union-vowel  takes  the  tone 
upon  itself.  The  sing.  ^  takes  the  tone  when  preceded  by  a  conso- 
nant ;  and  loses  it  when  preceded  by  a  vowel.] 

§  337.  Feminines  in  Jl_ ,  in  order  to  receive  suffixes, 
change  the  final  J"I__  into  n_  . 

§  338.   Nouns  dual  take  the  suffixes  of  nouns  plural. 

§339.  The  plural  and  dual,  in  order  to  receive  suffixes^ 
drop  the  appropriate  endings  of  the  abs.  state,  and  take  the 
suffixes  in  their  place. 

E.  g.  "D"?  ,  plur.  D^Sj ,  with  suff.  jftj'?  ,  where  the  ending  U\  is 
dropped,  and  the  suffix  5p—  taken  in  its  room.  So  S]3  ,  dual  B^53, 
with  suff.  IITESS,  dropping  C^_  and  taking  1^  . 

Notes  on  nouns  tcith  suffixes,  Par.  XXIV. 

[§  340.  This  paradigm  shews  the  manner  in  which  the  suffixes  are 
attached  to  masc.  and  fern,  nouns.  No.  I.  exhibits  the  usual  suffixes, 
in  connection  with  a  masc.  noun  ending  with  a  consonant.  A  fern, 
noun  terminating  in  a  consonant,  recieves  suffixes  in  the  same  way. 
No.  II.  exhibits  the  manner  in  which  suffixes  are  attached  to  nouns 
ending  with  a  vowel  or  quiescent  letter.  The  noun  2tf  in  its  abs.  state 
ends,  indeed,  in  a  consonant,  but  it  is  in  this  respect  irregular.  The 
const,  and  suff.  states  have  a  Yodh,  as  if  from  a  form  "»3N  ending  with  a 
Quiescent.  The  suffixes  are  of  course  of  the  simple  form,  i.  e.  without 
a  union-vowel.  The  plur.  of  na  is  n?3& ;  which  takes  suffixes  like  the 
plural  of  fnin  . 

No.  III.  exhibits  suffixes  in  connection  with  a  fern.  noun.  For  fem- 
inines in  n_  and  n_  with  suffixes,  see  §  390  and  Dec.  XIII.  in  the 
paradigm  of  nouns.     For  anomalies  as  to  suffixes  appended  to  fem. 


§§  341.  342.  nouns  ;  vowel  changes.  147 


nouns  see  Rosenm.  Comm.  in  Zach.  4 :  2,  where   is  a  large  list  of 
them. 

Changes  of  vowels  in  the  declension  of  Nouns. 

§  341.  As  regimen  and  the  suffix  state  usually  either 
change  the  tone  of  words,  or  occasion  contraction  in  the 
method  of  uttering  them,  it  follows  of  course  that  the 
vowels  must  be  affected  by  them.  But  in  almost  every 
case  of  this  nature,  only  the  ultimate  and  penult  vowels 
are  affected. 

For  the  changes  in  the  consonants,  see  $  333. 

§  342.  Vowel  changes,  (a)  When  any  accession  be- 
ginning with  a  vowel,  by  means  of  declension  or  suffixes, 
moves  the  tone  forward  one  place,  the  penult  mutable 
vowel  of  the  ground-form  falls  away;  but  in  nouns,  etc., 
of  the  form  of  Dec.  VII.,  the  ultimate  vowel  falls  away. 

E.  g.  *£"?,  plur.  tMsn ;  with  suff.  »tyi ,  ^nyj;  and  so  with  all 
the  suffixes  which  are  either  monosyllabic,  or  being  dissyllabic  have 
the  tone  on  the  penult.  Examples  of  Dec.  VII.,  where  the  final  vowel 
falls  away,  are  a^ia,  tnn^N,  jjj$«  ,  laa^lK,  etc.  See  paradigm  of 
nouns,  Dec.  VII. 

Note  I.  Nouns  of  Dec.  VI.,  i.  e.  Segholates,  inasmuch  as  the  abs. 
form  is  an  artificial  one  (§  141),  assume  their  original  ground-form  in 
order  to  receive  suffixes,  or  to  make  the  dual ;  e.  g.  abs.  Sjjpj ,  with 
suff.  "O^ ,  dual  fit&jjg  • 

(6)  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one  place,  by  a 
syllabic  accession  beginning  with  a  consonant,  and  when  the 
word  is  in  the  const,  state,  the  penult  vowel  is  dropped,  and 
the  ultimate  one  is  usually  shortened. 

E.  g.  (1)  By  syllabic  accession,  viz.  the  grave  suffixes  (§  336.  Rem.), 
as  ^1 ,  tD-in-i ,  (2)  In  the  const,  state  ;  as  tfjffs^  "^  >  **?  word  °f 
God'  *  But  in  Dec.  VI.  the  const,  state  remains  unchanged,  on  ac- 
count of  the  artificial  form  of  the  word  (supra  Note  1).  In  Dec.  VII., 
words  in  the  const,  state  for  the  most  part  (but  not  always)  remain  un- 
changed ;  see  par.  of  Dec.  VII. 

Note  %  The  suff.  ^  allows  of  two  different  forms  in  the  noun  to 


§§  342 — 345.  nouns  ;  dec.  i. 


which  it  is  appended  ;  e.  g.  (1)  It  shortens  the  ultimate  vowel ;  as  d£ 
name,  *|jpj  thy  name.  (2)  It  places  it  in  a  simple  syllable  by  combining 
the  final  letter  of  the  root  in  a  syllable  with  itself,  and  of  course  it  then 
requires  the  previous  vowel  to  be  long ;  as  ^y^  thy  word. 

(c)  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward  two  places,  and  in 
the  const,  state  of  plur.  nouns,  both  the  ultimate  and  penult 
mutable  vowels  fall  away. 

E.  g.  (l)  By  plur.  grave  suffixes  ;  as  E:b/>nn'7  .  (2)  By  const,  state  ; 
as  t:^n  "^Jto  the  words  of  the  people.  For  the  mode  of  supplying  new 
vowels,  see  §  137  seq. 

§  343.  All  fem.  nouns  having  forms  like  masc.  ones  are 
declined  in  the  same  manner.  Besides  the  usual  changes  in 
the  penult  vowel  (as  in  masc.  nouns),  feminines  in  fi_,  (l) 
Before  a  suffix  beginning  with  a  vowels  merely  change  fi  into 
n .  (2)  Before  a  suffix  beginning  with  a  consonant  they  not 
only  change  the  ft  into  T\ ,  but  also  shorten  the  vowel  immedi- 
ately preceding  then. 

E.  g.  (1)  M$  ,  with  suff.  injttj .  (2)  D3nrJ5 .  Fem.  plurals  and  Se- 
gholates  follow  the  analogy  of  masc,  nouns,  as  to  their  vowel  changes. 

General  rule  respecting  plural  suffixes. 
§  344.  (l)  In  masc.  nouns  plural,  light  suffixes  are  at- 
tached to  the  absolute  state  abridged;  grave  suffixes 
(§  336.  Remark)  to  the  construct  state.  (2)  In  fem. 
nouns  plural,  all  the  suffixes  are  attached  to  the  construct 
state. 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS  MASCULINE. 

First  declension. 
§  345.  This  comprehends  all  nouns,  whether  monosyllabic 
or  polysyllabic,  whose  vowels  are  all  immutable, 

E.  g.  -py  ,  tsj? ,  na  ,  ins  ,  ]i^N  ,  n^ba  ,  etc.  The  single  circum- 
stance that  vowels  are  immutable,  marks  this  declension ;  not  the 
kind  of  vowels,  nor  the  number  of  syllables.     Of  course  not  a  few  nouns 


§§  345 — 349.  nouns  ;  dec.  ii.  149 

that  are  feminine  belong  here  also ;  e.  g.  those  ending  in  n"1-. ,  m,  etc. 
and  many  others.  Whether  a  noun  is  masc.  or  fern.,  it  belongs  here  if 
the  vowels  are  immutable.  In  many  cases  it  is  easy  to  decide  whether 
the  vowels  are  immutable,  in  others  not.  Thus  in  Vlp  ,  SJiab  ,  etc., 
the  vowels  are  obviously  immutable  ;  but  the  vowels  in  SN3,'onQ  ,  etc. 
can  be  known  to  be  immutable  only  from  a  lexicon,  or  from  a  know- 
ledge of  etymology. 

[§  346.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  As  the  vowels  are  immutable 
here,  additions  to  the  ground-form  of  course  occasion  no  change.  (2) 
Some  few  nouns  are  treated  sometimes  as  belonging  here,  and  at  other 
times  as  being  of  Dec.  II. ;  e.  g.  aHh,  const,  tzJnrj  ,  Dec.  II. ;  butplur. 
const,  ''tpnn,  Dec.  I.  The  lexicons  note  such.  (3)  Some  few  nouns 
having  i  in  the  abs.  state,  exchange  it  for  1  in  some  of  the  derived 
forms;  see  Par.  Dec.  I.  c,  also  §  127.  Except.  1.  §  270.  b.  I.  In  the 
Par.,  d  presents  the  manner  in  which  nouns  with  a  final  Guttural  and 
Pattahh  furtive  are  declined.] 

Second  declension. 

§  347.  This  includes  nouns  with  fina I  Qamets  or  Pattahh 
pure  and  mutable,  whether  monosyllables,  or  polysyllables 
with  preceding  vowels  immutable. 

§  348.  Changes.  In  the  const,  state  singular,  before 
the  grave  suffixes,  and  sometimes  before  ^,  final  Qamets 
goes  into  Pattahh,  §  342.  b.  In  the  plural,  the  final  vowel 
falls  away  in  the  const,  state,  and  before  the  grave  suf- 
fixes, §342.  c. 

Remarks,  [a)  The  penult  vowel  in  nouns  of  this  Dec.  being  im- 
mutable, of  course  it  is  not  affected  by  either  regimen  or  suffixes,  (b) 
Final  Qamets  is  also  immutable  in  many  words,  although  it  cannot  be 
distinguished  by  the  mere  appearance  ;  e.g.  '^"lift,  plur.  const.  "»ipni73 , 
etc.,  of  Dec.  I.  Etymology  and  the  lexicons  determine  such  cases, 
(c)  Some  nouns  with  final  Qamets  mutable  belong  to  Dec.  VIII. ; 
e.  g.  tP  plur.  t3"V32  ,  etc.  The  mode  of  declension,  or  of  appending 
suffixes,  etc.,  enables  the  student  easily  to  distinguish  cases  of  this 
nature. 

[§  349.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  Under  a,  ES^  (for  tDE1?)  is 
sui  generis.  So  from  V  hand,  we  have  both  ED-p  and  t33n\  (2)  Ca- 
ses like  c  and  d  (with  final  Pattahh)  are  rare.     Only  the  forms  of  the 


150  §§  350 — 353.  nouns  ;  dec.  hi.  iv. 

plural  determine  the  declension,  to  which  they  belong.  (3)  Some  par- 
ticiples in  Niphal  from  verbs  Nb  ,  seem  at  first  view  to  belong  here  ; 
but  they  drop  their  Qamets  in  the  plural,  e.  g.  tP8»t33  instead  of 
fi^aea ;  and  such  forms  of  participles  as  tPKttp:  probably  have  a 
ground-form  like  aap:  of  Dec.  VII.] 

Third  declension. 
§  350.   This  comprises  all  nouns  which  have  an  im- 
mutable vowel  in  the  final  syllable,  and  Qamets  or  Tseri  pure 
and  mutable  in  the  penult 

§  351.   Changes.  Out  of  the  abs.  state,  the  mutable  vowel 

of  the  penult  falls  away. 

Remarks,  (a)  Pollysyllabic  nouns,  like  |Wp3,  etc.,  belong  here,  as 
well  as  dissyllabic  ones,  {b)  In  many  cases,  the  penult  vowel  is  ap- 
parently mutable,  but  really  immutable ;  e.  g.  h^^S^lrr^^ ,  Dec.  I. 
The  lexicons,  etymology,  and  declension,  determine  cases  of  this  na- 
ture. Sometimes  they  are  quite  unexpected  ;  as  in  niba ,  Mth,  etc., 
with  Qamets  impure,  and  so  belonging  to  Dec.  I. 

[§  352.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  Such  nouns  as  the  examples  in 
d  and  e,  more  generally  omit  the  Daghesh  forte  in  the  const,  state,  etc., 
as  in  the  Par. ;  but  they  sometimes  retain  it,  as  the  nouns  in  smaller 
print  shew.  (2)  The  Seghol  under  n  in  const.  jinTTJ ,  is  occasioned 
by  the  Guttural ;  so  traSto?  ,  etc.  But  3>  also  takes  Hhireq  short,  as 
const.  "pa£S .  (3)  As  to  exchanging  Hholem  for  Shureq  in  f,  see 
§  346.  3.  §  127.  1.  (4)  In  g,  the  Tseri  under  &t  in  the  sing,  is  immu- 
table, only  because  it  is  a  supposititious  euphonic  vowel,  §  119.  d.  2; 
the  plur.  is  regular.  The  word,  however,  can  scarcely  be  considered 
as  really  belonging  to  Dec.  III.  (5)  In  h,  the  short  form  in  the  const, 
state  ("b^ij  gedhol)  is  rare,  §  127.  3.  It  is  used  only  before  a  Maqqeph. 
(6)  In  such  rare  cases  as  "jna  plur.  B*»31"l»,  it  is  probable  that  the 
ground-form  of  the  plural  is  ]">*T!Q  ;  only  the  singular  properly  belongs 
to  Dec.  III.  (7)  A  very  few  nouns  fluctuate  between  Dec.  I.  and  III. 
e.  g.  t^nD  const.  O^nO,  as  of  Dec.  III. ;  but  plur.  E^O^O, ,  as  of 
Dec.  I.]  ' 

Fourth  declension. 

§  353.    This  includes  all  dissyllabic  nouns  with  Qamets 

pure  in  the    ultimate,  and  Qamets  or    Tseri    pure    in  the 

penult 


§§  354 — 358.  nouns  ;  dec.  iv.  v.  151 

§  354.   Changes,  (a)  Out  of  the  ground-form  the  penult 

vowel  always  falls  away.      (6)  In  the  const,  sing.,  before  the 

grave  suffixes,  and  sometimes  before  tj ,  the  final  Qamets 

shortens  into  Pattahh,  §  342.  b.      (c)    In   the   plur.  const. 

and   before   the   plur.  grave   suffixes,  both   the  vowels  of 

the  ground-form  fall  away  (§  342  c),  and  then  a  new  vowel, 

viz.  Hhireq  or  Pattahh,  is  inserted,  §  137.  §  138. 

[§  355.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  The  vowels  here,  as  in  other 
cases,  often  present  an  ambiguous  appearance.  The  lexicons  will  de- 
termine their  nature.  (2)  The  examples,  c,  d,  et  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  pointing  Gutturals,  §  138.  §  139.  In  c,  however,  the  const, 
and  suff.  plur.  conform  to  the  analogy  of  other  consonants,  in  the  first 
vowel ;  as  the  vowels  under  Gutturals  sometimes  do.  (3)  So,  on  the 
contrary,  other  letters  sometimes  conform  to  the  usage  of  Gutturals  ; 
e.  g.  const,  and  suff.  plur.  of  q;3  in/,  with  a  Pattahh  for  the  first  vowel. 
(4)  Nouns  of  the  form  g,  derivates  of  Nb  ,  belong  in  general  to  Dec. 
III.,  having  the  final  N_  immutable.  But  in  some  few  cases,  like  fitaS, 
the  final  Qamets  is  dropped  in  the  const,  and  suff.  plural ;  in  which 
case  they  are  of  Dec.  IV.  (5)  Cases  like  h  and  t,  with  a  const.  Se- 
gholate  form,  are  not  frequent  in  this  declension  ;  yet  they  occur  often 
enough  to  demand  a  distinct  recognition. 

Fifth  declension. 

§  356.  This  comprehends  dissyllabic  nouns,  with  Tseri 
pure  in  the  ultimate  and  Qamets  pure  in  the  penult. 

§  357.   Changes.  The  vowel-changes  follow  the  analogy 

of  Dec.  IV.,  except  that  the  singular  const.,  and  the  form 

before  the  grave  suffixes,  differ  more  sensibly  from  the  sing, 

absolute;  see §358. 3. 

[§  358.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  This  declension  might  have- 
been  ranked  with  Dec.  IV.  ;  but  I  conform  to  the  present  usage.  (2) 
The  'Segholate  forms  of  the  sing,  const,  in  c.  and  d,  are  like  those  in- 
A,  t,  of  Dec.  IV.  (3)  The  assumption  of  Pattahh  in  the  const,  sing.,, 
and  before  the  grave  suffixes,  etc.,  is  peculiar  to  this  declension  ;  but 
it  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  near  relation  of  the  vowels  Pattahh  and 
Seghol,  and  from  the  fact,  that  Seghol  is  very  rarely  employed  as  the 
final  vowel  of  nouns,  except  in  cases  of  Dec.  VI.,  where  it  is  merely 


& 


152  §§  358 — 361.  nouns  ;  dec.  v.  vi. 

furtive.  We  should  naturally  expect  short  Hhireq  before  the  grave 
suffixes ;  but  a  form  usually  like  the  const,  is  adopted.  Comp.  some  of 
the  Tseri  endings  in  Dec.  VII.  (4)  Derivates  of  fifc  (like  ttb«) 
which  apparently  belong  here,  have  a  Tseri  immutable  and  belong  to 
Dec.  III.  The  same  is  the  case  with  a  considerable  number  of  other 
nouns  and  participials  ;  e.  g.  ]V ,  ftSP ,  rtj£,  yah ,  bna  ,  h«8> ,  rrti, 
etc.,  all  of  Dec.  III.,  having  their  Tseri  immutable.  (5)  A  few 
words  fluctuate  between  Dec.  III.  and  Dec.  V. ;  e.g.  3£2  ,  const.  ap», 
Dec.  III. ;  but  plur.  const.  ^{J* ,  Dec.  V.] 

Sixth  declension. 

§  359.   This  comprises  dissyllabic  nouns,  which  have  the 

tone  on  the  penult  and  a  furtive  vowel  on  the  final  syllable. 

In  other  words,  this  declension  includes  all  Segholate  nouns  of  two 
syllables ;  excepting  a  few  nouns  and  Infinitives  with  the  fern.  Segho- 
late endings  ru  n_  ,  which  belong  to  Dec.  XII.  The  furtive  vowel 
of  the  final  syllable  is  Seghol,  Pattahh,  or  short  Hhireq,  §  141. 

Note.  All  the  Segholate  forms  are  factitious  and  merely  euphonic. 
They  appear  only  in  the  abs.  and  const,  states  of  the  singular  ;  for  all 
nouns  of  this  species,  when  they  receive  an  accession,  neglect  the  fur- 
tive vowel  and  develope  their  original  state,  which  is  a  monosyllable 
ending  with  two  consonants  ;  as  Sj^tJ ,  original  form  1f?ft  ,  with  suff. 
TSba ,  etc. 

§  360.  Changes,  (a)  The  const,  sing,  is  generally  the 
same  as  the  absolute.  (6)  The  suffixes  of  the  singular  are 
usually  appended  to  the  original  form  of  the  noun,  (c)  The 
plur.  absolute  assumes  a  form  like  that  of  nouns  belonging 
to  Dec  IV.  (d)  In  the  plur.  const,  and  before  the  grave 
suffixes,  the  penult  vowel  of  the  plur.  abs.  is  dropped,  and 
the  original  vowel  of  the  ground-form  in  the  first  syllable  is 

restored. 

Note.  The  plur.  abs.  of  this  declension  is  quite  anomalous,  and 
.cannot  be  derived  from  either  the  original  or  factitious  form  of  the  sin- 
gular, by  any  of  the  usual  laws  of  declension. 

§  361.  The  original  vowel  of  the  monosyllabic  ground- 
form  is  pure  in  all  cases,  and  mostly  short.  It  is  either  of 
the  A  E,  OF  O  class;  as  (l)  *j|ft.  (2)  1B6,  ■«&,  p>H. 


§§  361 — 365.  nouns  ;  dec.  vi.  153 

(3)  ttfrp,  TETfj?  ,  ©^jp.  In  the  factitious  forms,  the  original 
vowel  (if  not  of  the  O  class)  is  mostly  changed  into  Seghol 
by  the  influence  of  the  furtive  vowel,  §  142.  d. 

§362.  Segholate  nouns  may  be  divided  into  three  classes, 

according  to  the  original-vowels  of  their  ground-forms ;  and 

may  be  called  Segholates  of  the  j}9  E,  or  O  class. 

[§  363.  Notes  on  the  paradigm  of  the  A  class.  (I)  All  these  having 
Pattahh  under  their  first  radical  for  their  original  vowel,  assume  it  in 
the  suff.  state,  §  360.  b.  (2)  The  examples  b,  c,  shew  the  manner  in 
which  the  Gutturals  influence  the  form  of  these  Segholates,  §  141. 

(3)  A  few  words  belonging  here,  retain  the  original  ground-form  ; 
e.  g.  tfJJ,  Kitt  ,  *yt  (not  ink),  etc.] 

[§  364.  Notes  on  the  E  class.  (1)  In  such  cases  as  d,  ft  h,  we 
might  naturally  expect  that  the  Tseri  would  be  changed  into  Seghol, 
§  142.  d;  but  Tseri  often  appears  in  the  first  syllable.  (2)  The  ex- 
amples f,  g,  exhibit  the  influence  of  C  Guttural ;  the  example  h,  that 
of  a  final  Guttural.  Sometimes,  however,  Hhireq  short  is  used  in  the 
const,  and  suff.  plural  of  words  Pe  Guttural,  like  "^n  from  ^J5n  .  (3) 
The  student  must  not  fail  to  note,  that  although  such  nouns  as  *)5pv , 
-fen  ,  etc.,  exhibit  in  the  abs.  state  the  same  appearance  as  those  of 
the  A  class,  viz.  tfzjo ,  yet  in  the  suff.-  state  the  difference  in  the 
original  vowels  is  at  once  discerned ;  e.  g.  ")5p. ,  **}3|?  ,  but  ^\h} 
*jfctt  ,  etc. 

(4)  Original  forms  are  sometimes  found  here ;  as  ittttft  ,  ^D ,  etc. 
Remark.  Some  nouns,  by  usage,  are  treated  as  belonging  both  to 

the  A  and  E  classes  ;  e.  g.  I^n,  ijh,  etc.,  see  Lex.] 

[§365.  Notes  on  the  O  class.  (1)  The  examples  t,  k,  exhibit  Qa- 
mets  Hhateph  (in  the  suff.  state),  which  corresponds  to  the  Hholem 
of  the  abs.  state.  This  Hholem,  long  and  pure,  is  probably  the  vowel 
of  the  original  form  ;  as  in  mip  gosht.  (2)  In  k,  the  influence  of  3> 
Guttural  upon  the  vowels  is  seen.  For  the  suflf.  state  tDb^B  po-ol-Jchem, 
see  §  140.  Sometimes  this  form  appears  without  a  Guttural ;  e.  g. 
^nt:f: ,  from  npjp,  etc.  (3)  In  Z,  a  comp.  Sheva  is  assumed  under  the 
first  radical,  in  the  plur.  abs.  and  plur.  light  suff.  state;  an  occurrence 
very  rare  among  nouns  of  this  class. 

Anomalies.     The  nouns  ©fE  ,  unp  ,  Vti&  ,  exhibit  some  anom- 
alies in  regard   to  their   vowels;    plur.   tTiinuJ  sho-ra-shim,  cpttftg 
20 


154  §§  366 — 368.  nouns  ;  dec.  vi. 

qb-dha~shim,  EPirTrfc,  etc.  Also  "jn'f,  M53,  rp'i,  have  anomalous  plu- 
rals ;  see  the  Lex.  on  these  words. 

An  original  form  here  is  puip.] 

[§  366.  Segholates  of  verbs  "\2  and  *2>.  (a)  Those  of  the  A  class 
have  two  forms,  viz.  with  middle  1  (as  in  m,  n),  which  out  of  the  abs. 
state  quiesces  in  Shureq  or  Hholem,  as  in  the  examples ;  or  with 
middle  *  (as  in  o,  p),  which  out  of  the  abs.  state  quiesces  in  Tseri  or 
Hhireq.  The  forms  like  T\V2 ,  Tfih  ,  with  Qamets  for  a  penult  vowel 
without  the  influence  of  an  accent,  are  sui  generis,  and  belong  only  to 
Segholates  with  middle  1  in  proper  nouns.  Some  of  the  forms,  like 
VS  ,  have  a  regular  plural. 

(6)  Those  of  the  E  class  all  belong  to  Dec.  I.,  and  quiesce  in  Tseri 
or  Hhireq ;  as  ra  ,  f*f,  etc.,  the  Segholate  form  not  being  admissible 
here. 

(c)  Those  of  the  O  class  all  quiesce  in  Hholem  or  Shureq  in  the 
singular^  which  belongs  to  Dec.  I. ;  as  g,  r.  But  the  plural  is  occasion- 
ally regular ;  as  in  these  examples.  The  form  TN%  is  equivalent  to 
"ivf,  and  ^q£x=?i1jK  .  The  same  words  sometimes  have  regular  and 
irregular  forms  in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  TH,  nPW  and  trw.] 

[§  367.  Segholates  derived  from  verbs  rib ,  imitate  the  Inf.  Segho- 
lates. The  root  of  verbs  Tib  is  properly  ">b  or  "ib  ,  §  280.  Hence,  as 
neither  *  nor  1  at  the  end  of  a  word  will  bear  a  furtive  vowel  before 
them  (§  120  6),  so  that  we  cannot  write  "*n  b  ,  ins,  the  form  of  the 
word  is  changed  so  as  to  accommodate  the  nature  of  the  final  *  or  "J, 
i.  e.  the  Inf.  Segholate  form  is  chosen,  and  the  final  vowel  becomes 
homogeneous  with  the  quiescent,  §  117.  1.  The  examples  5 — w  ex- 
hibit the  modes  of  declining  these  peculiar  nouns.  They  appear  all  of 
them  to  belong  to  the  E  or  O  class  of  Segholates.  The  paradigm  ex- 
hibits the  change  which  a  pause-accent  produces  upon  them.  The 
examples  u,  v}  w,  exhibit  the  regular  plurals  which  they  occasionally 
form. 

Note.  The  final  quiescent  i  and  1  here  do  not  make  their  vowel 
immutable.  The  general  law  of  the  vowel  yields  here  to  the  law  which 
respects  the  form  of  the  noun  in  the  surf,  and  plur.  state.  Forms  like 
'inz^iriiT,  are  not  found  in  the  suff.  or  plur.  state,  in  our  present 
Hebrew.] 

[§  368.  Infinitive  Segholates.  So  I  would  choose  to  call  such  as 
are  monosyllabic  in  their  ground-form,  with  the  vowel  after  the  second 
radical ;  which  is  the  established  form  of  the  Inf.  construct,  so  often 


§§  368—373.  nouns  ;  dec.  vii.  155 

employed  as  a  mere  noun.  The  class  of  simple  nouns  with  such  forms 
as  |6$?-i  D^?j ,  "1^3 ,  is  not  large  ;  but  the  Inf.  forms  of  this  kind  are 
very  numerous,  and  the  majority  of  them  take  Hholem,  as  b't2p  .  The 
examples  z,  y,  z,  exhibit  the  modes  of  declining  nouns  of  this  sort ;  aa 
and  66,  the  method  of  declining  the  const.  Infinitives.  See  also  in  Par. 
XXII.  the  Inf.  with  suffixes,  etc. 

Note.  The  reason  of  classing  these  nouns  and  Inf.  forms  among 
the  Segholates,  is,  that  in  the  suff.  state,  etc.,  they  conform  altogether 
to  the  model  of  Segholates.] 

[§  369.  Anomalous  plurals  of  Segholates.  Of  these  there  are  a  num- 
ber, which  in  the  plur.  absolute  take  in  the  first  syllable  the  vowel  ap- 
propriate to  the  plur.  construct ;  e.  g.  ^ty.:?  ,  E""?^?  instead  of  D^fty ; 
so  sn*3  ,  tPsatp ;  Tbti) ,  O^lbtZJ ;  vbv  for  IjVi  .  Forms  like  &npv  for 
fi^j^ip ;  tP2in  for  En25h ,  etc.,  sometimes  occur. 

Note.  In  the  plur.  construct,  Daghesh  forte  euphonic  is  not  unfre- 
quent ;  as  *£lm  for  ^n  ,  rnntts  for  niaujy ,  §  77.  Some  other  sin- 
gularities of  particular  words  are  noticed  in  the  lexicons.] 

[§  370.  Segholates  with  a  paragogic  i"l_  .  This  is  appended,  like 
the  light  suffixes,  to  the  original  form  of  the  word  ;  e.  g.  f^N  ,  WpN  ; 
1T1[? ,  JiTrip.;  Vb,  ttbt*ij  ttyjs,  !1733%,  etc.,  the  tone  uniformly  re- 
maining on  the  penult.] 

Seventh  declension. 

§  371.  This  comprises  nouns  with  Tseripure  in  the  ultimate, 
(in  a  few  cases  with  Hholem  pure),  which  are  either  monosylla- 
bic, or  have  the  preceding  vowels  immutable. 

§372.    Changes,     (a)  The  const,  singular  is  generally 

like  the  absolute;  in  a  few  cases  it  exchanges  final  Tseri for 

Pattahh.     (b)   In  case  of  accession,  the  final  Tseri  (and  the 

Hholem  also) generally  falls  away ;  except  in  the  plur.  abs.  of 

monosyllabic  words,      (c)  Before  suffixes  beginning  with  a 

consonant  and  taking  the  tone,  the  final  Tseri  is  shortened  into 

Hhireq,  Pattahh,  or  Seghol,  according  to  the  nature  of  the 

word. 

[§  373.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  This  declension  includes 
most  of  the  active  participles  in  their  masc.  forms,  which  are  declined 
like  6,  c.    The  Part,  of  verbs  b  Gutt.,  are  declined  like  d.     (2)  The 


156  §§  373 — 375.  nouns  ;  dec.  viu. 

forms  like  d,  e,  with  Pattahh  final  (instead  of  Tseri)  in  the  const,  state, 
are  not  confined  to  nouns  5  Guttural,  but  appear  in  several  other  nouns; 
e.  g.  ^BOft  ,  const.  ISOE  .  It  is  peculiar  here,  that  a  number  of  nouns 
which  take  a  final  Pattahh  in  regimen,  throw  away  the  preceding  Pat- 
tahh in  such  a  case,  and  take  a  Hhireq ;  e.  g.  hrjDjg  ,  TlttSE  ;  V^.l^ 
ys*)73  ,  etc.  Probably  this  is  in  order  to  avoid  two  Pattahhs  in  mixed 
syllables  and  in  immediate  succession,  neither  of  which  is  furtive.  (4) 
The  example  e  presents  Seghol  before  the  consonant-suffix  tp. ,  etc. ; 
as  in  some  few  cases  is  the  usage.  (5)  The  final  Tseri*  in  this  Dec.  is 
not  unfrequently  retained,  in  the  plur.  absolute,  as  though  it  were  im- 
mutable. Usually  it  is  retained  in  monosyllabic  words  ;  as  in  the  ex- 
amples a  and  g.     Comp.  §  358.  4. 

(6)  Some  nouns,  as  "S3  ,  ft ,  ntt  (obs.  root),  lose  their  vowel  in  the 
sufF.  state  and  when  they  receive  an  accession,  as  if  they  belonged  to 
this  declension  ;  e.  g.  ^nra,  tF2T ,  tPnfc  . 

(7)  But  few  nouns  which  have  final  Hholem  pure,  are  inflected  in 
the  manner  of  this  declension ;  e.g.  £3  SJS*,  plur.  rribSttto  ;  ^p^p  , 
suff.  fop  HP  •     Peculiar  is  plur.  niftS  ,  plur.  pluralium  trnna  •] 

Eighth  declension. 

§  374.  This  includes  all  nouns,  which  insert  Daghesh  forte 
in  the  final  letter  of  the  ground  forms  when  they  receive  an  ac- 
cession, 

§  375.  Changes,  (a)  The  construct  state  is  generally 
the  same  as  the  absolute;  but  before  Maqqeph,  ultimate 
long  vowels  are  shortened,  (b)  Any  accession  causes  the 
Daghesh  forte  of  the  final  letter  to  appear ;  and  if  such  acces- 
sion takes  the  accent,  the  final  long  vowel  (when  pure)  of  the 
ground-form  is  shortened,  (c)  Penultimate  vowels,  if  muta- 
ble, conform  to  the  rules  in  §  132  seq. 

The  following  classes  of  words  fall  under  this  declension. 

(a)  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  is  ;  as  pn  ,  if  ,  bj  ,  "jn  ,  etc. ;  and 
also  the  participles  of  these  verbs  in  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal.  (b) 
Other  words  in  which  the  penult  letter  is  dropped,  or  assimilated  to 
the  final  one  ;  as  ab  for  isb  ;  Inf.  nflj  for  n?n  ,  etc.  (c)  Some  words 
which  are  primitive,  or  are  derived  from  a  Pilel  form  of  verbs  ;  as  b»2  , 
1%a ,  etc. 


§§  376—379.  nouns  ;  dec.  ix.  157 


[§  376.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  In  a,  b,  c,  the  const,  state  is 
generally  with  Pattahh.  In  a  few  cases  where  the  ground-form  is  as 
D*  ,  Q,amets  is  retained.  (2)  In  c  the  exchange  of  Pattahh  for  Hhireq 
in  the  suff.  state,  e.  g.  173  ,  "^a ,  is  peculiar,  and  is  found  in  but  few 
cases.  (3)  In  c?the  Tseri  sometimes  goes  into  Pattahh,  as  "pD,  133; 
n?  with  suffix  pronoun  makes  39J ,  but  with  ii_  parag.  ttny .  In  like 
manner  Seghol  final  goes  into  Hhireq  short ;  as  bfc*)5,  iba-}3  .  (4) 
Id  e,  fy  the  short  vowels  may  be  either  woro,  §  128  b.  (5)  Poly- 
syllabic nouns  regulate  their  ultimate  and  penult  syllables  in  conformity 
with  the  laws  of  other  declensions ;  as  in  the  cases  g,  h,  the  former,  with 
a  pure  penult  vowel,  the  latter  with  an  impure  one.  (6)  Nouns  of  the 
form  in  t,  make  the  const,  in  *«-,  except  in  the  phrase  JihJT?  *r\. 
Nouns  in  ,,_  double  the  Yodh  when  accession  is  made ;  as  "^b  ,  •T*l"lb  . 

Note  1.  When  the  final  letter  is  a  Resh  or  a  Guttural  and  cannot 
be  doubled,  the  compensation  for  Daghesh  excluded  is  as  usual ;  see 
§112.  This  brings  the  words  in  question  within  other  declensions ; 
e.  g.  Ito  ,  const,  nto  with  light  suff.  ">nuj  (for  "nto  §  112),  plur.  tPniZJ , 
const.  "»niy  etc.  with  Q,amets  immutable,  i.  e.  the  sing,  belongs  to  Dec. 
II.  c,  d,  and  the  plur.  to  Dec.  1.  But  nouns  like  nb  ,  const,  rib  ,  with 
suff.  Tib  plur.  trnb  (for  D^nb  §  112),  belong  to  Dec.  I.,  inasmuch  as 
the  vowel  throughout  is  immutable. 

Note  2.  A  few  nouns  belong  to  this  declension  in  some  of  their 
forms,  and  to  other  declensions  in  others ;  e.  g.  nfij ,  EPS'iya ,  etc. ; 
for  which,  see  the  lexicons. 

General  Remark.  Nouns  of  various  declensions  ai  to  the  vowels,  belong  to  this  declension. 
It  is  only  the  doubling  of  the  final  consonant,  which  makes  the  peculiarity  of  it.  The  vowel- 
changes  are  all  governed  by  laws  belonging  to  the  general  principles  adopted  respectively  in  other 
declensions. 

Ninth  declension. 

§  377.  This  comprises  all  those  words  ending  in  Ti  —  which 
are  derived  from  verbs  %v? . 

§  378.   Changes,      (a)   In  the  const,  singular,  final  Seghol 

is  changed  to  Tseri.      (b)  With  suffixes,  etc.,  the  ending  H- 

is  dropped,      (c)  Penultimate  vowels,  if  mutable,  conform  to 

the  usual  rules  respecting  the  vowel-changes. 

§  379.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  It  is  only  the  final  ending  rt- 
which  characterises  this  declension.  The  penult  vowel  may  be  im- 
mutable,  as  in  a ;  or  mutable,  as  in  6.     It  is  treated  according  to  the 


158  §§  379 — 385.  nouns  ;  dec.  x.  xi. 

general  laws  of  the  vowel  changes.  (2)  With  suffixes,  these  nouns 
imitate  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  throw  away  their 
final  consonant  and  vowel,  as  in  «,  b.  (3)  The  const,  vowel  Tseri, 
(longer  than  the  Seghol  of  the  ground-form),  is  altogether  a  peculiarity 
in  the  phenomena  of  declension. 


NOUNS   FEMININE. 

Tenth  declension. 


§  380.  This  includes  all  nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  Si— , 
when  the  preceding  vowels  are  immutable. 

§381.  Changes.  In  the  const,  state  fi_  becomes  n__; 
before  suffixes  it  becomes  fl-1  or  D- .  The  plural  is  usual- 
ly ni. 

[§  382.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  In  regard  to  the  fem.  ending 
?1_  in  the  abs.  state  ;  although  its  vowel  coalesces  with  a  Quiescent, 
and  on  general  grounds  would  be  immutable,  yet  in  this  case  the  law 
of  the  vowels  yields  to  the  demands  of  case  or  relation,  i.  e.  a  change 
of  the  vowel  is  effected  by  a  more  imperious  law,  which  requires  a 
change  in  order  to  designate  the  relation  in  which  the  noun  in  question 
may  stand  to  other  parts  of  the  sentence  connected  with  it.  (2)  The 
reader  will  see  that  Qamets  is  retained  under  the  penult  letter,  when- 
ever it  stands  in  a  simple  syllable ;  according  to  §  130. 

Eleventh  Declension. 

§  383.  This  comprehends  all  nouns  with  the  fem.  end- 
ing n_  and  a  mutable  Qamets  or  Tseri  in  the  penult  syl- 
lable. 

§  384.  Changes.  These  are  the  same  as  in  Dec  X. ;  ex- 
cept that  here  the  vowel  of  the  penult,  being  mutable,  falls 

away  in  the  const,  state  and  before  suffixes. 

[§  385.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  The  cases  a,  b,  simply  follow 
the  analogy  of  Dec.  X.,  with  the  exception,  that  the  penult  vowel  un- 
dergoes the  mutations  which  the  general  laws  of  declension  demand. 
(2)  In  c,  d,  e,  after  the  penult  vowel  falls  away,  there  would  remain 
two  Shevas  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable ;  which  being  impossible,  a 


§§  385 — 390.  nouns  ;  dec.  xii.  xiii.  159 

new  vowel  arises,  agreeably  to  §  137,  §  138.  (3)  Many  nouns  of  Dec. 
XI.  as  to  the  absolute  state,  out  of  this  state  conform  altogether  to  Dec. 
XIII ;  so  that  only  the  abs.  state  belongs  to  Dec.  XL,  and  all  the  rest 
to  Dec.  XIII.  Such  are  /,  g ;  and  such  are  many  words  which  are 
noted  in  the  lexicons.] 

[§  386.  Remarks.  (1)  Many  fem.  nouns  apparently  belong  here, 
but  in  reality  to  Dec.  X.,  because  the  penult  vowel  is  immutable  ;  e.  g. 
Jibtf  ,  tittrri,  !"&T3  ,  ronra  ,  etc. ;  all  such  a  good  lexicon  notes. 

(2)  A  few  nouns  (by  usage)  are  employed  as  belonging  both  to 
Dec.  X.  and  XI. ;  e.  g.  nD^  const.  DD? ,  with  suff.  ViS^  Dec.  X. ;  so 
iibnD ,  with  suff.  ^nb^D  Dec.  X.,  but  commonly  the  const,  is  as  nbiq  , 
with  suff.  TnbaD ,  etc.,  of  Dec.  XI.  The  lexicons  should  designate 
such.] 

Twelfth  declension. 
§  387.  This  Includes  all  those  fem.  nouns  in  fj_  which  are  de- 
rived from  Segholates  of  Dec.  VL 

Note.  The  feminine  ending  is  attached  to  the  original  masc.  form 
of  the  Segholate,  as  1]\h  ,  original  form  -^73  ,  fem.  nsbtt;  so  that  these 
nouns  have  the  appearance  of  belonging  to  Dec.  X. 

§388.  Changes.  Nouns  belonging  here  are  declined  ex- 
actly like  those  of  Dec.  X.  in  the  singular ;  but  the  plural  con- 
forms to  the  model  of  the  plurals  in  Dec.  VI. 

§  389.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  The  example  a  is  a  derivate  of 
the  A  class  of  Segholates ;  b,  c,  of  the  E  class ;  d}  of  the  O  class. 
(2)  The  form  in  e  exhibits  the  effects  of  Ayin  Guttural  upon  the  vowel- 
points  of  a  word. 

Remark.  There  is  a  number  of  nouns  which  in  appearance  belong 
to  this  declension,  e.  g.  tl}273  ,  tTN^E  ,  etc.,  but  which  in  reality  belong 
to  Dec.  X.  The  plural  at  once  distinguishes  them  ;  e.  g.  plur.  rni2273 , 
not  ni  12273  ,  etc.,  as  it  would  be  in  Dec.  XII.] 

Thirteenth  declension. 

§  390.  This  includes  all  fem.  Segholates  in  n_T  and  ru ; 

i.  e.  all  those  which  have  a  tone  on  the  penult  and  a  furtive  vowel  in 

the  final  syllable. 

Note.  The  furtive  vowel  here  is  Seghol  or  Pattahh  ;  and  as  it  is 
factitious  it  appears  only  in  the  abs.  and  const,  state.    The  original 


160  §§391 — 395.  nouns;  dual  number,  etc. 


vowel  reappears,  as  in  Dec.  VI.,  whenever  the  word  receives  any  ac- 
cession. All  fem.  Infinitives  and  participles  in  D—  or  D-.  fall  under 
this  declension. 

§391.  Changes.  The  sing,  number  is  declined  as  in  Dec. 
VI.  The  plur.  absolute  is  quite  anomalous,  sometimes  drop- 
ping the  original  final  vowel  of  the  ground-form,  and  some- 
times retaining  it. 

[§392.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  The  example  a  exhibits  the 
manner  of  Segholates  belonging  to  the  A  class  ;  6,  c,  those  of  the  E 
class  ;  d,  e,  those  of  the  O  class,  whose  short  vowel  may  be  short  o  or 
u.    (2)  The  fem.  Inf.  const,  forms  are  declined  as  iny,  g,  h. 

Remark.  Some  nouns  of  the  E  class  take  Pattahh  in  the  syllable 
which  precedes  a  suffix;  e.  g.  njp\Tn ,  *W$|^J  Inf.  form,  nsip,  "»fc3J$, 
Ps.23:6.] 


NOUNS  OF  THE  DUAL,  NUMBER. 

[§  393.  These  are  exhibited  in  Par.  XXVII.  {a)  From  the  para- 
digm it  appears,  that  the  construct  state  of  the  dual  is  the  same  as  that 
of  the  plur.  masc.  in  &*1-  .  To  this  form  the  grave  suffixes  are  attach- 
ed, as  in  the  plural ;  see  §  344.  (6)  The  dual  in  general  causes  the 
same  contraction  of  the  vowels  of  the  sing,  ground-form,  as  the  plural ; 
but  in  Dec.  VI.,  the  contraction  is  still  greater ;  e.  g.  *p.z  ,  dual 
tP'Snfe ;  the  plur.  would  be  D*5na  . 

Note.  There  are  but  a  few  nouns  of  the  dual  form.  Dec.  IX.  ex- 
hibits none.  Of  those  that  actually  occur,  some  have  no  singular ; 
others  have  no  construct  form.  The  nouns  frhp  and  B*fjg  are^of  the 
dual  form,  but  are  used  as  plurals.] 


ANOMALOUS  NOUNS. 

[§394.  Such  are  n« ,  m ,  iru§,  nirm,itf»&,  tt»tf,:TtfN,  rpa, 
*??.>  K|»  Wi,  t"\  "*3,  tP».,  "TO,  MS, 'dan;  the  peculiar  derivate 
forms  of  which  the  lexicon  exhibits.] 


NUMBERS. 

§  395.     Cardinal  numbers,    (a)  From  1  to  10  the  form  of  cardinal 
numbers  have  the  distinction  of  gender,  and  generally  also  that  of  the 


§§  395.  396.     CARDINAL  NUMBERS,  ETC.  161 

abs.  and  const,  states.  From  3  to  10  however,  the  primitive  forms  are 
of  the  fern,  gender;  while  the  derivative  forms  (in  n_  and  n_)  are  of 
the  masc.  gender. 

(b)  From  11  to  19,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  of  the  compound  form, 
i.  e.  they  are  made  up  by  joining  the  word  I  toy  in  the  masc,  and 
t"pttDy  in  the  fem.,  to  the  units.  These  numerals  thus  formed  have  no 
const,  state,  but  are  put  in  apposition  with  other  nouns,  or  are  used 
adverbially. 

Note.  The  words  ^lipy  and  JTlfeMJ  are  found  only  in  the  above 
connections,  and  are  evidently  derived  from  "\Jgy  ten;  somewhat  like 
the  termination  -teen  for  ten  in  the  English  thirteen,  fourteen,  etc. 

(c)  From  20  to  90,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  the  plural  forms  of  the 
corresponding  units ;  except  that  the  form  for  20  is  the  plural  of  the 
form  for  10.  All  these  are  of  common  gender,  and  have  no  construct 
state. 

Note.  When  intermediate  units  are  to  be  expressed,  they  may 
either  precede  or  follow  the  tens;  as  trypan  ynip=y:r!zh  th*&6 
=77. 

(d)  Hundreds  are  expressed  by  the  plural  of  the  word  SlN/3  preceded 
by  the  nine  units;  thousands,  by  the  plural  of  t\bh  with  the  same 
units  ;  ten  thousands  in  a  similar  manner  by  the  forms  of  tt5S*i ,  i2n 
or  ttian  ;  see  in  the  Par.  under  D.  E. 

Note.  In  expressing  a  sum  of  hundreds,  with  intervening  tens  and 
units,  the  smaller  numbers  may  either  precede  or  follow  the  hundreds ; 
as  HWJ  nKJai  Wd  &*•#)  D,,fittj=l62  years,  Gen.  5 :  18 ;  or  uibsJ 
traaJi  tryatt)  niN73=372,  Ezra  2  :  4.  The  latter  mode  prevails  in  the 
later  Hebrew. 

In  expressing  thousands  with  additional  smaller  numbers,  the  for- 
mer are  placed  first;  as  D^ab^n  ni&ttj  afeftjl  B^bfil  n3tatt)=8580. 
Num.  4 :  48.] 

[§  396.  Ordinal  numbers.  The  ordinal  numbers  extend 
only  from  two  to  ten.  Beyond  this  last  number,  and  some- 
times also  below  it,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  as  or- 
dinals. 

The  ordinals  are  derived  from  the  cardinals  by  annexing  to  them 
the  termination  \ .  Most  of  them  likewise  insert  *»_  before  the  final 
letter  of  the  ground-form. 

Note.    The  ordinals  sometimes  have  a  fem.   form   in  n\ ,  and 
21 


162  §§  397 — 399.  numerals — adjectives. 


sometimes  in  ir*_  .  In  this  shape  they  are  commonly  employed  to 
denote  a  numeral  part ;  as  mn"to  ,  the  tenth  part.] 

[§  397.  Notes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  The  class  A  exhibits  the  usual 
forms  of  the  cardinals  from  one  to  ten.  The  fern.  nfrN  is  for  n^na ;  see 
§  107.  2.  The  form  JT.Vp  is  dual,  as  if  from  fljj ;  the  fern.  XPPti  (for 
J3?h?tp)  is  also  dual,  as  from  an  obsolete  root  TC0  .  The  Daghesh  in 
S^IREJ  is  regarded  as  Daghesh  lene,  or  rather  as  a  Daghesh  compensative 
for  the  3  which  is  dropped.  (2)  There  is  a  dual  form  of  masc,  cardinals, 
which  is  used  adverbially  ;  as  trn3|33J  sevenfold,  Gen.  4  :  15,  24,  etc. ; 
D"ihy2p$  fourfold,  2  Sam.  12  :  6.  (3)  The  plurals  of  some  of  these 
forms  likewise  appear  ;  as  IWllfr  ,  Gen.  27  :  44  ;  ni'lto?  tens,  Ex.  18  : 
21,  25,  etc.  (4)  A  few  of  these  cardinals  are  also  found  with  suffixes  ; 
as  IJftgti  ,  both  of  us ;  EpttUiVii ,  ye  three,  quasi  trias  vestrum. 

(5)  The  class  B  presents  the  forms  of  cardinals  from  eleven  to  nine- 
teen. Those  for  eleven  and  twelve  have  two  forms  ;  and  S"1:;^  and  E^ttip 
coincide  with  the  Aramaean  dual.  The  form  "\p9  r»3fatt3 ,  eighteen, 
occurs  once,  Judg.  20 :  25.] 

[§  398.  Method  of  notation.  The  Hebrews  made  use  of  the  letters 
of  the  alphabet  in  order  to  denote  numbers.  Like  the  Greeks,  they 
divided  the  letters  (including  the  final  ones)  into  three  classes ;  of 
which  the  first  denotes  units,  the  second  tens,  the  third  hundreds. 
After  400  the  final  letters  were  sometimes  employed  for  further  desig- 
nation. To  express  thousands  and  higher  numbers  they  began  the  al- 
phabet anew,  placing  two  dots  over  each  letter.  When  more  than  one 
letter  was  employed,  the  accent  called  Garshayim  or  double  Geresh 
was  sometimes  used  to  mark  them  as  numerals.  In  designating  com- 
posite numbers,  the  letters  which  represent  the  larger  numbers  are 
placed/rs*;  as  )DSn=429  ;  n*5n=4898  ;   fbqN=1837. 

Note.  Fifteen  is  denoted  by  IB  =9+6=15  ;  never  by  !T  ,  because 
this  last  is  a  contraction  for  the  word  7l)p1 .] 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  399.  Hebrew  adjectives  have  no  peculiar  and  appro- 
priate forms,  but  only  such  as  are  common  to  nouns.  The 
fem.  form  of  the  adjective  is  derived  from  the  masculine, 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  fem.  nouns,  §  323.  The  dual 
number  does  not  occur  here. 

Whatever  has  been  said  of  the  forms  of  nouns,  in  the  preceding  sections,  applies  also  to  adjec- 
tives ;  so  that  the  latter  do  not  need  to  be  treated  of  separately. 


§§  400 403.  PARTICLES — ADVERBS.  163 

Note.  Comparison  in  adjectives  is  formed  by  periphrasis,  for  which 
see  §  454  seq.  The  const,  state  of  adjectives  appears  most  frequently 
when  they  are  used  as  nouns,  or  before  a  noun  expressed  or  understood ; 
as  n?-' nur  the  upright  of  heart,  Ps.  7:  11. 


PARTICLES. 

§400.  Under  the  general  appellation  of  particles,  are 
comprehended  adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  inter- 
jections. 

§401.  Like  nouns,  some  of  these  are  primitive,  but  most 
of  them  derivative.  Of  the  derivates  some  have  an  ending 
appropriated  solely  to  the  form  of  particles,  as  DDfttf  truly, 
from  ]t)fc  truth  ;  while  most  retain  the  form  of  verbs,  nouns, 
or  pronouns. 

Note  1.  Compound  words  are  more  frequent  among  particles,  than 
among  the  leading  parts  of  speech.  Apocope  is  also  more  common  ; 
for  all  the  prepositions,  etc.,  which  consist  of  only  one  letter,  are  doubt- 
less apocopated  words  ;  as  b  for  bN  ,  "12  for  ]72  ,  etc. 

Note  2.  The  older  grammarians  have,  for  the  most  part,  considered 
all  the  particles  as  derivative  nouns;  but  this  is  hardly  probable,  as 
primitives  are  found  in  all  other  parts  of  speech.  It  is,  however,  very 
difficult  to  draw  the  exact  line  between  the  primitive  and  derivative 
forms,  as  the  etymology  is  often  much  obscured  by  the  changes  which 
the  particles  have  undergone. 


ADVERBS, 


[§  402.  Some  derivative  adverbs  have  appropriate  endings ;  e.  g.  (a) 
In  tl_  ;  as  D37pfij  truly,  from  )12&  truth.  (6)  In  D-  ;  as  fifcns  sudden- 
ly, from  5R5  the  wink  of  an  eye.  (c)  In  T)**-. ;  as  rpati} ,  a  second  time, 
(d)  In  %. ;  *n«  ,  from  TN  then.} 

[§  403.  Many  derivative  adverbs  have  the  forms  of  other  parts  of 
speech ;  e.  g.  (a)  Of  nouns  with  a  preposition  ;  as  tP3B*j  before,  rP3fc 
within,  etc.  (b)  Of  nouns  in  the  Accusative,  either  sing,  or  plural  ; 
as  sing,  no h  securely,  plur.  D',"y£",ft  uprightly.  Some  of  these  forms 
are  no  longer  used  as  nouns  ;  e.  g.  ]?*  not.  (c)  Of  adjectives ;  as  masc. 
Sita  well,  fem.  rt^rttt  quickly,  plur.  rntf^ia  fearfully ;  in  the  const. 


164  §§  404—407.  prepositions. 

state,  nsn  much.  These  are  used  in  a  neuter  sense,  like  multum,  noXXcc, 
etc.  (d)  Of  the  Inf.  absolute,  especially  in  Hiphil ;  as  1^1  again,  lit- 
erally redeundo,  T^n  much,  lit.  multiplicando ,  HSflf*!  earfy.  Some- 
times with  a  preposition ;  as  ^T\\  abundantly,  (e)  Of  pronouns  {  as 
Ht  Ziere,  rift  /jow,  etc.] 

[§404.  Some  adverbs  are  compounded  of  other  words,  (a)  Of  pre- 
positions and  adverbs;  as  ]3"i>§  wherefore,  ^Ztir-^y  how  long?  (b) 
Of  two  adverbs;  as  rfWt  where,  from  "W  and  ns  ,  etc.] 

[§  405.  Several  adverbs  receive  after  them  verbal  suffixes  ;  in  which 
connection  the  suffixes  are  generally  in  the  Nom.  case;  e.  g.  *»jP9. 1 
[am]  yet,  Wli?  he  [is]  yet;  IS^K  7«e  [is]  wo£;  1*N  w/jere  [is]  Ae  ?  Gen. 
3:  9,  hfc*«  (for  *J*K)  wAere  [art]  Mow  ?  The  suffixes  are  usually  those 
which  have  an  epenthetic  Nun,  and  which  belong  to  the  Fut.  tense.] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


[§  406.  Four  prepositions,  3  ,  3,  b ,  a  (*a),  consisting  of  only  one 
letter,  are  united  with  the  words  which  they  govern.  Probably  they 
are  all  derivates  of  roots  which  were  of  a  more  complete  form.  This 
is  certain  as  to  72  (which  comes  from  ]a),  and  probable  as  to  the  oth- 
ers ;  see  the  articles  in  the  lexicon.  For  the  various  vowel  pointing  of 
these  prepositions,  see  §  152,  b.] 

[§  407.  Derivative  prepositions  making  words  by  themselves,  (and 
most  of  them  are  of  this  kind),  have  the  forms  of  other  parts  of  speech  ; 
viz.  (a)  Of  nouns  sing,  in  the  Ace.  case,  or  const,  state;  as  "]$\  causa, 
on  account  of,  \fi  before,  nnn  under,  etc.  (6)  Of  nouns  plural  in 
the  const,  or  stiff,  state  ;  as  bfi$  ,  to,  for,  *\&  poetic  ;  "ja ,  nsa ,  etc.  Se- 
veral prepositions  take  suffixes  of  such  a  form  as  are  usually  attached 
to  the  plural,  as  well  as  such  as  are  attached  to  the  singular  ;  as  nnn, 
T>nfi,  VRnPj,  but  also  with  sing.  surf.  DFiHiy,  so  Tb$ ,  to  him,  etc. 
In  like  manner  b*  upon,  plur.  const.  %gj  poetic,  with  suff.  ■%£  ,  §■£$  , 
&5*fet«  (c)  Of  nouns  in  the  const,  state  with  prefix-prepositions ;  as 
1-3  by,  \&  before,  etc.  (d)  Of  adverbs  with  prefix-prepositions  ;  as 
r$3,  ^nb:b  without,  taa  since,  etc.  (e)  Of  adverbs  followed  by  a 
preposition,  so  as  to  denote  but  one  idea ;  as  \  3^0  around,  b  b*» 
above,  )72  fin  without,  etc.  (/*)  Of  a  double  preposition  ;  as  Sra/rom 
with,  |*jfl|  between,  nWh  bfc  zmder ;  like  the  French  d5  aupres,  de  chez. 
ig)  Of  a  paragogic  letter  or  suffix,  viz.  n_  towards,  to;  as  iiaip 
towards   Sodom,   ttSSj*  to  Me  ground,  etc.      So  also  M_  and   J"l_," 


§  408.    PREPOSITIONS. 


165 


in  a  few  cases ;  as  n:\o  to  Syene,  Ezek.  29:  10 ;  !t23  to  Nob,  1  Sam. 
21:2. 

Note.  Prepositions  take  noun-suffixes,  in  the  manner  of  both  sing. 
and  plur.  nouns ;  very  seldom  are  verbal-suffixes  appended  to  them, 
like  "•rrcftn,  n|nnft ,  *yr& ,  etc.] 

[§  408.  Several  prepositions  and  particles  are  united  with  the  pro- 
nouns in  a  peculiar  way.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  view  of  these 
peculiarities. 


3 
i 

b 

(ins)  3 
■was 

15 

"^ 

■fc 

<15>*! 

W« 

SJ1H3 

(\fc»)  MiJ 

!R 

* 

Wi 

13 

\\ 

5ni^3 

in S73  »       *  • 

rta 

T 

nb 

rrias 

T      *      • 

132 

W§ 

13ia3 

13  an 

b$a 

"  T 

(D3ia3)  E33 

B$$ 

wi 

m 

W 

C3 

iab,  cnb 

ens  0ri3  Brria3 

( ansa )  n-.a 

(JS=)  ]n3 

(i^)inV 

m 

ntf  of  the  Ace. 

nN  tffiVA. 

(*jn&)  ^nfc       tt?fp|>  csnfc 

W»              WW 

nnfc         infc,  "jnnN 

( *jntt )  %p*          tern 
ina            cna 

»                                                     »      » 

iVirfes  on  the  paradigm.  (1)  The  sufF.  *j  sometimes  takes  the  parag. 
n-;  e.g.  n33=^3  ,  rp^=^b  , etc.  (2)  Before  suff.  pronouns  3  requires 
the  parag.  ia  as  a  union-syllable  ;  as  in  the  table.  (3)  )12  becomes  "jaa 
(=ia:a  ,  i.  e.  "ja  doubled)  before  most  of  the  pronouns;  not  before  all, 
e.  g.  0373=t33;a  etc.  (4)  n»  the  sign  of  the  A  ecus.,  (also  standing 
sometimes  before  other  cases,  §  427.  Note  2),  in  union  with  pronouns, 
usually  assumes  the  form  nfc,  or  (as  it  is  often  written  plene)  nitf. 

(5)  nN  {with)  appears  to  be  derived  from  ri3N  ,  which  is  a  derivate  of 
1-T3N  to  approach;  see  Ges.  Lex.  It  is  imitated  throughout,  in  its 
Daghesh  and  its  mode  of  taking  suffixes,  by  D?  with ;  as  ^a*,  Tja* ,  etc. 


166  §§  408 410.   CONJUNCTIONS — INTERJECTIONS. 


Through  negligence  perhaps  of  transcribers,  it  appears,  in  the  books 
of  Josh.,  Kings,  Jer.,  and  Ezek.,  in  the  same  form  as  niN  of  the  Ace, 
when  this  is  written  defectively  and  joined  with  pronouns ;  e.  g.  ^n&, 
nnfc,  Qnfc,etc. 

Note*  The  parag.  forms,  nan,  Srrsn,  take  prepositions  without 
change ;  as  tt^ha ,  nsiia ,  iiahtt  ,  etc.] 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

[§  409.  Of  primitive  conjunctions  there  are  only  a  few  ;  and  most 
of  these  are  monosyllabic.  Derived  conjunctions  have  the  forms,  (a) 
Of  pronouns  ;  as  TiJtt  (*tU  ),  because,  that,  like  on,  quod,  etc.  (6)  Of 
pronouns  preceded  by  prepositions ;  as  T£ja—|52  because,  "T^WIJ 
until,  etc.  (c)  Of  a  double  conjunction  ;  as  *3  Sa  although;  &K  TS  but, 
unless.]  

INTERJECTIONS. 

[§  410.  Interjections  being  exclamations  expressive  of  joy  or  sorrow, 
are  for  the  most  part  primitive. 

Derived  interjections  have  the  forms,  {a)  Of  verbs  in  the  Impera- 
tive, both  of  the  sing,  and  plur.  forms  ;  as  !"Dn  age !  plur.  toft  ,  from 
Sijji  Dm  hush,  be  still,  plur.  IDm  in  Piel,  from  MDft ;  Plfi<n  Idov,  eccef 
(6)  Of  nouns;  as  ^ypto  O  the  blessedness  of!  fib^Tl  far  be  it  from, 
God  forbid !  in  enough,  hold  ! 

Note.  The  interjection  MSfi  takes  after  it  verbal  suffixes  in  the 
Nona,  case ;  as  ^\r\,  na\rt  ecce  ego!  ^fl  ecce  tu !  etc.] 


PART  IV. 


SYNTAX. 

In  the  syntax  the  etymological  arrangement  is  not  followed,  but  that 
which  is  most  convenient  and  simple  in  the  natural  order  of  sentences. 


ARTICLE. 

I.  The  article  in  Hebrew,  like  that  in  Greek,  seems  ori- 
ginally to  have  been  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  this,  that ;  and 
sometimes  to  have  been  used  also  as  a  relative  pronoun ;  in 
both  which  senses  it  is  often  employed  in  our  present  Heb. 
Scriptures;  see  §412.   Note  1. 

Insertion  of  the  Article. 
§  41 1.  In  general  the  Hebrew  article  (§  162),  like  the  in 
English,  is  used  in  speaking  of  a  definite,  before-mentioned, 
well  known,  or  monadic  object. 

E.  g.  -Jtart  the  king ;  Gen.  2 :  7,  Cifijrr  the  man  before  mentioned ; 
•^73'in  the  sun  ;  Y""?Nn  the  earth,  etc. 

Note.  In  poetry,  definite  objects  are  often  designated  without  the 
article ;  as  Ps.  48  :  3,  '  the  city  In  S|^q  of  the  great  king  $  Ps.  72 :  1. 
In  a  similar  manner  the  earlier  Greek  poets  omit  the  article  where  the 
Attic  prose  writers  insert  it. 

§  412.  The  article  is  commonly  (but  not  always)  used  in  cases  such 
as  the  following,  viz. 

(a)  Before  a  noun  in  the  Genitive,  when  the  first  noun 
requires  the  article ;  and  thus  it  renders  definite  the  whole 
expression. 

E.  g.  Vl^vJ  ^.^  Me  ti*g*  of  the  land;  n^n^n  *t$jj|  the  men  of 
war,  i.  e.  the  warriors. 

Note.  The  article  after  1:3,  all,  the  totality,  deserves  special  notice. 
When  it  stands  before  the  noun  following  ^3  ,  it  there  designates  a  to- 
tality embracing  the  whole  ;  e.  g.  yjNH-bS  all  the  land,  finKJi-b?  all 


168  §  412.  syntax  ;  article. 

men.  But  when  the  article  is  omitted  before  such  noun,  the  *:3  means 
every,  any,  every  or  any  hind  of;  e.  g.  ]3N|~b3  ,  every  hind  of  stone, 
1  Chron.  29 :  2 ;  W-bs ,  any  thing,  Judg.  19  :  19;  a"p-b33  at  every 
time,  always. 

(b)  Before  a  generic  noun  or  noun  of  multitude. 

E.  g.  SttHn  Me  wicked,  p**[^ft  Me  righteous,  n33>33S3  Me  Canaanite, 
l3?V\B?*tt  Me  wicked,  Ps.  1  : 4.  And  this  principle  extends  to  inanimate, 
as  well  as  to  animate  things ;  e.  g.  Gen.  13:2,'  Abraham  was  rich  in 
Me  cattle,  Me  silver,  and  Me  gold,'  3m  la5)  £)033  !"i:pa3 .  These  were 
well  known  and  definite  objects. 

(c)  Before  generic  nouns,  when  used  with  a  particular, 

individual  signification. 

E.  g.  Ifjsn  Me  river,  i.  e.  the  Euphrates ;  la'iBn  Me  desert,  i.  e.  the 
Arabian  desert ;  ]t3^fT  Me  adversary,  i.  e.  Satan,  6  didfloXog. 

(d)  Often  before  the  Vocative. 

E.  g.  trjbrcn  O  heavens  !  ST  fi  O  sea  !   Frequently  omitted  in  poetry. 

(e)  Not  infrequently  is  the  article  used  before  proper 

names  of  rivers,  mountains,  and  towns,  when  the  names  are 

used  with  special  reference  to  their  appellative  meaning. 

E.g.  'Ifc^il ,  Me  Nile,  properly  Me  stream;  "pas^ri  Me  Lebanon,  prop. 
Me  white  [mountain].  But  such  a  use  of  the  article  is  not  very  fre- 
quent in  prose  ;  still  less  so  in  poetry. 

Cy)  Before  participles  used  in  the  sense  of  verbs,  and 

before  verbs  also,  the  article  is  employed  in  the  sense  of  a 

pronoun  relative ;  see  under  I.  above. 

E.  g.  JOiTafl ,  who  brought  [thee]  out,  ^pSn'l  and  who  redeemed 
thee,  Deut.  13  :  6.  So  in  Deut.  13  :  11.  8  :  14—16.  20  :  1,  et  al.  saepe. 
So  also  Jos.  10  :  24,  '  the  warriors  who  went  with  him,7  nPiK  fiWDbttn  : 
Judg.  13:  8,  'the  child  which  is  born,'  tV}*»1,  etc. 

Note  1.  The  article  (as  noted  in  I.  above)  is  sometimes  used  also 
as  a  pronoun  demonstrative ;  e.  g.  ftfajj  this  day,  nblbn  this  night, 
tDyEti  this  time. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrews  sometimes  joined  the  article  with  a  noun 
which  we  should  use  in  an  indefinite  signification  (prefixing  the  article 
a  or  an);  e.  g.  1  Sam.  17 :  34,  *ngn  a  lion;  Num.  11  :  27,  ^ili  a 


§413.  syntax;  article. 


youth, ;  Ex.  2  :  15,  "W3n  a  well,  etc.  So  in  Is.  7 :  14,  riEbsrj  may,  in 
conformity  with  such  usage,  be  rendered  a  virgin  and  not  the  maiden, 
as  Gesenius  and  others  have  translated  it.  It  should  be  remarked 
however,  that  we  can  hardly  believe  the  Hebrew  article  to  have  been 
employed  in  cases  where  to  the  mind  of  the  writer  the  object  was 
wholly  indefinite;  e.g.  Gen.  19:  11,  'he  smote  them  KfrrtpQB  (for 
&n-p:0n3  )  with  blindness ;'  not  a  blindness  (as  we  might  say),  but  the 
blindness,  i.  e.  the  disease  of  blindness;  just  as  we  say,  the  pestilence, 
the  plague,  etc. 

In  particular  we  may  note,  that  the,  Hebrews  employed  the  article 
where  we  do  not, 

(a)  In  comparisons ;  e.  g.  Is.  1 :  18, '  Although  your  sins  are  as  the 
scarlet  (  D'WS^trSttJnS ),  they  shall  be  white  as  the  snow ;  if  they 
are  red  like  the  crimson,  they  shall  become  as  the  wool.'  Ps.  49  :  21. 
Is.  24  :  18.  34 :  4,  '  they  [the  heavens]  shall  be  rolled  up  as  the  book  f 
al.  saepe. 

(b)  In  abstract  nouns  of  a  generic  nature;  e.  g.  Is.  29 :  21, '  they 
bring  down  the  righteous  by  the  falsehood,'  ^rin^  ;  Is.  60  :  2,  '  behold 
the  darkness  J  ^nn )  shall  cover  the  people.'  See  also  Gen.  19:  11, 
as  above. 

Where  a  properly  indefinite  sense  is  designed  to  be  expressed,  the 
article  is  omitted  ;  as  Job  1:1,'  there  was  UTN  a  man.1 

Note  3.  The  indefinite  article  a  or  an,  is  sometimes  expressed 
by  nntf  one;  as  1  Sam.  1:1,'  there  was  nfrK  ttJ^B  a  man,'  etc.  1  Sam. 
16  :  18.  25  :  14.  Job  2  :  10.  Ex.  29:  3.  1  K.  19  :  4.  This  con- 
struction is  usual  in  Chaldee  and  Syriac.  So  in  Greek,  Matt.  21  :  19, 
avxij  fiiu,  a  Jig-tree  ;  Mark  14  :  51,  elg  tig  veavioxog,  a  certain  young 
man,  etc. 

Omission  of  the  article. 

§  413.  It  is  omitted,  in  general,  when  the  object  is  in- 
definite, general  or  common,  not  well  known,  nor  before 
mentioned.      In  particular, 

(l)  Proper  names, especially  those  of  persons, countries, 
and  nations,  frequently  omit  it. 

There  are  so  many  exceptions  to  the  omission,  that  it  can  by  no 
means  be  regarded  as  a  general  principle  of  the  language.     Thus  rns 
the  Euphrates  always  omits  the  article,  but  77."\a_rj  the  Jordan  almost 
22 


170  §§  413,  414.  syntax  ;  article. 

always  has  it.     So  "l:"lD  Sinai,  "p"^  Sion,  etc.,  are  always  without  it ; 
but  jtaaVrn  Lebanon,  h^-)?-  Carmel,  etc.,  usually  with  it. 

(2)   It  is  omitted  before  a  noun  in  the  const,  state  followed 

by  a  Genitive ;    for  the  Gen.  of  itself  makes  the  preceding 

noun  definite. 

E.  g.  rrHn'1  11t  the  word  of  Jehovah,  instead  of  Slim  "Din  .  But 
there  are  some  exceptions  here,  which  shew  that  the  usage  is  variable. 
Thus,  (a)  When  the  following  Gen.  is  a  proper  name  which  excludes 
the  article,  the  first  noun  may  take  it;  as  Gen.  31:  13,  VNprPa  bttn  , 
the  God  of  Bethel;  Gen.  24:  67,  n*Tto  rr?rT&TT ,  to  the  tent  of  Sarah, 
(b)  So  where  two  Genitives  come  together ;  as  Ezek.  45:  16,  E2H  ^3r 
y^&WT  ,  all  the  people  of  the  land,  (c)  In  some  other  cases  also,  it  is 
used  before  the  first  noun  without  any  such  reasons ;  e.  g.  s;tzj  n:'n3ri , 
the  coat  of  fine  linen,  Ex.  28:  39  ;  nU3fl3?j  fr:2T;2fr  the  altar  of  brass, 
2  K.  16:  14.  Jer.  32:  12  (comp.  v.  11).  Ps.  123:  4.  In  most  cases  of 
such  a  nature,  the  Genitive  relation  that  follows  is  designated  by  !? , 
§421.d. 

(.3)   Before  a  noun  which  has  a  suffix  pronoun. 
But  here  also  the  article  is  sometimes  used,  especially  before  a  word 
in  the  Genitive,  or  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  etc. ;  as  Josh.  7:  21,  ^jina 
^Nn,  in  the  midst  of  my  tent,  Mic.  2:  12.  Lev.  27:  23. 

(4)  Before  the  predicate  of  a  sentence  it  is  more  usually 
omitted ;  but  still,  it  is  often  inserted  when  definiteness  is  re- 
quired. 

E.  g.  'Yet  is  the  day  bl*T3  ,  much,'  i.  e.  much  remains,  Gen.  29:  7. 
So  in  Is.  5:  20.  et  al.  saepe.  On  the  other  hand,  if  definiteness  or  em- 
phasis is  demanded  in  the  predicate,  it  can  take  the  article ;  e.  g.  Ex. 
9:  27,  '"Jehovah  is  just  (p",'7^r?  the  just  one),  and  I  and  my  people  are 
ffVti  in ,  the  wicked:     Num.  3:  24.  Gen.  45:  12,  al. 

General  Remark.  In  all  the  cases  where  the  article  is  omitted,  and  in  which  the  object  still 
is  definite,  either  the  nature  of  the  thing  itself,  or  of  its  adjuncts,  marks  that  definiteness.  E.  g. 
in  No.  I.  above,  a  proper  name  makes  the  noun  definite;  in  No.  2,  the  following  Gen.  makes  it 
definite  ;  in  No.  3,  the  pronoun  does  this  ;  and  so  in  other  cases  of  omission  which  from  their  na- 
ture are  definite.  The  reader  wilt  see,  moreover,  that  there  are  scarcely  any  cases  in  which  the 
amission  of  the  article  is  uniformly  a  matter  of  necessity. 

Article  before  adjectives. 
§414.    (l)  In  general  where  a  noun  has  the  article,  the 


§§414 — 415.  syntax;  nouns.  171 


adjective  or  pronoun-adjective  agreeing  with  it,  must  also 

have  the  article. 

E.g.  Gen.  10:  12,  n^VttQ  T^n  the  great  city;  Num.  11:34, 
Wnri  uipizn  ,  this  place.  But  this  principle  is  not  uniform  ;  for  some- 
times the  noun  has  an  article,  and  the  adjective  omits  it ;  as  Gen.  29: 
2,  nbi"W  fn^n  ,  the  great  stone;  2  Sam.  6:  3,  *T£hn  llb^n  ,  the  new 
wagon. 

(2)  The  article  is  usually  omitted  before  adjectives,  (a) 
When  the  noun  to  which  the  adjective  belongs  omits  the 
article;   e.g. 5]*lV^  ^OMj  «  tame  lamb,  etc. 

Note.  But  when  the  noun  omits  an  article  required  by  the  sense, 
merely  through  the  influence  of  a  suffix  pronoun,  or  of  a  Gen.  which 
follows  it,  the  adjective  which  belongs  to  it  may  still  take  the  article ; 
as  2  Chr.  6:  32,  bil^  ^EU  ,  thy  great  name;  Deut.  11:  7,  ni££tt 
^iiari  h"}*?* ,  the  great  work  of  Jehovah. 

(6)   When  the  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  a  sentence,  the 

article  is  usually  omitted. 

E.g.  DVfbNn  aitt,  God  is  good,  nirt^  QUJn  Sflrt^,  the  name  of 
Jehovah  be  blessed.     Comp.  §  413.  4. 

N.  B.  Practice  is  not  uniform  in  regard  to  the  article,  in  any  of  the 
cases  under  §  414.  Instances  are  not  rare,  where  the  noun  omits  the 
article  (without  any  of  the  reasons  for  it  assigned  in  §  413  above),  and 
the  adjective  still  has  it ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  19:  22,  biian  ^12,  the  great 
cistern ;  Jer.  36:  14.  46:  16.  50:  16,  etc.  In  some  cases  apparently 
of  this  nature,  the  article  may  be  rendered  as  a  pronoun ;  e.  g.  tTja 
J-nrnn ,  [like]  '  a  wall  which  is  tottering/ 


NOUNS. 

Case  absolute. 
§415.  By  this  is  meant,  the  case  of  a  noun  or  pronoun 
which  stands  in  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  without  any  verb 
or  predicate  directly  belonging  to  it.  The  case  absolute 
is  more  commonly,  but  not  always,  of  the  form  of  the 
Nominative. 


172  §§  416 — 419.  syntax  ;  nouns. 


§  416.  Modes  of  construction,  (a)  When  the  noun  in  the  case  ab- 
solute is  the  real  object  of  the  sentence  which  follows,  a  Vav  copula- 
tive succeeds  it ;  as  Job  36  :  26,  -ij3ft  &]  VXD  ""1B0E  ,  '  as  to  the  num- 
ber of  his  years,  surely  there  is  no  computation,'  i.  e.  his  years  cannot 
be  computed.  (6)  The  case  absolute  is  sometimes  used  where  the 
sense  requires  an  oblique  case ;  and  then  the  oblique  case  is  most  com- 
monly made  by  a  pronoun,  e.  g.  Ps.  18  :  31,  i3")i  tTEFi  £|jj  "  *  as  to 
God,  perfect  is  the  way  of  him,'  i.  e.  the  way  of  God  is  perfect,  where 
as  to  the  sense  the  Gen.  of  rtf"  is  required.  This  oblique  case  may  be 
the  Accusative,  Ps.  74  :  17,  Ern:^  RRN  S)"}rn  y^'as  to  summer 
and  winter,  thou  hast  made  them.'  So  Jer.  6  :  19,  Fia  *06J»*3  Vpjn  , 
'  as  to  my  law,  they  have  abhorred  it.'  (c)  Sometimes  a  participle  is 
joined  with  the  Norn.,  like  the  Engl,  case  absolute  ;  as  1  Sam.  2 :  13, 
l"Dt  ip^fipfeS  nil,  '  any  man  offering  a  sacrifice,  the  servant  of  the 
the  priest  came,'  etc.     1  Sam.  9:11.  Gen.  4  :  15.  Prov.  23  :  24. 

NOTE.  Pronouns  are  often  found  in  the  case  absolute,  as  well  as  nouns. 

§  417.  The  case  absolute  is  sometimes  made,  [a)  by  the  Ace. ;  as 
Gen.  47  :  21,  fi^n-ntt,  '  as  to  the  people,  he  led  them  from  one  town  to 
another.'  So  in  Ezek.  10  :  22,  CniNT  &rp«-}E,  as  to  their  appearance 
and  themselves.  (6)  In  effect,  although  not  formally,  by  the  Dat. ;  as 
Ps.  16  :  3,  E^jnip.b  ,'  as  to  the  saints  who  are  in  the  land,  all  my  de- 
light is  in  them.'  See  the  same  or  at  least  the  like  sense  to  fc  before 
nouns,  in  Ezek.  10  :  13.  Gen.  31 :  43.  1  Sam.  9  :  20.  (c)  By  the  Abl. ; 
as  Gen.  2  :  17,  2"]}  nit:  nr-n  yyq  ,  lin  respect  to  the  tree  of  knowledge 
of  good  and  evil,  thou  shalt  not  eat  of  it,'  etc.  Or  this  construction  may 
be  referred  to  the  principle  noticed  in  §  543. 

CASES  RELATIVE. 
§.418.  Declension  in  the  Latin  or  Greek  sense  of  the 
word,  the  Hebrew  has  not.  The  case  of  a  noun  is  marked 
therefore,  as  in  English,  either  by  the  relation  which  it 
sustains  to  the  sentence, as  subject, object,  etc.;  or  by  its  re- 
lation to  some  specific  part  of  it, as  regimen  or  const,  state; 
or  by  prepositions  connected  with   it,  either  expressed  or 

understood. 

Nominative  case. 
§  419.   This  is  generally  known  by  its  being  the  subject 
of  a  sentence. 


§§  419.  420.  syntax  ;  genitive  case.  173 

Such  a  subject  may  be  either  one  noun  or  several,  either  sing,  or 
plural ;  and  the  nouns  may  be  of  the  ground-form,  or  in  the  state  of 
regimen  which  belongs  to  all  cases,  §  434. 

Note.  The  natural  order  of  position  in  a  sentence  is  subject,  cupula, 
predicate,  or  subject,  verb,  object.  Adverbial  qualifications  may  precede 
or  follow  the  verb  ;  negatives  stand  before  it. 

But  the  Hebrews  were  not  obliged  to  follow  this  order ;  and  most 
usually  the  subject  follows  the  verb.  Still,  whenever  a  Hebrew  wished 
to  render  prominent  any  particular  word  in  a  sentence,  he  could  place  it 
first;  e.  g. 

{a)  A  verb ;  as  9Vfi  ....  ^03 ,  lit.  there  jlee  .  ...  the  wicked.  So  in 
Is.  13  :  22,  et  al.  saepe.  Specially  does  the  verb  take  the  leading  place, 
when  a  second  declaration  is  attached  to  a  preceding  one  by  i ,  ''S , 
or  Tul;N  ;  as  Gen.  3  :  1,  'Now  the  serpent  was  more  cunning  than  all 
the  beasts  TVVTP  ?lto2  "N^N,  which  Jehovah  had  made.'  Gen.  2  :  5,  et 
al.  saepe. 

(6)  An  Adjective ;  which,  when  a  predicate,  always  stands  first ;  as 
MjltfJ  WO  ,  good,  [is]  Jehovah. 

(c)  The  object;  as  Is.  18 :  5,  ni;  rr^n-;  bpH  "!?3,  a  ripening  grape 
becomes  thejlower,  i.  e.  the  flower  becomes,  etc. 

{d)  Adverbial  qualifications ;  as  rPCJfiTia,  Gen.  1:1;  isn?  T8  then 
said  he,  Jos.  10  :  12.     So  Judg.  5  :  22,  et  al.  saepe. 

Genitive  case. 
§  420.   This  is  most  commonly  made  by  a  noun  or  ad- 
jective  preceding  it  in  the  const,  state,  §  322  seq.      The 
noun  itself  which  is  in  the  Genitive  undergoes  no  change 
of  form. 

Note.  The  Gen.  is  nearly  always  placed  immediately  after  its  ante- 
cedent, i.  e.  the  noun,  etc.,  which  causes  it  to  be  put  in  the  Genitive  ; 
but  in  a  few  cases,  some  word  closely  connected  with  the  clause  is  in- 
serted between  the  Gen.  and  its  antecedent.  Thus  Gen.  7  :  6,  ^2X3 
tT73  Fpn ,  a  flood  of  waters  was,  [Heb.  a  flood  was  of  waters] ;  Hos. 
14  :  3,  \)%  KirrrblD ,  thou  wilt  forgive  all  transgression,  [Heb.  all  thou- 
wilt-forgive  transgression]  ;  Is.  40 :  12.  Job  15  :  10.  Is.  19 :  8.  One 
can  scarcely  refrain  from  believing  that  such  cases,  so  contrary  to  the 
common  usage  of  the  Hebrews,  must  have  originated  from  error  in 
transcribing. 


174  §§  421.  syntax  ;  genitive  case. 

§  421.  Besides  the  usual  method  of  expressing  the 
Genitive,  as  designated  in  §  420,  it  is  often  marked  by  the 
particle  *? ,  to,  belonging  to,  of;  in  a  few  cases  by  the  parti- 
cle JB . 

In  many  cases  the  expression  of  a  Gen.  is  needed,  where  no  noun 
preceding  it  in  regimen  is  employed,  or  where  the  usual  form  of  re- 
gimen would  mark  a  closer  connection  than  the  writer  designed,  or 
where  the  preceding  noun  is  so  conditioned  as  to  render  the  usual  form 
of  regimen  undesirable  or  inexpedient.  In  all  such  cases,  the  Hebrews 
usually  expressed  the  Genitive  by  the  use  of  b; .  E.  g. 

(a)  Where  the  preceding  noun  is  omitted ;  as  T)*Tb  ,  [a  psalm]  of 
David,  (this  is  called  b  aucloris);  so  where  ]3  (son)  is  omitted,  as 
JlbJSb  tJJprY%  Ithream,  [the  son]  of  Eglah.  But  see,  under  the  gen- 
eral Remark  at  the  close. 

(6)  Where  the  first  noun  is  an  indefinite  one,  the  second  a  definite 
one  ;  as  *4hb  ]3  a  son  of  Jesse,  (**tt$*-*pg  would  be,  the  son  of  Jesse). 

2  Sam.  9:3.'  1  K.  2  :  39.    2  Sam.  2  :  8  blKtib "tip ,  a  leader  of 

SauVs.  Is.  37  :  13.  Num.  1 :  4. 

(c)  When  several  nouns  follow  each  other  in  succession,  where  the 
sense  of  the  Gen.  is  required,  it  is  usual  to  put  h  before  the  second 
Gen.  case ;  e.  g.  Wftb  n*1feKj  ^Rbft ,  a  field-portion  of  Boaz  (in  the 
const,  state  it  would  mean,  a  portion  of  the  field  of  Boaz),  Ruth  2  :  3. 

Note.  In  such  cases,  however,  TiJN  is  very  often  inserted  be- 
fore the  b  ;  e.g.  Ruth  4  :  3.  Gen.  41  :  43.  Cant.  1 :  1.  Ezra  1 :  5. 
Judg.  3  :  28.  12 :  5.  1  K.  15  :  20.  22  :  31,  et  saepe.  See  General  Re- 
mark below. 

[d)  As  the  article  is  usually  omitted  before  the  first  of  two  nouns  in 
regimen  (§  413.  2),  so  where  it  is  inserted  because  the  sense  impe- 
riously demands  it,  the  following  Genitive  is  usually  made  by  b.  ,  in  or- 
der that  the  form  of  regimen  may  be  dispensed  with  in  respect  to  the 
first  noun.  E.  g.  1  K.  4  : 2,  ib  T£N  tPnWn  ft%»  ,  these  are  the  princes 
which  were  his  (Solomon's) ;  1  Chron.  11 :  10,  T*Hb  "lfSJt  D^foto, 
the  heroes  who  were  Davids.  1  Chron  11:11.  27  :  31.  Ruth.  2:  21. 
2  Sam.  14  :  31.  Gen.  24  : 9.  47 :  4,  et  alibi  saepe. 

NOTE.  In  nearly  all  cases  of  this  nature,  the  article  is  expressed  before  the  preceding  noun. 
In  poetry  there  are  a  few  exceptions,  by  virtue  of  poetic  license. 

(c)  When  a  Genitive  by  anticipation  precedes  its  natural  place,  it  is 
made  by  b ;  e.  g.  Jer.  22  :  4,  iaD3  b3>  11  $g ,  lit.  of  David  on  his  throne, 
i.  e.  on  the  throne  of  David. 


I , 


§§  421 — 423.  syn-tax  ;   genitive  case.  175 

(/)  When  an  Adjective  intervenes  between  the  first  and  second 
noun  ;  e.  g.  ^"jbEpfrNb  Tntt  "j3  ,  a  son  of  Ahimelek ;  especially  after  a 
numeral,  as  Hag.  1:1,  UJV'Tlb  S"]PR0  r&$3j  »  *w  '^e  second  ?/ear  of  Da- 
rius. Gen.  7:  11.  1  K.  3:18.' 

(g)  In  designating  time,  after  a  numeral  when  ni"*  etc.  is  omitted; 
Deut.  1 :  3,  tf*jft?  infi*3  ,  on  the  first  [day]  of  the  month.  Ezek.  1 :  2. 

(A)  In  describing  the  materials  of  which  a  thing  consists ;  e.  g. 
Ezek.  1:11,  nnirb  D^3 ,  vessel  of  gold.  Lev.  13  :  48. 

(*)  .4s  to  ]7Z  ,  it  denotes  the  Gen.  of  origin  only  ;  as  fi^a  roifi  ,  ^e 
reproof  of  you ,  i.  e.  which  proceeds  from  you,  Job  6:  25.  But  see  Prov. 
26 :  7  for  a  more  direct  Genitive. 

General  Remark.  It  will  be  seen  by  a  careful  inspection  of  the 
above  examples,  that  the  Hebrew  very  often  admits  a  Gen.  relation  to 
be  expressed,  without  the  form  of  regimen.  Strictly  speaking,  however,, 
there  is  no  case  of  this  sort  which  does  not  admit  of  another  solution, 
viz.  one  which  resembles  the  Greek,  Latin,  and  French  methods  of  ex- 
pressing possession  or  property;  e.g.  iaxl  (tot,  est  mihi,  c'est  a  moi. 
The  later  Hebrew,  which  frequently  employs  b  T£K  to  express  a  Gen. 
relation,  proffers  the  solution  in  question.  Thus  JIVJ&  is  an  elliptical 
expression  for  Tllb  T&J*  "VlbfBj  *P*\  ]3  is  used  instead  of  ^SJtt  ]3 
!*jjj*b  ;  bisrcjb  tPoilKj  the  watchers  which  belonged  to  Saul,  is  used  for 
b'lNtfb  ITT  T£8  KTOixft ,  etc.  The  very  frequent  cases  where  Ttftf  is 
actually  employed  in  this  way,  point  us  of  course  to  such  an  obvious 
solution. 

As  to  the  b  auctoris  (a  above),  however,  Gesenius  solves  it  by  ren- 
dering b.  by,  through,  thus  designating  the  efficient  cause  ;  which  seems 
to  be  well  supported  by  analogies.  See  his  Lex.  art.  \  ;  and  see  on  b 
before  the  causa  efficiens,  Ges.  on  Is.  28 :  2. 

§  422.   In  Hebrew,  the  Gen.  frequently  stands  where  we 

might  naturally  expect  apposition. 

E.  g.  nnss  ^n: ,  the  river  of  Euphrates,  i.  e.  the  river  Euphrates  ; 
1  K.  10 :  15,  E'nfln  "•'Osr.K  ,  the  men  of  the  merchants,  i.  e.  the^merchant- 
men. 

§  423.  The  Gen.  frequently  follows  such  adjectives  or 
participles  as  express  qualities  belonging  to  the  subject  desig- 
nated by  such  Genitive. 

E.  g.  2  Sam.  4  :  4,  iS^n  MM  lame  of  feet,  i.  e.  in  his  feet ;  Ps.  24  : 


176  §  424.  syntax  ;  genitive  case. 

4,  ftjia  "JM ,  pure  of  hands,  i.  e.  of  pure. hands  ;  Prov.  6  :  32,  nb.-'iqft 
deficient  of  [in]  understanding.  So  in  Latin,  integer  vitae  scelerisque 
purus,  etc. 

§  424.    Various  significations  of  the  Genitive,     This  case 

marks  a  great  variety  of  relations  and   dependencies  in 

Hebrew. 

Note.  These  are  generally  comprehended  in  the  designations,  Gen. 
of  the  subject  and  Gen.  of  the  object.  But  these  two  designations  do 
not  by  any  means  convey  an  adequate  idea  of  all  the  various  relations 
which  the  Gen.  sustains  or  expresses.  These  may  be  better  dis- 
tributed thus:  viz.  (1)  Genitive  of  the  subject ;  e.g.  J"P!"P  nEft,  the 
anger  of  Jehovah,  i.  e.  the  anger  which  he  feels,  or  of  which  he  is  the 
subject.  This  use  of  the  Gen.  is  frequent.  (2)  Genitive  of  the  ob- 
ject; e.  g.  Prov.  1  :  7,  Hipp  VWV\ ,  the  fear  of  Jehovah,  i.  e.  the  fear  of 
which  Jehovah  is  the  object ;  Prov.  20  :  2,  ^ba  nfa^tt  ,  the  terror  of  the 
king,  i.  e.  the  terror  of  which  the  king  is  the  object,  (this  may  also  be 
ranked  under  No.  5) ;  ^plDT;  the  memory  of  thee,  i,  e.  of  which  thou  art 
the  object.  This  class  of  meanings  is  of  wide  extent.  (3)  The  Genitive 
of  possession,  not  merely  as  property,  but  as  quality,  attribute,  etc.  etc.; 
e.  g.  rtjrw  "V 1  the  hand  of  Jehovah,  i.  e.  which  belongs  to  him ;  Tn  tfw , 
the  soul  of  David  ;  of  wide  extent.  (4)  The  Genitive  of  material ;  e.  g. 
fflgD  "^3 ,  vessels  of  silver,  i.  e.  made  of  silver,  Ex.  11:2.  (5)  The  Gen- 
itive of  cause  (Genitivus  auctoris) ;  1  Sam.  14  :  15,  D^rfbfit  TFHtn  ,  the 
terror  of  God,  i.  e.  which  God  inspired,  or  of  which  he  is  the  author  ; 
Ezek.  12  :  19,  D^ip^rr  orft ,  the  injury  of  the  inhabitants,  i.  e.  the  in- 
jury of  whicrrthe  inhabitants  were  the  cause  or  authors.  There  is  a 
great  variety  of  shades  under  this  head  of  meaning.  (6)  The  Genitive 
of  consequence ;  e.  g.  Ezek.  35  :  5,  yp  ji  *,  the  sin  of  the  end,  i.  e  the 
sin  which  is  followed  by  consummation  or  destruction.  (7)  The  Gen. 
of  special  relation;*  e.  g.  Is.  54  ;  9,  ft:  "^  ,  the  waters  of  Noah,  i.  e.  to 
which  Noah  stood  related,  viz.  as  described  in  the  history  of  the  flood, 
or  waters  in  the  time  of  Noah  ;  1  Sam.  16  :  26,  Qh^  "nttlrr,  the  ass  of 
bread,  i.  e.  the  ass  which  carries  bread.  There  is  a  great  variety  of 
shades  in  the  meanings  here,  (8)  The  Genitive  of  quality ;  e.  g. 
n*3N  ^"^N  words  of  truth,  \.  e.  true  words.     This  is  a  widely  extended 

All  Genitives  express  relation,  and  this  name  might  therefore  be  given  to  all. 
But  as  more  specific  names  are  here  assigned  to  other  Genitives,  I  have  used  the 
words  special  relation  to  designate  a  sui  generis  connection  which  1  can  find 
no  other  words  satisfactorily  to  express. 


§§  425 — 427.  syntax  ;  dative  and  accusative  cases.       177 


usage  ;  see  §  445.  Other  divisions  of  meaning  conveyed  by  the  Gen. 
might  be  added ;  but  these  are  the  leading  ortes.  The  attentive  reader 
of  the  Scriptures  will  soon  find,  that  the  Genitivus  subjecti  et  objecti  is 
very  far  from  expressing  all  relations  designated  by  this  case ;  and,  in- 
deed, no  formal  divisions  can  reach  all  the  niceties  of  the  examples 
which  now  and  then  occur.  Almost  every  and  any  kind  of  relation  of 
one  thing  to  another,  is,  in  fact,  expressed  by  the  Genitive  case. 

§425.  Sometimes  the  Genitive  following  an  adjective  is 
used  as  a  noun  of  multitude,  and  the  adjective  then  denotes 
and  characterizes  a  part  of  this  multitude. 

E.  g.  Prov.  15:  20.  21:  20,  tm  VD3  ,  the  foolish  of  men,  i.  e.  fool- 
ish men  ;  1  Sam.  17:  40,  '  five  tP:2kN  "^Vrj  ,  smooth  of  stones,'  i.  e. 
smooth  stones;  Job  41:  7,  D^B  "lp.*,DN  ,  the  strong  of  shields,  i.e. 
strong  shields. 

Dative  case. 

§426.    This  case  is  marked  by  7  signifying  to  or  for. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  cases  b  seems  to  stand  before  a  Norn. ;  as  1  Chr. 
3:  2,  ■  the  third  was  Dirraas  ,  Absalom'  But  see  another  solution  of 
this  in  Ges.  Lex.  bt,  A.  at  the  close  of  No.  4.  Sometimes  before  the 
Ace.  j  as  Ezra  8:  16,  '  I  sent  nT^N^. ,  Eliezer.'  Lam.  4:  5.  1  Sam. 
3:  30.  Job  5:  2.  Is.  8:  1.  The  latter  usage  is  common  in  Syriac.  See 
Ges.  Lex.  here,  under  b  ut  supra. 

Note  2.  The  Dative  case  is  very  common  after  the  verb  S"Plri 
either  implied  or  expressed,  when  it  signifies  possession,  belonging  to ; 
like  sum  put  for  habeo  in  Latin. 

Accusative  case. 

§  427.  This  is  sometimes  designated  by  ntf ,  T)ft$ ; 
otherwise  it  is  without  any  distinctive  sign. 

Note  1.  The  use  of  nfij  with  the  Ace.  is  limited,  (a)  To  nouns 
with  the  article.  (6)  To  nouns  having  a  Gen.  or  suffix  after  them, 
(c)  To  proper  names.  Consequently  it  is  used  only  in  cases  where  a 
definite  idea  is  conveyed  by  the  noun.  But  in  poetry,  the  use  of  DN  as 
above  is  not  observed  with  any  strictness. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  nsj  is  used,  as  it  is  commonly  said,  before  the 
Nom. ;  as  2  K.  6:  5,  bT-ia-ruVi ,  and  the  iron  fell  into  the  water.' 
Especially  before  the  Nom.  of  passive  verbs  ;  as  Gen.  17:  5,  5jnil5~n*$  | 
23 


178        §§  427,  428.  syntax  of  nouns  ;  accusative  case. 

'  thy  name  shall  no  more  be  called  Abram.'  Sometimes  it  stands  be- 
fore the  Nom.  of  neuter  verbs;  as  2  Sam.  11:25,  rPf.ri  "Q^ft-nif  ,  '  this 
matter,  may  it  not  displease  thee  ;'  Ezek.  35:  10,  tPian  "^"Titt  ,  '  the 
two  nations  are  mine.'  See  ntt  in  the  Lex.  All  these  and  the  like 
cases,  however,  may  be  solved  by  supposing  the  case  absolute  to  be 
employed,  and  then  to  make  the  Nom.  of  the  verb  which  follows  by 
supplying  the  pronoun,  as  usual. 

§  428.  Use  of  the  Accusative  case.  This  commonly,  as  in 
other  languages,  denotes,  (l)  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb. 
(2)  In  a  great  number  of  eases  it  forms  adverbial  designa- 
tions of  time,  place,  measure,  etc.  (3)  It  is  also  used  in  all 
those  cases  where  the  Greeks  understand  naid,  and  the 
Latins,  secundum,  quoad,  etc. 

Note  1.  No.  1  needs  no  illustration.  As  to  No.  2,  we  may  note, 
(a)  Place  whither ;  as  2  Chr.  20:  36,  B'flKn  n^b  ,  to  go  to  Tar- 
shish.  (b)  Place  where  ;  as  Gen  18: 1,  bnan-nns  ,  at  the  door  of  the 
tent,  (c)  Time  when  and  how  long;  as  Z-)?  ,  in  the  evening ;  Ip/l, 
in  the  morning  ;  and  so  Gen.  27:  44,  D^irjtf  b*jQi  t  during  certain  days. 

(d)  Measure ;    as  Gen.  7  :  20,  J  the  waters  rose  fifteen  H72N  cubits.' 

(e)  The  material,  from  which  any  thing  is  made  ;  as  Gen.  2:  7,  '  God 
formed  man  "is:?,  of  dust  from  the  earth ;'  §  511.  Note. 

As  to  No.  3,  there  are,  (f)  Many  cases  like  those  where  xaTa  is 
said  to  be  implied  in  Greek  ;  as  1  K.  16:  23,  '  lame  Tb^-ntt  as  to  his 
feet ;'  Ps.  3:  8,  '  thou  hast  smitten  all  thine  enemies  Ifch  ,  as  to  [on] 
the  cheek  bone.1  (g)  Also  many  cases  where  a  noun  is  taken  in  an  ad- 
verbial signification;  as  Deut.  23:24,  Jin^D  voluntarily;  Ezek.  11: 
19,  nrtN  lb ,  unanimously  ;  Ex.  24:  3,  nfrN  bip  unanimously,  etc. 

Note  2.  If  the  student  will  but  note  the  extent  of  these  usages  of 
the  Ace,  he  will  easily  solve  cases  where  the  prepositions  seem  to  be 
needed;  e.g.  Bnsi3 ,  as  in  their  pastures,  Is.  5:  17,  Ace.  designat- 
ing place  where.  So  as  to  time ;  tn  ""S  as  on  the  day,  *g'»3  as  in  the 
days  of,  fa'Vti  as  in  the  months  of.  So  ihn  ynB3  as  in  the  wide 
wall-breach  (place),  Job  30:  14;  ODSS  as  in  chains,  Prov.  7:  22.  Is. 
29:  7.  Job  38:  14. 

N.  B.  It  will  be  very  convenient  to  name  these  various  cases,  the  Ace.  of  ■place  ;  of  time  ;  of 
quantity  ;  of  material  ;  of  manner.  The  student  has  only  to  recollect  that  all  these  are  desig- 
nated by  the  Ace;  and  this,  without  its  bearing  a  special  relation  to  any  active  verb. 

(4)    The  Accusative  is  sometimes  put  after  participles, 


§§  429 — 432.  syntax  ;  construct  state.  179 

or  verbals  with  an  active  signification,  and  is  governed  by 
them. 

E.  g.  2  K.  4:  1,  rnrTJ-ntf  **•£,  fearing  Jehovah;  Is.  11:  9,  !W 
!"ni"p-ntf  ,  the  knowledge  of  Jehovah,  lit.  to  cognoscere  Jehovam,  as 
rw  is  the  fern,  form  of  the  Infinitive. 

Vocative  and  Ablative. 

§  429.  The  Vocative  sometimes  has  the  article  to  desig- 
nate it;  but  not  always.  It  can  be  distinguished  only  by  the 
sense  of  the  passage. 

§430.   The  Ablative  case  takes  ^Djrom,  out  of;    2  tVi, 

by;  DP  with,etc.      In  many  cases,  the  preposition  is  merely 

implied. 

Note.  It  is  probable  that  the  Hebrews  regarded  the  nouns  follow- 
ing JzJ ,  1 ,  tO> ,  etc.,  as  being  in  the  Genitive,  because,  in  their  origin, 
nearly  all  the  prepositions  of  this  nature  were  nouns. 

Construct  state. 

§  431.  A  noun  is  said  to  be  in  this  state,  when  it  precedes 
another  noun  in  the  Genitive.  This  rarely  admits  of  any  in- 
tervening word,  §  420.  Note. 

As  to  the  changes  in  the  form  of  the  noun  in  the  const,  state ;  see 
§  333,  seq. 

§  432.  Theform  of  the  const,  state,  however,  is  not  limit- 
ed to  nouns  before  a  Gen.  case ;  it  often  appears,  (a)  Be- 
fore nouns  in  other  cases  governed  by  prepositions,  (b)  Be- 
fore verbs  and  parts  of  sentences  which  express  the  same 
sense  as  nouns  might  express,  (c)  Before  adjectives,  (d) 
Before  "VON .      (e)   Before  1  copulative. 

(a)  Before  nouns  governed  by  prepositions ;  e.g.  (1)  Nouns  with 
2?;  Is.  9:  2,  "1^2  nftEitt ,  the  joy  in  [ofj  harvest ;  Is.  5:  11,  'WDaJfc 
"^*2l ,  who  rise  early  in  the  morning.  (2)  With  b  ;  as  Is.  56:  10, 
tnib  %t*  ,  lovers  of  slumber.     (3)  With  b$  ;   as  Is.  14:  20,  ^V , 


180  §§  432—434.  syntax  ;  construct  state. 

'■ril— £>Mrbfc$  ,  going  down  to  the  stones  of  the  pit  (4)  With  ntf  ;  as 
Jer.  23:  92,  the  Levites  *ftfc  Tntttt  ,  who  served  me.  (5)  With  pD ; 
as  Jer.  23:  23,  ninjvTJ  ^n/btt  ,  a  God  near  at  hand.  (6)  With  *&  ;  as 
Judg.  5:  10,  ^fT!""' 5  "*5Vn '",  wAo  g-o  on  tfie  way. 

(6)  Before  verbs  and  parts  of  sentences*  expressing  ideas  that  might 
be  designated  by  nouns  ;  as  1  Sam.  25:  15,  tsm  laaVnnn  hj*^  all 
the  days  of  our  walking  with  them,  where  *%*  is  in  the  const,  state  be- 
fore the  verb  that  follows.  Job  f8:  21, 1:2*  J^  Kb  triptt  ,  the  place  of 
him  who  knows  not  God.  Is.  29: 1,  TH  n:ft  n"-]p  ,  the  city  of  David's 
dwelling.  The  like  in  Lev.  14:  46.  Is*.  30:29.  Hos.  1:2;  also  in  Ex. 
6:  28.  Lev.  7:  35.  Num.  3:  1.  Zech.  8:  9.  Jer.  31:  2.  48:  36.  Lam.  1: 
14.  Ps.  81:6.  Jer.  50:31. 

(c)  Before  adjectives;  as  2  K.  12:  10,  inK.  "ji"!^,  one  coffer  (comp. 
§  440.  a) ;  Is.  17 :  10,  B^ttya  *?d: ,  pleasant  plants ;  see  §  445. 
§440. 

(d)  Before  "VJjNt  ;  as  Lev.  4:  24,  T£tt  Bi.pB  ,  the  place  which.  Gen. 
40:3.     See  also  1  Sam.  3:  13. 

(e)  Before  "l  copulative ;  as  Is.  33 :  6,  fj£in  riEDtt  ,  wisdom  and 
knowledge.     So  also  Is.  35:  2.  Is.  51:  21. 

§433.  In  a  few  cases,  the  const,  form  seems  to  be  em- 
ployed where  we  might  naturally  expect  the  absolute. 

But  most  of  these  are  cases  of  such  a  nature  as  to  shew  that  some 
noun  in  the  Gen.  after  such  const,  form  is  implied,  although  not  express- 
ed. E.  g.  2  K.  9:  17,  '  I  see  n>D;2) ,  a  multitude,'  i.  e.  the  multitude  of 
Jehu,  as  the  preceding  part  of  the  verse  shews.  Ps.  74:  19,  '  give  not 
f1!^  j  to  the  beasts,'  i.  e.  to  the  beasts  of  the  forest  ("i?^)  or  t0  tne 
wild  beast.  Both  of  these  cases,  however,  may  be  mere  examples  of 
the  unusual  fern,  in  n^ ;  see  §  319.  Note  1.  No.  3.  So  in  Ps.  16:  3, 
Yy*7fi5  is  probably  for  Y"!Nn  ^"V^tf  ,  which  may  easily  be  supplied  from 
the  preceding  part  of  the  verse. 

Note.  Vice  versa,  the  absolute  state  is  sometimes  employed  where 
the  construct  might  be  used,  and  where  we  should  naturally  expect  it. 
E.  g.  in  Is.  28:  1;  W212V)  is  absolute  although  followed  by  a  Genitive  ; 
and  so  in  Is.  10:  12,  nnb.  abs.  form  with  a  Gen.  after  it ;  also  fr*fc  in 
1  Chron.  9:  13,  and  perhaps  tontoa  in  Is.  32:  13.  In  such  cases  the 
absolute  noun  indicates  only  a  subordinate  idea,  and  may  usually  be 
rendered  as  an  adjective. 

§  434.    Const,  state  or  regimen  has  reference  solely  to  the 
relation  of  the  two  nouns,  etc.,  connected   together  in  this 


§§  434,  435.  syntax  ;  apposition.  181 


state ;  but  not  to  the  relation  these  may  sustain  in  regard  to 

the  rest  of  the  sentence. 

Hence  the  const,  state  is  found  in  all  the  cases  of  nouns  ;  e.  g.  (a) 
In  the  Nom. ;  as  1  K.  12:  22,  Durban  TBfl  ,  *  the  word  of  God  came 
to  Shemaiah.'  (b)  In  the  Gen. ;  as  Job  12:  24,  J"JK5j-t£  %*h  ib, 
the  heart  of  the  princes  of  the  people  of  the  land;  where  V£N^  is  in  the 
Gen.  in  regard  to  Sb  ,  and  in  the  const,  as  it  respects  W  ;  while  fi^  is 
in  the  Gen.  with  regard  to  "♦ayfch »  ana*  in  the  const,  as  it  respects 
Y"?Nn  .  (c)  In  the  Dat. ;  as  Job  3:  20,  tD$|  !*3$j ,  to  those  who  are 
grieved  in  spirit,  where  the  former  word  is  in  the  const,  state  and  Da- 
tive, (d)  In  the  Ace. ;  as  1  Sam.  9: 27,  '  that  I  may  shew  thee  ^JM-THJ , 
E^rybN  the  word  of  God,1  where  *Q*j  is  in  the  const,  state  Accusative, 
(c)  In  the  Voc. ;  as  2  K.  1:  13,  0Vibi*n  O^l ,  O  man  of  God.  (/) 
In  the  Abl. ;  as  Ps.  17: 4,  T*5*$  ^&T»  i  °V  the  word  of  thy  lips,  where 
the  first  noun  is  in  the  const,  state  Ablative. 

Apposition. 

§  435.  In  Hebrew,  two  nouns  designating  the  same  thing 
are  not  only  placed  in  apposition  (as  is  usual  in  other  langua- 
ges), but  apposition  is  frequently  employed  where  the  Gen. 
might  be  used  and  would  naturally  be  expected. 

E.  g.  Prov.  22:  21,  n»N  fi^lflS  i  words  [which  are]  truth,  i.  e.  words 
of  truth;  Zech.  1:  13,  tPJOJH  ta"1-)!^  ,  words  [which  are]  consolations, 
i.  e.  words  of  consolation  ;  Ex.  24:  5,  tFttbuj  WnSl ,  offerings  [which 
are]  peace  offerings. 

NOTE.    Of  two  nouns  thus  placed,  one  is  frequently  used  as  an  adjective  ;  as  in  the  examples 
above  we  may  render  true  words,  consolatory  words,  etc.    See  $  440  seq. 

§435  a.  Nouns  are  apparently  but  not  really  in  apposi- 
tion, which  designate  weight,  measures,  time,  etc. 

E.  g.  2  K.  7:  1,  rkjb  nNp  ,  a  seah  [of]  fine  meal;  2  K.  5:  23,  fifj^SS 
p)D2>,  two  talents  [of]  silver;  Gen.  41:  1,  ff*£  Q?n;;»  ,  two  years  [of] 
time;  IK.  7:42,  p^ftfi  fiT)"P".?2*ti  iwo  rows  [°f]  pomegranates; 
Ezek.  22:  18,  S)p3  DMO  ,  dross  [of]  silver.     Comp.  §  463. 

N.  B.  In  these  instances  the  second  nouns  are  all  in  the  Ace.  of  measure,  material,  time,  man- 
ner, etc. ;  comp.  $  428.  N.  B. 

Note.  Some  examples  occur  of  apparent  apposition,  in  which  the 
latter  noun  is  probably  to  be  considered  as  in  the  Gen.,  by  reason  of  a 


182    §§  436,  437.  sxntax  ;  gender  and  number  op  nouns. 

word  implied;  e.  g.  nifiOX  [*tfygi}  ft}?*} ,  Jehovah  [God  of]  hosts.  So 
probably  Is.  30:  20,  ynb  ["*a]  tyi ,  water  [water  of]  trouble ;  nan 
TCtf  [nan] ,  the  glow  [the  glow  of]  his  anger.  So  Judg.  5: 13,  tPn^N 
E3> ,  the  nobles  [of]  Me  people,  where  "^"^N  is  mentally  repeated  before 

Gender  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

§  436.  The  Hebrew,  having  no  neuter  gender,  commonly 
employs  the  fem.  to  express  it ;  but  sometimes  the  masculine, 
§  321.  Note  1. 

E.  g.  Ps.  27:  4,  !  I  have  asked  nn_tf  ,  one  thing;'  Ps.  12:  4,  niito , 
great  things  ;  Gen.  42:  30,  nVu3j3  ,  hard  things,  etc.  Things  without 
life,  and  abstract  nouns,  usually  take  the  fem.  form.  But  to  the  first  of 
these  there  are  many  exceptions.  Less  often  is  the  masculine  employ- 
ed ;  as  Prov.  8:  6,  ST?^  ,  noble  things. 

Note  1.  The  fem.  is  sometimes  used  also  in  a  collective  sense  for 
objects  which  are  properly  masculine;  as  Mic.  1:  11,  12,  ni'dji"1 ,  in- 
habitress,  i.  e.  inhabitants ;  Mic.  7  :  8,  10,  hS^M  ,  enemies.  So  yy  a 
tree,  n£S>  a  grove  of  trees,  etc.  So  in  Arabic,  the  pluralis  fractust 
which  is  used  as  a  collective,  very  often  has  a  fem.  form. 

Note  2.  In  like  manner  the  fem.  designating  office  or  rank,  is 
sometimes  employed  to  designate  the  person  who  holds  such  office  or 
rank  ;  e.  g.  TitTD  Pasha  or  governor,  nbnp  preacher,  concionator. 

Number  of  Nouns. 

§  437.  (l)  The  Hebrews  often  employed  nouns  sing,  in  a 

collective  sense,  especially  national  denominations. 

E.  g.  Jpht  small  cattle,  am  gold,  yggf\  the  Canaanite,  i.  e.  the  in- 
habitants of  Canaan,  etc. 

(2)  For  the  sake  of  emphasis,  the  Hebrews  commonly 

employed  most  of  the  words  which  signify,  Lord,  God,  etc., 

in  the  plur.  form,  but  with  the  sense  of  the  singular.      This  is 

called  pluralis  excellentiae. 

Examples,  (a)  *pitf  lord,  is  so  used  in  all  the  forms  of  the  plural, 
except  *2*T«|  my  masters.  The  form  ^1N  (with  Q,amets)  is  always  used 
in  the  sense  of  the  singular,  for  God.     (6)  nibN  God,  in  all  the  forms 


§§  437,  438.  syntax  ;  peculiar  signification,  etc.        183 


of  the  plural,  (c)  b^S  lord,  in  all  its  forms,  (d)  filiip ,  the  most 
Holy  One,  Hos.  12:  I.  Prov.  9:  10.  30:  3.  Josh.  24:  19.'  (e)  *$D  the 
Almighty,  is  probably  of  the  plural  form,  §  325.  b.  (f)  CSpFi  house- 
hold god,  as  sing.  1  Sam.  19:  13,  16.  (g)  Occasionally  a  few  other 
words  are  used  in  the  like  way  ;  as  Job  35  :  10,  '  God,  "»ti5h> ,  my 
Maker;'  Ecc.  12:  1,  SpJ^i,  thy  Creator.  See  also  Is.  22:  11.  42:  5. 
Ps.  149:  2.     Comp.  §  484/ 

(3)  The  plural,  especially  in  poetry,  is  not  unfrequently 

used  where  we  might  expect  the  singular. 

E.  g.  Job  6:  3,  !  the  sand  D^za^  ,  of  the  seas,7  i.  e.  of  the  sea.  Even 
where  only  one  can  possibly  be  meant,  is  this  the  case  ;  as  Judg.  12: 
7,  '  he  was  buried  "'"isa  ,  in  the  towns  of  Gilead,'  i.  e.  in  a  town  ;  Gen. 
8:  4,  '  the  ark  rested  ^nn  b?  ,  on  the  mountains  of  Ararat,'  i.  e.  on  a 
mountain;  Job  21:  32,  m*DD,  the  graves,  i.  e.  the  grave.  Ps.  46:  5. 
Intensity  of  expression  is  generally  intended,  where  the  plural  is  thus 
employed  ;  but  it  is  difficult  to  make  it  out  in  all  cases. 

General  Remark.  Where  a  proper  plurality  is  not  the  design  of 
the  plural  form,  it  bears,  for  the  most  part,  a  kindred  meaning.  Thus 
objects  extended  as  to  space  or  time  have,  at  least  many  of  them,  names 
of  the  plural  form.  Thus  for  space,  fi^ra  heavens,  nitta ,  heights, 
tn'^^n'D  region  under  feet,  m&ttnE  region  over  head,  ST3B  face, 
t^ntfnx  neck;  for  time,  DfNQ  ltfe>  tPW3  youth,  B^pt  old  age;  final- 
ly for  attributes  or  qualities  of  a  permanent  nature,  as  &919  perverse- 
ness,  CJBnn  compassion,  O^WBJ  a  childless  state,  etc. 

Peculiar  signifcancy  attached  to  the  repetition  of  nouns. 

§  438.  The  Hebrews  frequently  repeated  nouns,  with- 
out or  with  the  copula  1  between  them,  for  various  purpo- 
ses; viz. 

(a)  To  denote  multitude;  e.  g.  Gen.  14:  10,  ^ittn  m"nN3  ninN3  , 
pits  pits  of  bitumen,  i.  e.  many  pits,  etc. ;  see  d  below,  (b)  To  denote 
distribution;  e.  g.  Gen.  32:  17,  T75^  ■YJJ  Ti*  flock  flock  by  itself,  i.  e. 
each  flock  by  itself,  (c)  To  denote  all,  every ;  e.  g.  Deut.  14:  22, 
J1D25  fj3U5 ,  year  year,  i.  e.  every  year.  Sometimes  also  with  a  copula; 
as  Deut.  32:  7,  iVJI  ^n? ,  generation  and  generation,  i.  e.  all  genera- 
tions, (d)  To  denote  intensity  ;  e.  g.  Ecc.  7 :  24,  pfrP  pfc?  ,  deep 
deep,  i.  e.  very  deep ;  comp.  a  above.  So  earnestness  in  warning  or 
threatening,  in  grief,  joy,  etc.,  is  usually  expressed  by  repetition. 


184         <§§  438 — 441.  syntax  ;  nouns  used  as  adjectives. 

Note.  In  order  to  designate  intensity,  it  is  not  always  necessary 
that  the  same  word  should  be  repeated  ;  but  a  synonymous  word,  or  a 
word  of  similar  sound  and  signification,  is  often  substituted  with  the 
same  effect;  as  Ps.  40  :  3,  JV»H  D^O,  clay  of  mire,  i.  e.  the  miry 
clay;  Job  30 : 3,  ntt'&ft^  ttfitVl? ,  wasting  and  destruction,  i.  e.  great 
wasting,  etc. 

§  439.  Repetition,  with  the  copula  1  between  the  words, 

more  usually  denotes  diversity. 

E.  g.  Deut.  25 :  13.  ttt£i  ]!2N ,  stone  and  stone,  i.  e.  different  stones 
or  weights ;  Ps.  12 :  3,  3^]  a£± ,  with  a  heart  and  a  heart,  i.  e.  with 
different  hearts,  with  deceit. 

Nouns  used  in  the  sense  of  Adjectives. 

§  440.  Of  two  nouns  in  regimen  one  is  frequently  em- 
ployed as  an  adjective,  in  order  to  qualify  the  other. 

The  principle  is  regulated  thus  :  {a)  The  second  or  Gen.  noun  com- 
monly qualifies  the  first;  e.  g.  E)t^  ^3  ,  vessels  of  silver,  i.  e.  silver 
vessels;  Cbi^  riTfttf  ,  possession  of  eternity,  i.  e.  everlasting  possession; 
Is.  24  :  10,  ^inh-rnnp ,  city  of  desolation,  i.e.  desolate  city;  Gen.  34: 
30,  1SDE  "nfc ,  men  of  number,  i.  e.  which  can  be  numbered,  few 
men. 

[b)  Sometimes  the  first  noun  qualifies  the  second;  e.  g.  HEip 
TVy& ,  the  tallness  of  his  cedars,  i.  e.  his"  tall  cedars ;  Vli^a  "ppB  , 
the  fatness  of  his  flesh,  his  fat  flesh  ;  tnNfr-bs  ,  the  whole  of  men,  i.  e. 
all  men,  Ex.  13:  3.  See  also  Is.  32 :  14,  l*y>  p»n,  the  tumultuous 
city.     But  this  construction  is  less  frequent  than  the  other. 

Note.  This  principle  is  more  or  less  common  to  all  languages,  spe- 
cially the  one  designated  under  a ;  but  the  Hebrew,  having  only  a  few 
adjectives,  resorts  to  it  more  frequently  than  almost  any  other  language. 
In  particular,  the  Hebrew  is  almost  entirely  wanting  in  adjectives  de- 
signating the  material  of  which  any  thing  is  made.  Hence  J)p3#  "\b3  , 
vessels  of  silver,  and  other  expressions  of  the  like  nature,  are  a  matter 
of  necessity.  But  this  form  of  expression  is  sometimes  used  where 
there  is  no  necessity,  i.  e.  where  adjectives  might  be  employed  ;  e.  g. 
P3J?«n  ",!*-*i  garments  of  holiness ;  Uifcorr  ]TV3t  priest  of  the  head,  i.  e. 
high  priest,  instead  of  bil^n  "J^Sm. 

§  441.    When  two  or  more  nouns  are  connected   by 


§§  441 — 444.  syntax  ;  peculiar  signif.  of  nouns.         185 


the  verb  of  existence  (iT^l)   expressed    or   understood, 

such  nouns  as  designate  quality  are  usually  employed  as 

adjectives. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1  :  2,  'the  earth  irni  Wn  nrrn,  was  desolation  and 
emptiness,'  i.  e.  desolate  and  empty;  Ps.  10  :  5,  TpEBUJE  fii^a  ,  high- 
ness [are]  thy  statutes,  i.  e.  they  are  high,  out  of  sight;  Job  8  :9,  bitttt 
ttfl^M i,  yesterday  [are]  we,  i.e.  of  yesterday,  hesterni  sumus.  Lev.  21:6. 

§  442.   Nouns  with  prepositions  prefixed  are  sometimes 

used  as  adjectives. 

E.  g.  Ps.  77 :  14,  ^3^1!  0*HP3  ,  mi  holiness  [is]  My  way,  i.  e.  thy  way 
is  holy  ;  1  Chr.  26 :  14,  ^3to3  Y?^  ,  a  counsellor  with  toisdom,  i.  e.  a 
wise  counsellor ;  Ps.  17:  9,  '232321  ^k,  my  enemies  in  respect  to  life,  i.  e. 
my  deadly  enemies. 

§  443.  When  two  nouns  are  connected  by  a  conjunc- 
tion, one  of  them  is  occasionally  employed  as  an  adjective. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4  :  4,  ^rTaVhE/l  13&S2  rri^att  ,  of  the  firstlings  of  his 
flock  and  of  the  fat  of  them,  i.  e.  of  the  fat  firstlings,  etc. ;  Gen.  3: 16, 
=Tr.^«!ll  l?.^2?3? >  thy  Pa™  art,d  iny  conception,  i.  e.  thy  painful  concep- 
tion.    Perhaps  Ps.  119  :  168.     The  construction  may  be  called  Hen- 
diadys,  ev  did  dvoiv  ;  see  §  569. 

§  444.  To  express  qualities  which  in  other  languages 
are  usually  designated  by  adjectives,  the  Hebrews  em- 
ployed the  words  Ehtf,  7?3,  ]!3,  Wt>  followed  by  a  noun 
expressive  of  quality. 

Examples,  (a)  X'W  man ;  as  S^3H  tti'W  a  man  of  words ;  i.  e.  an 
eloquent  man  ;  TOft  UTN  ,  a  man  of  piety,  i.  e.  a  pious  man.  (b)  fi^nft 
men;  as  ayn  ^nE ,  men  of  hunger,  i.  e.  hungry  men.  (c)  b?2i  lord, 
possessor;  as  ^2tL*  b?3  ;  possessor  of  hair,  i.  e.  hairy,  Wn'n  nb?3l  ,  pos- 
sessors of  a  covenant,  i.  e.  bound  together  by  a  covenant,  (d)  ]2j  son, 
and  D2i  daughter ;  as  b?rj-]2» ,  son  of  strength,  i.  e.  a  hero ;  ni^"]3 
son  of  death,  i.  e.  condemned,  worthy  of  death  ;  tt3ttj  12} ,  son  of  a  year, 
i.  e.  a  yearling.  So  "PtfH  ni32t,  the  daughters  of  song,  i.  e.  singing 
women,  Eccl.  12:4;  see  Lex.  The  student  will  see  that  these  cases 
are  only  a  peculiar  modification  of  the  principle  in  §  440.  a. 

Note.  The  first  noun  in  constructions  of  this  kind  is  sometimes 
24 


186  §§444 — 446.  syntax;  adjectives. 

omitted,  and  can  be  supplied  only  from  the  sense  of  the  passage  ;  as 
Job  31  :  32,  nnN  way,  for  m_N  ]2  son  of  the  way,  i.  e.  a  traveller ; 
Prov.  17  :  4,  Spttj  falsehood,  for  a  man  of  falsehood,  i.  e.  a  liar.  So 
Gen.  15  :  2,  ptoTaT  ,  for  son  of  Damascus,  i.  e.  a  native  of  Damascus. 
Job  34  :  18. 


ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  used  in  an  abstract  sense. 

■ 
§  445.  The  Hebrew,  like  other  languages,  often  supplies 

the  place  of  nouns  by  adjectives  taken  in  an  abstract  or 

neuter  sense. 

E.  g.  Jos.  24  :  14,  t3"l»n  ,  integrity,  lit.  upright,  innocent ;  Job  20  : 
22,  feqg ,  trouble,  lit.  troublesome,  etc.,  Ps.  10 :  10.  So  3>n  DttJN  ,  a 
woman  of  evil,  i.  e.  an  evil  woman,  where  3>n  is  constructed  as  a  noun 
in  the  Gen. ;  Klba  "»73  ,  waters  of  fulness,  i.  e.  full  streams,  instead  of 
tpJQ  tPtfba.     Comp.  in  Greek  to  xcdov,  to  ooqov,  etc. 

Note.  In  this  way  some  adjectives  are  constantly  used  as  epithets 
of  persons  or  things ;  as  "Vna  strong,  for  '  God ;'  "psa  strong,  for 
1  bull,  horse,  hero  ;'  n73h  hot,  for  '  the  sun  ;'  Mjab  white,  for  '  the  moon/ 
etc.  So  for  God,  we  say  (in  English)  the  Almighty,  the  Omnipotent, 
etc. ;  in  French,  T  Eternel,  etc.     This  is  called  epitheton  ornans. 

Adjectives  as  predicates  of  a  sentence. 

§  446.  (a)  When  an  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  a 
sentence,  and  the  verb  of  existence  (n^n)  is  omitted,  the  ad- 
jective  stands  regularly  before  the  noun,  and  is  usually  with- 
out the  article. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4  :  13,  "♦an!*  bil*  ,  great  [is]  my  iniquity.  In  a  very  few 
cas°,s  the  adjective  seems  to  stand  after  the  noun ;  as  in  Gen.  19  :  20. 
1  Sam.  12  :  17.  But  in  the  first  of  these  cases  ( 1|at»  fiOrt ),  the  word 
*W2B  is  originally  and  properly  a  noun ;  in  the  second,  Man  is  prob- 
ably a  verb.  In  Hab.  1  :  16,  MN^a  seems  to  be  properly  a  noun, 
meaning  pecus  pingue ;  comp.  Zech.  11 :  16.  Ezek.  34 :  3. 


§§  446 — 449.  syntax  ,*  adjectives.  187 

(b)  Such  adjective  generally  agrees  in  number  and  gen- 
der with  the  noun  to  which  it  relates;  but  there  are  many 
apparent  exceptions. 

Note.  These  exceptions  may  be  explained  on  the  principle,  that 
when  adjectives  are  used  as  predicates,  they  are  often  to  be  taken  in 
an  abstract  sense  as  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender;  §  445.  Thus  Ps.  73: 
28,  a'lO  '•b  tPrybtf  rqnp>  ,  approach  to  God  [is]  to  me  delightful,  lit.  a 
pleasant  or  delightful  thing,  the  noun  being  in  the  fem.,  and  the  adj.  in 
the  masc.  and  used  as  a  neuter  noun,  §  436.  So  Gen.  27 :  29,  *p*5"lk 
^ntf  ,  the  cursers  of  thee  [are]  cursed,  lit.  an  accursed  thing ;  Ps.  119: 
137,  -Kir  ^OBipB  ,  upright  [quoddam  rectum]  are  thy  statutes.  Ps. 
66 : 3.  So  Virgil,  Aen.  iv.  569,  varium  et  mutabile  semper  femina. 
Statius,  Theb.  n.  399,  blandum  potestas ;  Achill.  Tat.,  novrigov  uiv 
yvvt].    So  to  ndv,  ta  tjolvicc,  the  universe,  rational  or  material. 

§  447.  Article  before  an  adjective  used  as  a  predicate. 
When  this  occurs,  the  verb  of  existence  STM ,  or  its  equiv- 
alent the  pronoun  fc^H ,  is  usually  inserted. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  17  :  14,  ]U|?ri  K^n  Tn  David  was  the  smallest,  or  as 
to  David,  he  etc.,  i.  e.  the  youngest.  In  cases  of  this  kind,  the  adjec- 
tive is  placed  after  the  noun  to  which  it  relates. 

Note.  In  a  like  manner  participles,  when  used  for  the  Pres.  tense 
of  verbs,  sometimes  stand  as  predicates  after  the  noun,  and  take  the 
article  ;  e.  g.  Deut.  3  :  21,  rritfin  ^pa^* ,  thine  eyes  see,  lit.  thine  eyes 
are  the  beholders  or  they  which  see: 

Concord  of  Adjectives  as  qualifying  nouns. 
§  448.     Adjectives   used   as  epithets,  i.  e.  as  simply 
qualifying  nouns,  (so  also  participial  and  pronominal  adjec- 
tives), generally  agree  with  the  noun  in  gender  and  number. 

§  449.  Exceptions,  (a)  The  pluralis  excellentiae,  commonly  but 
not  always,  takes  an  adjective  singular,  §  437. 2 ;  e.g.  Is.  19  :  4.  tr^Sfct 
tttp£  a  hard  master.  On  the  contrary,  Jos.  24 :  19,  foti^p  D'TfV*J ,  a 
holy  God,  falling  in  with  the  general  analogy.  (6)  Nouns  of  multitude 
in  the  singular,  commonly  but  not  always,  require  a  plural  adjective  ;* 
e.  g.  Jer.  50:  6,  rrnaft  "}&<:£ ,  a  wandering  flock. 

*  When  the  concord  is  directed  by  the  sense,  as  in  a,  b,  rather  than  by  the: 
grammatical  form  of  the  noun,  we  may  call  it  constructio  ad  sensum. 


188  §§  450 — 453.  syntax  ;  adjectives. 


§  450.  Dual  nouns  take  plural  adjectives;  e.  g.  D^Y1 
rftPT,  weak  hands. 

§  451.  Nouns  of  common  gender,  having  more  than  one 
adjective, admit  either  a  masc.  or  fem.  adjective;  or  they 
may  have  both  at  the  same  time. 

E.  g.  1  K.  19  :  11,  ptni  h£lffl  *?*<T,  a  great  and  strong  wind. 

Position  of  Adjectives. 
§  452.   When  they  qualify  nouns,  they  are  usually  put 
after  them. 

The  number  of  apparent  exceptions  to  this  rule  is  so  very  small,  and 
some  of  them  so  equivocal,  that  it  appears  dubious  whether  real  excep- 
tions are  to  be  admitted.  See  however,  Ps.  89  :  51,  Q^a?  fi^^'b^  all 
the  numerous  people,  or  rather  all  the  multitudes,  the  nations.  See  also 
Is.  53  :  II.  Jer.  3  :  7,  10.  16  :  16,  all  which  I  regard  as  cases  of  ex- 
egetical  apposition  ;  and  so  of  the  like  cases  elsewhere. 

Note.  The  pronominal  adjective  rtj  this,  not  unfrequently  precedes 
the  noun  with  which  it  agrees. 

§453.  When  an  adjective  serves  to  qualify  two  or  more 
nouns,  it  is  usually  put  after  them ;  and  the  gender  of  it  may 
be  either  masc.  as  the  more  worthy,  or  the  same  as  the  gen- 
der of  the  last  noun. 

E.  g.Neh.  9:  13,  CTClftj  ni^l  ff»g! >h  ,  good  laws  and  statutes ;  Ezek. 
1:  11,  JTHn©  D^BSD"}  EJT'DD,  their  faces  and  wings  were  separated. 
Here  rriins  ,  a  part,  adjective,  is  fem. ;  as  is  the  noun  also  which  next 
precedes  it. 

Construct  state  of  adjectives. 
§  453  a.    They  are  often  put  in  this  state,  even  when 
they  qualify  the  noun  with  which  they  stand  in  regimen. 

E.  g.  BW»  ^fn  ,  clean  of  hands ;  d§5  ^  >  Vure  °f  neart »  ^^  ^"! 
beautiful  of  form,  etc.  This  construction  is  of  wide  extent  in  Hebrew, 
and  is  often  used  in  respect  to  participles  which  partake  of  the  nature  of 
adjectives ;  e.  g.  Ps.  19 :  8,  9.  Jer.  2 :  8. 


§§  454.  455.  syntax;  comparison  op  adjectives.         189 

Comparison  of  adjectives. 
Comparative  degree. 

§  454.  (a)  The  comparative  degree  in  adjectives  is 
made  by  using  18  (prae,  in  comparison  of)  after  the  ad- 
jective, and  before  the  noun  with  which  the  comparison 
is  made. 

E.  g.  Judg.  14  :  18,  BMflq  pinD ,  sweeter  than  honey ;  Ps.  19  :  11. 

Note.  In  the  same  manner  also  ]X3  is  used,  to  make  a  comparison 
after  nouns  or  verbs  signifying  condition  or  quality.  E.  g.  Is.  52  :  14, 
'  his  visage  ttj^NE)  riTTpE  ,  was  marred  more  than  any  man's ;  Gen.  41  : 
40,  ^7323  VWK  ,  I  will  be  greater  than  thou. 

(6)   But  "jE  after  an  adjective  and  before  the  Inf.  mood, 

implies  a  negative. 

In  this  case  it  may  be  translated  so  that  not,  or  than  that,  according 
as  the  sentence  is  constructed  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  4  :  13,  aotoSE  ^19  bilX  ,  my 
iniquity  is  great  so  that  it  cannot  be  pardoned,  or  greater  than  that  it 
can  be  pardoned. 

(c)  Sometimes  the  adjective  necessary  to  make  out  fully  the  com- 
parison, is  omitted;  as  Is.  10 :  10,  'their  gods,  Db^'VQ,  [were  more 
powerful]  than  those  of  Jerusalem.' 

Note.  In  the  Rabbinic,  comparison  is  made  by  ^rp^  ,  more.  In  the 
N.  Test.,  the  positive  degree  of  adjectives  is  not  unfrequently  used  for 
both  the  other  degrees  ;  an  imitation  of  the  Hebrew,  which  does  not 
vary  the  form  of  adjectives  for  the  sake  of  comparison. 

Superlative  degree. 

§  455.   The  Hebrew  has  no  appropriate  form  to  mark 

this,  but  expresses  it  by  various  circumlocutions. 

E.  g.  (a)  By  the  article  prefixed  to  an  adjective  of  the  positive 
degree  ;  as  1  Sam.  16: 11,  '  David  was  fttjpn  ,  the  smallest.'  The  Ara- 
bian makes  his  superlative,  by  prefixing  the  article  to  the  comparative 
form,  (b)  By  a  Gen.  or  suffix  following  the  adjective  ;  as  2  Chr.  21  : 
17,  "p:a  JltJft ,  the  smallest  of  his  sons;  Mic.  7  :  4,  tDTB ,  the  best  of 
them,  (c)  A  superlative  of  intensity  is  formed,  when  a  word  is  repeated 
and  put  in  the  Gen.  plural ;  as  D^^jPo  U/Vp  ,  holy  of  holies,  i.  e.  the 
most  holy  place ;  Ecc.  1:1,  tP^Sn  bnn  ,  vanity  of  vanities^  i.  e.  ex- 


190  §<§  455 — 457.  syntax  ;  adjectives — numerals. 

ceedingly  vain.  So  1  K.  8:  27,  heaven  of  heavens,  i.  e.  the  highest 
heaven  ;  Gen.  9:  25,  servant  of  servants,  i.  e.  a  most  abject  servant ; 
Deut.  10:  17,  God  of  gods,  i.  e.  the  supreme  God,  etc.  (d)  The  com- 
parative degree  sometimes  necessarily  expresses  the  sense  of  the  su- 
perlative ;  as  Gen.  3:  1,  '  now  the  serpent  was  rt*tf|JJ  rrft  bbE  Ssny  , 
cunning  above  all  the  beasts  of  the  field,'  i.  e.  the  most  cunning  of  all. 
(e)  Some  nouns  necessarily  imply  a  superlative  in  themselves  ;  viz.  (1) 
ttj&n  head,  as  Ps.  137:  6,  Vifrfcil)  tt&n  ,  the  head  of  my  joy,  i.  e.  my 
highest  joy.  (2)  1133 ,  first  born,  as  Is.  14:  40,  E^bn  ^i^S  first  born 
of  the  wretched,  i.  e.  most  wretched  ;  Job  18:  13,  T\\12  *n33  ,  the  first 
born  of  death,  i.  e.  the  most  terrible  death. 

§  456.  Besides  the  above  modes  of  expressing  a  superla- 
tive, the  Hebrew  exhibits  a  variety  of  methods  by  which 
intensity  of  meaning  is  denoted. 

E.  g.  {a)  ibva  very,  or  1X72  INtt  very  very ;  as  Gen.  7 :  19,  '  the 
waters  increased  IfcE  ifctt  ,  very  exceedingly,'  etc.  (b)  By  repeating 
the  same  word  ;  see  §  438.  d.  (c)  By  two  synonymous  words  ;  see 
§  438.  Note,  (d)  By  repeating  the  same  word  and  putting  it  in  the 
Gen.  when  repeated  ;  as  Hos.  10:  15,  tJ3nsn  D^l ,  the  evil  of  your 
evil,  i.  e.  your  base  wickedness.  Sometimes  a  synonyme  is  used  in  the 
Gen.,  instead  of  the  same  word  being  repeated  ;  see  §  438.  Note,  (e) 
The  name  of  God  placed  after  a  noun  sometimes  makes  it  specially  in- 
tensive ;  as  Jonah  3:  3,  'a  great  city  t^yfbttb  before  God,'  i.  e.  really  or 
truly  very  great ;  Gen.  10 :  9,  '  Nimrod  was  a  mighty  hunter  "»3fib 
Mirn  ,  before  Jehovah,'  i.  e.  exceedingly  expert  in  hunting.  So  Acts 
7:  20,  '  Moses  was  datelog  zcS  Sera  ,  fair  to  God,'  i.  e.  very  fair  ;  Luke 
1:  6,  'righteous  Ivojuvov  tov  @tov  ,  before  God,'  i.  e.  really  or  emi- 
nently pious.  The  ground  of  this  seems  to  be,  that  nothing  can,  in 
the  sight  of  God,  appear  to  be  different  from  what  it  really  is. 


NUMERALS. 

§  457.  The  cardinal  numbers  2 — 10,  are  commonly  joined  with  plu- 
ral nouns,  and  follow  the  same  gender.  They  may  be  put,  (a)  In  the 
const,  state  with  nouns  to  which  they  relate ;  e.  g.  tP72^  n"£>btfi ,  three 
days,  lit.  a  threeness  of  days,  (b)  In  apposition  (or  perhaps  used  ad- 
verbially) with  the  nouns  to  which  they  relate,  and  either  before  or 
after  them  ;  e.  g.  pW3  i"jtt5b«tt  three  sons,  'wib^  rnl33  three  daughters; 
see  and  comp.  §  435  and  §  535  a.     The  position  of  the  cardinal  num- 


§§  458 — 468.  syntax;  numerals.  191 

ber  after  the  noun  is  less  common,  and  it  belongs  rather  to  the  later 
Hebrew. 

§  458.  The  cardinal  numbers  11 — 19  are  put  in  apposition,  or 
rather  used  adverbially,  with  nouns  plural  or  singular,  and  commonly 
stand  before  the  noun,  but  sometimes  after  it.  The  gender  is  usually 
the  same  as  that  of  the  noun.  E.  g.  Num.  1:  44,  Vftj  nteS  &2V  , 
twelve  men ;  2  Sam.  9:  10,  tFsa  nto?  niBfcft  ,  fifteen  sons ;  niSSJ  W3. 
■"1TDJP ,  sixteen  sons. 

§  459.  The  tens  (20 — 90)  are  of  common  gender ;  are  put  in  ap- 
position with  nouns  either  sing,  or  plural ;  and  may  stand  either  before 
or  after  the  noun.  E.  g.  Judg.  11:  33,  W  D^-jtoy  twenty  cities;  Gen. 
32:  15.     tPnt;?  S^tt  ,  twenty  rams. 

§  460.  Numbers  composed  of  tens  and  units  (e.  g.  26,  34,  48,  etc.), 
when  standing  before  a  noun,  require  it  to  be  in  the  singular;  but 
when  the  noun  precedes,  it  is  in  the  plural.  In  both  cases  the  gender 
of  the  smaller  numeral  is  usually  the  same  as  that  of  the  noun ;  e.  g. 
Deut.  2:  14,  rtttf  nsiBtfl  Q""2Jbu3 ,  thirty  and  eight  years  ;  Ezek.  8: 
35,  n^ZvIJl  B^tiKJ  t^iBSD ,  seventy  and  seven  lambs. 

§  461.  The  numerals  nNE  a  hundred,  and  pfcfi  a  thousand,  may  be 
put  in  either  the  abs.  or  const,  state  with  nouns  either  sing,  or  plural, 
and  may  stand  either  before  or  after  the  noun.  E.  g.  Gen.  17 :  17, 
S"r:'£-n«73 ,  a  hundred  years ;  25 :  7,  17,  J-j;«2$  DN22 ,  a  hundred  of 
years ;  2  Chr.  3:  16,  HKE  t3">:i73-) ,  100  pomegranates  ;  Is.  7:  23,  F)^$ 
]S3.,  a  thousand  of  vines;  Ezra  8:  27,  P)b^  a^b-ntf  ,  1000  Varies. 

§  462.  Numbers  composed  of  thousands  and  smaller  numbers,  fol- 
low the  same  rule  as  composite  numerals  in  §  460. 

§  463.  In  many  cases  the  numerals  are  used  alone  to  designate 
weights,  measures  in  common  use,  and  time,  the  noun  being  omitted. 
E.  g.  Gen.  20:  16,  5]  03  5)£N  ,  a  thousand  [shekels]  of  silver ;  Ruth  3: 
15,  C-jyiz)  ttf ,  six  [measures]  of  barley ;  1  Sam.  10:  4,  Eft^-' 'ITtf , 
two  [loaves]  of  bread.  The  word  nratt ,  cubit,  commonly  takes  the 
preposition  3  after  the  numeral ;  as  Ex.  27:  18,  H73N2  fiNfc  ,  one  hun- 
dred in  cubits,  i.  e.  100  cubits.  An  abridged  form  is  as  in  Gen.  8:  5, 
unhb  TTC*3  ,  on  the  first  [day]  of  the  month.  Comp.  551,  also  §  421.  g. 

§464.  The  cardinal  numbers  beyond  ten  are  also  used  as 
ordinals  ;  and  they  are  either  put  before  the  noun  and  in  ap- 
position with  it,  or  are  put  in  the  Gen.  after  the  noun. 

E.  2.  Gen.  7:  11,  trp  ^i!)3>  rj3>3'IJ3 ,  on  the  seventeenth  day  ;  1  K.  16: 
10,  *3«j)  V**yb$  rtfira  ,  in  the  year  of  27,  i.  e.  the  27th  year. 


192  §§  465 — 468.  syntax  ;  pronouns. 

For  the  ordinal  numbers  below  10,  see  §  396. 

§  465.     The  cardinal  numbers  below  ten  are  also  used 

as  ordinals,  in  designating  years  and  days  of  the  month. 

E.  g.  2  K.  18: 10,  SJirj  natf  ,  the  sixth  year,  lit.  the  year  of  six;  Gen. 
8:  5,  anhb  ift^S,  on  the  first  [day]  of  the  month ;  Lev.  23:  32,  !"WttJna 
'innb  ,  on  the  ninth  of  the  month,  etc.,  as  in  English.  For  the  b  here 
comp.  §  421.  g. 

§  466.     The  cardinal  numbers  are  used  distributive!?/, 

when  repeated  without  a  copula. 

E.  g.  Gen.  7:  8,  tTDtt  &yv  ,  two  and  two,  or  two  by  two ;  Gen.  7:  3, 

tlSSUJ  !"l?2tfj ,  seven  and  seven,  or  by  sevens. 

* 

PRONOUNS. 

Primitive  pronouns. 
§  467.  These  are  more  usually  omitted  before  verbs ;  but 
when  employed,  they  seem  intended  to  give  more  energy  to 
the  expression. 

Such  pronouns  are  commonly  found  only  in  the  Nominative ;  but 
occasionally  they  occupy  the  oblique  cases  as  the  following  section 
shews. 

§  468.   When  a  pronoun  of  any  form  is  to  be  repeated  for 

the  sake  of  emphasis,  it  is  done  by  using  the  primitive  form ; 

and  this  form,  thus  repeated,  is  in  the  case  required  by  the 

nature  of  the  sentence.      E.  g. 

(a)  In  the  Nom. ;  which  is  frequent  in  the  way  of  apposition  to  the 
subject  of  a  sentence,  {b)  In  the  Gen. :  as  Ps.  9:  7,  tt&n  dnST  lq$  , 
the  memory  of  them  of  them  has  perished,  i.  e.  the  very  memory  of  them, 
etc.  1  K.  21:  19,  '  the  dogs  shall  lick  tim  D|  ^m-ni* ,  the  blood  of 
thee  even  of  thee.'  (c)  In  the  Dat. ;  as  Hag.  1:  4,  Jjjjg  Dib  nyn  ,  is 
it  a  time  for  you  yourselves  ?  (d)  In  the  Ace. ;  as  Gen.  27:  34,  "*?&» 
^'«  ttt  ,  bless  me  even  me.  (e)  In  the  Abl.  ;  as  1  Sam,  25:  24,  TIN  73 
"p3>n,  with  me  even  me  [be]  this  evil. 


§§  469— 471.  syntax;  pronouns.  193 

Note  1.  The  primitive  pronoun  is  sometimes  placed  first;  as  Gen. 
49:  8,  '  Judah  ^n»  Tp-n"1  Hta ,  thee  thee  shall  thy  brethren  praise: 

Note  2.  The  primitive  pronoun  appears  sometimes  to  be  used  by 
way  of  emphasis,  instead  of  repeating  a  noun;  e.  g.  Gen.  4:  27,  mgbl 
*fV*  IWJ1  S3  >  and  t°  Seth  even  1°  hi™  •■*  ^orw  «  sow. 

§  469.  Primitive  pronouns  used  for  the  verb  of  existence. 
When  a  personal  pronoun  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it  im- 
plies the  verb  of  existence  («T,»l)  along  with  or  after  it ;  the 
verb  itself  being  usually  omitted. 

E.g.  Gen.  42:  11,  l3n2N  tPSfe,  we  [are]  righteous;  Gen.  29:4. 
*flH  V^+*4**&  tare]  Ve  ?  Geu-  &  10,  ^-N  DT?,  J  [am]  naM. 

Note.  Personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  sometimes  stand  sim- 
ply in  the  place  of  the  verb  of  existence ;  e.  g.  Gen.  9:3,'  every  thing 
which  moves  *T[  in?!  *H$t,  wAscA  is  alive;'  Zech.  1:9,  nifit  ilfr 
{■JBn ,  wte  are  these  ?  Plainer  still  is  the  principle  in  such  cases  as 
follow  ;  viz.  Zeph.  2:  12,  '  ye  Cushites,  victims  of  my  sword  ri73^  BPiN, 
are  ye;'  2  Sam.  7:  28,  OTrbtfn  wn-nntf,  thou  art  God;  Ezra  5:  if, 
1  the  servants  of  God  nan  tt^fnN  (Chaldaic),  are  we,'  answering  to  the 
Heb.  ri72rt  Wffafi*.  In  Syriac  and  Arabic  this  use  of  the  personal  pro- 
noun is  very  common.  Still,  in  all  these  cases  the  pronoun  must  be 
considered  simply  as  the  emphatic  self,  selves,  and  the  verb  of  existence 
be  supplied  as  usual. 

§469  a.  Primitive  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  viz. 
tt1!l,  fcOn,  Wt,  in,  are  very  frequently  employed  as  de- 
monstrative pronouns. 

E.  g.  Nlttn  fii*3  ,  in  that  day ;  Dntt  fi^ian  those  nations.  Comp. 
§  167.  Note. 

Suffix  Pronouns. 
§  479.     In  general  the  pronouns  suffixed  to  verbs  are 
in  the  Ace.  case ;    those  suffixed  to  nouns  are  in  the  Gen. 
case. 

§  471.  Exceptions  as  to  verbal  suffixes,     (a)  These  sometimes  ex- 
press the  sense  of  the  Dative  ;   as  Josh.  15:  19,  "^Pin: ,  thou  hast  given 
to  me;  Zech.  7:  5,  n3tf  "•ajR&Xtt ,  have  ye  fasted  for  me  for  me,  i.  e. 
on  my  account ;  Job  10: 14,  'if  I  sin  W]?g*fa,  then  thou  watchest  it  for 
25 


194  §§  471 — 473.  syntax  ;  pronouns. 


me,  i.  e.  on  my  account;  Prov.  13:  20,  10123  ilfttfj ,  he  seeks  for  him 
correction ;  Ps.  94:  20,  ^"Oh?  ,  is  it  bound  to  thee  ?  (b)  They  some- 
times denote  relations  which  are  usually  expressed  by  particles  ;  as  Is. 
65:  5,  V™DP  i  I  am  more  holy  than  thou  ;  1  K.  21:  10,  irnapl , 
and  caused  them  to  testify  against  him ;  Ps.  42:  5,  B$g$ ,  /  moved 
along  with  them,  etc.     This  usage  is  more  frequent  in  Arabic. 

§472.  Exceptions  as  to  the  suffixes  of  nouns,  (a)  These  sometimes 
express  the  sense  of  the  Dative;  as  Ps.  115:  7,  Dn^? — BTpbin,  they 
have  hands — they  have  feet,  for  Enb  Q?lj  ,  hands  are  to  them,  etc.  (6) 
They  express  the  sense  of  the  preposition  ^3> ;  as  Ex.  15:  7,  ^pEft  > 
those  who  rise  up  against  thee,  instead  of  the  tp^}  an^j?  •  So  Ps.  53: 
6,  *f  2  h ,  /«»i  who  encampeth  against  thee. 

Note.  The  suffixes  of  nouns  may  have  either  an  active  or  a  passive 
sense ;  e.  g.  (a)  Active  ;  as  nOJ3rt  ,  my  violence,  i.  e.  that  which  I  do ; 
"HDD  ,  my  book,  i.  e.  that  which  I  possess.  This  sense  of  the  suffixes 
is  the  common  one.  (b)  Passive;  as  Jer.  51:  35,  *08tt  ,  my  violence, 
i.  e.  that  which  is  done  upon  me;  Ex.  20:  20,  infrp^  ,  his  fear,  i.  e. 
which  he  inspires ;  Is.  56:  7,  tlVfcf] ,  my  prayer,  i.  e.  the  prayer  offer- 
ed to  me ;  Ps.  56:  13,  ^"H? ,  thy  vows,  i.  e.  vows  made  to  thee ;  Is. 
21:  2,  nnri2N  ,  her  sighing,  i.  e.  the  sighing  over  her,  or  on  her  ac- 
count.    Comp.  §  424. 

N.  B.  For  the  pleonasm  and  ellipsis  of  personal  pronouns,  see  §  543 
seq.  and  §  552  seq. 

Position  of  pronouns. 
§  473.  (a)  When  a  noun  in  the  Gen.  is  used  merely  to 
qualify  a  preceding  noun,  the  suffix  pronoun  (which  as  to 
sense  belongs  to  theirs/  noun)  is  usually  placed  after  the 
second. 

E.  g.  Dan.  9:  24,  SfUhjJ  T* ,  thy  holy  city,  lit.  the  city  of  thy  holi- 
ness ;  Is.  2:  20,  ispD  "^Jfit ,  his  silver  idols,  lit.  the  idols  of  his  silver  ; 
Zeph.  3:  11,  ^rniO  *f*)>9  ,  thy  proud  exulters,  lit.  the  exulters  of  thy 
pride,  etc. 

(6)  In  a  very  few  cases,  the  suffix  is  apparently  attached 
to  the  first  noun. 

E.  g.  Ps.  71:  7,  TS>— W» ,  my  strong  refuge,  lit.  my  refuge  of 
strength.  Ezek.  16:  27.  Lev.  6:  3.  But  this  construction  is  not  alto- 
gether certain,  as  it  admits  of  another  solution,  viz.  by  the  ellipsis  of 


§§  474,  475.  syntax  ;  substitutes  for  pronouns.         195 

the  first  noun  mentally  repeated  before  the  second,  or  (more  obviously 
still)  by  apposition. 

§  474.    Pronouns  usually  stand  after  the  noun  to  which 

they  relate. 

But  sometimes  this  noun  is  not  mentioned  until  after  the  pronoun, 
either  immediately,  or  perhaps  at  the  distance  of  several  sentences ; 
and  sometimes  it  is  to  be  supplied  only  from  the  general  sense  of  the 
passage,  e.  g.  Ps.  87: 1,  tfi^p  "H^.na  in^O"; ,  its  foundation  [is]  in  the 
holy  mountain,  i.  e.  Zion's,  as  appears  from  v.  2  ;  Is.  8:  21,  na  "0? , 
he  passes  through  it,  i.  e.  the  land,  see  v.  22 ;  Ps.  9:  13,  '  when  he  tak- 
eth  vengeance  for  blood  "Dt  finiN  ,  he  remembereth  them,'  i.  e.  the  af- 
flicted, as  in  the  second  part  of  the  parallelism ;  Ps.  65 :  10.  68: 15. 
18:  15,  comp.  v.  18.  Job  37:  4.  / 

Note.  Sometimes,  although  the  pronoun  is  immediately  preceded 
by  a  noun,  it  does  not  refer  to  that  noun,  but  to  one  which  must  be 
supplied  from  the  sense;  so  Ps.  44:  3,  *  by  thy  hand  thou  didst  drive 
out  the  nations,  Eyiarn  and  didst  plant  them,'  i.  e.  the  Israelites,  as 
appears  from  v.  2.  "  So  Ps.  81:  16,  comp.  v.  14.  Ps.  105:  37.  Gen.  10: 
12,  where  N1!"i  probably  refers  to  Nineveh  in  v.  11. 

Nouns  used  for  pronouns. 

§  475.  (1)  In  addressing  a  superior,  the  Hebrews  commonly  em- 
ployed words  descriptive  of  the  relation  which  the  speaker,  or  the  per- 
son addressed,  sustained,  instead  of  using  pronouns  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  44:  16, 
1  what  shall  we  say  to  my  lord  1  i.  e.  to  thee  ;  '  lo,  we  are  servants  to 
my  lord,1  i.  e.  to  thee.  Verse  19,  *  my  lord  asked  his  servants,'  etc., 
i.  e.  thou  didst  inquire  of  us. 

(2)  The  place  of  the  personal  pronouns,  especially  in  a 
reflexive  sense,  is  often  supplied  by  the  most  distinguished  and 
essential  parts  of  either  the  external  or  internal  man. 

E.g.  (a)  By  ffiB3  sou  I,  most  frequently  ;  as  Job  9: 21,  *ips>3  3>1N  tf'b, 
I  know  not  myself;  Ps.  7:  3, '  lest  like  a  lion  *^B2  ifatp  ,  he  rend  me ;' 
Ps.  3:  3,  ^B3_b  ,  to  me;  Ps.  11  :  I.  16:  10.  35:  3.  Amos  1:  8,  'Je- 
hovah hath  sworn  "feSssa,  by  himself  (b)  By  tP3B  person;  as  Prov. 
7:  15,  *p3B  ■tfiagj  ,  to  seek  thee ;  Ezek.  6:  9.  Bropsa  Wffpa  ,  they  abhor 
themselves',  etc.  \c)  By  3^  heart ;  as  Ex.  9:  14,  ^ab ,  thyself ;  Ps.  16: 
9,  *$  ,  J  myself,  etc.  (d)  Occasionally  by  several  other  words ;  as 
Ps.  7  :  6.  16:  9,  tP*ft  life,  and  "riaa  heart  or  soul;  Is.  26:  9,  mi 
spirit ;  Ps.  6: 8,  ^e'ye;  Ps.  16: 9,  itoa  flesh ;  Ps.  17:  14,  fft  belly; 


196      §§  475 — 478.  syntax  ;  anomalies  of  pronouns,  etc. 

Ps.  6:  3,  DS2g  bone;  1  Sam.  20: 17,  T  hand,  etc.  The  same  usage 
prevails  very  extensively  in  Aramaean  and  Arabic ;  and,  I  may  add,  in 
our  own  language,  e.  g.  How  many  hands  does  he  employ  1 

Anomalies  of  pronouns. 

§  476.  Departures  from  concord  in  respect  to  gender,  number,  etc., 
are  called  anomalies  here.  These  are  somewhat  frequent,  and  may  be 
ranked  under  several  heads  ;  comp.  §§  484 — 496. 

E.  g.  (a)  In  regard  to  number  ;  for  a  pronoun  sing,  not  unfrequent- 
ly  relates  to  a  noun  plural,  i.  e.  it  is  used  in  a  collective  sense,  like  a 
noun  of  multitude  ;  as  Deut.  21  :  10,  *  when  thou  goest  against  V^k, 
thine  enemies,  and  God  I3n3  gives  him  (sing.)  into  thine  hand,'  etc. 
Josh.  2  :  4,  ''  and  the  woman  took  the  two  spies,  nSBSftl  and  hid  him.' 
So  Deut.  28  :  48.  Ps.  5  :  10.  Mai.  2  :  2.  Jer.  31 :  15.  Ecc.  10  :  15.  Is. 
5  :  23,  et  saepe  passim. 

Note.  Pronouns  singular  being  often  employed  in  a  generic  or  col- 
lective sense,  in  the  same  way  as  nouns  of  multitude,  exhibit  the  like 
appearances  in  regard  to  concord  with  verbs,  adjectives,  etc. 

(6)  In  regard  to  gender.  (1)  The  masc.  is  used  for  the  feminine ; 
as  tfm  for  ]na  ,  Ezek.  13  :  20.  nan  for  nsn ,  Ruth  1 :  22.  Cant.  6  :  8. 
Zach.  5 :  10.  So  the  suff.  tD  for  ft ,  Ruth  1  :  8,  11,  13.  fin  for  "JH  , 
Ruth  1:  18.  Ex.  1 :  21.  Is.  3: 16.  Dan.  8  :  9,  2.  Ezek.  1 :  6, 7, 8  saepe. 
So  fi_  for  •}_  ,  Judg.  19:  24.  tu  for  ]_  ,  2  K.  18 :  16.  2  Chron.  29 :  3. 
(3)  The  fem.  for  the  masculine ;  as  nsri  instead  of  rran  ;  2  Sam.  4 : 6. 
Jer.  50 :  5  ;  na  for  WJK  ,  Deut.  5 :  24."  Ezek.  28  :  14.  In  Arabic  and 
Rabbinic  such  anomalies  are  very  frequent. 

(c)  In  respect  both  to  number  and  gender ;  e.  g.  Job.  14: 19,  rPh^EQ  , 
where  the  antecedent  of  J"i_  is  fiVJ  plur.  masc.  Is.  35  :  7,  P7£S1  [ml 
thelaier  of  her,  i.  e.  of  the  S^sfi  plur.  masc. 

Relative  pronouns. 

§  477,  The  relative  ntttf  (also  HT  and  *)T  when  used 
as  relatives,  §  1 69)  is  used  in  respect  to  antecedents  of  all 
persons,  numbers,  and  genders,  §  168. 

§  478.   The  relative  ""KIDiS;  is  often  joined  in  sense  with 

other  words,  merely  to  give  them  a  relative  meaning;  e.  g. 

(a)  With  nouns  and  pronouns  :  as  Gen.  13:  16,  ^B3>-nN  .  .  .  ^N, 
which  dust;   ib  *Mi$.,  to  whom;    in&  *\W&twhom;   Deut.  28:49, 


§§  478 — 481.  syntax  ;  verbs.  197 


tltflj  i^,  whose  language;  Ps.  1:4,  trn  *I${4  **['&$,  which  the 
wind  scatters,  etc.  (b)  With  adverbs  ;  as  tK)  ^tott ,  wfore ;  ytito 
d&E ,  whence,  etc. 

Note.  The  word  *itti$  is  commonly,  but  not  always,  separated 
from  the  word  which  it  qualifies,  by  another  intervening  word.  The 
word  qualified,  moreover,  is  often  omitted  ;  as  Ezek.  21 :  35,  '  in  the 
place  [is]  DfrnSD  *V£N ,  where  thou  wast  created;  Ex.  32  :  34, -*bN 
[Diptt]  Sf%,  to  what  [place];  Is.  83  :  4,  [rtf]  T458»  ,  from  what 
[time],  etc.     For  the  ellipsis  of  this  pronoun,  see  §  553. 

Note  2.  TiJtt  not  only  designates  a  relative  sense,  but  often  in- 
cludes with  it  the  sense  of  these  or  those ;  e.  g.  ^NFi  "V^tf  those  whom 
thou  shalt  curse,  Num.  22  :  6 ;  ^YJjWb ,  tfo  Mose  tt>fo'cA,  etc. 


YERBS. 

Usual  principles  of  concord. 

§  479.  In  general  a  verb  agrees  with  its  Nom.  case  in 
number,  gender,  and  person. 

§  480.  Nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular  often  take  a 

verb  in  the  plural. 

E.  g.  Gen.  33:  13,  ]&i£fi->3  WtgJ  ,  then  all  the  flock  will  die ;  comp. 
§  449.  b.  Sometimes  verbs  in  the  singular  only  are  employed  after 
nouns  of  multitude;  in  other  cases,  a  sentence  begins  with  a  verb  sing, 
and  proceeds  with  plur.  verbs ;  e.  g.  Ex.  1 :  20.  33 :  4.  Is.  2  :  20.  Ps. 
14  :  1,  etc.     See  further  on  nouns  of  multitude,  §  500. 

§  481.  Several  connected  Nominatives,  either  all  masc, 

or  of  different  genders,  usually  take  a  verb  in  the  plur. 

masculine. 

E.  g.  Ex.  17:  10,  'and  Moses  and  Aaron  and  Hur  *fc3>  ascended;' 
Ps.  85 :  11,  'llBilB:  n7aMi^D.h,  mercy  and  truth  are  met  together; 
Gen.  8  :  22,  etc!  ' 

Note.  Exceptions.  Cases  occur  rarely,  where  a  verb  sing,  is  used 
after  several  Nominatives  ;  e.  g.  Ex.  21 :  4,  Jl^n  rj*,tlj:'n  il^an,  the 
woman  and  her  children  shall  be,  (verb  sing.) 

§  482.   When  the  subjects  and  predicate  of  a  sentence 


198  §§  482—487.  syntax  ;  verbs. 

are  connected  by  the  verb  of  existence  (STil),  this  verb 

often  agrees  with  the  latter. 

E.  g.  Gen.  27  :  39,  ^bttfifc  HW  y^jn  isaaJfc  ,  rich  countries  shall 
be  thine  abode;  Gen.  31  :8.  Lev.'  25  :  33.'  Ezek.  35:  15,  etc. 

§  483.   Dual  nouns  take  verbs  like  nouns  plural. 

Note.  In  like  manner  plural  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  joined 
with  dual  nouns ;  for  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  have  no  dual 
form. 

Anomalies  in  the  concord  of  verbs. 

1.  As  to  Number. 

§  484.  The  pluralis  excelkntiae  commonly,  but  not  always, 
takes  a  verb  in  the  singular,  §  437. 2. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1 :  1,  DVrbN  *n3,  God  created;  Ex.  21: 29,  ri£5P  T»^pj , 
his  owner  shall  be  put  to  death.  But  in  a  few  cases  the  pluralis  excel- 
lentiae  takes  a  verb  in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  Gen.  20  :  13.  31  :  53.  35  : 7. 
Ex.  32:5,8.  2  Sam.  7  :  23. 

§  485.  Plural  Nominatives  of  the  fem.  gender,  which  re- 
late to  beasts  or  things  and  not  to  persons,  frequently  take 
a  verb  singular  whether  it  precede  or  follow  them.* 

E.  g.  Ezek.  26 :  2,  nnnH  tV^jttfa  broken  is  [are]  the  gates ;  Joel 
1 :  20,  afeQQ  ntatta  the  beasts  cry  [cries] ;  Gen.  49 :  22.  Jer.  4 :  14. 
48 :  41.  5i  :  29,  56."  Ps.  119 :  98.  87 :  3.  Job  27  :  20,  etc. 

§  486.    Vice  versa,  the  plur.  fem.  of  verbs  is  sometimes 

used,  where  the  usual  concord  would  demand  the  singular. 

E.  g.  Ex.  1 :  10,  Sltth^tt  MDJOpn-'O,  when  there  shall  happen  war, 
Judg.  5 :  26.  Job  17:  16.'  Is.  28 :'  3.  Obad.  v.  13. 

§  487.  When  a  Nom.  plural  is  used  in  a  distributive  sense, 
viz.  to  denote  each  or  every  one  of  the  subjects  in  question, 
it  often  takes  a  verb  in  the  singular. 

*  This  construction  of  the  feminine  plural  with  a  verb  singular,  is  technically 
called  pluralis  infiumarius.  Compare  the  Greek  neuter  plurals,  as  joined  with 
verbs  singular. 


§§  488—490.  syntax  ;  verbs.  199 

E.  g.  Ex.  31 :  14,  ntt'P  fimbria ,  they  who  -profane  it,  i.  e.  every  one 
who  profanes  it  [the  Sabbath],  shall  be  put  to  death  ;  Prov.  27:  16. 
3  :  18.  28 :  1.  Gen.  47 :  3.  Ex.  31 :  14. 

§  489.   When  the  verb  precedes  a  plural  Nominative,  it 

is  not  unfrequently  put  in  the  singular ;  and  sometimes  when 

it  follows  one. 

E.  £.  1  Sam.  1 : 2,  tPlV*  ii32Sb  'tW  ,  and  there  was  to  Peninnah 
children,  i.  e.  Peninnah  had  children  ;  Is.  13  :  22,  tP*tf  T\y$  ,  the  jack' 
als  shall  howl ;  Deut.  5 :  7.  Judg.  13  :  12.  2  Sam.  21  :  6.  Ps.  124  :  5. 
In  all  such  cases,  the  verb  is  used  in  a  kind  of  impersonal  way,  like  the 
French  il  vient  des  hommes,  there  comes  some  men.  So  occasionally  even 
when  the  verb  follows  a  plur.  Nom ;  as  Ecc.  2:7,^  ivn  rpl  "^a 
there  were  slaves  to  me,  i.  e.  I  had  slaves  ;  Gen.  46 :  22,  '  these  were  the 
sons  of  Rachel  "J?.?  *"itpK  which  were  [lit.  was]  born  to  Jacob  ;'  Gen.  35: 
26.  Dan.  9  :  24.  Is.  64  :10. 

Note.  Sentences  not  unfrequently  begin  with  a  verb  singular,  and 
then  proceed  with  a  verb  plural ;  as  Gen.  1  :  14,  nilkE  Vn  ,  let  there 
be  lights,  ....  l^nT  and  let  them  be  for  signs,  etc.'  Num.  9 :  6.  Ezek. 
14:  1.  Esth.  9:23. 

Remark.  It  appears  to  have  been  a  very  common  practice  among  the  Hebrews, 
to  make  use  of  the  most  simple  form  of  the  verb,  i.  e.  the  third  pers.  sing,  masc, 
whenever  such  verb  preceded  its  subject,  and  (of  course)  the  subject  was  not  yet 
announced.  In  many  cases  such  is  the  usage,  (as  the  rules  above  and  below 
will  shew),  even  where  the  subject  is  plural  or  feminine.  When  the  subject  is 
once  named,  anomalies  are  less  frequent;  although  they  do  now  and  then  occur, 
as  the  examples  adduced  will  shew. 

II.  As  to  gender. 

§  490.  Feminine  Nominatives  either  singular  or  plural, 
sometimes  take  a  verb  masc.  whether  it  precedes  or  fol- 
lows them. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  25  :  22,  SjnftBtt}  iOSn  ,  thine  handmaid  brought ;  1  Chr. 
2  :  48,  ib^  EJ^S,  ^e  concubine  bore ;  Judg.  21  :  21,  ni3i  liwr^  SN  , 
if  the  daughters  go  out ;  Ruth  1:8,'  even  as  ye  [Ruth  and  Orpah] 
&!}Mp9  have  done  to  the  dead  ;'  Is.  57 : 8,  ^-rnpFfl  and  thou  hast 
made  a  covenant  for  thyself,  where  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  fem.  So 
Lev.  2:8.  11 :  32.  I  K.  22  :  36.  Ecc.  7 :  7.  12 :  5.  Jer.  3 :  5.  Cant 
3:5.  5:8.  8:4.  2  K.  3:26.  Gen.  15:17. 

Note.  In  a  very  few  cases,  a  masc,  Nominative  singular  is  united 


200  §§490—493.  syntax;  verbs. 


to  a  verb  fem. ;  e.  g.  Judg.  11 :  39,  pn-^nPn  ,  and  it  became  a  custom , 
where  the  verb  is  employed  in  a  kind  of  impersonal  manner.  In  Ecc. 
7:  27,  t)\np  n*1*MJ,  saith  the  preacher,  the  grammatical  concord  is  fol- 
lowed, and  the  constructio  ad  sensum  (masc.  subject)  avoided. 

§  491.  Nouns  of  common  gender  take  either  a  masc. 
or  fem.  verb;  and  sometimes  both  in  the  same  construc- 
tion. 

E.  g.  Is.  33 :  9,  yntt  »lv?23&*  biN  ,  the  land  mourns  and  is  withered; 
14 :  9.  Job  20  :  26.  Lev.  3  :  i.  5  :  1.  etc. 

NOTE.  There  are  many  more  nouns  of  the  common  gender  in  Hebrew  than  has  been  generally 
supposed,  (Ges.  Lehrgeb.  p.  472)  ;  which  accounts  for  many  supposed  anomalies  of  gender. 

§  492.  Nouns  of  multitude,  (among  which  the  names  of 

nations  may  be  ranked),  sometimes  take  a  verb  feminine ; 

comp.  §  480. 

E.  g.  Ex.  5 :  16,  5pg$  Dttttn  ,  thy  people  have  sinned ;  but  E9  is  per- 
haps of  the  common  gender.  So  the  name  of  a  nation,  as  Ps.  114  :  2. 
This  construction  resembles  that  of  the  pluralis  fractus  in  Arabic, 
which  often  takes  a  verb  feminine,  whatever  the  sense  of  the  noun 
maybe. 

NOTE.  The  names  of  nations,  countries.,  and  towns,  arc  of  the  masc.  gender  when  they  are 
used  to  denote  the  inhabitants ;  but  they  are  fem.  when  they  merely  designate  place ;  comp.  §  320. 
Note  1. 

§  493.  When  several  Nominatives  of  different  genders 
are  connected,  the  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  a  masc. 
noun  as  the  most  worthy;  and  sometimes  it  conforms  to 
the  noun  which  stands  nearest ;  e.  g. 

(a)  With  a  masc.  noun ;  as  Prov.  27:9,  nb  jmgj^  nnb^l  f$$, 
ointment  and  perfume  make  [makes]  glad  the  heart ;  Hos.  9 :  2,  etc. 

(b)  With  the  nearest  noun  ;  as  Num.  12:  1,  p^nwn  tT^tt  ^51^1 , 
then  spake  Miriam  and  Aaron;  Num.  20:  11,  DVS21  STJSft  tttpFJ! , 
and  the  multitude  and  their  cattle  drank;  Gen.  7:7.  1  K.  17  :  15. 
Est.  9:  29.  2  Sam.  3  :  22.  Comp.  §  481. 

For  the  general  rule  respecting  the  composite  Nominatives,  see  §  481. 

Note.  Where  there  are  several  Nominatives  connected,  and  the 
sentence  begins  with  a  verb  singular,  it  commonly  proceeds  with  a  verb 
plural ;  as  Gen.  21 :  32.  24 :  61.  31 :  14.  33 :  7.  Comp.  §  489.  Note. 
§430. 


§§  494 — 497.  syntax  ;  verbs.  201 


III.  Number  and  gender. 

§  494.  Feminine  nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular,  often 

take  a  verb  in  the  plur.  masculine. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2  :  33,  '  all  D"»3^7:  the  increase  of  thy  house  tola;  , 
shall  die;'  Jer.  44  :  12,  rPHflpJ  'the  remainder  of  Judah  who  V3fcj  set 
their  faces  ;'  Zeph.  2:9.  Gen.  48  :  6.  This  is  constructio  ad  sensum, 
§  449.  b.  Note.* 

§  495.  (a)  Plural  Nominatives  of  the  fern,  gender  some- 
times take  a  verb  in  the  sing,  masc,  whether  they  precede 
or  follow  the  verb.  (6)  Vice  versa,  nouns  plur.  masculine 
(specially  a  pluralis  inhumanus),  sometimes  take  a  verb 
sing,  feminine. 

E.  g.  (a)  Job  42:  15,  rtltH  6*233  RJpM  &\  there  were  [was]  not 
found  women  so  beautiful;  Jer.  48:  15,  Tibs  rrny  ,  her  towns  ascended 
in  the  flames ;  Ex.  13  :  7.  I  K.  11  :  3.  Is.  17  : 6.  Mic.  2 :  6.  Hab.  3 :  17, 
Ps.  57  : 2.  87 :  3.  Job  22  : 9.  Comp.  §  489.  §  490.  {b)  Tnttfo  T^flfj  tfy . 
his  steps  totter  [totters]  not ;  Job  14 :  19,  r."1^^  R&??j  its  floods 
overflow  [overflows] ;  also  when  the  verb  follows,  as  Jer.  49  :  24,  E^bin 
ttRTtiN  ,  distresses  take  [takes]  hold  on  her. 

§  496.  Peculiar  Anomaly.  When  the  subject  of  a  verb 
is  a  noun  in  the  const,  state  followed  by  a  Genitive,  the 
verb  sometimes  agrees  in  number,  or  in  number  and  gen- 
der, with  the  noun  in  the  Genitive. 

E.  2.  2  Sam.  19  :9.  '  and  Joab  saw  that,  n»nb»  WD  Hn'S ,  the  front 
of  the  battle  was  against  him  ;'  where  the  verb  agrees  with  H»$|t3.  • 
Is.  22 :  7,  tt&g  ?R£&;  *">tj2a ,  the  choice  part  of  thy  vallies,  i.  e.  thy 
choice  vallies*  shall  be  filed;  where  the  verb  agrees  with  ^JW  •  So 
Job  29:  10.  38:21.  Is.  2:11.  Jer.  10  :  21,  etc. 

Note.  The  solution  of  this  seems  to  be  the  intimate  connection  or 
oneness  of  two  nouns  in  regimen  so  that  only  one  subject  is  in  the 
mind  of  the  writer ;  §  332. 

§  497.  Anomalies  as  to  the  Dual.     We  have  seen  that  the  dual 
takes  a  verb  in  the  same  manner  as  the  plural,  there   being  no  dual 
number  of  verbs,  §  483.    Like  the  plural  too  (§  489),  it  can  take  a  verb 
26 


202  §§  497—500.  syntax  ;  verbs. 

in  the  singular,  whether  it  follows  or  precedes  the  verb ;  e.  g.  Ex. 
17  :  12,  mi  ^3  »  *"  hands  [was]  w«r«»  Josh-  8  :  20.  Mic.  4:11.  So 
1  Sam.  4  :  15,  njgg  V:^/] ,  and  his  eyes  [was]  were  dim ;  Deut.  27 :  7. 
Kethibh. 

Note.  For  anomalies  in  regard  to  pronouns,  of  the  like  character 
with  these  in  §§  484—496,  see  §  476. 

Impersonal  verbs. 

§  498.   These  are   made  in  Hebrew  by  the  3d  pers. 

masc.  or  fem.  sing,  of  either  the  Praet.  or  Fut.  tense ;  and 

sometimes  by  the  Inf.  mood. 

E.  g.  W1  ,  and  it  happened;  "b  *V2  ,  it  is  bitter  to  me ;  "'b  RWJ ,  / 
am  quiet,  lit.  it  is  quiet  to  me ;  ib  "l£  or  ib  1S£1  ,  *'  was  grievous  to 
him;  1  Sam.  30:  1,  THb  "^^31,  and  *'  was  grievous  to  David;  Job 
4:5,  'but  now  Sp^K  Nl3Tl,ff  comes  w/wrc  fAee;'  Ps.  18:7,  Inf. 
">b  "-1^3  ,  when  it  was  ill  with  me.  In  Gen.  4  :  26,  bnin  (pass.)  ft  was 
begun. 

§  499.    Impersonal  verbs  commonly  take  after  them  a 

Dative  case  with  the  preposition  7. 

E.  g.  ^  1^  it  is  grievous  to  me,  i.  e.  I  am  grieved  ;  "'b  ^&3 ,  w?Aen  it 
was  ill  to  or  with  me. 

§  500.    Fer&s  with  indefinite  Nominatives.     These  are 
frequent,  e.  g. 

(a)  The  third  pers.  sing,  or  plur.  of  the  verb  is  used  in  this  way ; 
as  Gen.  11:9,  *n[?  [one]  called;  Gen.  48  :  1,  ^fi^T,  and  [one]  told; 
I  Sam.  26:20,  ^V-J"]  [one]  pursues;  16:23.  Is.  9:5.  64:3,  'from 
everlasting  V3!jig  &  [they]  toe  mrt  heard;  47:1,  -jb-lNnp?  tfb 
[they]  s/m/Z  710^  cat//  Mee;  etc.  Dan.  1  :  12.  Hosea  2  :  9.  This  con- 
struction answers  to  the  use  of  ore,  tout  le  monde,  etc.,  in  French  ;  or  to 
the  Greek  tiyovoi,  etc.     It  is  quite  common  in  Hebrew. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  the  Nom.  is  expressed  by  c^tf ,  Q*1N  ,  etc.  ;   and 
sometimes  the  act.  Part,  of  the  verb  is  employed  as  the  Nom.,  as  Is.  16: 
10,  ?J1^rt  $W  ,  the  treader  shall  tread,  i.  e.  one  shall  tread  ;  Is.  28 
4,  H&pn  nNn"] ,  the  seer  sees,  i.  e.  one  sees  ;  2  Sam.  17 :  9.  Deut.  22 
8.     So  plur.,  Jer.  31 : 5,  SVtSSn  ^'Dj,  the  planters  shall  plant;  i.  e. 
one  shall  plant ;  Nah.  2  :  3. 

Note  2.  The  3  pers.  plural,  or  a  Part,  plural  used  as  a  verb,  is  often 


<§§  500.  501.  syntax  ;  tenses  of  verbs.  203 


to  be  rendered  passively  in  such  cases;  as  Job  34:  20,  *"P2tt  1TD% 
the  mighty  one  is  removed,  lit.  they  remove  the  mighty  one  ;  Prov.  9 : 
11,  *  for  by  me  13")"]  are  increased  [lit.  they  increase]  thy  days,  and 
years  ncpi"1  are  added  [lit.  they  add]  to  thee  ;'  Gen.  39  :  22,  '  all  which 
t3u3  tPtfvwas  done  there,'  lit.  they  did  or  were  doing  there.  Job  4: 19. 
7 1  a  17 :  12.  19  :  26.  32  :  15.  Comp.  Luke  12 :  20,  n»»  ipvtf*  gov 
dncuTOvai,  thy  soul  do  they  require,  i.  e.  thy  soul  shall  be  required ; 
16:9,  that  when  ye  die  dt"$tx)viai,  ye  may  be  received,  lit.  they  may  re- 
ceive you. 

(6)  Occasionally  the  second  person  of  the  verb  is  employed  in  a  sim- 
ilar way;  e.  g.  Is.  7:  24,  tTB'ti  Klin  tfb  ,  one  shall  not  come  there,  lit. 
thou  shalt  not  come  ;  Job  18 :  4.  Lev.  2 :  4.  Also  in  the  common 
phrase  with  the  Inf.,  ^&p2  1?  until  thou  comest,  i.  e.  till  one  comes. 


TENSES  OF  VERBS. 

§  501.  As  the  Hebrew  has  but  two  distinct  forms  of 
tense,  it  is  obvious  that  these  must  have  had  a  diverse,  va- 
rious, and  extended  use. 

Note.  Ewald  contends  strenuously,  (Klein.  Graram.  §  470  seq.),  against  the 
notion  that  the  distinctive  forms  of  the  Hebrew  verb  were  designed  to  mark 
tenses  ;  although  he  admits  that  the  marking  of  time  is  a  result  of  these  distinc- 
tive forms.  He  represents  five  different  forms  of  the  verb  as  secondarily  marking 
tenses,  viz.  the  Praeter,  the  Future,  both  of  these  with  i  prefixed  (which  he  calls 
Vav  relative),  and  the  Participle ;  and  each  of  these,  he  avers,  is  entirely  distinct 
and  separate  from  the  other,  so  that  they  are  never  commingled  nor  exchanged 
for  each  other.  According  to  him,  the  marking  of  time  by  the  forms  of  the  verbs 
arises  in  this  way,  viz.,  the  first  mode  (Praeter)  designates  that  which  is  complete, 
definite,  and  certain ;  the  second  mode  (Future)  designates  what  is  incomplete,  in- 
definite, dependent  on  circumstances.  The  Praeter,  he  says,  can  never  designate 
the  future  sense,  except  when  a  thing  is  regarded  or  represented  as  being  com- 
pleted and  definite  or  unconditional. 

With  much  ingenuity  and  acuteness  has  this  distinguished  Hebrew  scholar  en- 
deavoured to  carry  through  the  principles  of  a  system  having  such  a  basis.  The 
Vav  conversive  (as  it  is  usually  named)  he  represents  as  merely  marking,  when  it 
is  prefixed  to  verbs,  something  consequent  upon  something  which  had  before  taken 
place,  and  thus  applicable  to  all  forms  of  a  verb,  and  even  to  portions  of  a  sen- 
tence which  are  without  a  verb.  Consequently,  as  he  says,  no  books,  narration, 
etc.  can  begin  with  such  a  i. 

Yet  Ruth  1 : 1  and  Esth.  1  : 1  begin  with  a  Vav ;  and  separate  narrations  often 
begin  with  ^n*,l  ,  etc.  In  a  word,  there  is  so  much  of  tenuous  distinction  in 
Ewald's  efforts  to  support  his  theory  here,  so  much  that  is  obscure  if  not  unintel- 


204       §§  502.  503.  syntax  ;  tenses  of  verbs. 

ligible,  such  a  want  of  definiteness  and  simplicity,  that  one  despairs,  when  read- 
ing the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  of  being  able  to  make  out,  or  keep  up,  the  nice  distinc- 
tions of  the  author.  Besides  this,  there  are  so  many  passages  where  the  use  of 
the  Praeter  and  Future,  (and  these  moreover  both  with  and  without  Vav),  seems 
to  be  regulated  by  the  mere  effort  of  the  writer  to  exhibit  an  agreeable  variety  of 
construction,  that  I  must  despair,  for  myself,  of  finding  adequate  support  for  the 
theory  of  Ewald.  Gesenius  does  not  hesitate  to  say,  in  a  recent  edition  of  his 
Grammar  (11th  edit.  1834,  p.  219)  on  which  he  has  bestowed  much  labour,  that 
the  ascription  of  modal  signification  to  the  Praeter  and  Future  is  erroneous  and 
savours  much  of  party-spirit  (einseitig).  Nor  does  he  accord  by  any  means  with 
Ewald,  in  many  of  his  views  respecting  i  relative.  After  all  the  novel  and  in- 
genious theories  which  have  of  late  been  broached  and  defended  respecting  He- 
brew tenses,  I  do  not  think  we  have  made  any  certain  advances  towards  a  satisfac- 
tory solution  of  the  difficulties  (the  theoretical  ones)  attending  them.  The  gener- 
al truths  respecting  the  use  of  them  are,  in  my  apprehension,  expressed  in  the  fol- 
lowing section. 

In  the  mean  time,  let  those  who  think  as  Ewald  does  with  respect  to  the  modal 
sense  of  the  tenses  as  being  primary,  and  regard  them  as  only  secondarily  or  con- 
sequentially accommodated  to  designate  time,  compare  such  passages  as  Is.  46:  4, 
11,  and  many  others  of  the  same  tenor,  where  the  Praeter  and  Future  are  placed 
in  directly  antithetic  position — antithetic  simply  as  it  regards  time.  But  the 
difficult  and  interesting  nature  of  this  subject  requires  another  time  and  place  for 
the  discussion  of  it. 

§  502.  The  Praeter  and  Future  forms  can  be  used,  in 
a  great  many  cases,  to  express  the  same  idea.  Both  of  them 
may  be  made  aoristic  by  prefixing  Vav,  §  208,  §  209,  and  by 
some  other  particles  placed  before  them;  but  the  pre- 
dominant use  of  the  Praeter  is  to  express  past  time  of  some 
shade  or  other ;  and  the  predominant  use  of  the  Future  is 
to  designate  some  shade  oi' future  time. 

§  503.   The  Praeter  tense  of  verbs  is  used  to  designate 

the  meaning  of  various  tenses. 

(«)  For  the  Perfect  tense,  i.  e.  for  time  absolutely  past,  which  is  its 
appropriate  use  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  3  :  13,  '  why  hast  thou  done  this  V  3: 11, 
who  Tar.  has  told  thee?'  3  :  14,  17,  22.  al.  saepe. 

{b)  For  the  Pluperfect  tense ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:2,'  God  finished  the 
work  which  rr&y ,  he  had  made ;'  2:5,'  Jehovah  TuEri  fitr  ,  had  not 
caused  it  to  rain.'  Gen.  7:  9. 

(c)  For  the  past  tense  of  narration  or  historic  tense;  e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  1, 
'God  fina  created;'  1:2,'  the  earth  nmn  was  ;'     29  :  17,  '  Rachel 

t  t  '  r  :  it  ' 

'Itfh-nS"]  nrPti ,  was  of  a  beautiful  form.'  al.  saepe. 


§§  503.  SYNTAX  ;  PRAETER  TENSE.  205 

The  Fut.  with  Vav  conversive  commonly  follows  the  Praeter,  in  the 
same  sentence  or  in  a  succeeding  one,  in  order  (as  it  would  seem)  to 
avoid  repeating  the  Praeter.  This  exchange  of  the  forms  of  tenses 
is  common  where  a  subsequent  narration  is  connected  with  a  preceding 
one.  Comp.  Gen.  4:  2—5.  1  Sam.  7:  15,  16. 

{d)  For  the  present  tense ;  (1)  In  verbs  signifying  habitual  quality 
or  condition ;  as  5l|  he  is  great,  ESh  he  is  wise,  etc.  (2)  When  the 
object  of  the  verb  is  to  express  a  state  of  acting  or  often  repeated  ac- 
tion ;  as  Ps.  119 :28,  '  my  soul  nsb.J  weeps  for  trouble  ;'  119:  30,  '  the 
way  of  truth  "Fnfta  I  choose;'  Is.  1:  15,  'your  hands  M<bl2  are  full  of 
blood.'  (3)  In  general  propositions  designating  action  at  any  time  ;  as 
Ps.  1:  1,  '  blessed  is  the  man  who  ^bn  tiibwalkethnot — -jn1!  rib  treadeth 
not — SUJ^  rib  sitteth  not ;  and  often  so.  (The  Fut.  is  often  employed 
in  the  same  way ;  and  frequently  the  Praeter  and  Future  are  in  such 
cases  promiscuously  employed ;  e.  g.  Ps.  1  :  1 — 3.  44 :  10 — 15.  Is. 
5  :  12.) 

(c)  To  designate  a  future  sense;  (1)  In  prophecies,  protestations, 
and  assurances ;  as  Is.  9:  1,  '  the  people  who  have  walked  in  darkness 
1M1  (see)  shall  see  a  great  light ;'  Is.  2  : 2,  SrrV]  and  it  shall  come  to 
pass;  2:3,  4,  11,  17,  19,  et  saepe.  (2)  When  a  fut.  form  (with  a  fu- 
ture meaning)  precedes  the  Praeter  in  the  same  construction ;  as  Is.  1: 
30,  31,  i'Tin  ye  shall  be  as  an  oak — ]bftn  !~rni  and  the  mighty  man 
shall  be,  etc. ;  3:  25,  28,  '  thy  men  )b*1  shall  fall  by  the  sword — and 
her  gates  ^JO  \7lg\  shall  mourn  and  lament ;'  often  so. 

Note  1.  The  conjunction  Vav  in  such  cases  may  precede  the  verb 
itself,  as  in  e  2,  and  usually  it  makes  the  verb  Milra,  §  101.  a ;  or  pre- 
cede the  Nom.  when  this  stands  before  the  verb,  e.  g.  Job.  19:27,  'I 
shall  see  'itfn  W91  and  my  eyes  shall  behold,'  where  ^N")  seems  to  be 
made  Fut.in  sense  by  the  Vav  before  its  Nominative.  In  some  cases  Vav 
is  omitted,  particularly  by  poetic  license,  and  the  Praeter  still  designates 
the  sense  of  a  Future. 

Note  2.  Any  word  expressive  of  future  time  and  standing  in  con- 
nection with  any  construction,  requires  the  Praeter  that  follows  (with  a 
Vav  prefixed)  to  be  rendered  as  a  Future;  e.g.  1  Sam.  2; 31,  '  behold 
the  days  tP&O  are  coming,  TOW  when  I  will  cut  off,7  etc.  So  with  an 
Inf.,  as  Deut.  4:  30,  T}b  ->£2  when  thou  shalt  be  troubled,  SpNS^I  and 
[these  things]  shall  overtake  thee',  Gen.  2:  5.  So  also  Ex.  17:  4,  "rip 
ttrtt  yet  a  little  time,  "^bfton  and  they  xoill  stone  me;  Ex.  16:  1,  'at 
evening  DF13>TVI  ye  shall  know' 

if)  For  the  Imp.  mood;    (1)  When  an  Imp.   precedes,  and  the 


206  §  504.  syntax  ;  future  tense. 

Praet.  is  connected  with  it  by  Vav  ;  as  Gen.  6:  21,  ^b  ftp_  take  for 
thyself,  fiS&tf  1  and  collect ;  comp.  above  in  e.  2.  (2)  Sometimes  when 
Vav  is  prefixed  without  a  preceding  Imp.;  as  Gen.  33:  10,  ■  if  I  have 
found  favor  in  thine  eyes,  WTj^  then  take,'  etc.  Ruth  33:  9.  Gen.  47  : 
23.  Deut.  29:  7,  8. 

(g)  For  the  Subj.  mood  in  all  its  tenses,  especially  when  a  Fut. 
with  a  Subj.  meaning  precedes  in  the  same  construction,  §  504.  h  ; 
€.  g.  (1)  For  the  Present ;  as  Gen.  3 :  22,  nbttj'1.-]©  lest  he  put  forth  his 
hand,  npbl  and  [lest  he]  take,  b3iO  and  [lest  he]  eat,  etc.  (2)  For  the 
Imperf.  ;  as  Is.  1 :  9,  T^n  'we  should  be  as  Sodom,  WD"!  we  should 
be  like  Gomorrha;'  Gen.  13:  13,  'inEH — tWpfiH  ,  should  one  hurry  them 
—then  they  would  die;  Ruth  1:  12.  Judg,  8 :  19.  (3)  For  the  Pluperf.; 
as  Is.  1:  9,  'unless  Jehovah  "Vnin  had  left  us  a  remnant,  etc.'  2  K. 
13  :  19, '  then  n^n  thou  wouldest  have  smitten  the  Syrians.'  Job  10 : 
19.  Num.  22 :  33.  (4)  For  the  Futurum  exactum  or  Fut.  perfect,  as  it 
is  named  ;  as  Ruth  2:  21,  ^5*"tJ8  "P ,  until  they  shall  have  finished; 
3: 18.  Is.  4:  4.  Gen.  24:  19. 

§  504.   The  Future  tense  of  verbs  is  used  with  a  variety 
of  meaning;  viz. 

[a)  To  indicate  future  time ;  which  is  its  appropriate  use ;  e.  g.  Gen. 
9: 11.  al.  saepe. 

W  (6)  For  the  present  tense ;  e.  g.  S^Nt  rib  ,  1  know  not ;  b^tf  fc*b  ,  I 

cannot;  ttiift  f*&$  >  whence  comest  thou?  •Jijv^"^. ,  what  seekest 
thou?  Also  in  general  propositions;  as  '  a  wise  son  riTa'S"?  makes  glad 
his  father.'  Such  a  use  of  the  Fut.  is  very  common,  and  agrees  with 
the  common  use  in  Arabic ;  in  the  New  Arabic  the  Future  is  named 
the  Present. 

(b)  To  designate  past  time  ;  e.  g.  (1)  Often  when  preceded  by  parti- 
cles that  indicate  past  time,  {a)  By  Ttf  when  it  signifies  then;  as  Jos. 
10 :  12,  1^1]  TN  ,  then  spake  he.  (b)  By  Dne  ,  not  yet ;  as  Gen.  2:  5, 
Jivr  Qnt2 ,  was  not  yet,  or  before  it  was.  But  sometimes  the  sense  is  future 
after  these  particles,  (and  then  the  particles  themselves  have  a  different 
shade  of  meaning) ;  as  in  Ex.  12: 48.  Job  10:  21.  (2)  Sometimes  (not  very 
frequently)  the  simple  Future  indicates  the  past  time  of  narration,  i.  e. 
it  is  employed  as  the  historic  tense  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:  6.  '  and  a  mist  n\$1 
went  up,  etc.'  2:  10,  '  and  thence  TW)  it  was  divided,  etc'  2  :  25, 
ri^ten?  Kb") ,  and  they  were  not  ashamed.  [Is  this  occasioned  by  the 
Vav  which  precedes  in  such  cases?  Comp.  §  503.  e.'2.  Note  1. — Job  1: 
5,  flips''  did,  would  seem  to  make  against  this  solution.     See  e.  below.] 


§  504.  SYNTAX  ;  FUTURE  TENSE.  207 

{d)  With  Vav  conversive  the  Fut.  forms  a  common  historic  tense, 
(But  see  and  comp.j  below.) 

Note  1.  Vav  does  not  always  stand  before  the  verb  itself  in  such 
cases,  but  may  stand  before  some  word  intimately  connected  with  it ; 
e.  g.  Gen.  2:  10,  "ns^  D'vi-iE5],  and  thence  it  was  divided;  comp.  as 
above. 

Note  2.  Vav  conversive,  with  the  1st  pers.  sing.,  usually  requires  the 
parag.  form  of  the  verb ;  see  §  208.  Note  1.  Otherwise  with  the  2nd 
and  3d  persons;  see  §  206.  Note  1. 

(c)  Without  such  Vav  it  is  sometimes  employed  to  denote  habitual 
or  continued  action  ;  1  K.  5:  25,  'thus  much  Solomon  ]rP  gave  to 
Hiram  yearly  f  Job  1:5,'  thus  7tiQ9+  did  Job  continually;'  2  Sam.  12 : 
31.  2Chr.25.  14.  Gen.  2:  6. 

( /)  For  the  Imperative  ;  viz.  (1)  Always  where  the  first  or  third 
person  of  the  Imp.  is  needed  ;  as  Gen.  1 :  26,  tHtt  Snip*  3  let  us  make 
man ;  1:  3,  ^iN"^';  let  there  be  light,  etc.  Where  excitement,  urging, 
entreaty,  etc.,  is  to  be  expressed,  the  paragogic  future  is  usually 
employed  ;  as  Inb'UN,  let  me  rejoice  now ;  It^ptt  ,  let  me  arise  now. 
See  §  208. 

{g)  For  the  Optative ;  especially  when  the  particle  N2  is  subjoined  ; 
e.  g.  Ps.  7 :  10,  J«-^£:p  O  that  it  might  come  to  an  end!  Cant.  7  :  9, 
Ni-TVP  O  may  they  be  I  1  K.  17:21.  Is.  19:  12.  47:  13.  For  the 
Optative  use  of  the  parag.  and  apoc.  Fut.,  see  §  203.  seq. 

{h)  For  the  Subjunctive  (usually  in  the  paragogic  form) ;  especially 
after  particles  signifying  that,  so  that,  in  order  that,  etc.  E.  g.  after 
nffe)  that,  ^525  that,  ]  that,  XJ  that,  b  that,  "lttJN  ]3>Eb  in  order  that, 
>«  that  not,  b3  that  not,  ]B  that  not ;  as  Gen.  27: 4, l  bring  it  here  nb^fcn, 
that  I  may  eat.'  Yet  the  Fut.  often  follows  particles  such  as  the  above, 
when  a  subj.  sense  is  not  required  but  a  future  one. 

(i)  The  Fut.  designates  all  those  shades  of  meaning,  which  we  ex- 
press in  English  by  the  auxiliaries  may,  can,  must,  might,  could,  should, 
would,  etc.  E.  g.  Gen.  3:  2,  b3K3 ,  we  may  eat ;  30:  31,  IfeT^W"^  > 
what  must  [shall]  /  give  thee  1  Judg.  14:  16,  TiJtt  ^bl  ,  and  should  I 
tell  thee  ?  Prov.  20:  9,  -\72&" >E  ,  who  can  [will]  say  ?  So  Job  10  :  18, 
S13N  ,  I  should  have  died;  Gen.  31:  37,  ^rib'^l  >  taat  I  might  ta^e  my 
leave  of  thee;  28:  8,  'until  that  all  T  3DJO  shall  have  been  gathered ;' 
comp.  §  503,  g.  4. 

(j)  The  Fut.  with  Vav  conversive  (which  commonly  indicates  past 
time),  15  sometimes  used  as  a  proper  Future,  the  Vav  being  rendered 


208  §§  505.  506.  syntax  ;  imperative  mood. 


merely  as  a  conjunction ;  e.  g.  Is.  9  :  5,  ■  to  us  a  son  shall  be  given,  and 
the  government  "Wfl  shall  be  upon  his  shoulder,  etc'  Is.  9: 10,  13, 15, 
17.  51: 12, 13.  (See  and  comp.  d.  above.) 

{h)  The  Fut.  with  Vav  is  sometimes  also  used,  (1)  For  the  Present 
Indie. ;  as  2  Sam.  19:  2,  '  behold  the  king  weeps  bsNn*i  and  mourns  ;' 
Ps.  102:  5,  852*1  and  is  dried  up.  Is.  2:  7.  (2)  For  the  present  Subj. ; 
9:  21,  f  let  them  live,  W^l ,  and  let  them  be  or  may  they  be,  etc.'  Job 
14:  10.  But  such  uses  of  the  Fut.  with  Vav  conversive  are  not  fre- 
quent. 

(/)  The  Future  apocopate,  (used  principally  in  the  2nd  and  3d  per- 
sons^ 206.  Note  1),  is  employed,  (a)  In  commands ;  e.  g.  yi^NSpft 
let  the  earth  bring  forth,  Gen.  1:  24.  (6)  In  prohibitions;  e.  g.  h& 
nhttjn  destroy  not,  Deut.  9:  26.  (c)  After  ")  when  it  means  that,  etc. ; 
•e.  g.  Ex.  8:  4,  *1D^  that  he  may  remove.  Ex.  10:  17.  al.  saepe. 

Note.  In  respect  to  the  various/brms  and  significations,  etc.,  of  the 
Fut.,  comp.  §§  203—208. 

Imperative  mood. 

§  505.  The  Imp.  mood  and  the  Fut.  tense  are  nearly 
related  to  each  other,  and  often  they  are  used  almost  in- 
discriminately j  comp.  §  504.  f.  §201.  The  Imp.,  besides 
its  proper  sense, is  employed  for  the  Future;  viz. 

(a)  When  two  Imperatives  immediately  succeed  each  other ;  in 
which  case  the  latter  often  has  a  Fut.  sense,  and  the  former  a  condi- 
tional one ;  e.  g.  Gen.  42  :  18,  Itll  *)&?  ,  do  this  and  live,  i.  e.  do  this 
and  ye  shall  live  ;  Prov.  3  :  3,  4,  7.  4 :  4.  7 :  2.  9 :  6.  Is.  8:9.  36 :  16. 
45:22.  55:2. 

{b)  When  an  Imp.  is  connected  with  a  Fut.  in  the  same  construc- 
tion, it  often  has  a  Fut.  meaning ;  e.  g.  (1)  Sometimes  when  it  stands 
before  the  Fut. ;  as  Is.  45:  11,  ^ibNtiJ  will  ye  inquire  of  me — and 
^SP,  will  ye  prescribe  to  me  ?  6:  9.  (2)  When  it  stands  after  the  Fut.  ; 
as  Gen.  45  :  18,  r^PSO  and  I  will  give  you  .  .  .  'lbSN'l  and  ye  shall  eat, 
lit.  eat  ye.  Gen.  20*  :*7.'  Is.  54 :  14.  Ruth  1 :  9. 

Use  of  composite  verbs. 
§  506.  The   Hebrew  does  not  form  composite  verbs, 
like  the  Greek  and  Latin,  by prefixing  prepositions  to  them ; 


§§  506 — 508.  syntax  ;  composite  verbs,  etc.  209 

but  it  inserts  a  preposition  between  them  and  the  noun  or 
pronoun  which  follows  them. 

NOTE.  Different  prepositions  are  used  in  order  to  vary  the  shades  of  meaning  ;  and  in  this 
way  a  great  variety  of  forms  of  verbs  are  made  in  Hebrew,  Aramaean,  and  Arabic,  which  may  be 
called  composite  ;  like  our  English,  put, put  by,  put  up, put  in,  put  down,  put  aside,  put  away,  put 
on,  put  off,  put  out,  etc. 

E.  g.  be:  to  fall;  J?*  b53  to  fall  over  to,  to  fall  away;  ]»  b'JDj  to 
leave,  to  depart  from  ;  "^cb  b?2  to  fall  down  before  any  one.  Hnpr  to 
call;  3  Nnj?  to  call  to,  to  invoke;  b  tt*^p  to  name.  bN*J  to  ask  with 
an  Ace.  of  the  person ;  b&*  *3  to  demand,  with  an  Ace.  of  the  thing  de- 
manded ;  I  bN"£  to  consult  any  one. 

§  507.  No  definite  rules  can  be  made  out  for  the  very  various  usage 
of  the  prepositions  in  these  cases.  The  lexicons  and  practice  only  can 
give  the  requisite  information.  The  following  distinctions  may  aid  the 
learner,  in  a  {e\\  cases  :  viz. 

(a)  The  preposition  a  is  often  put  after  verbs  signifying  to  be  angry, 
to  trust,  to  hold,  to  sin  against,  to  reprove,  etc. ;  also  to  pray  to,  to  in- 
voke, to  worship,  to  testify  against,  to  look  upon,  to  hear  or  listen  to,  to 
smell,  to  touch,  etc. 

(6)  The  preposition  b  is  often  put  after  verbs  signifying  to  make,  to 
attain  to,  to  become  any  thing ;  as  2  Sam.  7: 14,  *  I  will  be  to  him  Sttb , 
for  a  father  [a  father],  and  he  shall  be  to  me  ]Sb  ,for  a  son  [a  son] ; 
1  Sam.  4  :  9,  C^DNb  tXf^Tl  ,  be  ye  for  men,  i.  e.  be  men,  act  coura- 
geously;  Gen.  2:  22,  'and  Jehovah  made  the  rib  STBttb,  for  a  woman,1 
i.  e.  a  woman.  The  later  Hebrew  makes  more  frequent  use  of  b  in 
this  way  than  the  early ;  e.  g.  Jon.  4:  6,  comp.  Ex.  12:  27. 

Note.  This  is  the  habitual  construction  after  the  verb  S"?J  signify- 
ing to  become ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2 :  7,  SljH  ttJD^b  "'n")] ,  and  he  became  an  ani- 
mated being. 

(c)  The  particles  3 ,  ]»,  b$ ,  "pa  ,  -jya  ,  "nn  tf  ,  ^sb  ,  etc.,  are  often 

put  after  verbs ;  and  they  modify,  in  various  ways,  the  simple  meaning 

of  them. 

Cases  governed  by  verbs. 

§  508.   Active  transitive  verbs  govern  the  Accusative 

case. 

Note.  Many  verbs  have  both  a  trans,  and  intrans.  sense ;  conse- 
quently they  are  sometimes  with,  and  sometimes  without,  an  Ace.  after 
them ;  e.  g.  rC2  to  weep,  and  to  bemoan ;  *£n  to  go,  and  to  pass 
through,  Gen.  2:  14  :  H'^to  dwell,  and  to  inhabit,  Ps.  22;.  4;  173 T  to 
sing,  and  to  celebrate  with  praise  ;  so  "jsn  ,  -PU3 ,  etc. 
27 


210  §§  509—612.  syntax  ;  cases  gov.  by  verbs,  etc. 

§  509.  Many  verbs  in  Hebrew  govern  an  Ace.  directly 

without  any  intervening  preposition,  which  we  can  trans* 

late  only  by  inserting  a  preposition  before  the  noun  which 

follows  them. 

E.  g.  Tflga  to  bring  good  tidings  To  any  one,  n""*73  to  be  refractory 
against  any  one,  Sny  to  give  a  pledge  for  any  one>  etc.  Among 
these  are  verbs  of  putting  off  and  on,  of  ornamenting ;  of  plenty  and 
want ;  of  dwelling  in  or  among ;  of  going  out,  coming  in,  coming  upon, 
happening  to,  etc.  Verbs  of  overflowing,  overspreading f  etc.,  take  the 
Ace.  of  the  thing  with  which  they  overflow,  etc. ;  as  Joel.  4:  18,  '  the 
mountains  DW  . . .  3&&^,  overflow  [with]  new  winder.  9:17.  Lam.  3:48* 

§  510.   Neuter  verbs  sometimes  take  an  Ace.  case. 

E.  g.  3h  Mft ,  to  celebrate  a  feast ;  n^ft  Tin  ,  to  propose  an  enigma, 
etc.  Comp.  the  English,  to  run  a  race,  to  fight  a  fight,  etc.  Gen.  27 : 
34.  Neh.  2:10.  Ps.  25:  19,  etc. 

§511.  Verbs  governing  two  Accusatives,  All  verbs  which 
have  a  causative  meaning,  (of  course  the  conj.  Piel  and 
Hiphil  generally),  may  govern  two  Accusatives;  the  one 
usually  of  a  person,  and  the  other  of  a  thing. 

E.g.  Ezek.  8: 16,  D?:h  y^fj-rrt}  qfcjjj ,  they  filled  [caused  to  be 
full]  the  earth  with  violence;  Gen.  41:42,  ctp— •'152  ink  ^ab*]  ,  and 
he  clothed  him  with  [caused  him  to  put  on]  garments  of  fine  linen,  etc. 

Note.  Many  verbs  in  Kal  have  a  kind  of  causative  meaning,  or  one 
kindred  to  it,  and  may  therefore  govern  two  Accusatives  ;  e.  g.  such 
as  signify  to  anoint,  to  sow,  to  plant,  to  stone,  i.  e.  cover  with  stones, 
to  nourish,  to  furnish,  to  rob,  to  do  good  or  evil  to  any  one,  to  call  or 
name,  to  command,  to  convert  any  thing  into  another ■,  as  Job  28:2, 
nufana  pn£*  JIN. ,  stone  he  fuses  into  brass ;  Gen.  2:  7,  '  God  made 
man  HE'iKn  ]5Q  1^5  with  cfos*  [out  of  dws*]  /row  Me  earth,  where  1B3J 
is  the  Ace.  of  the  material,  as  grammarians  speak. 

§  512.  But  the  insertion  of  appropriate  prepositions,  such  as  a ,  \ , 
173  ,  b? ,  etc,  before  the  latter  noun  in  cases  like  the  above,  is  not  un- 
frequent ;  so  that  the  Hebrews  practised  both  methods  of  constructing 
a  sentence. 

Many  of  the  cases  above  may  bo  regarded  as  having  a  preposition  implied  before  the  second 
noon  in  the  Accusative,  if  the  reader  chooses  this  ancient  method  of  construction  ;  but  I  cannot 
recommend  this  method  of  solving  difficulties. 


§§  513.  514.  syntax  ;  passive — inf.  absolute.  211 

Passive  Verbs. 
§  513.  The  passive  forms  of  verbs  which  govern  two 
Accusatives,  retain  but  one  of  them ;  the  other  being  usu- 
ally made  a  Nominative. 

E.  g.  Ps.  80:  11,  nbs  t^nrr  sjDS  ,  the  mountains  were  covered  with 
the  shadow  of  it.     Ex.  25:  40.'  28:1 1. 

Note.  Sometimes  verbs  of  a  passive  form  have  an  active  sense ;  and 
in  this  case  they  may  govern  an  Ace,  like  active  verbs  ;  e.  g.  Job  7:  3, 
ttltt)  VT"P  ^Plbfrsn,  /  have  inherited,  or  I  have  been  made  to  inherit , 
months  of  vanity,  where  the  verb  is  in  Hophal ;  Ex.  20 :  5.  Deut. 
13:3. 

Infinitive  absolute. 

§  514.  In  general  this  is  employed,  when  the  action, 
etc.,  designated  by  it  does  not  stand  in  immediate  connec- 
tion with  a  following  Genitive,  nor  in  dependence  on  a  pre- 
ceding Nominative  or  a  particle.  The  most  important  cases 
of  its  usage  are, 

(1)  It  is  usually  put  before  a  finite  tense  of  the  same 
verb,  and  in  this  position  serves  to  qualify  its  meaning  in 
various  ways;  viz. 

(a)  It  marks  intensity  of  various  degrees  ;  as  1  Sam.  23  :  22,  EhP 
fittii  b*t*2  ,  very  subtilely  he  will  deal;  20  :  6,  bN\lJ3  bto  ,  he  has  ur- 
gently requested;  Amos  9:  8,  TfcEK  TEpv*  &^,  Twill  not  utterly  de- 
stroy. Gen.  31:  30.  43:  3,  7, Ftj  3p*rjr: ,  could  we  indeed  know?  37:8, 
*jb»Pl  <]b73rt ,  shalt  thou  indeed  reign  ?  Gen.  31:  30. 

(6)  It  denotes  assurance,  certainty ;  as  Gen.  2:  17,  mftfi  rnfc  ,  thou 
shalt  surely  die;  3:  4.  37:  33,  P]"ib  f)hD  ,  he  is  surely  torn  in  pieces ; 
Judg.  15:  2,  ^PHttN  Hfctt  surely  J.  thought  or  said. 

(c)  In  general  it  gives  intensity,  energy,  animation,  vivacity,  or  some 
colouring  of  this  nature,  to  the  expression;  although  it  is  difficult  al- 
ways to  express  it  in  an  English  version. 

So  the  intensive  particles  of  the  Greek,  German,  etc.,  cannot  well  be  expressed  in  a  translation. 

(2)  When  put  after  a  finite  tense,  it  marks  continued 
or  often  repeated  action. 


212  §§  514 — 517.  syntax  ;  inf.  absolute. 

E.  g.  2  Sam.  15:  30,  SiMl  lib*  lb?  ,  #Aey  went  up  continually  weep- 
ing ;  Gen.  8:  7,  nidi  Nix*  NS*1  ,  and  it  continued  going  and  return- 
ing;  Gen,  19:  9,  'he  is  continually  acting  the  part  of  a  judge.'  Is.  6: 
9.  Jer.  23:  17.  1  Sam.  6:  12.  1  K.  20:  37.  2  Sara.  3:  24  26:  5.  In 
such  cases  a  participle  is  sometimes  used  as  a  second  Inf.,  2  Sam.  16: 
5 ;  or  a  finite  verb,  as  in  Josh.  6:  13. 

N.  B-  although  continued  action,  etc.,  is  usually  designated  by  the 
Inf.  abs.  placed  after  the  finite  verb,  yet  there  are  examples  of  this 
position  in  which  the  sense  does  not  appear  to  differ  from  that  of  the 
examples  under  No.  1 ;  e.g.  Is.  22: 17.  Jer.  22: 10.  Gen.  31:  15.  Dan. 
11:  10,  13. 

Note  1.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  commonly  of  the  same  conjugation  as  the 
finite  verb  with  which  it  is  joined,  but  sometimes  of  a  different  one; 
as  Job  6:  1,  bp*^  biptfi  >  with  Inf.  abs.  in.  Kal  and  finite  verb  in  Ni- 
phal ;  Ezek.  16:  4,  fibnH  tfb  bfihn  ,  Inf.  in  Hophal  and  finite  verb  in 
Pual. 

Note  2.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  taken  from  a  kindred  synony- 
mous verb  ;  as  Is.  28:  28,  IS^'T  ttSVlSf  ,  he  icill  thoroughly  thresh  him, 
roots  *Hi£  and  X*rf}  both  signifying  to  thresh. 

§515.   The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  used  adverbially. 
E.  g.  i^ts^ri  bene  faciendo,  for  bene ;  1  Sam.  3:  12,  nV^n  bhrj ,  in- 
cipiendo  etjiniendo,  i.  e.  utterly. 

§  516.  In  a  few  cases,  the  Inf.  const,  is  used  in  a  like  sense 
with  the  Inf.  absolute. 

(a)  Adverbially;  as  Is.  60:  14,  ty\TV£  incurvando,  for  rVifrtfj  Hab. 
2:  10,  nixp  for  riXjD .  (b)  With  a  finite  verb  ;  as  Num.  23^25,  dp 
*3J|j5$]  Sib  ,  thou  shalt  not  curse  at  all,  for  21  np;  Ruth  2:  16,  "Vs 
5)bil3n ,  for  b^b'V  ;  Ps.  50:  21,  rrnfiprriVT  for  tint ,  etc.  But  instan- 
ces of  this  nature  are  so  rare,  that  one  hardly  knows  whether  to  rank 
them  under  the  head  of  established  usage. 

§517.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  a  finite 
verb;   and  this  for  any  mood,  tense,  or  person. 

(a)  When  a  finite  verb  is  expressed,  and  precedes  the  Inf. ;  as  Dan. 
9:  5,  nio"]  ^n^D ,  toe  have  rebelled  and  apostatized ;  Est.  9:  6.  Jer. 
14:  5.  Gen.  41:  43.  Judg.  7:  19.  Ecc.  8:  9.  9:  11.  Jer.  32:  44,  'fields 
shall  they  buy,  nin^T  and  they  shall  write  bills  of  sale,  l^ni — EinlT) 
and  they  shall  seal  them — and  take  witnesses,'  Num.  15:  35.  Deut.  14: 
21.  Is.  5:  5. 

(b)  When  the  Inf.  absolute  stands  alone ;  as  Deut  5:  12,  *ii#"i3  sim- 


§§  517 — 520.  syntax  ;  inf.  construct.  21S 

ply,  instead  of  fPttflfa  *S*tf$  as  it  is  in  Deut.  6:  17  ;  Ex.  20:  8,  *^JDt , 

for  "ibTft  *DT  as  in  Deut.  7:  18 ;  Job  40:  2,  lin  an  contendendo  1  for 
in  d-in  as 'in  Judg.  11:  25.  So  also  in  Is.  21:  5.  Hos.  4:  2.  2  K.  4: 
43.  2  K.  22:  20.  Is.  22:  13,  et  al.  saepe. 

For  the  Imper.  this  latter  usage  is  frequent ;  e.  g.  Deut.  5: 12,  linv, 
keep;  1 :  16.  Jer.  2  :  2,  rpbrj ,  go;  13:  1,  etc.  Num.  25:  17.  See 
several  examples  also  under  b  above. 

Note.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  in  some  cases  to  be  translated  in  a  passive 
sense;  as  Prov.  12:  7,  '  the  wicked  ^psrr ,  are  to  be  destroyed.'  This 
is  elliptical ;  the  full  phrase  would  be  ^Sti?.  ^ps>n  .  So  *<fh  ,  Prov. 
15:22. 

§  518.  It  deserves  special  notice,  that  the  Inf.  abs.  is  often 
employed  in  a  kind  of  cnergic  sense,  or  as  a  kind  of  nomen 
actionis  repetitae,  i.  e.  to  denote  the  practice  of  doing  any  thing. 

E.  g.  ^^jjJtS  iMI  H&^h  '.zihlDl  ri^fi* ,  cursing,  and  dissembling,  and 
murdering,  and  stealing,  break  out,  Hos.  4:  2.  Is.  21:  5.  59:  4.  Jer.  7: 
9.  23:  14.  8: 15.  2  K.  4:  43.  Prov.  12:  7.  Ps.  22:  9. 

NOTE.  As  the  Inf.  abs.  has  generally  an  intensive  sense,  whether  employed  with  a  finite 
verb  or  standing  alone,  it  may  be  called  the  energic  form  of  verbs.  The  usage  adverted  to  in 
$  517,  $  518,  shews  that  the  Heb.  language  possesses  a  most  striking  power  of  brevity  and  energy. 

Remark  1.  Seldom  is  the  subject  of  the  Inf.  abs.  expressed,  when  it 
stands  for  a  finite  verb;  but  such  a  case  is  found  in  Ezek.  1:  14. 

Remark  2.  Very  seldom  is  the  Inf.  construct  employed,  in  such 
cases,  in  the  same  sense  as  the  Inf.  absolute.  But  see  under  §  516. 
Even  verbals,  i.  e.  verbal  nouns  which  were  originally  Infinitives,  are 
sometimes  employed  in  the  room  of  the  Inf.  abs.,  in  the  poetic  parts  of 
the  Scriptures;  e.  g.  B?7a3  THD,  boiling  over  aswater  [finds  place],  i.e. 
Reuben  boils  over  as  water  ;  Gen.  49:  4.  So  Wjb  in  Judg.  5:  8.  Pro- 
bably in  a  like  way  il»tD»  in  Is.  8:  6. 

Infinitive  construct. 

§  5 19.   The  Inf.  const,  being  a  sort  of  verbal  noun,  is  used 

like  one  in  respect  to  construction,  position,  government,  and 

even  form. 

Note.  But  the  Inf.  has  no  plural  form  ;  nor  can  it  become  a  defi- 
nite noun  and  take  the  article.     It  is  simply  nomen  actionis. 

§520.    Like  nouns,  the  Inf.  const,  is  used  in  the  various 

cases;  viz. 


214  §§  520 — 523.  syntax  ;  inf.  construct. 

(a)  In  the  Nom.  case ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:  18,  ttfteft  ftVtfl ,  '  the  being  of 
the  man  alone  is  not  good  ;'  29:  19,  *Fto  (Inf.  of  "jn:)  '  my  giving  is 
good  ;'  11:  6.  30:  15.  (6)  In  the  Gen. ;  e.  g.  Gen/29:  7,  5)DNn  DV  , 
Me  ft'me  of  collecting;  2:  4,  rrf&g  tTP3 ,  in  the  day  of  making ;  Num. 
9:  15.  Ps.  128:  2,  et  passim,  (c)  In  the  Dat. ;  e.  g.  Num.  7:  5,  =Prri , 
^ta^b  and  let  them  be  for  serving,  i.  e.  let  them  serve.  8:  11.  Ezek.  30: 
16,  2p3nb  Jl?.fltt  ,  it  shall  be  for  being  pierced  through,  i.  e.  it  shall  be 
pierced  through  ;  comp.  §  523.  d.  (d)  In  the  Ace. ;  e.  g.  I  K.  3:  7, 
*  I  knew  not  ftf&l  r>N2 ,  the  going  out  or  coming  in  ;'  Jer.  5:  3.  Gen. 
21:  6.  The  Ace.  here  commonly  has  b  before  it ;  as  Gen.  11:  8.  Ex. 
2:  15.  Comp.  §  522.  §  523.  (c)  In  the  Abl. ;  e.  g.  Ps.  39:  2,  '  I  will 
guard  my  way  shvnftfrom  sinning.' 

§  521.  Like  nouns,  it  takes  prepositions  before  it,  and  suf- 
fixes after  it. 

In  translating  such  Infinitives  we  must  generally  give  them  a  finite 
sense;  e. g.  (a)  With  3;  as  Gen.  2:  4,  Bfrpana  ,  when  they  were  crea- 
ted, lit.  in  the  being  created  of  them ;  Ex.  16:  7,  i^a'ija  ,  because  he 
heard;  Is.  1:  15.  (b)  With  3;  as  Gen.  44:  30,  "WIS,  when  I  come  ; 
39:  18,  ^-m  ,  when  I  lifted  up.  (c)  With  ^  ;  Gen.  2:  3,  rntoyp, 
when  he  made  it;  Is.  7:  15,  irw^b  ,  until  he  know;  1  K.  16:  7,  '  to  pro- 
voke him  by  his  doings,  DVnb  in  that  he  was  or  in  respect  to  his  being.' 
In  like  manner,  with  |tt  ,  *W,  bl,  RJDb  ,  nhtt,  ^ftN  ,  etc. 

Note.  The  preposition  1*3  has  often  a  negative  sense  in  such  cases ; 
e.  g.  Gen.  27:  1,  '  his  eyes  were  dim  rrifiOE ,  so  that  he  could  not  see,' 
lit.  from  seeing  ;  16:  2.  Ex.  14:  5.  For  *}£  before  the  Inf.  in  compar- 
isons, see  §  454.  b. 

N.  B.  For  the  use  of  the  Inf.  const,  instead  of  the  Inf.  abs.,  see 
§  516. 

§  522.  The  Inf.  const,  with  7 ,  in  many  cases,  answers  to 

the  English  Inf.  preceded  by  the  particle  to. 

E.  g.  Gen.  2:  5,  *  and  there  was  no  man  "b^b  ,  to  till  the  ground  ;' 
v.  10,  *  and  a  river  went  out  from  Eden  nip^rir  >  to  water  the  ground ;' 
11:  6,  'all  which  they  may  purpose  niiasb  to  do,'  etc.  When  T-ibSi 
(not)  comes  before  an  Inf.,  the  b.  is  put  before  it ;  as  Gen.  3: 11,  '  which 
I  command  thee  ""b-SN  ^bib  not  to  eat,  lit.  in  respect  to  the  not  of 
eating,  i.  e.  the  Inf.  is  used  as  a  noun  in  regimen  with  ^fiba  . 

§  523.    The  Inf.  const  with  7  ?  and  with  the  verb  of  exis- 
tence (i"PJ"l)  expressed  or  implied,  constitutes  a  periphrasis 


§§523 — 525.  syntax;  inf.  construct.  215 


expressing  the  meaning  of  several  forms  of  the  finite  verb* 
viz. 

(a)  Of  the  Praeter ;  as  2  Chr.  26:  5,  mfi*  ©"1$  ",H%1  >  and  ne 
sought  God,  lit.  and  he  was  for  seeking  God ;  Gen.  15:  12,  ■  the  sun 
8inb  W  was  about  to  go  down,  lit.  was  for  going  down  ;  2  Chr.  11: 
22.  Ezra  3:  12. 

(b)  Of  the  Present;  as  Is.  44:  14,  ib-rnab  fc$$>  ^e  news  down 
for  himself,  lit.  [he  is]  for  hewing  down.  Prov.  19:  8,  '  he  that  is  wise, 
nits  Nl£?3b  [7PT\]%findeth  prosperity,'  lit.  is  for  finding  ;  so  Is.  21:  1. 

(c)  Of  the  Future;  as  Is.  38:  20,  WttJtn^fslSfr]  T\vn^  ,  Jehovah 
will  deliver  me,  lit.  will  be  for  the  delivering  of  me ;  Ps.  25:  14,  '  Jeho- 
vah fiy^nrib  [n^Tp]  Ml  teach  them,'  lit.  will  be  for  the  teaching  of 
them;' 49:  15.  62-  10.  Ecc.  3:  14.  So  Ps.  101:  8,  'soon  tinm$  will 
I  destroy  the  wicked  of  the  land,  rP*^3ttb  Iioill  cut  off,'  etc.,  i.  e.  will 
be  for  the  cutting  off,  etc. 

{d)  Of  the  passive ;  as  Josh.  2:  5,  ■  and  it  came  to  pass  *i3Db  IStiJn 
when  the  gate  was  to  be  shut,'  lit.  and  the  gate  was  for  shutting,  or  to 
be  shut;  Deut.  31:  17,  bb&):  rrrn  ,  and  they  shall  be  devoured,  lit. 
and  it  shall  be  for  devouring ;  Is.  6:  13. 

(c)  Of  the  Latin  participle  in  -dus,  or  the  English  auxiliaries  shall, 
can,  must,  etc. ;  as  2  K.  4:  13,  niiL'2>b  [rrn]  Mfc ,  what  [is]  to  be  done 
for  thee  ?  2  Chr.  19:  2,  nfs>b  [STWti  J2jhbfi  ,  should  one  help  the  wick- 
ed?  Judg.  1:  19,  ^"ninb  [rp!i]  tib ,  he  could  not  dispossess  them} 
Hos.  9:  13.  Amos  6;  10.  2  Chr.  20:  6. 

§  524.  The  Inf.  const,  (sometimes  also  the  Inf.  abs.)  gov- 
erns nouns  in  the  oblique  cases,  like  finite  verbs. 

Note.  When  the  noun  which  follows  the  Inf.  is  object,  must  b£ 
judged  of  in  many  cases  merely  by  the  nature  of  the  sense  designed  to1 
be  conveyed. 

§  525.  The  subject  of  the  Inf.  const,  (corresponding  to  the 
Norn,  of  finite  verbs),  is  usually  put  in  the  Gen.  after  the  verb. 

E.  g.  Judg.  13:  20,  Sribrr  nib  3>a  ,  in  the  mounting  up  of  the  flame, 
i.  e.  when  the  flame  mounted  up  ;  1  Sam.  23:  6,  '"irnnN  fthza  ,  in  the 
flying  of  Abiathar,  i.  e.  when  Abiathar  fled ;  Ps.  66:  10.  Here  also 
belong  those  cases  in  which  the  Inf.  const,  takes  pronominal-suffixes, 
i.  e.  suffixes  in  the  Genitive. 

Note.     In  a  few  cases  the  object  immediately  follows  the  Inf.,  and 


216  §§  526 — 528.  syntax  ;  participles.  , 

apparently  in  the  Genitive;  e.  g.  13SX73  niinv  ,  to  do  or  the  doing  of 
judgment,  Mich.  6:  8. 

§  526.  Besides  the  subject  in  the  Gen.  after  the  Inf.  con- 
struct, it  also  takes  the  object,  i.  e.  an  Ace.  case,  and  even  two 
Accusatives. 

E.  g.  Gen.  2:  4,  &?BttJ]  Y"}*$  ^i^'!  rri&2  tai^  ,  in  the  day  of  Jeho- 
vah's making  the  earth  and  the  heavens,  i.  e.  in  the  day  when  Jehovah 
made,  etc.  1  K.  13:  4,  3}*»a  *D^-ntf  ^?.E«j  ?73'£3  ,  when  the  king  heard 
the  word  of  the  man,  etc.  Is.  58:  5,  '  a  day  in;*::  tHfij  nisy  ,  wAcn  a 
man  will  afflict  his  soul,1  etc.  So  with  the  subject  and  two  Accusa- 
tives ;  as  Gen.  41:  39,  n^T-b3-nx  ^nitf  XPT^Hk  y^in  "»nfttf ,  sinc« 
GW  s  showing  you  all  this,  i.  e.  since  God  hath  shewn,  etc. 

Note  1.  The  Gen.  or  subject  usually  stands  next  to  the  verb  ;  but 
in  a  very  few  cases  the  Ace.  is  put  first ;  as  Is.  5:  24,  )l%b  *&j2  bbN3 
ttifij  ,  as  the  fame  of  fire  devours  the  stubble;  20:  1.  Gen.  4:  15. 

Note  2.  When  suffix  pronouns  are  joined  to  the  Inf.,  the  verbal 
forms  mark  the  Ace.  of  object,  and  the  no?m-forms  shew  that  subject  is 
designated  ;  e.  g.  verbal,  "^snttb  to  hill  me ;  on  the  contrary  with  a 
noun-suffix,  as  Vt^pa  when  I  call. 


PARTICIPLES. 


§  527,  Active  Participles  are  often  used  in  the  place  of 
finite  verbs;  viz. 

(a)  For  the  present  tense;  e.  g.  Ecc.  I:  4,  'one  generation  ^bh 
passeth  away,  and  another  generation  MS  cometh  ;'  1:  7, 8.  Ps.  1:6.  3: 
2.  4:  7.  Is.  1:7.  In  this  manner  participles  are  used  with  pronouns 
of  any  person  instead  of  verbs,  in  order  to  express  the  present  tense  ; 
as  *Db&  8*v  ,  I  fear ;  nm  &•£  ,  thoufearest ;  wrgB  tTKn? ,  we  fear  ; 
etc.     In  intrans.  verbs  this  use  is  very  common. 

(b)  For  the  past  tense  in  all  its  gradations,  specially  after  any  ex- 
pression of  time  past ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:  10,  '  and  a  river  $&  issued  from 
Eden ;'  Deut.  4:  3, '  your  eyes  nitf-irj  have  seen ;'  Gen.  31:  17, 18, 19. 

(c)  For  the  Fut.  in  all  its  varieties  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  17:  19,  '  Sarah  ir$«i 
shall  bear  a  son,'  etc.  19:  13,  DWnrcn  '  we  are  about  to  destroy  the 
city;'  6:  17,  'behold  I  aoaft  will  cause  to  come  a  flood;5  48:4.  Ex  9* 
18.  IK.  11:31.  14:  10. 


§§  528 — 532.  syntax  ;  participles.  217 

§  528.  Participles,  when  used  as  verbs,  are  subject  to  all 
the  anomalies  of  concord  which  are  found  in  verbs. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4:  10,  tflj&A  TpfrK  ^$jj  ^ip ,  the  voice  of  thy  brother's 
blood  cries  [cry] ;  com  p.  §  496. 

§529.  The  two  Hebrew  participles,  active  and  passive, 
often  have  the  sense  of  the  Latin  participles  in  -rus  and 
-dus. 

E.  g.  Gen.  19:  14,  ^9ft  hVit]  rprrajn  ,  Jehovah  is  about  to  destroy 
the  city;  Ps.  76:  8,  NniU,  metuendus;  Ps.  18:  4,  b\riT2  ,  laudandus, 
etc. 

§  530.  The  verb  of  existence  (rp»l)  added  to  the  partici- 
ple, makes  an  Imperf.  tense  descriptive  of  continued  action  or 
condition. 

E.  g.  Job  1:  14,  '  the  cattle  nvdnh  ^h  ,  were  ploughing;'  Neh.  1: 
4,  b^snBI  D2  Vt&IT  ,  /was  fasting  and  praying;  2:  13,  15.  2  Chr. 
24:  14  36:  16.  Gen.  4:  17.  Deut.  9:  22,  24. 

Note.  In  like  manner  ttJj  there  is,  and  "p#N  there  is  not,  either  with 
or  without  suffixes,  are  often  connected  with  participles,  and  form  a 
periphrasis  for  the  Pres.  tense  of  the  finite  verb ;  e.  g.  Judg.  6:  36,  '  if 
ynjfia  *$;  thou  savest;'  Gen.  24:  49.  43:  5,  '  if  H^W  *;r«  ,  Mom  rfos* 
not  send  away;'  Ex.  5:  16,  *  straw  "jn2  ]\*  is  not  given;'  Lev.  26:  6. 
In  the  later  Hebrew  the  construction  of  the  participles  with  the  subst. 
verb,  in  order  to  designate  the  past,  is  very  common. 

§531.  Active  participles  may  govern  the  same  cases  as 
their  verbs;  but  it  is  a  more  common  construction  to  put 
them  in  regimen  with  the  noun  that  follows. 

E.  g.  rnriTnN  flrjj ,  fearing  Jehovah  ;  so  1  Sam.  18:  29.  1  K.  9: 
23,  and  al.  saepe.  On  the  other  hand  the  construct  state  is  very  com- 
mon ;  as  Ps.  84:  5,  ItrV'n  *&fi* ,  inhabiters  of  thy  house;  Ps.  28:  1, 
ITS  ,v^'^:>,, ,  the  descenders  of,  [i.  e.  those  who  go  into]  the  pit ;  5: 12, 
4&tt]  "an&  ,  the  lovers  of  thy  name;  19:  8.  Prov.  2:  19.  Such  a  Gen. 
is  capable  of  all  the  varieties  of  rendering  which  belong  to  the  Gen. 
after  nouns,  §  424.  It  also  admits  intervening  prepositions,  like  nouns, 
§432. 

§532.   Passive  participles  are  constructed  with  cases  in 

various  ways;  viz. 

28 


218  §§531—533.  syntax;  verbs  used  as  adverbs. 

(a)  With  an  Ace;  as  Ezek.  9:  2,  D*1"^  P}%\f  clothed  [with]  linen 
garments  ;  1  Sam.  2:  18,  TlDNt  "l^n  ,  girded  [with]  an  ephod.  So  in 
Greek  dvaidiirjv  tniei(xtvog,  II.  a.  149.  (6)  With  the  Gen. ;  as  Ezek. 
9: 11,  D^sn  ajtob ,  c/o^eJ  [of]  linen  garments ;  Joel  1:  8,  pto-rnafrT 
girded  [of]  sackcloth;  Ps.  32:  1,  Pttj^"*^  , pardoned  [of]  sm,  etc. 

Note.     When  there  is  but  one  form  of  the  participle,  as  n?3  (from 
nia  *o  die),  this  is  capable  of  all  the  meanings  and  constructions  of 
both  the  act.  and  pass,  participles. 

§  532  a.    Active  participles  are  very  often  employed  as 

mere  nomina  agentis  vel  patientis,  i.  e.  are  mere  nouns  in  the 

sense  of  agents  actively  or  passively  considered. 

Peculiar  Construction  of  two  verbs  together. 

VERBS  USED  AS  ADVERBS. 

§  533.  When  two  verbs  immediately  follow  each  other, 
either  with  or  without  the  copula  between  them,  the  first 
of  them  may  serve  merely  to  qualify  the  second,  and  must 
then  be  rendered  adverbially. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2:  3,  £\3*jri  l^nft  btf  ,  do  not  make  much  [and]  speak 
i.  e.  do  not  say  much  ;  Job  19  :  3,  ^"^SriF;.  q$3Q  *6  ,  ye  are  not 
ashamed  ye  stun  me,  i.  e.  in  a  shameless  manner  ye  stun  me ;  Gen.  26: 
18,  HsrTl  5l£*V,  and  he  returned  and  dug,  i.  e.  he  again  dug  ;  19: 22. 
27 :  20.  30  :  31."  31 :  28.  Hos.  1 :  6.  Ps.  51  :  4.  71 :  20.  So  rtpn  is 
used  for  well,  skilfully,  Ps.  33 :  3 ;  SpDi  n  for  again,  once  more,  Gen. 
4:2.  8  :  12.  n^S  for  ad  finem,  entirely,  Gen.  24 :  15.  'infc  for 
hastily,  quickly,  Gen.  27  :  20.  Ex.  2  :  18.  tt2pn  for  much,  often, 
2  K.  21 :  6.  Ps.  51 :  4.  hVJJ  for  again,  1  K.  19  :*6.  Job  7  :  7.  The 
same  is  true  of  some  other  verbs.  In  some  cases  the  second  verb  is  in 
the  Inf.  mode ;  as  Gen.  27  :  20.  Ex.  2  :  18,  etc. 

Note.  Not  all  the  cases  where  two  verbs  come  together,  are  of  the 
same  nature  as  those  just  described  ;  for  (1)  The  Inf.  abs.  and  const, 
may  be  joined  with  a  finite  verb  ;  e.  g.  IE?  t$£sn  thou  art  able  to  stand, 
rjibn  j?ifij  a?  they  were  not  willing  to  go.  (2)  The  Inf.  with  b  often 
follows  another  verb  ;  as  tittfe  fi""]^  thou  hastenest  to  find,  (3)  Two 
finite  verbs  may  follow  each  other,  asyndic,  i.  e.  without  a  conjunction 
between  them,  and  still  the  full  sense  of  both  may  be  preserved  ;  e.  g. 
*  Jehovah  nbrirT  ys>n  was  pleased  to  make  sick,'  lit.  was  pleased — made 


§§  533 — 537.  syntax  ;  adverbs.  219 

sick.     And  so  also  when  the  second  verb  is  in  the  future :  as  tr^VtiJT 

t  s    -  .    i 

Tin ,  and  thou  shalt  come  down  on  the  third  day,  lit.  thou  shalt  make  it 
a  third  [day] — thou  shalt  come  down,  1  Sam.  20 :  19.  (4)  Or  the  two 
verbs  may  have  1  between  them :  as  '  O  that  inNSJJqfiO  "TOV  ,  I  knew 
— that  I  might  find  him.  Job  23:  3.  (5)  Even  a  Part,  also  may  be 
joined  to  a  verb  in  the  like  manner  ;  as  Is.  33 :  1. 


ADVERBS. 


Gesenius  has  given  in  his  Grammar  of  1834,  eleventh  edition,  a  large  catalogue 
of  the  adverbs,  classified  and  briefly  defined.  After  all,  the  exhibition  of  them  is 
imperfect,  compared  with  that  which  he  has  made  in  his  Lexicon  ;  and  as  alpha- 
betical order  is  not  at  all  observed,  it  answers  but  little  purpose  for  the  student. 
Besides,  the  matter  of  such  a  catalogue  is  properly  lezicographal,  and  belongs 
neither  to  etymology  nor  to  syntax.  I  have  limited  myself  almost  exclusively  to 
syntactical  principles  here.  For  the  farms  of  adverbs,  etc.,  the  reader  will  con- 
sult §  402  seq. 

§  534.   Adverbs  in  Hebrew  are  often  used  in  the  place 

of  nouns. 

(a)  In  apposition  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify ;  as  Gen.  18  :  4, 
tnE-USE  ,  a  little  water ;  Neh.  2:  12,  t23>72  tPttfrK  ,few  persons ;  Is.  30: 
33,  nsnn  DTJfc* ,  much  wood,  etc.  {b)  In  the  Gen.  after  nouns  ;  as 
1  K.  2:  31,  C3n  "Wi ,  innocent  blood;  Ezek.  30:  16,  b»V  *yi,  daily 
persecutors;  Deut.  26:  5,  t39p  "TiE  ,few  men,  etc. 

§  535.  Adverbs  standing  in  the  place  of  nouns,  some- 
times take  prepositions  before  them  in  the  manner  of 
nouns. 

E.  g.  Ezek.  6:  10,  ftfrj  h&  ,  gratis ;  2  Chr.  19:  36,  fcknsra  ,  sudden- 
ly ;  1  K.  22:  20,  ridS  /so,  [lit.  in  the  so]  ;  Esth.  4:  16,  ]D3  ,  so ;  Neh. 
9:  19,  t^S^,  daily.' 

§  536.  The  repetition  of  adverbs  marks  intensity. 

E.  g.  Gen.  7:  19,  "ifittj  $ttq,  very  much;  Deut.  28:  43,  ttbjjfc , 
nb3>3  ,  higher  and  higher,  TXQ12  ftttB ,  deeper  and  deeper;  1 K.  20:  40, 
MS rn  JlStl ,  hither  and  thither,  i.  e.  here  and  there,  all  around. 

§  537.  Two  negatives  in  Hebrew  strengthen  the  ne- 
gation. 


220  §§  537.  538.  syntax  ;  adverbs. 

E.  g.  1  K.  10:  21,  aujrjs  *<b  P]03  fN&  ,  silver  was  not  at  all  regarded. 
In  the  parallel  verse,  2Chr.  9:  20,  Nb  is  omitted.  Ex.  14:  11,  ^2*3n 
D^lip  ]\| ,  because  there  were  no  graves  at  all.  Zeph.  2:  2  etc. 

§  538.   A  negative  particle  is  often  joined  with  nouns 

and  adjectives  to  qualify  the  sense  of  them. 

E.  g.  Deat.  32:  6,  toh  tfb  ,  not  wise,  i.  e.  foolish  ;  Ps.  43: 1,  VOJ1  rib> 
unmerciful;  Job  30 : 8,  jag  ^  ,  disgraced;  Deut.  32  :  21,  bN-B 5  ,  no 
GW;  Q2>-^b  ,  no£  a  nation,  i.  e.  not  worthy  of  this  appellation  ;  Is.  31: 
8,  &»*&,  not  a  mortal;  10:  15,  y?.-*6  ,  no  wood  at  all,  etc.  This 
mode  of  expression  is  called  Xitotijq. 

Note.  A  negative  is  frequently  implied  in  an  interrogative  sen- 
tence ;  e.  g.  2  Sam.  7:  5,  fittNiT. ,  wilt  thou  build  me  an  house  ?  i.  e.  thou 
shalt  not ;  as  in  the  parallel  verse,  1  Chr.  17 :  4.  So  Is.  27  :  7.  Prov. 
24  :  28.  Ezek.  18  :  23,  comp.  v.  32.  1  K.  8  :  27.  Gen.  30 :  20.  Job  16: 
6,  '  if  I  keep  silence  ^btj^  **tt'  .1U  ,  what  departs  from  me  V  i.  e.  I  am 
not  relieved  ;  Cant.  8:  4.  Prov.  20:  24.  Dan.  1: 10. 

§  538  a.  The  leading  negative  adverbial  particles  in  He- 
brew are  1NJ7  and  7tf.  The  first  corresponds  in  a  good 
degree  with  ov  in  Greek,  and  designates  an  objective  uncon- 
ditional negative.  The  second  corresponds  with  fiij,  and 
designates  subjective  and  dependent  negation  according  to  the 
views  and  feelings  of  the  speaker. 

Note  I.  When  t&b  stands  in  a  clause  with  b3,  it  is  joined  in  sense 
with  it  and  designates  none,  provided  the  noun  which  follows  b*3  has 
not  the  article ;  e.  g.  Ex.  12  :  16,  rvtfy?.  bib  n3tf::E-b3  ,  no  work  shall 
be  done  ;  Gen.  3:  1.  (And  so  where  the  negative  "ps  is  used  in  its  room, 
Ecc.  1:  9).  But  if  the  noun  following  b'3  has  an  article,  or  b3  itself  has 
one,  rib  does  not  qualify  b3,  but  simply  the  verb  which  it  precedes  ; 
e.  g.  UTfe  nyfr-r3  S^tt  rib  ,  the  icholc  people  tasted  not  bread,  1  Sam. 
14:24.  [So  Gesenius;  but  I  doubt  whether  this  nice  distinction  is  not 
factitious.  What  does  the  writer  mean  to  say,  but  that '  none  of  the 
people  tasted  bread  V] 

Note  2.  The  negative  btt  is  exclusively  used  with  the  Future,  be- 
cause negation  here  must  be  subjective,  i.  e.  it  is  a  negation  dependent 
on  the  views  and  feelings  of  the  speaker.  But  when  the  Future  is  mere- 
ly prohibitory,  then  rib  is  employed  in  precepts ;  e.  g.  nspn  rib  ,  thou 
shalt  not  kill,  Ex.  20:  13,  et  sic  al.  saepe, 


§§  538.  539.  syntax  ;  prepositions.  221 

Note  3.  The  negation  "pa*  >  ^ere  *s  n°t>  includes  the  verb  of  exist- 
ence in  itself,  and  is  the  direct  opposite  of  tt)||  there  is.  For  the  various 
forms  it  assumes,  see  the  lexicon.  When  a  verb  follows,  or  rather, 
when  the  sense  of  a  verb  is  required  to  follow,  a  participle  is  almost  ex- 
clusively employed  ;  and  so  we  should  expect,  because  *ptt  includes  the 
verb  of  existence,  so  that  "jPi:  "pi*  is  equivalent  to  ]Fq  !rpn  ptf. 

For  other  negatives,  b3 ,  "'Pibs ,  "J5 ,  Dnc  ,  OBfi$ ,  see  the  lexicon. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


§  539.  Prepositions  both  simple  and  composite  govern 

the  oblique  cases  of  nouns,  pronouns,  etc. 

For  the  pleonasm  and  ellipsis  of  them,  see  §  547.  §  559. 

Note.  The  Hebrew  language  sometimes  compounds  two  or  more 
prepositions  together,  and  employs  them  at  one  time  in  the  sense  of  only 
one  part  of  this  composite  word,  at  another  in  the  sense  that  each  of 
the  prepositions  separately  used  would  convey ;  e.  g.  ^PiNE==,,^flN  , 
b?*3=b3> ,  ]72b=]*3 ,  etc.  Yet  in  most  of  such  cases,  the  first  prepo- 
sition seems  to  indicate  some  relation  which  could  not  be  expressed 
without  it ;  e.  g.  ]ttb  means  from  [something]  to  [something],  an  idea 
different  from  that  conveyed  by  ]tt  simply. 

Remarks,  [a)  Prepositions,  like  adverbs,  designate,  in  their  origi- 
nal and  proper  sense,  the  physical  relations  of  space,  etc. ;  and  subse- 
quent to  this  class  of  meanings,  and  in  a  secondary  sense  come  they  to 
designate  relations  of  time,  cause,  and  other  intellectual  apprehensions. 
Prepositions  which  have  respect  to  place,  either  designate  resting  in  it, 
or  motion  to  or  from  it.  Several  of  the  former  class  are  also  employed 
in  designating  motion  to  or  from  it ;  but  those  of  the  latter  class  are  not 
usually  applied  vice  versa. 

(6)  Nothing  can  exceed  the  expressiveness  of  some  of  the  Hebrew 
prepositions,  especially  the  composite  ones.  E.  g.  para  (=1*3  and  pa) 
designates  motion  from  between,  i.  e.  it  designates  the  direction  of  the 
motion  and  the  place  from  which  it  proceeds.  So  b?£  ,  away  from 
above,  Piftfitt ,  away  from  under,  etc.  Still  more  complete  are  such 
composite  forms  as  b  "pntt  b«  ;  e.  g.  'thou  shalt  send  them  y^riE  b» 
5l2h73b,  to  the  without  the  camp,'  Num.  5:  3,  4,  where  bN  marks  the  di- 
rection which  the  persons  sent  are  to  go,  and  b  yi  Pitt  marks  the  locali- 
ty of  the  place  in  respect  to  the  camp.  And  thus  often  in  other  con- 
nections. 


222     §§  539.  540.  syntax  ;  conjunctions — interrogatives. 

(c)  Many  compound  prepositions  which  by  themselves  attain  an 
adverbial  signification,  are  made  prepositions  in  sense  again,  by  in- 
serting b  or  ]a  after  them ;  e.  g.  bftt  above  or  upwards,  b  b?E  over,  etc. 

Gesenius  has  added  here  a  long  and  valuable  lexicographal  account  of  the 
leading  prepositions  ;  which  I  omit  for  brevity's  sake  as  above  in  respect  to  ad- 
verbs. His  lexicon  gives  the  substance  of  the  whole,  and  many  particulars  not 
given  in  the  Grammar. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  540.  As  the  Hebrew  language  possesses  but  very 
few  conjunctions,  some  of  them  are  necessarily  employed 
in  a  great  variety  of  significations.  This  is  particularly 
the  case  with  the  copulative  1 .  But  the  various  uses  of 
this  and  others,  are  best  learned  from  the  lexicons  and 
from  practice. 

Note  1.  Gesenius,  in  his  lexicon  and  in  the  eleventh  edition  of  his 
Grammar  §  152,  has  more  fully  and  satisfactorily  unfolded  the  manifold 
senses  of  1  ,  ^3 ,  ^ttJK  ,  (employed  in  a  conjunctive  sense),  than  I  have 
elsewhere  found  to  be  done.  The  learner  may  well  be  referred  to  his 
lexicon  for  a  copious  illustration,  not  only  of  these  words,  but  of  all  the 
Hebrew  particles  used  in  the  sense  of  conjunctions. 

For  some  peculiar  uses  of  Vav,  see  §  558.  Note.  For  the  ellipsis  of 
conjunctions,  see  §  561. 


INTERROGATIVES. 

§  540  a.  Interrogative  sentences  are  formed  in  a  vari- 
ety of  ways,  either  without  or  with  words  designed  to  mark 
interrogation. 

(a)  Merely  by  the  tone  of  voice ;  e.  g.  ^VfSb  SibttJ ,  is  it  well  with  the 
young  man  ?  2  Sam.  18:  29.     So  in  Gen.  27:  24.  2  Sam.  9:  6. 

Note  1.  When  fcft  is  prefixed  to  an  interrogative  of  this  nature,  the 
answer  is  expected  to  be  affirmative;  e.  g.  Jon.  4 :  11,  mtttf  &6 , 
should  I  not  spare?  Ans.  yes.     So  in  Job  14: 16.  Lam.  4:  36,  37. 


§§  540 — 544.  syntax  ;  interjections — pleonasm.         223 

On  the  other  hand  ;  when  btf  precedes,  a  negative  answer  is  expect- 
ed ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  27 :  10. — This  usage  corresponds  exactly  with  the 
Greek  interrogative  use  of  ovx  and  [ir\. 

(b)  By  prefixing  n : ,  DM ,  ftJQ  ,  •»**  ,  etc.,  for  the  use  of  which  the  lexi- 
con must  be  consulted. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrews  did  not  give  an  answer  simply  affirmative  by 
a  word  equivalent  to  yes,  but  repeated  the  predicate  of  the  question. 
E.  g.  My  son  Esau  art  thou  ?  Ans.  "^tt,  J,  i.  e.  I  am.  The  negative 
answer  would  be  given  by  Kb  ,  no,  or  not. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

§  541.  Interjections  simply  expressive  of  calamity  or  im- 
precation, often  take  a  Dative  after  them. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  4:  8,  vi\  nia ,  wo  to  us.   Ezek.  30:  2,  iJ^b  PTH  ,  wo  for 
the  day  ! 

§  542.  Interjections  which  have  the  forms  of  other 
parts  of  speech,  take  after  them  the  cases  required  by 
those  forms. 

E.  g.  Ps.  1 :  1,  ^m  with  a  Gen.  after  it ;  29 :  1,  2,  ISrt ,  with  an 
Ace,  etc. 


PLEONASM. 

§  543.   Personal  Pronouns.    Verbal  suffixes  are  not  un- 

frequently  pleonastic,  being  immediately  followed  by  the 

noun  to  which  they  have  relation. 

E.  g.  Ex.  2  :  6,  Tr'n-riK  T^NnPiT ,  she  saw  him  the  child;  1  Sam. 
21:  14,  iE^Q-niS:  isuj^l  he  changed  it  his  understanding ;  Job  33:  20, 
Drib  Trrh  ^mi ,  his  soul  abhors  it  bread;  Ps.  83  :  12.  Such  is  the 
predominant  construction  in  the  Chaldee  and  Syriac. 

§  544.   The  suffixes  of  nouns  are  sometimes  pleonastic. 

E.  g.  Is.  17: 6,  TV*jnb  n^pa,  in  the  twigs  of  it  the  fruit  tree  ;  Prov. 
14:  13,  JiriWB  ftrp^rip^theendofitjoy;  Cant.  1:6,  ">>#  ^3,»iy 


*224  §§  545 — 547.   syntax  ;  ellipsis. 

vineyard  ickich  [is]  to  me.    Such  also  is  the  general  usage  of  the  Chal- 
dee  and  Syriac. 

§  545.   The   Dative  case  of  pronouns  after  verbs,  and 

especially  verbs  of  motion,  is  often  pleonastic. 

E.  g.  Gen.  12 :  1,  *$""*ft ,  go  for  thyself,  i.  e.  go ;  Cant.  2:11,  >jbn 
ib  ,  it  has  gone  for  itself  i.  e.  has  gone  ;  Gen.  27:  43,  ^"fina,  j?ee 
for  thyself  i.  e.  flee  ;  Is.  31 :  8,  "lb  D$  ,  he  has  fled  for  himself  i.  e.  he 
has  fled  ;  Job  39:  4,  iftb  'ib^-^b  ,  they  turned  not  back  for  themselves, 
i.  e.  turned  not  back ;  Cant.  2  :  17,  ^b  nE? ,  compare  for  thyself  i.  e. 
compare  ;  Job  12:  11,  '  the  palate  ib-tjyp? ,  relishes  for  itself  i.  e.  re- 
lishes ;  15:  28, '  houses  which  ittb  WiT-fiSb  ,  they  do  not  inhabit  for 
themselves'  i.  e.  which  no  one  inhabits;  Prov.  13:  13,  ibb^n**  ,  he  shall 
perish  for  himself,  i.  e.  shall  perish ;  Job  19:  29,  D^b  I-3U  ,  fear  for 
yourselves,  i.  e.  fear  ye.  The  Arabic  has  the  same  idiom  ;  and  it  is 
also  very  common  in  Syriac,  and  even  in  the  Greek  ;  see  Matth. 
Gram.  §  389. 

§  546.  The  Dative  pleonastic  also  occurs  after  partici- 
ples and  adjectives;  but  more  seldom  than  after  verbs. 

E.  g.  Hos.  8  :  9,  '  a  wild  ass  lb  "H3 ,  lonely  for  itself,'  i.  e.  alone,  or 
lonely  ;  Amos  2 :  13,  nb  rti£»  ,  full  for  itself  i.  e.  full ;  Ps.  144:  2, 
^b-^Dbsa  ,  my  deliverer  for  me,  i.  e.  my  deliverer. 

§  547.  Of  Prepositions.  The  prepositions  3  and  *\12  are 
sometimes  pleonastic. 

(a)  3 ;  as  Ex.  32: 22,  '  thou  knowest  this  people  that  inn  3na  ,  they 
are  evil,'  lit.  that  they  are  in  evil;  Hos.  13:  9,  *p.T?i  V*VB  ,for 
my  help  is  in  thee,  lit.  in  respect  to  me  [I  am]  in  thy  help ;  Ps.  29:  4. 
Prov.  3 :  26.  Is.  26  s  4.  45 :  14,  b$  ^3  *JN  ,  only  thou  [art]  God,  or  only 
in  thee  [is]  God;  Job  18  :  8.  Ezra  3: 3.  In  the  three  last  examples, 
it  stands  even  before  the  subject  of  a  sentence.  This  is  technically 
called  Beth  essentiae. 

Note.  The  name  of  Beth  essentiae  is  also  extended  to  3  used  in 
cases  like  the  following;  as  Ps.  118:  7,  ''"iTbs  !"rtrF  ,  Jehovah  is  among 
my  helpers,  i.  e.  Jehovah  is  my  helper.  Ps.  54:  6.  99:  6.  Job  24  :  13. 
Judg.  13:  35.  Gesenius  (Gramm.  p.  261)  now  solves  all  the  phraseol- 
ogy of  this  nature,  by  rendering  3  as  equivalent  to  tanauam ;  e.  g.  '  I 
appeared  to  Abraham  "%»  b«3 ,  as  the  Almighty  God.'  So  3itt3  rp!l , 
be  joyful,  i.  e.  demean  yourselves  as  glad.  But  how  will  this  solution 
apply  to  Is.  45:  14,  as  quoted  above  ? 


§§  547 — 551.  syntax  ;  ellipsis. 


225 


(o)  Jg  ;  as  Deut.  15  :  7,  \  a  poor  man  %p^N  nfta»  ,  one  of  %  ©red- 
rew,' lit.  from  one  of  thy  brethren  ;  Lev.  4:2.  5 :  13.  Ezek.  18  :  10. 
This  idiom  is  common  in  Arabic. 


ELLIPSIS. 

§  548.  Of  Nouus.    The  Nom.  case  is  sometimes  omit- 
ted before  verbs. 

(a)  Before  verbs  used  in  an  intrans.  way,  in  order  to  denote  condi- 
tion or  state  of  feeling ;  e.  g.  Gen.  31 :  36,  ib  *4h*%  it  was  hot  to  him, 
viz.  S|N  anger,  i.  e.  his  anger  burned ;  Gen.  34 :  7.  comp.  Gen.  30:  2. 
Ex.4:  14,  etc.,  where  5)N  is  expressed.  So  1  Sam.  24:11,  Dttffl 
?pSj ,  and  it  pitied  thee,  i.  e.  mine  eye  [*&£)  pitied ;  comp.  Gen.  45 ; 
20.  Deut.  7:  16,  etc.,  where  jjj  is  expressed.  (o)  Words  such  as  the 
mind  of  the  reader  will  spontaneously  supply,  are  sometimes  omitted, 
viz.  such  as  rpJT;,  mrrbfi*  ;  e.  g.  Prov.  10:24,  the  desire  of  the 
righteous,  ]rn  he  will  grant,  i.  e.  Jehovah  will  grant ;  12  :  12.  13  :  21. 
21 :  13.  Job  3  :  20.  Ecc.  9  :  9.  Ps.  10  :  4,  comp.  v.  13,  and  see  below 
in  §  555. 

§  549.    The   Ace.  case  after  several  verbs  which  are 

in  frequent  use,  is  often  omitted  as  being  unnecessary  to 

render  the  language  intelligible. 

E.  s.  •"H^  she  bore,  i.  e.  children  ;  m3  he  concluded,  viz.  rpna  an 
agreement ;  nt3D  he  inclined  or  spread,  i.  e.  ]T8  the  ear,  or  bnk  the 
tent ;  ttip3  he  lifted  up,  i.  e.  bip  the  voice  ;  ?py  he  arranged,  i.  e.  C^M 
words  in  prayer,  etc.  These  omissions  are  sometimes  supplied ;  but 
more  generally  the  noun  is  omitted.    A  good  lexicon  notes  such  usages. 

§  550.    When  the  subject  of  a  proposition  is  required 

by  the  sense  to  be  repeated  in  the   predicate  with  some 

addition,  the  actual  repetition  of  it  rarely  takes  place, 

E.  g.  Cant.  1:  15,  tr:in  ^"]3n?,  thine  eyes  [are  the  eyes]  of  doves ;  Ps. 
18:  34.  48:  7.  55:  7.  Is.  52:14. 

§  551.   In  the  designation  of  weights  and  measures,  the 
ordinary  words  which  express  the   standard  of  them  are 
29 


226  §§  551 — 553.  syntax  ;  ellipsis. 


commonly  omitted;  days  and  months,  also,  are  in  the  like 

manner  occasionally  omitted. 

E.  g.  5)05  5]V.N,  a  thousand  [shekels]  of  silver;  ShT  ft*fll*»*«« 
[shekels]  of  gold  ;  t*n"yiz5  X^D  ,  six  [ephahs]  of  barley;  fcrfj  "'RB,  <wo 
[loaves]  ojf  bread;  comp.  §463.  So  in  respect  to  time;  as  infcO 
35nhi  ,  ow  the  first  [day]  o/*Ae  mon^.  Gen.  8:  15.  Ex.  12  :  18.  Ezek. 
1:1.  Comp.  §  465. 

§  552.  Of  Pronouns.     The  personal  pronouns  are  often 
omitted;  e.  g. 

[a)  In  the  Nom.  most  commonly,  as  in  Greek  and  Latin.  (6)  In 
the  Gen.  after  the  Inf.  nominascens,  or  after  a  noun ;  e.  g.  Gen.  6 : 
19,  n\TfcP!^i  to  preserve  [them]  alive,  etc.,  instead  of  BniTinb  ;  Ex. 
15:  2,  '  Jehovah  is  my  strength,  IVJM1  and  [my]  song,'  for  "Tnm"]; 
Ps.  40:  10,  11.  66:6,  etc.  (c)  In  the  Ace.  after  verbs;  as  Ex. 
2 :  25,  '  and  God  3H*i  observed  them,'  for  $PJ*1 ;  so  perhaps  Ps. 
137:5,  'let  my  right  hand  Rfttjlft  forget  [me];'  139:1.  17:11. 
Gen.  9  :  22,  etc. 

§  553.   The  relative  pronoun  TlD&*  is  often  omitted  in 

various  constructions ;  viz. 

(a)  In  the  Nom. ;  as  Gen.  15 :  13,  '  in  a  land  firrb  &6,  [which]  is 
not  theirs;'  Is.  40:20.  51:2.    54:  1.   55:5.    61 :  10,  etc.      (6)  In 

the  Gen.  after  a  noun  in  the  const,  state;  Ex.4:  13,  'send  T3 
nbvbn  ["TpK],  by  the  hand  [of  him  whom]  thou  wilt  send;'  see 
§  433.  (c)  In  the  Ace. ;  Prov.  9  :  5,  '  as  wine  [which]  ttWJO  I  have 
mingled;'  Gen.  3  :  13,  rpip?  nNT~ntt  ,what  is  this  [which]  thou  hast 
done  ? 

(d)  When  used  to  qualify  pronouns,  adi/erbs,  etc.  (§478);  as  Ex. 
18 :  20,  '  the  way  nn  *Di£  [in  which]  they  go;'  Job  3:3,'  perish 
the  day  telfcwt  h^NJ,  [in  which]  1  was  born;'  Ps.  32:2.  Is.  1: 
30.  23:7,  etc.  Ecc.  1:5,  Sri  *nn  ti-yiT  [t^n],  [where]  he  arose. 
(e)  Sometimes  even  the  pronoun  which  "iria*  would  qualify,  is  also 
omitted  ;  as  Ps.  4:8,'  more  than  in  the  time  trcn-prn  bjfl  [Tri«] 
[in]  4jK)  ,  [in  which]  their  corn  and  new  wine  increase,  etc'  Comp. 
§  478.  Note. 

(/)  Trie*  in  the  sense  of  that  which,  he  who,  those  who,  etc.,  is  often 
omitted  ;  e.  g.  Job  24 :  19,  '  Sheol  takes  away  *&ph  [those  who]  have 
sinned;'  Ps.  12:6,  'I  will  place  in  safety  nb  fTO;   [him  whom]  one 


§§  554 — 557.  syntax  ;  ellipsis.  227 


puffs  at ;  i.  e.  who  is  contemned,  [g)  In  an  adverbial  sense  ;  as  I  Chr. 
15  :  12,  ii  ''rriU'On  bfi* ,  to  [the  place  which]  J  Awe  prepared  for  it ; 
comp.  §  478.  Note. 

J\TOTE.  The  omission  of  *i®X  is  much  more  common  in  poetry  than  in  prose.  In  prose,  it  ii 
generally  inserted  after  a  definite  noun,  and  omitted  after  an  indefinite  one,  as  in  Arabic.  (De 
Sacy,  Gramm.  Arahe  II.  $363.) 

§  554.  Of  Verbs.  The  verb  of  existence  ( fiifi )  is 
commonly  omitted  between  a  subject  and  its  predicate, 
especially  when  the  predicate  stands  first;  see  §  446. 

E.  g.  Gen.  3:  11,  *»DbN  tri-pS-D  ,  for  naked  [am]  J;  4:  13,  bi^U 
*V?t  f  great  [is]  my  iniquity,  etc. 

§  555.  When  the  words  of  any  one  are  repeated,  the  verb 
"fflfcj  (which  marks  quotation)  is  very  often  omitted,  and  must 
be  supplied  from  the  sense  of  the  passage. 

E.  g.  Ps.  8:  4,  'when  I  behold  the  heavens,  fc|Sj  Tflgi  I  exclaim], 
Lord,  what  is  man!'  10:  4,  '  the  wicked  in  his  pride  [-i»K  has  said], 
tZ}"Yr~ba  [Jehovah]  will  not  punish ;'  comp.  v.  13,  where  the  ellipsis 
is  supplied  ;  Ps.  52  :  8,  9.  59  :  8.  Job  8 :  18.  Ecc.  8 :  2,  "•:«  ,  i.  e. 
■5IJ  h&iN]. 

§  556.  When  a  finite  verb  would  be  preceded  by  an  Inf. 
abs.  of  the  same  verb,  the  former  is  sometimes  omitted ; 

comp.  §517. 

Note.  Besides  the  above  common  cases  of  ellipsis  in  respect  to  the 
verb,  there  are  many  others,  especially  in  poetry,  which  cannot  be 
made  the  subject  of  rules,  but  must  be  supplied  in  conformity  with 
the  context ;  e.  g.  in  Job  39:  24.  Is.  66:  6.  Ps.  3:  9.  4:  3.  6:  4.  7:  9. 
Jer.  11:  15.  2  Sam.  23:  17,  comp.  1  Chr.  11:  19.  1  K.  11:  25.  2  K.  6: 
33:  Hos.  8:  1.  Prov.  6:  26. 

§  557.    Of  Adverbs.      The  interrogative    »1   is  often 

omitted. 

E.  g.  Gen.  27:  24,  "*:a  fiT  iintf  ,  art  thou  my  very  son,  for  ntttfn; 
3:  1,  rs  qtt  ,  is  it  so  then  that,  for  ">3  S|»n  ;  1  Sam.  16:  4.  30:  8.  2  Sam. 
9:  6.  18:  29.  Job  40:  25.  Such  ellipsis  often  takes  place  in  a  negative 
interrogation  before  rib  ;  as  Jon.  4:  11,  Oirtt*  rib  n2Nn ,  and  should  not 
I  spare  Nineveh?  instead  of  ribn;  Lam.  1:  12.  3:  36.  Ex.  8*22.  2S 
K.  5:  26.  Job  14:  16,  n72'£n  rib] ,  and  wilt  thou  not  keep  watch  over 
my  sins  ?     So  also  before  bi*  ,  1  Sam.  27:  10. 


228  §§  558 — 561.  syntax  ;  ellipsis. 

§  558.  When  two  negative  propositions  follow  each  other 
in  the  same  construction,  especially  in  poetic  parallelism,  the 
negative  adverb  is  sometimes  omitted  in  the  second  proposi- 
tion, and  must  be  supplied. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2:  3,  '  speak  not  proudly,  pri3>  gg|g ,  let  [not]  any  rash 
thing  proceed  from  your  mouth  ;'  Ps.  9:  J  9,  '  for  he  will  not  always  for- 
get the  poor,  the  expectation  of  the  afflicted  -Data ,  shall  [not]  always 
perish;'  Ps.  75:  6.  Job  28.  17.  30:  20.  Is.  23:  4.  38:  18. 

Note.  When  a  negative  is  expressed  in  the  first  member  of  a  par- 
allelism, and  the  second  has  a  Vav  prefixed  to  it,  that  Vav  should  be 
rendered  disjunctively,  viz.  nor,  but,  etc. ;  e.  g.  Ps.  44:  19,  '  our  heart 
has  not  turned  back  from  thee,  ^"v&8  BJRV,  nor  our  steps  declined;' 
Is.  41:  28,  CT*fc5*1  nor  did  any  answer,  or  but  none  gave  answer;  Job 
3:10.  Is.28:27VDeut.33:6. 

§559.  Of  Prepositions.  The  prepositions  S,  p,  etc., 
are  not  unfrequently  omitted  where  the  sense  requires 
them. 

(a)  The  prefix  3;  as  Ps.  66:  17,  ,'nK-}j?-''Q  VbN  ,  J  cried  to  him 
[with]  my  mouth,  for  nja;  12:  3.  17:  10,  13,  14  60' 7,  ■  help  me 
*jrxr  [with]  thy  right  hand;'  108:  7.  109:  2,  etc.  But  all  these  and 
the  like  cases  may  be  solved  in  another  way,  viz.  by  the  Ace.  or  Abl. 
of  instrument,  etc.  Note  also  that  the  prefix  3  ,  when  used  as  a  con- 
junction, usually  excludes  2;  as  Am.  9:  11,  fcbi?  ^3 ,  as  [in]  the 
days  of  old,  for  ">7rS3  .  (b)  The  prefix  b  ;  as  Prov.  27:  7,  rD3n  ajfl}, 
[to]  the  hungry  soul,  for  tc:ir ;  13:  18.'  14:  22.  Jer.  9:  2.  *  (c)  The 
preposition  "je  ;  Ecc.  2:  24,  '  nothing  is  better  for  a  man  ??:DK*>tt5  [than] 
that  he  should  eat,'  for  b3tf*'£E . 

§  560.  Of  Conjunctions.  Conjunctions  which  would  ex- 
press some  particular  relation  of  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence 
to  the  former,  are  sometimes  omitted,  and  their  place  is 
supplied  by  the  copulative  Vav.* 

§561.  Conjunctions  which  serve  to  connect  words  and 
phrases  are  often  omitted/f" 

*  In  technical  language,  that  part  of  the  sentence  which  in  cases  like  the  above 
precedes  Vav,  is  called  protasis  ;  that  which  follows,  apodosis. 

t  This  is  called  the  constructio  asijndctica  or  asyndic  construction,  i.  e.  without 
ovvdtofio;  or  conjunction. 


^§  561,  562.  syntax;  ellipsis.  229 

(a)  The  copulative  Vav ;  as  Gen.  31:  2,  triaJViJ  bton  yesterday 
[and]  the  day  before ;  Judg.  19:  2,  Q^ttHll  il^s-iK  nw ,  a  year,  [and] 
four  months;  Hab.  3:  11,  rn;  $g$i  sun  [and]  moon;  Nah.  3:  1.  Is. 
63:  11.  32:  14.  27:  4.  Ex.  15:9.  Judg.  5:  27.  Ps.  10:  3.  The  asyndic 
construction  occurs  principally  in  poetry,  or  in  the  phraseology  of  com- 
mon life.  (6)  The  disjunctives  1 ,  ia  or;  as  2K.  9:  32,  n^Va  PEV& 
two  [or]  three  eunuchs;  1  Sam.' 20:  12.  Is.  17 :  6.  (c)  The  sign  of 
comparison  3,  T^NS  as;  Is.  21:  8,  JrnN  *rj|{*l  A«  mcc? out  [as] 
a  Son  ;  Ps.  11: 1,  niD2£  E^-jn  **H2  ,/y  *o  yonr  mountain  [as]  a  6frrf; 
Is.  51:  12, '  who  shall  be  made  $$|IJ  [as]  grass ;'  Job  24: 5.  Ps.40:8. 
Nah.  3:  12,  13.  Especially  when  the  second  member  of  a  sentence 
has  ]3  so,  the  first  member  often  omits  2  ;  as  Is.  55:  9,  '  for  [as]  the 
heavens  are  higher  than  the  earth,  ]3  so  are  his  ways,'  etc.  Ps.  48:  6. 
Job  7:  9.  Judg.  5:  15.  (d)  The  particles  ^  ,  "n^N  ,  that ;  as  Ps.  9: 
21,  '  the  nations  shall  know  HTan.  &1Mjh  [that]  they  are  mere  men ;' 
50:  21.  71:  8.  Job  19:  25.  Lam.'l:  21.  ''"' 

Ellipsis  in  poetic  parallelism. 

§  562.  In  poetry,  a  noun,  pronoun,  verb,  adverb,  or  prepo- 
sition, expressed  in  the  first  member  of  a  parallelism,  is  fre- 
quently omitted  in  the  second  member;  and  vice  versa* 

In  the  second  member,  (a)  A  noun ;  as  Ps.  24:  1,  l-rtf^!:  '  Jehovah's 
is  the  earth  and  all  that  is  in  it,  [Jehovah's  is]  the  world  and  they  who 
dwell  therein.'  (6)  A  pronoun ;  Ps.  22:  7,  "•sbtj  'lam  a  worm  and 
no  man,  [I  am]  the  scorn  of  men ;'  so  JTJJM  ,  in  v.  10.     (c)  A  verb  ;  as 

Ps.  23:  3,'Omy  God,  ttfrpfi  / call  all  the  day, and  all  the  night 

[do  I  call]  ;'  1:  3,  rPTEN  H5K  13> ,  '  how  long  shall  I  have  anxiety  in 
my  soul,  [how  long  shall  I  have]  sorrow  in  my  heart  V  Is.  49:  7, 
*  kings  5]  W|  shall  behold  and  rise  up,  princes  [shall  behold]  and  do  re- 
verence, etc'  (d)  An  adverb :  as  Ps.  10:  1,  1173b  ,  '  why,  Jehovah, 
standest  thou  afar  off,  [why]  hidest  thou  thyself;'  13  :  3.  22  :  2,  etc. 
For  the  omission  of  Kb,  see  §  558.  (e)  A  preposition  ;  as  Job  12: 12, 
E^vjjvj  ,  '  with  the  aged  is  wisdom,  ^ptf*]  and  [with]  length  of  days  is 
understanding ;'  15:  3.  Is.  28:  7.  44:  28,  '  saying  to  Jerusalem — b^rpt 
and  [to]  the  temple,'  for  &a»jh ;  28:  6.  Job  34:  10.  Gen.  49:  25,  &$0 
'from  the  God  of  thy  father— *rq  nan  and  [from]  the  Almighty,'  for 
DN73 ;  Ps.  22:  2,  '  why  art  thou  distant  *ypQ  [from]  the  words  of  my 
cry,'  for|  *^p9 ;  Job  30:  5.  Is.  48:  9.  49:  7.  61:  7. 

In  the  first  member;    e.  g.  Is.  48:  11,  '  for  how  shall  [my  glory]  be 


230         §$  563 — 565.  syntax  ;  change  of  construction. 

profaned,  for  I  will  not  give  ^'13  ,  my  glory  to  another  V     And  so 
often. 

Remark.  These  principles  of  ellipsis  are  by  no  means  limited  to 
poetry ;  oftentimes  they  for  substance  occur  in  prosaic  parts  of  the 
Hebrew  Scriptures  ;  e.  g.  Ex.  6:  3,  4.  A  multitude  of  obscurities  in 
the  English  translation  of  the  Old  Testament  might  be  removed  by  the 
aid  of  these  principles,  and  much  light  diffused  over  the  sacred  writings. 


CHANGE  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 

§  563.    When  a  sentence  begins  with  a  verb  in  the  Inf., 

preceded  by  a  preposition  and  used  in  a  finite  sense,  it  often 

proceeds  with  a  finite  verb. 

E.  g.  Ps.  60:2,  Srt£3 — irii&»T3,  when  he  strove — and  returned; 
den.  39:  18,  tt^ptp  nbip  ^nii:?  ,  when  I  raised  my  voice  and  cried  ; 
Is.  18:  5.  30:  12.  49:  5  Qeri.  Amos  1:  11.  2:  4.  Gen.  27:  45.  Job  28: 
25.  29:  6.  38:  7. 

§  564.  Sentences  often  begin  with  a  participle  and  pro- 
ceed with  a  finite  verb. 

E.  g.  Prov.  19:  28,  bg  tpnn^  SK-TJUJE  ,  he  who  abuses  his  father, 
[and]  chases  away  his  mother;  2:  14.  Is.  5:  11.  48:  1.  57:  3.  Gen.  27: 
33.  Ps.  15:  2,  3,  etc. 

§565.  Sentences  often  exhibit  a  change  of  person  espe- 
cially in  poetry;   viz. 

(a)  A  transition  from  the  third  person  to  the  second ;  and  vice  versa. 
E.  g.  Is.  1:  29,  '  for  they  shall  be  ashamed  of  the  groves,  which  ye 
have  loved  ;'  Gen.  49:  4,  '  thou  wentest  up  to  thy  father's  bed — he 
went  up  to  my  couch ;'  Mic.  7:  18.  Mai.  2:  15. 

(b)  Atransition  from  the  first  person  to  the  third.  E.  g.  Is.  42:  24. 
44:  24,  25,  '  I  am  Jehovah  who  made  the  universe,— he  frustrates  the 
signs,'  etc.  This  transition,  however,  is  not  very  frequent,  and  for  the 
most  part  it  is  altered  in  the  Qeri. 

Note.  The  same  changes  of  person  occur  also  in  the  use  of  suffix- 
pronouns,  a  transition  being  often  made  from  the  first  or  second  person 
to  the  third,  and  vice  versa ;  as  Prov.  8:  17  (Kethib),  '  I  love  rpStlN  , 
her  lovers,'  i.  e.  those  who  love  me  ;  Mic.  1:  2,  'hear  ye  people,  t3>3  all 
of  them ;'  i.  e.  all  of  you ;  Job  18:  4.  Is.  22:  16,  etc. 


§§  566 — 569.  syntax  ;  constructio  praegnans,  etc.   231 


CONSTRUCTIO  PRAEGNANS. 

§  566.  The  name  of  constructio  praegnans  is  applied  to 
phrases,  which  imply  more  than  the  words  literally  express, 
although  there  is  no  direct  ellipsis. 

E.  g.  Ps.  22:  22,  *3p*MJ  tFJfln  T)£tt ,  answer  [and  deliver]  me  from 
Ike  horns  of  the  wild  bulls,  comp.  v.  13 ;  Ps.  74:  7,  f3iB5g  ibfcri  Tl/tA 
^D  p  to  the  earth  have  they  [cast  down  and]  defiled  thy  dwelling ;  1 
Sam.  10:  9,  ^fttf  S^  ff*fMt  ib-^srrn  ,  a/zeZ  GW  changed  [his  heart 
and  gave]  to  Am  another  heart;  1  Chr.  12:  17,  ^26  ^nian}?  ,  but  if 
to  deceive  [and  betray]  me  to  my  enemies;  Ps.  118:  5.  Is.  38:  17.  Josh. 
4:  18.  2  Sam.  18:  19.  Hos.  1:  2,  etc. 


ZEUGMA. 


§  567.  The  name  of  Zeugma  is  applied  to  a  construction,  where  two* 
subjects  have  a  verb  in  common,  but  this  verb  expresses  action,  etc., 
which  can  with  propriety  be  predicated  of  only  one  of  the  subjects ; 
e.  g.  Job  4:  10,  '  the  voice  of  the  lion,  and  the  teeth  of  the  young  lions, 
are  broken  out ,'  i.  e.  the  roaring  of  the  lion  [is  made  to  cease],  and  the 
teeth,  etc.  Gen.  47:  19,  '  wherefore  should  we  die,  we  and  our  land] 
i.  e.  we  die,  and  our  land  [become  desolate] ;  Is.  55:  3.  Hos.  1 :  2, 
Jer.  15:8.  Esth.  4:  1. 

§  568.  The  figure  Zeugma  also  includes  those  cases  where  nouns 
are  grammatically  connected  with  preceding  nouns,  when  in  respect  to 
sense  strictly  considered  such  connection  cannot  be  admitted ;  e.  g.  Ps. 
65:9,  'thou  makest  "WfciE  ,  the  outgoings  of  the  morning  and  the 
evening  to  rejoice,'  where  outgoings  cannot  be  predicated  of  evening ; 
Gen.  2:  1, '  the  heavens,  and  the  earth,  and  all  DK522  the  host  of  them,' 
i.  e.  the  host  of  the  heavens,  viz.  the  stars.     Compare  Neh.  9:  6. 


HENDIADYS. 

§  569.  The  name  Hendiadys  is  applied  to  a  construction, 
in  which  two  nouns  are  put  in  the  same  case,  and  connected 
by  a  copula,  while  in  respect  to  sense  one  of  them  must  be 
taken  as  a  Gen.  following  the  other,  or  as  an  adjective  qualify- 
ing the  other,  §  443. 


232  §§  570,  571.  syntax  ;  paronomasia. 


E.  g.  Gen.  1:  14,  '  and  they  shall  be  for  signs,  tP'wnn*:5]  and  for  sea- 
sons,' i.  e.  they  shall  be  for  signs  of  seasons,  etc.  3:  16, 1  will  multiply 
thy  sorrows  and  thy  conception,  i.  e.  I  will  multiply  the  pains  of  thy 
conception ;  Job  10:  17,  misfortunes  and  a  host,  i.  e.  a  host  of  misfor- 
tunes ;  4:  16,  stillness  and  a  voice,  i.  e.  a  low  voice ;  comp.  1  K.  19: 
12.  2  Chr.  16:  14.  Jer.  29:  11.  The  origin  of  the  word  is,  ev  dtd  dvotv, 
one  thing  by  two. 


PARONOMASIA. 


§  570.  The  name  paronomasia  is  given  to  an  expression, 
which  contains  two  or  more  words  selected  in  such  a  manner 
that  they  may  resemble  each  other  in  sounds  while  in  sense 
they  may  differ. 

Paronomasia  is  a  very  favorite  figure  of  rhetoric  among  the  Hebrews,  and  is  common  in  all  the 
oriental  languages.  It  differs  from  our  rhyme,  inasmuch  as  the  words  which  constitute  it  do  not 
necessarily  stand  at  the  end  of  parallelisms  or  strophes,  but  may  be  placed  together  in  any  part 
of  a  sentence,  and  are  found  in  prose  as  well  as  poetry.* 

§  571.  There  are  various  modes  of  constructing  paronomasia,  of 
which  the  following  are  the  principal. 

(a)  By  placing  together  like  sounding  words;  as  Gen.  1:2,  IJih 
irihl  ,  desolate  and  empty ;  4:  12,  [jjj  22  ,  a  fugitive  and  a  vagabond; 
18:  27, 1E>K1  *lfc*  ,  dust  and  ashes ;  Job  30:  19.  Is.  28:  10,  322  12b  12 
«V  «ip  v>V  «\J5 JB&fi  law  here  and  law  there,  precept  here  and  precept 
there;  24:  17,  tici  nftBT,  1TVD  ,  terror  and  a  snare  and  a  sling;  Ps. 
18:  8.  Lam.  3:  477  Jer"  48:  43."  Is.  24:  3,  4. 

(b)  By  using  like  sounding  words  in  different  parts  of  a  sentence  ; 
as  Hos.  8:  2,  HES  ,  the  stalk  yields  no  rJBj?.  meal;  Is.  5:  7,  '  and  he 
looked  ttBUJfcb  for  equity,  and  lo  riBteE  shedding  of  blood,  for  ilj?1^ 
righteousness,  and  lo  "j^S  the  cry  of  the  oppressed  ;'  7:  9,  '  if  *6 
12^Nn  ye  will  not  believe,  then  lattfijn  tfb  ye  shall  not  be  established ;' 
61:  3,  *  he  shall  appoint  IBN  nhtt  Ittg  ,  beauty  instead  of  ashes ;'  Ps. 
40:  4.  52:  8.  68:  3.  Zech.  9:  5.  Gen.  42:  35.  Amos  5:  26. 

(c)  By  changing  sometimes  the  ordinary  forms  of  words,  in  order  to 
produce  similarity  of  sound  ;  as  Ezek  43:  11,  VK^lJa5)  !p»Xitt  ,  where 
tfiiE  stands  for  tfT5D;  Ps.  32:  1,  i-jNEn-^DD  y£a-^lD2  where  ***» 
stands  for  NliDa  .     See  Mic.  1:  8.  Ezek.  4:  11.  Amos  5:  26. 

(d)  By  employing,  in  some  cases,  a  word  sounding  in  some  degree 

*  Besides  the  name  naqovouaala,  the  Greek  rhetoricians  also  called  this  figure 
TiaQt'jXV01^  an<^  naqtavvfiia  ;  the  Latins,  agnominatio. 


§  571.    SYNTAX  ;    PARONOMASIA.  233 


like  another;  as  Joel  1:  15,  'it  shall  come  ^TO  TIJ3,  as  destruction 
from  the  Almighty ;'  Jer.  51:2,  '  I  will  send  against  Babylon  CnT  bar- 
barians,  fJV^  and  they  shall  scatter  her  f  Is.  32:  7,  vb3  ^fcS  ,  '  the 
armour  of  the  crafty  is  evil ;'  Ezek.  7:  6,  *J*b$  VT^.  V^  **a  **2  VP  » 
the  end  is  come,  come  is  the  end,  it  is  waked  up  against  thee;  Is.  1:  23, 
D^-nb  Sj^KSJ ,  thy  princes  are  revolters;  comp.  Hos.  9:  15.  Is.  57:  6. 
Amos  8:  2. 

(e)  By  repeating  the  same  word  in  a  different  signification  ;  as  Ecc. 
7:  6,  '  like  the  noise  [crackling]  tr^On  of  thorns  under  ^Pfcfl  a  pot ;' 
Judg.  10:  4,  '  Jair  had  thirty  sons,  and  they  rode  upon  thirty  B*TO  , 
asses'  colts,  and  had  thirty  tt+gS ,  cities;'9  15:  16,  '  with  the  jaw  bone 
ii anil  of  an  ass,  have  I  slain  D^rnifcrr  *n33ft  one  heap  two  heaps ;' 
1  Sam.  1:  24,  *  and  *i?3  -IMfr  Me  fad  was  yet  a  lad;'  Jer.  1:  11,  12, 
*  what  seest  thou,  Jeremiah  ?  Ans.  A  rod  TOftJ  o/*  Me  almond  tree. 
Then  God  said,  Well,  for  "Jj?/J  J  watch  over,  etc.1 

(/)  Proper  names  are  frequently  made  the  occasion  of  Paronoma- 
sia; as  Mic.  1:  10,  12QPI  bfi<  132  ,  in  Acco  weep  not,  rrvoyb  rP22  in 
Beth  Leaphra  roll  thyself  nS2  in  the  dust;  I:  14,  'the  houses  ^PT^tt 
of  Achzib  tt&  are  liars ;'  Zeph.  2: 4,  PO^IT*  H-Ty  ,  6raza  is  forsaken  ; 
Gen.  9:  27,  'God  n&;b  ns?  testf  e»/ar^e  Japheih ;'  49:  8,  rniinn  '  O 
Judah,  thy  brethren  ^ni">  sAaff  praise  Mee;'  49:  16,  yv  T7  »  ^aw 
shall  judge;  49: 19, 13*7 15":  IVM  "W  ,  GW,  a  7m?s*  shall  press  upon  him ; 
Ruth  1:  20.  Neh.  9:  24.  Num.  18:2.  Is.  21: 2.  Jer.  6:  1.  48:2.  Ezek. 
25:  16.  Hos.  2:  25.  Amos  5:  5,  6. 

Note.  Paronomasia  is  somewhat  common  in  the  New  Testament; 
as  Matt.  8: 22,  acpeg  zovg  vexgovg  tfaxpai  xovg  tavztav  vtxQO^g,  let  the 
dead  bury  their  own  dead;  see  above  in  e.  In  Latin  are  examples,  as 
capiatur  Capua,  cremetur  Cremona ;  and  Cicero  exclaims  (in  Verrem 
IV.  24),  quod  nunquam  hujusmodi  everriculum  in  provincid  ulldfuit. 
In  the  writings  of  the  monks  of  the  middle  ages,  and  of  the  older  Eng- 
lish divines,  paronomasia  abounds  to  such  an  excess,  and  withal  is  often 
so  trifling,  that  the  taste  of  the  occidental  literary  public  has  revolted 
against  it,  and  gone  over  to  the  other  extreme  ;  so  that  the  usage  of 
the  biblical  writers  in  respect  to  it,  has  hardly  met  with  a  fair  estimation. 


30 


234  PARADIGM  I.Reg.  Verb  trans., §§212—219. 


Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Piel. 


Praet.  3  m.  (sing.) 
3f. 

2  m. 
2f. 
1 

3  (P^) 
2  m. 
2f. 
1 


nj?bpq 


-51 

T    .*  It 

win 
npDn 


(etc.)  t&efe 


» 


wJ?R 


% 


-if 


Inf.      abs. 
const. 


5ip 


Fut.     3  m.  (^ng.)  pfc^1;  * 

*>bpn 

Vapn  : 


Jfcpa 


3f. 

2  m. 
2f. 

1 

3  m.  (pi™.)  S^p^ 

3f.      n^Vapn 

2  m.         ^PttjftJ  ' 

2f.      P»^3p:n 
i  *4bM 


W3  -in 

n3n|nn 
Tnru 


•    :'>t  • 

nAbjp 


.  .1— . 


Jlwf.  a/wc. 

Imp.    2 m. (sing) 


2f.  ^Dg 

2m.(piur.)    ^'qp 

2f.       ro^sfp 


ran  '    ^ttjaj 


Part.  act. 
pass. 


Mil 


— 


'"4P-a. 


PARADIGM  I.  Reg.  Verb  trans.,  §§212  -219.  235 


Pual. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

(bog)  ||j> 

(etc)Jl^p 

^p.n 

nVopn 
n^ppn 

(etc.)  nVopn 

rpDp.H 
r$opn 
n&op» 

fr^p_nn)bLp#p_nn 
(etc.)  nhapnri 

nbtapnn 
^nVbprin 

jnSapn 

wspn 

nnVJpn 
]nVppn 

cri^prin 

teeclwiJWapn 

■-J«n 

5i£      ^bwi 


^jpn 


(etc)^pri 


^Dpn 


^tapn 


rubbpn 
T^P3 


nD^bpn 
^bpn 


(etc.)     *?Dpn 
5>Dp» 

#Bpn 

?BP3 


(etc)^cpjpnji 
^Dprin 

nabbjpnn 
^np_nn 

*?Epn:j 


*QiT- 


(wanting) 


(btap_nr7)^tptp_nn 

(etc.)^ppnn 
n3^bp_nn 


($W0?I9gB 


k^s 


U*W^BR» 


bvpjta 


236     Par.  II.  Reg.  Verbs  intransitive.  §§  220—222. 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Kal.    , 

Kal. 

Praet 

.3m.( 

sing.)     ^£tD 

bm 

*ti 

-i« 

3f. 
2  m. 

rbjm          w$£ 

WW 

2f. 

nt3D© 

nV«tD     t*fl 

O't&fi 

(WC 

1 

^|^ 

■w^wp  Ntff: 

>thV 

3  (plur.)         $B© 

$m 

f$ 

•  It 

2  m. 

nr^DE 

nnbtfti 

am*ji 

Dm« 

2f. 
1 

s»fcta 

•     —  T 

Inf. 

abs. 
consl 

S&5 

bm 

The  other  forms  in  these  two  words 
belong  to  the  irregular  verbs.) 

Fut. 

3m.( 

sing.)   ^BEP 

b&tri 

•pan 

3f. 

2  m. 

bkwn 

bi±m 

etc. 

2f. 

^stb'n 

^»IDB 

derived  from  |gti 

.!=-*>) 

1 

(plur.)l^^ 

3  m. 

3f. 

n^ittW 

ft3^*Vta 

2.m. 

#s©n 

fcadri ; 

2f. 

n$kl»ri 

■  na!?N©n 

1 

*  ?M« 

?M8J!) 

Imp. 

2  m. 

(sing.)     *}££) 

^VtD 

2f. 

Jj)BB 

^kd 

2  m. 

(plur.)  ^fti 

iV^S 

v 

2f. 

rjSrjfe 

nab&irj 

Part. 

act. 

teti 

Vrfitf 

pass. 

. 

Par.  III.  Verbs  &  Gutt,  smooth  enunciation.  §224.   237 
Kal.  Niphal.        Hiphil.        Hophal. 


Praet. 


Plur. 


■tPJJ 

max 

tTTttJ 

ornap 


•    •    •"  -r 


riwi 

]IJWJ 

VarrbVa 


wfran 


wow 


Inf.  abs. 
const. 

Fut. 


PI 


ur. 


n1 

1537 

itagg 

*wn 

tor 

Wtt?n 

^iP 

pirn 

*wr; 

JflJjT 

"*t:t 

iftaq 

ptnn 

IWm 

Twm 

Ttown 

H&3 

*!P©^! 

—  r;   t 

"TOW* 

•^mn 

•   ;  it  •• 

^Tb?n 

•     ;  t    t 

niwa 

pjrot 

TQy» 

J®?* 

TBBK 

WOQ 

*WE 

.  1W 

V*Q£ 

may 

Dir&n 

nap  mm 

narow 

T       •     ••    T     •• 

niibjm 

nsiapFi 

*nB:rn     ipmn 

«  —  '   :  *••  v 

wmrn  napjnn 


.Ftt*.  a/?OC. 


I^y 


imp.         •**       pm     wn     tc^i 
Plur.        rnip      ipm    iwn   riwn 


Part.  act.     IB1)* 
pass.   lit)? 


Tttra 


■n»a 


Itttt 


238      Par.  IV.  Verbs  £  Gutt.,  rough  enunc.  §  225. 


Kal. 


Kal.        Niphal.  >       Hiphil.         Hophal. 


Praet.  (blh)^n 

3f.      rfam 

2  m.  ri^in 
2f.      n)hn 

3  (^)^n 
2  m  nnWn 
2f.     i^in 

1  W^R 


man  aafcri:  Im^orin  ,  rbzm 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


toEna    iTWtri    ttsnn 


etc. 


Inf.  abs. 
const. 


■mn 


Fut.  3  m.     fefg 

nan^ 

3f.      Nwi 

nanh 

2  m.     ^nW 

nann 

2f.      ^rift 

•nann 

i        Vnrifii 

?*MW 

3  m.(Pi.)  ^rn 

'nam 

etc. 


Tenn 

etc. 


3f.  naVMnn  nriann 
2  m.  $ww  vwrn 
2f.  n^nnjwnJnn 
i       T  Vffii     :  nam 


etc" 


Imp.  2  m.      7in 

nan     ^nn 

i&nn 

...  — 

2f.       ffciri 

•nan    ■oann 

etc. 

2  m.  (pi.)  ^n 

nan   ttsnn 

2f.     raVin 

nn'5n  naaSfln 

j 

Part.  act.        Tift         nain 


Ttrm 


tian     Ti^nD 


i 


Par.  V.  Verb.  V  Guttural.  §§  229—232.  239 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Piel. 


Pual.         Hithpael. 


m 

P?»3  ( 

^JSRftjtTOs).^ 

*m?\ 

»t  -:t 

np?T3(etc-)n5-)3  (etc-)ns-i3 

honarin 

*IW 

np?T3 

ps&a 

nrrfc 

■r     •  — 

ronarin 

Wl 

np?tD 

rmg 

nrn'a 

Wttnn 

faf&H 

Vdra 

Tpna 

*snann 

*m 

jj»H 

wti 

1313 

wwpn 

MgteT 

onjwa 

nnrna    Dns-fc 

DMiann 

WW 

■jnp^ta 

jfl.rnst     jp^a 

fR&^ann 

Wl 

■flj&M 

*»|3 

W& 

•  —  t    r    * 

pW 


ppttj       ^n       fia      'rjn^nrr 


bhari 

Bftan 

■■ftn» 

Dhi* 

nsafiw 
ohaa 


P?tS 

p?T*n    w|Bf 

p?;n    pwj 


«tc.)»?t-tfift  (etc.)'?! 


TO*!? 

•onarin 


»^rw*  j  Wnafp 
rob^OT  fi^nbr)  rt»iajftn 

ttnip  inbn  ^Vnann 
wpj^i?  fft^ri  fi^ann 


P», 


— 


1p?:T 

napV? 


fibrin 

^ariri 

raiftarin 


PJ'IT 


to^nso 


K8 


240        Par.  VI.  Verb  V  Guttural.  §§  233—336. 


L< 


Kal. 

Niphal. 

Piel. 

Praet.  3  rn.  (sing.) 

Mti 

—      T 

MttJD 

(S|^)  MB 

3f. 

wato 

n»ri3 

(etc)nMti 

2  m. 

it 

n?so 
robtii 

ri*blD3 

nMp 
nMtb 

i 

TOMttn 

rcj#§« 

3  (P1^.) 

WttB 

wa©3 

WBB 

2  m. 

EnMri 

DnMED 

tanM© 

2f. 

I^P 

•jnMBD 

pwga 

1 

WOO 

MW393 

i»af 

Inf.       abs. 

Mti3 

¥Jp 

const. 

MID 

Men 

T        * 

ME 

Fut.     3  m.  (sing.) 

!BBS?J 

(2»C)M^ 

(*^;)M^ 

3f. 

Mian 

(etc.)  ^^^^ 

(etc.)  ^Eizjn 

2  m. 

mot 

Mtin 

Man 

2f. 

warin 

ttfcsto 

waairi 

1 

mem 

men 

3  m.  (plur.) 

WQBi 

wdep 

iw 

3f.           ! 

i3Mtin 

PttM^R 

n3M®n 

2  m. 

'watin 

wo  tin 

iMtin 

2f. 

mmsn 

nwwpp 

ruMan 

1 

MSD3 

M»3 

~  -r     • 

«S53 

Fut.  apoc. 

Imp.     2  m.  (sing.) 

*|# 

Mtin 

(573U3)  Mfc 

2f. 

v$SJ 

watin 

•  :- 

2  m.  (plur.) 

IMtD 

wjapn 

*mfi 

2f. 

na^fatD 

witeid 

Part.    act.         (a>a-jj)  Mil) 

(a^g^j  MOT 

pass. 

guni 

"*               T 

(?»4yMB3 

Par.  VI  Verb  J?  Guttural.  §§  233—236.       (241) 


Pual. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

?£© 

pnwi 

ttgQft  (*j?mJn)  yBHJDft 

fi?S3ffi 

*  •  •  • 

nyBtin 

(etc)WBXntin 

n*BiD 

PWBOT 

nyfctin 

n^ntsn 

n^aiD 

r^aton 

nyBmn 

DiPBfiflDn 

npatg 

•»nyaBn 

hfcyBiDn 

WEnton 

wsati 

w^ttin 

VB«J*j 

wanton 

BflyBffi 

Dn^nirin 

BWBajn 

tanyantin 

jjyfeiin 

niyntMi 

r5DtD 


^Bisn 


yWDH 


^T\XDT\ 


yaffle 
yBDti 

nayiran 


ya©5 
y^Btpin 
y^on 


*iyiBp; 

*^B03 


yBffi; 
yBprj 

?nran 

—        I      T 

wBtrin 

>BB« 

nayBrin 

T     J      —   J  T 

*iyBcin 

royBjcn 

yaw 


lrtB£)yBR»i 
(etc.)  ^52npn 

ysnti&S 

na^flwi 

*  yBintia 


— l& — L 


yBtin 


fan^yBi!{vn 

(etc.)  ^aridn 


nayfiion 

nay|ftan 

y»BtiB 

fe^»)yBna3B 

wama 

.  i 

•»  *  1         ~ 

(242) 


Par.  VII.  Verbs  j*&.  §§  240.  241. 


Kal. 

Kal.  !      Niphal.      Hiphil.     Hophal. 

Praet.  3  m. 
3f. 

m 

~     T 

(regular) 

(regular)  (as  B  Gutt.)Us£)Gutt.)(aS  5  Gutt.) 

Inf.      abs. 

Visa 

T 

— . wrffi^  .  , — - — —4  |                         ■ 

const. 

y** 

rjb*     wan  5*3**1  5£*n 

Fut. 

3  ta.(^^jtfi 

■nafl 

»»1 

^sir 

3  f.     ^N*n 

Wn    ^5»n 

etc. 

2  m.    ^iin  | 

ntta'm 

^Stti 

* 

2f.    ^qiftn 

^nrnsin 

^&wn 

i         5#i 

ntth 

Plur. 

3  m.      ^»|3ah 

VttWfi 

55$ 

3f.  rcfc^ 

nnbkn 

n^oan 

2  m.     feato 

ftDtfli 

wwa 

2f.  n^Sam 

nanjSa'n  [fiM*!1?. 

i       T*bau 

njjjbjj 

^*u 

etc. 


.Fitf.  apoc. 


bs^ 


Imp.    2m.(aing.)VD»   i  Ifi* 

2f-          jg|  hl£tf 

2m.(pi.)^^  Ft&5 

2f.     ro&ste  !  rent**  I 


^san  !  ^wn 


etc. 


etc. 


Part.    act. 
pass. 


y$te  (ra*)  nffiw 


V»5aB 


^5»3 


bwn 


The  derivative  conjugations  of  verbs  KD  are  declined  in  the  same 
manner  as  those  of  &  Guttural;  tf  being  treated  (out  of  Kal)  as  a  Gut- 
tural, and  not  as  a  Quiescent ;  see  Niphal,  etc.,  in  the  paradigm.  In 
like  manner,  Piel  b3N  ,  Pual  b3K ,  Hithp.  bsanfj ;  compare  verbs  D 
Guttural,  1»^  and  pTn,  for  the  mode  of  inflection. 


Par.  VIII.  Verbs  orig.  fe;  I.  Class  ?&.  §§243—247.(243) 

Kal.  Kal.         Niphal!         Hiphil.  Ho^hZ 


Praet. 
3f. 
2  m. 
2f. 

Plur.  : 
2  m. 
2f. 
1 


—     T 

(regular) 


m 


si-p :     aw    a^in  a»in 

~"T  • 

(regular);      p^g    fin^tt  RBjOWl 

n^|\s   rnriin  rn£hn 

natfia    ndtiin  naahn 

toaafta  orntiiri '  ttjaipwi 

IMti'ia  jnriEin  inasftn 


Inf.  abs.        DilIP         Din*1 

const,    nafe'  (dentin 


ri: 


aim 


now    a^in 


awl 


Fut. 

agy*,i:)fflY!j 

aw 

a'tw 

aw 

3f. 

35jn(fte-)oTri 

agjn 

a^'in 

atp*F» 

2  m. 

atbn      iiDn^m 

asftn 

ittBftn 

atrhn 

2f. 

iiapn   ^'^pj 

^rtDwi 

j^nStan 

■»ariw 

1 

a©«     nn\x 

r         „  |»*  ^  * 

a^ti'iN 

aa»a 

3  m.  (plur. 

>    ttp;  j    farj*| 

la^ 

taw 

3f. 

naaiDn  ras-pri 

naalrftn 

waT^m 

walsin 

2  m. 

wan    vdTn 

labin 

^snri 

totitti 

2f. 

maBfl  nao^ft 

HaaBw 

nantbin 

1 

&rb      tfjM 

aw 

ara'ia 

atha 

/•W.  apoc. 

i-jrt"1 

Imp.  m.  (sing.)  n©  jtt>l)  IDT 

f.        •oti      *yv     h^n 
m.>(phir.)nd      vst    town 

:    It      • 


f.      naati ; 


-  •  -r 


awn;    awn 

^;wn 

la^'in 

roawri 


Part.  act.     3W 
pass.   a*)W 


aw 


a^in 


awft 


(244)  Par.  IX.  Verbs  fe  II.  Class. 


Kal. 


Hiphil 


Praet.3m.  (sing.)  DDJ  ;(^an)3^n 

3  f.  (regular)  W*5^ 

3  rpiur.;  *tf*iph 


Inf.      abs. 

const. 


5£F 


n^n 


Fut.    3ra.^]^     ww 


3f. 
2  m. 
2f. 
1 


3^n 

■ocnn 


3  m.  (Pi.)  ot« 
3f.  mppn 
2  m.  nattnn 
2f,  rraa&wi 
i  ataa 


naafe* 


JFwr\  «/?oc. 


a»r 


Imp.   m.  (sing.)      2D*1 
f.  Vttfi 


m.(piur.)    *intqi 
f.         fisnfr 


acpa 

haffiq 

rtaa&'na 


Part.  act. 
pass. 


■left1* 

fairs* 


rpan 


Remarks.  Niphal,  in  verbs  of  this  spe- 
cies, does  not  occur.  The  daghesh'd  con- 
jugations are  regular  throughout ;  e.  g.  Piel 
ntr  ,  Pual  *&*  Hithpael  ntPnn .  Hophal 
conforms  to  the  model  in  Par/  VIII;  e.  g. 
nfc-P  ,  etc.  Only  Hiphil,  therefore,  distin- 
guishes the  II.  class  of  verbs  *»B  front  those 
of  the  I.  class. 


Par.  X.  ■»©  HI.  Class. 


Kal. 


Kal. 


fix;        px; 

( regular)         (regular) 


rVix1* 


ns; 

nsn 
nsn 

T        J  • 

wfltej 
ttafifn 


P'*i 


p2? 
pin 
pin 

ttSTj 

*pifi 

nspifn 
pk3 


Remarks.  The  conj. 
Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Ho- 
phal, are  declined  in  the 
same  manner  as  these 
conjugations  are  in  verbs 
Pe  Nun,  Par.  XI.  E.  g. 
Niph.  ns: ,  Hiph.  MBft  , 
Hoph.  ni'n ,  etc. 


Par.  XI.  Verbs  A  §  252. 


(245) 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Praet.  3  m.      ^>£)3 

Ett3 

8to 

tNin 

wn 

3  f.     (regular) 

(regular) 

nafa 

Rjp^Iifl 

nwn 

2  m. 

rnDy 

nwn 

nwn 

2f. 

nti33 

nwn 

nwn 

1 

WOM 

ngjg&rt 

mwn 

? 

3m.(plur.) 

llha 

iwn 

2  m. 

DP11DM 

enwn 

Dnwn 

2f. 

1 

■jnwn 

TO3S1 

jn».|ft 
*^ft 

Inf. 

abs.    *?iD3 

f 

■r 

wsn 

jp*an 

const.  ?B3 

me 

mn 

■8ft 

Fut. 

jfe< 

wi 

Ett3^ 

vw 

tfr 

3f. 

titt 

tztin 

maw 

ti^n 

©an 

2  m. 

bhft 

tinm 

wan 

wan 

wn 

2f. 

$j» 

*wm 

•■wan 

•qgtij£j 

iwn 

1 

w* 

tbsa 

W3tf 

W3N 

©at 

3m.( 

plur.)       $tf 

rjj^ 

•     *ltM3i 

«Hh 

*DS^ 

3f. 

HDVsn 

ranan 

rowan 

rown 

rown 

2  m. 

4&M 

\mf\ 

iwan 

ntf1^ 

rwn 

2f. 

•  nAisn 

wtnam 

n3tD53n 

nraln 

rown 

1 

^3 

tD33 

0533 

WM 

titt 

i^.  apoc. 

*M 

Imp. 

m.        Vb3 

m 

wan 

t&i 

f.        (regular) 

^3 

■•atari 

^o^n 

m.  (plur.) 

VJtt 

wtan 

*iwan 

f. 

fi3E3 

ronftsn 

rown 

Part. 

act.    V£>13 
pass. 



©£ri 

WjKJg 

TDW3 
i 

033 

1         «SLu 

»      . 

- 

(246)  Par.  XII.  Verbs  h.  §§  256—266. 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphil. 

Praet.  3  m.  (sing. 

>          & 

sdd 

0>W)  K» 

(non)  npn 

3f. 

nab 

t    •  It 

H2D3 

T     ••      •• 

2  m. 

rVDD 

nD3D 

rtiba 

rtion 

2f. 

nimD 

rpno 

nisDq 

ninon 

1 

TftSlD 

ydsd 

^nisDD 

nfsSsai 

3  (plur.) 

*£ 

4S80 

— ▼ 

^s%j 

2  m. 

diVdo 

D^.4& 

DiYiaKI 

Brfaon 

2f. 

•jntoD 

inaab 

■jntabi 

p$3&W 

1 

1D13D 

•      ""     T 

ftftM 

iDifon 

Inf.  abs. 

nbn 

non 

••     T 

const. 

6a)  sb 

( 

>w  a&n 

••     T 

Fut.        safe* 

no1] 

*K 

(t&£3£ 

(tiO)ttBg 

3f      :;  nbn 

nbn 

^p-1?. 

son 

2  m.       nbn 

T 

nbn 

fe 

DDPl 

a$p 

2f.       *aon 

•oon 

"TOl 

isbn 

•     ••     T 

l           nba* 

nba 

ait 

s$$ 

DDtf 

3  m.  (Pi.)    nafeg 

JQgg 

»$&2 

^ 

(•attp)  iab^ 

3f.    rn^Dn 

T        V  *••       • 

1*^1 

t      yf  ~"    ; 

wand 

T         ■.*.-• 

2  m.         toon 

toon 

*9& 

toon 

tabn 

2f.    n^a&n 

rT»£ft 

ra^pn 

wa&n 

T        V   "~  •    • 

T          V      •        • 

i           nbj 

T 

aba 

'  fe>* 

DD3 

••T 

JFV/f.  conu.  iD*T 

V    T  - 

Imp.  m.       DO 

ion 

son 

f.   rno 

« 

«$h 

■fc&jj 

m.  jtfg 

(^rr)^bfi 

vSbn 

••     T 

f.  fiD.^D 

n^on 

Rpaorj 

Part.  act.  MID 

aw 

pass.  MDD 

TT 

Par.  XII.  Verbs  ».  §§  256—266.  (247) 


Hophal. 


Poel. 


Poal. 


Pilpel. 


Pulpal. 


(Otfj)  1V\T\ 

rqio 

mid 

nortD 

aonG 

nfoin 

Hftfto 

mniD 

nnono 

msno 

nteMn 

rrato 

PIMID 

PODDD 

nnono 

tHiK&ri 

nnrho 

mrnD 

nnono 

r\2tet> 

%t^ft»w 

irinhto 

iSaglib 

^rinonD 

^nnonD 

toDIH 

^nnto 

«niD 

uteb 

^ddd 

Dntawn 

cmrhD 

Dnnnio 

UTitttt 

dmddd 

wfo8© 

•jnnonD 
ttabao 

•jrinono 

nwn 


Dins 


MID 


MM 


mm 


(an)  no*p 

MID"" 

mid1* 

MM** 

aDaD^ 

DD^in 

midd 

Mton 

aoa&n 

aDaDn 

awn 

nnion 

MiDn 

aDaon 

nonon 

iao*in 

SMftori 

■catea 

■oDa&n 

^oaon 

DM* 

MiDa 

MiDtf 

aDaDtf 

aDaDtf 

130  V 

SMjjp* 

ttatoi 

ODSD^ 

wtoO1* 

nrbDw 

nDMton 

maMon" 

rwosDn 

naaoaon 

sa&ffl 

ttatofl 

teSrtwj 

aeafcn 

<DDaDin 

rfj^Mn 

nMbiDn 

na^toa 

riDnonon 

naaoaon 

DD^D 

mid: 

mid: 

,  aOaW 

3KIW 

i 

mid 

aoaD 

■onto. 

iaDaD 

*imid 

la&aD 

• 

narfo/iD 

ma'oao 

T      J    *"      J     "" 

aaiDft 


aDaDft 


aD^ 


aaiDE 


aDaD£ 


(248)  Par.  XIII.  Verbs,  12.  §§  267—271. 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphil. 

Praet.3  m.  (sing.)       Dp 

n)j 

&n 

B££l 

3f.                Rtjjjj 

ttjpSft 

•r    P  •    .. 

2  m.               Bjtijp 

nibipq 

rVm^n 

2f.                »B£ 

Mp 

nii2ip3 

frtn^.n 

1                  «ffi 

Tib 

^nibip? 

3  (piur.)           *|fi]> 

Vib. 

m$i 

mpn 

2  m.           QtlBJ? 

Brft 

Drtwpa 

DBtefipn 

2f-              fcpjB 

JRB 

JDf©%3 

•jni^^pn 

1                Kttlj> 

Mrfe 

tafife^a 

$ir?j>n 

Inf.      abs.                Dip 

nift 

Dpn 

const.              Dip 

nw 

oipn 

o^n 

Fut.    3  m.  (sing.)      Dip;; 

Dip1; 

3f.               Dipn 

(etc.) 

Dipn 

vm 

2  m.             Dlpri 

tflpa 

Dfl 

2f.        nwpn 

nrtpn 

•      1  •     T 

i           trtpaj 

nipa 

Q$K 

3  m.  (plur.)     *flWpU 

«fi$ 

«$: 

3  f.      nfi&$& 

T       j'            • 

rgojpn 

2  m.         ^fpn 

ftrtpH 

at       nraipn 

nfflpn 

rwtapn 

i         .  :  ttpj 

D*ipD 

v% 

i*\/£.  apoc.            (&p\l)  fij?', 

(n»\3)  a** 

«*t 

Imp.  2  m.  (sing.)    1  Dip  ( 

n»)  tm 

nipn 

Dpn 

2f.          nyfp 

(etc.) 

nrtpn 

■wfen 

2  m.  (plur.)       ^p 

toipn 

I     wfn 

2  f.              riD^jP 

nD5D'pn 

Part.  act.                   Dp 

»• 

ifi^ 

pass.               Dip 

.  Nl 

Par.  XIII.  Verbs  fo.  §§  267—271. 

P.  XIV.  V.  (249) 

Hophal. 

Polel. 

Polal. 

§  272.        Kal. 

D^n 

pfcrtp 

pfchp 

m 

wbpwi 

wirtp 

T   s 

n&tfip 

rt& 

rrqjyn 

ntfTrtp 

T       J      —      t 

ftfiMn 

riMip 

nntfip 

PJ33 

Origin 

^fi'rhp 

^nribip 

■SRjl 

ngwi 

Wtfip 

ttMffip 

$3 

T 

Dfi&j^n 

nnadhp 

Dljqrftp 

ante 

]nn*pjn 

jii^p 

■jriMip 

■jriw 

wognn 

tttfe*ip 

iDMip 

*$ 

Wl 

opjin 

nnhp 

ntfip 

r» 

Dg¥> 

Btf^ 

M'ipl 

r* 

nyn 

Krtpn 

aaipn 

r^ 

npjin 

DBApn 

Mfipn 

ns 

■ttjfla 

^tfipn 

np^pn 

•o'on 

Dpjia 

B#lp* 

Mi  pa 

TO 

tt^ri 

*5Dtf»pn 

iM/ip'i 

13^3 

njripjir) 

riDM^pn 

ratfttipp 

TV          •       • 

*op#i 

wirtpfc 

TOJj^P] 

wan 

•      T 

n:ttp^in 

t     ;'"" 

n;tfa;ipn 

nDMipri 

TV          '         • 

np_i3 

Btflpi 

btflpi 

r* 

ws 

btfip 

W 

■torrtp 

spi 

*6rhp 

w*! 

natfrhp 

OKflpB 

1% 

Dptt 

nrtpa 

32 


(250) 

Par.  XV.  Verbs  *fc. 

§§  276-279. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Piel. 

Praet.  3  m. 

(sing.) 

MSB 

MSB3 

MSB 

3f. 

rmsb 

T     !  It 

rntatsa 

PIMSB 

2  m. 

nalra 

Ijmsbi 

n«kB 

T              ••• 

2f. 

n»sa 

ftasrb 

hmsb 

1 

*?8bj 

^nM3 

wmsb 

3(P1« 

jr.) 

.  if 

&SB3 

MSB 

2  m. 

DnasB 

bn*xbj 

tma 

2f. 
1 

ttii&B 

T      T 

■}nasB3 

WMSB3 

jnMSB 

Inf.      abs. 

ttttfi 

tfSB 

const. 

6(523 

MSB 

Fut.     3  m. 

(sing.) 

^ 

MSB1; 

MSB* 

3f. 

msbfj 

msbh 

MSBn 

2  m. 

msba 

M&BF) 

rierbn 

2f. 

^szin 

^SBB 

•    ;  it    • 

*msbw 

1 

K^3M 

MSBM 

**ipA 

3  m. 

(plur.) 

*¥R'i 

***S1 

MSB1; 

3f. 

nsasBn 

waiBH 

POM^ari 

2  m. 

bsBfrl 

WSBn 

^MSjigrj 

2f. 

wmsbV] 

naa&sn 

rtjasBn 

1 

T       »  • 

MSB3 

MSB3 

Fut.  apoc. 

Imp.    2  m. 

(sing.) 

MSB. 

msbh 

MSB 

2f. 

*MSB 

%ssn 

*MSB 

2  m. 

(plur.) 

>imsb 

^san 

IwVEft 

2f. 

wmsb 

ftjiSran 

ft3MSB 

Part.   act. 

M3rtB 

MSBB 

pass. 

MSB 

MSB3 

t    ;  • 

Par.  XV.  Verbs  &J  §§276—279.  (251) 


Pual. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

tuma)  uses 

aosari  (**»sjj  wtajj 

axann 

(etc.)  mia 

nat^an 

T            •        •        » 

(etc.)  naxan 

sasarin 

na&a 

!*£#»! 

naian 

ijBann 

naa® 

nasan 

nasan 

ninrih 

^**?& 

*n*3^i 

TOR$pn 

>nak?Drin 

^18 

^12^1 

VOSWl 

MttQnn 

Dn*a» 

Dnasan 

DraUBKJ 

nnaxarin 

^nasan 

Xg&tl 

▼  ••• 

^tajh 

**an 

asajfiri 

Gi|a*)  KSBpi 

(etc.)  axari 

(asajjjeKW 

»        .  T                           ,.          .... 

(etc.)  *±fcfl 

asann 

asan 

a^an 

a&sn 

asann 

^sbri 

wiajg 

*&to 

^asanri 

axa* 

tf^na 

■4^% 

aafarta 

***?£ 

sae^an 

!***£ 

*a«srp 

wakan 

raaia'n 

naasan 

n»%ann 

•     toiari 

^san 

inn 

^sana 

naKsarj 

8138005 

naaSan 

awltarin 

T             V     ~      J       • 

T     "'•    • 

inabxi 

*  ***2. 

aa&na 

Mia11 

"  asan 

asann 

\vrsan 

^asarin 

sj^nh 

WSqnfrj 

waltarin 

a"*aa 

asana 

Ml)  USQfi 

3 

(**»»)  asaa 

(252)         Par.  XVI.  Verbs  tbi  §§  280— 292. 


Kal. 

Niphal. 

Piel. 

Pual. 

Praet.  3  m. 

[&S 

rbx* 

rfpa 

*% 

3f. 

(nba)nn^ 

nniJia 

nn£a 

rtnVa 

2  m. 

n^g^5#)n^  ( 

n^n^pb 

TO 

2f. 

V%  ( 

etcon^i 

(etc.)  rpjg 

h4a 

1 

WW 

wVij 

■WW 

w*>a 

3  (pi.) 

(ft*>^3 

^D 

'$ 

Vv?; 

2  m. 

BW^j 

awfeb 

nrr^a 

ti$% 

2f. 

v&i 

VT^.3. 

jsptej 

irK?. 

1 

WW 

•    T 

wfia 

vify 

w^ 

Inf.      abs. 

n^a 

rt^w 

(nisn^a 

n^a 

const 

phi 

rfon 

niV* 

n'V* 

Fut.     3  m.  i 

[sing.)  nb^ 

Kb1! 

tt$@ 

r^il 

3f. 

nbin 

^Vn. 

n\aa 

••••••  : 

2  m. 

r$» 

fi^in. 

hVwi 

fiV.5.n 

2f. 

■$» 

^Vn 

^MJ 

^Jn 

1 

n^.% 

rial* 

nV^fci 

nVj* 

3  m. 

(plor.)      ^ 

Sp 

^ 

^ 

3f. 

iWf*R 

nr.V?ri 

w»y»j 

nr^ta 

2  m. 

Viwn 

^n 

^v» 

$jri 

2f. 

fl?^$ 

ra$*» 

hi$wj 

w^an 

1 

r*fea 

VT-* 

*^j?i 

nVy 

Fut.  apoc. 

*tf 

^ 

&#*« 

Imp.    2  m.  i 

(sing.)   nba 

rfcan 

fc*)n^ 

2f. 

■&' 

^sn 

-fe 

2  m.  fptar.J       *fej 

sterj 

to 

2f. 

wVa 

513^5*5 

■r    V    T     • 

T      V      "" 

Part.    act. 

rfc'ia 

nVan 

pass. 

^ 

n^b 

...... . 

Par.  XVI.  Verbs  rh.  §§  280—292.  (253) 


Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

Hithpalel. 

afewt 

rftort 

nWtn 

rnnnjrin 

rmpm 

M$n 

nn^arin 

(n^art)n^in 

n\£in 

n^ann 

n^rwisn 

(etc.)  n^in 

w&m 

n%nn 

T            *           i               J               * 

*Tf$X% 

wfwj 

w^irrti 

winntin 

i&am 

V^n 

fysm 

swfgfa 

■wfeyi 

nn^in 

Diy^ann 

w^vji/m* 

)^\x\ 

I  y     ••  •   t 

1    V     ••—     «     . 

Wwfcl 

W$>n*i 

^*l 

»^#3 

rft&nri 

nVwi 

n*>in 

nWn 

ninjnran 

s^ 

t&x* 

f^|? 

mni# 

H^w 

n^.$ 

ifjSWf! 

ninnran 

^.in 

n^'n 

rf^jjj 

ninnnrj 

■&HPI 

*?*J 

^arin 

nViat 

nVi*! 

rtV^% 

nirmab 

A* 

to* 

<S8 

^nnsh 

nrbYn 

nr.^ 

wt^r 

Y*?M 

$» 

^Wn 

w9» 

nr.^ 

nr^nn 

n|M 

row 

V  I* 

'rferiD 

ninnpa 

^4*P 

-  1   • 

(b^)n^n 

ri%s$i 

^ih 

^Vin 

^nntpn 

^in 

sVari.n 

«$¥? 

wVarin 

rfiyn 


rhn 


nVanjq       ninritnxq 


(254)  Par. 

xvii.  to  &  rfc. 

Par.  XVIII.  Verbs 

Kal.       Niphal. 

1©  &*6- 

Kal. 

Hiphil. 

Hiphil. 

Praet 

rrvj 

rnin 

riss 

KE3 

T  • 

•Wflfci 

3f. 

nnT 

nrrnn 

▼       JIT 

nnssa 

twnsn 

2  m. 

n/nin 

(as  fo) 

rjasfa 

nafcn 

T                       • 

2f. 

n^r 

wnta 

ntriga 

ruflsn 

1 

*nfg 

wnta 

*mtSfa 

vwEliri 

3  (plur.) 

^ 

vrtn 

wttfa 

w«n 

2  m. 

Qnwji 

nrrnin 

Drrtnoa 

Dnxffin 

2f. 

]*WP 

jirnifi 

IHHtto 

•jn^tpn 

1 

•  T 

tinta 

n»®i 

w*$n 

Inf.  abs. 

^ 

RVtD3 

rioah 

ntsn 

const. 

rffin 

n»to 

#©n 

Fut. 

6!3* 

n^v 

tt'tB1* 

T    • 

•  •t  • 

**«p 

3f. 

nTn 

rnftn 

(as«b) 

2  m. 

srrn 

rnto 

atom 

T       • 

2f. 

*yr\ 

■nta 

■»aten 

1 

rfflk 

jtYih 

T    V 

3  (plur.) 

fii« 

W 

)mto 

•  IT  * 

w©! 

3f. 

T         V           • 

ftj^ta 

si^wl 

2  m. 

Wf\ 

nhn 

te$& 

wtrin 

2f. 

t        %•          • 

Krnfiri 

T             V      • 

1 

rff* 

Tnti 

atea 

Fut.  apoc. 

nig 

Imp. 

ttTt* 

*•  • 

rrAh 

2f. 

"ij 

hta 

MAD 

2  m.  (plur.) 

it;' 

nin 

**tiD 

2f. 

wVin 

route 

Part.  act. 

htp 

rnta 

rig) 

*  From  »ca 

,  not  »'w  3  . 

pass. 

T 

kVC3 

» 

Par.  XIX.  fc  and  &. 

Par.  XX. 

Verb  aha. 

(255) 

Kal. 

Hiphil. 

Kal. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Praet. 

HDD 

man 

*a 

*'*" 

aa*in 

3f. 

mjsg 

nntan 

n*a 

T    T 

n*oan 

X           •      •• 

naan 

2  m. 
2f. 

(as  rib) 

n^ri 

Mta 
ruts 

naan  nnann 

*            .»     ••                    T             T     *•• 

1 

•man 

*mh 

*ni*an 

3(plur.) 

wrt 

(tej.Sita 

wan 

*aavi 

2  m. 

Dn^n 

onaa 

nnaan 

2£ 

1 

Mttl 

.     a     .     . 

Inf.  abs. 

nba 

aia 

const. 

nit:: 

niton 

Ma)  Kia 

*Kff\ 

Fut. 

nw» 

nto* 

aim 

V&fr 

aa*h 

3f. 

nan 

man 

atian 

apan 

2  m. 

nan 

nan 

ainn 

tfpn 

ill 

w 

^n 

sirtSw 

i 

ne* 

ntD« 

tfiDtf 

a^aa 

3(plur.) 

w 

^ 

teSty 

w4p 

*t3¥» 

3f. 

W%3 

▼    v   . 

n:^n 

raafapi 

wwan 

2  m. 

USB 

««j 

ttha 

W3& 

2f. 

n:%n 

nanbn 

.  .  . 

•  *  •  . 

1 

fife? 

nag 

•r 

a*a3 

•  T 

-J'W.  a/?oc. 

B2 

he 

«^1 

Imp. 

fit?:  (t3!i)    ntari 

tejaia(^n)#wi 

2£ 

(as  rib) 

•ran 

W3 

wan 

2  m.  (plur, 

1 

^n 

sjrtl 

lii^an 

2£ 

nybrt 

... 

.  •  .  . 

Part.  act. 

naiD 

nasi 

MS) 

*oan 
•  •* 

T 

pass 

.    ^tag 

(256) 


Par.  XXI.  Participles.  §  301. 


Kal. 

• 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Fem.  Segh. 

Verbs  final  Pattahh 

i  act.    Jtfrtp 

e^aj?)rtVlg? 

H$gp 

—        — 

pass.  ^t3j? 

nVitij? 

—    Tseri 

act.       10* 

ro©.'! 

—    Hholem 

act.      lij 

i  gutt. 

act.     pipjr 

nI?.|'T 

*>  gutt. 

act.     EDtD 

t    ; 

rOTjfc 

1! 

1? 

act.       Dp 

Wfc 

ft 

act.    rt>2» 

(n»\a)  stja 

pass.  i^H 

T              • 

Niphal. 

regular 

^ 

fl^&jtt 

£>"  gutt. 

*m» 

rnraw 

ni^i?. 

1! 

ai» 

J13BJ 

1? 

trtps 

na^pD 

Pie). 

regular 

^5 

nVapja 

n$3#8 

1? 

T3"i 

na-ba 

V    "••    T      • 

ft 

nVaa 

nVaa 

Poel. 

h 

aaioa 

robots 

T      J                    J 

rcfrrtw 

Paal 

regular 

nVapa 

Hiphil. 

regular 

^Dpjo 

rfcnjjaa 

hVbf*j 

to  gutt. 

rniaya 

P^» 

K 
w 

K>tj 

rot* 

t 
w 

D^ 

pia/pa 

Hophal. 

regular 

^» 

rijopa 

nVbpa 

Hithpael. 

regular 

^ggrb 

n^p.na 

n^p_ri!a 

Par.  XXI.  Participles.  §301 


(257) 


Plur.  masc. 

Kal. 

Plur.  fem. 

rrtiBDjJ  Dec, 

Masc. 

.  VII.  b. 

III.  ft 

Fem. 

Dec.  X. 
X. 

Fem.  Segh. 

XIII. 

n^ttii 

ms©1* 

V.ft 

XI. 

XIII. 

trni* 

rrn;r 

III.c. 

X. 

b^# 

nip?? 

VII. 

X. 

XIII. 

d^e© 

rtwni 

VII. 

X. 

XIII. 

rtajj 

I. 

IX.  a. 
III.  c. 

X. 
X. 

X. 

D^ttP3 

Niphal 

niVopD 

II. 

XL 

XIII. 

d^td^ 

niiE?: 

II. 

XI. 

XIII. 

n^3D3 

rftsu 

VIII. 

X. 

CW3llp3 

rftrtpa 

III.  & 

X. 

Piel. 

o'tyagjq 

niVrqjP^q 

VII.  c. 

X. 

XIII. 

D^-Dfc 

nimna 

VII. 

X. 

XIII. 

D^a 

m*5a 

IX. 

X. 

Poel. 

D^M^Da 

rnMtoa 

VII.  6. 

X. 

XIII. 

•  ?      ? 

r         : 

n^apa 


tPTay'a 
ara^a 


Pual. 

rfiVapa         II. 


Hiphil. 

ni^apa         I. 


i-fia^a 


i. 

VIII. 

in. 


XI.    XIII. 


X. 
X. 
X. 
X. 


XIII. 
XIII. 


Hophal. 


a^apa       rrtVfipa        ir. 


XL    XIII, 


Hithpael. 

n^tqpna      n^Bpna         VII.  c. 

33 


X.      XIII. 


(258)  Par.  XXII.  Verbs  with  suffix-pronouns.  §§303—312. 


Suffixes.  Sing.  1. 


Kal.Prslet.^Vbp 


3f. 


2  m. 
2f. 


2  inasc. 




2  fem.  3  masc. 


•    •—     t*  ;  If        /  :  —     t'  ; 


■nn^DPf 


i 

3(plur.) 


2  m. 
1 


?3&Bp 


P-R       - 


3  fem. 


wVopJ 

-*   -nrfj 


■.■■■■■!     *|l  J  wfl  I ■     - " 


Inf. 


h£P.P 


TOfc 


.  fep. 


% 

(*»%) 


- 


Fut.      »3?oje 


jjVttp^    ^wsip* 


i 


3(plur.)     ^DJPM     ^D^J    ^DjP^nftD^  tffiBf* 


Imp.  W&£  —  — 


-, — 


ft* 


Piel. 


■ajfej? ;     $jg>    ij^bg  ;!   iVbp        t^'op 


Par.  XXII.  Verbs  with  suffix-pronouns.  §§302—312.(259) 


Plur.  1. 


Q  masc. 


2fem. 


3  masc. 


3  fera. 


^ 


5DVqp.      ttbap,  !|    tbp^ 


ariVK?1   osnbttp    pnVop  8  nn'rop 


Bb^ap 
sttatap 


fsn^ttp. 


ddVop 


isfafiwp 


BVfcOp 

BhAbp" 


(« 


^Op.*! 


i*> 


H#ttp 
KjVdP 


QSVjP.' 


jtep&qp; 


T$m 


nbpy 


$m 


thpj*  \ 


— 


w5»r:   ft$Bg     i?|aj>  / 


«THrS  P 


i 


Dp>;aj?:  p>;ap.:  I 


zb'op         — 


TO 


Q^a.p:   :  ;fc»E 


(260)       Par.  XXIII.  Verbs  th  with  suffixes.  §  313. 


Suffixes. 

Sing.  1. 

2  masc. 

3  masc. 

Plur.  masc. 

Kal.  Praet. 

'     ~    T 

^ 

}fcffij 

cto 

T    T 

3f. 

Wtd* 

%rf$2 

—     T 

onto* 

—      T    T 

2  m. 

.    -       .  -5  ' 

— 

wto) 

1 

TH1*? 

wto) 

S?JV*? 

3  (plur.) 

WE? 

•                  T 

siti; 

wrtftp 

Olto 

Inf. 

v;to 

rj*#? 

into) 

fcnto 

Fut.  3  m. 

^y.n 

53P?! 

S&BC 

3  m.  with  ) 
epenth.  3  ) 

h???s! 

Mto^i 

1 

— 

flto.#k 

j#$9M 

D'taja 

3  m.  (plur.) 

htim 

3^$?* 

lirfttfiij; 

B$D£ 

Imp.  m. 

v\f 

— 

)&$ 

n?.? 

Piel.   Praet.  3  m 

.  rfr£ 

TO 

.  tfni 

CIS 

Fut.  3  m. 

■»aw 

*p/K 

3n\ii 

D?.^. 

3  m.  with  > 
epenth.  3  ) 

tfvQ 

t'  V    —  J 

$jj*! 

— 

Hiph.  Praet.  *fen  5pH  WWI  Mfi 

Fut.  with )         .*  .  !*to  k,j*  k 


Par.  XXIV.  Nouns  with  suffixes.  §§  334—340.     (261) 


No.  I.  Noun  masc. 

ending  with  a  consonant. 

Abs.  (sing.)     DID  a  horse. 

(plur.)  DSflO  horses. 

Suffil 

*W8  my  horse. 

^D^D  my  horses. 

2  m 

?tyZ>  thy    — 

5pD*l&  thy    — 

2f. 

•=JMD  thy   — 

TJ^D  thy   — 

3  m. 

iDto  his   — 

I^D^lD  his    — 

3f. 

fiDID  Aer    — 

rpDTO  her    — 

T         V 

1   (plur.) 

> 
ll&yo  our    — 

I^Dlb  our   — 

2  m.  " 

DpDft)  your  — 

D^WD  your  — 

2f. 

"pD^lD  your  — 

I^MO  your  — 

3  m. 

DD1D  their  — 

DHNMD  their  — 

3f. 

^D^D  their  — 

flWto  their  — 

No.  I.  Noun  masc.  ending  with  a  Quiescent. 


Abs.  (sing.)       Ditt  father.        Abs.  (sing.)  28  father. 

Sufi!  (sing.)      "OM  my  father.  Suffi  (pi.)  WD^  our  father. 
^hjXthy   —      2  m.        Utttiyour  — 
"•pSS  thy   —      2f.  ]?.^^Fwr~" 


2  ra. 
2f. 


3  m.  tfPna,  ^ifflk  his   —      3  m. 
3  f.  *  ttH  her  —      3  f. 


No.  III.  Noun  feminine. 


Abs.  (sing.)  rnin 
Suff.  i     Tnto 


2  m. 
2f. 

3  m. 
3  f. 

1  (plur.) 

2  m. 
2f.    * 

3  m. 
3  f. 


irnin 
rjrrrte 
write 

oDrnin 

nrhhn 
]nrnin 


a  law.  (piur.)  rvnin  Bfiw. 

my  law.  .    ^rTnhD  my  laws. 

thy  —  ^rvnin  %  — • 

%  —  ^rVniri  %  — 

his  —  wjVVifl  to  — 

her  —  n^nYYM  for  — 

our    —  ^nillD  our   — 

your  —  O^lVnin  your  — 

yowr  —  p^JYniri  your  — 

/teV  —  Dh^rfnto  their  — 

*/m»V  —  p^rtTfiri  their  — 


(262)      Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculine.  §§  345  seq. 


Sing.  abs. 

Const. 

Light  sufF. 

Grave  suff". 

Dec.  I.  Singular. 

§345. 

GO 

638 

WD 

■»MD 

MMD 

(6) 

•niaa 

1133 

^125 

M*^SU| 

<«) 

tfUHB 

ai£p 

•^tofj 

tbtflWB 

(d) 

R$* 

w^i» 

v$$ 

K^H* 

Dec.  II.  Singular. 

§347. 

(«) 

n^ 

wn 

nyjj 

(once)  EDjQ/I 

(b) 

Mis 

asto 

■qisw 

laaiwS 

(*) 

.      3>3i3 

7213 

WS 

steals 

(d) 

no 

no 

•nri 

•    T 

co^i 

Dec.  III.  Singular 

.§350. 

(a) 

iip, 

vj$>je 

D?.TP& 

(b) 

rf?& 

v$a 

•»s^p 

BM?^ 

(<) 

fog 

?%> 

^PR 

t»&pj!> 

(d) 

fr$ 

fl"Q| 

^-ot 

^"^t 

(e) 

fmn  (]ias»)  •jinn 

rj/mn 

D!D3/Pm 

(f) 

01353 

D^a 

W3B 

Dpbnw 

<*) 

BOM 

013M 

***8 

mmsk 

(h) 

55113 

"^3 

Dec.  IV.  Singular. 

§353. 

(«) 

•  *#! 

iss 

r*s 

Bha^ 

(b) 

a$ 

^ 

*$ 

omsV 

(c) 

Q?n 

19WS 

vippji 

(<*) 

•Ufa 

T      •• 

TrtD 

OT^D 

(e) 

m 

P5??. 

D^*? 

(/) 

*l® 

«$ 

$38 

B*PS 

00 

K32 

1    T 

Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculine.  §§  345  seq.      (263) 


Plural  abs. 

Light  stiff. 

Const. 

Graro  suff. 

Dec.  I.  Plural. 

§345. 

ff»M8 

*»MD 

■HM& 

0f*$0 

Irn'iaa 

•ntea 

^l^a 

0^5*3 

D^DMti 

^DtiMD 

%»« 

ns^iM 

Wtfqj 

^1 

in*>a 

ayrfta 

Dec.  II.  Plural. 

§347. 

t3W 

1JM 

*m 

D5^ 

D^S 

*a:rta 

Sfi"# 

ge^s^a 

a^Dte 

wrtli 

vSil 

bmd1© 

*tti 

*T© 

B^ia 

Dec.  III.  Plural. 

§350. 

qpTjas 

TTffi 

*T»pB 

B^yj* 

fi^!?B 

■w^b 

■*$B 

a^r^a 

w5flWj> 

^&j?' 

h&DP. 

ai&wjj 

cytfiTbt 

•tfi-DT 

■n^t 

na^hnaf 

(ni^K)nWm 

(as  Dec.  X.) 

D*^ 

*M3B 

tobb 

a^D^a 

D^'tt* 

^onoM 

^dj| 

dsmmmi 

Dec.  IV.  Plural 

l  §  353. 

a*na^ 

*¥fi 

•HM 

*$y& 

a^rnV 

^ 

-iS 

VSKj$ 

ardri 

~    T    "J 

^p.h 

B^BSJf 

D'nrtD 

i-i^tD 

*.  -.  — 

o^i^i 

a^a? 

'Si 

^a? 

aS^a* 

D1** 

«33 

•»|i| 

bbnxl) 

rt»sa! 

(do'iaoe) 

(264)      Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculine.  §§  356  seq. 


Sing.  aba. 

Const. 

Light  suff. 

Grave  suff. 

(h) 

i»> 

(TO)]^ 

(0 

5^2 

T    •• 

6rSp^S 

^i 

Dec.  V.  Singular.  §  356. 

GO 

£ 

IP-! 

BM£! 

(6) 

nsn 

->sn 

"H^n 

w^ej 

(c) 

fe? 

5)n| 

tons 

DabQs 

09 

T23 

(lasH^ 

^D3 

D!Dll|3 

Dec. 

VI.  Singular. 

.4  class.   §  359. 

(«)  <iwi?k 

*8 

"•S 

B$&*1 

m 

ia 

"l?3 

*izi 

M'lfi 

CO 

y^t 

(nt)  3>i't 

jcnt 

£  class. 

B^9*T| 

fe 

ISO 

-12& 

nHD 

tfir^n 

(o 

1$ 

T& 

^3jfj 

ninnjp 

(/) 

pVn 

pVn 

^Vtt 

copVb 

(g) 

nbh 

^ 

hT>rj 

iShpSj 

09 

ns: 

^23 

O  class. 

BSTCtt 

(0 

3J?I 

■$£ 

*np3 

•  1    »     T 

wn^a 

0) 

V5?.!5 

<&M> 

o»B£ 

it) 

S?s 

(ib?b)^5?S 

mSwd 

(0 

tin| 

m1jp 

Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculine.  §§  356  seq.      (265) 


Plural  abs. 

Light.  sufF.                           Const. 

Grave  suif 

u^mj 

^EJ?               ^ti? 

Q^?.®? 

•    T      J 

•q^x         ^Vx 

t^&is 

Dec.  V.  Plural.  §  356. 

°$it 

%t                 ^3pT 

OMjPT 

n^sn 

rj3^        ^sn 

ofnsri 

ntero 

(as  Dec.  XI.) 

ewasl 

..  ...^ 

£b*£ft 

Dec.  VI.  Plural.  A  class.  §  359. 

D^B 

•*9*j*j         ^jj 

BysJHft 

D*h*a 

•n?3           Wn 

^1?$ 

orcn? 

^1!           TU 

£  class. 

tovjt 

nnso 

tjjt©          tjdo 

D^nSD 

•nap.          ■nap 

D^n 

*f>H           ^Vn 

B^l^J 

O  class. 

n^nii 

onp2 

•It    • 

-*T     .                                                      ••»  J     T 

D^npa 

■"  t    •                               *'t;  t 

&#!£ 

^lPr.         h®T& 

D^trinjp 

34 


(266)      Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculinev§§  371  seq. 

Segholates  of  roots  \9  and  iy. 
{m)  ijfe,  const.  rrttt  (p)  "Vf*  ,  const.  *VV,  plur.  Ibr*£3; 

(w)  *jin      —      ^in  (gr)  *||f       —     TH      —    ta'H'iV 

(o)  Jj^h      —     b*»h  (r)  nW     —    *™     —  H^Vib 

Segholates  of  roots  n'b. 
(5)  "|-)D  O^B),  const,  'ns  (*)  *ajb  (^.p),  const,  ^n 

stiff.  Y*ib,  Si*»-|B  suff.  i^h  ,  *psri 


Dec.  VII.  Singular 

.  §  371. 

Sing.  abs. 

Const. 

Light  sufT. 

Grave  suff. 

(«) 

oti 

(wjj  Dti 

'*N 

Q^ 

»x 

n;n* 

a^« 

■Q'na 

B»4ii 

(«) 

S*fe? 

&*fe 

$bgq 

&^k* 

C3) 

had 

nana; 

^nana 

oinatn 

(«) 

§ffi 

5>£B 

i^je 

£3^ 

(/) 

nnsa 

nfi&a 

— 

— 

<*) 

•f8 

Y? 

DM? 

(A) 

pbtD* 

Dec  VIII.  Singular 

.  §  374. 

(«) 

(B*)85 

■qg 

D^ 

(6) 

tl* 

M 

** 

BSfiil 

(0 

is 

"8* 

*=ra 

DOTB 

09 

* 

(-ay  D$ 

*V 

pa^' 

fc 

ph 

(-pn)  pn 

hi^n. 

u6jh 

(/) 

1* 

H*)?* 

(^j  *» 

mo 

(if) 

T  T 

(A) 

]?.» 

■MB 

DM5B 

(0 

hn 

V. 

Dec  IX.  Singular. 

§377. 

(«) 

mft 

mft 

nfc 

°?tn 

(6) 

JTinB 

V^J 

mnto 

<*1 


Par.  XXV.  Nouns  Masculine.  §§  371  seq.     (267) 

Segholates  ofnb  continued. 
(")  *§  ("^)>  const,  ^n  (v)  *fl ,  plur.  tn^a 

suff.  i*bn ,  plur.  a^bft  (w)  ^as ,  —  D^ast 

Jra/*.  Segholates. 
(x)  »3*r,  const. tth'T,  suff.  iW    (z)  ^N2      — -  *iaa ,  plur.  nilN3 
(y)  B3tfj      —    tSgti    —  150OtD    (aa)  bfcj? ,  ibC2^     (66)  BSD ,  1  fcia 


Dec.  VII.  Plural. 

§371. 

Plural  abs. 

Light  suff. 

Const. 

Grave  suff. 

niftiri 

^niftp 

rrati 

B^ntof 

S%*ii! 

vetm 

tos^a 

j^BgB 

^BgB 

tfi^JS 

htoafb 

^niniitt? 

tfinatfi 

DS^rfinato 

HftfB 

(as  Dec.  XIII) 

BTO^ffi 

n^? 

■*£ 

■*Si 

to**? 

nftsria 

fift^3n&t 

Dec.  VIII.  Plural.  §  374. 

o^ajj 

^ 

*s£ 

Off** 

o?»a 

%* 

*iig 

D^B« 

otto 

:*ffl 

ni 

0^*83 

rfia$ 

^3$ 

riteb 

o^nis*? 

n^n 

"Ml 

yn 

na^n 

8^*1 

^ 

^na 

D^.^m 

ttim 

■»»lj 

1$3 

D^!*o 

o^n 

h!n 

^ 

m*b 

Dec,  IX.  Plural. 

§377. 

- 

onn 

nn 

*tn 

o^m 

D*rto 

into 

v^j 

b?Wtd 

(268)      Par.  XXVI.  Nouns  Feminine.  §§  380—392. 


Sing.  abs. 

Const. 

Light  suff. 

Grave  sufl*. 

Dec.  X.  Singular. 

§380. 

(«) 

rpte 

rnin 

^nnin 

tXJBl^ih 

(6) 

T                     J 

rfe»Sj 

»    -r                    a 

Dsnpnna 

Dec  XI.  Singular 

.§383. 

(«) 

nati 

TUB 

•  T   J 

B5h$B 

(6) 

nDtb 

nia 

TUB 

DsrotS 

w 

PE1* 

r^xi 

fiSr^tf 

GO 

n»Bn 

nHpn 

^naiqn 

DSnkqn 

CO 

nbs? 

rfr$ 

^ 

ttgn^Hj 

(/) 

roSffio 

^^M*(etc: 

)asDec.XIII. 

(g) 

nr©ti& 

t  t    :    • 

rinlei} 

^flnbda  (etc. 

)asDec.XIII. 

Dec.  XIL .  Singular.  §  387. 

w 

reVQ 

n»B 

v$to 

B5ns^ 

($ 

T       J         « 

n^tfts 

*rfcnpm 

DanjjBto 

t<) 

ris-in 

f®^5 

^nsnn 

Mn©nn 

GO 

nsnn 

•V      •      T 

nanri 

tana4; 

w 

T  ~I 

rrjM 

D*5ni?I 

Dec.  XIII.  Singula* 

u  §  390. 

(«) 

fttipja 

rrtipa 

WTSWJ 

b^mm 

(6) 

PT[3i 

n"}.l? 

^1^. 

*H"B* 

(«) 

nH 

^ia  fyj 

%&  spm* 

(d)  (rijrsjmrra 

nans 

■»wnaj 

^nan? 

0) 

nam 

nina 

^ntDH3 

^npna 

if) 

n^ 

*k£t 

fej. 

fc) 

tomd 

rjto© 

(h) 

nHl 

^np 

sjwro 

Par.  XXVI.  Nouns  Feminine.  §§  280—392.     (269) 


Sing.  abs. 

Const. 

Light  suff. 

Grave  sufF. 

Dec.  X.  Plural. 

§380. 

ninin 

ttrfm 

^ninte 

BMVnte 

rY^na 

rfiVina 

^nte&flj 

B^nteina 

'Dec.  XI.  Plural. 

§383. 

nintri 

nira 

TfiM) 

WTi'tfti 

rfam 

ni3ti 

Ttoti 

D^niDtb 

nhMt 

inhps 

D^nip^ 

rrtaan 

rhvasn 

*nS«DB 

Dyi^Ktai 

*$h 

*&» 

B^n/fcw 

Dec.  XII.  Plural 

.§387. 

rkffa 

hte^B 

^rfp&B 

BS^nto^B 

rtVaij 

n^n'to 

^ni^to 

oyn/fcBto 

nte->n 

nisnn 

Tnsnn 

wnimn 

nimn 

nimn 

intann 

B^nimn 

nii?:D 

*nVw£ 

Dec.  XIII.  Plural.  §  390. 

rVna&B        riHwb      YihiaDB    BsirfiiaBB 


rnanB 


nianD       iniana     BHtotarte 


(270) 


Par.  XVII.  Nouns  Dual.  §  393. 


Sing.  abs. 


Dual  abs. 


Const. 


Sing.  abs. 


Dual  abs. 


Const. 


nra 


D*nrtt 

•  —  t;  t 


#f> 

D'w 

n? 

JEW? 

T?. 

■>  . 

hn^. 

nfy-6 

nian 

n^rna-i 

VII. 

» 

II. 

w 

D^Taffl 

rMB 

*f 

°fr 

^ 

&?"}&£ 

VIII. 

hi. 

ft 

b&s 

*sjg 

i.    . 

■jo 

n^ara 

•»ao 

£<Q«| 

131730 

X. 

IV. 

si 

nax 

QShfcH 

R» 

D^. 

»3S 

T    "* 

•  —  f  — 

O^JQ 

*a£*f 

XI. 

. 

nsto 

D-TIBTD 

^nSDte 

V. 

T    T 

*         -r    ? 

•• . . 

*, 

rtaB 

D^nae 

TINS 

m 

VI. 

'ops 

T     ». 

•      —    t      a 

XII. 

3f    ^.1 

D^n 

tyfi 

n3T« 

DW 

■> 

van* 

£  vS 

0?1$ 

*$Ffy 

niapn 

D^nBpn 

0 

B^lnn 

■ann 

XIII. 

fe* 

D^?3 

*w 

ntfna 

Bppft* 

Par.  XXVIIL  Numerals,  etc.  §§  295—393.      (271) 


No.     Signs. 

(A)  Cardinals  etc.  from  1  to  10. 

Masc.  abs.                      Const.        Fem.  abs.           Const. 

Ordinals. 

i    *t  frhnna 

"n** 

nmt 

nna 

2    a 

D^-t? 

*3? 

B$l» 

^;jj 

*»l 

3      3 

m&$ 

rrefriri 

tdVd 

ti^q 

•)©^ti 

4     1 

f#Vl» 

fi*2jh<| 

^yk 

|an» 

n^n-j 

5  n 

T           •     **J 

n??^h 

can 

••      T 

Ian 

(^fchpffian 

6      ^ 

ntip 

nta? 

©d 

EE 

*Ejfa) 

7      T 

n«p 

ngavj 

>atp 

*3® 

*yqtj 

8   n 

njatzi 

Nlttj 

rnbtf 

^■HQID 

9     Q 

wtin 

rarari 

ytiri 

yarn 

^B|fi 

10    1 

T        f  ~J 

riniD* 

^?f 

^| 

*yfay 

(B)  Cardinals  from  11  to  19. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

11  |tf 

nto?  im 

nnto?.  arm 

nta?  ^riijj 

nntti'vjtB* 

12  :p 

ito  D^DtD 

irinio?,  n^ 

(etc.) 

(C)  Cardinals  from  20  to  90. 

20     5 

tpnto 

40 

a 

a^an* 

30    *> 

fl^Vtt 

50 

3 

b*»ran 

(etc.) 

(D)  Hundreds. 

100    p 

300 

.         6  . 

123 

rrtata  afta 

200    1 

fi$l*ffl 

400 

n      rrtaa  *ana 

(etc.) 

1,000  tf 

2,000  a 


(E)  Thousands. 

t\bh        3,ooo  3  [snfe*  ritrfrE 
o%7fe       4,ooo  ■*  n^Wnysm 


(etc.) 


(272)  Synoptical  View. 


Verb  Reg. 

£  Gutt. 

9  Gutt.     ^Gutt. 

**& 

1         T 

*B  I. 

Praet.  3  m.  ^DJ? 

■to* 

Kal. 

^DH 

dm 

3f.            fi^Dp 

nw 

np?t  woo 

1  T  "."IT              t     :  It 

&te« 

t    :  It 

nno^ 

t     rtr 

2  m,          npttj? 

mru 

np$t  nwo 

T    J    ~    * 

raoi 

3  (Pi.)          $J3p 

WW 

sp*j  wap 

*lte* 

*idoi 

2  m.     cfetej?  I 

3*P.b? 

onpjTonwo 

b^r 

DDDEP 

Inf.abs.      ^iDjP 

srtajj 

pter  080 

feian 

Disr 

const.           ptap 

^3| 

pi?T    ?bq 

&* 

KM 

Fut3m.  ^bpi    in*5  p?p  wqi  Saifl  do* 

2  m.       Vt^pn  nb?n  pyi&:mon  £a«s  dot 

3  (Pi.)     $op*  ran  *»**»»«#  stem  ^ntb-^ 
2  f.     naVtSpn  rpian  nspJw  ngftfe  n£$fe  naaon 

lMP.2.m.    tep.       iD9  p?T     WO  fen  DO 

2f.             *»tep      hW  ^JQ   VEO  ^Dtf  *00 

Part.  act.  te^p     lb1*  p?.1T    ?8ftB  te/lH  DO*' 

pass.         £fltyg     ifeb*  pW  ?*W  ^3*  a^ 

NIPHAL. 

PRAET.3m.^pD      ^BgJ  p9|i    51303  te«3  D013 

2  m.         nVDj?3  B1BJ3  npJwnWIM  fi^DM  BDOfc 

Inf.       ^bgn   wn  pjjn  won  £awt  aonrt 

Fut.       fcojj;    iti£  p?*?  SJoj4!  tem  doV 

Imp.        ^agn   Wn  piwj  w&rti  Jj&kjj  Doin 

Part.        tep3      11353  p?T3   W03  te**3  Stfll 


of  all  the  Conjugations  of  the  Hebrew  Verbs.      (273) 


it     TT 

■*B  II. 

P 

22 

?» 

& 

KAL. 

'30; 

JDM 

no 

DE 

]a     acta 

n^jj 

rear 

nirba 

nab 

T     ~" 

n^E 

t  t            ▼   ;  »t 

nrra 

Z    -IT 

T       J      —f 

irojia 

mao 

T                 ~~ 

ntfp 

T,'    "                  T              T      T 

T         •  T 

tol^ 

<VM 

teo 

^ 

raa     ^125 

& 

mm* 

Oftfcfea 

brftab 

jb&fcj? 

onaa  QnaajB 

biv^s 

ata** 

ritoa 

nino 

Dip 

]ia   #bs 

jibj 

n*S 

nb 

Dip 

p3      MKD 

rrtVa 

ata1*  j^v  nb^  tnp;  pa*  nsxg  n^l 
ama  tign  abn  wpn  pan  wan  n^n 
09^    $*;     531?;    jjgfe;    «p5;  #$ep     $y 


nj-jqni-i  • 

-r        •    —      • 

lJn30Fl  »  1 

UT«wfl 

T          V      >            • 

i  * 

jjxszjxn  n 

T         ".'J         * 

aft 

ab 

$b 

Dip 
Wp 

*a$a 

r6i 

T 

eafta 

awa 

T 

±g$8 

a*o& 

T 

•   nip 

8 

nisij 

NIPHAL. 

ate]      a$3     tfipa      fpj    asaa    rfoa 
tfvla  nTaoa  rflinpa  rrtltfaa  na&aa  n^ia 


cban 

awj 

nipn 

flnjl 

Mian  nftan 

atari 

a$) 

sip1; 

fltf 

*a&i    n$j& 

Sb#J 

aon 

chpn 

■pan 

Kg&ri  rfrfn 

©33 

no: 

T  T 

35 

DipD 

p 

Mama   n|# 

(274) 


Synoptical  View 


Verb  Reg. 

B'Gutt. 

»Gutt.      §Gutt. 

t& 

fcl. 

PIEL. 

Praet. 

Sfi 

way 

Tpn     ?be 

%M 

nt^ 

Inf. 

&8fe 

itss 

bty* 

3& 

Fut. 

^Wl 

W1 

aria*    ?b^ 

b3i& 

Sfe 

Part. 

^P-^. 

JSRB? 

TpnB  tagta 

(Imp.  »myl) 

telrt? 

s*Sfi 

PUAL. 

Praet. 

5% 

la? 

fin    teti 

{am 

air 

Inf. 

SIR. 

-jb* 

■jjHa     wati 

fc§* 

-?'. 

Fut. 

Sfc 

nqh 

tj-^   fcgsh 

Mfe 

v   3$?. 

Part. 

tegs 

.  t  ••    ; 

tj^Sia  sfetip 

&5*b 

ati^B 

(Imp.  wanting.) 

HIPHIL. 

• 

Praet. 

^opn 

"rttfn 

p^tji  ?i»Bttin 

^n«n 

n^'in 

2  m. 

rj^bpn  W|te*i 

fl$»ii 

T     J   — 

Inf. 

N$h 

ra??j 

p^TH  ^BWSl 

5W5<*2 

n^snn 

Fut. 

s*fe 

w 

pw  p*tf; 

^C 

s^sft1* 

Part. 

feW£B 

HSHJD 

pf*?B  ?^DB 

(Imp.  3>JattJrt) 

^MB[ 

n'jpte 

] 

EIOPHAL. 

Praet. 

5W 

1t#n 

f        -  .      T                    —       •      T 

-  r;   t 

nrain 

Inf. 

^Dj?n 

Iftrn 

psgh  ^gjfii 

s©m 

Fut. 

%; 

Tir 

p?p    wairp 

a^ipi 

Part. 

*3f» 

IBS*! 

tt;   t 

p?TB    3>BE)B 

1        T  ;     T                     T  J         T 

*>n«B 

tt;  t 

now 

(Imp.  wanting.) 


of  all  the  Conjugations  of  the  Hebrew  Verbs.  (275) 


*t  II. 

r 

r                           r 

23>                    1? 

ab 

©53 

PIEL  (Poel,  Polel). 

Poel.                  Polel. 

goto     BEfip 

M/lD       BB*lp 

&2B 

©aga 

a|hdD   6tfiptr 

Imp.  iiira) 

Stg* 

C53D 

PUAL  (Poal,  Polal). 

Pual.                  Polal. 

aato     ariip 

MSB 

rf-o 

«atB 

BMB 

(Imp.  wanting.) 

ttXQB 

rt?}P. 

awl 

ntian 

HIPHIL. 

n*&qn 

n^D^ 

EW 

3§j      n^ 

NSsdfe 

nfe 

mrgB 

trhaB 

DM       B*£B 

(Imp.  tf^Vr) 

Bin 

nfeii 

HOPHAL. 

atnn     Dpjin 

«$Bn 

T    •       T 

ajj$ 

p'^ 

jjjgft       DpJP 

AJKDj; 

ria* 

DOW       BplB 

T                                                  »T 

HSWQ 

(Imp.  wanting.) 

(276)  Synoptical  View,  etc. 

~      Vreb  Reg.      DGutt.      y'Gutt.       !:  Gutt.  HD        Vl. 
HITHPAEL. 

Praet.  ^rpp_nn  tbwjw  ^nann  nsrngri  ^Min  atimn 

Inf.    rL?p_nn  lawin  ^ann  PEtfiti  ^*W|  rawi 

Fut.    Ve>£r£  raw*  sfaarr;   >^ntd^  ^g$£  a©;_rn 

Part.  ^|>fflD  to?^  ^aniq  rarnm  ^a$h  atiTiB 


•'B  II.  ]D  99  12  *6  lib 

HITHPAEL. 

rnaTin  tbsDnn  *£>iann  Mipnn  affiann    riVwfii 

at^nn  pHfin  V^anri  Dtfip'fjn  $|&nn  nftSMri 

jfehry;  main1;   ^anj  Dtfiprn  »*Qni     nV*n.1 

bigyiB  swiia  ^>n^  oa^rja  fi^ftfc    rt^ana 

(Imp.  n^nri) 

The  student  who  has  acquired  any  good  degree  of  facility  in  the 
Hebrew  forms,  will  be  able  easily  to  make  them  out  from  the  above 
Synopsis,  which  exhibits  to  his  eye  all  the  leading  ones.  Verbs  *9  are 
discontinued  in  most  of  the  derived  conjugations,  merely  because  they 
coincide  exactly  with  Verbs  Ayin  Vav.  The  Imper.  mode  is  not  gen- 
erally inserted  after  Niphal,  because  it  coincides,  in  its  first  form,  ex- 
actly with  the  Infinitive.  In  the  few  cases  where  it  differs,  it  is  in- 
serted in  small  type  at  the  bottom. 

If  the  student  will  be  faithful  to  himself,  and  practise  for  a  few 
weeks,  after  he  has  made  some  tolerable  progress  in  the  knowledge  of 
forms,  the  declining  of  all  the  verbs  in  Kal,  on  one  day;  those  in 
Niphal,  the  next ;  and  so  of  the  rest ;  and  keep  on  repeating  this  prac- 
tice until  he  can  readily  and  accurately  distinguish  all  the  different 
forms  of  the  different  verbs  under  the  same  conjugation,  he  will  in  the 
end  be  very  amply  and  satisfactorily  repaid  for  his  labour. 


\  T3K 


^X 


